issue-1996-03-12•Federal Register final rules — 1996-03-12
Federal Register final rules — 1996-03-12
issue-1996-03-12Federal Register final rules — 1996-03-12Regulation
Published Federal Register documents, not public-inspection drafts. The GPO XML/text rendition is a research aid; the linked complete official PDF retains the printed layout and all graphics. Graphics are retained in that PDF and are not independently reproduced in this text rendition. Publication does not establish that every provision remains legally in force.
FR Doc. 96-5872 Groundfish of the Gulf of Alaska; Limited Access; Foreign Fishing; Final 1996 Harvest Specifications; Correction
[Federal Register Volume 61, Number 49 (Tuesday, March 12, 1996)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 9955-9956]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 96-5872]
=======================================================================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
50 CFR Parts 611, 672, and 676
[Docket No. 960129018-6018-01; I.D. 110295B]
Groundfish of the Gulf of Alaska; Limited Access; Foreign
Fishing; Final 1996 Harvest Specifications; Correction
AGENCY: National Marine Fisheries Service (NMFS), National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), Commerce.
ACTION: Final 1996 harvest specifications of groundfish and associated
management measures; correction.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: This document contains corrections to the Final 1996 Harvest
Specifications for Groundfish of the Gulf of Alaska (GOA) (I.D.
110295B), which was published in the Federal Register on Monday,
February 5, 1996 (61 FR 4304). Portions of the information contained in
Table 1 of the specifications for the pollock, Atka mackerel, and
shortraker/rougheye species are misleading, inadvertently omitted, or
misspelled.
EFFECTIVE DATE: 1200 hours, Alaska local time (A.l.t.), January 30,
1996, through 2400 hours, A.l.t., December 31, 1996, or until changed
by subsequent notification in the Federal Register.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Kaja Brix, NMFS, (907) 586-7228.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: Under Sec. 672.20(c)(1)(ii)(B), NMFS
published final 1996 harvest specifications of groundfish on February
5, 1996 (61 FR 4304). For each species identified in Table 1, column 1,
of the final specifications, the following information is provided for
the 1996 fishing year: (1) Regulatory area and/or district as defined
at Sec. 672.2, (2) acceptable biological catch levels, (3) total
allowable catch (TAC) amounts, and (4) overfishing levels.
In the GOA, pollock is apportioned by area, season, and inshore/
offshore components. Regulations at Sec. 672.20(a)(2)(iv) require that
the TAC for pollock in the combined Western/Central (W/C) GOA be
apportioned among Statistical Areas Shumagin (61), Chirikof (62), and
Kodiak (63) in proportion to known distributions of the pollock
biomass. For the pollock species, Table 1 currently indicates that the
overfishing level of 82,000 metric tons (mt) applies only to the
Chirikof area. However, the overfishing level of 82,000 mt for the
pollock species applies to the combined W/C area rather than to only
the Chirikof area. Information contained in Table 1 related to the
pollock species is revised to make clear that the overfishing level of
82,000 mt applies to the W/C GOA.
Need for Correction
The TAC for the Atka mackerel species is divided among the Western,
Central, and Eastern regulatory areas. However, the designation for the
Western regulatory area for Atka mackerel contained in Table 1, column
two, of the specifications was inadvertently omitted. This document
corrects that error.
In Table 1, column 1, the species ``shortraker/rougheye'' is
misspelled. This document corrects the misspelling.
Correction of Publication
Accordingly, the publication on February 5, 1996 (61 FR 4304),
which was the subject of FR doc. 96-2292, is corrected as follows:
On page 4305, Table 1, under the subheading ``Species'', the
information related to ``pollock'' is revised to read as follows:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Species Area\1\ ABC TAC Overfishing
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pollock:\2\
Shumagin (W)(61)................. 25,480 25,480 ...........
Chirikof (C)(62)................. 12,840 12,840 ...........
Kodiak (C)(63)................... 13,680 13,680 ...........
----------------------
Subtotal................................ W/C (61,62,63)................... 52,000 52,000 82,000
E................................ 2,810 2,810 4,000
----------------------
Total................................. ................................. 54,810 54,810 86,400
* * * * * *
*
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
On page 4306, Table 1--Continued, under the subheading ``Species''
in the first column, the term ``Short raker/rougheye: \8\'' is revised
to read ``Shortraker/rougheye'' \8\.
On page 4307, Table 1--Continued, under the subheading ``Species'',
``Atka mackerel'' is revised to read as follows:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Species Area\1\ ABC TAC Overfishing
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* * * *
* * *
Atka mackerel:
W ....... 2,310 ...........
C ....... 925 ...........
[[Page 9956]]
E ....... 5
---------
Total..................... ......... 3,240 3,240 9,800
* * * *
* * *
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Authority: 16 U.S.C. 1801 et seq.
Dated: March 5, 1996.
Gary Matlock,
Program Management Officer, National Marine Fisheries Service.
[FR Doc. 96-5872 Filed 3-11-96; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 3510-22-W
Complete official Federal Register PDF
FR Doc. 96-5837 Certifications and Exemptions Under the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972; Amendment
[Federal Register Volume 61, Number 49 (Tuesday, March 12, 1996)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 9904-9905]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 96-5837]
=======================================================================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE
Department of the Navy
32 CFR Part 706
Certifications and Exemptions Under the International Regulations
for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972; Amendment
AGENCY: Department of the Navy, DOD.
ACTION: Final rule.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: The Department of the Navy is amending its certifications and
exemptions under the International Regulations for Preventing
Collisions at Sea, 1972 (72 COLREGS), to reflect that the Deputy
Assistant Judge Advocate General (Admiralty) of the Navy has determined
that USS PAUL HAMILTON (DDG 60) is a vessel of the Navy which, due to
its special construction and purpose, cannot fully comply with certain
provisions of the 72 COLREGS without interfering with its special
functions as a naval ship. The intended effect of this rule is to warn
mariners in waters where 72 COLREGS apply.
EFFECTIVE DATE: February 26, 1996.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Captain R. R. Pixa, JAGC, U.S. Navy,
Admiralty Counsel, Office of the Judge Advocate General, Navy
Department, 200 Stovall Street, Alexandria, VA 22332-2400, Telephone
number: (703) 325-9744.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: Pursuant to the authority granted in 33
U.S.C. 1605, the Department of the Navy amends 32 CFR Part 706. This
amendment provides notice that the Deputy Assistant Judge Advocate
General (Admiralty) of the Navy, under authority delegated by the
Secretary of the Navy, has certified that USS PAUL HAMILTON (DDG 60) is
a vessel of the Navy which, due to its special construction and
purpose, cannot fully comply with the following specific provisions of
72 COLREGS without interfering with its special function as a naval
ship: Annex I, paragraph 3(a), pertaining to the location of the
forward masthead light in the forward quarter of the vessel, the
placement of the after masthead light, and the horizontal distance
between the forward and after masthead lights; Annex I, paragraph
2(f)(i) pertaining to placement of the masthead light or lights above
and clear of all other lights and obstructions; Annex I, paragraph 3(c)
pertaining to placement of task lights not less than two meters from
the fore and aft centerline of the ship in the athwartship direction;
and, Rule 21(a), pertaining to the masthead light unbroken arc of
visibility over an arc of the horizon of 225 degrees and visibility
from right ahead to abaft the beam of 22.5 degrees. The Deputy
Assistant Judge Advocate General (Admiralty) has also certified that
the lights involved are located in closest possible compliance with the
applicable 72 COLREGS requirements.
Moreover, it has been determined, in accordance with 32 CFR Parts
296 and 701, that publication of this amendment for public comment
prior to adoption is impracticable, unnecessary, and contrary to public
interest since it is based on technical findings that the placement of
lights on this vessel in a manner differently from that prescribed
herein will adversely affect the vessel's ability to perform its
military functions.
List of Subjects in 32 CFR Part 706
Marine safety, Navigation (water), and Vessels.
Accordingly, 32 CFR Part 706 is amended as follows:
PART 706--[AMENDED]
1. The authority citation for 32 CFR Part 706 continues to read:
Authority: 33 U.S.C. 1605.
2. Table Five of Sec. 706.2 is amended by revising the entry for
USS PAUL HAMILTON (DDG 60) as follows:
[[Page 9905]]
Sec. 706.2 Certifications of the Secretary of the Navy under Executive
Order 11964 and 33 U.S.C. 1605.
* * * * *
Table Five
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After masthead
Masthead lights Forward light less
not over all masthead light than \1/2\ Percentage
other lights and not in forward ship's length horizontal
Vessel No. obstructions. quarter of aft of forward separation
annex I, sec. ship. annex I, masthead attained
2(f) sec. 3(a) light. annex
I, sec. 3(a)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* * * * * *
*
USS PAUL HAMILTON.............. DDG 60 X X X 20.4
* * * * * *
*
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dated: February 25, 1996.
R. R. Pixa,
Captain, JAGC, U.S. Navy, Deputy Assistant Judge Advocate General
(Admiralty).
[FR Doc. 96-5837 Filed 3-11-96; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 3810-FF-P
Complete official Federal Register PDF
FR Doc. 96-5834 Alteration of V-423
[Federal Register Volume 61, Number 49 (Tuesday, March 12, 1996)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 9902-9903]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 96-5834]
=======================================================================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
Federal Aviation Administration
14 CFR Part 71
[Airspace Docket No. 95-ANE-31]
Alteration of V-423
AGENCY: Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), DOT.
ACTION: Final rule.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: This rule alters Federal Airway V-423 due to the
decommissioning of the Uplands Nondirectional Beacon (NDB).
EFFECTIVE DATE: 0901 UTC, June 20, 1996.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT:
Patricia P. Crawford, Airspace and Obstruction Evaluation Branch (ATP-
240), Airspace-Rules and Aeronautical Information Division, Air Traffic
Rules and Procedures Service, Federal Aviation Administration, 800
Independence Avenue, SW., Washington, DC 20591; telephone: (202) 267-
3075.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
The Rule
This amendment to part 71 of the Federal Aviation Regulations
alters Federal Airway V-423 due to the decommissioning of the Uplands
NDB located in Ottawa, Canada. Specifically, this action eliminates a
segment of Federal Airway V-423 due to the decommissioning of that NDB.
Because this action is a minor amendment in which the public would not
be particularly interested, I find that notice and public procedure
under 5 U.S.C. 553(b) are unnecessary. Domestic VOR Federal airways are
published in paragraph 6010(a) of FAA Order 7400.9C dated August 17,
1995, and
[[Page 9903]]
effective September 16, 1995, which is incorporated by reference in 14
CFR 71.1. The airway listed in this document will be published
subsequently in the Order.
The FAA has determined that this regulation only involves an
established body of technical regulations for which frequent and
routine amendments are necessary to keep them operationally current.
It, therefore--(1) Is not a ``significant regulatory action'' under
Executive Order 12866; (2) is not a ``significant rule'' under DOT
Regulatory Policies and Procedures (44 FR 11034; February 26, 1979);
and (3) does not warrant preparation of a regulatory evaluation as the
anticipated impact is so minimal. Since this is a routine matter that
will only affect air traffic procedures and air navigation, it is
certified that this rule will not have a significant economic impact on
a substantial number of small entities under the criteria of the
Regulatory Flexibility Act.
List of Subjects in 14 CFR Part 71
Airspace, Incorporation by reference, Navigation (air).
Adoption of the Agreement
In consideration of the foregoing, the Federal Aviation
Administration amends 14 CFR part 71 as follows:
PART 71--[AMENDED]
1. The authority citation for part 71 is revised to read as
follows:
Authority: 49 U.S.C. 106(g), 40103, 40113, 40120; E.O. 10854, 24
FR 9565, 3 CFR, 1959-1963 Comp., p. 389.
Sec. 71.1 [Amended]
2. The incorporation by reference in 14 CFR 71.1 of the Federal
Aviation Administration Order 7400.9C, Airspace Designations and
Reporting Points, dated August 17, 1995, and effective September 16,
1995, is amended as follows:
Paragraph 6010(a)--Domestic VOR Federal Airways
* * * * *
V-423 [Revised]
From Williamsport, PA; Binghamton, NY; Ithaca, NY; Syracuse, NY;
Watertown, NY; INT Watertown 018 deg. radial and the United States/
Canadian Border.
* * * * *
Issued in Washington, DC, on March 4, 1996.
Nancy B. Kalinowski,
Acting Manager, Airspace--Rules and Aeronautical Information Division.
[FR Doc. 96-5834 Filed 3-11-96; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 4910-13-M
Complete official Federal Register PDF
FR Doc. 96-5822 Satellite Licensing
[Federal Register Volume 61, Number 49 (Tuesday, March 12, 1996)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 9945-9953]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 96-5822]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 9946]]
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
47 CFR Part 25
[IB Docket No. 95-41; FCC 96-14]
Satellite Licensing
AGENCY: Federal Communications Commission.
ACTION: Final rule.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: The Commission is hereby adopting rules that eliminate the
regulatory distinctions between U.S.-licensed domestic satellites and
separate international satellite systems, resulting in uniform
treatment of all U.S.-licensed geostationary fixed-satellites. Our
action is in response to comments received in response to our Notice of
Proposed Rulemaking in this proceeding. Permitting U.S. operators to
provide the widest range of service offerings technically feasible will
allow them to use their satellites more efficiently and to provide
innovative and customer-tailored services.
EFFECTIVE DATE: April 11, 1996.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: John M. Coles, Attorney, Satellite
Policy Branch, International Bureau (202) 418-0771.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: 1. This is a synopsis of the Commission's
Report and Order in IB Docket No. 95-41; FCC 96-14, adopted January 19,
1996 and released January 22, 1996. The complete text of this
Memorandum Opinion and Order is available for inspection and copying
during normal business hours in the FCC Reference Center (Room 239),
1919 M Street, N.W., Washington, D.C., and also may be purchased from
the Commission's copy contractor, International Transcription Service,
(202) 857-3800, 2100 M Street, N.W., Suite 140, Washington, DC 20037.
I. Introduction
2. With this Report and Order, we adopt a policy that permits all
U.S.-licensed fixed satellite service (``FSS'') systems, mobile
satellite service (``MSS'') systems, and direct-broadcast satellite
service (``DBS'') systems to offer both domestic and international
services. This will remove outdated regulatory barriers to greater
competition in satellite communications services.
3. We initiated this proceeding in April 1995 when we issued a
Notice of Proposed Rulemaking (``Notice'') to amend the regulatory
policies governing the provision of fixed satellite services over
domestic satellites and separate international satellite systems.\1\ We
recognized that U.S.-licensed satellites providing international
services have been regulated under two different polices: (1) The
Transborder Policy, which permits U.S. domestic fixed satellites
(``domsats'') to provide limited international services within the
footprint of those satellites; and (2) the Separate Systems Policy,
which permits U.S. ``separate systems'' to provide a much wider range
of international services, but restricts their provision of domestic
services.
\1\ Amendment to the Commission's Regulatory Policies Governing
Domestic Fixed Satellites and Separate International Satellite
Systems, Notice of Proposed Rulemaking, IB Docket No. 95-41,
(``Notice''), 60 FR 24817 ( May 10, 1995).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. After examining these policies in light of the trend towards a
globalized economy, we concluded that changes were needed to satisfy
the growing needs of customers for both domestic and international
communications services. Consequently, we proposed to provide satellite
operators and earth station operators with greater flexibility to serve
different geographic markets while minimizing the regulatory delay
associated with the satellite licensing process. Specifically, we
proposed to eliminate the Transborder Policy in its entirety and
regulate all U.S.-licensed fixed satellites under a modified version of
the Separate Systems Policy. This would eliminate the distinction
between U.S. domsats and separate systems and allow both space- and
earth-segment operators to provide both domestic and international
services. We proposed to apply a uniform financial showing to all U.S.-
licensed satellites and provide all U.S.-licensed FSS operators a
choice between common carrier and non-common carrier operators. We also
asked whether we should extend this treatment to other services such as
MSS and DBS, and whether, and under what conditions, we should permit
non-U.S. satellite service providers, including those using Intelsat
and Inmarsat, to serve the U.S. domestic market.
5. In response to the Notice, we received thirty-eight initial
comments and sixteen reply comments from entities representing every
sector of the communications industry. The comments overwhelmingly
support the main thrust of our proposals. A small number of comments
suggest a phased or ``transition'' approach to implementation of our
proposal to ensure a competitive environment. Others suggest that our
proposal does not go far enough in eliminating regulatory hurdles in
connection with earth station licensing and they suggest alternatives.
6. By this Report and Order, we adopt the proposals set forth in
the Notice for FSS, MSS and DBS satellites. We also conclude that these
policies should be implemented without delay. We will address issues
relating to the provision of domestic service by non-U.S. satellites in
a forthcoming Notice. In that Notice, we will also address issues
related to the receipt in the United States of signals originating in
foreign countries, whether via U.S. or non-U.S. satellites.
II. Discussion
A. Modification of U.S. Satellite Policy
1. General Policy Change
7. The Transborder and Separate Systems policies were developed at
different times and in response to different circumstances. Though the
policies present different criteria for determining whether to
authorize U.S.-licensed satellites to provide international service,
the intent of both policies was to protect Intelsat from technical or
significant economic harm pursuant to the Intelsat Agreements.
8. The Transborder Policy was developed in 1981, in response to
requests from domsat operators to provide international public
telecommunications services within the coverage areas of their
satellites. Under this policy, we permit domsats to provide certain
international public telecommunications services where: (1) Intelsat
does not provide the service; or (2) it is clearly uneconomical or
impractical to use Intelsat facilities for the service. These criteria
required that international service would be primarily incidental to
the domestic service (i.e., involve extensions of existing domestic
networks). The only exceptions to this policy involve services between
the U.S. and Canada and the U.S. and Mexico. We permit more extensive
two-way services between the U.S. and Canada and Mexico because
Intelsat has not traditionally provided these services.
9. The Separate Systems Policy was adopted in 1985 and permitted
the establishment of U.S. international satellite systems separate from
Intelsat. To protect Intelsat's core revenue base of switched services,
separate satellite systems were initially restricted to providing
services through the sale or long-term lease of capacity for
communications not interconnected with public switched networks (except
for emergency restoration service). Before public switched service
could be implemented, each system was required to gain approval from
the foreign communications authority in each country to be served and
to complete consultation procedures (in accordance with Article XIV(d)
of the Intelsat
[[Page 9947]]
Agreement) to ensure technical compatibility and to avoid significant
economic harm to Intelsat. Because the orbital locations requested by
separate satellite system applicants were deemed a limited resource for
the provision of international services, separate system operators were
restricted to providing domestic services on an ``ancillary'' basis.
Thus, separate satellite system licensees could use their systems only
for domestic communications reasonably related to their use of the
facilities for international communications.
10. In the Notice, we recognized that with the trend towards a
globalized economy, users whose communications requirements were once
wholly domestic now need international space segment capacity to
satisfy private-line and other two-way service requirements. We
concluded that current domsat operators might not be able to meet these
needs under the Transborder Policy. Similarly, we recognized that
separate system customers might be unable to meet the needs of their
customers for domestic service because of the ``ancillary'' service
restriction in our Separate Systems Policy. Thus, we concluded that the
public interest would be best served by modifying our policy to reflect
the global nature of the communications needs by eliminating the
distinction between domsats and separate systems and permitting U.S.-
licensed fixed-satellite systems to provide both domestic and
international service under a modified Separate Systems Policy.
11. All of the commenters support our proposal to eliminate the
Transborder Policy and to treat all U.S.-licensed FSS satellites under
a single regulatory regime. The commenters also support eliminating the
``ancillary'' restriction on separate system operators. The commenters
agree that the proposed changes will promote competition in both the
domestic and international satellite services markets and will provide
additional, much-needed C-band capacity in the domestic market. They
also cite a need for flexibility to provide either domestic or
international service, or both, as their own business judgments may
necessitate, without the need to seek additional Commission
authorization. Separate system licensees favor eliminating the
distinction between domestic and international satellites as a means of
creating additional competition in the U.S. domestic market.
12. Although they support the central thrust of our policy, two
satellite operators--one domestic and one international--oppose
eliminating the Transborder Policy at the same time the ``ancillary''
service restriction is removed from our separate system policy.
According to GE, separate satellite systems have advantages in
``landing rights'' \2\ and relationships with foreign authorities.
Conversely, PanAmSat believes a ``transition'' period is needed during
which domsat licensees who wish to use part or all of their satellite
capacity for international services should apply to the Commission for
explicit authorization. Without the ``transition'' period, PanAmSat
argues that domestic licensees will quickly offer north-south
international satellite services from their present orbital locations
while separate system licensees could not offer effective domestic
satellite service from their present orbital locations.
\2\ ``Landing rights'' involve one country granting permission
for another country's satellite to provide service or ``land'' in
its country. Landing rights may also involve completion of the
Intelsat Article XIV(d) consultation process. Under Article XIV(d)
of the Intelsat Agreement, a Party or Signatory that desires to use
non-Intelsat space segment (i.e., a ``separate system'') for the
provision of public international telecommunications service must
consult with Intelsat to determine if the use of non-Intelsat space
segment will cause either technical or significant economic harm.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. We do not believe the public interest would be served by
delaying the benefits of our policy modifications out of concern for
perceived advantages accruing to either domsats or separate satellites
systems. Neither PanAmSat nor GE has persuasively shown that either
domsats or separate systems will have an advantage in a competitive
market. Given the manner in which their respective industries have been
established, domsats and separate system operators can each identify
certain advantages in the short term, and we recognized in the Notice
that full competition between domsats and international systems in the
near term would be constrained by their current antenna beam patterns.
We anticipated, however, that operators would design next-generation
systems to provide optimal coverage to those areas they wish to serve.
2. Effect on Domestic Satellite Capacity
14. Some commenters who generally support our proposal are
concerned that current domsats may divert satellite capacity from the
U.S. to foreign countries, resulting in insufficient domestic satellite
capacity. To avoid this, Capital Cities/ABC, Inc., CBS, Inc., National
Broadcasting Company, Inc., and Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. (the
``Networks'') believe the Commission should clarify that international
services provided by U.S.-licensed fixed satellites must either
originate or terminate in the U.S. HBO believes that we should require
U.S.-licensed satellite operators using traditional domestic orbital
locations to provide domestic service in lieu of international service
when a shortage of domestic capacity occurs. In their reply comments,
AT&T and Hughes oppose any requirement to serve the U.S. domestic
market. AT&T believes that market forces will provide sufficient
incentive for U.S. licensees to meet domestic needs. Hughes asserts
that applicants in the current domsat processing round have proposed
more than enough domsat capacity to meet domestic needs.
15. We believe that satellite operators should be permitted to use
their facilities in the manner they deem most efficient, based on
market forces, with no specific service requirements. This policy will
actually increase the potential domestic capacity, since current
separate systems will be able to supplement existing domsat capacity.
16. The Networks' suggestion that international service provided
over U.S.-licensed fixed satellites must either originate or terminate
in the U.S. is contrary to precedent regarding the use of domsats and
separate systems. We have permitted both domestic and international
U.S.-licensed satellite capacity to be used for service to locations
that do not involve U.S. service.3
\3\ See The Western Union Telegraph Company, File No. 823-DSS-
ML-86, FCC 86-376 (released August 26, 1986) (transponders used for
video services wholly outside of the U.S.). See also Pan American
Satellite, 2 F.C.C.Rcd. 7011 (1987) (PanAmSat's use of four
transponder to provide domestic service within Peru).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Changes to Other Space Station Rules
1. Financial Qualifications
17. In our Notice, we noted that domsat and separate systems are
now subject to different financial qualification standards. The domsat
standard requires evidence of full financing before a license is
awarded. Although separate satellite system operators must ultimately
demonstrate the same level of financial commitment, they are permitted
to make their financial showing in two stages because of the unique
circumstances applicable to separate systems. Separate satellite system
operators providing public switched services must first obtain an
agreement from a foreign country to operate with their systems and then
complete the Intelsat Article XIV(d) consultation process. Thus, it may
be difficult for a separate system applicant
[[Page 9948]]
to get full financing before it knows whether and on what terms it will
be able to provide service. Consequently, we issue separate system
applicants a conditional grant upon, essentially, the submission of a
detailed business plan. Once they complete the Intelsat consultation
process, separate systems operators may apply for final authorization.
At that time they must submit a showing of full financing.
18. Because our policy modifications would allow separate satellite
systems to provide both domestic and international service, we proposed
to eliminate the two-stage financial qualification showing applicable
to separate system operators. We reasoned that all applicants should be
able to obtain financial commitments based on the justified expectation
of revenues from the provision of domestic service.
19. AT&T and Hughes urge us to apply the same financial
qualification test to all competitors to guard against warehousing of
scarce orbital spectrum. Separate satellite system operators oppose
eliminating the two-stage financial showing, citing the limited amount
of domestic service that can be provided from the orbital locations
they occupy and uncertainties in the consultation process. Because of
their orbital locations, they argue that they will still have to rely
on international revenues and, therefore, will not be able to obtain
financial commitments from lenders based on the expectation of revenues
from domestic service.
20. In the traditional domsat arc, we have historically received
more system applications than we can accommodate in orbit. The one-step
financial showing therefore prevents those entities without the
requisite financial resources from tying up scarce orbital resources
and precluding qualified applicants from building their proposed
systems. In eliminating the distinction between domestic and separate
systems satellites, we anticipate increased demand for a wider range of
orbit locations. This is because satellites operating from orbit
locations over the ocean regions can still see large portions of the
United States. Consequently, we believe general application of the one-
step financial showing is needed to prevent warehousing and to allow
the maximum number of qualified applicants to go forward.
21. Nevertheless, we cannot ignore the possibility that some
separate satellite system operators will be limited in their domestic
coverage due to more easterly or westerly orbital locations.
Significantly, we generally do not receive as many competing
applications for locations well outside the traditional domestic arc.
Consequently, in these circumstances, allowing an applicant some
additional time in which to obtain financing should not prevent
financially able applicants from implementing systems, nor delay
service to the public. We will therefore permit operators who apply for
orbit locations in uncongested portions of the orbital arc to request a
waiver of the one-step financial showing. All such requests should
include the costs of construction, launch, and first-year operation of
the particular satellite. In addition, the request should include
specific information regarding attempts to obtain adequate financing
and an explanation as to why such financing could not be obtained. Any
applicant requesting a waiver will have the burden of demonstrating
that the requested waiver will not foster the misuse of scarce orbital
resources, and that the public interest would therefore not be served
by the application of our one-step rule.
22. All pending separate system applications filed after the
release date of the Notice have had notice of our proposed rule change
and therefore we will require them to meet our one-step financial
requirement. We will permit these applicants to file amendments within
30 days of the effective date of this Report and Order to bring their
applications into compliance with the financial standard or to seek a
waiver. Separate system applications filed prior to the release date of
the Notice will not need to meet the one-step standard. Rather, they
will be subject to the two-stage separate systems financial requirement
applicable at that time.
2. Regulatory Classification
23. Under our current policy, domsat operators are permitted to
sell or lease transponders on a non-common carrier basis if we find
that doing so will not unduly reduce the number of transponders
available on a common carrier basis. In determining whether a
particular request should be granted, we have relied upon the analysis
set forth in NARUC I.4 Specifically, we may regulate an entity as
a private carrier under NARUC I unless: (1) There is or should be any
legal compulsion to serve the public indifferently; or (2) there are
reasons implicit in the nature of the service to expect that the entity
will in fact hold itself out indifferently to the eligible user public.
This analysis was inapplicable to separate satellite systems since they
were established for the provision of non-common carrier services.
\4\ Nat'l Ass'n of Regulatory Utility Commissioners v. F.C.C.,
525 F.2d 630 (D.C. Cir.), cert. denied, 425 U.S. 992 (1976).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
24. We tentatively concluded in our Notice that there is no longer
a need to require domsat licensees to provide capacity on a common
carrier basis. With respect to the first prong of NARUC I, we concluded
that sufficient competitive capacity is and will continue to be
available to assure the U.S. public ample access to fixed-satellite
services. With regard to the second prong of NARUC I, we found little
likelihood that non-common carrier domsats will hold themselves out
indifferently to serve the public and that stable, long-term
contractual offerings to individual customers of technically and
operationally distinct portions of a satellite fall short of the
indiscriminate offerings contemplated in NARUC I. We also noted that
restrictions on separate system offerings have been eroded and no
longer limit separate system operators to providing customized
services. We, therefore, proposed to permit but not require U.S. space
station licensees providing international service to do so on a common
carrier basis, if these offerings further their business plans.
Accordingly, we proposed to allow all U.S. FSS licensees and applicants
to elect whether to provide service on a common carrier or non-common
carrier basis.
25. Domsat and separate system operators support this proposal and
note that most domestic fixed satellite services are already offered on
a non-common carrier basis. In contrast, GCI and the Networks are
concerned that permitting satellite operators to choose their
regulatory classification might endanger the amount of capacity
available for domestic service requirements. The Networks oppose
changing the current obligation of satellite operators to make
available a sufficient amount of capacity on a common carrier basis.
26. We adopt our proposal to permit satellite operators to elect to
operate on a common carrier or non-common carrier basis. As we stated
in the Notice, no transponder sales application has been opposed in the
last decade. Further, despite the near-routine approval of these
requests, several operators have chosen to continue to offer space
segment capacity on a common carrier basis. This suggests that market
forces are sufficient to provide enough common carrier capacity.
Neither the Networks nor GCI has presented any evidence to suggest that
this will not continue.
27. While applicants will need to elect their regulatory
classification in
[[Page 9949]]
their applications, this election will not be of decisional
significance. Rather, the election will be for informational purposes
only to enable us to apply Title II regulations to common carriers.
Similarly, licensees wishing to change their regulatory classification
should notify us in writing of such change, including the date on which
they intend to do so. No prior approval from the Commission will be
necessary. Commission staff will include the notification of a change
in status as an informational listing in the Satellite and
Radiocommunication Division's weekly Public Notice of actions taken.
The staff will also place a copy of the notification in the station
file.
C. Changes to Earth Station Rules.
28. Under our current licensing scheme, earth stations are
classified as either domestic or international depending on the
satellites that will be accessed. Domestic earth stations are typically
licensed to communicate with all domestic satellites in the
``domestic'' portion of the arc, referred to for licensing purposes as
``ALSAT.'' International earth stations are licensed to communicate
with specific U.S.-licensed separate systems and non-U.S. international
satellites. Under this licensing scheme, domestic earth station
licenses have to be modified to communicate with any satellites not
included in the ``ALSAT'' designation and international earth station
licenses have to be modified to communicate with any satellite not
designated on the license.
29. In light of our proposal to eliminate the distinction between
domestic and separate system satellites, we tentatively concluded in
our Notice that there is no reason to retain any distinction between
domestic and international earth stations using U.S.-licensed space
segment. Accordingly, we proposed to retain the ``ALSAT'' designation,
but broaden its meaning to include all U.S.-licensed satellites
providing fixed-satellite service. We noted that expanding the
``ALSAT'' designation will reduce the number of license modification
applications, while allowing operators to provide service immediately
consistent with Intelsat Article XIV(d) consultations. We recognized,
however, that our proposal could require additional coordination
between earth stations operating in the C-band and terrestrial C-band
facilities.
30. All of the comments support this proposal. The commenters agree
that the proposed modifications will avoid the need for earth station
license modification requests, result in substantial savings, lessen
the burden on the Commission while allowing more rapid service to
customers, and enhance competition by allowing FSS earth station
operators a broader choice of satellites with which to communicate.
31. The comments also favor a simplified procedure for modifying
existing earth station licenses to incorporate domestic and
international transmissions to all U.S.-licensed satellites. Where no
frequency coordination issues are presented, the comments suggest that
the modification be automatic. If frequency coordination is required,
Group W suggests that we permit access to a new satellite immediately
upon certification or notification to the FCC that appropriate
frequency coordination procedures have been completed. GCI believes
that licensees operating earth stations in the C-band should be allowed
to submit the additional frequency coordination studies and that such
filings should not be placed on public notice. HBO proposes that the
modification be made self-executing if no opposition is filed within 30
days after public notice of the filing of the appropriate coordination
data.
32. We adopt our proposal to expand the ALSAT designation. We
further agree that the proposal should be implemented with no
unnecessary regulatory burden. We recognize, however, that earth
station operators in the C-band that wish to communicate with an
expanded number of satellites may need to complete additional frequency
coordination with respect to terrestrial operators sharing the band.
Consequently, we automatically modify all earth station licenses to
allow the facilities to access all U.S.-licensed satellites, provided
that the operator submits, when necessary, a frequency coordination
analysis verifying that the expanded operations are fully coordinated
with other primary users in the band under the Part 25 coordination
requirements.
D. Other Services
33. In our Notice, we recognized that U.S.-licensed satellite
systems providing services other than domestic fixed satellite services
may be similarly constrained in the geographic reach of their services.
We requested comment on whether licensees of geostationary systems that
provide mobile and broadcast services should be permitted to provide
both domestic and international service subject to U.S. international
coordination obligations. In addition, we noted that there might be
specific considerations for MSS and DBS that could dictate a different
domestic/international policy. We asked, for instance, whether
authorizing U.S.-licensed DBS providers to broadcast to customers in
other countries would be inconsistent with the ``Plan'' that assigned
DBS orbit locations internationally, adopted at the 1983 Regional
Administrative Radio Conference (RARC-83). We also asked whether
receipt in the U.S. of DBS programming transmitted from earth stations
in foreign countries would be inconsistent with the provisions of
International Telecommunications Union (ITU) Appendix 30A regarding
feeder links for DBS. Finally, we requested comments on any other
matters bearing on the issue of whether and to what extent U.S.-
licensed geostationary satellite systems should be permitted to provide
international broadcast and mobile services.
1. Direct Broadcast Satellite Service
a. Background
34. DBS, or Broadcast Satellite Service (``BSS'') as it is referred
to internationally, is a direct-to-home service that uses geostationary
satellites to transmit to small earth terminals. Because of the high
power at which the satellites operate, the home dishes can be as small
as 12 inches in diameter. DBS orbital locations and channels have been
assigned to countries in Region 2--which includes North, Central, and
South America--under a Plan adopted at RARC-83. The Plan allocates 32
channels at each of eight orbital locations to the United States from
which to provide domestic DBS service. The Plan also specifies the
technical parameters under which DBS systems must operate.
Nevertheless, the Plan may be modified to permit non-standard
satellites and operations, provided that they do not cause harmful
interference to satellites operating in compliance with the Plan.
Procedures for modifying the Plan are set forth in Appendices 30 and
30A of the ITU Regulations. Modifications to the regional BSS Plans to
change, add, or cancel channel assignments require the consent of the
countries affected by such modifications.
35. The commenters generally agree that it is possible for U.S.
licensees to provide DBS service to foreign countries in a manner
consistent with the Region 2 Plan. They also support a policy that
would permit U.S. DBS operators to provide international service,
although they disagree about the timing for implementation of this
policy and the conditions under which international service should be
authorized.
36. While agreeing that it would be beneficial to relax geographic
[[Page 9950]]
constraints on U.S.-licensed satellite communications systems, HBO
urges us to maintain a policy where the orbital positions best suited
to provide service in the United States are used primarily to meet
domestic communications needs. Accordingly, HBO suggests that we
approve proposals to provide international service from such orbital
positions only upon a showing that doing so would not cause a domestic
shortage. It also asks that we periodically assess domestic capacity
and require service adjustments when necessary.
37. Separate from this proceeding, DBSC filed a Petition for
Declaratory Ruling regarding the use of ``spare'' transponders to
provide international DBS service. DBSC holds a construction permit for
two eleven-channel DBS satellites at 61.5 degrees W.L. and 175 degrees
W.L. DBSC states that it plans to design each satellite with 16
transponders. In its Petition, DBSC requests authority to use the five
``spare'' or ``extra'' transponders on each satellite for international
service, subject to two conditions: (1) That there would be no
consequent reduction in the use of its satellites for provision of
domestic DBS, and (2) that full compliance with all relevant treaty
obligations be ensured. DBSC submitted an engineering study with its
Petition to demonstrate that compatible use is technically feasible.
38. Local-DBS, Inc., a DBS licensee, supports DBSC's Petition
because it is consistent with ``the Clinton Administration's goal [of]
opening the satellite marketplace to fair and effective competition.''
Canadian Satellite Communications, Inc. (``Cancom''), a corporation
licensed by the Canadian Radio-television and Telecommunications
Commission to distribute radio and television signals by satellite,
opposes DBSC's petition. It contends that adoption of a general policy
permitting U.S. licensees to provide international DBS service could
undercut Canadian regulatory policies designed to preserve Canada's
cultural identity.
b. Discussion
39. International DBS service from an orbital location assigned to
the United States would require coordination with the administration in
the receiving country and any other affected administration. However,
we see no reason why the Commission should impose any barriers on a
licensee willing to undertake the coordination processes in order to
provide international DBS service from an orbital location allocated to
the United States for DBS service.
40. On the contrary, we should encourage international DBS service
since it would advance the public interest in a number of ways. First,
permitting international service would expand the potential audience
for American programming, and could stimulate economic growth. Second,
importing uplinked foreign programming would enable operators to better
satisfy the needs and desires of enhanced services to multi-lingual
subscribers in the U.S. Third, operators would enjoy economies of scale
for both themselves and their customers if non-English language
programs could simultaneously serve same-language communities in the
U.S. and in foreign markets. Finally, the possibility of providing
international DBS services to Pacific Rim nations could make the
western-most DBS orbital locations allocated to the United States--from
which no permittee appears ready to operate in the near future--more
attractive platforms, which could accelerate development of those
locations and thereby accelerate the delivery of DBS service to Hawaii
and Alaska. None of the commenters have presented any reason why we
should delay these benefits to the public.
41. We disagree with HBO that we should monitor the industry to
ensure that sufficient services are being made available to the United
States. We believe market forces will determine the appropriate balance
between international and domestic offerings. Further, we do not agree
with those commenters who argue that revising our DBS policy
compromises the rights of foreign administrations. Those
administrations would retain all rights they now have to license the
provision of international DBS service to their countries. The
Commission's refusal to impose an additional layer of regulation upon
those seeking to deliver international DBS service from U.S. orbital
locations in no way diminishes those rights.
42. While we believe the public interest will be served by allowing
DBS licensees to provide domestic or international service from their
authorized channels, we believe there are significant obstacles to DBSC
or any other DBS operator providing international DBS service using
``spare'' channels not assigned to it. At each of the orbital locations
at which DBSC is assigned eleven channels, nearly all of the remaining
21 channels assigned to the United States have been, or soon will be,
assigned to other DBS permittees for domestic DBS service. Thus, in
this regard DBSC mischaracterizes these channels as ``spare'' channels.
Instead, before it can provide international service, DBSC would have
to obtain the consent of the permittees holding assignments for the
channels on which it seeks to provide international service, and ensure
that its international service will not cause harmful interference to
other DBS permittees.
43. Therefore, we conclude that U.S. geostationary DBS satellite
systems should be permitted to provide both domestic and international
services from their authorized channels without additional approval
from the Commission. Prior to commencing such service, licensees should
ensure that (a) the technical and operational parameters of the
channels have been successfully coordinated, consistent with U.S.
treaty requirements; and (b) they comply with FCC service rules for DBS
channels assigned for U.S. domestic use. Naturally, a foreign
administration may impose other conditions before it permits a U.S.
operator to do business there. The Commission cannot preempt such
conditions, but neither will we give them independent enforcement under
U.S. law.
2. The Mobile Satellite Service
a. Background
44. MSS provides seamless data or voice communications services to
maritime land, and aeronautical mobile users anywhere. It can also
serve FSS users. MSS encompasses a number of important services,
including position location, search and rescue communication, disaster
management communications, and messaging services. The Commission
licensed the first U.S. commercial MSS system in 1989, when we granted
American Mobile Satellite Corporation (``AMSC'') a license to construct
and launch a geostationary MSS system to serve the United States. Last
year, we authorized the first low-Earth orbit (``LEO'') MSS systems.
Specifically, we authorized Motorola, LQSS, and TRW to construct and
launch voice and data systems. We have authorized Orbcomm, VITA, and
Starsys to construct and launch data-only systems. In granting these
licenses, we emphasized that LEO systems, by virtue of their non-
geostationary orbits, are inherently capable of providing global
service. Indeed, we required the Big LEO systems to be designed to
provide global coverage. In doing so, we noted the significant benefits
in facilitating the creation of the global information infrastructure.
We asked in
[[Page 9951]]
our Notice whether we should permit U.S. licensed geostationary MSS
systems to provide both domestic and international services, as well.
45. Most commenters recommend that we defer, to a future
proceeding, the issues concerning MSS. Two of these commenters--Loral/
Qualcomm and Constellation--are licensees in the Big LEO Service and
contend that there are characteristics unique to MSS that any change in
the Commission's MSS policies should take into account. For example,
they assert that AMSC's system has not been successfully coordinated
internationally. In addition, they note that geostationary MSS
technology generally does not permit more than one system to serve a
geographic area using the same frequencies, resulting in far fewer MSS
systems than FSS systems. Thus, they request that we defer any policy
decision concerning geostationary systems to take into account the
implications for U.S.-licensed LEO systems. In contrast, COMSAT
supports eliminating geographic barriers for U.S. geostationary MSS
systems provided that COMSAT is also permitted to provide domestic and
international services.
b. Discussion
46. We conclude that it is in the public interest to permit U.S.-
licensed geostationary MSS systems to provide both domestic and
international service. As Comsat notes, customer demands for
communication services are becoming increasingly global. In our Big LEO
Rulemaking,5 we addressed the many public benefits associated with
global MSS systems and required the systems in that proceeding to be
capable of providing global coverage. We conclude that permitting U.S.-
licensed geostationary MSS systems to provide both domestic and
international services will offer similar benefits, including promoting
increased competition, increased consumer choices, and further
development of the global information infrastructure. The Big LEO
licensees have not provided any valid reason to delay these public
interest benefits. The fact that there are fewer MSS systems than FSS
systems or that spectrum coordination for the AMSC system has not yet
been completed has little bearing on whether we should permit AMSC or
other U.S. MSS licensees to extend its service offerings
internationally. We conclude that the record is sufficiently developed
to allow us to implement a policy that would permit geostationary MSS
systems, as their counterpart LEO MSS systems and geostationary FSS and
DBS systems, to provide international as well as domestic service.
Before an MSS licensee can actually provide service in a foreign
territory, it must complete its international coordination obligations
and obtain any required approvals from the countries it wishes to
serve.
\5\ See In re Amendment of the Commission's Rules to Establish
Rules and Policies Pertaining to a Mobile Satellite Service in the
1610-1626.5/2483.5-2500 MHz Frequency Bands, 9 F.C.C.Rcd. 4936
(1994) (the ``Big LEO Order'').
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
III. Conclusion
47. In this Report and Order, we eliminate the outdated regulatory
framework that distinguished domsats from separate systems and allow
all U.S.-licensed satellites in the fixed satellite service to provide
both domestic and international services. To effectuate this, we
eliminate the Transborder Policy in its entirety and regulate all U.S.-
licensed fixed satellites under a modified Separate Systems Policy. In
doing so, we enhance the opportunity for the provision of innovative
satellite service offerings without artificial regulatory barriers. In
addition, we extend the benefits of this new policy to other services
by permitting DBS satellites and geostationary MSS satellites to
provide both domestic and international services.
IV. Ordering Clauses
48. Accordingly, it is ordered that Part 25 of the Commission's
rules is amended as set forth below effective April 11, 1996.
49. It is further ordered that DBSC's petition to use transponders
to provide international DBS service is granted.
50. This action is taken pursuant to Sections 4 and 303(r) of the
Communications Act of 1934, as amended, 47 U.S.C. 154, 303(r), and
Section 201(c) of the Communications Satellite Act of 1962, 47 U.S.C.
721(c).
List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 25
Communications common carriers, Radio, Satellites.
Federal Communications Commission.
William F. Caton,
Acting Secretary.
Final Rules
Part 25 of Title 47 of the CFR is amended as follows:
PART 25--SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS
1. The authority citation for Part 25 continues to read as follows:
Authority: Secs. 25.101 to 25.601 issued under Sec. 4, 48 Stat.
1066, as amended; 47 U.S.C. 154. Interpret or apply secs. 101-104,
76 Stat. 419-427; 47 U.S.C. 701-744; 47 U.S.C. 554.
2. Section 25.110 is amended by revising paragraph (b) to read as
follows:
Sec. 25.110 Filing of applications, fees, and number of copies.
* * * * *
(b) Applications for satellite radio station authorizations
governed by this part and requiring a fee shall be mailed or hand-
delivered to the locations specified in part 1, subpart G of this
chapter. All other applications shall be submitted to the Secretary,
Federal Communications Commission, 1919 M Street, N.W., Washington, DC
20554.
* * * * *
3. Section 25.113 is amended by revising paragraphs (b) and (d) to
read as follows:
Sec. 25.113 Construction permits.
* * * * *
(b) Construction permits are not required for satellite earth
stations that operate with INTELSAT or INMARSAT space stations, or for
earth stations that operate with U.S.-licensed space stations.
Construction of such stations may commence prior to grant of a license
at the applicant's own risk. Applicants must comply with the provisions
of Sec. 1.1312 of this chapter relating to environmental processing
prior to commencing construction. A simultaneous application for a
construction permit and station license may be made for all earth
station and space station facilities governed by this part.
* * * * *
(d) In addition to the construction permit required by paragraph
(a) of this section, a launch authorization must be applied for and
granted before a space station may be launched and operated in orbit.
Request for launch and operation authorization and station license may
be included in the application for space station construction permit. A
launch authorization and station license may also be requested at any
time for a space station constructed as an on-ground spare satellite.
However, an application for authority to launch and operate an on-
ground spare satellite will be considered to be a newly filed
application for cut-off purposes, except where the space station to be
launched is determined to be an emergency replacement for a previously
authorized space station which has been lost as a result of a launch
failure or a catastrophic in-orbit failure.
* * * * *
4. Section 25.114 is amended by revising paragraph (c)(18) and
removing
[[Page 9952]]
and reserving paragraphs (c)(23) and (c)(24) to read as follows:
Sec. 25.114 Applications for space station authorizations.
* * * * *
(c) * * *
(18) Detailed information demonstrating the financial
qualifications of the applicant to construct and launch the proposed
satellites. Applications shall provide the financial information
required by Sec. 25.140 (b) through (e) or Sec. 25.142(a)(4).
* * * * *
5. Section 25.115 is amended by revising paragraph (c) introductory
text to read as follows:
Sec. 25.115 Application for earth station authorizations.
* * * * *
(c) Large Networks of Small Antennas operating in the 12/14 GHz
bands with U.S. satellites for domestic services. Applications to
license small antenna network systems operating in the 12/14 GHz
frequency band under blanket operating authority shall include the
following:
* * * * *
6. Section 25.117 is amended by revising paragraph (a) to read as
follows:
Sec. 25.117 Modification of station license.
(a) Except as provided, no modification of a radio station governed
by this part which affects the parameters or terms and conditions of
the station authorization shall be made except upon application to and
grant of such application by the Commission. No license modification
will be required if the licensee seeks to access another U.S.-licensed
fixed satellite provided:
(1) Consultations pursuant to Article XIV(d) of the INTELSAT
Agreement have been completed for the satellites, services and
countries involved; and
(2) The operators of the U.S.-licensed systems have received
specific authorization to provide the services to the proposed
locations.
* * * * *
7. Section 25.130 is amended by revising paragraph (d) to read as
follows:
Sec. 25.130 Filing requirements for transmitting earth stations.
* * * * *
(d) Transmission of signals or programming to non-U.S. satellites,
or to foreign points by means of U.S.-licensed fixed satellites, may be
subject to restrictions as a result of international agreements or
treaties. The Commission will maintain public information on the status
of any such agreements.
* * * * *
8. Section 25.131 is amended by revising paragraphs (b), (g) and
(j) to read as follows:
Sec. 25.131 Filing requirements for receive-only earth stations.
* * * * *
(b) Except as provided in paragraph (j) of this section, receive-
only earth stations may be registered with the Commission in order to
protect them from interference from terrestrial microwave stations in
bands shared co-equally with the fixed service in accordance with the
procedures of Sec. 25.203 and Secs. 25.251 through 25.256.
* * * * *
(g) Reception of signals or programming from non-U.S. satellites
may be subject to restrictions as a result of international agreements
or treaties. The Commission will maintain public information on the
status of any such agreements.
* * * * *
(j) Receive-only earth stations operating with INTELSAT space
stations, or U.S.-licensed and non-U.S. space stations for reception of
services from other countries, shall file an FCC Form 493 requesting a
license for such station. Receive-only earth stations used to receive
INTELNET I services from INTELSAT space stations need not file for
licenses. See Deregulation of Receive-Only Satellite Earth Stations
Operating with the INTELSAT Global Communications Satellite System,
Declaratory Ruling, RM No. 4845, FCC 86-214 (released May 19, 1986).
9. Section 25.140 is amended by revising the section heading and
paragraphs (a) and (b) to read as follows:
Sec. 25.140 Qualifications of fixed-satellite space station licensees.
(a) New fixed-satellites shall comply with the requirements
established in Report and Order in CC Docket No. 81-704. The
requirements for radio station applications for new fixed-satellites
are specified in Appendix B to the Commission's 1983 Processing Order
(93 FCC2d 1260 (1983)). Applications must also meet the requirements in
paragraphs (b) through (e) of this section. The Commission may require
additional or different information in the case of any individual
application. Applications will be unacceptable for filing and will be
returned to the applicant if they do not meet the requirements referred
to in this paragraph.
(b) Each applicant for a space station authorization in the fixed-
satellite service must demonstrate, on the basis of the documentation
contained in its application, that it is legally, financially,
technically, and otherwise qualified to proceed expeditiously with the
construction, launch and/or operation of each proposed space station
facility immediately upon grant of the requested authorization. Each
applicant must provide the following information:
* * * * *
10. Section 25.202 is amended by revising paragraph (c) to read as
follows:
Sec. 25.202 Frequencies, frequency tolerance and emission limitations.
* * * * *
(c) Orbital locations assigned to space stations licensed under
this part by the commission are subject to change by summary order of
the Commission on 30 days notice. An authorization to construct and/or
to launch a space station becomes null and void if the construction is
not begun or is not completed, or if the space station is not launched
and positioned at its assigned orbital location and operations
commenced in accordance with the station authorization, by the
respective date(s) specified in the authorization. Frequencies and
orbital location assignments are subject to the policies set forth in
the Report and Order, FCC 83-184, adopted April 27, 1983 in CC Docket
No. 81-704 and the Report and Order, adopted July 25, 1985 in CC Docket
No. 84-1299 as modified by the Report and Order, adopted January 19,
1996 in IB Docket No. 95-41.
* * * * *
11. Section 25.210 is amended by revising the introductory portions
of paragraphs (e) and (j) and removing and reserving paragraph (f) to
read as follows:
Sec. 25.210 Technical requirements for space stations in the Fixed-
Satellite Service.
* * * * *
(e) For fixed-satellite space stations providing international
service, full frequency re-use is defined as follows:
* * * * *
(j) All operators of space stations shall file a semi-annual report
with the International Bureau and the Commission's Laurel, Maryland
field office containing the following information:
* * * * *
12. Section 25.211 is amended by revising paragraph (b) to read as
follows:
Sec. 25.211 Video Transmissions in the Domestic Fixed-Satellite
Service.
* * * * *
(b) All 4/6 GHz analog video transmissions shall contain an energy
[[Page 9953]]
dispersal signal at all times with a minimum peak-to-peak bandwidth set
at whatever value is necessary to meet the power flux density limits
specified in Sec. 25.208(a) and successfully coordinated
internationally and accepted by adjacent U.S. satellite operators based
on the use of state of the art space and earth station facilities.
Further, all transmissions operating in frequency bands described in
Sec. 25.208(b) and (c) shall also contain an energy dispersal signal at
all times with a minimum peak-to-peak bandwidth set at whatever value
is necessary to meet the power flux density limits specified in
Sec. 25.208(b) and (c) and successfully coordinated internationally and
accepted by adjacent U.S. satellite operators based on the use of state
of the art space and earth station facilities. The transmission of an
unmodulated carrier at a power level sufficient to saturate a
transponder is prohibited, except by the space station licensee to
determine transponder performance characteristics. All 12/14 GHz video
transmissions for TV/FM shall identify the particular carrier
frequencies for necessary coordination with adjacent U.S. satellite
systems and affected satellite systems of other administrations.
* * * * *
13. Section 25.276 is amended by revising paragraph (c) to read as
follows:
Sec. 25.276 Points of communication.
* * * * *
(c) Transmission to or from foreign points over space stations in
the Fixed-Satellite Service, other than those operated by the
International Telecommunications Satellite Organization and Inmarsat,
are subject to the policies set forth in the Report and Order, adopted
January 19, 1996 in IB Docket No. 95-41.
[FR Doc. 96-5822 Filed 3-11-96; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 6712-01-P
Complete official Federal Register PDF
FR Doc. 96-5815 Minor Correcting Amendments
[Federal Register Volume 61, Number 49 (Tuesday, March 12, 1996)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 9901-9902]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 96-5815]
=======================================================================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION
10 CFR Parts 19, 30, 51, 52, and 55
RIN 3150-AF42
Minor Correcting Amendments
AGENCY: Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
ACTION: Final rule.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: The Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) is amending its
regulations to correct several miscellaneous errors in the Code of
Federal Regulations (CFR). This document is necessary to inform the
public of these corrective changes to NRC regulations.
EFFECTIVE DATE: March 12, 1996.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Michael T. Lesar, Chief, Rules Review
Section, Rules Review and Directives Branch, Division of Freedom of
Information and Publications Services, Office of Administration, U.S.
Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC 20555, Telephone (301)
415-7163.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Background
The Nuclear Regulatory Commission is amending the regulations in 10
CFR Parts 19, 30, 51, 52, and 55 to correct several miscellaneous
errors in regulatory text. These changes in CFR text occurred in the
process of preparing and printing of rulemaking documents.
In particular, under Sec. 30.72, Schedule C, the entry for C-14
only applies to non-carbon dioxide forms. This rule was first published
in the Federal Register on April 7, 1989 (54 FR 14051) and the
explanatory note for C-14 in the table, as printed in the final rule,
appears to read ``non CO,'' rather than ``non CO2.'' In a
subsequent reprinting of Sec. 30.72 in the Code of Federal Regulations,
this note was inadvertantly omitted. This correction replaces the
explanatory note for the C-14 entry in the table.
Because this is an amendment dealing with agency organization,
practice, and procedure, the notice and comment provisions of the
Administrative Procedure Act do not apply pursuant to 5 U.S.C.
553(b)(A). The amendment is effective upon publication in the Federal
Register. Good cause exists to dispense with the usual 30-day delay in
the effective date because the amendment is of a minor and
administrative nature dealing with corrections to certain CFR sections.
Environmental Impact: Categorical Exclusion
The NRC has determined that this final rule is the type of action
described in categorical exclusion 10 CFR 51.22(c)(2). Therefore,
neither an environmental impact statement nor an environmental
assessment has been prepared for this final rule.
Paperwork Reduction Act Statement
This final rule does not contain a new or amended information
collection requirement subject to the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995
(44 U.S.C. 3501 et seq.). Existing requirements were approved by the
Office of Management and Budget, approval numbers 3150-0044, -0017, -
0021, -0151, and -0018.
List of Subjects
10 CFR Part 19
Criminal penalties, Environmental protection, Nuclear materials,
Nuclear power plants and reactors, Occupational safety and health,
Radiation protection, Reporting and recordkeeping requirements, Sex
discrimination.
10 CFR Part 30
Byproduct material, Criminal penalties, Government contracts,
Intergovernmental relations, Isotopes,
[[Page 9902]]
Nuclear materials, Radiation protection, Reporting and recordkeeping
requirements.
10 CFR Part 51
Administrative practice and procedure, Environmental impact
statement, Nuclear materials, Nuclear power plants and reactors,
Reporting and recordkeeping requirements.
10 CFR Part 52
Administrative practice and procedure, Antitrust, Backfitting,
Combined license, Early site permit, Emergency planning, Fees,
Incorporation by reference, Inspection, Limited work authorization,
Nuclear power plants and reactors, Probabilistic risk assessment,
Prototype, Reactor siting criteria, Redress of site, Reporting and
recordkeeping requirements, Standard design, Standard design
certification.
10 CFR Part 55
Criminal penalties, Manpower training programs, Nuclear power
plants and reactors, Reporting and recordkeeping requirements.
For the reasons set out in the preamble and under the authority of
the Atomic Energy Act of 1954, as amended; the Energy Reorganization
Act of 1974, as amended; and 5 U.S.C. 552 and 553; the NRC is adopting
the following amendments to 10 CFR Parts 19, 30, 51, 52, and 55.
PART 19--NOTICES, INSTRUCTIONS AND REPORTS TO WORKERS: INSPECTION
AND INVESTIGATIONS
1. The authority citation for Part 19 continues to read in part as
follows:
Authority: Secs. 53, 63, 81, 103, 104, 161, 186, 68 Stat. 930,
933, 935, 936, 937, 948, 955, as amended, sec. 234, 83 Stat. 444, as
amended, sec. 1701, 106 Stat. 2951, 2952, 2953 (42 U.S.C. 2073,
2093, 2111, 2133, 2134, 2201, 2236, 2282, 2297f) * * *.
Sec. 19.2 [Amended]
2. In Sec. 19.2, in the first sentence, add the numeral ``70,''
between the numeral ``61,'' and the word ``or''.
PART 30--RULES OF GENERAL APPLICABILITY TO DOMESTIC LICENSING OF
BYPRODUCT MATERIAL
3. The authority citation for Part 30 continues to read in part as
follows:
Authority: Secs. 81, 82, 161, 182, 183, 186, 68 Stat. 935, 948,
953, 954, 955, as amended, sec. 234, 83 Stat. 444, as amended (42
U.S.C. 2111, 2112, 2201, 2232, 2233, 2236, 2282) * * *.
Sec. 30.72 [Amended]
4. In Sec. 30.72, Schedule C, in the ``Radioactive material''
column, the entry for Carbon-14 is revised to read, ``Carbon-14 (non-
carbon dioxide).''
PART 51--ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REGULATIONS FOR DOMESTIC
LICENSING AND RELATED REGULATORY FUNCTIONS
5. The authority citation for Part 51 continues to read as follows:
Authority: Secs. 161, 68 Stat. 948, as amended, sec. 1701, 106
Stat. 2951, 2952, 2953, as amended (42 U.S.C. 2201, 2297f); secs.
201, as amended, 202, 88 Stat. 1242, as amended, 1244 (42 U.S.C.
5841, 5842) * * *.
Sec. 51.22 [Amended]
6. In Sec. 51.22, in paragraph (c)(14)(ii), remove the words ``10
CFR 35.14 and 35.100'' and add ``10 CFR 35.18.''
Sec. 51.123 [Amended]
7. In Sec. 51.123, in paragraphs (a) and (b), remove the words
``Sec. 9.14 of this chapter,'' and add the words ``Sec. 9.35 of this
chapter.''
PART 52--EARLY SITE PERMITS; STANDARD DESIGN CERTIFICATIONS; AND
COMBINED LICENSES FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS
8. The authority citation for Part 52 continues to read as follows:
Authority: Secs. 103, 104, 161, 182, 183, 186, 189, 68 Stat.
936, 948, 953, 954, 955, 956, as amended, sec. 234, 83 Stat. 1244,
as amended (42 U.S.C. 2133, 2201, 2232, 2233, 2236, 2239, 2282);
secs. 201, 202, 206, 88 Stat. 1242, 1244, 1246, 1248, as amended 42
U.S.C. 5841, 5842, 5846).
9. In Appendix O to Part 52, paragraph 1. is revised to read as
follows:
Appendix O To Part 52--Standardization of Design: Staff Review of
Standard Designs
* * * * *
1. Any person may submit a proposed preliminary or final standard
design for a nuclear power reactor of the type described in Sec. 50.22
to the regulatory staff for its review. Such a submittal may consist of
either the preliminary or final design for the entire reactor facility
or the preliminary or final design of major portions thereof.
* * * * *
PART 55--OPERATORS' LICENSES
10. The authority citation for Part 55 continues to read as
follows:
Authority: Secs. 107, 161, 182, 68 Stat. 939, 948, 953, as
amended, sec. 234, 83 Stat. 444, as amended (42 U.S.C. 2137, 2201,
2232, 2282); secs. 201, as amended, 202, 88 Stat. 1242, as amended,
1244 (42 U.S.C. 5841, 5842).
Sec. 55.5 [Amended]
11. In Sec. 55.5, paragraph (b)(2)(iii), remove the words ``799
Roosevelt Road, Glyn Ellyn, IL 60137,'' and add the words ``801
Warrenville Road, Lisle, IL 60532-4351.''
Dated at Rockville, Maryland, this 28th day of February 1996.
For the Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
James M. Taylor,
Executive Director for Operations.
[FR Doc. 96-5815 Filed 3-11-96; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 7590-01-P
Complete official Federal Register PDF
FR Doc. 96-5812 Indirect Food Additives: Adhesives and Components of Coatings
[Federal Register Volume 61, Number 49 (Tuesday, March 12, 1996)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 9903-9904]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 96-5812]
=======================================================================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES
Food and Drug Administration
21 CFR Part 175
[Docket No. 93F-0358]
Indirect Food Additives: Adhesives and Components of Coatings
AGENCY: Food and Drug Administration, HHS.
ACTION: Final rule.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: The Food and Drug Administration (FDA) is amending the food
additive regulations to provide for the safe use of meta-
tetramethylxylene diisocyanate for reaction with one or more of the
polyols and polyesters listed in the adhesive regulations and with
dimethylolpropionic acid and trimethylamine, N-methyldiethanolamine, 2-
dimethylaminoethanol, 2-dimethylamino-2-methyl-1-propanol, and/or 2-
amino-2-methyl-1-propanol in the production of polyurethane resins
intended for use as components of adhesive formulations used in food
packaging applications. This action is in response to a petition filed
by Cytec Industries.
DATES: Effective March 12, 1996; written objections and requests for a
hearing by April 11, 1996.
ADDRESSES: Submit written objections to the Dockets Management Branch
(HFA-305), Food and Drug Administration, 12420 Parklawn Dr., rm. 1-23,
Rockville, MD 20857.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Vir D. Anand, Center for Food Safety
and Applied Nutrition (HFS-216), Food and Drug Administration, 200 C
St. SW., Washington, DC 20204, 202-418-3081.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: In a notice published in the Federal
Register of October 26, 1993 (58 FR 57613), FDA announced that a food
additive petition (FAP 3B4401) had been filed by Cytec Industries, c/o
Keller and Heckman, 1001 G St. NW., suite 500 West, Washington, DC
20001, proposing that Sec. 175.105 Adhesives (21 CFR 175.105) be
amended to provide for the safe use of meta-tetramethylxylene
diisocyanate for reaction with one or more of the polyols and
polyesters listed in Sec. 175.105 and with dimethylolpropionic acid and
trimethyamine, N-methyldiethanolamine, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, 2-
dimethylamino-2-methyl-1-propanol, and/or 2-amino-2-methyl-1-propanol
in the production of polyurethane resins intended for use as components
of adhesive formulations used in food packaging applications. This
document is also amending Sec. 175.105(c)(5) to correct inconsistencies
in the spelling of the Chemical Abstract Service Registry Numbers.
FDA has evaluated data in the petition and other relevant material.
The agency concludes that the proposed use of the additive is safe and
that 21 CFR 175.105 should be amended as set forth below.
In accordance with Sec. 171.1(h) (21 CFR 171.1(h)), the petition
and the documents that FDA considered and relied upon in reaching its
decision to approve the petition are available for inspection at the
Center for Food Safety and Applied Nutrition by appointment with the
information contact person listed above. As provided in 21 CFR
171.1(h), the agency will delete from the documents any materials that
are not available for public disclosure before making the documents
available for inspection.
The agency has carefully considered the potential environmental
effects of this action. FDA has concluded that the action will not have
a significant impact on the human environment, and that an
environmental impact statement is not required. The agency's finding of
no significant impact and the evidence supporting that finding,
contained in an environmental assessment, may be seen in the Dockets
Management Branch (address above) between 9 a.m. and 4 p.m., Monday
through Friday.
Any person who will be adversely affected by this regulation may at
any time on or before April 11, 1996, file with the Dockets Management
Branch (address above) written objections thereto. Each objection shall
be separately numbered, and each numbered objection shall specify with
particularity the provisions of the regulation to which objection is
made and the grounds for the objection. Each numbered objection on
which a hearing is requested shall specifically so state. Failure to
request a hearing for any particular objection shall constitute a
waiver of the right to a hearing on that objection. Each numbered
objection for which a hearing is requested shall include a detailed
description and analysis of the specific factual information intended
to be presented in support of the objection in the event that a hearing
is held. Failure to include such a description and analysis for any
particular objection shall constitute a waiver of the right to a
hearing on the objection. Three copies of all documents shall be
submitted and shall be identified with the docket number found in
brackets in the heading of this
[[Page 9904]]
document. Any objections received in response to the regulation may be
seen in the Dockets Management Branch between 9 a.m. and 4 p.m., Monday
through Friday.
List of Subjects in 21 CFR Part 175
Adhesives, Food additives, Food packaging.
Therefore, under the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act and under
authority delegated to the Commissioner of Food and Drugs and
redelegated to the Director, Center for Food Safety and Applied
Nutrition, 21 CFR part 175 is amended as follows:
PART 175--INDIRECT FOOD ADDITIVES: ADHESIVES AND COMPONENTS OF
COATINGS
1. The authority citation for 21 CFR part 175 continues to read as
follows:
Authority: Secs. 201, 402, 409, 721 of the Federal Food, Drug,
and Cosmetic Act (21 U.S.C. 321, 342, 348, 379e).
2. Section 175.105 is amended in the table in paragraph (c)(5) by
revising the entry for ``Polyurethane resins * * *'' under the heading
``Substances'' to read as follows:
Sec. 175.105 Adhesives.
* * * * *
(c) * * *
(5) * * *
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Substances Limitations
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* * * *
* * *
Polyurethane resins produced by: (1) reacting ......................
diisocyanates with one or more of the polyols
or polyesters named in this paragraph, or (2)
reacting the chloroformate derivatives of one
or more of the polyols or polyesters named in
this paragraph with one or more of the
polyamines named in this paragraph, or (3)
reacting toluene diisocyanate or 4,4'-
methylenebis (cyclohexylisocyanate) (CAS Reg.
No. 5124-30-1) with one or more of the polyols
or polyesters named in this paragraph and with
either N-methyldiethanolamine (CAS Reg. No. 105-
59-9) and dimethyl sulfate (CAS Reg. No. 77-78-
1) or dimethylolpropionic acid (CAS Reg. No.
4767-03-7) and triethylamine (CAS Reg. No. 121-
44-8), or (4) reacting meta-tetramethylxylene
diisocyanate (CAS Reg. No. 2778-42-9) with one
or more of the polyols and polyesters listed in
this paragraph and with dimethylolpropionic
acid (CAS Reg. No. 4767-03-7) and triethylamine
(CAS Reg. No. 121-44-8), N-methyldiethanolamine
(CAS Reg. No. 105-59-9), 2-dimethylaminoethanol
(CAS Reg. No. 108-01-0), 2-dimethylamino-2-
methyl-1-propanol (CAS Reg. No. 7005-47-2), and/
or 2-amino-2-methyl-1-propanol (CAS Reg. No.
124-68-5).
* * * *
* * *
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dated: March 1, 1996.
Fred R. Shank,
Director, Center for Food Safety and Applied Nutrition.
[FR Doc. 96-5812 Filed 3-11-96; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 4160-01-F
Complete official Federal Register PDF
FR Doc. 96-5807 The Federal Maritime CommissionGeneral
[Federal Register Volume 61, Number 49 (Tuesday, March 12, 1996)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Page 9944]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 96-5807]
=======================================================================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
FEDERAL MARITIME COMMISSION
46 CFR Part 501
The Federal Maritime Commission--General
AGENCY: Federal Maritime Commission.
ACTION: Final rule.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: The Federal Maritime Commission is revising its statement of
delegations of authorities to include new authority delegated to the
Director of the Bureau of Economics and Agreement Analysis to grant or
deny applications for waivers of certain regulations.
EFFECTIVE DATE: March 12, 1996.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT:
Austin L. Schmitt, Director, Bureau of Economics and Agreement
Analysis, Federal Maritime Commission, 800 North Capitol Street, NW.,
Washington, DC 20573-0001, (202) 523-5787.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: In Docket No. 94-31, Information Form and
Post-Effective Reporting Requirements for Agreements Among Ocean Common
Carriers Subject to the Shipping Act of 1984, the Federal Maritime
Commission (``Commission'') has amended its regulations set forth in 46
CFR Part 572 governing the filing, processing and review of agreements
among ocean common carriers subject to the Shipping Act of 1984. The
amended regulations provide that, upon a showing of good cause, the
Commission may waive any part of their requirements, and set forth
procedures and standards governing applications for a waiver.
This rule amends the Commission's statement of delegations of
authorities in 46 CFR Part 501 to include a new delegation to the
Director of the Commission's Bureau of Economics and Agreement Analysis
to grant or deny applications for waivers of the agreement regulations.
Review of the Director's grant or denial of a waiver is available under
the procedures already in effect pursuant to 46 CFR 501.21(f).
Notice and opportunity for public comment were not necessary prior
to issuance of this rule and because it deals solely with matters of
agency organization and procedure. 5 U.S.C. 553.
List of Subjects in 46 CFR Part 501
Administrative practice and procedure; authority delegations;
organization and functions; seals and insignia.
Therefore, pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 551-557, 701-706, 2903 and 6304; 31
U.S.C. 3721; 41 U.S.C. 414 and 418; 44 U.S.C. 501-520 and 3501-3520; 46
U.S.C. app. 801-848, 876, 1111 and 1701-1720; Reorganization Plan No. 7
of 1961, 26 FR 7315, August 12, 1961; Pub. L. 89-56, 79 Stat. 195; and
5 CFR Part 2638, Part 501 of Title 46, Code of Federal Regulations, is
amended to read as follows:
PART 501--THE FEDERAL MARITIME COMMISSION--GENERAL
1. The authority citation for Part 501 continues to read as
follows:
Authority: 5 U.S.C. 551-557, 701-706, 2903 and 6304; 31 U.S.C.
3721; 41 U.S.C. 414 and 418; 44 U.S.C. 501-520 and 3501-3520; 46
U.S.C. app. 801-848, 876, 1111 and 1701-1720; Reorganization Plan
No. 7 of 1961, 26 FR 7315, August 12, 1961; Pub. L. 89-56, 79 Stat.
195; 5 CFR Part 2638.
2. In section 501.26, paragraph (f) is amended by changing the
reference to ``572.404'' to ``572.406,'' and by changing the references
to ``572.501 and 572.502'' to ``572.404 and 572.405;'' paragraphs (g)
through (m) are redesignated (i) through (o); newly redesignated (i)
(6) is removed; and new paragraphs (g) and (h) are added, as follows:
Sec. 501.26 Delegation to the Director, Bureau of Economics and
Agreement Analysis.
* * * * *
(g) Authority to grant or deny applications filed under
Sec. 572.505 of this chapter for waiver of the information form
requirements of Secs. 572.503 and 572.504 of this chapter.
By the Commission.
(h) Authority to grant or deny applications filed under
Sec. 572.709 of this chapter for waiver of the reporting and record
retention requirements of Secs. 572.701, 572.702, 572.703, 572.704,
572.705, 572.706, 572.707 and 572.708 of this chapter.
* * * * *
By the Commission.
Ronald D. Murphy,
Assistant Secretary.
[FR Doc. 96-5807 Filed 3-11-96; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 6730-01-M
Complete official Federal Register PDF
FR Doc. 96-5805 Groundfish of the Gulf of Alaska; Rex Sole in the Western Regulatory Area
[Federal Register Volume 61, Number 49 (Tuesday, March 12, 1996)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Page 9956]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 96-5805]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
50 CFR Part 672
[Docket No. 960129018-6018-01; I.D. 030596A]
Groundfish of the Gulf of Alaska; Rex Sole in the Western
Regulatory Area
AGENCY: National Marine Fisheries Service (NMFS), National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), Commerce.
ACTION: Closure.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: NMFS is closing the directed fishery for rex sole in the
Western Regulatory Area of the Gulf of Alaska management area (GOA).
This action is necessary to prevent exceeding the rex sole total
allowable catch (TAC) in the Western Regulatory Area.
EFFECTIVE DATE: 1200 hrs, Alaska local time (A.l.t.), March 6, 1996,
until 2359 hrs, A.l.t., December 31, 1996.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Andrew Smoker, 907-586-7228.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: The groundfish fishery in the GOA exclusive
economic zone is managed by NMFS according to the Fishery Management
Plan for Groundfish of the Gulf of Alaska (FMP) prepared by the North
Pacific Fishery Management Council under authority of the Magnuson
Fishery Conservation and Management Act. Fishing by U.S. vessels is
governed by regulations implementing the FMP at 50 CFR parts 620 and
672.
In accordance with Sec. 672.20 (c)(1)(ii)(B) the rex sole TAC for
the Western Regulatory Area was established by the Final 1996 Harvest
Specifications of Groundfish (61 FR 4304, February 5, 1996) as 800
metric tons (mt).
The Director, Alaska Region, NMFS (Regional Director), has
determined, in accordance with Sec. 672.20(c)(2)(ii), that the rex sole
TAC in the Western Regulatory Area soon will be reached. Therefore, the
Regional Director has established a directed fishing allowance of 700
mt, with consideration that 100 mt will be taken as incidental catch in
directed fishing for other species in the Western Regulatory Area. The
Regional Director has determined that the directed fishing allowance
has been reached. Consequently, NMFS is prohibiting directed fishing
for the rex sole in the Western Regulatory Area.
Maximum retainable bycatch amounts for applicable gear types may be
found in the regulations at Sec. 672.20(g).
Classification
This action is taken under Sec. 672.20 and is exempt from review
under E.O. 12866.
Authority: 16 U.S.C. 1801 et seq.
Dated: March 5, 1996
Richard H. Schaefer
Director, Office of Fisheries Conservation and Management, National
Marine Fisheries Service.
[FR Doc. 96-5805 Filed 3-7-96; 11:37 am]
BILLING CODE 3510-22-F
Complete official Federal Register PDF
FR Doc. 96-5800 Organization and Functions
[Federal Register Volume 61, Number 49 (Tuesday, March 12, 1996)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Page 9901]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 96-5800]
========================================================================
Rules and Regulations
Federal Register
________________________________________________________________________
This section of the FEDERAL REGISTER contains regulatory documents
having general applicability and legal effect, most of which are keyed
to and codified in the Code of Federal Regulations, which is published
under 50 titles pursuant to 44 U.S.C. 1510.
The Code of Federal Regulations is sold by the Superintendent of Documents.
Prices of new books are listed in the first FEDERAL REGISTER issue of each
week.
========================================================================
Federal Register / Vol. 61, No. 49 / Tuesday, March 12, 1996 / Rules
and Regulations
[[Page 9901]]
DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE
Office of Energy
7 CFR Part 2902
Organization and Functions
AGENCY: Office of Energy, USDA.
ACTION: Final rule.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: This document removes the regulations of the Office of Energy
(OE) regarding organization and functions to reflect an internal
reorganization of the Department of Agriculture (USDA).
EFFECTIVE DATE: March 12, 1996.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT:
Susan E. Offutt, Administrator, ERS, U.S. Department of Agriculture,
Room 1226, 1301 New York Avenue NW., Washington, DC 20005-4788, (202)
219-0300.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: The Freedom of Information Act, 5 U.S.C.
552(a)(1), requires Federal agencies to publish in the Federal Register
descriptions of its central and field organizations. Part 2902 of Title
7, Code of Federal Regulations, was issued in accordance with the
regulations of the Secretary of Agriculture at 7 CFR 2.88, organization
and functions. Pursuant to an internal reorganization of USDA, OE has
been integrated into the Economic Research Service (ERS), USDA. This
document removes 7 CFR Part 2902. Requests for information relating to
OE may be obtained through the ERS Administrator pursuant to 7 CFR Part
3700.
This rule relates to internal agency management. Therefore,
pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 553, notice of proposed rulemaking and opportunity
for comment are not required, and this rule may be made effective less
than 30 days after publication in the Federal Register. Further, since
this rule relates to internal agency management, it is exempt from the
provisions of Executive Orders 12988 and 12866. Also, this rule will
not cause a significant economic impact or other substantial effect on
small entities. Therefore, the requirements of the Regulatory
Flexibility Act, 5 U.S.C. 601 et seq., do not apply.
List of Subjects in 7 CFR Part 2902
Organization and Functions.
PART 2902--[REMOVED]
Accordingly, under the authority of 5 U.S.C. 301 and 522; 7 CFR
2.88, 7 CFR Part 2902 is removed.
Done at Washington, DC, this 4th day of March 1996.
Susan E. Offutt,
Administrator, Economic Research Service.
[FR Doc. 96-5800 Filed 3-7-96; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 3410-18-M
Complete official Federal Register PDF
FR Doc. 96-5773 Federal Travel Regulation; Maximum Per Diem Rates
[Federal Register Volume 61, Number 49 (Tuesday, March 12, 1996)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 10252-10268]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 96-5773]
[[Page 10251]]
_______________________________________________________________________
Part IV
General Services Administration
_______________________________________________________________________
41 CFR Chapter 301
Federal Travel Regulation; Maximum Per Diem Rates; Final Rules
Federal Register / Vol. 61, No. 49 / Tuesday, March 12, 1996 / Rules
and Regulations
=======================================================================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 10252]]
GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION
41 CFR Chapter 301
[FTR Amendment 47]
RIN 3090-AF79
Federal Travel Regulation; Maximum Per Diem Rates
AGENCY: Office of Policy, Planning and Evaluation, GSA.
ACTION: Final rule.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: An analysis of lodging and meal cost survey data reveals that
the listing of maximum per diem rates for locations within the
continental United States (CONUS) should be updated to provide for the
reimbursement of Federal employees' expenses covered by per diem. This
final rule increases/decreases the maximum lodging and meals and
incidental expenses amounts in certain existing per diem localities,
adds new per diem localities, and defines a time frame for submission
to the General Services Administration (GSA) of rate adjustment
requests for travel within CONUS.
DATES: Effective date: This final rule is effective April 1, 1996.
Applicability date: The per diem rates in this final rule apply for
travel performed on or after April 1, 1996.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Travel and Transportation Management
Policy Division (MTT), Washington, DC 20405, Jane Groat, (703) 305-
5745..
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: GSA has determined that this rule is not a
significant regulatory action for the purposes of Executive Order 12866
of September 30, 1993. This final rule is not required to be published
in the Federal Register for notice and comment. Therefore, the
Regulatory Flexibility Act does not apply.
List of Subjects in 41 CFR Part 301-7
Government employees, Travel and transportation expenses.
For the reasons set out in the preamble, under 5 U.S.C. 5701-5709,
41 CFR chapter 301 is amended as follows:
PART 301-7--PER DIEM ALLOWANCES
1. The authority citation for part 301-7 continues to read as
follows:
Authority: 5 U.S.C. 5701-5709; E.O. 11609, 36 FR 13747, 3 CFR,
1971-1975 Comp., p. 586.
Sec. 301-7.4 [Amended]
2. Section 301-7.4 is amended by adding the following sentence at
the end of paragraph (a):
Sec. 301-7.4 Rate adjustment requests for travel within CONUS.
(a) *** Agencies should submit their requests to GSA no later than
May 1 of each year in order for the city or area to be included in the
annual survey.
* * * * *
APPENDIX A--PRESCRIBED MAXIMUM PER DIEM RATES FOR CONUS
3. Appendix A to chapter 301 is revised to read as follows:
Appendix A To Chapter 301--Prescribed Maximum Per Diem Rates for CONUS
The maximum rates listed below are prescribed under Sec. 301-7.3(a)
of this chapter for reimbursement of per diem expenses incurred during
official travel within CONUS (the continental United States). The
amount shown in column (a) is the maximum that will be reimbursed for
lodging expenses including applicable taxes. The M&IE rate shown in
column (b) is a fixed amount allowed for meals and incidental expenses
covered by per diem. The per diem payment calculated in accordance with
part 301-7 of this chapter for lodging expenses plus the M&IE rate may
not exceed the maximum per diem rate shown in column (c). Seasonal
rates apply during the periods indicated.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Per diem locality
------------------------------------------------------------ Maximum Maximum
County and/or other lodging + M&IE = per diem
Key city \1\ defined location \2\ , amount rate (b) rate \4\
\3\ (a) (c)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CONUS, Standard rate............... ...................... $40 ........ $26 ........ $66
(Applies to all locations within CONUS not specifically
listed below or encompassed by the boundary definition
of a listed point. However, the standard CONUS rate
applies to all locations within CONUS, including those
defined below, for certain relocation subsistence
allowances. See parts 302-2, 302-4, and 302-5 of this
subtitle.)
ALABAMA
Anniston....................... Calhoun............... 42 ........ 26 ........ 68
Birmingham..................... Jefferson............. 55 ........ 30 ........ 85
Dothan......................... Houston............... 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
Florence....................... Lauderdale............ 41 ........ 26 ........ 67
Gulf Shores.................... Baldwin...............
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 112 ........ 30 ........ 142
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 67 ........ 30 ........ 97
Huntsville..................... Madison............... 61 ........ 30 ........ 91
Mobile......................... Mobile................ 55 ........ 34 ........ 89
Montgomery..................... Montgomery............ 57 ........ 26 ........ 83
Sheffield...................... Colbert............... 55 ........ 30 ........ 85
Tuscaloosa..................... Tuscaloosa............ 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
ARIZONA
Casa Grande.................... Pinal................. 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
Chinle......................... Apache................
(April 1-October 31)......... ...................... 83 ........ 26 ........ 109
(November 1-March 31)........ ...................... 67 ........ 26 ........ 93
Flagstaff...................... All points in Coconino
County not covered
under Grand Canyon
per diem area.
(April 1-October 31)......... ...................... 79 ........ 30 ........ 109
(November 1-March 31)........ ...................... 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
Grand Canyon................... All points in the 105 ........ 34 ........ 139
Grand Canyon National
Park and Kaibab
National Forest
within Coconino
County.
[[Page 10253]]
Kayenta........................ Navajo................
(April 1-October 14)......... ...................... 78 ........ 26 ........ 104
(October 15-March 31)........ ...................... 58 ........ 26 ........ 84
Phoenix/Scottsdale............. Maricopa..............
(October 1-May 14)........... ...................... 96 ........ 34 ........ 130
(May 15-September 30)........ ...................... 62 ........ 34 ........ 96
Prescott....................... Yavapai...............
(April 1-September 30)....... ...................... 54 ........ 30 ........ 84
(October 1-March 31)......... ...................... 48 ........ 30 ........ 78
Sierra Vista................... Cochise............... 48 ........ 30 ........ 78
Tucson......................... Pima County; Davis-
Monthan AFB.
(November 1-May 31).......... ...................... 66 ........ 30 ........ 96
(June 1-October 31).......... ...................... 60 ........ 30 ........ 90
Yuma........................... Yuma.................. 60 ........ 26 ........ 86
ARKANSAS
Fayetteville................... Washington............ 50 ........ 26 ........ 76
Fort Smith..................... Sebastian............. 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
Helena......................... Phillips.............. 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
Hot Springs.................... Garland............... 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
Little Rock.................... Pulaski............... 61 ........ 30 ........ 91
Texarkana...................... Miller (See also 43 ........ 30 ........ 73
Texarkana, TX).
CALIFORNIA
Bridgeport..................... Mono..................
(April 1-October 31)......... ...................... 64 ........ 34 ........ 98
(November 1-March 31)........ ...................... 55 ........ 34 ........ 89
Chico.......................... Butte................. 55 ........ 30 ........ 85
Clearlake...................... Lake.................. 58 ........ 26 ........ 84
Death Valley................... Inyo.................. 87 ........ 34 ........ 121
El Centro...................... Imperial.............. 47 ........ 30 ........ 77
Eureka......................... Humboldt..............
(May 15-October 14).......... ...................... 66 ........ 30 ........ 96
(October 15-May 14).......... ...................... 56 ........ 30 ........ 86
Fresno......................... Fresno................ 68 ........ 34 ........ 102
Gualala/Point Arena............ Mendocino............. 109 ........ 38 ........ 147
Los Angeles.................... Los Angeles, Kern, 97 ........ 38 ........ 135
Orange and Ventura
Counties; Edwards
AFB; Naval Weapons
Center and Ordnance
Test Station, China
Lake.
Madera......................... Madera................ 41 ........ 26 ........ 67
Merced......................... Merced................ 51 ........ 30 ........ 81
Modesto........................ Stanislaus............ 58 ........ 34 ........ 92
Monterey....................... Monterey..............
(June 1-October 31).......... ...................... 83 ........ 34 ........ 117
(November 1-May 31).......... ...................... 71 ........ 34 ........ 105
Napa........................... Napa..................
(April 1-October 31)........... ...................... 83 ........ 34 ........ 117
(November 1-March 31).......... ...................... 74 ........ 34 ........ 108
Oakland........................ Alameda, Contra Costa 75 ........ 34 ........ 109
and Marin.
Ontario/Victorville/Barstow.... San Bernardino........ 60 ........ 38 ........ 98
Palm Springs................... Riverside............. 72 ........ 38 ........ 110
Palo Alto/San Jose............. Santa Clara........... 90 ........ 38 ........ 128
Redding........................ Shasta................ 55 ........ 34 ........ 89
Sacramento..................... Sacramento............ 71 ........ 34 ........ 105
San Diego...................... San Diego............. 81 ........ 34 ........ 115
San Francisco.................. San Francisco......... 114 ........ 38 ........ 152
San Luis Obispo................ San Luis Obispo....... 71 ........ 34 ........ 105
San Mateo/Redwood City......... San Mateo............. 82 ........ 34 ........ 116
Santa Barbara.................. Santa Barbara.........
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 96 ........ 30 ........ 126
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 88 ........ 30 ........ 118
Santa Cruz..................... Santa Cruz............
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 82 ........ 34 ........ 116
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 69 ........ 34 ........ 103
Santa Rosa..................... Sonoma................ 59 ........ 34 ........ 93
South Lake Tahoe............... El Dorado (See also 111 ........ 38 ........ 149
Stateline, NV).
Stockton....................... San Joaquin........... 55 ........ 30 ........ 85
Susanville/Herlong............. Lassen................ 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
Tahoe City..................... Placer................ 63 ........ 38 ........ 101
Vallejo........................ Solano................ 46 ........ 30 ........ 76
Visalia........................ Tulare................ 65 ........ 34 ........ 99
West Sacramento................ Yolo.................. 55 ........ 30 ........ 85
[[Page 10254]]
Yosemite Nat'l Park............ Mariposa.............. 93 ........ 38 ........ 131
Yuba City...................... Sutter................ 44 ........ 30 ........ 74
COLORADO
Aspen.......................... Pitkin................
(January 15-March 31)........ ...................... 160 ........ 38 ........ 198
(April 1-January 14)......... ...................... 67 ........ 38 ........ 105
Boulder........................ Boulder...............
(May 1-October 31)........... ...................... 93 ........ 34 ........ 127
(November 1-April 30)........ ...................... 70 ........ 34 ........ 104
Colorado Springs............... El Paso...............
(April 1-October 31)......... ...................... 67 ........ 26 ........ 93
(November 1-March 31)........ ...................... 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
Cortez......................... Montezuma.............
May 1-September 30).......... ...................... 59 ........ 26 ........ 85
October 1-April 30).......... ...................... 42 ........ 26 ........ 68
Denver......................... Denver, Adams, 92 ........ 34 ........ 126
Arapahoe and
Jefferson.
Durango........................ La Plata..............
(June 1-October 14).......... ...................... 84 ........ 34 ........ 118
(October 15-May 31).......... ...................... 55 ........ 34 ........ 89
Fort Collins/Loveland.......... Larimer...............
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 55 ........ 26 ........ 81
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 50 ........ 26 ........ 76
Glenwood Springs............... Garfield.............. 50 ........ 30 ........ 80
Grand Junction................. Mesa.................. 52 ........ 30 ........ 82
Gunnison....................... Gunnison..............
(June 1-October 14).......... ...................... 61 ........ 26 ........ 87
(October 15-May 31).......... ...................... 43 ........ 26 ........ 69
Keystone/Silverthorne.......... Summit................
(February 1-August 31)....... ...................... 152 ........ 38 ........ 190
(September 1-January 31)..... ...................... 113 ........ 38 ........ 151
Montrose....................... Montrose..............
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 55 ........ 26 ........ 81
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 41 ........ 26 ........ 67
Pagosa Springs................. Archuleta.............
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
Pueblo......................... Pueblo................
(June 1-August 31)........... ...................... 49 ........ 26 ........ 75
(September 1-May 31)......... ...................... 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
Steamboat Springs.............. Routt.................
(December 15-March 31)....... ...................... 99 ........ 34 ........ 133
(April 1-December 14)........ ...................... 68 ........ 34 ........ 102
Telluride...................... San Miguel............
(November 1-March 31)........ ...................... 154 ........ 34 ........ 188
(April 1-October 31)......... ...................... 87 ........ 34 ........ 121
Trinidad....................... Las Animas............
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 43 ........ 26 ........ 69
Vail........................... Eagle.................
(November 1-March 31)........ ...................... 166 ........ 38 ........ 204
(April 1-October 31)......... ...................... 91 ........ 38 ........ 129
CONNECTICUT
Bridgeport/Danbury............. Fairfield............. 92 ........ 34 ........ 126
Hartford....................... Hartford and Middlesex 80 ........ 34 ........ 114
New Haven...................... New Haven............. 78 ........ 30 ........ 108
New London/Groton.............. New London............
(June 1-October 31).......... ...................... 78 ........ 34 ........ 112
(November 1-May 31).......... ...................... 63 ........ 34 ........ 97
Putnam/Danielson............... Windham............... 63 ........ 30 ........ 93
Salisbury...................... Litchfield............ 86 ........ 34 ........ 120
Vernon......................... Tolland............... 55 ........ 26 ........ 81
DELAWARE
Dover.......................... Kent.................. 50 ........ 30 ........ 80
Lewes.......................... Sussex................
(June 1-September 14)........ ...................... 72 ........ 30 ........ 102
(September 15-May 31)........ ...................... 52 ........ 30 ........ 82
Wilmington..................... New Castle............ 77 ........ 34 ........ 111
[[Page 10255]]
DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA
Washington, DC (also the cities of Alexandria, Falls 124 ........ 38 ........ 162
Church, and Fairfax, and the counties of Arlington,
Loudoun, and Fairfax in Virginia; and the counties of
Montgomery and Prince Georges in Maryland) (See also
Maryland and Virginia)
FLORIDA
Altamonte Springs.............. Seminole.............. 65 ........ 30 ........ 95
Bradenton...................... Manatee...............
(January 1-May 14)........... ...................... 67 ........ 30 ........ 97
(May 15-December 31)......... ...................... 48 ........ 30 ........ 78
Clewiston...................... Hendry................ 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Cocoa Beach.................... Brevard............... 78 ........ 30 ........ 108
Daytona Beach.................. Volusia...............
(February 1-August 31)....... ...................... 80 ........ 30 ........ 110
(September 1-January 31)..... ...................... 54 ........ 30 ........ 84
Fort Lauderdale................ Broward...............
(December 15-April 30)....... ...................... 89 ........ 30 ........ 119
(May 1-December 14).......... ...................... 65 ........ 30 ........ 95
Fort Myers..................... Lee...................
(January 1-April 30)......... ...................... 90 ........ 30 ........ 120
(May 1-December 31).......... ...................... 66 ........ 30 ........ 96
Fort Pierce.................... Saint Lucie...........
(December 1-April 30)........ ...................... 60 ........ 26 ........ 86
(May 1-November 30).......... ...................... 52 ........ 26 ........ 78
Fort Walton Beach.............. Okaloosa..............
(April 1-September 14)....... ...................... 76 ........ 30 ........ 106
(September 15-March 31)...... ...................... 61 ........ 30 ........ 91
Gainesville.................... Alachua............... 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
Jacksonville................... Duval County; Naval 58 ........ 30 ........ 88
Station Mayport.
Key West....................... Monroe................
(December 15-April 30)....... ...................... 164 ........ 38 ........ 202
(May 1-December 14).......... ...................... 114 ........ 38 ........ 152
Kissimmee...................... Osceola...............
(February 1-August 31)....... ...................... 71 ........ 30 ........ 101
(September 1-January 31)..... ...................... 60 ........ 30 ........ 90
Lakeland....................... Polk..................
(January 1-April 30)......... ...................... 61 ........ 30 ........ 91
(May 1-December 31).......... ...................... 51 ........ 30 ........ 81
Miami.......................... Dade.................. 77 ........ 38 ........ 115
Naples......................... Collier...............
(December 15-April 30)....... ...................... 103 ........ 34 ........ 137
(May 1-December 14).......... ...................... 58 ........ 34 ........ 92
Ocala.......................... Marion................ 44 ........ 30 ........ 74
Orlando........................ Orange................ 65 ........ 34 ........ 99
Panama City.................... Bay...................
(March 1-September 14)....... ...................... 49 ........ 26 ........ 75
(September 15-February 29)... ...................... 43 ........ 26 ........ 69
Pensacola...................... Escambia.............. 60 ........ 30 ........ 90
Punta Gorda.................... Charlotte.............
(December 15-April 14)....... ...................... 80 ........ 30 ........ 110
(April 15-December 14)....... ...................... 51 ........ 30 ........ 81
Saint Augustine................ Saint Johns...........
(February 1-August 31)....... ...................... 55 ........ 30 ........ 85
(September 1-January 31)..... ...................... 48 ........ 30 ........ 78
Sarasota....................... Sarasota..............
(December 15-April 30)....... ...................... 89 ........ 30 ........ 119
(May 1-December 14).......... ...................... 55 ........ 30 ........ 85
Stuart......................... Martin................ 66 ........ 30 ........ 96
Tallahassee.................... Leon.................. 63 ........ 30 ........ 93
Tampa/St. Petersburg........... Hillsborough and 72 ........ 26 ........ 98
Pinellas.
Vero Beach..................... Indian River..........
(January 15-April 30)........ ...................... 71 ........ 26 ........ 97
(May 1-January 14)........... ...................... 58 ........ 26 ........ 84
West Palm Beach................ Palm Beach............
(January 1-April 30)......... ...................... 81 ........ 30 ........ 111
(May 1-December 31).......... ...................... 61 ........ 30 ........ 91
GEORGIA
Albany......................... Dougherty............. 57 ........ 26 ........ 83
Athens......................... Clarke................ 45 ........ 30 ........ 75
[[Page 10256]]
Atlanta........................ Clayton, De Kalb, 85 ........ 34 ........ 119
Fulton, Cobb and
Gwinnett.
Augusta........................ Richmond.............. 52 ........ 30 ........ 82
Brunswick...................... Glynn................. 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
Columbus....................... Muscogee.............. 52 ........ 30 ........ 82
Conyers........................ Rockdale.............. 49 ........ 30 ........ 79
Macon.......................... Bibb.................. 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
Savannah....................... Chatham............... 61 ........ 26 ........ 87
Warner Robins.................. Houston............... 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
IDAHO
Boise.......................... Ada................... 61 ........ 30 ........ 91
Coeur d'Alene.................. Kootenai.............. 65 ........ 26 ........ 91
Idaho Falls.................... Bonneville............ 55 ........ 30 ........ 85
Ketchum/Sun Valley............. Blaine................
(November 1-March 31)........ ...................... 77 ........ 38 ........ 115
(April 1-October 31)......... ...................... 66 ........ 38 ........ 104
Lewiston....................... Nez Perce............. 55 ........ 26 ........ 81
McCall......................... Valley................ 66 ........ 30 ........ 96
Mountain Home.................. Elmore................
(May 1-October 31)........... ...................... 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
(November 1-April 30)........ ...................... 40 ........ 26 ........ 66
Pocatello...................... Bannock............... 45 ........ 30 ........ 75
Sandpoint...................... Bonner................
(July 1-August 31)........... ...................... 71 ........ 30 ........ 101
(September 1-June 30)........ ...................... 48 ........ 30 ........ 78
Stanley........................ Custer................
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 56 ........ 30 ........ 86
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 51 ........ 30 ........ 81
Twin Falls..................... Twin Falls............ 48 ........ 26 ........ 74
ILLINOIS
Alton.......................... Madison............... 46 ........ 30 ........ 76
Bloomington.................... McLean................ 52 ........ 26 ........ 78
Champaign/Urbana............... Champaign............. 56 ........ 30 ........ 86
Chicago........................ Du Page, Cook and Lake 119 ........ 38 ........ 157
Danville....................... Vermilion............. 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
Decatur........................ Macon................. 51 ........ 30 ........ 81
Dixon.......................... Lee................... 43 ........ 26 ........ 69
East St. Louis................. St. Clair............. 47 ........ 30 ........ 77
Joliet......................... Will.................. 54 ........ 30 ........ 84
Kankakee....................... Kankakee.............. 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
Macomb......................... McDonough............. 43 ........ 26 ........ 69
Mattoon........................ Coles................. 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
Morris......................... Grundy................ 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Pekin.......................... Tazewell.............. 41 ........ 26 ........ 67
Peoria......................... Peoria................ 61 ........ 34 ........ 95
Rock Island.................... Rock Island........... 86 ........ 26 ........ 112
Rockford....................... Winnebago............. 63 ........ 38 ........ 101
Springfield.................... Sangamon.............. 52 ........ 30 ........ 82
INDIANA
Anderson....................... Madison............... 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
Bedford........................ Lawrence.............. 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Bloomington/Crane.............. Monroe and Martin..... 56 ........ 30 ........ 86
Burlington Beach/Valparaiso.... Porter................ 68 ........ 26 ........ 94
Carmel......................... Hamilton.............. 67 ........ 38 ........ 105
Columbus....................... Bartholomew........... 47 ........ 30 ........ 77
Elkhart........................ Elkhart............... 52 ........ 26 ........ 78
Evansville..................... Vanderburgh........... 60 ........ 30 ........ 90
Fort Wayne..................... Allen................. 63 ........ 26 ........ 89
French Lick.................... Orange................ 58 ........ 26 ........ 84
Gary/Merrillville.............. Lake.................. 52 ........ 30 ........ 82
Greenwood...................... Johnson............... 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
Indianapolis................... Marion County; Fort 66 ........ 30 ........ 96
Benjamin Harrison.
Jasper/Dale.................... Dubois and Spencer.... 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
Jeffersonville/Charlestown..... Clark County; Indiana 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Army Ammunition Plant.
Lafayette...................... Tippecanoe............ 53 ........ 30 ........ 83
Logansport..................... Cass.................. 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
Madison........................ Jefferson............. 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Michigan City.................. La Porte.............. 49 ........ 26 ........ 75
Muncie......................... Delaware.............. 50 ........ 26 ........ 76
Nashville...................... Brown.................
(June 1-October 31).......... ...................... 99 ........ 30 ........ 129
[[Page 10257]]
(November 1-May 31).......... ...................... 77 ........ 30 ........ 107
New Albany..................... Floyd................. 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Richmond....................... Wayne................. 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Seymour........................ Jackson............... 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
South Bend..................... St. Joseph............ 61 ........ 26 ........ 87
Terre Haute.................... Vigo.................. 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
IOWA
Bettendorf/Davenport........... Scott................. 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
Cedar Rapids................... Linn.................. 55 ........ 30 ........ 85
Des Moines..................... Polk.................. 61 ........ 26 ........ 87
Dubuque........................ Dubuque............... 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Iowa City...................... Johnson............... 49 ........ 26 ........ 75
Sioux City..................... Woodbury.............. 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
Waterloo....................... Black Hawk............ 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
KANSAS
Hays........................... Ellis................. 43 ........ 26 ........ 69
Kansas City.................... Johnson and Wyandotte 63 ........ 34 ........ 97
(See also Kansas
City, MO).
Manhattan...................... Riley................. 56 ........ 26 ........ 82
Topeka......................... Shawnee............... 49 ........ 30 ........ 79
Wichita........................ Sedgwick.............. 63 ........ 34 ........ 97
KENTUCKY
Ashland........................ Boyd.................. 50 ........ 26 ........ 76
Bowling Green.................. Warren................ 48 ........ 30 ........ 78
Covington...................... Kenton................ 60 ........ 34 ........ 94
Florence....................... Boone................. 60 ........ 30 ........ 90
Frankfort...................... Franklin.............. 43 ........ 26 ........ 69
Hopkinsville................... Christian............. 41 ........ 26 ........ 67
Lexington...................... Fayette............... 57 ........ 30 ........ 87
London......................... Laurel................
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 56 ........ 30 ........ 86
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 44 ........ 30 ........ 74
Louisville..................... Jefferson............. 67 ........ 34 ........ 101
Owensboro...................... Daviess............... 50 ........ 26 ........ 76
Paducah........................ McCracken............. 52 ........ 30 ........ 82
Pikeville...................... Pike.................. 43 ........ 26 ........ 69
Prestonsburg................... Floyd................. 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
Somerset....................... Pulaski............... 41 ........ 26 ........ 67
LOUISIANA
Alexandria..................... Rapides Parish........ 48 ........ 30 ........ 78
Baton Rouge.................... East Baton Rouge 63 ........ 30 ........ 93
Parish.
Bossier City................... Bossier Parish........ 60 ........ 26 ........ 86
Gonzales....................... Ascension Parish...... 57 ........ 30 ........ 87
Lafayette...................... Lafayette Parish...... 51 ........ 30 ........ 81
Lake Charles................... Calcasieu Parish...... 58 ........ 26 ........ 84
Monroe......................... Ouachita Parish....... 50 ........ 26 ........ 76
New Orleans.................... Parishes of Jefferson, 70 ........ 34 ........ 104
Orleans, Plaquemines
and St. Bernard.
Shreveport..................... Caddo Parish.......... 55 ........ 30 ........ 85
Slidell........................ St. Tammany Parish.... 48 ........ 26 ........ 74
MAINE
Auburn......................... Androscoggin.......... 44 ........ 30 ........ 74
Augusta........................ Kennebec.............. 51 ........ 30 ........ 81
Bangor......................... Penobscot.............
(July 1-October 31).......... ...................... 57 ........ 30 ........ 87
(November 1-June 30)......... ...................... 46 ........ 30 ........ 76
Bar Harbor..................... Hancock...............
(July 1-September 14)........ ...................... 106 ........ 30 ........ 136
(September 15-June 30)....... ...................... 72 ........ 30 ........ 102
Bath........................... Sagadahoc............. 58 ........ 26 ........ 84
Calais......................... Washington............ 58 ........ 26 ........ 84
Kennebunk/Sanford.............. York..................
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 88 ........ 30 ........ 118
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 52 ........ 30 ........ 82
Kittery........................ Portsmouth Naval
Shipyard (See also
Portsmouth, NH).
(June 1-October 31).......... ...................... 73 ........ 34 ........ 107
(November 1-May 31).......... ...................... 53 ........ 34 ........ 87
Portland....................... Cumberland............
[[Page 10258]]
(July 1-October 31).......... ...................... 78 ........ 34 ........ 112
(November 1-June 30)......... ...................... 65 ........ 34 ........ 99
Presque Isle................... Aroostook............. 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
Rockport....................... Knox..................
(June 15-October 31)......... ...................... 95 ........ 30 ........ 125
(November 1-June 14)......... ...................... 63 ........ 30 ........ 93
Wiscasset...................... Lincoln...............
(July 1-September 14)........ ...................... 94 ........ 26 ........ 120
(September 15-June 30)....... ...................... 58 ........ 26 ........ 84
MARYLAND
(For the counties of Montgomery and Prince Georges, see
District of Columbia)
Annapolis...................... Anne Arundel.......... 86 ........ 38 ........ 124
Baltimore...................... Baltimore and Harford. 93 ........ 38 ........ 131
Columbia....................... Howard................ 80 ........ 38 ........ 118
Cumberland..................... Allegany.............. 49 ........ 26 ........ 75
Easton......................... Talbot................
(April 1-November 30)........ ...................... 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
(December 1-March 31)........ ...................... 54 ........ 30 ........ 84
Frederick...................... Frederick............. 55 ........ 30 ........ 85
Grasonville.................... Queen Annes........... 44 ........ 30 ........ 74
Hagerstown..................... Washington............ 55 ........ 30 ........ 85
Lexington Park/St. Inigoes/ Saint Marys........... 57 ........ 30 ........ 87
Leonardtown.
Lusby.......................... Calvert............... 57 ........ 30 ........ 87
Ocean City..................... Worcester.............
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 137 ........ 38 ........ 175
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 62 ........ 38 ........ 100
Salisbury...................... Wicomico..............
(June 1-September 14)........ ...................... 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
(September 15-May 31)........ ...................... 49 ........ 30 ........ 79
Waldorf........................ Charles............... 44 ........ 30 ........ 74
MASSACHUSETTS
Andover........................ Essex................. 77 ........ 34 ........ 111
Boston......................... Suffolk............... 116 ........ 38 ........ 154
Cambridge/Lowell............... Middlesex............. 110 ........ 34 ........ 144
Hyannis........................ Barnstable............
(July 1-September 30)........ ...................... 121 ........ 34 ........ 155
(October 1-June 30).......... ...................... 74 ........ 34 ........ 108
Martha's Vineyard/Nantucket.... Dukes and Nantucket...
(June 1-October 31).......... ...................... 164 ........ 38 ........ 202
(November 1-May 31).......... ...................... 118 ........ 38 ........ 156
Northampton.................... Hampshire............. 59 ........ 26 ........ 85
Pittsfield..................... Berkshire............. 55 ........ 34 ........ 89
Plymouth....................... Plymouth..............
(June 15-October 31)......... ...................... 92 ........ 26 ........ 118
(November 1-June 14)......... ...................... 63 ........ 26 ........ 89
Quincy......................... Norfolk............... 77 ........ 30 ........ 107
South Deerfield/Greenfield..... Franklin..............
(May 1-October 31)........... ...................... 76 ........ 26 ........ 102
(November 1-April 30)........ ...................... 55 ........ 26 ........ 81
Springfield.................... Hampden............... 67 ........ 30 ........ 97
Taunton/New Bedford............ Bristol............... 58 ........ 26 ........ 84
Worcester...................... Worcester............. 61 ........ 26 ........ 87
MICHIGAN
Adrian......................... Lenawee............... 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
Alpena......................... Alpena................ 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Ann Arbor...................... Washtenaw............. 67 ........ 30 ........ 97
Battle Creek................... Calhoun............... 48 ........ 26 ........ 74
Bay City....................... Bay................... 49 ........ 30 ........ 79
Bellaire....................... Antrim................ 48 ........ 26 ........ 74
Cadillac....................... Wexford............... 50 ........ 26 ........ 76
Charlevoix..................... Charlevoix............
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 90 ........ 30 ........ 120
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 40 ........ 30 ........ 70
Detroit........................ Wayne................. 94 ........ 38 ........ 132
Drummond Island................ Chippewa..............
(May 1-October 31)........... ...................... 77 ........ 26 ........ 103
(November 1-April 30)........ ...................... 58 ........ 26 ........ 84
Escanaba....................... Delta.................
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 40 ........ 26 ........ 66
[[Page 10259]]
Flint.......................... Genesee............... 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
Frankfort...................... Benzie................
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 63 ........ 26 ........ 89
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 42 ........ 26 ........ 68
Gaylord........................ Otsego................
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 57 ........ 30 ........ 87
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 51 ........ 30 ........ 81
Grand Rapids................... Kent.................. 60 ........ 34 ........ 94
Grayling....................... Crawford.............. 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
Hancock........................ Houghton.............. 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
Holland........................ Ottawa................
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 59 ........ 26 ........ 85
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 50 ........ 26 ........ 76
Houghton Lake.................. Roscommon.............
(June 1-September 14)........ ...................... 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
(September 15-May 31)........ ...................... 41 ........ 26 ........ 67
Jackson........................ Jackson............... 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
Kalamazoo...................... Kalamazoo............. 64 ........ 30 ........ 94
Lansing/East Lansing........... Ingham................ 57 ........ 30 ........ 87
Leland......................... Leelanau..............
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 102 ........ 30 ........ 132
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 79 ........ 30 ........ 109
Ludington...................... Mason.................
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 41 ........ 26 ........ 67
Mackinac Island................ Mackinac..............
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 121 ........ 38 ........ 159
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 76 ........ 38 ........ 114
Manistee....................... Manistee.............. 43 ........ 26 ........ 69
Marquette...................... Marquette............. 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
Midland........................ Midland............... 64 ........ 26 ........ 90
Monroe......................... Monroe................ 42 ........ 30 ........ 72
Mount Pleasant................. Isabella.............. 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
Muskegon....................... Muskegon.............. 52 ........ 26 ........ 78
Ontonagon...................... Ontonagon............. 49 ........ 26 ........ 75
Pontiac/Troy................... Oakland............... 74 ........ 34 ........ 108
Port Huron..................... St. Clair............. 52 ........ 30 ........ 82
Saginaw........................ Saginaw............... 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
South Haven.................... Van Buren.............
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 80 ........ 26 ........ 106
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 48 ........ 26 ........ 74
St. Joseph/Benton Harbor/Niles. Berrien...............
(June 1-September 14)........ ...................... 61 ........ 30 ........ 91
(September 15-May 31)........ ...................... 51 ........ 30 ........ 81
Tawas City..................... Iosco.................
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 50 ........ 26 ........ 76
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 40 ........ 26 ........ 66
Traverse City.................. Grand Traverse........
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 98 ........ 30 ........ 128
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 58 ........ 30 ........ 88
Warren......................... Macomb................ 56 ........ 26 ........ 82
MINNESOTA
Albert Lea..................... Freeborn.............. 43 ........ 26 ........ 69
Austin......................... Mower................. 42 ........ 26 ........ 68
Bemidji........................ Beltrami.............. 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Brainerd....................... Crow Wing.............
(May 1-September 14)......... ...................... 46 ........ 30 ........ 76
(September 15-April 30)...... ...................... 40 ........ 30 ........ 70
Duluth......................... St. Louis.............
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 61 ........ 34 ........ 95
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 51 ........ 34 ........ 85
Fergus Falls................... Otter Tail............ 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
Grand Rapids................... Itasca................
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 50 ........ 30 ........ 80
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 45 ........ 30 ........ 75
Hinckley....................... Pine.................. 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Minneapolis/St. Paul........... Anoka, Hennepin, 79 ........ 38 ........ 117
Dakota and Ramsey
Counties; Fort
Snelling Military
Reservation and Navy
Astronautics Group
(Detachment BRAVO),
Rosemount.
Rochester...................... Olmsted............... 61 ........ 30 ........ 91
St. Cloud...................... Stearns............... 45 ........ 30 ........ 75
[[Page 10260]]
Winona......................... Winona................ 48 ........ 26 ........ 74
MISSISSIPPI
Biloxi/Gulfport/Pascagoula/Bay Harrison, Jackson, and
St. Louis. Hancock.
(May 1-September 14)......... ...................... 73 ........ 30 ........ 103
(September 15-April 30)...... ...................... 63 ........ 30 ........ 93
Jackson........................ Hinds................. 61 ........ 34 ........ 95
Natchez........................ Adams................. 49 ........ 30 ........ 79
Oxford......................... Lafayette............. 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Ridgeland...................... Madison............... 51 ........ 34 ........ 85
Robinsonville.................. Tunica................ 61 ........ 26 ........ 87
Tulepo......................... Lee................... 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
Vicksburg...................... Warren................ 52 ........ 26 ........ 78
MISSOURI
Branson........................ Taney.................
(May 1-October 31)........... ...................... 85 ........ 30 ........ 115
(November 1-April 30)........ ...................... 58 ........ 30 ........ 88
Cape Girardeau................. Cape Girardeau........ 46 ........ 30 ........ 76
Columbia....................... Boone................. 48 ........ 30 ........ 78
Hannibal....................... Marion................
(June 1-September 14)........ ...................... 57 ........ 26 ........ 83
(September 15-May 31)........ ...................... 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
Jefferson City................. Cole.................. 56 ........ 30 ........ 86
Joplin......................... Jasper................ 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
Kansas City.................... Clay, Jackson and 63 ........ 34 ........ 97
Platte (See also
Kansas City, KS).
Lake Ozark..................... Miller................
(May 1-September 30)......... ......................
FR Doc. 96-5773 Federal Travel Regulation; Maximum Per Diem Rates
53 ........ 30 ........ 83
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 48 ........ 39 ........ 78
Osage Beach.................... Camden................
(May 15-October 31).......... ...................... 62 ........ 30 ........ 92
(November 1-May 14).......... ...................... 51 ........ 30 ........ 81
Springfield.................... Greene................ 56 ........ 30 ........ 86
St. Louis...................... St. Charles and St. 74 ........ 38 ........ 112
Louis.
MONTANA
Billings....................... Yellowstone........... 48 ........ 26 ........ 74
Great Falls.................... Cascade............... 54 ........ 26 ........ 80
Helena......................... Lewis and Clark....... 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
Kalispell/Polson............... Flathead and Lake.....
(April 15-September 30)...... ...................... 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
(October 1-April 14)......... ...................... 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
NEBRASKA
Kearney........................ Buffalo............... 44 ........ 30 ........ 74
Lincoln........................ Lancaster............. 48 ........ 30 ........ 78
North Platte................... Lincoln...............
(May 1-October 31)........... ...................... 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
(November 1-April 30)........ ...................... 42 ........ 26 ........ 68
Omaha.......................... Douglas............... 63 ........ 30 ........ 93
NEVADA
Elko........................... All points in Elko 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
County excluding
Wendover.
Incline Village*...............
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 143 ........ 34 ........ 177
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 101 ........ 34 ........ 135
Las Vegas...................... Clark County; Nellis 74 ........ 34 ........ 108
AFB.
Reno........................... All points in Washoe 57 ........ 34 ........ 91
County other than the
city of Incline
Village.
Stateline...................... Douglas (See also 111 ........ 38 ........ 149
South Lake Tahoe, CA).
Wendover*...................... (See also Wendover, 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
UT).
Winnemucca..................... Humboldt.............. 48 ........ 30 ........ 78
*Denotes independent cities
NEW HAMPSHIRE
Concord........................ Merrimack.............
(June 1-October 31).......... ...................... 68 ........ 26 ........ 94
(November 1-May 31).......... ...................... 59 ........ 26 ........ 85
Conway......................... Carroll...............
(June 1-October 31).......... ...................... 68 ........ 34 ........ 102
(November 1-May 31).......... ...................... 56 ........ 34 ........ 90
Durham......................... Strafford............. 63 ........ 26 ........ 89
Hanover........................ Grafton and Sullivan..
[[Page 10261]]
(June 1-October 31).......... ...................... 82 ........ 38 ........ 120
(November 1-May 31).......... ...................... 59 ........ 38 ........ 97
Laconia........................ Belknap...............
(June 1-October 31).......... ...................... 69 ........ 30 ........ 99
(November 1-May 31).......... ...................... 52 ........ 30 ........ 82
Manchester..................... Hillsborough.......... 65 ........ 26 ........ 91
Portsmouth/Newington........... Rockingham County;
Pease AFB (See also
Kittery, ME).
(June 1-October 31).......... ...................... 73 ........ 34 ........ 107
(November 1-May 31).......... ...................... 53 ........ 34 ........ 87
NEW JERSEY
Atlantic City.................. Atlantic..............
(April 1-November 30)........ ...................... 124 ........ 38 ........ 162
(December 1-March 31)........ ...................... 78 ........ 38 ........ 116
Belle Mead..................... Somerset.............. 69 ........ 34 ........ 103
Camden/Moorestown.............. Camden and Burlington. 71 ........ 34 ........ 105
Edison......................... Middlesex............. 65 ........ 38 ........ 103
Flemington..................... Hunterdon............. 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
Freehold/Eatontown............. Monmouth County; Fort
Monmouth.
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 87 ........ 34 ........ 121
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 76 ........ 34 ........ 110
Millville...................... Cumberland............ 54 ........ 30 ........ 84
Newark......................... Bergen, Essex, Hudson, 102 ........ 38 ........ 140
Passaic and Union.
Ocean City/Cape May............ Cape May..............
(May 15-September 30)........ ...................... 141 ........ 34 ........ 175
(October 1-May 14)........... ...................... 89 ........ 34 ........ 123
Parsippany/Dover............... Morris County; 90 ........ 38 ........ 128
Picatinny Arsenal.
Princeton/Trenton.............. Mercer................ 89 ........ 34 ........ 123
Salem.......................... Salem................. 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
Tom's River.................... Ocean................. 68 ........ 30 ........ 98
NEW MEXICO
Albuquerque.................... Bernalillo............ 70 ........ 34 ........ 104
Cloudcroft..................... Otero................. 74 ........ 26 ........ 100
Farmington..................... San Juan.............. 55 ........ 30 ........ 85
Gallup......................... McKinley..............
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 52 ........ 26 ........ 78
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
Grants......................... Cibola................ 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
Las Cruces/White Sands......... Dona Ana.............. 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
Los Alamos..................... Los Alamos............ 75 ........ 30 ........ 105
Raton.......................... Colfax................
(June 1-August 31)........... ...................... 50 ........ 26 ........ 76
(September 1-May 31)......... ...................... 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
Roswell........................ Chaves................ 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Santa Fe....................... Santa Fe..............
(May 1-October 31)........... ...................... 112 ........ 38 ........ 150
(November 1-April 30)........ ...................... 86 ........ 38 ........ 124
Silver City.................... Grant................. 41 ........ 26 ........ 67
Taos........................... Taos..................
(December 1-March 31)........ ...................... 78 ........ 34 ........ 112
(April 1-November 30)........ ...................... 71 ........ 34 ........ 105
Tucumcari...................... Quay.................. 42 ........ 26 ........ 68
NEW YORK
Albany......................... Albany................ 81 ........ 34 ........ 115
Auburn......................... Cayuga................ 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
Batavia........................ Genesee...............
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 60 ........ 26 ........ 86
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
Binghamton..................... Broome................ 63 ........ 34 ........ 97
Buffalo........................ Erie.................. 84 ........ 38 ........ 122
Catskill....................... Greene................
(July 1-September 14)........ ...................... 72 ........ 26 ........ 98
(September 15-June 30)....... ...................... 63 ........ 26 ........ 89
Corning........................ Steuben............... 61 ........ 30 ........ 91
Elmira......................... Chemung............... 48 ........ 26 ........ 74
Glens Falls.................... Warren................
(June 1-October 31).......... ...................... 79 ........ 34 ........ 113
(November 1-May 31).......... ...................... 53 ........ 34 ........ 87
Ithaca......................... Tompkins.............. 67 ........ 26 ........ 93
Jamestown...................... Chautauqua............ 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
[[Page 10262]]
Kingston....................... Ulster................
(May 1-October 31)........... ...................... 53 ........ 30 ........ 83
(November 1-April 30)........ ...................... 48 ........ 30 ........ 78
Lake Placid.................... Essex.................
(June 1-November 14)......... ...................... 98 ........ 30 ........ 128
(November 15-May 31)......... ...................... 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
Massena/Canton................. St. Lawrence.......... 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
Monticello..................... Sullivan.............. 60 ........ 30 ........ 90
New York City.................. The boroughs of the 142 ........ 38 ........ 180
Bronx, Brooklyn,
Manhattan, Queens and
Staten Island; Nassau
and Suffolk Counties.
Niagara Falls.................. Niagara...............
(May 15-October 31).......... ...................... 79 ........ 30 ........ 109
(November 1-May 14).......... ...................... 61 ........ 30 ........ 91
Oswego......................... Oswego................ 60 ........ 26 ........ 86
Owego.......................... Tioga................. 59 ........ 26 ........ 85
Palisades/Nyack................ Rockland.............. 60 ........ 30 ........ 90
Plattsburgh.................... Clinton...............
(June 1-October 31).......... ...................... 57 ........ 30 ........ 87
(November 1-May 31).......... ...................... 50 ........ 30 ........ 80
Poughkeepsie................... Dutchess.............. 67 ........ 30 ........ 97
Rochester...................... Monroe................ 72 ........ 38 ........ 110
Romulus........................ Seneca................ 60 ........ 26 ........ 86
Saratoga Springs............... Saratoga..............
(May 1-October 31)........... ...................... 79 ........ 34 ........ 113
(November 1-April 30)........ ...................... 53 ........ 34 ........ 87
Schenectady.................... Schenectady........... 64 ........ 30 ........ 94
Syracuse....................... Onondaga.............. 68 ........ 30 ........ 98
Troy........................... Rensselaer............ 47 ........ 34 ........ 81
Utica.......................... Oneida................ 60 ........ 30 ........ 90
Watertown...................... Jefferson............. 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
Watkins Glen................... Schuyler..............
(May 1-October 31)........... ...................... 82 ........ 26 ........ 108
(November 1-April 30)........ ...................... 58 ........ 26 ........ 84
West Point..................... Orange................ 52 ........ 26 ........ 78
White Plains................... Westchester........... 104 ........ 38 ........ 142
NORTH CAROLINA
Asheville...................... Buncombe..............
(May 1-October 31)........... ...................... 64 ........ 34 ........ 98
(November 1-April 30)........ ...................... 50 ........ 34 ........ 84
Boone.......................... Watauga............... 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
Charlotte...................... Mecklenburg........... 63 ........ 38 ........ 101
Duck/Outer Banks............... Dare..................
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 123 ........ 30 ........ 153
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 57 ........ 30 ........ 87
Elizabeth City................. Pasquotank............ 48 ........ 26 ........ 74
Fayetteville................... Cumberland............ 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
Greensboro/High Point.......... Guilford.............. 58 ........ 30 ........ 88
Greenville..................... Pitt.................. 44 ........ 30 ........ 74
Jacksonville................... Onslow................ 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
Kinston........................ Lenoir................ 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
Morehead City.................. Carteret.............. 60 ........ 26 ........ 86
New Bern/Havelock.............. Craven................ 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
Research Park/Raleigh/Durham/ Wake, Durham and 84 ........ 34 ........ 118
Chapel Hill. Orange.
Salisbury...................... Rowan................. 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
Southern Pines................. Moore................. 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
Wilmington..................... New Hanover...........
(March 1-September 30)....... ...................... 56 ........ 30 ........ 86
(October 1-February 29)...... ...................... 50 ........ 30 ........ 80
Winston-Salem.................. Forsyth............... 62 ........ 30 ........ 92
NORTH DAKOTA
Bismarck/Mandan................ Burleigh and Morton... 45 ........ 30 ........ 75
Fargo.......................... Cass.................. 48 ........ 34 ........ 82
Grand Forks.................... Grand Forks........... 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Minot.......................... Ward.................. 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
OHIO
Akron.......................... Summit................ 72 ........ 34 ........ 106
Bellevue/Norwalk............... Huron.................
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 75 ........ 26 ........ 101
[[Page 10263]]
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 40 ........ 26 ........ 66
Cambridge...................... Guernsey.............. 58 ........ 30 ........ 88
Canton......................... Stark................. 50 ........ 26 ........ 76
Chillicothe.................... Ross.................. 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
Cincinnati/Evendale............ Hamilton and Warren... 69 ........ 30 ........ 99
Cleveland...................... Cuyahoga.............. 83 ........ 38 ........ 121
Columbus....................... Franklin.............. 69 ........ 30 ........ 99
Dayton/Fairborn................ Montgomery and Greene; 63 ........ 30 ........ 93
Wright-Patterson AFB.
Defiance....................... Defiance.............. 50 ........ 26 ........ 76
East Liverpool................. Columbiana............ 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
Elyria......................... Lorain................
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 60 ........ 30 ........ 90
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 52 ........ 30 ........ 82
Fairfield/Hamilton............. Butler................ 59 ........ 26 ........ 85
Findlay........................ Hancock............... 55 ........ 26 ........ 81
Geneva......................... Ashtabula............. 72 ........ 30 ........ 102
Jackson........................ Jackson and Pike...... 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
Lancaster...................... Fairfield............. 55 ........ 26 ........ 81
Lima........................... Allen................. 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
Martin's Ferry/Bellaire........ Belmont............... 41 ........ 30 ........ 71
Port Clinton/Oakharbor......... Ottawa................
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 81 ........ 30 ........ 111
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 41 ........ 30 ........ 71
Portsmouth..................... Scioto................ 49 ........ 26 ........ 75
Sandusky....................... Erie..................
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 94 ........ 30 ........ 124
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
Springfield.................... Clark................. 56 ........ 30 ........ 86
Tinney/Fremont................. Sandusky..............
(June 1-September 14)........ ...................... 69 ........ 26 ........ 95
(September 15-May 31)........ ...................... 56 ........ 26 ........ 82
Toledo......................... Lucas................. 56 ........ 30 ........ 86
Wapakoneta..................... Auglaize.............. 42 ........ 26 ........ 68
Warren......................... Trumbull.............. 48 ........ 30 ........ 78
OKLAHOMA
Ada............................ Pontotoc.............. 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Eufaula........................ McIntosh.............. 41 ........ 26 ........ 67
Lawton......................... Comanche.............. 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
Muskogee....................... Muskogee.............. 41 ........ 26 ........ 67
Norman......................... Cleveland............. 56 ........ 26 ........ 82
Oklahoma City.................. Oklahoma.............. 56 ........ 30 ........ 86
Stillwater..................... Payne................. 43 ........ 26 ........ 69
Tulsa/Bartlesville............. Osage, Tulsa and 55 ........ 30 ........ 85
Washington.
OREGON
Ashland/Medford................ Jackson............... 78 ........ 30 ........ 108
Beaverton...................... Washington............ 64 ........ 34 ........ 98
Bend........................... Deschutes............. 60 ........ 30 ........ 90
Clackamas/Milwaukie............ Clackamas............. 63 ........ 26 ........ 89
Coos Bay....................... Coos.................. 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
Crater Lake/Klamath Falls...... Klamath............... 97 ........ 26 ........ 123
Eugene......................... Lane.................. 52 ........ 30 ........ 82
Gold Beach..................... Curry.................
(May 15-October 31).......... ...................... 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
(November 1-May 14).......... ...................... 43 ........ 30 ........ 73
Lincoln City/Newport........... Lincoln...............
(June 1-October 31).......... ...................... 80 ........ 34 ........ 114
(November 1-May 31).......... ...................... 72 ........ 34 ........ 106
Portland....................... Multnomah............. 85 ........ 34 ........ 119
Salem.......................... Marion................ 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
Seaside........................ Clatsop...............
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 82 ........ 30 ........ 112
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 62 ........ 30 ........ 92
PENNSYLVANIA
Allentown...................... Lehigh................ 61 ........ 34 ........ 95
Altoona........................ Blair................. 48 ........ 30 ........ 78
Bloomsburg..................... Columbia.............. 47 ........ 30 ........ 77
Chambersburg................... Franklin.............. 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
Chester/Radnor................. Delaware.............. 88 ........ 34 ........ 122
Du Bois........................ Clearfield............ 50 ........ 30 ........ 80
Easton......................... Northampton........... 59 ........ 26 ........ 85
[[Page 10264]]
Erie........................... Erie..................
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 66 ........ 30 ........ 96
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
Gettysburg..................... Adams.................
(May 1-October 31)........... ...................... 68 ........ 30 ........ 98
(November 1-April 30)........ ...................... 57 ........ 30 ........ 87
Harrisburg..................... Dauphin............... 71 ........ 34 ........ 105
Johnstown...................... Cambria............... 48 ........ 26 ........ 74
King of Prussia/Ft. Washington. Montgomery County, 80 ........ 34 ........ 114
except Bala Cynwyd
(See also
Philadelphia, PA).
Lancaster...................... Lancaster............. 73 ........ 30 ........ 103
Lebanon........................ Lebanon County; Indian
Town Gap Military
Reservation.
(April 1-November 30)........ ...................... 56 ........ 26 ........ 82
(December 1-March 31)........ ...................... 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
Mechanicsburg.................. Cumberland............
(May 1-October 31)........... ...................... 63 ........ 26 ........ 89
(November 1-April 30)........ ...................... 58 ........ 26 ........ 84
Mercer......................... Mercer................ 57 ........ 26 ........ 83
Philadelphia................... Philadelphia County; 90 ........ 34 ........ 124
city of Bala Cynwyd
in Montgomery County.
Pittsburgh..................... Allegheny............. 83 ........ 38 ........ 121
Reading........................ Berks................. 64 ........ 26 ........ 90
Scranton....................... Lackawanna............ 58 ........ 26 ........ 84
Shippingport/Beaver Falls...... Beaver................ 47 ........ 30 ........ 77
Somerset....................... Somerset.............. 48 ........ 26 ........ 74
State College.................. Centre................ 62 ........ 30 ........ 92
Stroudsburg.................... Monroe................ 45 ........ 30 ........ 75
Uniontown...................... Fayette............... 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
Valley Forge/Malvern........... Chester............... 97 ........ 34 ........ 131
Warminster..................... Bucks County; Naval 61 ........ 30 ........ 91
Air Development
Center.
Wilkes-Barre................... Luzerne............... 50 ........ 34 ........ 84
Williamsport................... Lycoming.............. 46 ........ 30 ........ 76
York........................... York.................. 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
RHODE ISLAND
Block Island/Quonset Point..... Washington............
(May 15-September 30)........ ...................... 83 ........ 34 ........ 117
(October 1-May 14)........... ...................... 66 ........ 34 ........ 100
East Greenwich................. Kent County; Naval 78 ........ 34 ........ 112
Construction
Battalion Center,
Davisville.
Newport........................ Newport...............
(May 1-October 14)........... ...................... 92 ........ 38 ........ 130
(October 15-April 30)........ ...................... 77 ........ 38 ........ 115
Providence..................... Providence............ 89 ........ 38 ........ 127
SOUTH CAROLINA
Aiken.......................... Aiken................. 52 ........ 30 ........ 82
Charleston..................... Charleston and 66 ........ 30 ........ 96
Berkeley.
Columbia....................... Richland.............. 58 ........ 30 ........ 88
Florence....................... Florence.............. 43 ........ 30 ........ 73
Greenville..................... Greenville............ 66 ........ 34 ........ 100
Hilton Head.................... Beaufort..............
(March 1-September 30)....... ...................... 74 ........ 38 ........ 112
(October 1-February 29)...... ...................... 54 ........ 38 ........ 92
Myrtle Beach................... Horry County; Myrtle
Beach AFB.
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 106 ........ 30 ........ 136
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 58 ........ 30 ........ 88
Rock Hill...................... York.................. 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
Spartanburg.................... Spartanburg........... 49 ........ 26 ........ 75
Sumter......................... Sumter................ 50 ........ 26 ........ 76
SOUTH DAKOTA
Custer......................... Custer................
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 73 ........ 26 ........ 99
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 43 ........ 26 ........ 69
Hot Springs.................... Fall River............
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 61 ........ 26 ........ 87
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 40 ........ 26 ........ 66
Rapid City..................... Pennington............
(June 1-August 31)........... ...................... 84 ........ 30 ........ 114
(September 1-May 31)......... ...................... 49 ........ 30 ........ 79
Sioux Falls.................... Minnehaha............. 51 ........ 30 ........ 81
Spearfish...................... Lawrence..............
[[Page 10265]]
(May 1-September 14)......... ...................... 65 ........ 26 ........ 91
(September 15-April 30)...... ...................... 40 ........ 26 ........ 66
TENNESSEE
Alcoa.......................... Blount................ 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
Bristol*....................... (See also Bristol, VA) 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Chattanooga.................... Hamilton.............. 60 ........ 30 ........ 90
Clarksville.................... Montgomery............ 54 ........ 26 ........ 80
Columbia....................... Maury................. 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
Gatlinburg..................... Sevier................ 70 ........ 34 ........ 104
Jackson........................ Madison............... 47 ........ 30 ........ 77
Johnson City................... Washington............ 53 ........ 30 ........ 83
Kingsport...................... Sullivan.............. 46 ........ 30 ........ 76
Knoxville...................... Knox County; city of 64 ........ 34 ........ 98
Oak Ridge.
Memphis........................ Shelby................ 64 ........ 30 ........ 94
Murfreesboro................... Rutherford............ 49 ........ 26 ........ 75
Nashville...................... Davidson.............. 69 ........ 34 ........ 103
Shelbyville.................... Bedford............... 49 ........ 26 ........ 75
*Denotes independent city
TEXAS
Abilene........................ Taylor................ 55 ........ 26 ........ 81
Amarillo....................... Potter................ 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
Austin......................... Travis................ 70 ........ 34 ........ 104
Bay City....................... Matagorda............. 41 ........ 26 ........ 67
Beaumont....................... Jefferson............. 47 ........ 30 ........ 77
Brownsville.................... Cameron............... 62 ........ 26 ........ 88
College Station/Bryan.......... Brazos................ 52 ........ 26 ........ 78
Corpus Christi/Ingelside....... Nueces and San 64 ........ 34 ........ 98
Patricio.
Dallas/Fort Worth.............. Dallas and Tarrant.... 84 ........ 38 ........ 122
Denton......................... Denton................ 48 ........ 26 ........ 74
Eagle Pass..................... Maverick.............. 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
El Paso........................ El Paso............... 72 ........ 30 ........ 102
Fort Davis..................... Jeff Davis............ 67 ........ 26 ........ 93
Galveston...................... Galveston.............
(May 1-September 14)......... ...................... 74 ........ 38 ........ 112
(September 15-April 30)...... ...................... 62 ........ 38 ........ 100
Granbury....................... Hood.................. 52 ........ 26 ........ 78
Houston........................ Harris County; L.B. 79 ........ 34 ........ 113
Johnson Space Center
and Ellington AFB.
Kingsville..................... Kleberg............... 43 ........ 26 ........ 69
Lajitas........................ Brewster.............. 63 ........ 30 ........ 93
Laredo......................... Webb.................. 62 ........ 26 ........ 88
Longview....................... Gregg................. 48 ........ 26 ........ 74
Lubbock........................ Lubbock............... 60 ........ 30 ........ 90
Lufkin......................... Angelina.............. 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
McAllen........................ Hidalgo............... 62 ........ 30 ........ 92
Midland/Odessa................. Ector and Midland..... 55 ........ 26 ........ 81
Nacogdoches.................... Nacogdoches........... 50 ........ 26 ........ 76
Plano.......................... Collin................ 84 ........ 26 ........ 110
San Angelo..................... Tom Green............. 50 ........ 26 ........ 76
San Antonio.................... Bexar................. 91 ........ 30 ........ 121
Temple......................... Bell.................. 49 ........ 26 ........ 75
Texarkana...................... Bowie (See also 43 ........ 30 ........ 73
Texarkana, AR).
Tyler.......................... Smith................. 52 ........ 26 ........ 78
Victoria....................... Victoria.............. 49 ........ 26 ........ 75
Waco........................... McLennan.............. 56 ........ 30 ........ 86
Wichita Falls.................. Wichita............... 49 ........ 26 ........ 75
UTAH
Bullfrog....................... Garfield..............
(April 1-October 31)......... ...................... 109 ........ 30 ........ 139
(November 1-March 31)........ ...................... 69 ........ 30 ........ 99
Cedar City..................... Iron..................
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 56 ........ 30 ........ 86
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 43 ........ 30 ........ 73
Moab........................... Grand................. 77 ........ 30 ........ 107
Park City...................... Summit................
(December 1-March 31)........ ...................... 132 ........ 38 ........ 170
(April 1-November 30)........ ...................... 69 ........ 38 ........ 107
Provo.......................... Utah.................. 55 ........ 34 ........ 89
[[Page 10266]]
Salt Lake City/Ogden........... Salt Lake, Weber, and 75 ........ 34 ........ 109
Davis Counties;
Dugway Proving Ground
and Tooele Army Depot.
St. George..................... Washington............ 48 ........ 26 ........ 74
Vernal......................... Uintah................
(May 1-September 14)......... ...................... 55 ........ 26 ........ 81
(September 15-April 30)...... ...................... 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
Wendover....................... Tooele (See also 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
Wendover, NV).
VERMONT
Burlington..................... Chittenden............ 64 ........ 30 ........ 94
Middlebury..................... Addison...............
(May 1-October 31)........... ...................... 72 ........ 30 ........ 102
(November 1-April 30)........ ...................... 56 ........ 30 ........ 86
Montpelier..................... Washington............
(May 15-October 31).......... ...................... 65 ........ 26 ........ 91
(November 1-May 14).......... ...................... 49 ........ 26 ........ 75
Rutland........................ Rutland...............
(December 15-March 31)....... ...................... 68 ........ 30 ........ 98
(April 1-December 14)........ ...................... 53 ........ 30 ........ 83
White River Junction........... Windsor...............
(June 1-October 31).......... ...................... 82 ........ 30 ........ 112
(November 1-May 31).......... ...................... 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
VIRGINIA
(For the cities of Alexandria, Fairfax, and Falls
Church, and the counties of Arlington, Fairfax, and
Loudoun, see District of Columbia)
Blacksburg..................... Montgomery............ 50 ........ 26 ........ 76
Bristol*....................... (See also Bristol, TN) 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Charlottesville*............... ...................... 55 ........ 38 ........ 93
Covington*..................... ...................... 45 ........ 26 ........ 71
Fredericksburg*................ ...................... 43 ........ 30 ........ 73
Lexington*.....................
(April 1-October 31)......... ...................... 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
(November 1-March 31)........ ...................... 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
Lynchburg*..................... ...................... 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
Manassas/Manassas Park*........ Prince William........ 50 ........ 30 ........ 80
Petersburg*.................... Fort Lee.............. 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
Richmond*...................... Chesterfield and 64 ........ 38 ........ 102
Henrico Counties;
also Defense Supply
Center.
Roanoke*....................... Roanoke............... 57 ........ 34 ........ 91
Staunton*...................... ...................... 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Virginia Beach*................ Virginia Beach (also
Norfolk, Portsmouth
and Chesapeake)*.
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 108 ........ 34 ........ 142
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 68 ........ 34 ........ 102
Wallops Island................. Accomack..............
(June 1-October 14).......... ...................... 76 ........ 26 ........ 102
(October 15-May 31).......... ...................... 55 ........ 26 ........ 81
Warrenton/Amissville........... Fauquier and 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Rappahannock.
Waynesboro*....................
(May 1-October 31)........... ...................... 54 ........ 26 ........ 80
(November 1-April 30)........ ...................... 40 ........ 26 ........ 66
Williamsburg*.................. Williamsburg (also
Hampton, Newport
News, York County,
Naval Weapons
Station, Yorktown)*.
(April 1-October 31)......... ...................... 76 ........ 34 ........ 110
(November 1-March 31)........ ...................... 66 ........ 34 ........ 100
Wintergreen.................... Nelson................ 113 ........ 34 ........ 147
*Denotes independent cities.
WASHINGTON
Anacortes/Mt. Vernon/Whidbey Skagit and Island..... 68 ........ 34 ........ 102
Island.
Bellingham..................... Whatcom............... 56 ........ 30 ........ 86
Bremerton...................... Kitsap................ 57 ........ 26 ........ 83
Friday Harbor.................. San Juan.............. 79 ........ 34 ........ 113
Kelso/Longview................. Cowlitz............... 47 ........ 30 ........ 77
Lynnwood/Everett............... Snohomish............. 61 ........ 34 ........ 95
Ocean Shores................... Grays Harbor..........
(April 1-September 30)....... ...................... 75 ........ 30 ........ 105
(October 1-March 31)......... ...................... 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
Port Angeles................... Clallam...............
(May 15-September 30)........ ...................... 64 ........ 30 ........ 94
(October 1-May 14)........... ...................... 46 ........ 30 ........ 76
Port Townsend.................. Jefferson.............
[[Page 10267]]
(April 15-October 31)........ ...................... 73 ........ 30 ........ 103
(November 1-April 14)........ ...................... 57 ........ 30 ........ 87
Richland....................... Benton................ 44 ........ 30 ........ 74
Seattle........................ King.................. 83 ........ 34 ........ 117
Spokane........................ Spokane............... 67 ........ 30 ........ 97
Tacoma......................... Pierce................ 58 ........ 30 ........ 88
Tumwater/Olympia............... Thurston.............. 63 ........ 30 ........ 93
Vancouver...................... Clark................. 65 ........ 30 ........ 95
Yakima......................... Yakima................ 45 ........ 30 ........ 75
WEST VIRGINIA
Beckley........................ Raleigh............... 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
Berkeley Springs............... Morgan................ 82 ........ 26 ........ 108
Charleston..................... Kanawha............... 62 ........ 26 ........ 88
Harpers Ferry.................. Jefferson............. 62 ........ 30 ........ 92
Huntington..................... Cabell................ 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
Martinsburg.................... Berkeley.............. 56 ........ 26 ........ 82
Morgantown..................... Monongalia............ 65 ........ 26 ........ 91
Parkersburg.................... Wood.................. 55 ........ 26 ........ 81
Wheeling....................... Ohio.................. 47 ........ 26 ........ 73
WISCONSIN
Appleton....................... Outagamie............. 61 ........ 30 ........ 91
Brookfield..................... Waukesha.............. 65 ........ 34 ........ 99
Cable.......................... Bayfield.............. 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Eagle River.................... Vilas.................
(June1-September 30)......... ...................... 59 ........ 26 ........ 85
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 43 ........ 26 ........ 69
Eau Claire..................... Eau Claire............ 55 ........ 30 ........ 85
Green Bay...................... Brown................. 59 ........ 30 ........ 89
Kewaunee....................... Kewaunee..............
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 49 ........ 26 ........ 75
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 40 ........ 26 ........ 66
La Crosse...................... La Crosse............. 55 ........ 30 ........ 85
Lake Geneva.................... Walworth..............
(May 1-October 31)........... ...................... 86 ........ 30 ........ 116
(November 1-April 30)........ ...................... 58 ........ 30 ........ 88
Madison........................ Dane.................. 62 ........ 30 ........ 92
Milwaukee...................... Milwaukee............. 70 ........ 30 ........ 100
Mishicot....................... Manitowoc............. 54 ........ 26 ........ 80
Oshkosh........................ Winnebago............. 51 ........ 30 ........ 81
Platteville.................... Grant................. 41 ........ 26 ........ 67
Racine/Kenosha................. Racine and Kenosha.... 58 ........ 30 ........ 88
Rhinelander/Minocqua........... Oneida................ 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
Sheboygan/Plymouth............. Sheboygan............. 45 ........ 30 ........ 75
Stevens Point.................. Portage............... 45 ........ 30 ........ 75
Sturgeon Bay................... Door..................
(June 1-September 14)........ ...................... 65 ........ 26 ........ 91
(September 15-May 31)........ ...................... 40 ........ 26 ........ 66
Superior....................... Douglas...............
(June 1-September 14)........ ...................... 50 ........ 30 ........ 80
(September 15-May 31)........ ...................... 42 ........ 30 ........ 72
Tomah.......................... Monroe................ 43 ........ 26 ........ 69
Waupaca........................ Waupaca............... 48 ........ 26 ........ 74
Wausau......................... Marathon.............. 49 ........ 30 ........ 79
Wautoma........................ Waushara..............
(June 1-September 30)........ ...................... 53 ........ 26 ........ 79
(October 1-May 31)........... ...................... 40 ........ 26 ........ 66
West Bend...................... Washington............ 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
Wisconsin Dells................ Columbia..............
(June 1-September 14)........ ...................... 105 ........ 34 ........ 139
(September 15-May 31)........ ...................... 56 ........ 34 ........ 90
Wisconsin Rapids............... Wood.................. 42 ........ 26 ........ 68
WYOMING
Casper......................... Natrona............... 44 ........ 30 ........ 74
Cheyenne....................... Laramie............... 44 ........ 30 ........ 74
Cody........................... Park..................
(May 1-September 30)......... ...................... 83 ........ 26 ........ 109
(October 1-April 30)......... ...................... 40 ........ 26 ........ 66
Gillette....................... Campbell..............
(May 15-August 31)........... ...................... 46 ........ 26 ........ 72
(September 1-May 14)......... ...................... 40 ........ 26 ........ 66
[[Page 10268]]
Jackson........................ Teton.................
(June 1-October 14).......... ...................... 105 ........ 38 ........ 143
(October 15-May 31).......... ...................... 73 ........ 38 ........ 111
Pinedale....................... Sublette.............. 54 ........ 26 ........ 80
Rock Springs................... Sweetwater............ 44 ........ 30 ........ 74
Thermopolis.................... Hot Springs...........
(June 1-September 14)........ ...................... 51 ........ 26 ........ 77
(September 15-May 31)........ ...................... 44 ........ 26 ........ 70
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Unless otherwise specified, the per diem locality is defined as ``all locations within, or entirely
surrounded by, the corporate limits of the key city, including independent entities located within those
boundaries.''
\2\ Per diem localities with county definitions shall include ``all locations within, or entirely surrounded by,
the corporate limits of the key city as well as the boundaries of the listed counties, including independent
entities located within the boundaries of the key city and the listed counties.''
\3\ Military installations or Government-related facilities (whether or not specifically named) that are located
partially within the city or county boundary shall include ``all locations that are geographically part of the
military installation or Government-related facility, even though part(s) of such activities may be located
outside the defined per diem locality.''
\4\ Federal agencies may submit a request to GSA for review of the costs covered by per diem in a particular
city or area where the standard CONUS rate applies when travel to that location is repetitive or on a
continuing basis and travelers' experiences indicate that the prescribed rate is inadequate. Other per diem
localities listed in this appendix will be surveyed on an annual basis by GSA to determine whether rates are
adequate. Requests for per diem rate adjustments shall be submitted by the agency headquarters office to the
General Services Administration, Office of Policy, Planning and Evaluation, Attn.: Travel and Transportation
Management Policy Division (MTT), Washington, DC 20405. Agencies should designate an individual responsible
for reviewing, coordinating, and submitting to GSA any requests from bureaus or subagencies. Requests for rate
adjustments shall include a city designation, a description of the surrounding location involved (county or
other defined area), and a recommended rate supported by a statement explaining the circumstances that cause
the existing rate to be inadequate. The request also must contain an estimate of the annual number of trips to
the location, the average duration of such trips, and the primary purpose of travel to the locations. Agencies
should submit their requests to GSA no later than May 1 in order for a city to be included in the annual
survey.
Dated: February 27, 1996.
Roger W. Johnson,
Administrator of General Services.
[FR Doc. 96-5773 Filed 3-11-96; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 6820-24-F
Complete official Federal Register PDF
FR Doc. 96-5765 Mobile Satellite Service in the 1610-1626.5/2483.5-2500 MHz Frequency Band
[Federal Register Volume 61, Number 49 (Tuesday, March 12, 1996)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 9944-9945]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 96-5765]
=======================================================================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
47 CFR PART 25
[CC Docket No. 92-166; FCC 96-54]
Mobile Satellite Service in the 1610-1626.5/2483.5-2500 MHz
Frequency Band
AGENCY: Federal Communications Commission.
ACTION: Final rule: petition for reconsideration.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: The Commission has adopted, upon reconsideration, changes to
the rules and policies establishing service and licensing rules for the
Mobile Satellite Service in the 1610-1626.5/2483.5-2500 MHz Frequency
Band. Specifically, we conclude that the ``interim plan,'' designed to
avoid interference between the Big LEO systems and the Russian Global
Navigation Satellite System (``GLONASS''), is unnecessary at this time.
We also clarify our views concerning position determination
capabilities in Big LEO earth terminals, and modifications to feeder
link proposals. In order to ensure that United States licensees do not
engage in practices that are contrary to the goal of competitive
markets world-wide, we also adopt a rule concerning exclusive
arrangements for provision of Big LEO service. We also clarify our
``two-tiered'' processing scheme for financial qualifications. In
addition, we make a number of minor editorial and clarifying changes to
our technical rules.
EFFECTIVE DATE: April 11, 1996.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Karl Kensinger, International Bureau,
Satellite and Radiocommunication Division, Satellite Policy Branch,
(202) 418-0773.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: This is a summary of the Commission's
Memorandum Opinion and Order in CC Docket No. 92-166; FCC 96-54,
adopted February 12, 1996 and released February 15, 1996. The complete
text of this Memorandum Opinion and Order is
[[Page 9945]]
available for inspection and copying during normal business hours in
the FCC Reference Center (Room 239), 1919 M Street, N.W., Washington,
D.C., and also may be purchased from the Commission's copy contractor,
International Transcription Service, (202) 857-3800, 2100 M Street,
N.W., Suite 140, Washington, DC 20037.
Summary of Memorandum Opinion and Order
1. The Commission continues the development of a regulatory
structure conducive to the rapid and successful deployment of the
global mobile satellite service systems known as ``Big LEOs,'' or low
earth orbit Mobile Satellite Service systems in the 1.6/2.4 GHz
frequency bands. These systems have a wide range of potentially
revolutionary applications, including: (1) providing a comparatively
low-cost means of connecting to the world-wide public telephone
network, particularly in areas too remote or underpopulated to receive
service through wires; (2) allowing global ``roaming'' by users of
mobile phones, including hand-held phones; (3) providing ``fill-in''
service for areas not reached by terrestrial ``wireless'' services such
as cellular telephones; and (4) providing for global competition in
telephone and data services, both satellite and terrestrially based. In
Amendment of the Commission's Rules to Establish Rules and Policies
Pertaining to a Mobile Satellite Service in the 1610-1626.5/2483.5-2500
MHz Frequency Band, 59 FR 53294 (October 21, 1994), 9 FCC Rcd 5936
(1994) (``Big LEO Report''), the Commission adopted rules and policies
for the Big LEO service. This order addresses requests for
reconsideration of that decision, and makes minor changes and
clarifications to the rules and policies adopted.
2. The particular changes adopted here address concerns raised by
the Big LEO licensees and applicants. We decline to adopt a number of
other changes proposed by the applicants and licensees. We leave intact
the protections to radio astronomy--protections developed in
negotiations between Big LEO and radio astronomy interests. We decline
at this time to adopt certain technical rules concerning interference
between the competing Big LEO systems in order not to preempt
prematurely private negotiations. We also decline to modify our
construction milestone requirements or system replacement procedures.
3. Accordingly, it is ordered, that the ``Petition for
Reconsideration'' filed by AMSC Subsidiary Corp. on November 21, 1994,
the ``Petition for Reconsideration,'' filed by Constellation
Communications, Inc. on November 21, 1994, the ``Petition for
Clarification and Partial Reconsideration,'' filed by Loral/Qualcomm
Partnership, L.P., on November 21, 1994, the ``Petition for
Clarification and Partial Reconsideration,'' filed by Motorola
Satellite Communications, Inc., on November 21, 1994, and the
``Petition for Partial Reconsideration and Clarification,'' filed by
TRW Inc. on November 21, 1994, are granted to the extent indicated in
this Memorandum Opinion and Order, and are otherwise denied.
4. It is further ordered that the Rule Changes set forth below
shall be effective April 11, 1996.
List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 25
Satellites.
Federal Communications Commission.
William F. Caton,
Acting Secretary.
Rule Changes
Part 25 of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations is amended
as follows:
PART 25--SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS
1. The authority citation for Part 25 continues to read as follows:
Authority: Sections. 101-404, 76 Stat. 419-427; 47 U.S.C. 701-
744, Sec. 4, 48 Stat. 1066, as amended; 47 U.S.C. 154. Interprets or
applies sec. 303, 48 Stat. 1082, as amended; 47 U.S.C. 303.
Sec. 25.114 [Amended]
2. Section 25.114 is amended by removing paragraph (c)(6)(iii).
3. Section 25.136(b) is revised to read as follows:
Sec. 25.136 Operating provisions for earth station networks in the
1.6/2.4 GHz mobile-satellite service.
* * * * *
(b) User transceiver units in this service are authorized to
communicate with and through U.S. authorized space stations only. No
person shall transmit to a space station unless the user transceiver is
first authorized by the space station licensee or by a service vendor
authorized by that licensee, and the specific transmission is conducted
in accordance with the operating protocol specified by the system
operator.
* * * * *
4. Section 25.143 is amended by adding a new paragraph (h) to read
as follows:
Sec. 25.143 Licensing provisions for the 1.6/2.4 GHz Mobile-Satellite
Service.
* * * * *
(h) Prohibition of certain agreements. No license shall be granted
to any applicant for a space station in the mobile satellite service
operating at 1610-1626.5/2483.5-2500 MHz if that applicant, or any
persons or companies controlling or controlled by the applicant, shall
acquire or enjoy any right, for the purpose of handling traffic to or
from the United States, its territories or possession, to construct or
operate space segment or earth stations, or to interchange traffic,
which is denied to any other United States company by reason of any
concession, contract, understanding, or working arrangement to which
the Licensee or any persons or companies controlling or controlled by
the Licensee are parties.
5. Section 25.203 is amended by revising paragraphs (j) and (k) to
read as follows:
Sec. 25.203 Choice of sites and frequencies.
* * * * *
(j) Applicants for non-geostationary 1.6/2.4 GHz Mobile-Satellite
Service/ Radiodetermination satellite service feeder links in the bands
17.7-20.2 GHz and 27.5-30.0 GHz shall indicate the frequencies and
spacecraft antenna gain contours towards each feeder-link earth station
location and will coordinate with licensees of other fixed-satellite
service and terrestrial-service systems sharing the band to determine
geographic protection areas around each non-geostationary mobile-
satellite service/radiodetermination satellite service feeder-link
earth station.
(k) An applicant for an earth station that will operate with a
geostationary satellite or non-geostationary satellite in a shared
frequency band in which the non-geostationary system is (or is proposed
to be) licensed for feeder links, shall demonstrate in its applications
that its proposed earth station will not cause unacceptable
interference to any other satellite network that is authorized to
operate in the same frequency band, or certify that the operations of
its earth station shall conform to established coordination agreements
between the operator(s) of the space station(s) with which the earth
station is to communicate and the operator(s) of any other space
station licensed to use the band.
Sec. 25.213 [Amended]
6. Section 25.213 is amended by removing paragraphs (c) and (d).
[FR Doc. 96-5765 Filed 3-11-96; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 6712-01-P
Complete official Federal Register PDF
FR Doc. 96-5764 Conforming Amateur Service Rules to the Provisions of the Telecommunications Act of 1996
[Federal Register Volume 61, Number 49 (Tuesday, March 12, 1996)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Page 9953]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 96-5764]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
47 CFR Part 97
[FCC 96-74]
Conforming Amateur Service Rules to the Provisions of the
Telecommunications Act of 1996
AGENCY: Federal Communications Commission.
ACTION: Final rule.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: This action amends the amateur service rules, consistent with
the statutory mandate of the 1996 Telecommunications Act, to remove
certain unnecessary and outdated regulations. It removes the conflict-
of-interest provisions pertaining to the administration of amateur
operator license examinations. It also eliminates the requirement that
volunteer examiners (VEs) and volunteer-examiner coordinators (VECs)
who administer and coordinate amateur operator examinations maintain
records of out-of-pocket expenses and annually certify those expenses
to the Commission. The effect of these rule amendments is to further
the public interest because they eliminate unnecessary regulatory
burdens.
EFFECTIVE DATE: April 11, 1996.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Maurice J. DePont, Federal
Communications Commission, Washington, D. C. 20554, (202) 418-0690.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: This is a summary of the Commission's Order,
adopted February 28, 1996, and released February 28, 1996. The complete
text of this Commission action, including the rule amendments, is
available for inspection and copying at the Federal Communications
Commission, Room 246, 1919 M Street, N. W., Washington, D. C. The
complete text of this Order may also be obtained from the Commission's
copy contractor, International Transcription Services, Inc., 2100 M
Street, N.W., Suite 140, Washington, D. C. 20037, telephone (202) 857-
3800.
Summary of Order:
1. By this Order, we are revising the rules for the amateur
service, consistent with the statutory mandate of the 1996
Telecommunications Act, to remove the conflict-of-interest provisions
pertaining to the administration of amateur operator license
examinations.
2. Also, to be consistent with the new statutory mandate, we are
eliminating the requirement that volunteer examiners (VEs) and
volunteer-examiner coordinators (VECs), who administer and coordinate
amateur operator examinations, maintain records of out-of-pocket
expenses, and, annually certify those expenses to the Commission.
3. These rule amendments are necessary in order to make our rules
consistent with the requirements of the 1996 Telecommunications Act.
4. The amended rules are set forth below, effective April 11, 1996.
5. The rule amendments have been analyzed with respect to the
Paperwork Reduction Act of 1990, 44 U.S.C. Secs. 3501-3520, and are
found to eliminate a paperwork burden imposed upon the public.
6. This Order and the rule amendments are issued under the
authority of Sections 4(i) and 303(r) of the Communications Act of
1934, as amended, 47 U.S.C. Secs. 154(i) and (303)(r).
List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 97
Examinations, Radio, Volunteers.
Federal Communications Commission.
William F. Caton,
Acting Secretary.
Final Rules
Part 97 of Chapter I of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations
is amended as follows:
PART 97--AMATEUR RADIO SERVICE
1. The authority citation for Part 97 continues to read as follows:
Authority: 48 Stat. 1066, 1082, as amended; 47 U.S.C. 154, 303.
Interpret or apply 48 Stat. 1064-1068, 1081-1105, as amended; 47
U.S.C. 151-155, 301-609, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 97.509 [Amended]
2. Section 97.509 is amended by removing paragraph (b)(5).
Sec. 97.521 [Amended]
3. Section 97.521 is amended by removing paragraph (e).
Sec. 97.527 [Amended]
4. Section 97.527 is amended by removing paragraphs (c), (d), (e),
and (f).
[FR Doc. 96-5764 Filed 3-11-96; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 6712-01-P
Complete official Federal Register PDF
FR Doc. 96-5529 Standards of Performance for New Stationary Sources and Guidelines for Control of Existing Sources: Municipal Solid Waste Landfills
[Federal Register Volume 61, Number 49 (Tuesday, March 12, 1996)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 9905-9944]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 96-5529]
=======================================================================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
40 CFR Parts 51, 52, and 60
[AD-FRL-5437-8]
RIN 2060-AC42
Standards of Performance for New Stationary Sources and
Guidelines for Control of Existing Sources: Municipal Solid Waste
Landfills
AGENCY: Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
ACTION: Final rule and guideline.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: This action adds subparts WWW and Cc to 40 CFR part 60 by
promulgating standards of performance for new municipal solid waste
landfills and emission guidelines for existing municipal solid waste
landfills. This action also adds the source category ``municipal solid
waste landfills'' to the priority list in 40 CFR Part 60, Sec. 60.16,
for regulation under section 111 of the Clean Air Act. These standards
and emission guidelines implement section 111 of the Clean Air Act and
are based on the Administrator's determination that municipal solid
waste landfills cause, or contribute significantly to, air pollution
that may reasonably be anticipated to endanger public health or
welfare. The emissions of concern are non-methane organic compounds
(NMOC) and methane. NMOC include volatile organic compounds (VOC),
hazardous air pollutants (HAPs), and odorous compounds. VOC emissions
contribute to ozone formation which can result in adverse effects to
human health and vegetation. Ozone can penetrate into different regions
of the respiratory tract and be absorbed through the respiratory
system. The health effects of exposure to HAPs can include cancer,
respiratory irritation, and damage to the nervous system. Methane
emissions contribute to global climate change and can result in fires
or explosions when they accumulate in structures on or off the landfill
site. The intended effect of the standards and guidelines is to require
certain municipal solid waste landfills to control emissions to the
level achievable by the best demonstrated system of continuous emission
reduction, considering costs, nonair quality health, and environmental
and energy impacts.
EFFECTIVE DATE: Effective on March 12, 1996.
ADDRESSES: Background Information Document. The background information
document for the promulgated standards may be obtained from the U.S.
EPA Library (MD-35), Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711,
telephone number (919) 541-2777. Please refer to ``Air Emissions from
Municipal Solid Waste Landfills--Background Information for Final
Standards and Emission Guidelines,'' EPA-453/R-94-021. The Background
Information Document contains: (1) A summary of all the public comments
made on the proposed standards and the Notice of Data Availability as
well as the Administrator's response to these comments, (2) a summary
of the changes made to the standards since proposal, and (3) the final
Environmental Impact Statement, which summarizes the impacts of the
standards.
Docket. Docket No. A-88-09, containing supporting information used
in developing the promulgated standards, is available for public
inspection and copying between 8:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m., Monday through
Friday, except for Federal holidays at the following address: U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Air and Radiation Docket and
Information Center (MC-6102), 401 M Street SW., Washington, DC 20460
[phone: (202) 260-7548]. The docket is located at the above address in
Room M-1500, Waterside Mall (ground floor). A reasonable fee may be
charged for copying.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: For information on the regulation of
municipal solid waste landfills, contact Ms. Martha Smith, Waste and
Chemical Processes Group, Emission Standards Division (MD-13), U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina
27711, telephone number (919) 541-2421.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Judicial Review
Under section 307(b)(1) of the Clean Air Act, judicial review of
the actions taken by this notice is available only by the filing of a
petition for review in the U.S. Court of Appeals for the District of
Columbia Circuit within 60 days of today's publication of this rule.
Under section 307(b)(2) of the Clean Air Act, the requirements that are
the subject of today's notice may not be challenged
[[Page 9906]]
later in civil or criminal proceedings brought by the EPA to enforce
these requirements.
The following outline is provided to aid in locating information in
the introductory text (preamble) to the final standards.
I. Acronyms, Abbreviations, and Measurement Units
A. Acronyms
B. Abbreviations and Measurement Units
C. Conversion Factors and Commonly Used Units
II. Background
III. Summary of Considerations in Developing the Standards and
Emission Guidelines
A. Purpose of the Regulation
B. Technical Basis of the Regulation
C. Stakeholders and Public Involvement
IV. Summary of the Standards, Emission Guidelines, and Methods
V. Impacts of the Standards and Emission Guidelines
A. Environmental Impacts
B. Cost and Economic Impacts
VI. Significant Changes to the Proposed Standards and Emission
Guidelines
A. Design Capacity Exemption
B. Emission Rate Cutoff
C. Collection System Design Specifications
D. Timing for Well Placement
E. Operational Standards
F. Surface Emission Monitoring
G. Model Default Values
VII. Permitting
A. New Source Review Permits
B. Operating Permits
VIII. Administrative Requirements
A. Docket
B. Paperwork Reduction Act
C. Executive Order 12866
D. Executive Order 12875
E. Unfunded Mandate Reform Act
F. Regulatory Flexibility Act
G. Miscellaneous
I. Acronyms, Abbreviations, and Measurement Units
The following definitions, acronyms, and measurement units are
provided to clarify the preamble to the final rule.
A. Acronyms
BDT--best demonstrated technology
BID--background information document
CAA--Clean Air Act
CERCLA--Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and
Liability Act
EG--emission guideline(s)
EPA--Environmental Protection Agency
FR--Federal Register
HAP--hazardous air pollutant
LFG--landfill gas
MSW--municipal solid waste
NMOC--nonmethane organic compounds
NPV--net present value
NSPS--new source performance standards
NSR--new source review
OMB--Office of Management and Budget
PSD--prevention of significant deterioration
RCRA--Resource Conservation and Recovery Act
VOC--volatile organic compound(s)
B. Abbreviations and Measurement Units
J/scm--joules per standard cubic meter
m--meter
Mg--megagram
mm--millimeter
ppm--parts per million
ppmv--parts per million by volume
tpy--tons per year
yr--year
C. Conversion Factors and Commonly Used Units
1 meter = 3.2808 feet
1 megagram = 1.1023 tons = 2204.6 pounds
1 cubic meter = 35.288 cubic feet = 1.3069 cubic yards
1 cubic meter = 0.0008101 acre-feet
Degrees Celsius = (degrees Fahrenheit - 32)/1.8
II. Background
The United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) originally
considered regulating MSW landfill emissions under a RCRA subtitle D
rulemaking. However, the Administrator decided to regulate MSW landfill
emissions under the authority of the CAA, and announced the decision in
the Federal Register on August 30, 1988 (53 FR 33314). The EPA decided
to propose regulation of new MSW landfills under section 111(b) of the
CAA and to propose EG for existing MSW landfills under section 111(d).
The EPA published a proposal of this NSPS and EG in the Federal
Register on May 30, 1991 (56 FR 24468).
Following the receipt of new data and changes in the modeling
techniques, the EPA published a Notice of Data Availability in the
Federal Register on June 21, 1993 (56 FR 33790).
Under the authority of section 111(b)(1)(A) of the CAA, today's
notice adds the source category MSW landfills to the priority list in
40 CFR 60.16 because, in the judgement of the Administrator, it
contributes significantly to air pollution which may reasonably be
anticipated to endanger public health and welfare. Further rationale
for this finding is contained in section 1.1.1 of the promulgation BID
(EPA-453/R-94-021).
Today's notice promulgates the final NSPS and EG for MSW landfills.
The promulgation BID ``Air Emissions from Municipal Solid Waste
Landfills--Background Information for Final Standards and Guidelines''
(EPA 453/R-94-021) summarizes all public comments on the proposed NSPS
and EG and the EPA responses. For further discussion of stakeholder and
public involvement in the development of the rules see section III.C.
of this preamble.
Recent information suggests that mercury might be emitted from
landfills. The EPA is still looking at the possibility and will take
action as appropriate in the future under the landfill national
emission standards for hazardous air pollutants.
III. Summary of Considerations in Developing the Standards and Emission
Guidelines
A. Purpose of the Regulation
Landfill gas emissions contain methane, carbon dioxide, and more
than 100 different NMOC, such as vinyl chloride, toluene, and benzene.
Studies indicate that MSW landfill gas emissions can at certain levels
have adverse effects on both public health and welfare. The EPA
presented concerns with the health and welfare effects of landfill
gases in the preamble to the proposed regulations (56 FR 24468).
Briefly, specific health and welfare effects from LFG emissions are
as follows: NMOC contribute to ozone formation; some NMOC are known or
suspected carcinogens, or cause other noncancer health effects; NMOC
can cause an odor nuisance; methane emissions present a well-documented
danger of fire and explosion on-site and off-site, and contribute to
global climate change as a major greenhouse gas. Today's rules will
serve to significantly reduce these potential problems associated with
LFG emissions.
B. Technical Basis of the Regulation
Today's regulations are based on extensive data analysis and
consideration of several alternatives. Prior to proposal, the EPA
developed an extensive data base, using survey information from
approximately 1,200 landfills, along with emissions information from
literature, State and local agencies, and industry test reports. The
preamble to the proposed regulations presented a detailed discussion of
the data used to develop the rule and the regulatory alternatives
considered (56 FR 24476).
After proposal, the EPA continued to gather new information and
received new data through public comments. The EPA published this new
information in a Notice of Data Availability on June 21, 1993 (56 FR
33790). In addition to
[[Page 9907]]
public comments, the EPA held consultations with industry under the
authority of Executive Order 12875 (See section VIII of this document
for a detailed discussion of the Executive Order).
Based on the new information, the EPA re-assessed the impacts of
the alternatives and made changes to the final regulation. The most
significant changes to the regulation are summarized in section VI of
this preamble. Detailed rationales for these changes as well as more
minor changes are provided in the final BID (EPA 453/R-94-021).
In keeping with the EPA's common sense initiative, several of the
changes were made to streamline the rule and to provide flexibility.
Examples of this streamlining and increased flexibility include
focusing control on the largest landfills, removing the gas collection
system prescriptive design specifications, and more reasonable timing
for the installation of collection wells. All of these changes are
discussed further in section VI of this preamble.
C. Stakeholders and Public Involvement
Prior to proposal, in accordance with section 117 of the CAA, the
EPA had consultations with appropriate advisory committees, independent
experts, Federal departments and agencies. In addition, numerous
discussions were held with industry representatives and trade
associations.
After proposal, the EPA provided interested persons the opportunity
to comment at a public hearing and through a written comment period.
Comment letters were received from 60 commenters including industry
representatives, governmental entities, environmental groups, and
private citizens. A public hearing was held in Research Triangle Park,
North Carolina, on July 2, 1991. This hearing was open to the public
and five persons presented oral testimony on the proposed NSPS and EG.
On June 21, 1993, a supplemental notice of data availability to the
May 30, 1991 proposal appeared in the Federal Register (58 FR 33790).
The notice announced the availability of additional data and
information on changes in the EPA's modelling methodology being used in
the development of the final NSPS and EG for MSW landfills. Public
comments were requested on the new data and comment letters were
received from seven commenters.
Since the Notice of Data Availability, the EPA has held several
consultations with State, local, and industry representatives in
accordance with the October 26, 1993 Executive Order 12875 on Enhancing
the Intergovernmental Partnership.
Major concerns expressed by participants in the consultations were
identified by the EPA. These concerns included: the design capacity
exemption level, collection system design and monitoring flexibility,
and timing of well placement. These concerns and others raised at
proposal and clarified in the consultations were addressed by revising
the rule as described in section VI of this preamble.
IV. Summary of the Standards, Emission Guidelines, and Methods
The affected facility under the NSPS is each new MSW landfill. MSW
landfills are also subject to the requirements of RCRA (40 CFR 257 and
258). A new MSW landfill is a landfill for which construction,
modification, or reconstruction commences on or after the proposal date
of May 30, 1991 or that began accepting waste on or after that date.
The EG require control for certain existing MSW landfills. An
existing MSW landfill is a landfill for which construction commenced
prior to May 30, 1991. An existing MSW landfill may be active, i.e.,
currently accepting waste, or have additional capacity available to
accept waste, or may be closed, i.e., no longer accepting waste nor
having available capacity for future waste deposition. The designated
facility under the EG is each existing MSW landfill that has accepted
waste since November 8, 1987.
The final rules (both the NSPS and EG) require affected and
designated MSW landfills having design capacities below 2.5 million Mg
or 2.5 million cubic meters to file a design capacity report. Affected
and designated MSW landfills having design capacities greater than or
equal to 2.5 million Mg or 2.5 million cubic meters are subject to the
additional provisions of the standards or EG.
The final standards and EG for MSW landfill emissions require the
periodic calculation of the annual NMOC emission rate at each affected
or designated facility with a maximum design capacity greater than or
equal to 2.5 million Mg or 2.5 million cubic meters. Those that emit
more than 50 Mg/yr are required to install controls.
The final rules provide a tier system for calculating whether the
NMOC emission rate is less than or greater than 50 Mg/yr, using a first
order decomposition rate equation. The tier system does not need to be
used to model the emission rate if an owner or operator has or intends
to install controls that would achieve compliance. Chapter 1 of the
promulgation BID (EPA 453/R-94-021) presents a complete discussion of
the components of the tier system.
The BDT for both the NSPS and the EG requires the reduction of MSW
landfill emissions from new and existing MSW landfills emitting 50 Mg/
yr of NMOC or more with: (1) A well-designed and well-operated gas
collection system and (2) a control device capable of reducing NMOC in
the collected gas by 98 weight-percent.
A well-designed and well-operated collection system would, at a
minimum: (1) Be capable of handling the maximum expected gas generation
rate; (2) have a design capable of monitoring and adjusting the
operation of the system; and (3) be able to collect gas effectively
from all areas of the landfill that warrant control. Over time, new
areas of the landfill will require control, so collection systems
should be designed to allow expansion by the addition of further
collection system components to collect gas, or separate collections
systems will need to be installed as the new areas require control.
The BDT control device is a combustion device capable of reducing
NMOC emissions by 98 weight-percent. While energy recovery is strongly
recommended, the cost analysis is based on open flares because they are
applicable to all affected and designated facilities regulated by the
standards and EG. If an owner or operator uses an enclosed combustor,
the device must demonstrate either 98-percent NMOC reduction or an
outlet NMOC concentration of 20 ppmv or less. Alternatively, the
collected gas may be treated for subsequent sale or use, provided that
all emissions from any atmospheric vent from the treatment system are
routed to a control device meeting either specification above.
The standards and EG require that three conditions be met prior to
capping or removal of the collection and control system: (1) The
landfill must be permanently closed under the requirements of 40 CFR
258.60; (2) the collection and control system must have been in
continuous operation a minimum of 15 years; and (3) the annual NMOC
emission rate routed to the control device must be less than the
emission rate cutoff on three successive dates, between 90 and 180 days
apart, based upon the site-specific landfill gas flow rate and average
NMOC concentration.
Section VI.E. of this preamble describes a new section of the NSPS,
Sec. 60.753, ``Operational Standards for Collection and Control
Systems.'' The EG also refer to this section. The
[[Page 9908]]
provisions in this section include: (1) Collection of gas from each
area, cell or group of cells in which non-asbestos degradable solid
waste has been placed for a period of 5 years or more for active areas
or 2 years or more for closed areas; (2) operation of the collection
system with each wellhead under negative pressure, with a nitrogen
level less than or equal to 20 percent (revised from 1 percent in the
proposal, based on public comments) or an oxygen level less than or
equal to 5 percent (a new provision); (3) operation with a landfill gas
temperature less than 55 deg.C (a new provision) at each well
transporting the collected gases to a treatment or control device
designed and operated in compliance with Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(iii) of the
NSPS and operated at all times when the collected gas is vented to it;
and (4) a requirement that the collection system be operated to limit
the surface methane concentration to 500 ppm or less over the landfill
as determined according to a specified monitoring pattern.
Owners and operators must determine compliance with the standards
for the collection systems and control devices according to
Sec. 60.755. Changes made to the final compliance determination and
monitoring procedures as a result of comments are discussed in detail
in the BID (EPA 453/R-94-021). The Secs. 60.757 and 60.758 of the NSPS
and Sec. 60.35(c) of the EG contain recordkeeping and reporting
requirements. Changes have been made to the recordkeeping and reporting
requirements to allow for consistency with the final compliance
requirements.
V. Impacts of the Standards and Emission Guidelines
A. Environmental Impacts of Promulgated Action
The estimated environmental impacts have changed somewhat from
those presented in the preamble to the proposed regulations as a result
of changes in the final rules and changes in the estimation
methodology. These changes were made in response to public comments.
Additional data were also incorporated and are described in the
supplemental Notice of Data Availability (56 FR 33790). The analysis of
environmental impacts presented in this document, along with the
proposal and promulgation BID's, and memoranda in the docket constitute
the Environmental Impact Statement for the final standards and
guidelines.
For most NSPS, emission reductions and costs are expressed in
annual terms. In the case of the NSPS and EG for landfills, the final
regulations require controls at a given landfill only after the
increasing NMOC emission rate reaches the level of the regulatory
cutoff. The controls are applied when the emissions exceed the
threshold, and they must remain in place until the emissions drop below
the cutoff. However, this process could take as long as 50 to 100
hundred years for some landfills. During the control period, costs and
emission reductions will vary from year to year. Therefore, the
annualized numbers for any impact will change from year to year.
Because of the variability of emission reductions and costs of the
final standards and EG over time, the EPA judged that the NPV of an
impact is a more valuable tool in the decision process for landfills
and has used NPV in the development of both the proposal and final
nationwide impacts. The NPV is computed by discounting the capital and
operating costs and emission reductions that will be incurred
throughout the control periods to arrive at a measure of their current
value. In this way, the NPV accounts for the unique emission patterns
of landfills when evaluating nationwide costs and benefits over
different discrete time periods for individual sources. Thus, the
impacts presented include both annualized estimates and estimates
expressed in terms of NPV in 1992.
1. Air Emissions
The methodology for estimating the impacts of the NSPS and EG is
discussed in the proposal BID and in memoranda in the docket. The
analysis of impacts for the NSPS is based on new landfills (beginning
construction after May 30, 1991) that are projected to begin accepting
waste over the first 5 years of the standards. The NPV of the emission
reduction achieved by the final standards is estimated to be 79,300 Mg,
which reflects a 50 percent reduction from the NPV of the baseline
emissions of 160,000 Mg. Substantial reduction of methane emissions is
also achieved. Table 1 presents the emission reductions of the final
NSPS in annualized values as well as NPV.
Table 1.--Summary of Emission Reduction and Cost Impacts for the NSPS
------------------------------------------------------------------------
NPV Annualized
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Baseline NMOC Emissions a (Mg).......... 160,000 13,400
NMOC Emission Reductions (Mg)........... 79,300 4,860
% NMOC Emission Reduction............... 50% 36%
Baseline Methane Emissions a (Mg)....... 10,600,000 899,000
Methane Emission Reduction b (Mg)....... 3,890,000 193,000
% Methane Emission Reduction............ 37% 21%
Cost (Million $)........................ 97 4
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a In the absence of an NSPS. This does not include landfills closed
prior to November 8, 1987.
b This does not enclude landfills expected to undertake profitable
energy recovery.
For existing landfills, the NPV of the NMOC emission reduction
achieved by the final EG is estimated to be 1.1 million Mg, or a 53
percent reduction from a baseline of 2.07 million Mg (NPV). The NPV of
the methane reduction is estimated to be 47 million Mg. Table 2
presents the emission reductions of the final EG in annualized values
as well as NPV. Note that the baseline methane emissions do not include
landfills closed prior to November 8, 1987, and that methane reductions
shown in Tables 1 and 2 do not include landfills expected to undertake
profitable energy recovery. Total methane reductions are anticipated to
be on the order of 7 million megagrams in the year 2000.
[[Page 9909]]
Table 2.--Summary of Emission Reduction and Cost Impacts for the
Emission Guidelines
------------------------------------------------------------------------
NPV Annualized
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Baseline NMOC Emissions a (Mg).......... 2,070,000 145,000
NMOC Emission Reductions (Mg)........... 1,100,000 77,600
% NMOC Emission Reduction............... 53% 54%
Baseline Methane Emissions b (Mg)....... 120,000,000 8,440,000
Methane Emission Reduction (Mg)......... 47,000,000 3,370,000
% Methane Emission Reduction............ 39% 40%
Cost (Million $)........................ 1,278 90
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a In the absence of EG. This does not include landfills closed prior to
November 8, 1987.
bThis does not enclude landfills expected to undertake profitable energy
recovery.
As existing landfills are filled, closed, and replaced by new
landfills, the actual annual emissions reductions achieved by the
guidelines will decrease, while the reductions achieved by the
standards will increase.
Certain by-product emissions, such as NOX, CO, SOX, and
particulates, may be generated by the combustion devices used to reduce
air emissions from MSW landfills. The types and quantities of these by-
product emissions vary depending on the control device. However, by-
product emissions are very low compared to the achievable NMOC and
methane emission reductions. Chapters 4 and 6 of the proposal BID (EPA-
450/3-90-011a) present additional information about the magnitude of
potential secondary air impacts.
2. Water
Landfill leachate is the primary potential source of water
pollution from a landfill. Although there is no data on the effect of
gas collection on leachate composition, the amount of water pollution
present as NMOC in the leachate may be reduced under these standards
and guidelines.
When LFG is collected, organics and water are condensed inside the
header pipes of the gas collection system. This waste also contains
NMOC and various toxic substances present in the LFG. The pH of this
condensate is normally adjusted by adding caustic at the landfill and
then routing it to a public treatment works where it would be treated
and discharged. At this time, there is insufficient data available to
quantify the effects of the rule on leachate.
3. Solid Waste
The final NSPS and EG will likely have little impact on the
quantity of solid waste generated nationwide. Aside from the disposal
of the collection and control system equipment once it can be removed
from the landfill, no other solid wastes are expected to be generated
by the required controls. The increased cost of landfill operation
resulting from the control requirements may cause greater use of waste
recycling and other alternatives to landfill disposal, leading to a
decrease in landfill use. However, quantification of such an impact is
not possible at this time.
4. Superfund Sites
Municipal solid waste landfill sites comprise approximately 20
percent of the sites placed by the EPA on the national priorities list.
Often, remedial actions selected at these sites include venting methane
and volatile organic contaminants, which would be controlled as
necessary to protect human health and the environment.
The final NSPS and EG may affect remedial actions under Superfund
for MSW landfills. Section 121(d)(2) of CERCLA requires compliance with
the substantive standards of applicable or relevant and appropriate
requirements (ARAR) of certain provisions in other environmental laws
when selecting and implementing on-site remedial actions.
``Applicable'' requirements specifically address a hazardous substance,
pollutant, contaminant, remedial action, location, or other
circumstance at a Superfund site. ``Relevant and appropriate''
requirements are not legally applicable, but may address problems or
situations sufficiently similar to those encountered so that their use
is well suited to a particular site. See 40 CFR 300.5 (55 FR 8814,
8817, March 8, 1990).
These air emission rules will apply to new MSW landfills, as well
as to those facilities that have accepted waste since November 8, 1987,
or that have capacity available for future use. For CERCLA municipal
landfill remediations, these requirements would be potential ARAR for
all Records of Decision signed after the date of promulgation. These
NSPS and EG will be applicable for those MSW landfill sites on the
national priorities list that accepted waste on or after November 8,
1987, or that are operating and have capacity for future use. These
standards may also be determined relevant and appropriate for sites
that accepted wastes prior to November 8, 1987. The determination of
relevance and appropriateness is made on a site-specific basis pursuant
to 40 CFR 300.400(g) (55 FR 8841, March 8, 1990). Because the NSPS and
EG apply only to landfills with design capacities greater than or equal
to 2.5 million Mg or 2.5 million cubic meters, the collection and
control requirements may not be relevant and appropriate for smaller
landfills.
Given the significant public policy benefits that result from the
collection and processing of landfill gas, Congress, as part of the
1986 SARA Amendments, enacted CERCLA Section 124 to provide broad
liability protection for companies engaged in landfill gas recovery or
processing. Landfill gas emissions, in addition to being a significant
source of air pollution, can leach underground and cause explosions in
nearby residences. If recovered, landfill gas could supply as much as 1
percent of the U.S. energy requirements.
CERCLA Section 124 states that owners or operators of equipment
installed ``for the recovery or processing (including recirculation of
condensate) of methane'' shall not be liable as a CERCLA ``owner or
operator'' under CERCLA Section 101 (20) nor shall they be deemed ``to
have arranged for disposal or treatment of any hazardous substance* *
*'' pursuant to CERCLA Section 107. Exceptions are provided (1) where a
release is primarily caused by activities of the landfill gas owner/
operator or (2) where such owner/operator would be otherwise liable due
to activities unrelated to methane recovery.
Since passage of CERCLA section 124, methane emissions have been
targeted by the EPA as a large contributor to global warming (18
percent) and landfills are one of the largest source of methane
emissions (36 percent). Because of this, the EPA's Atmospheric
Pollution Prevention Division has initiated the Landfill Methane
Outreach Program to promote landfill gas
[[Page 9910]]
collection projects at the 750 landfills where methane could profitably
be recovered. Methane recovery, as compared with collection and flaring
of landfill gas without recovery, results in significantly less
emissions. It also can greatly reduce the financial burden on local
governments (as well as taxpayers) since the energy recovered can be
sold to utilities or other consumers and thereby create a revenue
stream that may cover the costs of collection and recovery.
The EPA is aware that the standards and guidelines promulgated
today for control of emissions at municipal solid waste landfills may
change the focus of the landfill gas collection and processing for
methane recovery. The landfill gas owner/operator will now need to
consider how the collection and recovery of methane will impact on
controlling the MSW landfill emissions. It is also likely that the
landfill gas owner/operator will be asked to advise and in some cases
help implement the MSW landfill's compliance obligations. These related
objectives, the control of emissions at municipal solid waste landfills
in order to comply with the Clean Air Act Amendments and the reduction
of methane emissions in order to mitigate global warming, will need to
be coordinated in carrying out common activities such as laying a
system of collection piping at a given landfill.
In promulgating today's standards and guidelines, the EPA wants to
promote the policy incorporated in CERCLA Section 124. Recognizing the
chilling effect that potential CERCLA liability might otherwise have on
landfill gas collection or processing activities, the EPA interprets
CERCLA Section 124 in a manner that will encourage the beneficial
recovery of methane. Specifically, EPA believes that Congress intended
Section 124 to provide liability protection to owners and operators of
equipment for the recovery or processing of methane with respect to all
phases involved in landfill gas collection and methane processing. This
includes any assistance (related to recovery or processing of methane)
provided by the landfill gas equipment owner or operator to the
landfill owner/operator for achieving compliance with the emission
standards promulgated today or similar Federal, State, or local
controls on landfill emissions. In general, Section 124 will be
interpreted in a manner to provide owners and operators of equipment
for the recovery or processing of methane with comprehensive protection
from CERCLA liability, unless the release or threatened release was
primarily caused by activities of the owners and operators of the
equipment, or unless such owners or operators would be otherwise liable
under CERCLA.
B. Energy and Economic Impacts of Promulgated Action
The energy and economic impacts are summarized in chapter 1 and
fully discussed in chapter 3 and appendix A of the promulgation BID
(EPA-453/R-94-021). The estimated impacts have changed somewhat as a
result of changes in the final rules and changes in the impacts
estimation methodology made in response to public comments.
1. Energy Impacts
Affected and designated landfills with NMOC emission rates of 50
Mg/yr or more are required to install a gas collection system and
control device. The gas collection system would require a relatively
small amount of energy to run the blowers and the pumps. If a flare is
used for control, auxiliary fuel should not be necessary because of the
high heat content of LFG, commonly 1.86 x 10 \7\ J/scm or more. If a
recovery device such as an internal combustion (I.C.) engine or a gas
turbine is used, an energy savings would result.
The EPA evaluated the overall energy impacts resulting from the use
of flares, I.C. engines, or gas turbines for control of collected
emissions at all affected landfills. The least cost control option was
identified by taking the NPV costs of the three control options
(flares, I.C. engines, and turbines), including any cost savings from
the use of recovered landfill gas, and determining the option that
costs the least. If landfills use the least cost control device, it is
estimated that the NSPS will produce $170 million of energy revenue as
NPV in 1992. The EG are estimated to generated $1.5 billion of energy
revenue as NPV in 1992, if the least cost control device is used.
2. Control Costs and Economic Impacts
Nationwide annualized costs for collection and control of air
emissions from new MSW landfills are estimated to be $4 million. The
nationwide cost of the EG would be approximately $90 million. These
values are annualized costs. Tables 1 and 2 present costs in both
annualized and NPV values. In comparison to other solid waste-related
rules, the nationwide costs of the recently promulgated RCRA Subtitle D
(40 CFR 257 and 258) rule are estimated to be $300 million per year and
the estimated nationwide costs of the MWC rules promulgated in 1991 are
estimated to be $170 million per year for new combustors and $302
million per year for existing combustors (56 FR 5488 and 5514).
The incremental costs and benefits of the different options are
presented in tables 3, 4, 5, and 6 in section VIII.E. For NMOC, the
average cost effectiveness is approximately $1,200/Mg for both the NSPS
and the EG. Preliminary economic analysis indicates that the annual
cost of waste disposal may increase by an average of approximately
$0.60 per Mg for the NSPS and $1.30 per Mg for the EG. Costs per
household would increase approximately $2.50 to $5.00 per year, when
the household is served by a new or existing landfill, respectively.
Additionally, less than 10 percent of the households would face annual
increases of $15 or more per household as a result of the final EG.
However, the EPA anticipates that many landfills will elect to use
energy recovery systems, and costs per household for those areas would
be less. The EPA has concluded that households would not incur severe
economic impacts. For additional information, please refer to the
regulatory impact analysis (Docket No. A-88-09, Item No. IV-A-7) and
chapter 3 of the promulgation BID (EPA-453/R-94-021).
VI. Significant Changes to the Proposed Standards and Emission
Guidelines
All of the significant public comments received on the proposed
standards and EG and the Notice of Data Availability are addressed in
the promulgation BID (EPA-453/R-94-021). This section of the preamble
reviews the major changes to the standards and EG resulting from public
comments. A more detailed rationale for these changes is provided in
chapters 1 and 2 of the promulgation BID (EPA-453/R-94-021).
A. Design Capacity Exemption
A design capacity exemption of 100,000 Mg was included in the
proposed NSPS and EG to relieve owners and operators of small landfills
that the EPA considered unlikely to emit NMOC above the emission rate
cutoff requiring control from undue recordkeeping and reporting
responsibilities. Commenters indicated that the exemption level was too
low, and would still impact many small businesses and municipalities.
In response to these comments and as a result of changes to the
nationwide impacts analysis, the design capacity exemption in the final
NSPS was revised to 2.5 million Mg. The 2.5 million Mg exemption level
would exempt 90 percent of the existing landfills while only losing 15
percent of the total NMOC emission reduction. Most of the exempt
landfills are owned
[[Page 9911]]
by municipalities. The 2.5 million Mg level was chosen to relieve as
many small businesses and municipalities as possible from the
regulatory requirements while still maintaining significant emission
reduction.
This cutoff excludes those landfills who would be least able to
afford the costs of a landfill gas collection and control system and
are less likely to have successful energy recovery projects. However,
depending on site-specific factors including landfill gas
characteristics and local markets, some landfills smaller than the
design capacity exemption level may be able to make a profit by
installing collection and control systems that recover energy. While
the rule does not require control of landfills smaller than 2.5 million
Mg, the EPA encourages energy recovery in cases where it is profitable.
The EPA has developed a Landfill Methane Outreach Program to encourage
more widespread utilization of landfill gas as an energy source.
Information can be obtained by calling the Landfill Methane Outreach
Program Hotline at (202) 233-9042. Available publications are
identified in section 1.2.1 of the promulgation BID.
Since some landfills record waste by volume and have their design
capacities calculated in volume, the EPA also established an equivalent
design capacity exemption of 2.5 million m \3\ of waste. The density of
solid waste within different landfills varies depending on several
factors, including the compaction practices. Any landfill that reports
waste by volume and wishes to establish a mass design capacity must
document the basis for their density calculation.
B. Emission Rate Cutoff
Some commenters asserted that the proposed emission rate cutoff of
150 Mg/yr should be made more stringent, while others favored the
proposal cutoff or higher. The commenters favoring the more stringent
level indicated that the EPA's data on NMOC concentration, the benefits
of energy recovery and reduced global warming, and the reduced health
risks all supported an increased stringency level.
The Climate Change Action Plan, signed by the President in October,
1993, calls for EPA to promulgate a ``tough'' landfill gas rule as soon
as possible. This initiative also supports a more stringent emission
rate cutoff that will achieve greater emission reduction.
Due to the small-size exemption, only landfills with design
capacities greater than 2.5 million Mg of waste or 2.5 million cubic
meters of waste will be affected by this rule. It is estimated that a
landfill of 2.5 million Mg design capacity corresponds to cities
greater than about 125,000 people. On the whole, large landfills
service areas with large population. A reasonable assumption is that
many of these large landfills are in the 400 counties that have been
designated as urban ozone nonattainment areas and are developing plans
to address ozone nonattainment.
Finally, the new data and modeling methodologies, which were
published in the Notice of Data Availability on June 21, 1993,
significantly reduced the emission reduction and corresponding
effectiveness of the rule. Therefore, a more stringent emission rate
cutoff would achieve similar emission reductions at similar cost
effectiveness to the proposed rule.
Based on all of these reasons, the EPA reevaluated the stringency
level and chose an emission rate cutoff of 50 Mg/yr of NMOC for the
final rules. This revision would affect more landfills than the
proposal value of 150 Mg/yr of NMOC; however, the 50 Mg/yr of NMOC will
only affect less than 5 percent of all landfills and is estimated to
reduce NMOC emissions by approximately 53 percent and methane emissions
by 39 percent. The 150 Mg/yr emission rate cutoff would have reduced
NMOC emissions by 45 percent and methane emissions by 24 percent. The
incremental cost effectiveness of control of going from a 150 Mg/yr
cutoff level to a 50 Mg/yr cutoff level is $2,900/Mg NMOC reduction for
new landfills and $3,300/Mg for existing landfills.
The values for NMOC cost effectiveness do not include any credit
for the benefits for toxics, odor, explosion control, or the indirect
benefit of methane control. A revised cost effectiveness could be
calculated with an assumed credit value for one or more of the other
benefits. As an example, assuming a $30/Mg credit for the methane
emission reduction, the incremental cost effectiveness from the
proposal cutoff of 150 Mg/yr to the final cutoff of 50 Mg/yr would be
reduced to $660/Mg NMOC.
C. Collection System Design Specifications
Commenters indicated that the proposed design specifications for
the collection system were overly prescriptive, discouraged innovation,
and did not prevent off-site migration of LFG. In the new Sec. 60.759
for design specifications, certain criteria still require proper
landfill gas collection; however, the proposed design specifications
for the LFG collection system were removed from the final regulations.
Instead, the final rule allows sources to design their own collection
systems. Design plans must meet certain requirements and be signed by a
registered professional engineer, and are subject to agency approval.
These changes were made to provide flexibility and encourage
technological innovation.
D. Timing for Well Placement
The proposed regulations required the installation of collection
wells at applicable landfills within 2 years of initial waste
placement. Commenters indicated that the installation of wells within 2
years was not practiced at many landfills, because many cells were
still active (receiving waste) 2 years after initial placement.
Collection wells installed at these cells would have to be covered
over, which would decrease the operational life of the well and be
costly and inefficient.
The proposed timing for the placement of collection wells has been
revised to reduce costs and better coincide with common operational
practices at MSW landfills. The final regulation allows for well
installation up to 5 years from initial waste placement for active
cells. An area that reaches final grade or closure must install
collection wells within 2 years of initial waste placement.
E. Operational Standards
In response to commenters concerns about the operation of
collection systems, the final NSPS contains a new section, Sec. 60.753,
``Operational Standards for Collection and Control Equipment.'' Various
operational provisions that had previously been located throughout the
proposed rule have been organized under this one section, and new
provisions on collection and control systems have been added. The new
section addresses the following areas: (1) Collection of gas from
active areas containing solid waste older than 5 years (changed from 2
years at proposal); (2) operation of the collection system with
negative pressure at each wellhead (except as noted in the rule); (3)
operation of the collection system with a landfill temperature less
than 55 deg. (or a higher established temperature) and either an
N2 level less than or equal to 20 percent or an O2 level less
than or equal to 5 percent; (4) operation of the collection system with
a surface concentration less than 500 ppm methane; (5) venting all
collected gases to a treatment or control device; and (6) operation of
the treatment or control device at all times when the collected gas is
routed to the control device. The numerical requirements (for the
N2 or O2 levels, landfill temperature,
[[Page 9912]]
and surface concentration) are new requirements that will verify that
the system is being adequately operated and maintained. In conjunction
with the new operational provisions, the compliance, testing and
monitoring sections were revised to reference and support these new or
relocated provisions.
F. Surface Emission Monitoring
Numerous commenters asserted that the proposed rules did not
address surface methane emissions resulting from insufficient well
spacing or from breaks in the cover material. The commenters
recommended that monitoring of surface emissions be required to ensure
the proper operation of collection system equipment. Upon further
analysis, the EPA decided to require surface emission monitoring and
the maintenance of negative pressure at all wells, except under
specified conditions, to ensure proper collection system design and
operation. Based on information submitted by commenters, a maximum
surface concentration of 500 ppm methane should be demonstrated to
indicate proper operation of the collection system. Monitoring is to be
done quarterly, with provisions for increasing monitoring and
corrective procedures if readings above 500 ppm are detected.
Instrumentation specifications, monitoring frequencies, and monitoring
patterns have been structured to provide clear and straight-forward
procedures that are the minimum necessary to assure compliance.
G. Model Default Values
The EPA received additional data after proposal on the model
defaults that were included in the tier system calculations. These
default values are used to calculate whether the NMOC concentration is
above the cutoff level for control requirements of 50 Mg/yr. The new
information received lead the EPA to revise the default values for the
site-specific methane generation rate constant (k), the methane
generation potential (Lo), and the NMOC concentration
(CNMOC). In the absence of site-specific data, the landfill owner
or operator would use the default values for k, Lo, and CNMOC
in order to estimate the annual NMOC emission rate. More information on
the model defaults may be found in the final BID (EPA-453/R-94-021) and
the memorandum ``Documentation of Small-Size Exemption Cutoff Level and
Tier 1 Default Values (Revised),'' October 21, 1993, (Docket No. A-88-
09, Item No. IV-B-5).
The Tier 1 default values of k, Lo, and CNMOC tend to
overstate NMOC emission rates for most landfills, and are intended to
be used to indicate the need to install a collection and control system
or perform a more detailed Tier 2 analysis. It is recommended that
these default values not be used for estimating landfill emissions for
purposes other than the NSPS and EG. The EPA document ``Compilation of
Air Pollution Emission Factors'' (AP-42) provides emission estimation
procedures and default values that can be used for emissions
inventories and other purposes.
VII. Permitting
A. New Source Review Permits
Today's rulemaking under section 111(b) establishes a new
classification of pollutants subject to regulation under the CAA: ``MSW
landfill emissions.'' Therefore, PSD rules now apply to all subject
stationary sources which have increases in landfill gas above the
significance level, 50 tpy or more of NMOC. Landfills below the 2.5
million Mg design capacity exemption, which are not required by the
regulations to install controls, may exceed this significance level. In
this case, the State will need to determine if controls should be
installed for purposes of PSD or NSR compliance.
The proposed significance level for MSW landfill emissions of 40
tpy of NMOC was changed to 50 tpy after consideration of public
comments. The PSD significance level for VOC emissions is 40 tpy. At
proposal, the landfill gas emission level was set at 40 tpy of NMOC to
be consistent with the 40 tpy level for VOC. However, NMOC contains
organic compounds that are not VOC. An NMOC emission rate of roughly 50
tpy corresponds to a VOC emission rate of 40 tpy.
The components of MSW landfill emissions that are regulated as
pollutants or precursors of an air pollutant listed under section 108
of the CAA are also regulated by other provisions of CAA as applicable.
For example, the components of MSW landfill emissions that are emitted
as photochemically reactive VOCs are regulated, as applicable, under
the nonattainment provisions for ozone contained in part D of title I
of the CAA.
B. Operating Permits
Section 502 of the CAA and Sec. 70.3(a) require any source subject
to standards or regulations under section 111 of the CAA to obtain part
70 operating permits. However, landfills below 2.5 million Mg design
capacity are not subject to standards under section 111 because they
are not required to put on controls and are not subject to emission
limits. These landfills are subject to a reporting requirement under
the section 111 rule; however, this requirement determines
applicability of the standard and does not make them ``subject'' for
the purposes of part 70. Consequently, landfills below 2.5 million Mg
design capacity are not subject to part 70, provided they are not major
sources; and this is stated in Sec. 60.752(a) of the rule. If landfills
below 2.5 million Mg design capacity are major sources, they must
obtain a part 70 permit under the same deadlines and requirements that
apply to any other major source. States may request additional
information to verify whether landfills have the potential to emit at
major source levels.
For landfills above the 2.5 million Mg design capacity exemption,
part 70 operating permits are required. These landfills are subject to
emission limits and will most often be major sources. Since landfill
emissions increase over time, a landfill over 2.5 million Mg may not be
major in the beginning; however, as the landfill progresses to
capacity, it may become major. Many of the landfills above the 2.5
million Mg exemption will be required to collect and control the gas
under the regulation. The issuance of a permit will also help enforce
and implement the standard. Therefore, the EPA has decided to require
permits for all landfills with design capacities above 2.5 million Mg,
whether or not the landfill will be required to install a collection
and control system.
The regulation also provides for termination of operating permits.
Landfill emissions, unlike emissions from other source categories,
decrease over time after the landfill is closed. If a landfill has
closed and a control system was never required or the conditions for
control system removal specified in the regulation have been met, an
operating permit is no longer necessary.
VIII. Administrative Requirements
A. Docket
The docket (Docket No. A-88-09) is an organized and complete file
of all the information considered by the EPA in the development of this
rulemaking. The docket is a dynamic file, since material is added
throughout the rulemaking development. The docketing system is intended
to allow members of the public and industries involved to readily
identify and locate documents so that they can effectively participate
in the rulemaking process. Along with
[[Page 9913]]
the statement of basis and purpose of the proposed and promulgated
standards and the EPA responses to significant comments, the contents
of the docket, except for interagency review materials, will serve as
the record in case of judicial review [section 307(d)(7)(A)].
B. Paperwork Reduction Act
The information collection requirements in this rule have been
submitted for approval to the Office of Management and Budget (OMB)
under the Paperwork Reduction Act, 44 U.S.C. 3501 et seq. An
Information Collection Request (ICR) document has been prepared by the
EPA (ICR No. 1557.03) and a copy may be obtained from Sandy Farmer,
OPPE Regulatory Information Division; U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (2137); 401 M St., S.W.; Washington, DC 20460, or by calling
(202) 260-2740. The information requirements are not effective until
OMB approves them.
The information required to be collected by this rule is necessary
to identify the regulated entities who are subject to the rule and to
ensure their compliance with the rule. The recordkeeping and reporting
requirements are mandatory and are being established under authority of
section 114 of the Act. All information submitted as part of a report
to the Agency for which a claim of confidentiality is made will be
safeguarded according to the Agency policies set forth in title 40,
chapter 1, part 2, subpart B--Confidentiality of Business Information
(see 40 CFR 2; 41 FR 36902, September 1, 1976, amended by 43 FR 39999,
September 28, 1978; 43 FR 42251, September 28, 1978; 44 FR 17674, March
23, 1979).
The total annual reporting and recordkeeping burden for this
collection, averaged over the first 3 years of the NSPS applicability
to new MSW landfills, is estimated to be 3,379 person hours per year.
This is the estimated burden for 299 respondents (e.g., MSW landfill
owners/operators) per year, at an estimated annual reporting and
recordkeeping burden averaging 11.3 hours per respondent. The rule
requires an initial one-time notification of landfill design capacity.
If the landfill is larger than the design capacity cutoff, annual
reports are required. The capital cost to purchase required monitoring
equipment is $8,100 per monitor. The total annualized capital and
startup costs for purchase of monitoring equipment are $80,250. The
total national annual cost burden including all labor costs and
annualized capital costs for recordkeeping and reporting is $188,850.
Burden means the total time, effort, or financial resources
expended by persons to generate, maintain, retain, or disclose or
provide information to or for a Federal agency. This includes the time
needed to review instructions; develop, acquire, install, and utilize
technology and systems for the purposes of collecting, validating, and
verifying information, processing and maintaining information, and
disclosing and providing information; adjust the existing ways to
comply with any previously applicable instructions and requirements;
train personnel to be able to respond to a collection of information;
search data sources; complete and review the collection of information;
and transmit or otherwise disclose the information.
C. Executive Order 12866
Under Executive Order 12866, (58 FR 51735 (October 4, 1993)) the
EPA must determine whether the regulatory action is ``significant'' and
therefore subject to OMB review and the requirements of the Executive
Order. The Order defines ``significant regulatory action'' as one that
is likely to result in a rule that may: (1) Have an annual effect on
the economy of $100 million or more or adversely effect in a material
way the economy, a sector of the economy, productivity, competition,
jobs, the environment, public health or safety, or State, local, or
Tribal governments or communities; (2) create a serious inconsistency
or otherwise interfere with an action taken or planned by another
agency; (3) materially alter the budgetary impact of entitlement,
grants, user fees, or loan programs or the rights and obligations of
recipients thereof; or (4) raise novel legal or policy issues arising
out of legal mandates, the President's priorities, or the principles
met forth in the Executive Order.
Pursuant to the terms of Executive Order 12866, this action was
submitted to OMB for review. Changes made in response to OMB
suggestions or recommendations are documented in the public record.
D. Executive Order 12875
To reduce the burden of Federal regulations on States and small
governments, the President issued E.O. 12875 on October 26, 1993. Under
E.O. 12875, the EPA is required to consult with representatives of
affected State, local, and tribal governments. Because this regulatory
action imposes costs to the private sector and government entities in
excess of $100 million per year, the EPA pursued the preparation of an
unfunded mandates statement, consultations, and other requirements of
the Unfunded Mandates Reform Act. The requirements are met as presented
under the following unfunded mandates section (section VIII.E of this
notice).
E. Unfunded Mandate Reform Act
Under section 202 of the Unfunded Mandates Reform Act of 1995
(``Unfunded Mandates Act''), signed into law on March 22, 1995, the EPA
must prepare a statement to accompany any rule where the estimated
costs to State, local, or tribal governments, or to the private sector,
will be $100 million or more per year. Section 203 requires the Agency
to establish a plan for informing and advising any small governments
that may be significantly or uniquely affected by the rule. Section 204
requires that the Agency ``to the extent permitted in law, develop an
effective process to permit elected officers of State, local, and
tribal governments * * * to provide meaningful and timely input in the
development of regulatory proposals containing significant Federal
intergovernmental mandates''. Under section 205(a), the EPA must select
the ``least costly, most cost-effective or least burdensome alternative
that achieves the objectives of the rule'' and is consistent with
statutory requirements.
The unfunded mandates statement under section 202 must include: (1)
A citation of the statutory authority under which the rule is proposed,
(2) an assessment of the costs and benefits of the rule including the
effect of the mandate on health, safety and the environment, and the
Federal resources available to defray the costs, (3) where feasible,
estimates of future compliance costs and disproportionate impacts upon
particular geographic or social segments of the nation or industry, (4)
where relevant, an estimate of the effect on the national economy, and
(5) a description of the EPA's consultation with State, local, and
tribal officials.
Because this rule is estimated to impose costs to the private
sector and governments entities in excess of $100 million per year
(based on tenth or fifteenth year annualized values), it is considered
a significant regulatory action.
The EPA has thus prepared the following statement with respect to
sections 202 through 205 of the Unfunded Mandates Act.
1. Statutory Authority
As discussed in section II of this preamble, the statutory
authority for this rulemaking is section 111 of the CAA. The rule
establishes emission guidelines
[[Page 9914]]
for existing MSW landfills and standards of performance for new MSW
landfills. Section 111(a)(1) of the requires that standards of
performance for new sources reflect the--
* * * degree of emission limitation and the percentage reduction
achievable through application of the best technological system of
continuous emission reduction which (taking into consideration the
cost of achieving such emission reduction, any nonair quality health
and environmental impact and energy requirements) the Administrator
determines has been adequately demonstrated.
Section 111(d) requires emission guidelines for existing sources to
reflect a similar degree of emission reduction.
These systems are referred to as BDT for new and existing sources.
Properly operated gas collection and control systems achieving 98
percent emission reduction have been demonstrated on landfills of the
size affected by the standards and EG, and represent BDT. Control
technologies and their performance are discussed in the preamble to the
proposed rules (56 FR 24476, May 30, 1991).
In selecting BDT, the EPA also considered which landfills should be
required to apply collection and control systems. A range of landfill
design capacity and emission rate cutoffs were evaluated, as described
below in section 2.b ``Regulatory Alternatives Considered.'' The
promulgated standards contain a design capacity exemption of 2.5
million Mg or 2.5 million cubic meters and an emission rate cutoff of
50 Mg NMOC/yr.
The EPA considered emission reduction, costs, and energy
requirements, as required by the statutory language of section 111 of
the CAA, in selecting the promulgated standards and EG. The promulgated
standards represent BDT. They achieve significant reductions in
landfill gas emissions--a 53 percent reduction in NMOC emissions, and a
39 percent reduction in methane reduction emissions nationwide. The
cost impacts of the standards are presented in section V.B and in
section VII.E.2 (below). The public entities and affected industries
who were consulted, as required by the Unfunded Mandates Reform Act,
understand the cost impacts and support the final rules (see Section 4,
``Consultation with Government Officials'' below). The energy impacts
are discussed in section V.B of this notice. To the extent energy
recovery devices are used to comply with the rules, the rules will
result in a net energy savings (production of energy).
Compliance with section 205(a): Regarding the EPA's compliance with
section 205(a), the EPA did identify and consider a reasonable number
of alternatives, and presents a summary of these below. The EPA has
chosen to adopt the alternative with a size cutoff of 2.5 million Mg
capacity, and 50 Mg/yr emissions. The incremental cost effectiveness of
this 50 Mg/yr option is $6,250 per ton of NMOC reduced (versus the less
stringent 75 Mg/yr option). This cost effectiveness is much higher than
is typical for NMOC (or VOC) controls in NSPSs. However, the EPA also
considers the reductions in methane achieved by this 50 Mg/yr option as
necessary to ``achieve the objectives'' of section 111. The additional
methane reductions achieved by this option are also an important part
of the total carbon reductions identified under the Administration's
1993 Climate Change Action Plan. The EPA thus concludes that the chosen
alternative is the most cost-effective to achieve the objectives of
section 111, as called for in section 205(a).
2. Social Costs and Benefits
This assessment of the cost and benefits to State, local, and
tribal governments of the guidelines is based on EPA's ``Economic
Impact Analysis for Proposed Emission Standards and Guidelines for
Municipal Solid Waste Landfills'' and updates to the analysis contained
in ``Air Emissions from Municipal Solid Waste Landfills--Background
Information for Final Standards and Guidelines'' (EPA-453/R-94-021).
Measuring the social costs of the guidelines requires identification of
the affected entities by ownership (public or private), consideration
of regulatory alternatives, calculation of the regulatory compliance
costs for each affected entity, and assessment of the market
implications of the additional pollution control costs. Considering the
social benefits of the guidelines requires estimating the anticipated
reductions in emissions at MSW landfills due to regulation and
identifying the harmful effects of exposure to MSW landfill emissions.
Quantitative valuation of the expected benefits to society was not done
for this rule.
a. Affected Entities. The standards of performance for new sources
will require control of approximately 43 new landfills constructed in
the first 5 years the standards are in effect. The EG will require
control of approximately 312 existing landfills. This represents less
than 5 percent of the total number of landfills in the U.S.
Of the landfills required to install controls, about 30 percent of
the existing landfills and 20 percent of the new landfills are
privately owned. The remainder are publicly owned. (These percentages
are taken from section 3.2.1 of the promulgation BID (EPA-453/R-94-
021). While that analysis used a design capacity exemption level of 1
million Mg rather than the 2.5 million Mg exemption level contained in
the final rule, the percentage of private versus publicly owned
landfills would be similar.
b. Regulatory Alternatives Considered. Under section 205 of the
Unfunded Mandates Act, the Agency must identify and consider a
reasonable number of regulatory alternatives before promulgating a rule
for which a budgetary impact statement must be prepared. The Agency
must select from those alternatives the least costly, most cost-
effective, or least burdensome alternative that achieves the objectives
of the rule, unless the Agency explains why this alternative is not
selected or the selection of this alternative is inconsistent with the
law.
A number of alternatives were considered. These included design
capacity exemption levels of 1, 2.5, and 3 million Mg and emission rate
cutoffs of 50, 75, 100, and 150 Mg/year. Table 3 presents the impacts
of alternative design capacity exemption levels for existing landfills.
Table 4 presents the impacts of alternative emission rate cutoffs for
existing landfills. Tables 5 and 6 present alternative design capacity
exemption levels and emission rate cutoffs for new landfills.
Table 3.--Alternative Design Capacity Exemption Level Options for the Emission Guidelines a,b,
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Annuald
Number Annual c methane Annual cost NMOC average NMOC
Small size cutoff (millions landfills NMOC emission (million $/ cost eff. ($/ Incremental
Mg) affected emission reduction yr) Mg) cost eff. ($/
reduction (Mg/yr) Mg)
-----------------------------------------------(Mg/yr)----------------------------------------------------------
Baseline e
3,000,000................... 273 73,356 3,220,000 84 1,145 1,145
[[Page 9915]]
2,500,000................... 312 77,600 3,370,000 89 1,147 1,178
1,000,000................... 572 97,600 3,990,000 119 1,219 1,500
No cutoff f................. 7,299 142,000 8,270,000 719 5,063 13,514
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Emission rate cutoff level of 50 Mg NMOC/yr.
b All values are fifth year annualized.
c NMOC emission reductions are from a baseline of 145,000 Mg NMOC/yr.
d Methane emission reductions are from a baseline of 8,400,000 Mg methane/yr.
e In the absence of an emission guidelines.
f No emission rate cutoff and no design capacity exemption level.
Table 4.--Alternative NMOC Emission Rate Stringency Level Options for the Emission Guidelines a,b
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Annual d
Number Annual c methane Annual cost NMOC average NMOC
Emission rate cutoff (Mg landfills NMOC emission (million $/ cost eff. ($/ Incremental
NMOC/yr) affected emission reduction yr) Mg) cost eff. ($/
reduction (Mg/yr) Mg)
-----------------------------------------------(Mg/yr)----------------------------------------------------------
Baseline e..................
150......................... 142 66,600 2,210,000 51 766 766
100......................... 201 72,700 2,720,000 66 908 2,459
75.......................... 250 76,000 3,080,000 79 1,039 3,939
50.......................... 312 77,600 3,370,000 89 1,147 6,250
No cutoff f................. 7,299 142,000 8,270,000 719 5,063 9,783
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Design capacity exemption level of 2,500,000 Mg of refuse.
b All values are fifth year annualized.
c NMOC emission reductions are from a baseline of 145,000 Mg NMOC/yr.
d Methane emission reductions are from a baseline of 8,400,000 Mg methane/yr.
e In the absence of an emission guidelines.
f No emission rate cutoff and no design capacity exemption level.
Table 5.--Alternative Design Capacity Exemption Level Options for the New Source Performance Standards a, b
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Annual d
Number Annual c methane Annual e NMOC average NMOC f
Small size cutoff (millions landfills NMOC emission cost cost eff. ($/ Incremental
Mgr) affected emission reduction (million $/ Mg) cost eff. ($/
reduction (Mg/yr) yr) Mg)
-----------------------------------------------(Mg/yr)----------------------------------------------------------
Baseline g..................
3,000,000................... 41 4,900 193,000 4 816 N/A
2,500,000................... 43 4,900 193,000 4 816 N/A
1,000,000................... 89 4,900 193,000 4 816 N/A
No cutoff h................. 872 13,115 881,000 81 6,176 N/A
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Emission rate cutoff level of 50 Mg NMOC/yr.
b All values are fifth year annualized.
c NMOC emission reductions are from a baseline of 13,400 Mg NMOC/yr.
d Methane emission reductions are from a baseline of 899,000 Mg
FR Doc. 96-5529 Standards of Performance for New Stationary Sources and Guidelines for Control of Existing Sources: Municipal Solid Waste Landfills
methane/yr.
e Due to rounding off to the nearest million dollar, cost values do not appear to change for each option.
However, actual costs are slightly less for a less stringent option.
f Because the annual cost does not change enough to show a different cost from one option to the next,
incremental cost effectiveness values are not applicable.
g In the absence of a standard.
h No emission rate cutoff and no design capacity exemption level.
Table 6.--Alternative NMOC Emission Rate Stringency Level Options for the New Source Performance Standards a,b
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Annual c,d Annual c,e
Number NMOC methane Annual f NMOC average NMOC g
Emission rate cutoff (Mg landfills emission emission cost cost eff. ($/ Incremental
NMOC/yr) affected reduction reduction (million $/ Mg) cost eff. ($/
(Mg/yr) (Mg/yr) yr) Mg)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Baseline h..................
150......................... 14 5,200 187,000 4 769 NA
100......................... 25 5,100 203,000 4 784 NA
75.......................... 33 5,000 194,000 4 800 NA
[[Page 9916]]
50.......................... 43 4,900 193,000 4 816 NA
No Cutoff i................. 872 13,115 881,000 81 6,176 NA
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Design capacity exemption level of 2,500,000 Mg of refuse.
b All values are fifth year annualized.
c Because of the small number of landfills and the longer time period of control for a given landfill at a more
stringent option, the average annual emission reduction appears to decrease for a more stringent option.
However, the emission reduction for a given year increase for more stringent options.
d NMOC emission reductions are from a baseline of 13,400 Mg NMOC/yr.
e Methane emission reductions are from a baseline of 899,000 Mg NMOC/yr.
f Due to rounding off to the nearest million dollar, cost values do not appear to change for each option.
However, actual costs are slightly less for a less stringent option.
g Because the annual cost does not change enough to show a different cost from one option to the next,
incremental cost effectiveness values are not applicable.
h In the absence of a standard.
i No emission rate cutoff and no design capacity exemption level.
The design capacity cutoff of 2.5 million Mg or 2.5 million cubic
meters was chosen as a result of changes to the nationwide impacts
analysis and to relieve as many small businesses and municipalities as
possible from the regulatory requirements while still maintaining
significant emission reduction. The 2.5 million Mg cutoff level exempts
landfills that serve populations of less than about 125,000 people from
periodic reporting and control requirements. This cutoff excludes those
landfills who would be least able to afford the costs of a landfill gas
collection and control system. A less stringent design capacity
exemption level (e.g., 3 million Mg) was not selected because it would
result in less emissions reductions. A more stringent design capacity
exemption level (e.g., 1 million Mg) was not selected because it would
increase the number of landfills required to apply control by over 80
percent (572 vs. 312 existing landfills) while only achieving an
additional 25 percent NMOC emission reduction (see table 3). It would
also increase national costs and subject smaller government entities to
the regulatory requirements, since smaller governments typically
operate smaller landfills.
The emission rate cutoff of 50 Mg/yr of NMOC was chosen because, in
conjunction with the 2.5 million Mg design capacity cutoff, it will
require control of less than 5 percent of all landfills, yet is
estimated to reduce NMOC emissions by approximately 53 percent and
methane emissions by 39 percent. The Climate Change Action Plan, signed
by the President in October 1993, calls for the EPA to promulgate a
``tough'' landfill gas rule as soon as possible.
The average cost effectiveness is about $1,150/Mg NMOC (see table
4). While the incremental cost effectiveness for NMOC control of going
from a cutoff of 75 Mg/yr to a 50 Mg/yr cutoff is high ($6,250/Mg
NMOC), this value does not include any credit for the benefits of
toxics, odor, explosion control, or the indirect benefit of methane
control. The economic analysis indicated that the final rule (including
the 50 Mg/yr cutoff level) would cause a relatively small increase in
waste disposal costs compared to the current costs and would not result
in severe economic impacts on households (see section C. ``Social
Costs'' below).
A more stringent option (e.g., no cutoff) was not chosen because
the average and incremental cost and cost effectiveness was not
reasonable (see table 4). Less stringent emission rate cutoff levels
were not chosen because they result in less NMOC and methane reduction,
and would not be consistent with the section 111 statutory requirement
to base emission standards on BDT.
The public entities with whom the EPA consulted understood the
EPA's concerns regarding the loss of emission reductions by changing
the proposed capacity exemption level from 100,000 Mg to 5 million Mg
and agreed that 2.5 million relieved 90 percent of the landfills from
the burden of regulation and was reasonable.
c. Social Costs. The regulatory compliance costs of reducing air
emissions from MSW landfills include the total and annualized capital
costs; operating and maintenance costs; monitoring, inspection,
recordkeeping, and reporting costs; and total annual costs. The
annualized capital cost is calculated using a 7 percent discount rate.
The total annual cost is calculated as the sum of the annualized
capital cost; operating and maintenance costs; and the monitoring,
inspection, recordkeeping, and reporting costs.
The total nationwide annualized cost for collection and control of
air emissions from new MSW landfills are estimated to be $4 million.
The nationwide costs of the EG for existing landfills is estimated to
be about $90 million. The annual cost of waste disposal is estimated to
increase by an average of $0.60/Mg for the NSPS and $1.30/Mg for the
EG. Costs per household would increase by approximately $2.50 to $5.00
per year for households served by a new or existing landfill,
respectively, that is required to install a collection and control
system. Because the rule requires control of only about 5 percent of
the landfills in the U.S. many households would experience no increase
in disposal costs. Furthermore, if affected landfills choose to use
energy recovery systems, the cost per household in those areas would be
less. The EPA has concluded that households would not incur severe
economic impacts. For additional information, please refer to the
regulatory impacts analysis (Docket No. A-88-09, Item IV-A-7) and
chapter 3 of the promulgation BID (EPA-453/R-94-021). There are no
Federal funds available to assist State and local governments in
meeting these costs.
d. Social Benefits. Society will benefit from the NSPS and EG
through the reduction of landfill gas emissions, including NMOC and
methane reductions. The total nationwide annualized emission reduction
of the EG is estimated to be 77,600 Mg/yr of NMOC and 3,370,000 Mg/yr
of methane.
[[Page 9917]]
The total nationwide annualized emission reduction for the NSPS is
about 4,900 Mg/yr of NMOC and 881,000 Mg/yr of methane.
The NMOC's present several hazards to human health. The NMOC's
participate in chemical reactions leading to the formation of ozone,
which causes health effects. Also, certain NMOC's have cancer risks and
cause noncancer health effects.
Ozone is created by sunlight acting on NOX and NMOC's in
ambient air. Ozone leads to alterations in pulmonary function,
aggravation of pre-existing respiratory disease, damage to lung
structure, and adverse effects on blood enzymes, the central nervous
system, and endocrine systems. Ozone also warrants control due to its
welfare effects, specifically, reduced plant growth, decreased crop
yield, necrosis of plant tissue, and deterioration of certain synthetic
materials such as rubber (Docket No. A-88-09, Item Nos. II-A-26, II-I-
16, etc.).
There is also concern about cancer risks from landfill NMOC
emissions. In reviewing limited emissions data from MSW landfills, EPA
identified both known and suspected carcinogens such as benzene, carbon
tetrachloride, chloroform, ethylene dichloride, methylene dichloride,
perchloroethylene, trichloroethylene, vinyl chloride, and vinylidene
chloride. Prior to proposal, the EPA attempted to apply statistical
methods to the limited data to generate the average annual increased
cancer incidence and the maximum individual risk (MIR). In evaluating
the result of the calculations for annual incidence and MIR, the EPA
could not determine reasonable estimates of either an annual incidence
or the MIR. The EPA concluded, at proposal, that the uncertainties in
the database are too great to calculate credible estimates of the
cancer risks associated with MSW landfills.
Another benefit of the NSPS and EG is reduced fire explosion hazard
through reduction of methane emissions. The EPA has documented many
cases of acute injury and death caused by explosions and fires related
to municipal landfill gas emissions. In addition to these health
effects, the associated property damage is a welfare effect.
Furthermore, when the migration of methane and the ensuring hazard are
identified, adjacent property values can be adversely affected (Docket
No. A-88-09, Item Nos. II-I-6, II-I-7, etc.)
Another aspect of MSW landfill emissions is the offensive odor
associated with landfills. While the nature of the wastes themselves
contribute to the problem of odor, the gaseous decomposition products
are often characteristically malodorous and unpleasant. Various welfare
effects may be associated with odors, but due to the subjective nature
of the impact and perception of odor, it is difficult to quantify these
effects. Studies indicate that unpleasant odors can discourage capital
investment and lower the socioeconomic status of an area. Odors have
been shown to interfere with daily activities, discourage facility use,
and lead to a decline in property values, tax revenues, and payroll
(Docket No. A-88-09, Item Nos. II-I-6, II-I-7, etc.)
An ancillary benefit from regulating air emissions from MSW
landfills is a reduction in the contribution of MSW landfill emissions
to global emissions of methane. Methane is a major greenhouse gas, and
is 20 to 30 times more potent than CO2 on a molecule-per-molecule
basis. This is due to the radiative characteristics of methane and
other effects methane has on atmospheric chemistry. There is a general
concern within the scientific community that the increasing emissions
of greenhouse gases could lead to climate change, although the rate and
magnitude of these changes are uncertain.
In conclusion, while the social benefits of the rule have not been
quantified, significant health and welfare benefits are expected to
result from the reduction in landfill gas emissions caused by the rule.
3. Effects on the National Economy
The Unfunded Mandates Act requires that the EPA estimate ``the
effect'' of this rule--
``on the national economy, such as the effect on productivity,
economic growth, full employment, creation of productive jobs, and
international competitiveness of the U.S. goods and services, if and
to the extent that the EPA in its sole discretion determines that
accurate estimates are reasonably feasible and that such effect is
relevant and material.''
As stated in the Unfunded Mandates Act, such macroeconomic effects
tend to be measurable, in nationwide econometric models, only if the
economic impact of the regulation reaches 0.25 to 0.5 percent of gross
domestic product (in the range of $1.5 billion to $3 billion). A
regulation with a smaller aggregate effect is highly unlikely to have
any measurable impact in macroeconomic terms unless it is highly
focused on a particular geographic region or economic sector. For this
reason, no estimate of this rule's effect on the national economy has
been conducted.
4. Consultation with Government Officials
The Unfunded Mandates Act requires that the EPA describe the extent
of the EPA's consultation with affected State, local, and tribal
officials, summarize the officials' comments or concerns, and summarize
the EPA's response to those comments or concerns. These goals were
addressed through meetings held with a number of public entities over
the course of six months. Those entities included the US Conference of
Mayors, the National League of Cities, the National Governor's
Association, the National Association of Counties, and the Solid Waste
Association of North America (SWANA). Through these meetings, these
entities were informed of the rule, educated about it, and advised as
to whether or not they would be impacted by it. These initial education
and information sharing meetings were followed by meetings in which
consultations and analysis of various alternatives took place.
Documentation of all meetings and public comments can be found in
Docket A-88-09.
Various concerns were discussed during the meetings. These concerns
included: (1) The design capacity cutoff; (2) collection wells, their
costing and installation requirements; (3) design specifications for
collection systems; (4) well head nitrogen measurement of 20 percent;
and (5) the surface monitoring requirements.
As a result of these consultations, the EPA decided to modify the
final regulatory package to address these concerns. In the final
regulatory package promulgated today: (1) The design capacity cutoff
has been raised from the proposed level of 100,000 to 2.5 million Mg;
(2) Changes were made to the way the costing algorithm calculates the
number of vertical collection wells. The rule was also changed to
require active areas to install wells 5 years from initial waste
placement instead of 2 years. Closed areas or areas at final grade must
install a collection system within 2 years; (3) Prescriptive design
specifications have been removed from the rule and replaced with
general criteria. The EPA is developing an Enabling Document to assist
State and local permitting agencies in their review of designs; (4)
Well head pressure monitoring can meet either 20 percent nitrogen or 5
percent oxygen; (5) Surface monitoring is to be done quarterly instead
of monthly, not to exceed 500 ppm methane above background.
These changes were made in response to consultations held regarding
burden of the regulation and as a result of new
[[Page 9918]]
data presented by the entities with whom the EPA met. A letter from the
Solid Waste Management of North America and SWAC to the EPA
demonstrates their support of this decision. Detailed summaries of the
meetings and the letter can be obtained from the Docket A-88-09.
Documentation of the EPA's consideration of comments on the
proposed standards and guidelines is provided in the BID's for the
proposed and final standards and guidelines. Refer to the ADDRESSES
section of this preamble for information on how to acquire copies of
these documents.
The final rule reflects a minimization of burden on small landfills
and does not create an unreasonable burden for large public entities.
The EPA has considered the purpose and intent of the Unfunded Mandate
Act and has determined the landfill NSPS and EG are needed.
F. Regulatory Flexibility Act
The Regulatory Flexibility Act (5 U.S.C. 601 et seq.) requires the
EPA to give special consideration to the impact of regulation on small
businesses, small organizations, and small governmental units. The
Regulatory Flexibility Act specifies that EPA must prepare an initial
regulatory flexibility analysis if a regulation will have a significant
economic impact on a substantial number of small entities.
Pursuant to section 605(b) of the Regulatory Flexibility Act, 5
U.S.C. 605(b), the Administrator certifies that this rule will not have
a significant economic impact on a substantial number of small
entities.
The final NSPS and Eg exempt small landfills that have a design
capacity below 2.5 million Mg of MSW. This design capacity exemption
will exempt landfills that serve communities of 125,000 people or less,
assuming the typical waste generation rate of 5 lb of waste per person
per day and an average landfill age of 20 years. Section 601 of the
Regulatory Flexibility Act defines a ``small governmental
jurisdiction'' as governments of cities, counties, towns, or other
districts with a population less than 50,000. The design capacity
exemption will exempt landfills that serve small governmental
jurisdictions. Therefore, the landfills NSPS and EG will have no impact
on small entities.
The NSPS and EG will require periodic emissions calculations or
control of emissions from only the largest 10 percent of landfills in
the U.S. By controlling these large landfills, the rules will
significantly reduce landfill gas emissions, which have adverse effects
on human health and welfare, contribute to global warming, and can
create odors and explosion hazards. In consideration of the potential
regulatory burden on small entities and in response to public comment,
the landfill design capacity in the proposed rule was raised to 2.5
million Mg/yr, thereby exempting small entities.
G. Miscellaneous
The effective date of this regulation is March 12, 1996. Section
111(b)(1)(B) of the CAA provides that standards of performance or
revisions thereof become effective upon promulgation and apply to
affected facilities of which the construction or modification was
commenced after the date of proposal, May 31, 1991.
As prescribed by section 111, the promulgation of these standards
was preceded by the Administrator's determination that MSW landfills
contribute significantly to air pollution that may reasonably be
anticipated to endanger public health or welfare. In accordance with
section 117 of the CAA, publication of these promulgated standards was
preceded by consultation with appropriate advisory committees,
independent experts, and Federal departments and agencies.
This regulation will be reviewed 4 years from the date of
promulgation as required by the CAA. This review will include an
assessment of such factors as the need for integration with other
programs, the existence of alternative methods, enforceability,
improvements in emission control technology, and reporting
requirements.
Section 317 of the CAA requires the Administrator to prepare an
economic impact assessment for any NSPS promulgated under section
111(b) of the CAA. An economic impact assessment was prepared for this
regulation and for other regulatory alternatives. All aspects of the
assessment were considered in the formulation of the standards to
ensure that cost was carefully considered in determining the BDT. The
economic impact assessment is included in the BID for the proposed
standards and in Chapter 3 of the promulgation BID.
List of Subjects
40 CFR Part 51
Environmental protection, Air pollution control.
40 CFR Part 52
Air pollution control.
40 CFR Part 60
Environmental protection, Air pollution control, Intergovernmental
relations, reporting and recordkeeping requirements, Municipal solid
waste landfills, Municipal solid waste.
Dated: March 1, 1996.
Carol M. Browner,
Administrator.
For the reasons set out in the preamble, title 40, chapter 1, parts
51, 52 and 60 of the Code of Federal Regulations are amended as
follows:
PART 51--REQUIREMENTS FOR PREPARATION, ADOPTION AND SUBMITTAL OF
IMPLEMENTATION PLANS
1. The authority citation for part 51 continues to read as follows:
Authority: 7401-7671q.
2. Section 51.166(b)(23)(i) is amended by adding an entry to the
end of the Pollutant and Emission Rate list to read as follows:
Sec. 51.166 Prevention of significant deterioration of air quality.
* * * * *
(b) * * *
(23) * * *
(i) * * * Municipal solid waste landfill emissions (measured as
nonmethane organic compounds): 45 megagrams per year (50 tons per year)
* * * * *
PART 52--APPROVAL AND PROMULGATION OF IMPLEMENTATION PLANS
3. The authority citation for part 52 continues to read as follows:
Authority: 42 U.S.C. 7401-7671q.
4. Section 52.21(b)(23)(i) is amended by adding an entry to the end
of the Pollutant and Emission Rate list to read as follows:
Sec. 52.21 Prevention of significant deterioration of air quality.
* * * * *
(b) * * *
(23) * * *
(i) * * * Municipal solid waste landfills emissions (measured as
nonmethane organic compounds): 45 megagrams per year (50 tons per year)
* * * * *
PART 60--STANDARDS OF PERFORMANCE FOR NEW STATIONARY SOURCES
5. The authority citation for part 60 continues to read as follows:
Authority: 42 U.S.C. 7401, 7411, 7414, 7416, and 7601.
6. Section 60.16 of subpart A is amended by adding an entry to the
end to read under Other Source Categories as follows:
[[Page 9919]]
Sec. 60.16 Priority list.
* * * * *
Other Source Categories
* * * * *
Municipal solid waste landfills.\4\
\4\ Not prioritized, since an NSPS for this major source
category has already been promulgated.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
* * * * *
7. Section 60.30 is amended by adding a new paragraph (c) to read
as follows:
Sec. 60.30 Scope.
* * * * *
(c) Subpart Cc--Municipal Solid Waste Landfills.
8. Part 60 is further amended by adding the Subpart Cc to read as
follows:
Subpart Cc--Emission Guidelines and Compliance Times for Municipal
Solid Waste Landfills
Sec.
60.30c Scope.
60.31c Definitions.
60.32c Designated facilities.
60.33c Emission guidelines for municipal solid waste landfill
emissions.
60.34c Test methods and procedures.
60.35c Reporting and recordkeeping guidelines.
60.36c Compliance times.
Subpart Cc--Emission Guidelines and Compliance Times for Municipal
Solid Waste Landfills
Sec. 60.30c Scope.
This subpart contains emission guidelines and compliance times for
the control of certain designated pollutants from certain designated
municipal solid waste landfills in accordance with section 111(d) of
the Act and subpart B.
Sec. 60.31c Definitions.
Terms used but not defined in this subpart have the meaning given
them in the Act and in subparts A, B, and WWW of this part.
Municipal solid waste landfill or MSW landfill means an entire
disposal facility in a contiguous geographical space where household
waste is placed in or on land. An MSW landfill may also receive other
types of RCRA Subtitle D wastes such as commercial solid waste,
nonhazardous sludge, conditionally exempt small quantity generator
waste, and industrial solid waste. Portions of an MSW landfill may be
separated by access roads. An MSW landfill may be publicly or privately
owned. An MSW landfill may be a new MSW landfill, an existing MSW
landfill or a lateral expansion.
Sec. 60.32c Designated facilities.
(a) The designated facility to which the guidelines apply is each
existing MSW landfill for which construction, reconstruction or
modification was commenced before May 30, 1991.
(b) Physical or operational changes made to an existing MSW
landfill solely to comply with an emission guideline are not considered
a modification or reconstruction and would not subject an existing MSW
landfill to the requirements of subpart WWW [see Sec. 60.750 of Subpart
WWW].
Sec. 60.33c Emission guidelines for municipal solid waste landfill
emissions.
(a) For approval, a State plan shall include control of MSW
landfill emissions at each MSW landfill meeting the following three
conditions:
(1) The landfill has accepted waste at any time since November 8,
1987, or has additional design capacity available for future waste
deposition;
(2) The landfill has a design capacity greater than or equal to 2.5
million megagrams or 2.5 million cubic meters. The landfill may
calculate design capacity in either megagrams or cubic meters for
comparison with the exemption values. Any density conversions shall be
documented and submitted with the report; and
(3) The landfill has a nonmethane organic compound emission rate of
50 megagrams per year or more.
(b) For approval, a State plan shall include the installation of a
collection and control system meeting the conditions provided in
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(ii) of this part at each MSW landfill meeting the
conditions in paragraph (a) of this section. The State plan shall
include a process for State review and approval of the site-specific
design plans for the gas collection and control system(s).
(c) For approval, a State plan shall include provisions for the
control of collected MSW landfill emissions through the use of control
devices meeting the requirements of paragraph (c)(1), (2), or (3) of
this section, except as provided in Sec. 60.24.
(1) An open flare designed and operated in accordance with the
parameters established in Sec. 60.18; or
(2) A control system designed and operated to reduce NMOC by 98
weight percent; or
(3) An enclosed combustor designed and operated to reduce the
outlet NMOC concentration to 20 parts per million as hexane by volume,
dry basis at 3 percent oxygen, or less.
Sec. 60.34c Test methods and procedures.
For approval, a State plan shall include provisions for: the
calculation of the landfill NMOC emission rate listed in Sec. 60.754,
as applicable, to determine whether the landfill meets the condition in
Sec. 60.33c(a)(3); the operational standards in Sec. 60.753; the
compliance provisions in Sec. 60.755; and the monitoring provisions in
Sec. 60.756.
Sec. 60.35c Reporting and recordkeeping guidelines.
For approval, a State plan shall include the recordkeeping and
reporting provisions listed in Secs. 60.757 and 60.758, as applicable,
except as provided under Sec. 60.24.
Sec. 60.36c Compliance times.
(a) Except as provided for under paragraph (b) of this section,
planning, awarding of contracts, and installation of MSW landfill air
emission collection and control equipment capable of meeting the
emission guidelines established under Sec. 60.33c shall be accomplished
within 30 months after the effective date of a State emission standard
for MSW landfills.
(b) For each existing MSW landfill meeting the conditions in
Sec. 60.33c(a)(1) and Sec. 60.33c(a)(2) whose NMOC emission rate is
less than 50 megagrams per year on the effective date of the State
emission standard, installation of collection and control systems
capable of meeting emission guidelines in Sec. 60.33c shall be
accomplished within 30 months of the date when the condition in
Sec. 60.33c(a)(3) is met (i.e., the date of the first annual nonmethane
organic compounds emission rate which equals or exceeds 50 megagrams
per year).
9. Part 60 is amended by adding a new subpart WWW to read as
follows:
Subpart WWW--Standards of Performance for Municipal Solid Waste
Landfills
Sec.
60.750 Applicability, designation of affected facility, and
delegation of authority.
60.751 Definitions.
60.752 Standards for air emissions from municipal solid waste
landfills.
60.753 Operational standards for collection and control systems.
60.754 Test methods and procedures.
60.755 Compliance provisions.
60.756 Monitoring of operations.
60.757 Reporting requirements.
60.758 Recordkeeping requirements.
60.759 Specifications for active collection systems.
Subpart WWW--Standards of Performance for Municipal Solid Waste
Landfills
Sec. 60.750 Applicability, designation of affected facility, and
delegation of authority.
(a) The provisions of this subpart apply to each municipal solid
waste
[[Page 9920]]
landfill that commenced construction, reconstruction or modification or
began accepting waste on or after May 30, 1991. Physical or operational
changes made to an existing MSW landfill solely to comply with Subpart
Cc of this part are not considered construction, reconstruction, or
modification for the purposes of this section.
(b) The following authorities shall be retained by the
Administrator and not transferred to the State: None.
Sec. 60.751 Definitions.
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined herein shall have
the meaning given them in the Act or in subpart A of this part.
Active collection system means a gas collection system that uses
gas mover equipment.
Active landfill means a landfill in which solid waste is being
placed or a landfill that is planned to accept waste in the future.
Closed landfill means a landfill in which solid waste is no longer
being placed, and in which no additional solid wastes will be placed
without first filing a notification of modification as prescribed under
Sec. 60.7(a)(4). Once a notification of modification has been filed,
and additional solid waste is placed in the landfill, the landfill is
no longer closed. A landfill is considered closed after meeting the
criteria of Sec. 258.60 of this title.
Closure means that point in time when a landfill becomes a closed
landfill.
Commercial solid waste means all types of solid waste generated by
stores, offices, restaurants, warehouses, and other nonmanufacturing
activities, excluding residential and industrial wastes.
Controlled landfill means any landfill at which collection and
control systems are required under this subpart as a result of the
nonmethane organic compounds emission rate. The landfill is considered
controlled at the time either
(1) A notification of intent to install a collection and control
system or
(2) A collection and control system design plan is submitted in
compliance with Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i).
Design capacity means the maximum amount of solid waste a landfill
can accept, as specified in the construction or operating permit issued
by the State, local, or Tribal agency responsible for regulating the
landfill.
Disposal facility means all contiguous land and structures, other
appurtenances, and improvements on the land used for the disposal of
solid waste.
Emission rate cutoff means the threshold annual emission rate to
which a landfill compares its estimated emission rate to determine if
control under the regulation is required.
Enclosed combustor means an enclosed firebox which maintains a
relatively constant limited peak temperature generally using a limited
supply of combustion air. An enclosed flare is considered an enclosed
combustor.
Flare means an open combustor without enclosure or shroud.
Gas mover equipment means the equipment (i.e., fan, blower,
compressor) used to transport landfill gas through the header system.
Household waste means any solid waste (including garbage, trash,
and sanitary waste in septic tanks) derived from households (including,
but not limited to, single and multiple residences, hotels and motels,
bunkhouses, ranger stations, crew quarters, campgrounds, picnic
grounds, and day-use recreation areas).
Industrial solid waste means solid waste generated by manufacturing
or industrial processes that is not a hazardous waste regulated under
Subtitle C of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, parts 264 and
265 of this title. Such waste may include, but is not limited to, waste
resulting from the following manufacturing processes: electric power
generation; fertilizer/agricultural chemicals; food and related
products/by-products; inorganic chemicals; iron and steel
manufacturing; leather and leather products; nonferrous metals
manufacturing/foundries; organic chemicals; plastics and resins
manufacturing; pulp and paper industry; rubber and miscellaneous
plastic products; stone, glass, clay, and concrete products; textile
manufacturing; transportation equipment; and water treatment. This term
does not include mining waste or oil and gas waste.
Interior well means any well or similar collection component
located inside the perimeter of the landfill. A perimeter well located
outside the landfilled waste is not an interior well.
Landfill means an area of land or an excavation in which wastes are
placed for permanent disposal, and that is not a land application unit,
surface impoundment, injection well, or waste pile as those terms are
defined under Sec. 257.2 of this title.
Lateral expansion means a horizontal expansion of the waste
boundaries of an existing MSW landfill. A lateral expansion is not a
modification unless it results in an increase in the design capacity of
the landfill.
Municipal solid waste landfill or MSW landfill means an entire
disposal facility in a contiguous geographical space where household
waste is placed in or on land. An MSW landfill may also receive other
types of RCRA Subtitle D wastes (Sec. 257.2 of this title) such as
commercial solid waste, nonhazardous sludge, conditionally exempt small
quantity generator waste, and industrial solid waste. Portions of an
MSW landfill may be separated by access roads. An MSW landfill may be
publicly or privately owned. An MSW landfill may be a new MSW landfill,
an existing MSW landfill, or a lateral expansion.
Municipal solid waste landfill emissions or MSW landfill emissions
means gas generated by the decomposition of organic waste deposited in
an MSW landfill or derived from the evolution of organic compounds in
the waste.
NMOC means nonmethane organic compounds, as measured according to
the provisions of Sec. 60.754.
Nondegradable waste means any waste that does not decompose through
chemical breakdown or microbiological activity. Examples are, but are
not limited to, concrete, municipal waste combustor ash, and metals.
Passive collection system means a gas collection system that solely
uses positive pressure within the landfill to move the gas rather than
using gas mover equipment.
Sludge means any solid, semisolid, or liquid waste generated from a
municipal, commercial, or industrial wastewater treatment plant, water
supply treatment plant, or air pollution control facility, exclusive of
the treated effluent from a wastewater treatment plant.
Solid waste means any garbage, sludge from a wastewater treatment
plant, water supply treatment plant, or air pollution control facility
and other discarded material, including solid, liquid, semisolid, or
contained gaseous material resulting from industrial, commercial,
mining, and agricultural operations, and from community activities, but
does not include solid or dissolved material in domestic sewage, or
solid or dissolved materials in irrigation return flows or industrial
discharges that are point sources subject to permits under 33 U.S.C.
1342, or source, special nuclear, or by-product material as defined by
the Atomic Energy Act of 1954, as amended (42 U.S.C 2011 et seq.).
Sufficient density means any number, spacing, and combination of
collection
[[Page 9921]]
system components, including vertical wells, horizontal collectors, and
surface collectors, necessary to maintain emission and migration
control as determined by measures of performance set forth in this
part.
Sufficient extraction rate means a rate sufficient to maintain a
negative pressure at all wellheads in the collection system without
causing air infiltration, including any wellheads connected to the
system as a result of expansion or excess surface emissions, for the
life of the blower.
Sec. 60.752 Standards for air emissions from municipal solid waste
landfills.
(a) Each owner or operator of an MSW landfill having a design
capacity less than 2.5 million megagrams by mass or 2.5 million cubic
meters by volume shall submit an initial design capacity report to the
Administrator as provided in Sec. 60.757(a). The landfill may calculate
design capacity in either megagrams or cubic meters for comparison with
the exemption values. Any density conversions shall be documented and
submitted with the report. For purposes of part 70 permitting, a
landfill with a design capacity less than 2.5 million megagrams or 2.5
million cubic meters does not require an operating permit under part 70
of this chapter. Submittal of the initial design capacity report shall
fulfill the requirements of this subpart except as provided for in
paragraphs (a)(1) and (a)(2) of this section.
(1) The owner or operator shall submit to the Administrator an
amended design capacity report, as provided for in Sec. 60.757(a)(3),
when there is any increase in the design capacity of a landfill subject
to the provisions of this subpart, whether the increase results from an
increase in the area or depth of the landfill, a change in the
operating procedures of the landfill, or any other means.
(2) If any increase in the maximum design capacity of a landfill
exempted from the provisions of Sec. 60.752(b) through Sec. 60.759 of
this subpart on the basis of the design capacity exemption in paragraph
(a) of this section results in a revised maximum design capacity equal
to or greater than 2.5 million megagrams or 2.5 million cubic meters,
the owner or operator shall comply with the provision of paragraph (b)
of this section.
(b) Each owner or operator of an MSW landfill having a design
capacity equal to or greater than 2.5 million megagrams or 2.5 million
cubic meters, shall either comply with paragraph (b)(2) of this section
or calculate an NMOC emission rate for the landfill using the
procedures specified in Sec. 60.754. The NMOC emission rate shall be
recalculated annually, except as provided in Sec. 60.757(b)(1)(ii) of
this subpart. The owner or operator of an MSW landfill subject to this
subpart with a design capacity greater than or equal to 2.5 million
megagrams or 2.5 million cubic meters is subject to part 70 permitting
requirements. When a landfill is closed, and either never needed
control or meets the conditions for control system removal specified in
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(v) of this subpart, a part 70 operating permit is no
longer required.
(1) If the calculated NMOC emission rate is less than 50 megagrams
per year, the owner or operator shall:
(i) Submit an annual emission report to the Administrator, except
as provided for in Sec. 60.757(b)(1)(ii); and
(ii) Recalculate the NMOC emission rate annually using the
procedures specified in Sec. 60.754(a)(1) until such time as the
calculated NMOC emission rate is equal to or greater than 50 megagrams
per year, or the landfill is closed.
(A) If the NMOC emission rate, upon recalculation required in
paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section, is equal to or greater than 50
megagrams per year, the owner or operator shall install a collection
and control system in compliance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
(B) If the landfill is permanently closed, a closure notification
shall be submitted to the Administrator as provided for in
Sec. 60.757(d).
(2) If the calculated NMOC emission rate is equal to or greater
than 50 megagrams per year, the owner or operator shall:
(i) Submit a collection and control system design plan prepared by
a professional engineer to the Administrator within 1 year:
(A) The collection and control system as described in the plan
shall meet the design requirements of paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this
section.
(B) The collection and control system design plan shall include any
alternatives to the operational standards, test methods, procedures,
compliance measures, monitoring, recordkeeping or reporting provisions
of Secs. 60.753 through 60.758 proposed by the owner or operator.
(C) The collection and control system design plan shall either
conform with specifications for active collection systems in
Sec. 60.759 or include a demonstration to the Administrator's
satisfaction of the sufficiency of the alternative provisions to
Sec. 60.759.
(D) The Administrator shall review the information submitted under
paragraphs (b)(2)(i) (A),(B) and (C) of this section and either approve
it, disapprove it, or request that additional information be submitted.
Because of the many site-specific factors involved with landfill gas
system design, alternative systems may be necessary. A wide variety of
system designs are possible, such as vertical wells, combination
horizontal and vertical collection systems, or horizontal trenches
only, leachate collection components, and passive systems.
(ii) Install a collection and control system within 18 months of
the submittal of the design plan under paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this
section that effectively captures the gas generated within the
landfill.
(A) An active collection system shall:
(1) Be designed to handle the maximum expected gas flow rate from
the entire area of the landfill that warrants control over the intended
use period of the gas control or treatment system equipment;
(2) Collect gas from each area, cell, or group of cells in the
landfill in which the initial solid waste has been placed for a period
of:
(i) 5 years or more if active; or
(ii) 2 years or more if closed or at final grade;
(3) Collect gas at a sufficient extraction rate;
(4) Be designed to minimize off-site migration of subsurface gas.
(B) A passive collection system shall:
(1) Comply with the provisions specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii),
(A) (1), (2), and (4) of this section.
(2) Be installed with liners on the bottom and all sides in all
areas in which gas is to be collected. The liners shall be installed as
required under Sec. 258.40 of this title.
(iii) Route all the collected gas to a control system that complies
with the requirements in either paragraph (b)(2)(iii) (A), (B) or (C)
of this section.
(A) An open flare designed and operated in accordance with
Sec. 60.18;
(B) A control system designed and operated to reduce NMOC by 98
weight-percent, or, when an enclosed combustion device is used for
control, to either reduce NMOC by 98 weight percent or reduce the
outlet NMOC concentration to less than 20 parts per million by volume,
dry basis as hexane at 3 percent oxygen. The reduction efficiency or
parts per million by volume shall be established by an initial
performance test, required under Sec. 60.8 using the test methods
specified in Sec. 60.754(d).
(1) If a boiler or process heater is used as the control device,
the landfill gas
[[Page 9922]]
stream shall be introduced into the flame zone.
(2) The control device shall be operated within the parameter
ranges established during the initial or most recent performance test.
The operating parameters to be monitored are specified in Sec. 60.756;
(C) Route the collected gas to a treatment system that processes
the collected gas for subsequent sale or use. All emissions from any
atmospheric vent from the gas treatment system shall be subject to the
requirements of paragraph (b)(2)(iii) (A) or (B) of this section.
(iv) Operate the collection and control device installed to comply
with this subpart in accordance with the provisions of
Sec. Sec. 60.753, 60.755 and 60.756.
(v) The collection and control system may be capped or removed
provided that all the conditions of paragraphs (b)(2)(v) (A), (B), and
(C) of this section are met:
(A) The landfill shall be no longer accepting solid waste and be
permanently closed under the requirements of Sec. 258.60 of this title.
A closure report shall be submitted to the Administrator as provided in
Sec. 60.757(d);
(B) The collection and control system shall have been in operation
a minimum of 15 years; and
(C) Following the procedures specified in Sec. 60.754(b) of this
subpart, the calculated NMOC gas produced by the landfill shall be less
than 50 megagrams per year on three successive test dates. The test
dates shall be no less than 90 days apart, and no more than 180 days
apart.
Sec. 60.753 Operational standards for collection and control systems.
Each owner or operator of an MSW landfill gas collection and
control system used to comply with the provisions of
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(ii) of this subpart shall:
(a) Operate the collection system such that gas is collected from
each area, cell, or group of cells in the MSW landfill in which solid
waste has been in place for:
(1) 5 years or more if active; or
(2) 2 years or more if closed or at final grade;
(b) Operate the collection system with negative pressure at each
wellhead except under the following conditions:
(1) A fire or increased well temperature. The owner or operator
shall record instances when positive pressure occurs in efforts to
avoid a fire. These records shall be submitted with the annual reports
as provided in Sec. 60.757(f)(1);
(2) Use of a geomembrane or synthetic cover. The owner or operator
shall develop acceptable pressure limits in the design plan;
(3) A decommissioned well. A well may experience a static positive
pressure after shut down to accommodate for declining flows. All design
changes shall be approved by the Administrator;
(c) Operate each interior wellhead in the collection system with a
landfill gas temperature less than 55 oC and with either a
nitrogen level less than 20 percent or an oxygen level less than 5
percent. The owner or operator may establish a higher operating
temperature, nitrogen, or oxygen value at a particular well. A higher
operating value demonstration shall show supporting data that the
elevated parameter does not cause fires or significantly inhibit
anaerobic decomposition by killing methanogens.
(1) The nitrogen level shall be determined using Method 3C, unless
an alternative test method is established as allowed by
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i) of this subpart.
(2) Unless an alternative test method is established as allowed by
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i) of this subpart, the oxygen shall be determined by
an oxygen meter using Method 3A except that:
(i) The span shall be set so that the regulatory limit is between
20 and 50 percent of the span;
(ii) A data recorder is not required;
(iii) Only two calibration gases are required, a zero and span, and
ambient air may be used as the span;
(iv) A calibration error check is not required;
(v) The allowable sample bias, zero drift, and calibration drift
are 10 percent.
(d) Operate the collection system so that the methane concentration
is less than 500 parts per million above background at the surface of
the landfill. To determine if this level is exceeded, the owner or
operator shall conduct surface testing around the perimeter of the
collection area along a pattern that traverses the landfill at 30 meter
intervals and where visual observations indicate elevated
concentrations of landfill gas, such as distressed vegetation and
cracks or seeps in the cover. The owner or operator may establish an
alternative traversing pattern that ensures equivalent coverage. A
surface monitoring design plan shall be developed that includes a
topographical map with the monitoring route and the rationale for any
site-specific deviations from the 30 meter intervals. Areas with steep
slopes or other dangerous areas may be excluded from the surface
testing.
(e) Operate the system such that all collected gases are vented to
a control system designed and operated in compliance with
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(iii). In the event the collection or control system
is inoperable, the gas mover system shall be shut down and all valves
in the collection and control system contributing to venting of the gas
to the atmosphere shall be closed within 1 hour; and
(f) Operate the control or treatment system at all times when the
collected gas is routed to the system.
(g) If monitoring demonstrates that the operational requirement in
paragraphs (b), (c), or (d) of this section are not met, corrective
action shall be taken as specified in Sec. 60.752(a) (3) through (5) or
Sec. 60.755(c) of this subpart. If corrective actions are taken as
specified in Sec. 60.755, the monitored exceedance is not a violation
of the operational requirements in this section.
Sec. 60.754 Test methods and procedures.
(a)(1) The landfill owner or operator shall calculate the NMOC
emission rate using either the equation provided in paragraph (a)(1)(i)
of this section or the equation provided in paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of
this section. The values to be used in both equations are 0.05 per year
for k, 170 cubic meters per megagram for Lo, and 4,000 parts per
million by volume as hexane for the CNMOC.
(i) The following equation shall be used if the actual year-to-year
solid waste acceptance rate is known.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.025
[[Page 9923]]
where,
MNMOC=Total NMOC emission rate from the landfill, megagrams per
year
k=methane generation rate constant, year-1
Lo=methane generation potential, cubic meters per megagram
solid waste
Mi=mass of solid waste in the ith section, megagrams
ti=age of the ith section, years
CNMOC=concentration of NMOC, parts per million by volume as
hexane
3.6 x 10-9=conversion factor
The mass of nondegradable solid waste may be subtracted from the
total mass of solid waste in a particular section of the landfill
when calculating the value for Mi if the documentation
provisions of Sec. 60.758(d)(2) are followed.
(ii) The following equation shall be used if the actual year-to-
year solid waste acceptance rate is unknown.
MNMOC=2Lo R (e-kc - e-kt) (CNMOC) (3.6 x
10-9)
where,
MNMOC=mass emission rate of NMOC, megagrams per year
Lo=methane generation potential, cubic meters per megagram
solid waste
R=average annual acceptance rate, megagrams per year
k=methane generation rate constant, year-1
t=age of landfill, years
CNMOC=concentration of NMOC, parts per million by volume as
hexane
c=time since closure, years. For active landfill c = O and
e-kc=1
3.6 x 10-9=conversion factor
The mass of nondegradable solid waste may be subtracted from the
average annual acceptance rate when calculating a value for R, if
the documentation provisions of Sec. 60.758(d)(2) are followed.
(2) Tier 1. The owner or operator shall compare the calculated NMOC
mass emission rate to the standard of 50 megagrams per year.
(i) If the NMOC emission rate calculated in paragraph (a)(1) of
this section is less than 50 megagrams per year, then the landfill
owner shall submit an emission rate report as provided in
Sec. 60.757(b)(1), and shall recalculate the NMOC mass emission rate
annually as required under Sec. 60.752(b)(1).
(ii) If the calculated NMOC emission rate is equal to or greater
than 50 megagrams per year, then the landfill owner shall either comply
with Sec. 60.752(b)(2), or determine a site-specific NMOC concentration
and recalculate the NMOC emission rate using the procedures provided in
paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
(3) Tier 2. The landfill owner or operator shall determine the NMOC
concentration using the following sampling procedure. The landfill
owner or operator shall install at least two sample probes per hectare
of landfill surface that has retained waste for at least 2 years. If
the landfill is larger than 25 hectares in area, only 50 samples are
required. The sample probes should be located to avoid known areas of
nondegradable solid waste. The owner or operator shall collect and
analyze one sample of landfill gas from each probe to determine the
NMOC concentration using Method 25C of appendix A of this part or
Method 18 of appendix A of this part. If using Method 18 of appendix A
of this part, the minimum list of compounds to be tested shall be those
published in the most recent Compilation of Air Pollutant Emission
Factors (AP-42). If composite sampling is used, equal volumes shall be
taken from each sample probe. If more than the required number of
samples are taken, all samples shall be used in the analysis. The
landfill owner or operator shall divide the NMOC concentration from
Method 25C of appendix A of this part by six to convert from CNMOC
as carbon to CNMOC as hexane.
(i) The landfill owner or operator shall recalculate the NMOC mass
emission rate using the equations provided in paragraph (a)(1)(i) or
(a)(1)(ii) of this section and using the average NMOC concentration
from the collected samples instead of the default value in the equation
provided in paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
(ii) If the resulting mass emission rate calculated using the site-
specific NMOC concentration is equal to or greater than 50 megagrams
per year, then the landfill owner or operator shall either comply with
Sec. 60.752(b)(2), or determine the site-specific methane generation
rate constant and recalculate the NMOC emission rate using the site-
specific methane generation rate using the procedure specified in
paragraph (a)(4) of this section.
(iii) If the resulting NMOC mass emission rate is less than 50
megagrams per year, the owner or operator shall submit a periodic
estimate of the emission rate report as provided in Sec. 60.757(b)(1)
and retest the site-specific NMOC concentration every 5 years using the
methods specified in this section.
(4) Tier 3. The site-specific methane generation rate constant
shall be determined using the procedures provided in Method 2E of
appendix A of this part. The landfill owner or operator shall estimate
the NMOC mass emission rate using equations in paragraph (a)(1)(i) or
(a)(1)(ii) of this section and using a site-specific methane generation
rate constant k, and the site-specific NMOC concentration as determined
in paragraph (a)(3) of this section instead of the default values
provided in paragraph (a)(1) of this section. The landfill owner or
operator shall compare the resulting NMOC mass emission rate to the
standard of 50 megagrams per year.
(i) If the NMOC mass emission rate as calculated using the site-
specific methane generation rate and concentration of NMOC is equal to
or greater than 50 megagrams per year, the owner or operator shall
comply with Sec. 60.752(b)(2).
(ii) If the NMOC mass emission rate is less than 50 megagrams per
year, then the owner or operator shall submit a periodic emission rate
report as provided in Sec. 60.757(b)(1) and shall recalculate the NMOC
mass emission rate annually, as provided in Sec. 60.757(b)(1) using the
equations in paragraph (a)(1) of this section and using the site-
specific methane generation rate constant and NMOC concentration
obtained in paragraph (a)(3) of this section. The calculation of the
methane generation rate constant is performed only once, and the value
obtained is used in all subsequent annual NMOC emission rate
calculations.
(5) The owner or operator may use other methods to determine the
NMOC concentration or a site-specific k as an alternative to the
methods required in paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(4) of this section if the
method has been approved by the Administrator as provided in
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i)(B).
(b) After the installation of a collection and control system in
compliance with Sec. 60.755, the owner or operator shall calculate the
NMOC emission rate for purposes of determining when the system can be
removed as provided in Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(v), using the following
equation:
MNMOC = 1.89 x 10-3 QLFG CNMOC
where,
MNMOC = mass emission rate of NMOC, megagrams per year
QLFG = flow rate of landfill gas, cubic meters per minute
CNMOC = NMOC concentration, parts per million by volume as
hexane
(1) The flow rate of landfill gas, QLFG, shall be determined
by measuring the total landfill gas flow rate at the common header pipe
that leads to the control device using a gas flow measuring device
calibrated according to the provisions of section 4 of Method 2E of
appendix A of this part.
(2) The average NMOC concentration, CNMOC, shall be determined
by collecting and analyzing landfill gas sampled from the common header
pipe before the gas moving or condensate
[[Page 9924]]
removal equipment using the procedures in Method 25C or Method 18 of
appendix A of this part. If using Method 18 of appendix A of this part,
the minimum list of compounds to be tested shall be those published in
the most recent Compilation of Air Pollutant Emission Factors (AP-42).
The sample location on the common header pipe shall be before any
condensate removal or other gas refining units. The landfill owner or
operator shall divide the NMOC concentration from Method 25C of
appendix A of this part by six to convert from CNMOC as carbon to
CNMOC as hexane.
(3) The owner or operator may use another method to determine
landfill gas flow rate and NMOC concentration if the method has been
approved by the Administrator as provided in Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i)(B).
(c) The owner or operator of each MSW landfill subject to the
provisions of this subpart shall estimate the NMOC emission rate for
comparison to the PSD major source and significance levels in
Secs. 51.166 or 52.21 of this chapter using AP-42 or other approved
measurement procedures. If a collection system, which complies with the
provisions in Sec. 60.752(b)(2) is already installed, the owner or
operator shall estimate the NMOC emission rate using the procedures
provided in paragraph (b) of this section.
(d) For the performance test required in Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(iii)(B),
Method 25 or Method 18 of appendix A of this part shall be used to
determine compliance with 98 weight-percent efficiency or the 20 ppmv
outlet concentration level, unless another method to demonstrate
compliance has been approved by the Administrator as provided by
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i)(B). If using Method 18 of appendix A of this part,
the minimum list of compounds to be tested shall be those published in
the most recent Compilation of Air Pollutant Emission Factors (AP-42).
The following equation shall be used to calculate efficiency:
Control Efficiency = (NMOCin - NMOCout)/(NMOCin)
where,
NMOCin = mass of NMOC entering control device
NMOCout = mass of NMOC exiting control device
Sec. 60.755 Compliance provisions.
(a) Except as provided in Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i)(B), the specified
methods in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6) of this section shall be
used to determine whether the gas collection system is in compliance
with Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(ii).
(1) For the purposes of calculating the maximum expected gas
generation flow rate from the landfill to determine compliance with
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(ii)(A)(1), one of the following equations shall be
used. The k and Lo kinetic factors should be those published in
the most recent Compilation of Air Pollutant Emission Factors (AP-42)
or other site specific values demonstrated to be appropriate and
approved by the Administrator. If k has been determined as specified in
Sec. 60.754(a)(4), the value of k determined from the test shall be
used. A value of no more than 15 years shall be used for the intended
use period of the gas mover equipment. The active life of the landfill
is the age of the landfill plus the estimated number of years until
closure.
(i) For sites with unknown year-to-year solid waste acceptance
rate:
Qm = 2Lo R (e-kc - e-kt)
where,
Qm = maximum expected gas generation flow rate, cubic meters
per year
Lo = methane generation potential, cubic meters per megagram
solid waste
R = average annual acceptance rate, megagrams per year
k = methane generation rate constant, year-1
t = age of the landfill at equipment installation plus the time the
owner or operator intends to use the gas mover equipment or active
life of the landfill, whichever is less. If the equipment is
installed after closure, t is the age of the landfill at
installation, years
c = time since closure, years (for an active landfill c = O and
e-kc = 1)
(ii) For sites with known year-to-year solid waste acceptance rate:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.026
where,
QM=maximum expected gas generation flow rate, cubic meters per
year
k=methane generation rate constant, year-1
Lo=methane generation potential, cubic meters per megagram
solid waste
Mi=mass of solid waste in the ith section, megagrams
ti=age of the ith section, years
(iii) If a collection and control system has been installed, actual
flow data may be used to project the maximum expected gas generation
flow rate instead of, or in conjunction with, the equations in
paragraphs (a)(1) (i) and (ii) of this section. If the landfill is
still accepting waste, the actual measured flow data will not equal the
maximum expected gas generation rate, so calculations using the
equations in paragraphs (a)(1) (i) or (ii) or other methods shall be
used to predict the maximum expected gas generation rate over the
intended period of use of the gas control system equipment.
(2) For the purposes of determining sufficient density of gas
collectors for compliance with Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(ii)(A)(2), the owner
or operator shall design a system of vertical wells, horizontal
collectors, or other collection devices, satisfactory to the
Administrator, capable of controlling and extracting gas from all
portions of the landfill sufficient to meet all operational and
performance standards.
(3) For the purpose of demonstrating whether the gas collection
system flow rate is sufficient to determine compliance with
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(ii)(A)(3), the owner or operator shall measure gauge
pressure in the gas collection header at each individual well, monthly.
If a positive pressure exists, action shall be initiated to correct the
exceedance within 5 calendar days, except for the three conditions
allowed under Sec. 60.753(b). If negative pressure cannot be achieved
without excess air infiltration within 15 calendar days of the first
measurement, the gas collection system shall be expanded to correct the
exceedance within 120 days of the initial measurement of positive
pressure. Any attempted corrective measure shall not cause exceedances
of other operational or performance standards.
(4) Owners or operators are not required to install additional
wells as required in paragraph (a)(3) of this section during the first
180 days after gas collection system start-up.
(5) For the purpose of identifying whether excess air infiltration
into the landfill is occurring, the owner or operator shall monitor
each well monthly for temperature and nitrogen or oxygen as provided in
Sec. 60.753(c). If a well exceeds one of these operating parameters,
action shall be initiated to correct the exceedance within 5 calendar
days. If correction of the exceedance cannot be achieved within 15
calendar days of the first measurement, the gas collection system shall
be expanded to correct the exceedance within 120 days of the initial
exceedance. Any attempted corrective measure shall not cause
exceedances of other operational or performance standards.
(6) An owner or operator seeking to demonstrate compliance with
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(ii)(A)(4) through the use of a collection system not
conforming to the specifications provided in Sec. 60.759 shall provide
information satisfactory to the Administrator as specified in
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i)(C) demonstrating that off-site migration is being
controlled.
[[Page 9925]]
(b) For purposes of compliance with Sec. 60.753(a), each owner or
operator of a controlled landfill shall place each well or design
component as specified in the approved design plan as provided in
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i). Each well shall be installed within 60 days of
the date in which the initial solid waste has been in place for a
period of:
(1) 5 years or more if active; or
(2) 2 years or more if closed or at final grade.
(c) The following procedures shall be used for compliance with the
surface methane operational standard as provided in Sec. 60.753(d).
(1) After installation of the collection system, the owner or
operator shall monitor surface concentrations of methane along the
entire perimeter of the collection area and along a serpentine pattern
spaced 30 meters apart (or a site-specific established spacing) for
each collection area on a quarterly basis using an organic vapor
analyzer, flame ionization detector, or other portable monitor meeting
the specifications provided in paragraph (d) of this section.
(2) The background concentration shall be determined by moving the
probe inlet upwind and downwind outside the boundary of the landfill at
a distance of at least 30 meters from the perimeter wells.
(3) Surface emission monitoring shall be performed in accordance
with section 4.3.1 of Method 21 of appendix A of this part, except that
the probe inlet shall be placed within 5 to 10 centimeters of the
ground. Monitoring shall be performed during typical meteorological
conditions.
(4) Any reading of 500 parts per million or more above background
at any location shall be recorded as a monitored exceedance and the
actions specified in paragraphs (c)(4) (i) through (v) of this section
shall be taken. As long as the specified actions are taken, the
exceedance is not a violation of the operational requirements of
Sec. 60.753(d).
(i) The location of each monitored exceedance shall be marked and
the location recorded.
(ii) Cover maintenance or adjustments to the vacuum of the adjacent
wells to increase the gas collection in the vicinity of each exceedance
shall be made and the location shall be re-monitored within 10 calendar
days of detecting the exceedance.
(iii) If the re-monitoring of the location shows a second
exceedance, additional corrective action shall be taken and the
location shall be monitored again within 10 days of the second
exceedance. If the re-monitoring shows a third exceedance for the same
location, the action specified in paragraph (c)(4)(v) of this section
shall be taken, and no further monitoring of that location is required
until the action specified in paragraph (c)(4)(v) has been taken.
(iv) Any location that initially showed an exceedance but has a
methane concentration less than 500 ppm methane above background at the
10-day re-monitoring specified in paragraph (c)(4) (ii) or (iii) of
this section shall be re-monitored 1 month from the initial exceedance.
If the 1-month remonitoring shows a concentration less than 500 parts
per million above background, no further monitoring of that location is
required until the next quarterly monitoring period. If the 1-month
remonitoring shows an exceedance, the actions specified in paragraph
(c)(4) (iii) or (v) shall be taken.
(v) For any location where monitored methane concentration equals
or exceeds 500 parts per million above background three times within a
quarterly period, a new well or other collection device shall be
installed within 120 calendar days of the initial exceedance. An
alternative remedy to the exceedance, such as upgrading the blower,
header pipes or control device, and a corresponding timeline for
installation may be submitted to the Administrator for approval.
(5) The owner or operator shall implement a program to monitor for
cover integrity and implement cover repairs as necessary on a monthly
basis.
(d) Each owner or operator seeking to comply with the provisions in
paragraph (c) of this section shall comply with the following
instrumentation specifications and procedures for surface emission
monitoring devices:
(1) The portable analyzer shall meet the instrument specifications
provided in section 3 of Method 21 of appendix A of this part, except
that ``methane'' shall replace all references to VOC.
(2) The calibration gas shall be methane, diluted to a nominal
concentration of 500 parts per million in air.
(3) To meet the performance evaluation requirements in section
3.1.3 of Method 21 of appendix A of this part, the instrument
evaluation procedures of section 4.4 of Method 21 of appendix A of this
part shall be used.
(4) The calibration procedures provided in section 4.2 of Method 21
of appendix A of this part shall be followed immediately before
commencing a surface monitoring survey.
(e) The provisions of this subpart apply at all times, except
during periods of start-up, shutdown, or malfunction, provided that the
duration of start-up, shutdown, or malfunction shall not exceed 5 days
for collection systems and shall not exceed 1 hour for treatment or
control devices.
Sec. 60.756 Monitoring of operations.
Except as provided in Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i)(B),
(a) Each owner or operator seeking to comply with
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(ii)(A) for an active gas collection system shall
install a sampling port and a thermometer or other temperature
measuring device at each wellhead and:
(1) Measure the gauge pressure in the gas collection header on a
monthly basis as provided in Sec. 60.755(a)(3); and
(2) Monitor nitrogen or oxygen concentration in the landfill gas on
a monthly basis as provided in Sec. 60.755(a)(5); and
(3) Monitor temperature of the landfill gas on a monthly basis as
provided in Sec. 60.755(a)(5).
(b) Each owner or operator seeking to comply with
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(iii) using an enclosed combustor shall calibrate,
maintain, and operate according to the manufacturer's specifications,
the following equipment.
(1) A temperature monitoring device equipped with a continuous
recorder and having an accuracy of 1 percent of the
temperature being measured expressed in degrees Celsius or
0.5 deg.C, whichever is greater. A temperature monitoring
device is not required for boilers or process heaters with design heat
input capacity greater than 44 megawatts.
(2) A gas flow rate measuring device that provides a measurement of
gas flow to or bypass of the control device. The owner or operator
shall either:
(i) Install, calibrate, and maintain a gas flow rate measuring
device that shall record the flow to the control device at least every
15 minutes; or
(ii) Secure the bypass line valve in the closed position with a
car-seal or a lock-and-key type configuration. A visual inspection of
the seal or closure mechanism shall be performed at least once every
month to ensure that the valve is maintained in the closed position and
that the gas flow is not diverted through the bypass line.
(c) Each owner or operator seeking to comply with
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(iii) using an open flare shall install, calibrate,
maintain, and operate according to the manufacturer's specifications
the following equipment:
(1) A heat sensing device, such as an ultraviolet beam sensor or
[[Page 9926]]
thermocouple, at the pilot light or the flame itself to indicate the
continuous presence of a flame.
(2) A device that records flow to or bypass of the flare. The owner
or operator shall either:
(i) Install, calibrate, and maintain a gas flow rate measuring
device that shall record the flow to the control device at least every
15 minutes; or
(ii) Secure the bypass line valve in the closed position with a
car-seal or a lock-and-key type configuration. A visual inspection of
the seal or closure mechanism shall be performed at least once every
month to ensure that the valve is maintained in the closed position and
that the gas flow is not diverted through the bypass line.
(d) Each owner or operator seeking to demonstrate compliance with
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(iii) using a device other than an open flare or an
enclosed combustor shall provide information satisfactory to the
Administrator as provided in Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i)(B) describing the
operation of the control device, the operating parameters that would
indicate proper performance, and appropriate monitoring procedures. The
Administrator shall review the information and either approve it, or
request that additional information be submitted. The Administrator may
specify additional appropriate monitoring procedures.
(e) Each owner or operator seeking to install a collection system
that does not meet the specifications in Sec. 60.759 or seeking to
monitor alternative parameters to those required by Sec. 60.753 through
Sec. 60.756 shall provide information satisfactory to the Administrator
as provided in Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i) (B) and (C) describing the design
and operation of the collection system, the operating parameters that
would indicate proper performance, and appropriate monitoring
proc
FR Doc. 96-5529 Standards of Performance for New Stationary Sources and Guidelines for Control of Existing Sources: Municipal Solid Waste Landfills
edures. The Administrator may specify additional appropriate
monitoring procedures.
(f) Each owner or operator seeking to demonstrate compliance with
Sec. 60.755(c), shall monitor surface concentrations of methane
according to the instrument specifications and procedures provided in
Sec. 60.755(d). Any closed landfill that has no monitored exceedances
of the operational standard in three consecutive quarterly monitoring
periods may skip to annual monitoring. Any methane reading of 500 ppm
or more above background detected during the annual monitoring returns
the frequency for that landfill to quarterly monitoring.
Sec. 60.757 Reporting requirements.
Except as provided in Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i)(B),
(a) Each owner or operator subject to the requirements of this
subpart shall submit an initial design capacity report to the
Administrator.
(1) The initial design capacity report shall fulfill the
requirements of the notification of the date construction is commenced
as required under Sec. 60.7(a)(1) and shall be submitted no later than
the earliest day from the following:
(i) 90 days of the issuance of the State, Local, Tribal, or RCRA
construction or operating permit; or
(ii) 30 days of the date of construction or reconstruction as
defined under Sec. 60.15; or
(iii) 30 days of the initial acceptance of solid waste.
(2) The initial design capacity report shall contain the following
information:
(i) A map or plot of the landfill, providing the size and location
of the landfill, and identifying all areas where solid waste may be
landfilled according to the provisions of the State, local, Tribal, or
RCRA construction or operating permit;
(ii) The maximum design capacity of the landfill. Where the maximum
design capacity is specified in the State or local construction or RCRA
permit, a copy of the permit specifying the maximum design capacity may
be submitted as part of the report. If the maximum design capacity of
the landfill is not specified in the permit, the maximum design
capacity shall be calculated using good engineering practices. The
calculations shall be provided, along with such parameters as depth of
solid waste, solid waste acceptance rate, and compaction practices as
part of the report. The State, Tribal, local agency or Administrator
may request other reasonable information as may be necessary to verify
the maximum design capacity of the landfill.
(3) An amended design capacity report shall be submitted to the
Administrator providing notification of any increase in the design
capacity of the landfill, whether the increase results from an increase
in the permitted area or depth of the landfill, a change in the
operating procedures, or any other means which results in an increase
in the maximum design capacity of the landfill above 2.5 million
megagrams or 2.5 million cubic meters. The amended design capacity
report shall be submitted within 90 days of the issuance of an amended
construction or operating permit, or the placement of waste in
additional land, or the change in operating procedures which will
result in an increase in maximum design capacity, whichever occurs
first.
(b) Each owner or operator subject to the requirements of this
subpart shall submit an NMOC emission rate report to the Administrator
initially and annually thereafter, except as provided for in paragraphs
(b)(1)(ii) or (b)(3) of this section. The Administrator may request
such additional information as may be necessary to verify the reported
NMOC emission rate.
(1) The NMOC emission rate report shall contain an annual or 5-year
estimate of the NMOC emission rate calculated using the formula and
procedures provided in Sec. 60.754(a) or (b), as applicable.
(i) The initial NMOC emission rate report shall be submitted within
90 days of the date waste acceptance commences and may be combined with
the initial design capacity report required in paragraph (a) of this
section. Subsequent NMOC emission rate reports shall be submitted
annually thereafter, except as provided for in paragraphs (b)(1)(ii)
and (b)(3) of this section.
(ii) If the estimated NMOC emission rate as reported in the annual
report to the Administrator is less than 50 megagrams per year in each
of the next 5 consecutive years, the owner or operator may elect to
submit an estimate of the NMOC emission rate for the next 5-year period
in lieu of the annual report. This estimate shall include the current
amount of solid waste-in-place and the estimated waste acceptance rate
for each year of the 5 years for which an NMOC emission rate is
estimated. All data and calculations upon which this estimate is based
shall be provided to the Administrator. This estimate shall be revised
at least once every 5 years. If the actual waste acceptance rate
exceeds the estimated waste acceptance rate in any year reported in the
5-year estimate, a revised 5-year estimate shall be submitted to the
Administrator. The revised estimate shall cover the 5-year period
beginning with the year in which the actual waste acceptance rate
exceeded the estimated waste acceptance rate.
(2) The NMOC emission rate report shall include all the data,
calculations, sample reports and measurements used to estimate the
annual or 5-year emissions.
(3) Each owner or operator subject to the requirements of this
subpart is exempted from the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1) and (2)
of this section, after the installation of a collection and control
system in compliance with Sec. 60.752(b)(2), during such time as the
collection and control system is in
[[Page 9927]]
operation and in compliance with Sec. Sec. 60.753 and 60.755.
(c) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i) shall submit a collection and control system
design plan to the Administrator within 1 year of the first report,
required under paragraph (b) of this section, in which the emission
rate exceeds 50 megagrams per year, except as follows:
(1) If the owner or operator elects to recalculate the NMOC
emission rate after Tier 2 NMOC sampling and analysis as provided in
Sec. 60.754(a)(3) and the resulting rate is less than 50 megagrams per
year, annual periodic reporting shall be resumed, using the Tier 2
determined site-specific NMOC concentration, until the calculated
emission rate is equal to or greater than 50 megagrams per year or the
landfill is closed. The revised NMOC emission rate report, with the
recalculated emission rate based on NMOC sampling and analysis, shall
be submitted within 180 days of the first calculated exceedance of 50
megagrams per year.
(2) If the owner or operator elects to recalculate the NMOC
emission rate after determining a site-specific methane generation rate
constant (k), as provided in Tier 3 in Sec. 60.754(a)(4), and the
resulting NMOC emission rate is less than 50 Mg/yr, annual periodic
reporting shall be resumed. The resulting site-specific methane
generation rate constant (k) shall be used in the emission rate
calculation until such time as the emissions rate calculation results
in an exceedance. The revised NMOC emission rate report based on the
provisions of Sec. 60.754(a)(4) and the resulting site-specific methane
generation rate constant (k) shall be submitted to the Administrator
within 1 year of the first calculated emission rate exceeding 50
megagrams per year.
(d) Each owner or operator of a controlled landfill shall submit a
closure report to the Administrator within 30 days of waste acceptance
cessation. The Administrator may request additional information as may
be necessary to verify that permanent closure has taken place in
accordance with the requirements of 40 CFR 258.60. If a closure report
has been submitted to the Administrator, no additional wastes may be
placed into the landfill without filing a notification of modification
as described under Sec. 60.7(a)(4).
(e) Each owner or operator of a controlled landfill shall submit an
equipment removal report to the Administrator 30 days prior to removal
or cessation of operation of the control equipment.
(1) The equipment removal report shall contain all of the following
items:
(i) A copy of the closure report submitted in accordance with
paragraph (d) of this section;
(ii) A copy of the initial performance test report demonstrating
that the 15 year minimum control period has expired; and
(iii) Dated copies of three successive NMOC emission rate reports
demonstrating that the landfill is no longer producing 50 megagrams or
greater of NMOC per year.
(2) The Administrator may request such additional information as
may be necessary to verify that all of the conditions for removal in
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(v) have been met.
(f) Each owner or operator of a landfill seeking to comply with
Sec. 60.752(b)(2) using an active collection system designed in
accordance with Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(ii) shall submit to the Administrator
annual reports of the recorded information in (f)(1) through (f)(6) of
this paragraph. The initial annual report shall be submitted within 180
days of installation and start-up of the collection and control system,
and shall include the initial performance test report required under
Sec. 60.8. For enclosed combustion devices and flares, reportable
exceedances are defined under Sec. 60.758(c).
(1) Value and length of time for exceedance of applicable
parameters monitored under Sec. 60.756(a), (b), (c), and (d).
(2) Description and duration of all periods when the gas stream is
diverted from the control device through a bypass line or the
indication of bypass flow as specified under Sec. 60.756.
(3) Description and duration of all periods when the control device
was not operating for a period exceeding 1 hour and length of time the
control device was not operating.
(4) All periods when the collection system was not operating in
excess of 5 days.
(5) The location of each exceedance of the 500 parts per million
methane concentration as provided in Sec. 60.753(d) and the
concentration recorded at each location for which an exceedance was
recorded in the previous month.
(6) The date of installation and the location of each well or
collection system expansion added pursuant to paragraphs (a)(3), (b),
and (c)(4) of Sec. 60.755.
(g) Each owner or operator seeking to comply with
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i) shall include the following information with the
initial performance test report required under Sec. 60.8:
(1) A diagram of the collection system showing collection system
positioning including all wells, horizontal collectors, surface
collectors, or other gas extraction devices, including the locations of
any areas excluded from collection and the proposed sites for the
future collection system expansion;
(2) The data upon which the sufficient density of wells, horizontal
collectors, surface collectors, or other gas extraction devices and the
gas mover equipment sizing are based;
(3) The documentation of the presence of asbestos or nondegradable
material for each area from which collection wells have been excluded
based on the presence of asbestos or nondegradable material;
(4) The sum of the gas generation flow rates for all areas from
which collection wells have been excluded based on nonproductivity and
the calculations of gas generation flow rate for each excluded area;
and
(5) The provisions for increasing gas mover equipment capacity with
increased gas generation flow rate, if the present gas mover equipment
is inadequate to move the maximum flow rate expected over the life of
the landfill; and
(6) The provisions for the control of off-site migration.
Sec. 60.758 Recordkeeping requirements.
Except as provided in Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i)(B),
(a) Each owner or operator of an MSW landfill subject to the
provisions of Sec. 60.752(b) shall keep for at least 5 years up-to-
date, readily accessible, on-site records of the maximum design
capacity, the current amount of solid waste in-place, and the year-by-
year waste acceptance rate. Off-site records may be maintained if they
are retrievable within 4 hours. Either paper copy or electronic formats
are acceptable.
(b) Each owner or operator of a controlled landfill shall keep up-
to-date, readily accessible records for the life of the control
equipment of the data listed in paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(4) of
this section as measured during the initial performance test or
compliance determination. Records of subsequent tests or monitoring
shall be maintained for a minimum of 5 years. Records of the control
device vendor specifications shall be maintained until removal.
(1) Where an owner or operator subject to the provisions of this
subpart seeks to demonstrate compliance with Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(ii):
(i) The maximum expected gas generation flow rate as calculated in
Sec. 60.755(a)(1). The owner or operator may use another method to
determine the maximum gas generation flow rate,
[[Page 9928]]
if the method has been approved by the Administrator.
(ii) The density of wells, horizontal collectors, surface
collectors, or other gas extraction devices determined using the
procedures specified in Sec. 60.759(a)(1).
(2) Where an owner or operator subject to the provisions of this
subpart seeks to demonstrate compliance with Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(iii)
through use of an enclosed combustion device other than a boiler or
process heater with a design heat input capacity greater than 44
megawatts:
(i) The average combustion temperature measured at least every 15
minutes and averaged over the same time period of the performance test.
(ii) The percent reduction of NMOC determined as specified in
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(iii)(B) achieved by the control device.
(3) Where an owner or operator subject to the provisions of this
subpart seeks to demonstrate compliance with
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(iii)(B)(1) through use of a boiler or process heater
of any size: a description of the location at which the collected gas
vent stream is introduced into the boiler or process heater over the
same time period of the performance testing.
(4) Where an owner or operator subject to the provisions of this
subpart seeks to demonstrate compliance with Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(iii)(A)
through use of an open flare, the flare type (i.e., steam-assisted,
air-assisted, or nonassisted), all visible emission readings, heat
content determination, flow rate or bypass flow rate measurements, and
exit velocity determinations made during the performance test as
specified in Sec. 60.18; continuous records of the flare pilot flame or
flare flame monitoring and records of all periods of operations during
which the pilot flame of the flare flame is absent.
(c) Each owner or operator of a controlled landfill subject to the
provisions of this subpart shall keep for 5 years up-to-date, readily
accessible continuous records of the equipment operating parameters
specified to be monitored in Sec. 60.756 as well as up-to-date, readily
accessible records for periods of operation during which the parameter
boundaries established during the most recent performance test are
exceeded.
(1) The following constitute exceedances that shall be recorded and
reported under Sec. 60.757(f):
(i) For enclosed combustors except for boilers and process heaters
with design heat input capacity of 44 megawatts (150 million British
thermal unit per hour) or greater, all 3-hour periods of operation
during which the average combustion temperature was more than 28 oC
below the average combustion temperature during the most recent
performance test at which compliance with Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(iii) was
determined.
(ii) For boilers or process heaters, whenever there is a change in
the location at which the vent stream is introduced into the flame zone
as required under paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section.
(2) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this
subpart shall keep up-to-date, readily accessible continuous records of
the indication of flow to the control device or the indication of
bypass flow or records of monthly inspections of car-seals or lock-and-
key configurations used to seal bypass lines, specified under
Sec. 60.756.
(3) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this
subpart who uses a boiler or process heater with a design heat input
capacity of 44 megawatts or greater to comply with
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(iii) shall keep an up-to-date, readily accessible
record of all periods of operation of the boiler or process heater.
(Examples of such records could include records of steam use, fuel use,
or monitoring data collected pursuant to other State, local, Tribal, or
Federal regulatory requirements.)
(4) Each owner or operator seeking to comply with the provisions of
this subpart by use of an open flare shall keep up-to-date, readily
accessible continuous records of the flame or flare pilot flame
monitoring specified under Sec. 60.756(c), and up-to-date, readily
accessible records of all periods of operation in which the flame or
flare pilot flame is absent.
(d) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this
subpart shall keep for the life of the collection system an up-to-date,
readily accessible plot map showing each existing and planned collector
in the system and providing a unique identification location label for
each collector.
(1) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this
subpart shall keep up-to-date, readily accessible records of the
installation date and location of all newly installed collectors as
specified under Sec. 60.755(b).
(2) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this
subpart shall keep readily accessible documentation of the nature, date
of deposition, amount, and location of asbestos-containing or
nondegradable waste excluded from collection as provided in
Sec. 60.759(a)(3)(i) as well as any nonproductive areas excluded from
collection as provided in Sec. 60.759(a)(3)(ii).
(e) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this
subpart shall keep for at least 5 years up-to-date, readily accessible
records of all collection and control system exceedances of the
operational standards in Sec. 60.753, the reading in the subsequent
month whether or not the second reading is an exceedance, and the
location of each exceedance.
Sec. 60.759 Specifications for active collection systems.
(a) Each owner or operator seeking to comply with
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i) shall site active collection wells, horizontal
collectors, surface collectors, or other extraction devices at a
sufficient density throughout all gas producing areas using the
following procedures unless alternative procedures have been approved
by the Administrator as provided in Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i)(C) and (D):
(1) The collection devices within the interior and along the
perimeter areas shall be certified to achieve comprehensive control of
surface gas emissions by a professional engineer. The following issues
shall be addressed in the design: depths of refuse, refuse gas
generation rates and flow characteristics, cover properties, gas system
expandibility, leachate and condensate management, accessibility,
compatibility with filling operations, integration with closure end
use, air intrusion control, corrosion resistance, fill settlement, and
resistance to the refuse decomposition heat.
(2) The sufficient density of gas collection devices determined in
paragraph (a)(1) of this section shall address landfill gas migration
issues and augmentation of the collection system through the use of
active or passive systems at the landfill perimeter or exterior.
(3) The placement of gas collection devices determined in paragraph
(a)(1) of this section shall control all gas producing areas, except as
provided by paragraphs (a)(3)(i) and (a)(3)(ii) of this section.
(i) Any segregated area of asbestos or nondegradable material may
be excluded from collection if documented as provided under
Sec. 60.758(d). The documentation shall provide the nature, date of
deposition, location and amount of asbestos or nondegradable material
deposited in the area, and shall be provided to the Administrator upon
request.
(ii) Any nonproductive area of the landfill may be excluded from
control, provided that the total of all excluded areas can be shown to
contribute less than 1 percent of the total amount of NMOC emissions
from the landfill. The
[[Page 9929]]
amount, location, and age of the material shall be documented and
provided to the Administrator upon request. A separate NMOC emissions
estimate shall be made for each section proposed for exclusion, and the
sum of all such sections shall be compared to the NMOC emissions
estimate for the entire landfill. Emissions from each section shall be
computed using the following equation:
Qi = 2 k Lo Mi (e-kti) (CNMOC) (3.6 x
10-9)
where,
Qi = NMOC emission rate from the ith section, megagrams
per year
k = methane generation rate constant, year-1
Lo = methane generation potential, cubic meters per megagram
solid waste
Mi = mass of the degradable solid waste in the ith
section, megagram
ti = age of the solid waste in the ith section, years
CNMOC = concentration of nonmethane organic compounds, parts
per million by volume
3.6 x 10-9 = conversion factor
(iii) The values for k, Lo, and CNMOC determined in field
testing shall be used, if field testing has been performed in
determining the NMOC emission rate or the radii of influence. If field
testing has not been performed, the default values for k, Lo and
CNMOC provided in Sec. 60.754(a)(1) shall be used. The mass of
nondegradable solid waste contained within the given section may be
subtracted from the total mass of the section when estimating emissions
provided the nature, location, age, and amount of the nondegradable
material is documented as provided in paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this
section.
(b) Each owner or operator seeking to comply with
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i)(A) shall construct the gas collection devices
using the following equipment or procedures:
(1) The landfill gas extraction components shall be constructed of
polyvinyl chloride (PVC), high density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe,
fiberglass, stainless steel, or other nonporous corrosion resistant
material of suitable dimensions to: convey projected amounts of gases;
withstand installation, static, and settlement forces; and withstand
planned overburden or traffic loads. The collection system shall extend
as necessary to comply with emission and migration standards.
Collection devices such as wells and horizontal collectors shall be
perforated to allow gas entry without head loss sufficient to impair
performance across the intended extent of control. Perforations shall
be situated with regard to the need to prevent excessive air
infiltration.
(2) Vertical wells shall be placed so as not to endanger underlying
liners and shall address the occurrence of water within the landfill.
Holes and trenches constructed for piped wells and horizontal
collectors shall be of sufficient cross-section so as to allow for
their proper construction and completion including, for example,
centering of pipes and placement of gravel backfill. Collection devices
shall be designed so as not to allow indirect short circuiting of air
into the cover or refuse into the collection system or gas into the
air. Any gravel used around pipe perforations should be of a dimension
so as not to penetrate or block perforations.
(3) Collection devices may be connected to the collection header
pipes below or above the landfill surface. The connector assembly shall
include a positive closing throttle valve, any necessary seals and
couplings, access couplings and at least one sampling port. The
collection devices shall be constructed of PVC, HDPE, fiberglass,
stainless steel, or other nonporous material of suitable thickness.
(c) Each owner or operator seeking to comply with
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i)(A) shall convey the landfill gas to a control
system in compliance with Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(iii) through the collection
header pipe(s). The gas mover equipment shall be sized to handle the
maximum gas generation flow rate expected over the intended use period
of the gas moving equipment using the following procedures:
(1) For existing collection systems, the flow data shall be used to
project the maximum flow rate. If no flow data exists, the procedures
in paragraph (c)(2) of this section shall be used.
(2) For new collection systems, the maximum flow rate shall be in
accordance with Sec. 60.755(a)(1).
10. Part 60 is further amended by adding Methods 2E, 3C and 25C to
appendix A as follows:
Appendix A--Reference Methods
* * * * *
Method 2E--Determination of Landfill Gas; Gas Production Flow Rate
1. Applicability and Principle
1.1 Applicability. This method applies to the measurement of
landfill gas (LFG) production flow rate from municipal solid waste
(MSW) landfills and is used to calculate the flow rate of nonmethane
organic compounds (NMOC) from landfills. This method also applies to
calculating a site-specific k value as provided in
Sec. 60.754(a)(4). It is unlikely that a site-specific k value
obtained through Method 2E testing will lower the annual emission
estimate below 50 Mg/yr NMOC unless the Tier 2 emission estimate is
only slightly higher than 50 Mg/yr NMOC. Dry, arid regions may show
a more significant difference between the default and calculated k
values than wet regions.
1.2 Principle. Extraction wells are installed either in a
cluster of three or at five locations dispersed throughout the
landfill. A blower is used to extract LFG from the landfill. LFG
composition, landfill pressures near the extraction well, and
volumetric flow rate of LFG extracted from the wells are measured
and the landfill gas production flow rate is calculated.
2. Apparatus
2.1 Well Drilling Rig. Capable of boring a 0.6 meters diameter
hole into the landfill to a minimum of 75 percent of the landfill
depth. The depth of the well shall not exceed the bottom of the
landfill or the liquid level.
2.2 Gravel. No fines. Gravel diameter should be appreciably
larger than perforations stated in sections 2.10 and 3.2 of this
method.
2.3 Bentonite.
2.4 Backfill Material. Clay, soil, and sandy loam have been
found to be acceptable.
2.5 Extraction Well Pipe. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), high
density polyethylene (HDPE), fiberglass, stainless steel, or other
suitable nonporous material capable of transporting landfill gas
with a minimum diameter of 0.075 meters and suitable wall-thickness.
2.6 Wellhead Assembly. Valve capable of adjusting gas flow at
the wellhead and outlet, and a flow measuring device, such as an in-
line orifice meter or pitot tube. A schematic of the wellhead
assembly is shown in figure 1.
BILLING CODE 6560-50-P
[[Page 9930]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.018
BILLING CODE 6560-50-C
[[Page 9931]]
2.7 Cap. PVC, HDPE, fiberglass, stainless steel, or other
suitable nonporous material capable of transporting landfill gas
with a suitable wall-thickness.
2.8 Header Piping. PVC, HDPE, fiberglass, stainless steel, or
other suitable nonporous material capable of transporting landfill
gas with a suitable wall-thickness.
2.9 Auger. Capable of boring a 0.15 to 0.23 meters diameter
hole to a depth equal to the top of the perforated section of the
extraction well, for pressure probe installation.
2.10 Pressure Probe. PVC or stainless steel (316), 0.025
meters. Schedule 40 pipe. Perforate the bottom two thirds. A minimum
requirement for perforations is slots or holes with an open area
equivalent to four 6.0 millimeter diameter holes spaced 90 deg.
apart every 0.15 meters.
2.11 Blower and Flare Assembly. A water knockout, flare or
incinerator, and an explosion-proof blower, capable of extracting
LFG at a flow rate of at least 8.5 cubic meters per minute.
2.12 Standard Pitot Tube and Differential Pressure Gauge for
Flow Rate Calibration with Standard Pitot. Same as Method 2,
sections 2.1 and 2.8.
2.13 Gas flow measuring device. Permanently mounted Type S
pitot tube or an orifice meter.
2.14 Barometer. Same as Method 4, section 2.1.5.
2.15 Differential Pressure Gauge. Water-filled U-tube manometer
or equivalent, capable of measuring within 0.02 mm Hg, for measuring
the pressure of the pressure probes.
3. Procedure
3.1 Placement of Extraction Wells. The landfill owner or
operator shall either install a single cluster of three extraction
wells in a test area or space five wells over the landfill. The
cluster wells are recommended but may be used only if the
composition, age of the solid waste, and the landfill depth of the
test area can be determined. CAUTION: Since this method is complex,
only experienced personnel should conduct the test. Landfill gas
contains methane, therefore explosive mixtures may exist at or near
the landfill. It is advisable to take appropriate safety precautions
when testing landfills, such as installing explosion-proof equipment
and refraining from smoking.
3.1.1 Cluster Wells. Consult landfill site records for the age
of the solid waste, depth, and composition of various sections of
the landfill. Select an area near the perimeter of the landfill with
a depth equal to or greater than the average depth of the landfill
and with the average age of the solid waste between 2 and 10 years
old. Avoid areas known to contain nondecomposable materials, such as
concrete and asbestos. Locate wells as shown in figure 2.
Because the age of the solid waste in a test area will not be
uniform, calculate a weighted average to determine the average age
of the solid waste as follows.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.027
where,
Aavg=average age of the solid waste tested, year
fi=fraction of the solid waste in the ith section
Ai=age of the ith fraction, year
BILLING CODE 6560-50-P
[[Page 9932]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.019
BILLING CODE 6560-50-P
[[Page 9933]]
3.1.2 Equal Volume Wells. This procedure is used when the
composition, age of solid waste, and landfill depth are not well
known. Divide the portion of the landfill that has had waste for at
least 2 years into five areas representing equal volumes. Locate an
extraction well near the center of each area. Avoid areas known to
contain nondecomposable materials, such as concrete and asbestos.
3.2 Installation of Extraction Wells. Use a well drilling rig
to dig a 0.6 meters diameter hole in the landfill to a minimum of 75
percent of the landfill depth, not to exceed the bottom of the
landfill or the water table. Perforate the bottom two thirds of the
extraction well pipe. Perforations shall not be closer than 6 meters
from the cover. Perforations shall be holes or slots with an open
area equivalent to 1.0 centimeter diameter holes spaced 90 degrees
apart every 0.1 to 0.2 meters. Place the extraction well in the
center of the hole and backfill with 2.0 to 7.5 centimeters gravel
to a level 0.3 meters above the perforated section. Add a layer of
backfill material 1.2 meters thick. Add a layer of bentonite 1.0
meter thick, and backfill the remainder of the hole with cover
material or material equal in permeability to the existing cover
material. The specifications for extraction well installation are
shown in figure 3.
BILLING CODE 6560-50-P
[[Page 9934]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.020
BILLING CODE 6560-50-C
[[Page 9935]]
3.3 Pressure Probes. Shallow pressure probes are used in the
check for infiltration of air into the landfill, and deep pressure
probes are used to determine the radius of influence. Locate the
deep pressure probes along three radial arms approximately 120
degrees apart at distances of 3, 15, 30, and 45 meters from the
extraction well. The tester has the option of locating additional
pressure probes at distances every 15 meters beyond 45 meters.
Example placements of probes are shown in figure 4.
The probes located 15, 30, and 45 meters from each well, and any
additional probes located along the three radial arms (deep probes),
shall extend to a depth equal to the top of the perforated section
of the extraction wells. Locate three shallow probes at a distance
of 3 m from the extraction well. Shallow probes shall extend to a
depth equal to half the depth of the deep probes.
BILLING CODE 6560-50-P
[[Page 9936]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.021
BILLING CODE 6560-50-C
[[Page 9937]]
Use an auger to dig a hole, approximately 0.15 to 0.23 meters in
diameter, for each pressure probe. Perforate the bottom two thirds
of the pressure probe. Perforations shall be holes or slots with an
open area equivalent to four 6.0 millimeter diameter holes spaced 90
degrees apart every 0.15 meters. Place the pressure probe in the
center of the hole and backfill with gravel to a level 0.30 meters
above the perforated section. Add a layer of backfill material at
least 1.2 meters thick. Add a layer of bentonite at least 0.3 meters
thick, and backfill the remainder of the hole with cover material or
material equal in permeability to the existing cover material. The
specifications for pressure probe installation are shown in figure
5.
BILLING CODE 6560-50-P
[[Page 9938]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.022
BILLING CODE 6560-50-C
[[Page 9939]]
3.4 LFG Flow Rate Measurement. Determine the flow rate of LFG
from the test wells continuously during testing with an orifice
meter. Alternative methods to measure the LFG flow rate may be used
with approval of the Administrator. Locate the orifice meter as
shown in figure 1. Attach the wells to the blower and flare
assembly. The individual wells may be ducted to a common header so
that a single blower and flare assembly and flow meter may be used.
Use the procedures in section 4.1 to calibrate the flow meter.
3.5 Leak Check. A leak check of the above ground system is
required for accurate flow rate measurements and for safety. Sample
LFG at the wellhead sample port and at a point downstream of the
flow measuring device. Use Method 3C to determine nitrogen (N2)
concentrations. Determine the difference by using the formula below.
Difference=Co-Cw
where,
Co=concentration of N2 at the outlet, ppmv
Cw=concentration of N2 at the wellhead, ppmv
The system passes the leak check if the difference is less than
10,000 ppmv. If the system fails the leak check, make the
appropriate adjustments to the above ground system and repeat the
leak check.
3.6 Static Testing. The purpose of the static testing is to
determine the initial conditions of the landfill. Close the control
valves on the wells so that there is no flow of landfill gas from
the well. Measure the gauge pressure (Pg) at each deep pressure
probe and the barometric pressure (Pbar) every 8 hours for 3
days. Convert the gauge pressure of each deep pressure probe to
absolute pressure by using the following equation. Record as
Pi.
Pi=Pbar+Pg
where,
Pbar=Atmospheric pressure, mm Hg
Pg=Gauge pressure of the deep probes, mm Hg
Pi=Initial absolute pressure of the deep probes during static
testing, mm Hg
3.6.1 For each probe, average all of the 8 hr deep pressure
probe readings and record as Pia. The Pia is used in
section 3.7.6 to determine the maximum radius of influence.
3.6.2 Measure the LFG temperature and the static flow rate of
each well once during static testing using a flow measurement
device, such as a Type S pitot tube and measure the temperature of
the landfill gas. The flow measurements should be made either just
before or just after the measurements of the probe pressures and are
used in determining the initial flow from the extraction well during
the short term testing. The temperature measurement is used in the
check for infiltration.
3.7 Short Term Testing. The purpose of short term testing is to
determine the maximum vacuum that can be applied to the wells
without infiltration of air into the landfill. The short term
testing is done on one well at a time. During the short term
testing, burn LFG with a flare or incinerator.
3.7.1 Use the blower to extract LFG from a single well at a
rate at least twice the static flow rate of the respective well
measured in section 3.6.2. If using a single blower and flare
assembly and a common header system, close the control valve on the
wells not being measured. Allow 24 hours for the system to stabilize
at this flow rate.
3.7.2 Check for infiltration of air into the landfill by
measuring the temperature of the LFG at the wellhead, the gauge
pressures of the shallow pressure probes, and the LFG N2
concentration by using Method 3C. CAUTION: Increased vacuum at the
wellhead may cause infiltration of air into the landfill, which
increases the possibility of a landfill fire. Infiltration of air
into the landfill may occur if any of the following conditions are
met: the LFG N2 concentration is more than 20 percent, any of
the shallow probes have a negative gauge pressure, or the
temperature has increased above 55 deg.C or the maximum established
temperature during static testing. If infiltration has not occurred,
increase the blower vacuum by 4 mm Hg, wait 24 hours, and repeat the
infiltration check. If at any time, the temperature change exceeds
the limit, stop the test until it is safe to proceed. Continue the
above steps of increasing blower vacuum by 4 mm Hg, waiting 24
hours, and checking for infiltration until the concentration of
N2 exceeds 20 percent or any of the shallow probes have a
negative gauge pressure, at which time reduce the vacuum at the
wellhead so that the N2 concentration is less than 20 percent
and the gauge pressures of the shallow probes are positive. This is
the maximum vacuum at which infiltration does not occur.
3.7.3 At this maximum vacuum, measure Pbar every 8 hours
for 24 hours and record the LFG flow rate as Qs and the probe
gauge pressures for all of the probes as Pf. Convert the gauge
pressures of the deep probes to absolute pressures for each 8-hour
reading at Qs as follows:
P=Pbar+Pf
where,
Pbar=Atmospheric pressure, mm Hg
Pf=Final absolute pressure of the deep probes during short term
testing, mm Hg
P=Pressure of the deep probes, mm Hg
3.7.4 For each probe, average the 8-hr deep pressure probe
readings and record as Pfa.
3.7.5 For each probe, compare the initial average pressure
(Pia) from section 3.6.1 to the final average pressure
(Pfa). Determine the furthermost point from the wellhead along
each radial arm where Pfa Pia. This distance
is the maximum radius of influence (ROI), which is the distance from
the well affected by the vacuum. Average these values to determine
the average maximum radius of influence (Rma).
The average Rma may also be determined by plotting on semi-
log paper the pressure differentials (Pfa-Pia) on the y-
axis (abscissa) versus the distances (3, 15, 30 and 45 meters) from
the wellhead on the x-axis (ordinate). Use a linear regression
analysis to determine the distance when the pressure differential is
zero. Additional pressure probes may be used to obtain more points
on the semi-long plot of pressure differentials versus distances.
3.7.6 Calculate the depth (Dst) affected by the extraction
well during the short term test as follows. If the computed value of
Dst exceeds the depth of the landfill, set Dst equal to
the landfill depth.
Dst=WD + Rma2
where,
Dst=depth, m
WD=well depth, m
Rma=maximum radius of influence, m
3.7.7 Calculate the void volume for the extraction well (V) as
follows.
V=0.40 Rma2 Dst
where,
V=void volume of test well, m3
Rma=maximum radius of influence, m
Dst=depth, m
3.7.8 Repeat the procedures in section 3.7 for each well.
3.8 Calculate the total void volume of the test wells (Vv)
by summing the void volumes (V) of each well.
3.9 Long Term Testing. The purpose of long term testing is to
determine the methane generation rate constant, k. Use the blower to
extract LFG from the wells. If a single blower and flare assembly
and common header system are used, open all control valves and set
the blower vacuum equal to the highest stabilized blower vacuum
demonstrated by any individual well in section 3.7. Every 8 hours,
sample the LFG from the wellhead sample port, measure the gauge
pressures of the shallow pressure probes, the blower vacuum, the LFG
flow rate, and use the criteria for infiltration in section 3.7.2
and Method 3C to check for infiltration. If infiltration is
detected, do not reduce the blower vacuum, but reduce the LFG flow
rate from the well by adjusting the control valve on the wellhead.
Adjust each affected well individually. Continue until the
equivalent of two total void volumes (Vv) have been extracted,
or until Vt=2 Vv.
3.9.1 Calculate Vt, the total volume of LFG extracted from
the wells, as follows.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.028
where,
Vt=total volume of LFG extracted from wells, m3
Qi=LFG flow rate measured at orifice meter at the ith
interval, cubic meters per minute
tvi=time of the ith interval, hour (usually 8)
3.9.2 Record the final stabilized flow rate as Qf. If,
during the long term testing, the flow rate does not stabilize,
calculate Qf by averaging the last 10 recorded flow rates.
3.9.3 For each deep probe, convert each gauge pressure to
absolute pressure as in section 3.7.4. Average these values and
record as Psa. For each probe, compare Pia to Psa.
Determine the furthermost point from the wellhead along each radial
arm where Psa Pia. This distance is the
stabilized radius of influence. Average these values to determine
the average stabilized radius of influence (Rsa).
3.10 Determine the NMOC mass emission rate using the procedures
in section 5.
3.11 Deactivation of pressure probe holes. Upon completion of
measurements, if pressure probes are removed, restore the
[[Page 9940]]
integrity of the landfill cover by backfilling and sealing to
prevent venting of LFG to the atmosphere or air infiltration.
4. Calibrations
Gas Flow Measuring Device Calibration Procedure. Locate a
standard pitot tube in line with a gas flow measuring device. Use
the procedures in Method 2D, section 4, to calibrate the orifice
meter. Method 3C may be used to determine the dry molecular weight.
It may be necessary to calibrate more than one gas flow measuring
device to bracket the landfill gas flow rates. Construct a
calibration curve by plotting the pressure drops across the gas flow
measuring device for each flow rate versus the average dry gas
volumetric flow rate in cubic meters per minute of the gas. Use this
calibration curve to determine the volumetric flow from the wells
during testing.
5. Calculations
5.1 Nomenclature.
Aavg=average age of the solid waste tested, year
Ai=age of solid waste in the ith fraction, year
A=age of landfill, year
Ar=acceptance rate, megagrams per year
CNMOC=NMOC concentration, ppmv as hexane (CNMOC=Ct/6)
Ct=NMOC concentration, ppmv (carbon equivalent) from Method 25C
D = depth affected by the test wells, m
Dst=depth affected by the test wells in the short term test, m
DLF=landfill depth, m
f = fraction of decomposable solid waste in the landfill
fi=fraction of the solid waste in the ith section
k=methane generation rate constant, year-1
Lo=methane generation potential, cubic meters per megagram
Lo=revised methane generation potential to account for the
amount of nondecomposable material in the landfill, cubic meters per
megagram
Mi=mass of solid waste of the ith section, megagrams
Mr=mass of decomposable solid waste affected by the test well,
megagrams
Mw=number of wells
Pbar=atmospheric pressure, mm Hg
Pg=gauge pressure of the deep pressure probes, mm Hg
Pi=initial absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes during
static testing, mm Hg
Pia=average initial absolute pressure of the deep pressure
probes during static testing, mm Hg
Pf=final absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes during
short term testing, mm Hg
Pfa=average final absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes
during short term testing, mm Hg
Ps=final absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes during
long term testing, mm Hg
Psa=average final absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes
during long term testing, mm Hg
QB=required blow flow rate, cubic meters per minute
Qf=final stabilized flow rate, cubic meters per minute
Qi=LFG flow rate measured at orifice meter during the ith
interval, cubic meters per minute
Qs=maximum LFG flow rate at each well determined by short term
test, cubic meters per minute
Qt=NMOC mass emission rate, cubic meters per minute
Rm=maximum radius of influence, m
Rma=average maximum radius of influence, m
Rs=stabilized radius of influence for an individual well, m
Rsa=average stabilized radius of influence, m
ti=age of section i, year
tt=total time of long term testing, year
V=void volume of test well, m3
Vr=volume of solid waste affected by the test well, m3
Vt=total volume of solid waste affected by the long term
testing, m3
Vv=total void volume affected by test wells, m3
WD=well depth, m
=solid waste density, m3 (Assume 0.64 megagrams per
cubic meter if data are unavailable)
5.2 Use the following equation to calculate the depth affected
by the test well. If using cluster wells, use the average depth of
the wells for WD. If the value of D is greater than the depth of the
landfill, set D equal to the landfill depth.
D=WD+Rsa
5.3 Use the following equation to calculate the volume of solid
waste affected by the test well.
Vr=Rsa2 D
5.4 Use the following equation to calculate the mass affected
by the test well.
Mr=Vr
5.5 Modify Lo to account for the nondecomposable solid
waste in the landfill.
Lo'=f Lo
5.6 In the following equation, solve for k by iteration. A
suggested procedure is to select a value for k, calculate the left
side of the equation, and if not equal to zero, select another value
for k. Continue this process until the left hand side of the
equation equals zero, #0.001.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.029
5.7 Use the following equation to determine landfill NMOC mass
emission rate if the yearly acceptance rate of solid waste has been
consistent (10 percent) over the life of the landfill.
Qt = 2 Lo' Ar (1 - e-k A) CNMOC / (5.256
x 1011)
5.8 Use the following equation to determine landfill NMOC mass
emission rate if the acceptance rate has not been consistent over
the life of the landfill.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.030
6. Bibliography
1. Same as Method 2, appendix A, 40 CFR part 60.
2. Emcon Associates, Methane Generation and Recovery from
Landfills. Ann Arbor Science, 1982.
3. The Johns Hopkins University, Brown Station Road Testing and
Gas Recovery Projections. Laurel, Maryland: October 1982.
4. Mandeville and Associates, Procedure Manual for Landfill
Gases Emission Testing.
5. Letter and attachments from Briggum, S., Waste Management of
North America, to Thorneloe, S., EPA. Response to July 28, 1988
request for additional information. August 18,1988.
6. Letter and attachments from Briggum, S., Waste Management of
North America, to Wyatt, S., EPA. Response to December 7, 1988
request for additional information. January 16, 1989.
* * * * *
Method 3C--Determination of Carbon Dioxide, Methane, Nitrogen, and
Oxygen From Stationary Sources
1. Applicability and Principle
1.1 Applicability. This method applies to the analysis of
carbon dioxide (CO2), methane (CH4), nitrogen (N2),
and oxygen (O2) in samples from municipal solid waste landfills
and other sources when specified in an applicable subpart.
1.2 Principle. A portion of the sample is injected into a gas
chromatograph (GC) and the CO2, CH4, N2, and O2
concentrations are determined by using a thermal conductivity
detector (TCD) and integrator.
2. Range and Sensitivity
2.1 Range. The range of this method depends upon the
concentration of samples. The analytical range of TCD's is generally
between approximately 10 ppmv and the upper percent range.
2.2 Sensitivity. The sensitivity limit for a compound is
defined as the minimum detectable concentration of that compound, or
the concentration that produces a signal-to-noise ratio of three to
one. For CO2, CH4, N2, and O2, the sensitivity
limit is in the low ppmv range.
3. Interferences
Since the TCD exhibits universal response and detects all gas
components except the carrier, interferences may occur. Choosing the
appropriate GC or shifting the retention times by changing the
column flow rate may help to eliminate resolution interferences.
To assure consistent detector response, helium is used to
prepare calibration gases. Frequent exposure to samples or carrier
gas containing oxygen may gradually destroy filaments.
4. Apparatus
4.1 Gas Chromatograph. GC having at least the following
components:
4.1.1 Separation Column. Appropriate column(s) to resolve
CO2, CH4, N2, O2, and other gas components that
may be present in the sample.
4.1.2 Sample Loop. Teflon or stainless steel tubing of the
appropriate diameter.
[[Page 9941]]
Note: Mention of trade names or specific products does not
constitute endorsement or recommendation by the U. S. Environmental
Protection Agency.
4.1.3 Conditioning System. To maintain the column and sample
loop at constant temperature.
4.1.4 Thermal Conductivity Detector.
4.2 Recorder. Recorder with linear strip chart. Electronic
integrator (optional) is recommended.
4.3 Teflon Tubing. Diameter and length determined by connection
requirements of cylinder regulators and the GC.
4.4 Regulators. To control gas cylinder pressures and flow
rates.
4.5 Adsorption Tubes. Applicable traps to remove any O2
from the carrier gas.
5. Reagents
5.1 Calibration and Linearity Gases. Standard cylinder gas
mixtures for each compound of interest with at least three
concentration levels spanning the range of suspected sample
concentrations. The calibration gases shall be prepared in helium.
5.2 Carrier Gas. Helium, high-purity.
6. Analysis
6.1 Sample Collection. Use the sample collection procedures
described in Methods 3 or 25C to collect a sample of landfill gas
(LFG).
6.2 Preparation of GC. Before putting the GC analyzer into
routine operation, optimize the operational conditions according to
the manufacturer's specifications to provide good resolution and
minimum analysis time. Establish the appropriate carrier gas flow
and set the detector sample and reference cell flow rates at exactly
the same levels. Adjust the column and detector temperatures to the
recommended levels. Allow sufficient time for temperature
stabilization. This may typically require 1 hour for each change in
temperature.
6.3 Analyzer Linearity Check and Calibration. Perform this test
before sample analysis. Using the gas mixtures in section 5.1,
verify the detector linearity over the range of suspected sample
concentrations with at least three points per compound of interest.
This initial check may also serve as the initial instrument
calibration. All subsequent calibrations may be performed using a
single-point standard gas provided the calibration point is within
20 percent of the sample component concentration. For each
instrument calibration, record the carrier and detector flow rates,
detector filament and block temperatures, attenuation factor,
injection time, chart speed, sample loop volume, and component
concentrations. Plot a linear regression of the standard
concentrations versus area values to obtain the response factor of
each compound. Alternatively, response factors of uncorrected
component concentrations (wet basis) may be generated using
instrumental integration. Note: Peak height may be used instead of
peak area throughout this method.
6.4 Sample Analysis. Purge the sample loop with sample, and
allow to come to atmospheric pressure before each injection. Analyze
each sample in duplicate, and calculate the average sample area (A).
The results are acceptable when the peak areas for two consecutive
injections agree within 5 percent of their average. If they do not
agree, run additional samples until consistent area data are
obtained. Determine the tank sample concentrations according to
section 7.2.
7. Calculations
Carry out calculations retaining at least one extra decimal
figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off results only
after the final calculation.
7.1 Nomenclature.
A = average sample area
Bw = moisture content in the sample, fraction
C = component concentration in the sample, dry basis, ppmv
Ct = calculated NMOC concentration, ppmv C equivalent
Ctm = measured NMOC concentration, ppmv C equivalent
Pbar = barometric pressure, mm Hg
Pti = gas sample tank pressure after evacuation, mm Hg absolute
Pt = gas sample tank pressure after sampling, but before
pressurizing, mm Hg absolute
Ptf = final gas sample tank pressure after pressurizing, mm Hg
absolute
Pw = vapor pressure of H2O (from table 3C-1), mm Hg
Tti = sample tank temperature before sampling, deg.K
Tt = sample tank temperature at completion of sampling, deg.K
Ttf = sample tank temperature after pressurizing, deg.K
r = total number of analyzer injections of sample tank during
analysis (where j = injection number, 1 . . . r)
R = Mean calibration response factor for specific sample component,
area/ppmv
Table 3C-1.--Moisture Correction
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vapor
Temperature deg.C Pressure of
H2O, mm Hg
------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.......................................................... 6.1
6.......................................................... 7.0
8.......................................................... 8.0
10......................................................... 9.2
12......................................................... 10.5
14......................................................... 12.0
16......................................................... 13.6
18......................................................... 15.5
20......................................................... 17.5
22......................................................... 19.8
24......................................................... 22.4
26......................................................... 25.2
28......................................................... 28.3
30......................................................... 31.8
------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2 Concentration of Sample Components. Calculate C for each
compound using Equations 3C-1 and 3C-2. Use the temperature and
barometric pressure at the sampling site to calculate Bw. If the
sample was diluted with helium using the procedures in Method 25C,
use Equation 3C-3 to calculate the concentration.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.031
8. Bibliography
1. McNair, H.M., and E.J. Bonnelli. Basic Gas Chromatography.
Consolidated Printers, Berkeley, CA. 1969.
* * * * *
Method 25C--Determination of Nonmethane Organic Compounds (NMOC) in MSW
Landfill Gases
1. Applicability and Principle
1.1 Applicability. This method is applicable to the sampling
and measurement of nonmethane organic compounds (NMOC) as carbon in
MSW landfill gases.
1.2 Principle. A sample probe that has been perforated at one
end is driven or augered to a depth of 1.0 meter below the bottom of
the landfill cover. A sample of the landfill gas is extracted with
an evacuated cylinder. The NMOC content of the gas is determined by
injecting a portion of the gas into a gas chromatographic column to
separate the NMOC from carbon monoxide (CO), carbon dioxide
(CO2), and methane (CH4); the NMOC are oxidized to
CO2, reduced to CH4, and measured by a flame ionization
detector (FID). In this manner, the variable response of the FID
associated with different types of organics is eliminated.
2. Apparatus
2.1 Sample Probe. Stainless steel, with the bottom third
perforated. The sample probe shall be capped at the bottom and shall
have a threaded cap with a sampling attachment at the top. The
sample probe shall be long enough to go through and extend no less
than 1.0 meter below the landfill cover. If the sample probe is to
be driven into the landfill, the bottom cap should be designed to
facilitate driving the probe into the landfill.
2.2 Sampling Train.
2.2.1 Rotameter with Flow Control Valve. Capable of measuring a
sample flow rate of 500 ml/min or less (30.53.1 m\3\/
min). The control valve shall be made of stainless steel.
2.2.2 Sampling Valve. Stainless steel.
2.2.3 Pressure Gauge. U-tube mercury manometer, or equivalent,
capable of measuring pressure to within 1 mm Hg in the range of 0 to
1,100 mm Hg.
2.2.4 Sample Tank. Stainless steel or aluminum cylinder, with a
minimum volume of 4 liters and equipped with a stainless steel
sample tank valve.
2.3 Vacuum Pump. Capable of evacuating to an absolute pressure
of 10 mm Hg.
2.4 Purging Pump. Portable, explosion proof, and suitable for
sampling NMOC.
[[Page 9942]]
2.5 Pilot Probe Procedure. The following are needed only if the
tester chooses to use the procedure described in section 4.2.1.
2.5.1 Pilot Probe. Tubing of sufficient strength to withstand
being driven into the landfill by a post driver and an outside
diameter of at least 6.0 millimeters smaller than the sample probe.
The pilot probe shall be capped on both ends and long enough to go
through the landfill cover and extend no less than 1.0 meter into
the landfill.
2.5.2 Post Driver and Compressor. Capable of driving the pilot
probe and the sampling probe into the landfill.
2.6 Auger Procedure. The following are needed only if the
tester chooses to use the procedure described in section 4.2.2.
2.6.1 Auger. Capable of drilling through the landfill cover and
to a depth of no less than 0.9 meters into the landfill.
2.6.2 Pea Gravel.
2.6.3 Bentonite.
2.7 NMOC Analyzer, Barometer, Thermometer, and Syringes. Same
as in sections 2.3, 2.4.1, 2.4.2, 2.4.4, respectively, of Method 25.
3. Reagents
3.1 NMOC Analysis. Same as in Method 25, section 3.2.
3.2 Calibration. Same as in Method 25, section 3.4, except omit
section 3.4.3.
4. Procedure
4.1 Sample Tank Evacuation and Leak Check. Conduct the sample
tank evacuation and leak check either in the laboratory or the
field. Connect the pressure gauge and sampling valve to the sample
tank. Evacuate the sample tank to 10 mm Hg absolute pressure or
less. Close the sampling valve, and allow the tank to sit for 60
minutes. The tank is acceptable if no change is noted. Include the
results of the leak check in the test report.
4.2 Sample Probe Installation. The tester may use the procedure
in sections 4.2.1 or 4.2.2. CAUTION: Since this method is complex,
only experienced personnel should perform this test. LFG contains
methane, therefore explosive mixtures may exist on or near the
landfill. It is advisable to take appropriate safety precautions
when testing landfills, such as refraining from smoking and
installing explosion-proof equipment.
4.2.1 Pilot Probe Procedure. Use the post driver to drive the
pilot probe at least 1.0 meter below the landfill cover. Alternative
procedures to drive the probe into the landfill may be used subject
to the approval of the Administrator.
Remove the pilot probe and drive the sample probe into the hole
left by the pilot probe. The sample probe shall extend not less than
1.0 meter below the landfill cover and shall protrude about 0.3
meters above the landfill cover. Seal around the sampling probe with
bentonite and cap the sampling probe with the sampling probe cap.
4.2.2 Auger Procedure. Use an auger to drill a hole through the
landfill cover and to at least 1.0 meter below the landfill cover.
Place the sample probe in the hole and backfill with pea gravel to a
level 0.6 meters from the surface. The sample probe shall protrude
at least 0.3 meters above the landfill cover. Seal the remaining
area around the probe with bentonite. Allow 24 hours for the
landfill gases to equilibrate inside the augered probe before
sampling.
4.3 Sample Train Assembly. Prepare the sample by evacuating and
filling the sample tank with helium three times. After the third
evacuation, charge the sample tank with helium to a pressure of
approximately 325 mm Hg. Record the pressure, the ambient
temperature, and the barometric pressure. Assemble the sampling
probe purging system as shown in figure 1.
BILLING CODE 6560-50-P
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.023
4.4 Sampling Procedure. Open the sampling valve and use the
purge pump and the flow control valve to evacuate at least two
sample probe volumes from the system at a flow rate of 500 ml/min or
less (30.53.1 m\3\/min). Close the sampling valve and
replace the purge pump with the sample tank apparatus as shown in
figure 2. Open the sampling valve and the sample tank valves and,
using the flow control valve, sample at a flow rate of 500 ml/min or
less (30.53.1 m\3\/min) until the sample tank gauge
pressure is zero. Disconnect the sampling tank apparatus and use the
carrier gas bypass valve to pressurize the sample cylinder to
approximately 1,060 mm Hg absolute pressure with helium and record
the final pressure. Alternatively, the sample tank may be
pressurized in the lab. If not analyzing for N2, the sample
cylinder may be pressurized with zero air. Use Method 3C to
determine the percent N2 in the sample. Presence of N2
indicates infiltration of ambient air into the gas sample. The
landfill sample is acceptable if the concentration of N2 is
less than 20 percent.
[[Page 9943]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.024
4.5 Analysis. The oxidation, reduction, and measurement of NMOC
is similar to Method 25. Before putting the NMOC analyzer into
routine operation, conduct an initial performance test. Start the
analyzer, and perform all the necessary functions to put the
analyzer into proper working order. Conduct the performance test
according to the procedures established in section 5.1. Once the
performance test has been successfully completed and the NMOC
calibration response factor has been determined, proceed with sample
analysis as follows:
4.5.1 Daily Operations and Calibration Checks. Before and
immediately after the analysis of each set of samples or on a daily
basis (whichever occurs first), conduct a calibration test according
to the procedures established in section 5.2. If the criteria of the
daily calibration test cannot be met, repeat the NMOC analyzer
performance test (section 5.1) before proceeding.
4.5.2 Operating Conditions. Same as in Method 25, section
4.4.2.
4.5.3 Analysis of Sample Tank. Purge the sample loop with
sample, and then inject the sample. Under the specified operating
conditions, the CO2 in the sample will elute in approximately
100 seconds. As soon as the detector response returns to baseline
following the CO2 peak, switch the carrier gas flow to
backflush, and raise the column oven temperature to 195 deg.C as
rapidly as possible. A rate of 30 deg.C/min has been shown to be
adequate. Record the value obtained for any measured NMOC. Return
the column oven temperature to 85 deg.C in preparation for the next
analysis. Analyze each sample in triplicate, and report the average
as Ctm.
4.6 Audit Samples. Same as in Method 25, section 4.5.
4.7 Deactivation of Sample Probe Holes. Once sampling has taken
place, either plug the sampling probes with a cap or remove the
probes and refill the hole with cover material.
5. Calibration and Operational Checks
Maintain a record of performance of each item.
5.1 Initial NMOC Analyzer Performance Test. Same as in Method
25, section 5.2, except omit the linearity checks for CO2
standards.
5.2 NMOC Analyzer Daily Calibration. NMOC response factors,
same as in Method 25, section 5.3.2.
6. Calculations
All equations are written using absolute pressure; absolute
pressures are determined by adding the measured barometric pressure
to the measured gauge of manometer pressure.
6.1 Nomenclature.
Bw=moisture content in the sample, fraction
CN2=measured N2 concentration, fraction
Ct=calculated NMOC concentration, ppmv C equivalent
Ctm=measured NMOC concentration, ppmv C equivalent
Pb=barometric pressure, mm Hg
Pti=gas sample tank pressure before sampling, mm Hg absolute
Pt=gas sample tank pressure at completion of sampling, but
before pressurizing, mm Hg absolute
Ptf=final gas sample tank pressure after pressurizing, mm Hg
absolute
Pw=vapor pressure of H2O (from table 25C-1), mm Hg
Tti=sample tank temperature before sampling, deg.K
Tt=sample tank temperature at completion of sampling, but
before pressuring, deg.K
Ttf=sample tank temperature after pressurizing, deg.K
r=total number of analyzer injections of sample tank during analysis
(where j=injection number, 1. . .r)
6.2 Water Correction. Use table 25C-1, the LFG temperature, and
barometric pressure at the sampling site to calculate Bw.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.032
Table 25C-1.--Moisture Correction
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vapor
Temperature, deg.C Pressure of
H2O, mm Hg
------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.......................................................... 6.1
6.......................................................... 7.0
8.......................................................... 8.0
1.......................................................... 9.2
12......................................................... 10.5
14......................................................... 12.0
16......................................................... 13.6
18......................................................... 15.5
20......................................................... 17.5
22......................................................... 19.8
24......................................................... 22.4
26......................................................... 25.2
28......................................................... 28.3
30......................................................... 31.8
------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.3 NMOC Concentration. Use the following equation to calculate
the concentration of NMOC for each sample tank.
[[Page 9944]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.033
7. Bibliography
1. Salon, Albert E., Samuel Witz, and Robert D. MacPhee.
Determination of Solvent Vapor Concentrations by Total Combustion
Analysis: A Comparison of Infrared with Flame Ionization Detectors.
Paper No. 75-33.2. (Presented at the 68th Annual Meeting of the Air
Pollution Control Association. Boston, Massachusetts. June 15-20,
1975.) p. 14.
2. Salon, Albert E., William L. Oaks, and Robert D. MacPhee.
Measuring the Organic Carbon Content of Source Emissions for Air
Pollution Control. Paper No. 74-190. (Presented at the 67th Annual
Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association. Denver, Colorado.
June 9-13, 1974.) p. 25.
[FR Doc. 96-5529 Filed 3-11-96; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 6560-50-P
Complete official Federal Register PDF
FR Doc. 96-5500 Classification Reform; Implementation Standards
[Federal Register Volume 61, Number 49 (Tuesday, March 12, 1996)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 10068-10217]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 96-5500]
[[Page 10067]]
_______________________________________________________________________
Part II
Postal Service
_______________________________________________________________________
39 CFR Part 111
Classification Reform; Implementation Standards; Final Rule
Federal Register / Vol. 61, No. 49 / Tuesday, March 12, 1996 / Rules
and Regulations
[[Page 10068]]
POSTAL SERVICE
39 CFR Part 111
Classification Reform; Implementation Standards
AGENCY: Postal Service.
ACTION: Final rule; request for comments.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: This final rule sets forth the Domestic Mail Manual (DMM)
standards adopted by the Postal Service to implement the Decision of
the Governors of the Postal Service in Postal Rate Commission Docket
No. MC95-1, Classification Reform I, and requests further comments on
some aspects of those standards.
DATES: The final rule is effective on July 1, 1996. Comments as allowed
herein must be received on or before March 27, 1996.
ADDRESSES: Mail or deliver written comments to the Manager, Customer
Mail Preparation, USPS Headquarters, 475 L'Enfant Plaza SW, Washington,
DC 20260-2405. Copies of all written comments will be available for
inspection and photocopying between 9 a.m. and 4 p.m., Monday through
Friday, in Room 6830 at the above address.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Leo F. Raymond, (202) 268-5199,
concerning the DMM standards, or Lynn Martin, (202) 268-6351,
concerning the comments analysis.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: On March 24, 1995, pursuant to its authority
under 39 U.S.C. 3621, et seq., the Postal Service filed with the Postal
Rate Commission (PRC) a request for a recommended decision on a number
of mail classification reform proposals (Classification Reform). The
PRC designated the filing as Docket No. MC95-1. The PRC published a
notice of the filing, with a description of the Postal Service's
proposals, on April 3, 1995, in the Federal Register (60 FR 16888-
16893).
On June 29, 1995, the Postal Service published for public comment
in the Federal Register an advance notice of proposed rulemaking (60 FR
34056-34069). That notice included an overview of the Postal Service's
proposals in MC95-1, the process that was used in developing them, and
the process being used to prepare for implementation of Classification
Reform and to begin development of the Domestic Mail Manual (DMM)
implementing standards. The notice also contained detailed information
about issues that had been identified for consideration in the
implementation process, presented in a format that paralleled the
Domestic Mail Classification Schedule (DMCS) changes proposed in the
MC95-1 filing. Many of those implementation issues had been developed
with the advice of the Classification Reform Implementation Advisory
Groups (IAGs) convened by the Postal Service as part of the process
described in the notice. The advance notice requested comments on the
criteria under consideration for inclusion in proposed DMM implementing
standards. Readers who are unfamiliar with the content of the Postal
Service's MC95-1 filing or the implementation process should review the
June 29 notice.
On August 30, 1995, the Postal Service published for public comment
in the Federal Register a second advance notice of proposed rulemaking
(60 FR 45298-45323). The second notice reported a summary of the
comments received in response to the first notice and invited further
comment from interested parties on updated proposed implementing
standards and on the implementation process generally. Readers were
advised that, following review of comments received in response to the
second notice, the Postal Service would revise its proposed
implementation criteria as appropriate and would use those criteria as
the basis for the DMM standards it would propose for adoption if the
Classification Reform proposals requested by the Postal Service in PRC
Docket No. MC95-1 were adopted.
On December 22, 1995, the Postal Service published for public
comment in the Federal Register a proposed rule (60 FR 66582-66703)
that summarized and responded to comments received from the August
notice; offered extensive details about contents of the proposed rule
that were new or modified compared to the earlier notices and assessed
their possible impact on the mailing community; offered simplified
charts to illustrate proposed mail preparation standards; supplied an
estimated list of 5-digit ZIP Codes affected by one of its proposals;
and concluded with a complete listing of changes to the standards in
the DMM that it proposed to adopt if the Classification Reform
proposals requested by the Postal Service in PRC Docket No. MC95-1 were
recommended by the PRC and approved by the Governors of the Postal
Service.
Pursuant to 39 U.S.C. 3624, on January 26, 1996, the PRC issued its
Recommended Decision on the Postal Service's Request to the Governors
of the Postal Service. The PRC recommendations made revisions to some
of the mail classification structure and rates requested by the Postal
Service. Based on an extensive analysis of the PRC's Recommended
Decision and deliberation as to its consequences to the Postal Service
and its customers, and pursuant to 39 U.S.C. 3625, the Governors acted
on the PRC's recommendations on March 4, 1996. Decision of the
Governors of the United States Postal Service on the Recommended
Decision of the Postal Rate Commission on Classification Reform I,
Docket No. MC95-1. With the exception of the PRC's separate courtesy
envelope mail and bulk parcel post proposals, the Governors determined
to approve the PRC's recommendations, and the Board of Governors set an
implementation date of July 1, 1996, for those rate and classification
changes to take effect. A notice announcing the Governors' Decision and
the issuance of final Domestic Mail Classification Schedule and Rate
Schedule changes is published elsewhere in this issue of the Federal
Register.
This final rule contains the DMM standards adopted by the Postal
Service to implement the Governors' decision. Except as specifically
noted below, the revised DMM standards will take effect on July 1,
1996.
In its testimony before the PRC, the Postal Service presented
extensive evidence concerning the prudence and necessity of certain
fundamental changes it was seeking to cause or facilitate in the
mailstreams it processes. Most if not all of those changes were not
founded in a particular rate or classification scheme, although the
Postal Service considered that the incentives offered in its requested
structure make it easier for customers to accept or benefit from those
changes. Many components of the proposed rule reflected basic
operational and network changes designed to improve the Postal
Service's ability to encourage, manage, and benefit from automated
mail, to improve mailflow, and to focus processing activities at a
redesigned matrix of node facilities. As a result, despite the
differences between the Postal Service's Request and the PRC's
recommendation which the Governors have approved, the value and
efficacy of those elements of the proposed rule related to mail
quality, preparation, automation, and equipment and network utilization
remain undiminished. As a result, the content of the proposed rule has
been adopted as a final rule except as described below to correct
factual or typographical errors, respond to comments received, or align
with the rate and classification
[[Page 10069]]
structure recommended by the PRC and approved by the Governors.
Because the PRC's Recommended Decision, as approved by the
Governors, made significant changes to the mail classification
structure requested by the Postal Service, adaptation of the proposed
rule to the final structure has been necessitated in the final rule.
Most of these changes are a direct consequence of the difference
between the rate and classification changes proposed by the Postal
Service and those recommended by the PRC and approved by the Governors.
These were matters at issue in the PRC proceeding and, as such, are not
subject to review or adjustment in this rulemaking. To the extent this
final rule establishes further standards that were not previously
published for public comment, the Postal Service has determined to seek
and consider additional input from customers. This further opportunity
for public comment is limited to matters that are newly introduced in
the final rule, that do not result from the difference in recommended
rate and classification provisions, and that are significant in their
impact on customers compared with what was proposed in the proposed
rule. The provisions for which comments are solicited are:
1. New standards applied to Periodicals that are similar to those
adopted in this final rule for First-Class and Standard Mail:
a. All pieces in an automation rate mailing must be delivery point
barcoded.
b. Presort and other preparation standards, including a 150-piece
minimum for preparing trays of automation rate letter-size mail.
c. 5-digit ZIP Codes used in the addresses on nonautomation rate
Periodicals must be verified annually for accuracy; mailers must
certify this at the time of mailing..
d. Letter-size reply envelopes and cards enclosed in automation
rate pieces must meet specific standards for automation-compatibility;
mailers must certify this at the time of mailing.
2. Standards for documentation produced by Presort Accuracy
Validation and Evaluation (PAVE) certified software and for
standardized documentation produced otherwise. These standards are
presented in P012, below; examples of documentation are also presented
as part of this notice.
After considering the potential impact of these provisions, the
Postal Service has determined to allow 15 days for public comment.
Although a longer comment period is usually provided, the Postal
Service concluded that a 15-day comment period was warranted in this
case for two reasons. First, the list of provisions on which comment is
sought is limited and straightforward. Mailers should have little
difficulty evaluating the impact of these provisions on their
operations and preparing comments in a short time period. Second, the
Postal Service wants to ensure that mailers have sufficient time after
the close of the comment period and publication of any possible
revisions to this final rule to make the necessary changes to their
operations before the July 1, 1996 implementation date. After review of
the comments received, the Postal Service will modify the corresponding
standards if such modification is determined to be appropriate.
Part A of this notice summarizes major changes that have been made
to or added to the proposed implementation standards since the proposed
rule. Part B provides an analysis of comments received on the proposed
rule and the Postal Service responses. Part C shows examples of
standardized documentation that would be generated under the standards
shown below. Part D summarizes the changes to the DMM, followed by the
text of the revised DMM standards.
A. Major Changes and Additions Since the December 22 Proposed Rule
This section identifies additions and changes to the final DMM
mailing standards that were not part of the proposed rules published on
December 22.
1. Marking Standards
Marking standards have been revised to allow mailers to continue to
use ``Presorted First-Class'' and ``Bulk Rate'' markings as class of
mail markings for presorted First-Class and Standard Mail. These
markings must appear in the postage area on mailpieces. Additional
mailing or rate specific markings are also required. This change will
allow mailers to continue to use existing envelope stock, precanceled
stamps, and meter slugs.
2. Postage Payment
Revisions have been made to postage payment standards to allow
mailers to affix metered postage to all the pieces in a mailing job at
the lowest rate that applies to any presorted mailing contained in the
mailing job.
3. Value Added Refund
The proposal that would have required all pieces in a value added
refund (VAR) mailing to have postage affixed at an automation rate has
been removed. First-Class mailpieces bearing postage at Presorted
First-Class rates will be acceptable for inclusion in automation First-
Class VAR mailings, and Standard Mail pieces bearing postage at
presorted nonautomation Regular rates will be acceptable for inclusion
in automation Standard Mail VAR mailings.
4. Minimum Quantity Per Mailing
In accordance with the Domestic Mail Classification Schedule
standards approved by the Governors, separate 500-piece minimum
quantity per mailing standards have been established for mailings of
cards in addition to those which apply to letters. Mailers may continue
to combine comparably prepared letters and cards in the same mailings
if the separate minimums are met and additional postage payment and
documentation standards are met.
5. Postage Statements
Mailing statements have been renamed postage statements to clarify
the new standards that will allow all mailings submitted for
verification as part of the same mailing job to be reported on a single
postage statement.
6. Sleeving and Banding
The proposed sleeving and banding standards for trayed letter mail
have been modified. There will be no exceptions to sleeving. Exceptions
to strapping of local mail have been extended to allow such exceptions
for mail entered and delivered within the service area of the SCF
serving the entry post office if approved by local management. The
proposal had limited this exception only to mail entered and delivered
within the service area of the facility where the mail was entered. The
DMM palletization standards have been modified to make it clear that
only trayed mail on stretchwrapped 5-digit, 3-digit, and SCF pallets
are exempt from tray-strapping.
7. Packaging Material
The proposal has been removed that required use of only rubber
bands to prepare packages within automation letter mailings. Upon
implementation of Classification Reform, mailers may continue to
prepare these packages using either rubber bands, elastic strapping,
plastic strapping or string. However, the Postal Service plans to
require use of rubber bands or elastic strapping for automation
mailings at a future date and will work with mailers on the timing of
this standard.
[[Page 10070]]
8. Courtesy Reply Mail in Automation Mailings
The standards have been revised concerning courtesy envelope and
business reply mail enclosed in pieces mailed at First-Class or
Standard Mail automation rates. The final rule also applies these
standards to automation Regular Periodicals. The proposal indicated
that the enclosed reply pieces must all bear a delivery point barcode,
in addition to being automation-compatible and bearing a FIM. Under the
final rule, the barcode standards have been revised to indicate that
ZIP+4 barcodes are required for business reply mail and that courtesy
reply mail must bear the correct delivery point barcode for the
delivery address as defined by the Postal Service. Unique 5-digit and
ZIP+4 barcodes provided by the Postal Service for use with courtesy
reply mail will be considered valid delivery point barcodes for
purposes of meeting this standard. In addition, the final rule requires
that the enclosed reply mail pieces meet the barcode preparation
standards in DMM C840. The standards concerning reply mail enclosed in
First-Class, Standard Mail and Periodicals automation rate mailings are
effective January 1, 1997. Comments are permitted on the extension of
this requirement to Periodicals.
9. 3-Digit Schemes for Automation Letters
Use of 3-digit scheme sort will be required for automation letters.
This standard will allow mailers to obtain the finest discount level
and the Postal Service to receive mail presorted to the finest extent
possible.
10. Grouping of Pieces in AADC Trays
Within mixed AADC trays in automation and upgradable letter
mailings, the proposed standard to group pieces in those trays by both
AADC, and within each AADC group, by 3-digit ZIP Code has been
modified. Mail in these mixed AADC trays will be required to be grouped
only by AADC area.
11. Specific Use of 1-Foot and 2-Foot Trays
The traying standards for proper use of appropriate 1-foot and 2-
foot trays have been clarified to specify the type of tray that must be
used when mailers have a quantity of mail for a tray sortation level
that exceeds the physical capacity of a 1-foot tray, but is less than
the minimum quantity for a full 2-foot tray. For automation and
upgradable mailings of other than card-size pieces, the Postal Service
would like the fewest number of packages (which are only prepared in
less-than-full trays). For these mailings, when the mail remaining
after filling all possible 2-foot trays exceeds the physical capacity
of a 1-foot tray, but is less than the minimum quantity for a full 2-
foot tray, mailers must place this mail in two 1-foot trays (a full 1-
foot tray (without packaging) and a less-than-full 1-foot tray (with
packaging)). For nonautomation mailings and for automation and
upgradable mailings consisting entirely of card-size pieces, which are
prepared in banded packages, the Postal Service would like to receive
the fewest number of trays. Therefore for nonautomation mailings, when
the mail remaining after filling all possible 2-foot trays exceeds the
physical capacity of a 1-foot tray, but is less than the minimum
quantity for a full 2-foot tray, mailers must place this mail in a
single less-than-full 2-foot tray.
12. Less-Than-Full 3-Digit Trays
Modification has been made to the proposed standard to tray all
mail for the 3-digit ZIP Codes served by the SCF of the entry post
office to at least the 3-digit level. These rules now apply only to the
SCF that serves the post office where the mailing is verified.
13. Modification to ADC Lists
The ADC list in proposed DMM L004 has been modified to provide for
some class-specific differences in labeling. In addition, separate ADC
and Mixed ADC labeling lists for Standard Mail irregular parcels have
been added as DMM L603 and L604.
14. Mixed ADC and AADC Tray Destinations for First-Class Mail
Mixed ADC and mixed AADC trays in First-Class mailings will be
labeled to the SCF that serves the entry post office rather than to the
3-digit ZIP Code of the entry post office.
15. Qualification of AADC and ADC Sort Levels for BMC Destination Entry
Discounts
Eligibility for destination BMC discounts for Standard Mail
prepared in AADC trays and ADC trays, sacks, and packages on pallets
has been clarified. The entire contents of these trays, sacks, or
packages placed on pallets may receive a DBMC discount, provided that
the ZIP Code in the top line of the tray or sack label, (or the ZIP
Code assigned to the ADC in L004 for the package) is in the service
area of the BMC at which the tray, sack, package on a pallet, is
entered.
16. Revisions to Barcoded Tray Label Specifications
The effective date for the standard to use barcoded tray and sack
labels for mailings at automation First-Class, automation Standard, and
automation Periodicals rates has been changed to January 1, 1997.
17. Revisions to Specifications for Mailer Prepared Tray and Sack
Labels
Adjustments and corrections have been made to the specifications in
DMM M032 concerning mailer-prepared tray and sack labels, including
barcoded labels. Mailers at all classes and rates are also reminded
that effective July 1, 1996, tray, sack, and pallet labels used with
their mailings must be revised to reflect the network changes, changes
to the names of the classes of mail, and other labeling changes that
will go into effect with these final DMM rules.
18. Enhanced Carrier Route Rates
Separate letter and nonletter rates have been established by the
Governors for the Standard Enhanced Carrier Route subclass. In
addition, the automation carrier route rate proposed under a separate
automation subclass has been recommended by the PRC and approved by the
Governors as an automation Enhanced Carrier Route rate. Accordingly,
automation Enhanced Carrier Route mailings must meet a separate minimum
quantity requirement from mail at automation Regular Standard rates,
and will be subject to the minimum per piece weight breakpoint for the
Enhanced Carrier Route subclass.
19. Palletization of Mail Meeting Both Letter-Size and Automation Flat-
Size Standards
In the proposed rule, the Postal Service proposed an exception that
would allow certain letter-size mail to be prepared as packages on
pallets. Under this exception, mailers of pieces that meet both the
letter and automation flats dimensions, and who mail a portion of their
mailing job at the automation flats rates, would be permitted to
prepare the entire mailing job (i.e., Enhanced Carrier Route,
automation Regular, and nonautomation Regular mailings) as packages on
pallets, provided the nonautomation Regular portion was 10% or less of
the total pieces mailed at the Enhanced Carrier Route and automation
Regular rates, and flat rates (non-letter rates) were paid on all
pieces. The final rule will provide for this exception, but only until
January 1, 1997. Beginning January 1, 1997, the Enhanced Carrier Route
and nonautomation Regular portions of
[[Page 10071]]
mailing jobs of pieces that meet the definition of letter-size mail
will be required to be trayed. Preparation of trays on pallets is
preferred. This is consistent with the Postal Service's need to have
all letter mail prepared in trays, and is discussed further in the
section discussing comments.
20. Periodicals
The proposed Publications Service subclass of Periodicals was not
recommended to the Governors by the Postal Rate Commission. Instead
revised rates for Regular Periodicals were recommended. These changes
to Periodicals have been accepted by the Governors. As a consequence,
the Postal Service has determined to modify the mail preparation and
quality standards for entry at the Regular Periodicals rates. The
standards set forth in this notice are final rules. Because many of
these standards were not applied to all Periodicals mailers in the
proposed rule, the Postal Service will permit comments on these
standards.
Unlike the proposed rule, there are no rates and corresponding
preparation standards for automation carrier route mail; only mail
sorted to 5-digit and unique 3-digit ZIP Code packages, trays, and
sacks may qualify for applicable 3/5 rates; and zone rates apply only
to advertising pounds. Like the proposed rule, optional city will no
longer be a sortation level, and SDC, State, and Mixed States sortation
levels have been replaced with the appropriate ADC and mixed ADC or
AADC and mixed AADC sortation levels.
a. Regular Periodicals Automation Rate Mailings
(1) Letter-Size Pieces. Mailings must be presorted under standards
similar to automation First-Class and Standard mailings. There is no
automation carrier route mail preparation or rate. Mailers must sort
mail to required 5-digit, required unique 3-digit, required 3-digit/
scheme, and required AADC trays, using a 150-piece minimum at each tray
level. Remaining mail is trayed to mixed AADC trays. Only mail in 5-
digit and unique 3-digit trays is eligible for 3/5 automation Regular
Periodicals per-piece rates. Mail in 3-digit/scheme, AADC, and mixed
AADC trays qualifies for basic automation per-piece rates. Both 1-foot
and 2-foot tray sizes must be used as appropriate.
Mailings must be 100% delivery point barcoded. Addresses must be
matched semi-annually using CASS-certified software and a current AIS
database. Barcoded tray labels will be required effective January 1,
1997. Use of PAVE-certified software or standardized documentation will
be required effective January 1, 1997. Enclosed courtesy and business
reply mail envelopes will be required to be automation-compatible and
prepared with barcodes and FIM marks effective January 1, 1997.
(2) Flat-Size Pieces. Firm and carrier route packages cannot be
part of an Automation flats mailing. Mailers must prepare packages of 6
or more pieces to 5-digit, 3-digit, ADC and mixed ADC destinations and
place them in 5-digit, 3-digit, ADC and mixed ADC sacks or on the
appropriate level of pallet. Only pieces in 5-digit and unique 3-digit
sacks (or in 5-digit and unique 3-digit packages placed on pallets),
are eligible for the 3/5 automation Regular Periodicals per-piece
rates. Pieces in non-unique 3-digit, ADC and mixed ADC sacks (and non-
unique 3-digit, ADC and mixed ADC packages placed on pallets) will
qualify for basic Automation per-piece rates. Mailings must be 100%
ZIP+4 or delivery point barcoded. Addresses must be matched semi-
annually using CASS-certified software and a current AIS database.
Barcoded sack labels will be required effective January 1, 1997. Use of
PAVE-certified software or standardized documentation will be required
effective January 1, 1997. Enclosed courtesy and business reply mail
envelopes will be required to be automation-compatible and prepared
with barcodes and FIM marks effective January 1, 1997.
b. Nonautomation Mailings
(1) Letters. Mail must be prepared in trays. Both 1-foot and 2-foot
trays must be used as appropriate. Firm packages are permitted and
receive rates based on current criteria. Six-piece or larger carrier
route packages must be placed in carrier route trays when there are at
least 24 pieces for the tray, but trays with as few as one 6-piece
package are acceptable. Remaining carrier route packages are placed in
5-digit carrier routes trays. Six-piece or larger 5-digit, 3-digit,
ADC, and mixed ADC packages are prepared and must be placed in 5-digit,
3-digit, and ADC trays whenever there are at least 24 pieces for one of
those tray destinations. Trays with as few as one 6-piece or larger
package may be prepared. Remaining packages are placed in mixed ADC
trays. Only mail in 5-digit or unique 3-digit trays qualifies for 3/5
nonautomation Regular Periodicals per-piece rates. Mail in non-unique
3-digit, ADC and mixed ADC trays qualifies for basic per-piece rates.
The carrier route portion must be matched using CASS-Certified software
to a current CRIS file or other AIS product containing carrier route
codes, within 90 days prior to the date of mailing. No sequencing is
required for basic carrier route rates. High Density and Saturation
rate mail must be prepared in carrier walk sequence using a current
USPS DSF or CDS file or other USPS sequencing service within 90 days
prior to the date of mailing. Effective October 1, 1996, 5-digit ZIP
Codes in each address in the non-carrier route portion of the mailing
must have been verified and corrected within 12-months prior to the
date of mailing by a USPS approved method.
(2) Nonautomation Flats. Mail is sorted according to current DMM
issue 49 standards except that there must now be a minimum of one 6-
piece package in each sack other than a mixed ADC sack; the optional
city package and sack level has been eliminated; and SDC, state, and
mixed states packages and sacks have been replaced with ADC and mixed
ADC packages and sacks. Only mail in 5-digit or unique 3-digit sacks
(or in 5-digit or unique 3-digit packages on pallets) qualifies for 3/5
nonautomation Regular Periodicals per-piece rates. Mail in non-unique
3-digit, ADC, and mixed ADC packages and sacks qualifies for basic per-
piece rates. The carrier route portion must be matched using CASS-
Certified software to a current CRIS file or other AIS product
containing carrier route codes, within 90 days prior to the date of
mailing. No sequencing is required for basic carrier route rates. High
Density and Saturation rate mail must be prepared in carrier walk
sequence using a current USPS DSF or CDS file or other USPS sequencing
service within 90 days prior to the date of mailing. Effective October
1, 1996, 5-digit ZIP Codes in each address in the non-carrier route
portion of the mailing must have been verified and corrected within 12-
months prior to the date of mailing by a USPS approved method.
21. Submission of Form 3553
A standard to submit a Form 3553, CASS Report, with automation
carrier route First-Class, automation and nonautomation Enhanced
Carrier Route Standard, and carrier route Regular Periodicals has been
added to the final DMM standards. Submission of this report with each
mailing will document that the addresses in these mailings were matched
to a current database using CASS certified software within 90 days
prior to the date of mailing. Mailings at carrier route Nonprofit
Standard and carrier route Preferred Periodicals rates will not be
required to be accompanied by a Form 3553 because the standard for use
of CASS
[[Page 10072]]
certified address matching software will not apply to mailings at these
rates (although the standard to update their carrier route information
within 90 days prior to the date of mailing using a current database
will apply). Comments will be accepted on the application of these
rules to Regular Periodicals.
B. Summary of Comments From the December 22 Proposed Rule
The Postal Service received 64 pieces of correspondence offering
comments on the December 22 proposed rule. Respondents included major
mailer associations, individual publishers, printers, presort bureaus,
and mailers.
The specific points raised in the comments are presented below,
organized by general comments and then by letters, flats, Periodicals
and addressing.
1. General Comments
a. Change in Name of Third-Class and Fourth-Class Mail to Standard Mail
Three comments were received regarding the change in name of third-
and fourth-class mail to Standard Mail.
The Postal Service proposed, as part of Classification Reform, that
mail matter currently designated as third-class and fourth-class be
combined into a new single Standard Mail class. This change was not
opposed in the Postal Rate Commission (PRC) proceeding and has been
recommended by the PRC and approved by the Governors.
The Postal Service will be publishing information on the name
change in the Postal Bulletin and has other planned communication
events and publications to raise the awareness level of all mailers and
the general public of this change and the other changes needed to
implement Classification Reform.
b. Format of Final Mailing Standards for Classification Reform
One commenter requested that entire DMM pages be published in the
Postal Bulletin that transmits the mail preparation rules in this
Federal Register notice and requested that any new wording be placed in
bold.
Due to limits on time, space, cost, and size of the document, the
DMM standards published in the Postal Bulletin will follow the same
format as this final rule and will contain only the sections that are
changed. DMM issue 50, which will incorporate the new preparation
standards will be distributed prior to implementation.
c. Comments Beyond the Scope of this Rulemaking Process
Ten commenters submitted comments requesting such things as a
change in the rates, rate structure, minimum quantity standards for a
rate category, or stated concerns about the structure of the future
Classification Reform proposals for nonprofit mail, or suggested an
implementation date for Classification Reform. One commenter requested
that the Postal Service provide mailers its delivery performance data.
These comments are beyond the scope of this rulemaking. The rates,
rate structure, and basic standards for rates in MC-95-1 were subject
to litigation before the Postal Rate Commission, and cannot be
unilaterally revised by the Postal Service in a rulemaking process.
Similarly, the date for implementation of MC95-1 is determined by the
Board of Governors of the Postal Service and is outside the scope of
this rulemaking. Comments concerning the structure of the future
Classification Reform proposal for Nonprofit Mail have been noted, but
are also outside the scope of this rulemaking process.
d. General Comments on Mail Preparation Standards in the Proposed Rule
Eight general comments were received regarding the preparation
standards set forth in the proposed rule. One commenter was pleased to
see the Federal Register notice published on the Postal Service
electronic bulletin board (RIBBS). One indicated he found no problems
or inequities with the proposed rule. The remaining six disagreed with
the overall effect of the preparation rules.
One of these indicated that the Postal Service is adding ``picky
details`` to make the preparation standards complex. One indicated that
some of the implementation standards may be exclusionary and create
unnecessary barriers thereby creating growth of coarsely sorted and
non-automated mail, exactly the opposite of the intended outcome of
Classification Reform. Another commenter indicated that the preparation
rules will negatively impact mailer cost and service. This commenter
argued the proposed rules would keep more mailers out of automation
thereby eliminating their reason to improve address quality, and
leaving the USPS with more difficult-to-process mail. This commenter
suggested that the Postal Service delay implementing unduly restrictive
rules.
Three commenters indicated a combination of several of the make-up
standards for mail will increase preparation costs, listing such things
as 1) the separate mailstreams for barcoded and non-barcoded mail; 2)
the need to have 150 pieces to a 5-digit or 3-digit destination to
obtain 5-digit and 3-digit automation rates; 3) the requirement to use
barcoded tray labels on automation mailings; 4) the requirement for the
mailer to strap all trays of letter mail; 5) the standard to prepare
each subclass as a separate mailstream with separate subclass markings;
6) the required use of both 1-foot and 2-foot trays in letter-size
mailings; 7) the standards to tray letter mail prior to palletizing it;
8) the decrease in drop shipment discounts when trucking costs may
increase due to increased cost of preparing pallets and loss of cube
space in trailers; and 9) the standards for purchasing and printing new
reply mail pieces that bear barcodes and FIM marks for inclusion within
pieces at automation rates.
One commenter remarked that it did not appear the Postal Service
gave serious consideration to mailer comments concerning these issues
in the last Federal Register and requested that it give such attention
in this rulemaking.
Some of the items stated as concerns by these commenters involve
issues that were at issue in the PRC proceeding, such as drop shipment
discounts, and minimum quantity standards for mailings. The Postal
Service cannot use rulemaking to change rates, discounts, and DMCS
provisions that were recommended by the PRC and approved by the
Governors. The Postal Service recognizes that under Classification
Reform many mailers will be affected by new preparation criteria;
however, the Postal Service believes that these preparation criteria
are necessary to achieve the goal of encouraging mail that is efficient
for the Postal Service to handle.
e. Minimum Quantity Standards/Definition of a Mailing
Ten comments were received concerning the application of minimum
quantity standards to mailings and the definition of a mailing. These
commenters had concerns about the proposed standard that each separate
subclass and, within each subclass, each separate mail processing
category, meet the appropriate 500-piece (First-Class) or 200-piece
(Standard Mail) minimum quantity standard.
Five commenters indicated the minimum quantity should apply to the
combined subclasses in the physical mailing and not to each individual
subclass. Six commenters similarly requested that mailers should be
able to combine mailings of different subclasses and rate categories
that are part of the same mailing job. Four commenters stated that
applying the minimum to
[[Page 10073]]
each subclass could cause problems for qualifying non-barcoded mail
because when using lists that have a high percentage of names that can
be properly barcoded, there may not be enough pieces left over after
preparing the Automation mailing to meet a separate minimum quantity
standard for mailing at Retail (now Presorted First-Class) or Regular
(now Nonautomation Standard) rates. Another commenter expressed concern
that mail remaining that cannot meet a separate minimum quantity
standard will end up in the single-piece rate category, and that
single-piece rate mail is generally not accepted at business mail entry
units. One commenter also indicated that proposed DMM M130.1.1b, which
stated that a mailing can consist of only one processing category, and
M130.1.1d, which required that a separate rate marking appear on Retail
Mail (now named Presorted First-Class), do not permit mailers to
prepare the residual to an Automation mailing as a Retail (Presorted
First-Class) mailing. One commenter expressed concern that splitting a
Standard mailing job into three separate mailstreams complicates the
mailing process and that this conflicts with a stated purpose of
Classification Reform to simplify the preparation of mailings.
The Domestic Mail Classification Schedule approved by the Governors
specifies separate 500-piece minimum quantity standards for the
following First-Class mailings: (1) Letters and Sealed Parcels
Automation, (2) Cards Automation, (3) Letters and Sealed Parcels
Presorted, and (4) Cards Presorted. Accordingly, the final implementing
DMM standards in this notice contain these separate minimum quantity
standards for Automation mailings and for Presorted First-Class
Mailings, including the separate minimums for mailings of First-Class
Cards. First-Class mailers will be permitted to combine letters and
cards in the same mailing as they do currently, provided each separate
subclass (cards and letters) meets its own separate 500 piece minimum
quantity standard and mailers either affix exact postage to each piece
in the mailing or can provide standardized documentation to reflect the
number of pieces in each subclass and each rate category within the
combined mailing. The current provisions that all pieces in a mailing
must be of the same processing category (with certain exceptions
allowing for commingling Standard Machinable and Irregular parcels) are
also retained in the final implementing DMM standards.
The DMCS also prescribes separate minimum quantity standards of 200
pieces or 50 pounds each mailing of Standard Regular and Enhanced
Carrier Route rate mail. Due to operational differences in the way that
mail is handled, automation mail must be sorted and presented
separately from presorted nonautomation mail. The Postal Service has
determined that automation and nonautomation mail must therefore be
prepared and presented as separate mailings. Accordingly, the final
implementing DMM standards in this notice contain separate minimum
quantity standards for the following Standard mailings: (1) automation
Enhanced Carrier Route, (2) nonautomation Enhanced Carrier Route, (3)
automation Regular, and (4) presorted nonautomation Regular.
If, after preparing one or more of the above mailings within a
class, mailers are left with a quantity of pieces that do not meet the
minimum quantity standards for a Presorted First-Class or presorted
nonautomation Regular mailing, mailers are correct that such pieces
must be mailed at single-piece rates. These single-piece rate pieces
will be accepted through the Business Mail Entry Unit when presented
along with other presort rate mailings. Additional information on
markings and postage payment for these pieces is provided in the
separate comment sections on those two topics.
Eight commenters indicated that mailings of all subclasses should
be able to be reported on the same mailing statement, and on the same
documentation. Four commenters requested clarification concerning the
application of minimum quantity standards to plant verified drop
shipment (PVDS) mailings expressing opinions that Customer Support
ruling PS-283 be continued under Classification Reform. Three
commenters pointed out that there is a conflict in the proposed rule
between the information presented in the general comments section which
states separate subclasses cannot be part of the same mailing, and the
information in DMM 600.2.4 which states that all the Standard Mail
subclasses can be prepared in the same mailing, and that this is
further confused by rules and comments indicating that mailings of
different subclasses can be combined on the same pallets in palletized
mailings. These commenters stated that the proposed policy was
confusing and inconsistently applied throughout the proposed standards.
One of these commenters indicated that he interpreted the proposed
standards to mean that Standard Automation and Regular (now
nonautomation Regular) mail may be on the same pallet and can be
reported on the same documentation and mailing statement. One commenter
stated that his support for 100% barcoding during the Implementation
Advisory Group (IAG) meetings was conditional on having Enhanced
Carrier Route, Automation, and Regular subclass mail to be part of the
same mailing and reported on the same mailing statement. This commenter
believed that previous responses to comments led him to believe the
Postal Service agreed with this single mailing concept.
The information in proposed DMM 600.2.4, which stated that all the
Standard mail subclasses could be prepared in the same mailing
contained a typographical error omitting the word ``not.'' The Postal
Service regrets any confusion this may have caused. Under
Classification Reform, a mailing will consist of a group of mail of the
same class and subclass which will be processed in the same manner by
the Postal Service, and which is submitted for verification at the same
time. Each mailing will be required to meet a separate minimum quantity
standard. As indicated above, for presorted Regular Standard Mail
mailers, automation mail must be prepared as a separate mailing from
mail entered at presorted nonautomation rates, and automation Enhanced
Carrier Route mail must be submitted as a separate mailing from mail
entered at nonautomation Enhanced Carrier Route rates and from other
Regular Standard mailings. Each of these four mailings must therefore
meet a separate 200-piece or 50-pound minimum quantity standard.
Similarly, a First-Class Automation letter mailing must meet a separate
500-piece minimum quantity standard and a Presorted First-Class letter
mailing must meet a separate 500-piece minimum quantity standard.
Separate minimum quantity standards must also be met for mailings of
automation First-Class Cards and Presorted First-Class Cards.
The final implementing DMM standards contained in this notice
provide that separate mailings of the same class of mail and in the
same mailing job that are presented for verification at the same time
may be claimed on a single postage statement. The Postal Service has
renamed its ``mailing statements'' as ``postage statements'' to avoid
confusion as to whether more than one mailing can be reported on a
single statement. Under the standardized documentation standards for
these mailings, separate documents describing each mailing will
[[Page 10074]]
be required except for copalletized, commingled, or combined mailings
submitted on pallets. For these palletized mailings, packages or sacks
or trays from each of the separate mailings are sorted together for
placement on the appropriate level of pallets. Therefore, standardized
documentation for palletized mailings will report pieces contained in
each separate mailing by each separate rate category on a pallet by
pallet basis, with a summary roll up of the total pieces for each
separate mailing and each rate for the entire mailing job. Each of the
mailings on the pallets that are part of the same mailing job may be
reported on a single postage statement. The DMM standards in this
notice have been revised to make these standards clear.
Customer Support Ruling PS-283, Third-Class Destination Entry
Discounts and Fourth-Class Bulk Bound Printed Matter for PVDS, that
pertains to application of minimum quantity standards for plant
verified drop shipment (PVDS) mailings will continue to apply to the
corresponding Standard mailings under Classification Reform.
f. Marking Standards
Eighteen comments were received in response to the proposed marking
standards for First-Class and Standard Mail. Five commenters expressed
outright opposition to the additional required markings. Three
commenters suggested the Postal Service consider a transition period to
allow time for mailer system and mailpiece design changes to
accommodate the proposed marking standards. One of these commenters
requested a one-year transition period to allow his company to deplete
their envelope stock bearing current markings. One commenter asked
whether the Postal Service would produce precanceled stamps bearing the
proposed markings and asked whether it would accept stamps with current
markings. One of these commenters questioned the need for the markings
since they have no impact on improving deliverability of mailpieces.
One commenter indicated that 5 to 7 address lines would be needed
for the markings plus a barcode, and that this means their address
windows will have to be enlarged to accommodate the extra address
lines. Another commenter similarly indicated he would have space
problems with their addresses if an optional endorsement line had to be
added. Two commenters indicated they had cleaned their address blocks
to appear more personalized and had eliminated all but the carrier
route endorsement line and the Address Correction Service information
line. These commenters were concerned the proposed markings would
detract from the appearance of their mailings and thereby reduce the
response rate to these pieces.
Several commenters pointed out problems that separate markings for
separate mailings would pose for their operations. Four MLOCR users
indicated that they cannot mark the mail before processing it, and that
the ability to apply the marking with an ink jet is not currently
available. They also stated that since their mailings consist of
various size pieces it would be hard to spray on a marking in a
consistent place. They further indicated that they could not apply
markings representing individual presort rates. One of these mailers
stated that in a letter sorter environment postage is applied to the
pieces prior to sorting them, and therefore correct markings could be
applied only if an optional endorsement line was used (requiring an
enormous amount of programming time) or if some mail was run through
the postage meter process a second time. Five commenters stated that
because their Retail Mail (renamed Presorted First-Class) will come
from Automation mail that was not delivery point barcoded, a standard
to separately mark this mail as Retail Mail (now Presorted First-Class)
would be a problem in itself and would also lead to postage payment
problems. One of these commenters stated the same marking and postage
problems will be encountered if some of the uncoded mail must be
entered at the First-Class single-piece rates.
One commenter requested use of a generic ``Presort'' marking for
all mailings. Two commenters requested that Retail Mail be allowed to
bear an Automation marking, and two commenters suggested Automation
mail be permitted to use the Retail marking. Two commenters indicated
there would be no efficient way to delete old markings and add new
markings to mailpieces. Another commenter indicated that the proposed
endorsements would cause a problem in his mailing operations in which
separately sorted mailings that each bear preprinted markings on an
insert appearing through a window are merged together using barcode
sorters to boost presort qualification levels. The merged final mailing
would therefore not be able to show an individual rate qualification
level marking. One commenter stated that one of the exhibits in the
proposed rule appeared to require destination entry level in the
markings and requested that the Postal Service eliminate this standard.
One commenter indicated that the standards are unclear and
requested clarification as to whether each subclass would have to bear
a separate marking. This commenter requested further information as to
which markings can appear in the indicia. Another commenter pointed out
that the proposed language in DMM P040, Exhibit 4.1b, stated that the
``Bulk Rate'' marking in permit imprints should be replaced with a
``Presort'' marking, yet the standards in proposed DMM M810.1.1 stated
that Standard Mail must be marked Standard or STD. This commenter
stated that based on proposed DMM M810.1.1 he would have expected the
permit imprint to have contained the marking ``Standard'' rather than
:``Presort.'' One commenter was confused as to where the proposed
subclass markings could be placed and suggested this standard could be
a problem unless they were allowed in the address block. One commenter
stated that the rules for optional endorsement lines and key lines need
to be standardized since the information in each of these appears to be
similar but is not consistent in content and format. One commenter
asked whether the markings in DMM P700 would be required for everyone
or just for customers who use manifest mailing systems.
One commenter wanted to know why nonprofit mailers and Periodicals
Mail did not need to meet the new marking standards.
One commenter didn't understand the need for the markings
indicating that it will provide no additional information to the Postal
Service. One commenter stated that the marking standards are the result
of shortcomings in the Postal Service In-Office Cost System (IOCS).
This commenter further stated that the Postal Service should invest in
technology to correct these shortcomings, and not require mailers to
invest in technology to fix them. One commenter indicated that the
Postal Service should use mailers' acceptance documents to gather
needed information and expressed a belief that these forms are not
analyzed and documented now. This commenter further questioned whether
the information this proposal requested would be used any more
effectively.
Markings are used to develop detailed cost information about
various categories of mail. The Postal Service In-Office Cost System
(IOCS) determines the costs attributable to each subclass and certain
rate categories. These attributable costs are used in determining
rates. The IOCS uses a sampling system. A data collector will
[[Page 10075]]
go to a randomly selected postal employee at a randomly selected time
and record the subclass, and where applicable, the rate category
information appearing on any mail that postal employee is handling at
the time of observation. The data collector will use the markings that
appear on individual mail pieces, as well as postage, piece size, and
other information to determine the subclass and any applicable rate
category of the mail being handled at the time of observation.
Accurate cost attribution depends on accurate piece markings. It is
therefore in the best interest of both mailers and the Postal Service
to have accurate costing information for subclasses and mailing and
rate categories within subclasses for ratemaking purposes.
Classification Reform offers an opportunity to implement markings that
will enable the Postal Service to more accurately determine the costs
of automation (barcoded) mailings and other mailings. Accordingly, the
Postal Service has determined that the markings applied to First-Class
and Standard mailpieces must accurately reflect the subclass and
mailing category at which the pieces are actually mailed. For mail at
any carrier route rates, a marking specifying the actual rate category
within a mailing will also be required.
The Postal Service is also sensitive to the concerns of the mailers
who commented. It recognizes that in some instances the marking
standards contained in this notice may require mailers to make changes
to their current mailing practices. In response to these concerns, the
Postal Service has made modifications to the final marking standards to
make them easier for mailers to comply with. The final standards are
described below.
In response to comments concerning needed phase-in time to use
current stocks of envelopes bearing ``Presorted First-Class'' and
``Bulk Rate'' markings, and concerns over use of precanceled stamps
that currently bear these printed markings, the Postal Service has
decided to retain use of ``Presorted First-Class'' rather than adopt
the proposed ``Presort First-Class'' for First-Class Mail; and to
retain use of ``Bulk Rate'' or ``Blk. Rt.'' as the marking for Standard
Mail (A) rather than the proposed ``Standard'' marking plus another
specific mailing marking. Use of these current class specific markings
will still allow the Postal Service to collect accurate data without
adding the extra cost to mailers of buying new envelopes, or replacing
meter slugs, or remarking mail bearing precanceled stamps with what
would have been obsolete markings. This retention of current markings
will also eliminate the confusion that would have occurred during any
transition period that would have allowed mail bearing the old markings
concurrent with mail bearing new markings. Accordingly, the Postal
Service does not plan to phase-in the marking standards.
For all First-Class and Standard Mail (A) presort rate mailings,
both a class marking and a mailing marking will be required on each
piece. For carrier route rates a class marking, mailing marking, and a
specific carrier route rate marking will be required.
For presorted First-Class mailings (both Automation and Presorted
First-Class), the class marking of either ``First-Class'' or
``Presorted First-Class'' must appear in the postage area. For
presorted Standard (A) mailings (Automation, Enhanced Carrier Route,
and Nonautomation), the class marking ``Bulk Rate'' or ``Blk. Rt.''
must appear in the postage area. The postage area is defined as the
area within the permit imprint or precanceled stamp, or below or to the
left of the meter stamp, permit imprint or precanceled stamp.
For automation First-Class, automation Regular Standard, and
automation Enhanced Carrier Route Standard mailings, the marking
``AUTO'' in all capital letters will be required on all pieces in
addition to the applicable class marking described above. In addition,
mail qualifying for a presort First-Class or Enhanced Carrier Route
Standard automation carrier route letter rate, must bear an additional
CR rate marking so that the marking will appear as ``AUTOCR'' on each
piece qualifying for those rates. The ``AUTOCR'' marking is in addition
to the applicable class marking described above. The ``AUTOCR'' marking
may appear only on pieces qualifying for an automation carrier route
rate and the ``AUTO'' marking may appear only on pieces qualifying for
a non-carrier route automation rate. The automation marking (``AUTO''
or ``AUTOCR'') may appear in the postage area or on the top line of the
address (only a barcode may appear above it). Alternatively, for MLOCR
users, the appropriate ``AUTO'' or ``AUTOCR'' marking may appear to the
left of a barcode in the lower right corner of the envelope, or to the
left of a date applied by the MLOCR in the postage payment area.
For nonautomation Presorted First-Class mailings the marking
``Presorted First-Class'' will be required in the postage area. This
serves as the marking for both the class of mail and type of mailing.
As indicated above, mail entered at the Presorted First-Class rates
will not be permitted to also bear an ``AUTO'' or ``AUTOCR'' marking.
Mail entered at single-piece First-Class rates must bear only the
``First-Class'' marking, no marking, or under certain conditions, the
``Presorted First-Class'' marking. Single-piece rate mail may bear the
``Presorted First-Class'' marking only if additional postage is affixed
to each piece to bring the total postage affixed to each piece up to
the correct single-piece rate (based on the weight of the piece). For
mailers using precanceled stamps or permit imprints, the additional
postage affixed to single-piece rate mail could be in the form of
either stamps or a meter imprint. The addition of postage to single-
piece rate mail marked ``Presorted First-Class'' will allow IOCS data
collectors to determine that the piece was mailed at a single-piece
First-Class rate.
For presorted nonautomation Regular Standard mailings, the ``Bulk
Rate'' or ``Blk. Rt.'' marking will be required in the postage area.
This serves as the marking for both the class of mail and type of
mailing. For nonautomation Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail, each
piece must bear the marking ``ECRLOT'', ``ECRWSH'', or ``ECRWSS'' that
is appropriate for the rate paid (basic, high density, or saturation)
for the piece in addition to the ``Bulk Rate'' or ``Blk. Rt.'' class of
mail marking. The Enhanced Carrier Route markings may appear either in
the postage area or on the top line of the address. Mail entered at
single-piece Standard rates must bear the marking ``Standard'', or
under certain conditions, the ``Bulk Rate'' or ``Blk. Rt.'' marking.
Single-Piece Standard Mail may bear the ``Bulk Rate'' or ``Blk. Rt.''
marking only if additional postage is affixed to each piece to bring
the total postage affixed to each piece up to the correct single-piece
rate (based on the weight of the piece). For mailers using precanceled
stamps or permit imprints, the additional postage could be in the form
of either stamps or a meter. The addition of postage to single-piece
rate mail marked ``Bulk Rate'' or ``Blk. Rt.'' will allow IOCS data
collectors to determine that the piece was mailed at a single-piece
Standard rate.
These marking standards will allow use of current meter slugs,
permit imprints, and precanceled stamps that bear the ``Presorted
First-Class'' and ``Bulk Rate'' or ``Blk. Rt.'' markings. For mailers
who electronically presort mail, any additional mailing and carrier
route rate markings can be applied on the top line of the address.
For MLOCR users, including those preparing mail under value added
refund (VAR) provisions, it is
[[Page 10076]]
recognized that some changes to their operations may be needed to
comply with these marking standards. However, these mailers should be
able to comply with these standards provided they can spray the
appropriate ``AUTO'' or ``AUTOCR'' marking on mailpieces at the time a
delivery point barcode is applied. The ``AUTO'' or ``AUTOCR'' marking
would have to be suppressed any time a 5-digit barcode or no barcode is
applied. Since pieces in both the automation First-Class mailing and
the Presorted First-Class mailing will be allowed to bear the marking
``Presorted First-Class'' in the postage area, this will allow mail not
coded to delivery point being to be submitted as a properly marked
Presorted First-Class mailing, provided all other standards for that
type of mailing are met, including a separate 500 piece minimum
quantity standard. Similarly the provision for both an automation
Enhanced Carrier Route mailing and a nonautomation Regular mailing to
bear the marking ``Bulk Rate'' or ``Blk. Rt.'' in the postage area, and
the ability to apply the appropriate ``AUTO'' or ``AUTOCR'' marking at
the time the barcode is applied will allow mail not coded to delivery
point to be submitted as a properly marked nonautomation Regular
mailing. The provision allowing the ``AUTO'' and ``AUTOCR'' marking to
be printed to the left of the barcode in the lower right corner of the
mailpiece, or in the postage area to the left of a date applied by the
MLOCR, should make the ``AUTO'' or ``AUTOCR'' markings easier to apply
for these mailers. In response to the commenter that indicated ink jet
capability has not yet been developed, it should be pointed out that
MLOCR users may currently use ink jet to spray a new mailing date and
the correct ZIP Code for the mailpiece, and that many mailers are using
these options already. The Postal Service does not believe that it
would be onerous to adapt these existing systems to apply the ``AUTO''
or ``AUTOCR'' markings.
First-Class, Regular Standard and Enhanced Carrier Route Standard
mailers opposed to placing markings in the top line of the address will
either need to modify their address labels or address inserts and
windows, or to place the applicable mailing and carrier route rate
markings in the postage area.
Nonprofit Standard and Preferred Periodicals mailers are not
affected by these new marking standards because these subclasses were
not part of this Classification Reform effort. Cost data for
Periodicals Mail is determined by the publication number that must
appear in each copy. Accordingly, new marking standards will not be
applied to Regular Periodicals under Classification Reform.
g. Postage Payment
Five commenters had concerns about postage payment issues. Four of
these commenters had concerns about the treatment of mail that would
not qualify as part of an Automation mailing and would, as a result,
become part of a Retail (Presorted First-Class) mailing. These
commenters requested that Retail (Presorted First-Class) mail left over
after preparing Automation mailings be permitted to bear postage at the
Automation rates rather than the Retail (Presorted First-Class) rates,
and that any difference between the postage affixed and the actual rate
of postage owed for these mailings be paid by means of a meter strip
affixed to the mailing statement or through an advance deposit account.
This would simplify their mailing operations and prevent them from
having to remeter mail entered at Retail (Presorted First-Class) rates.
Generally mailers affix postage to mail prior to sorting it. Most of
these commenters indicated that they use MLOCRs to prepare the mail and
indicated that they would not know whether a piece could be barcoded
and entered as part of an Automation mailing until after it was sorted.
These commenters indicated that the proposed standards to separately
mark and pay postage at the appropriate Retail (Presorted First-Class)
rates for their nondelivery point barcoded mail would require them to
run the mail through a second metering operation after it was sorted,
adding cost and time to their operations. One of these commenters also
requested that single-piece rate mail that could not be made part of
either an Automation mailing or a Retail (Presorted First-Class)
mailing also be allowed to pay the difference in postage between the
rate affixed and the single-piece rate through a meter strip or an
advance deposit account.
The rules for payment of postage under Classification Reform will
differ by method of postage payment as they do today. For mailings paid
by permit imprint, all pieces in a mailing must be of identical weight
(unless manifesting or an optional or alternative procedure has been
authorized by a rates & classification service center). Presort
mailings containing more than one rate category must be verifiable
either based on weight (because the pieces are of identical weight and
the mailer separates the trays or sacks by rate category at the time of
verification), or based on the submission of standardized documentation
showing the number of pieces in each rate category. As indicated under
the marking section, if any pieces remain that are subject to single-
piece rates, each such piece must have postage affixed at the correct
single-piece rate, or the pieces must be submitted as a separate
single-piece rate permit imprint mailing bearing the proper rate
markings for single-piece rate mail and meeting a separate minimum
quantity standard for a permit imprint mailing.
For metered mailings, postage must be metered on each piece at
either the exact rate of postage for the mailpiece, or at the lowest
rate applicable to any piece in the mailing, unless the mailer is
authorized by a rates and classification service center to mail under
an alternative program such as value added. An exception is provided by
this final rule for mailing jobs. When a mailing job consists of two
(First-Class) or two to three (Standard) mailing categories, and all
the mailings in the mailing job are presented for verification at the
same time, mailers may apply postage at the lowest rate applicable to
any piece in the mailing job to all pieces in the mailing job. For
First-Class metered mailings, each piece weighing more than 1-ounce
must bear the correct amount of additional postage to pay for the
additional ounces.
Metered mailings containing more than one rate category must be
verifiable either based on weight (because the pieces are of identical
weight and the mailer separates the trays or sacks by rate category at
the time of verification), or based on the submission of standardized
documentation showing the number of pieces in each rate category.
Presort mailings of nonidentical-weight pieces must (and mailings of
identical weight may) be accompanied by standardized documentation that
shows the number of pieces in the applicable rate categories and the
total postage owed for the mailing. Any difference between the amount
of postage affixed to the piece and the amount of postage owed for the
presort mailing may be paid by means of a meter strip affixed to the
postage statement or through a trust fund account. If any pieces remain
that are subject to single-piece rates, each such piece must have
postage affixed at the correct single-piece rate.
For mailing jobs metered at the lowest rate in the job and having
all mailings submitted on one postage statement, the individual
mailings in a job of identical-weight pieces may also be verified by
weighing as described above. Nonidentical-weight mailing jobs must (and
identical weight mailings may) be accompanied by documentation that
[[Page 10077]]
shows the pieces and postage at each rate category by mailing with a
summary for the job. Any difference between the total amount of postage
affixed to each piece and the amount of postage owed for the total of
all the presort mailings for the job may be paid by means of a meter
strip affixed to the postage statement or through a single debit to an
advance deposit account. If any pieces remain that are subject to
single-piece rates, each such piece must have postage affixed at the
correct single-piece rate.
For precanceled stamp mailings, each piece must bear either a
Postal Service precanceled stamp or stamps precanceled with a mailer's
postmark. Mailers must be able to document (either by the weighing
method or standardized documentation as described for meters) the
difference between the price paid for the stamp affixed and the amount
of postage owed for the presort mailing. The additional postage owed
for the presort mailing and any single-piece rate pieces must be paid
in the same manner as described for metered mailings. The provisions
for mailing jobs also apply to precanceled stamp mailings.
For value added refund mailings, the value added refund
documentation and payment procedures will be extended to the
nonautomation presorted portion of the mailing.
Mailings or jobs of any postage payment method in which cards and
letters are combined must be accompanied by standardized documentation
that substantiates that the separate minimum quantity standards for
cards and letters have been met. The documentation must also contain
separate rate columns for each card rate and for each letter rate in
the mailing or mailing job. In addition, if such combined mailings are
paid with precanceled stamps or meters, the cards must bear postage at
card rates and the letters must bear postage at the letter rates. Any
difference between postage affixed and postage owed for the presort
portion of a mailing or mailing job containing both cards and letters
may also be paid by means of a meter strip affixed to the postage
statement or through an advance deposit account. If any pieces remain
that are subject to single-piece rates, each such piece must have
postage affixed at the correct single-piece rate, or the pieces must be
submitted as a separate single-piece rate permit imprint mailing
bearing the proper rate markings for single-piece rate mail and meeting
a separate minimum quantity standard for a permit imprint mailing.
h. Minimum Per Piece Rate Breakpoints for Standard Mail (A)
Five comments were received regarding the minimum per piece rate
weight breakpoints. All five commenters requested that the same
breakpoint be used for the entire class of Standard Mail for the sake
of simplicity. Two of these commenters further indicated that they
wanted the highest weight breakpoint to apply to the entire class.
These two commenters also stated a belief that there was no reason for
the weight limits on heavy letter mail (mail weighing more than 3
ounces) that is eligible for mailing at the Automation letter rates to
be different for First-Class, Periodicals, Regular Standard, and
Nonprofit Standard Mail.
Separate rate schedules for each subclass of Standard Mail were
recommended by the PRC and approved by the Governors. The rate
schedules for the Regular, Enhanced Carrier Route, and Nonprofit
subclasses of Standard Mail (A) each separately prescribe that mailers
must pay either the minimum piece rate or the pound rates, whichever is
higher. The weight breakpoint for each subclass is mathematically
derived to determine the weight at which the pound rates become higher
than the minimum per piece rates. Accordingly, the Postal Service
cannot change the point at which the pound rates apply for individual
subclasses in this process. Once a particular weight break is exceeded,
the non-letter size piece and pound rates apply. The Postal Service
does set the weight limits for eligibility for automation First-Class
or Periodicals letter rates based on operational and administrative
criteria. In the interest of simplicity, the Postal Service has
determined to allow First-Class and Periodicals letter mail that meets
the higher Standard Mail weight breakpoint to be eligible for barcoded
letter rates provided that such mail meets all other standards for that
rate. This affords as many mailers as possible the highest weight cut-
off for Automation letter rates.
i. Acceptance Procedures for Presort Errors
One commenter requested information as to what would happen if one
of his machines missorted one piece of mail. This commenter gave an
example of a situation where on the second pass of an MLOCR, a piece
destined to a 3-digit bin might mistakenly be sorted by the machine to
another bin. The commenter indicated that the machine would not report
that piece at the 3-digit automation rate, but indicated that this
piece might be subsequently found and placed in a mixed AADC tray
because it would be difficult to find the proper 3-digit tray. The
commenter asked whether finding such a piece within a mixed AADC tray
would be considered an error, and if such errors exceeded whatever
tolerance might be established, if it would disqualify the mailing or
result in substantial penalties. The commenter requested that this type
of error be ignored for acceptance purposes since the primary 3-digit
and AADC separations would be made and correct postage would be paid on
the piece.
Currently, a First-Class barcoded mailing is permitted to contain
an unlimited amount of residual mailpieces without penalty, even if the
pieces could have been sorted to a finer extent. This is because the
residual mail is currently paid at single-piece rates. When
Classification Reform is implemented, all pieces in an Automation
mailing will receive a presort rate. Therefore it will be expected that
all pieces within such mailings be presorted to the finest extent
possible to 3-digit and AADC destinations prior to placing mail in a
mixed AADC tray. All possible 5-digit trays will not be expected
because this is an optional sortation level. Therefore, if during the
acceptance process, mail is discovered in a mixed AADC tray that could
have been sorted to a 3-digit or AADC tray in the mailing, such mail
will be considered a presort error. Because the Postal Service
recognizes that some machine or human errors can occur in the
preparation of mailings, the Postal Service allows a tolerance without
penalty for errors discovered in a mailing during acceptance. If the
errors found in the mailing exceed this tolerance, mailers will be
given the same two choices currently available: (1) to take the mailing
back, correct it, and resubmit it to the Postal Service; or (2) to pay
additional postage at the appropriate rate for the proportion of the
mailing found to be in error during the verification process. The
Postal Service does not agree with the commenter that certain types of
errors should be ignored because the mailer did not intentionally make
the error. The Postal Service expects that mailers will exercise good
machine maintenance and other quality control procedures in their
operations to ensure that such errors in sorting are minimized.
j. Destination Delivery Unit Discounts
Ten commenters had concerns over the proposed revisions in the
qualification criteria for
FR Doc. 96-5500 Classification Reform; Implementation Standards
destination delivery unit discounts for
Standard
[[Page 10078]]
Mail and Publications Service Periodicals to require that mailers take
carrier route sorted mail to the postal facility where sequencing of
the mail takes place rather than to the postal facility where the
carrier is located, in those situations where these were not the same
facility.
Seven commenters requested that the change requiring carrier route
mail to be entered at the location where the mail is sequenced should
be dropped. These mailers questioned how a small mailer is to know this
information and that it will be subject to change. Two commenters did
not disagree with the new standard but recommended that the Postal
Service develop a list of 5-digit ZIP Code facilities at which mailers
must drop Destination Delivery Unit mail. One commenter stated that
this standard only has logic for letters and possibly for automation
flats, and that applying it to non-automation flats could interfere
with well established mailing patterns for newspapers and their
shippers. This commenter requested that postmasters be given the
authority to allow mail to be dropped at the delivery office.
As pointed out by one commenter, a change in where the mail is
dropped makes sense only for letter mail. Moreover, any change in where
the mail is dropped would apply only to automation (barcoded) letter
mail that is processed at CSBCS sites. Since Publications Service was
not recommended as a separate subclass of Periodicals mail, and there
is no automation carrier route rate applicable to Regular Periodicals,
this revision will not apply to Periodicals under implementation of
Classification Reform. Mailers of Periodicals, and of Standard letters
mailed at other than automation Enhanced Carrier Route letter rates,
will continue to drop their mail at the destination where the carrier
is located since it is the carrier who sequences this mail under these
final rules. However, for automation Enhanced Carrier Route letter
mail, mailers will be required to drop their mail at the postal
facility where the mail is sequenced. This could be the facility at
which the carrier sequence barcode sorter (CSBCS) is located which will
sequence the mail, rather than the facility at which the carrier is
located. Mailers may contact the appropriate USPS district drop
shipment coordinators to determine the sites where automation Enhanced
Carrier Route letter mail must be dropped to obtain DDU discounts. The
Postal Service plans to incorporate information as to where automation
Enhanced Carrier Route mail must be dropped to obtain DDU discounts in
its AIS Drop Shipment product in the future.
k. Replacement of SDC Network With ADC Network
One comment was received in response to the Postal Service's notice
that the SDC network would be replaced by the ADC network for all mail,
effective with the implementation of Classification Reform. This
commenter asked whether we would be creating an excess of skin sacks as
a result of this since there are more ADCs than SDCs. He indicated that
today all working flat mail is placed in the same sack, and it appears
that the network change would require a separate sack for this mail for
each ADC.
The sortation rules for mail sorted to ADCs will require either a
full tray (with no overflow) or a sack meeting a prescribed minimum
quantity. Therefore there should not be an excess of skin sacks created
by this network change. Mail that cannot be placed in full letter or
flat trays, or in sacks meeting the specified minimum quantity would
continue to be merged into mixed trays or sacks with the label changed
to Mixed ADC rather than mixed states.
l. Enhanced Carrier Route Rate Eligibility for Routes With Fewer Than
Ten Stops
One commenter commended the USPS for allowing mail destined for
carrier routes that have fewer than 10 delivery stops to qualify for
the Saturation Enhanced Carrier Route rates if it meets the applicable
density and documentation standards.
m. Eligibility for Enhanced Carrier Route High Density Rates
Three comments were received in response to the Postal Service's
indication that walk sequencing rather than line-of-travel (LOT)
sequencing would be required to qualify for High Density Enhanced
Carrier Route rates. All three commenters indicated that LOT sequencing
should be permitted.
Currently, walk sequence is required to obtain these rates, and
that standard has been retained in the applicable DMCS provisions
recommended by the PRC and accepted by the Governors.
n. Density Standards for Saturation Enhanced Carrier Route Mail
One commenter requested an explanation as to why in proposed DMM
sections E632.1.7b and c, multiple pieces for a single delivery address
are not allowed to count toward meeting the Saturation Enhanced Carrier
Route qualification criteria, but are permitted to count toward meeting
the 125-pieces per route standard for High Density Enhanced Carrier
Route rates. This commenter asked whether this excludes multiple
dwelling units such as apartments or trailer parks. He requested
clarification of this rule and also a modification to make this rule
consistent for qualification for both rates.
The proposed DMM sections E632.1.7b and c do not reflect a change
from current standards but merely carry forward the current standards
in DMM E334.1.6d. To meet the saturation criteria, the Postal Service
requires delivery of a mailpiece to at least 90% of the active
residential addresses or at least 75% of the total number of active
possible delivery addresses for each carrier route claiming these
rates, whereas for High Density rates it requires only a total of 125
sequenced pieces per route. A delivery address for purposes of meeting
the Saturation standards could be individual apartments in an apartment
complex or highrise or individual trailers in a trailer park. This
standard for saturation rates does not preclude mailers from mailing
more than one piece to a specific delivery address, it only specifies
that the specific delivery address to which a piece or pieces are
delivered can count only once towards meeting the applicable percentage
of active possible delivery addresses per carrier route.
o. Placement of All Packages or Pieces for the Entry SCF in 3-Digit or
Finer Trays or Sacks
Eleven comments were received in response to the Postal Service's
proposal to require that all mail for the 3-digit ZIP Codes served by
the SCF of the entry post office be trayed or sacked to a 3-digit or
finer level of sortation. This proposed standard could have resulted in
the preparation of less-than-full 3-digit trays and sacks for the 3-
digit ZIP Codes served by the SCF of the entry post office where full
3-digit or finer trays or sacks for these destinations could not be
prepared. This standard was added to avoid having small quantities of
local mail being transported from the local office to an ADC or AADC
where it would undergo processing and transportation back to the SCF at
which it was entered. The avoidance of this loop would result in better
service and an expanded opportunity for mail to qualify for destination
SCF rates.
Four commenters indicated that this standard should be changed from
required to optional because it would be impossible for many drop
shipment mailers to comply with it. These
[[Page 10079]]
commenters pointed out that at many mail preparation facilities,
mailings are presorted and produced first and decisions as to
destination entry drop points made second after the mailer is able to
determine the total volume of mail it has produced on a given day for
certain drop shipment destinations. Because the presort is performed
prior to determining drop entry points, requiring 3-digit sortation
based on the SCF service area of the facility at which the mail is
dropped would require these mailers either to resort the mail by drop
ship sites or, to manually remove this mail from ADC, AADC, mixed ADC
and mixed AADC trays or sacks and make manual corrections to mailing
documentation. Six commenters indicated that these less-than-full 3-
digit trays should be eligible for the applicable 3-digit or 3/5 rate
rather than a basic rate. One commenter believed that a standard for
separate 3-digit trays was overkill and requested the ability to
prepare an SCF tray for this mail with separator cards. This would
prevent mailers from having to prepare 10 separate less-than-full 3-
digit trays for SCF areas such as White River Junction, VT, which
serves 10 different 3-digit ZIP Code areas. One commenter opposed this
standard, indicating that consistency in mail preparation transcends
the minimal benefit derived from this proposal.
In response to the comments by drop shipment mailers, the Postal
Service is revising the final DMM language to require preparation of
these less-than-full 3-digit trays or sacks only for the 3-digit ZIP
Codes served by the SCF of the post office where the mail is verified.
These trays or sacks would be optional for other entry points. The
Postal Service would also like to point out that because tray label
destinations for mixed AADC trays and mixed ADC trays and sacks of mail
will differ depending on the location of where the mail is dropped,
plant verified drop shipment mailers will be expected to make
appropriate tray label changes for any mixed AADC trays or mixed ADC
trays and sacks that are drop shipped to other than the facility where
the mail is verified.
The Postal Service does not want to reinstitute preparation of SCF
trays. Therefore the Postal Service is retaining the standard that,
after preparation of any applicable carrier route and 5-digit trays or
sacks, and all 3-digit trays or sacks meeting the applicable minimum
quantity standards, any mail (for automation and upgradable letters) or
any 5-digit and 3-digit packages (for other sortations) remaining for
the 3-digit ZIP Code or ZIP Codes served by the post office where the
mail is verified, must be prepared in separate 3-digit sacks or trays.
The only exception is that for automation letter mailings, preparation
of 3-digit scheme trays would be required where scheme sorts are
indicated in DMM L003. The Postal Service recognizes that in some SCF
areas like White River Junction, VT, which serves 10 different 3-digit
ZIP Code areas, this could result in as many as 10 separate less-than-
full trays or sacks for mailings at other than automation letter rates.
(For automation rate letters, only 3 separate scheme trays would be
required for this mail, assuming there were pieces in the mailing for
each of these schemes.) However, as stated above, the Postal Service
does not wish to reinstitute preparation of SCF packages, trays, or
sacks. The Postal Service is also retaining its position that when the
pieces in these entry or origin 3-digit (3-digit scheme for automation
rate letters) trays or sacks do not meet applicable minimum quantity
standards for 3-digit or 3/5 rates, the pieces must be paid at basic
rates.
p. Presort Accuracy Validation and Evaluation (PAVE)
The Postal Service proposed to require use of PAVE-certified
software or standardized documentation when preparing mailings under
any of the reformed subclasses. Four commenters responded to this
proposal. One commenter indicated that PAVE should not be required for
mail acceptance, rather there should be only a requirement for
standardized documentation. One commenter indicated that he is waiting
for further information. This commenter recommended that the
verification process for all changes and new proposals be incorporated
into the standardized documentation standards in order to eliminate
redundant documentation and streamline acceptance. One commenter
indicated that his company has invested in sophisticated documentation
software and needs the standardized documentation requirements in order
to make necessary programming changes. One commenter indicated that the
Postal Service needs to establish timely and reasonable procedures for
mailers to have their documentation certified as standard. One
commenter sent in a sample of current documentation to determine
whether it met the standardized documentation requirements.
The Postal Service has retained the standard for mailers to use
either PAVE-certified software or to use standardized documentation.
The standardized documentation requirements are included in this final
rule. Mailers who use standardized documentation need not also meet the
PAVE-certified software standard although its use is strongly
recommended. Mailers using PAVE-certified software can be assured that
their documentation will meet the standardized documentation
requirement. The standardized documentation specified in this final
rule does not incorporate all the new eligibility and mail preparation
standards of Classification Reform as requested by one commenter. The
standardized documentation is used to show that the presort criteria
have been met and that rates were properly claimed on the postage
statement. Certification of addressing standards, move update standards
for First-Class Mail, certification that enclosed reply pieces in
automation rate mailings are prepared with proper barcodes and FIMs,
etc. cannot properly be captured by standardized documentation and will
be certified through separate use of a Form 3553, the postage
statement, or other means. Consolidation of all these certification
standards may be considered in the future but is not part of these
final implementing rules.
The Postal Service plans to have PAVE testing available for
affected presort categories prior to implementation of Classification
Reform. PAVE test files will be available to software vendors on March
22 for First-Class and Regular Standard letters and flats categories,
and on March 29 for Enhanced Carrier Route Standard categories. This
will provide sufficient time for the Postal Service to evaluate
returned test files and certify participants prior to implementation of
Classification Reform. Vendors whose files fail as a result of an
initial evaluation will also have time for retesting and reevaluation
for certification prior to the July 1 implementation date. Test files
for Regular Periodicals will not be available until early summer as a
result of the significant changes made to the quality and preparation
standards in this category from those published in the proposed rule.
Accordingly, the standard for use of PAVE certified software or
standardized documentation for Regular Periodicals will not be required
until January 1, 1997.
Mailers are advised that PAVE certification does not remove the
requirement to submit documentation with each mailing where
documentation is required. This is because PAVE tests the ability of a
software program to sort addresses properly, but does not test the
[[Page 10080]]
mailer's proper use of it or the application of proper mailing
parameters to each mailing. Use of PAVE-certified software will assure
that the documentation produced meets the requirements for standardized
documentation. PAVE also tests the ability to prepare properly
formatted postage statement facsimiles. Software that is developed in-
house by mailers may be PAVE-certified. Requests for PAVE certification
information and tests should be directed to:
Pave Program, National Customer Support Center, US Postal Service,
6060 Primacy Pky Ste 101, Memphis TN 38188-0001
A list of PAVE certified products, by vendor, will be available on
RIBBS, the Postal Service Rapid Information Bulletin Board System, and
from the above address.
q. Perceived Restriction on the Mailability of Postcards as Bills
One commenter pointed out that the proposed Domestic Mail
Classification Schedule language in section 232.2 indicated that
mailpieces having certain characteristics such as punched holes,
vertical tearing guides, an address portion which is smaller than the
remainder of the card and numbers or letters unrelated to postal
purposes appearing in the address portion of the card, are not mailable
as a postal card or postcard unless the mailpieces are prepared as
prescribed by the Postal Service. This commenter believed that these
standards were new restrictions and was concerned that the Postal
Service included neither descriptions of ``face'' and ``holes, tearing
guides'' in the proposed DMM language in the proposed rule, nor
preparations ``prescribed by the Postal Service'' in order for mailers
to maintain mailability for such pieces. The commenter believed that
this meant that the Postal Service was seeking to prohibit such pieces
from being mailed and expressed concern about the impact this would
have on mailers of postcard bills.
DMCS section 232.2 does not set forth new restrictions on
postcards. This section carries forward the provisions of current DMCS
section 100.043. The related DMM preparation standards for this DMCS
provision are in current DMM C100.2.6 through 2.8. The Postal Service
did not propose any changes to DMM C100.2.6 through 2.8, except that
DMM C100.2.8 was revised to reflect the changes in the names of the
classes and subclasses of mail proposed in MC95-1 and to reflect the
proposed change to prepare this mail in trays rather than sacks. The
reason current DMM C100.26 and 2.7 were not included in the proposed
rule is because no changes were proposed for those existing sections.
The asterisks that appeared between revised DMM C100.2.1 and revised
DMM C100.2.8 meant that no changes were made to current rules that
appeared between these two sections in the DMM. Accordingly, the
current DMM provisions in C100.2.6 and 2.7 allowing postcards having
the characteristics described in DMCS section 232.2, to be mailed at
card rates if they are prepared under the provisions of DMM C100.2.8
will remain in effect. The commenter is also advised that the
additional preparation standards in C100.2.8 for pieces having the
aforementioned physical characteristics are for the purposes of
maintaining eligibility for card rates. Pieces having punched holes,
vertical tearing guides, an address portion smaller than the remainder
of the card, and numbers or letters unrelated to postal purposes
appearing in the address portion of the card, that are described in DMM
C100.2.6 and 2.7, and that do not meet the additional standards in DMM
C100.2.8, are still mailable but must pay postage at the letter rates
rather than the card rates.
2. Automation Mailings
a. 100% Barcoding
Nineteen commenters responded to the Postal Service proposal that
mailings at the proposed automation First-Class and automation Standard
Mail subclasses be comprised of 100% delivery point barcoded pieces for
letters and 100% ZIP+4 barcoded or delivery point barcoded pieces for
flats. Although an automation subclass was not recommended by the PRC,
the Postal Service reviewed these comments in light of its desire to
retain the 100% barcoding standard for automation mailings in the
First-Class Letters and Parcels subclass, automation mailings in the
Regular Standard Mail subclass, and automation mailings in the Enhanced
Carrier Route Standard Mail subclass. Furthermore, the Postal Service
plans to extend the 100% barcoding standard to automation (barcoded
rate) mailings within the Regular Periodicals subclass. Comments on
this extension to automation mailings of Regular Periodicals will be
permitted as discussed above.
Two commenters supported this standard, one of which indicated that
there is no need to phase in this standard because there is another
subclass at which to mail noncoded pieces. Another commenter requested
that implementation of this standard be delayed.
Four commenters requested a gradual increase in the percentage of
barcoded pieces needed to qualify, two of which suggested moving the
standard first to 90% and then to 95%, and one which wanted a 2-year
phase-in period. One commenter suggested that the standard be changed
to 95%, and another suggested that the Postal Service provide some
tolerance. One commenter asked whether there will be any error
tolerance for occurrences such as labels falling off, address
misprints, or a barcode spraying over two envelopes.
Two commenters requested the rules be changed to allow nonbarcoded
letter mail to be placed in the same trays as delivery point barcoded
mail, one suggesting separation of barcoded and nonbarcoded mail in all
trays, and one suggesting this practice be limited to AADC and mixed
AADC trays. Three other commenters indicated that splitting their mail
lists into two separate mailstreams, one with delivery point barcodes
and one without, will increase their mail preparation expenses. One of
these indicated it could result in more nonpresorted mail and another
commenter indicated that this standard would eliminate large volumes of
easier to process mail. Another commenter stated that together with the
150-piece minimum for rate qualification, the 100% barcoding standard
will result in a net increase in postage for many mailers, which in
turn could lead to a decrease in the volume of barcoded and presorted
mail. This commenter further stated that because postage for
nonbarcoded mail will increase total postage, the 100% barcoding
standard could result in a decrease of business for mail service
companies.
As indicated in the comment section of the December 22, 1995,
proposed rule, when mailers, as is currently permitted, mix delivery
point barcoded mail and non-delivery point barcoded mail within 3-digit
and residual portions of their barcoded rate mailings, the non-delivery
point barcoded mail is rejected from barcode sorters and must be rerun
on MLOCRs or multiposition letter sorting machines (MPLSMs). (Mail
presorted to 5-digit packages and trays must currently be 100% delivery
point barcoded.) Requiring mailers to prepare a separate mailing for
non-delivery point barcoded mail eliminates these extra handlings and
allows this mail to be directed properly from the start, resulting in
more efficient Postal Service processing. These efficiencies are
recognized in the lower automation rates recommended by the PRC and
approved by the Governors. Accordingly, the Postal Service does not
[[Page 10081]]
believe that phasing in or delaying this standard is appropriate. In
return for lower automation rates, mailers will have to perform the
additional work of separating nondelivery point barcoded mail (letters)
and non-ZIP+4 or delivery point barcoded mail (flats) from barcoded
mail, and presenting it as a separate Presorted First-Class,
nonautomation Regular Standard, nonautomation Enhanced Carrier Route
Mailing, or nonautomation Regular Periodicals mailing.
The Postal Service does not understand how this standard will
eliminate large volumes of easier to process mail or how it will lead
to a decrease in the volume of barcoded and presorted mail as some
commenters suggested. The nonautomation mailing rates approved by the
Governors are higher than current nonautomation rates, and much higher
than the automation rates to be implemented. For example, the rate
difference between an automation First-Class mailing and a Presorted
First-Class mailing is 3.4 cents-per-piece at basic automation rates
and 4.1 cents-per-piece for 3-digit automation rates. There is a 7.3
cents-per-piece difference between automation Regular Standard basic
rates and nonautomation Standard Regular basic rates, and a 3.4 cents-
per-piece difference between automation Regular Standard 3-digit rates
and nonautomation 3/5 Regular Standard rates. Based on these
incentives, the Postal Service believes most mailers will try to
qualify as much mail as possible for the lower automation rates,
thereby leading to an increase in barcoded mail.
One commenter took exception to a Postal Service response to a
comment indicating that if the 100% barcoding standard results in more
nonbarcoded mail presented for OCR processing at the origin post
office, the Postal Service believes that it has the operational
capacity to process this mail. The commenter stated that mailers have
been told for years that nonqualified residual must be presented early
in the night because operating units aren't able to handle this volume.
This commenter maintains that the 100% barcoding standard will result
in larger volumes of nonbarcoded mail and that this in turn will affect
the cut-off times that are now around 9:00 p.m. for acceptance of this
mail.
As indicated above, the Postal Service does not believe that the
100% barcoding standard will result in larger volumes of nonbarcoded
mail. When mailers separate out the current 15% of their nonbarcoded
mail that is currently permitted within barcoded rate mailings and
submit it as a separate mailing, they are not increasing the total
amount of nonbarcoded mail that must be processed by the Postal
Service. Furthermore, these mailers are likely to submit the non-
delivery point barcoded pieces as either a Presorted First-Class or
nonautomation Regular Standard mailing. These presorted nonautomation
rate mailings will contain 5-digit, 3-digit, and ADC trays (AADC trays
for upgradable mail) that can be dispatched directly to the appropriate
facility and thereby bypass individual piece processing at the entry
SCF. For automation Regular Standard mail, mixed AADC trays will be
directed to concentration centers, and nonautomation mixed ADC trays
will be directed to origin ADC for processing, also bypassing
processing at the entry SCF (unless the entry SCF happens to be the
concentration center or ADC). First-Class Mail received at the entry
post office in mixed AADC or mixed ADC trays will be processed at the
entry SCF. However, the processing of this mail will be more efficient
than the current processing of residual mail. Current residual mail
contains a mix of barcoded and nonbarcoded pieces. Under Classification
Reform, mixed AADC trays of automation rate mail will be 100% barcoded
and can be directed to an outgoing primary barcode sorter, mixed AADC
trays of upgradable nonbarcoded mail can be directed to an MLOCR
operation, and mixed ADC trays of nonupgradable mail can be directed to
the appropriate mechanized or manual operation. Furthermore, because
the SCF of the entry post office will not also have to process on OCRs
the current volume of mailer-prepared pieces without delivery point
barcodes that are rejected from that plant's barcode sorters, there
should be an offsetting lessening of mail volume presented to a plant's
OCRs for processing. If, despite all these offsetting factors, a higher
quantity of nonbarcoded single piece or mixed AADC barcoded mail is
experienced at a particular postal facility, the Postal Service can
make internal adjustments to handle that mail. Accordingly, the Postal
Service reiterates its belief that it has the operational capacity to
process this mail.
Two comments were received regarding the exception set forth in the
proposed rule to allow outgoing courtesy reply mail envelopes bearing a
FIM and a preapplied unique 5-digit or unique ZIP+4 barcode to be
considered to have a proper delivery point barcode as opposed to an 11-
digit delivery point barcode required for all other mail. The Postal
Service allowed this because this mail can be easily identified at
acceptance by the presence of the FIM. One commenter indicated that he
was pleased to see this provision and the other commenter noted that
this exception was missing from the DMM standards and requested it be
added to the DMM. Since the incidence of courtesy reply mail within the
outgoing barcoded mailstream should be small, and limited to MLOCR
users, this exception will be handled as an acceptance issue and will
not be included in DMM standards.
One commenter indicated that the 100% barcoding standards should
also apply to Nonprofit Standard Mail and to Periodicals mail. The 100%
barcoding standards have been added to Periodicals Automation mailings.
Nonprofit Standard and Preferred Periodicals mail is not part of this
phase of Classification Reform and therefore will not be affected by
this standard at this time. As indicated above, this standard is being
applied to automation Regular Periodical mail under the final rule.
One commenter suggested that the Postal Service cannot barcode all
addresses and that mailers therefore should not be held to this
standard. This commenter also believed that there are addresses in the
United States that have not been assigned ZIP+4 codes. One commenter
indicated the ZIP+4 database has errors and suggested that the Postal
Service match the DSF file against the ZIP+4 file, using CASS-certified
software, to list all noncoded addresses, and further list good
addresses that are not matched to the finest level to determine why
this might happen. Another commenter expressed concern that valid
addresses might not be coded due to data problems or strict software
standards, and invalid addresses might appear valid because incorrect
ZIP+4 codes are assigned. One commenter requested that the standard be
changed from 100% to between 95% and 97% to account for new addresses
and 911 conversions that are not in the database.
There are no addresses for which the Postal Service is unable to
assign a ZIP+4 code. For legal and privacy reasons, the Postal Service
cannot disclose mailing lists. The ZIP+4 files contain ranges of ZIP
Codes and are not intended as a product that would allow a mailer to
determine whether an address on a mailpiece actually exists. Mailers
with good quality addresses can obtain delivery point barcodes on their
mailpieces. If they cannot, those pieces can be mailed at the
appropriate rates for nonbarcoded mailings. Having
[[Page 10082]]
identified a need for accurate barcodes to ensure proper automation
sortation, the Postal Service tests and certifies address matching
software to ensure that it is producing correct barcodes. Because only
correct barcodes are acceptable, software is controlled to help ensure
that an incomplete or otherwise poor quality address receives a barcode
only if it is correct. The Governors approved reduced postage rates for
mail with correct barcodes. Those rates were not designed to apply to
nonbarcoded mail or to mail with incorrect barcodes. Use of bad
barcodes causes misdirected mailpieces. This in turn causes increased
costs and reduces the Postal Service's ability to provide timely,
consistent delivery service. To aid mailers with barcoding, the Postal
Service already has a variety of tools to assist in improving address
quality. If a mailer using CASS- or MASS-certified software cannot
apply a correct delivery point barcode or, for flats a correct ZIP+4
barcode, to mailpieces, the mailer should, and will be required to,
mail those pieces at the Presorted First-Class, presorted nonautomation
Regular Standard, nonautomation Regular Periodicals, or single-piece
rates, whichever is applicable.
b. Courtesy and BRM Barcoded Envelopes
Thirteen commenters responded to the proposed standard that,
effective January 1, 1997, letter-size courtesy and business reply
envelopes and cards included in letter-size an flat-size automation
First-Class or automation Standard mailings must be automation-
compatible, bear a FIM, and bear a correct barcode for the address to
which the piece is returned. Three commenters requested a more liberal
phase-in period for this standard, one specifying a minimum of 1 year,
to allow mailers to exhaust their existing stock of reply mail letters
and cards. Four commenters indicated that they do not support this
standard, three of which stated that they object to the standard
because enclosed reply mail has no connection with the cost of
processing the outgoing mailpiece. One of those commenters further
stated that the cost of processing reply mail should be borne by the
reply mail.
Several commenters had concerns over the certification standard and
enforcement of this standard. One commenter stated that this will add
costs to his mailing operation by requiring someone to proof every
reply piece prior to insertion. Two commenters requested a further
explanation of the certification standards and indicated most
lettershops are not involved with the creation and postal approval of
courtesy and business reply envelopes. Two commenters stated tracking
down the producer of the business reply piece will be difficult. One
commenter stated that the Postal Service's contention that a mailer
capable of printing a barcode on an outgoing piece should be able to
prepare properly barcoded reply pieces has no bearing on this standard
because some mailers do not print the reply pieces, only the host
pieces. Three commenters indicated that liability for noncompliance
should be the owner of the mail, not the preparer or presenter. One
commenter stated the Postal Service needs to clarify the actions that
will be taken for noncompliance. One commenter stated that enforcement
seems unattainable and that this standard could renew a call for a
public automation rate. One commenter assumed that an improperly
prepared reply piece discovered at acceptance would downgrade the
entire mailing to a higher rate of postage and stated that such a
penalty is draconian and a dangerous precedent that could drive postal
customers away from using return mailpieces rather than encourage their
use.
The Postal Service is adopting its proposal that letter-size reply
envelopes and cards that are included within both letter-size and flat-
size mailpieces entered as automation First-Class, automation Regular
Standard and automation Enhanced Carrier Route Standard mailings, must
be automation-compatible, bear a FIM, and a correct barcode for the
reply address. In addition, the Postal Service is extending this
requirement to automation mailings of Regular Periodicals. Comments on
this extension to Regular Periodicals will be permitted as discussed
above.
In addition to the customer convenience of a reply vehicle,
increasing the use of barcoded reply vehicles is expected to keep
postage rates down by making this mail more efficient to process. The
Postal Service recognizes that mailers will need to work with their
customers and possibly modify their contracts with advertisers and
others to ensure that this standard is met. To allow time for this and
for utilization of existing reply mail stock, the Postal Service is
setting an implementation date of January 1, 1997, for this standard.
The Postal Service does not believe a longer delay of this standard is
warranted. At that time, automation First-Class, automation Regular
Standard, automation Regular Enhanced Carrier Route, and automation
Regular Periodicals mailers will be required to certify that enclosed
reply pieces are properly prepared when the mailing is presented to the
post office. Mailers will certify this by checking a box on the postage
statement and signing the statement. For this purpose, the mailer is
whomever presents the mail to the post office. As indicated above, it
will be up to mailers to work with their customers and advertisers to
ensure that reply pieces provided to mailers comply with the standards
for barcoded reply pieces. Upon implementation, if mailers cannot
certify that this standard has been met, or noncomplying reply pieces
are found within the outgoing mailing, the mailing may not be mailed at
the automation rates and must pay the higher nonautomation rates.
Several commenters had questions concerning the standards for
proper preparation of reply mail. Two commenters had concerns over the
proposed standard for a delivery point barcode on all pieces. One
pointed out that business reply mail is required to use a ZIP+4 barcode
and that most courtesy envelope mail uses a unique ZIP+4 barcode. This
commenter indicated that requiring an 11-digit delivery point barcode
will require many mailers to make expensive form design changes to
accommodate the larger barcode without any benefit to the Postal
Service. The other commenter pointed out that there is a discrepancy
between the Postal Service's apparent willingness to accept courtesy
reply mail bearing unique 5-digit and ZIP+4 barcodes as properly
barcoded outgoing pieces for purposes of meeting the 100% barcoded
standard for automation rates, and its unwillingness to accept them on
courtesy reply pieces contained within such mailings. One commenter
questioned whether the standards for barcode preparation in DMM C840
would also be required as this section was not referenced in the
appropriate E module sections of the proposed DMM language. This
commenter was concerned that, if the reflectance standards contained in
C840 will be required, that the envelope industry may not be able to
meet them. This commenter also stated that because most reply envelopes
are printed with a flexographic process, 100% of the barcodes cannot be
guaranteed to meet the automation standards as this process does not
produce results as consistent as laser, inkjet, and impact printing.
One commenter, for environmental reasons, requested that the Postal
Service work to modify the reflectance tolerance levels in DMM C840 for
the area around the barcode, to improve the capability of its barcode
readers to read nonpolymer
[[Page 10083]]
window envelope coverings, and to relax its flexibility standards in
order to accommodate recycled paper. Another commenter requested that a
reference to DMM C840 be included in the DMM standards for enclosed
courtesy reply mail because this is the section that provides for
barcodes in the address block. One commenter requested the ability to
put barcodes in the address area for business reply mail. Another
commenter believed that the Postal Service had committed to allow the
barcode, permit holder, and permit number to appear on inserts through
a window on business reply mail in early 1996 and thanked us for this
effort.
The DMM standards concerning courtesy reply mail can be found in
DMM E140.1.5, E241.1.2, E641.1.2, and C810.8. The Postal Service has
determined that, for purposes of enclosed courtesy reply mail under
this section, a unique 5-digit or unique-ZIP+4 barcode provided by the
Postal Service will satisfy the delivery point barcode standards. This
will make these rules consistent with the acceptance provisions for
allowing outgoing courtesy reply mail prepared in this manner to count
toward the 100% delivery point barcoding standards for letter-size
automation rates. The Postal Service will require that barcodes on
enclosed reply mail meet the barcode, reflectance, and window standards
in DMM C840. The Postal Service recognizes that some recycled paper
will not meet the reflectance standards. However, recycled paper that
meets the Postal Service reflectance standards is available. Because
the reflectance standards reflect the current capabilities of USPS
barcode reader equipment they cannot be modified. Originators of reply
mail pieces will be expected to make the necessary changes to the
preparation of these pieces to ensure that they meet all the applicable
DMM standards. Although the Postal Service has not begun a formal
rulemaking process to allow BRM format elements such as the name of the
permit holder and the permit number to appear through a window on BRM
pieces, it will consider this for a future rulemaking.
The Postal Service will provide, free of charge, camera-ready
positives of appropriate FIMs and correct barcodes for the production
of reply mail. Mailers should contact their local Postal Service
account representative or postal business center to obtain the
positives and additional information on preparation standards.
Obtaining the correct barcode for mailpieces is extremely important.
The Postal Service assigns ZIP+4 barcodes to BRMAS reply pieces.
Publication 353, Designing Reply Mail, contains information on
correctly preparing barcoded courtesy reply mail and business reply
mail. Additional information on business reply mail and barcode
standards is contained in the Domestic Mail Manual. These publications
contain information on how to prepare barcodes that appear in the
address block of reply pieces and those that appear through an address
window.
c. Barcoded Tray and Sack Labels
Nineteen comments were received concerning the proposal to require
that automation First-Class and Standard Mail, and automation-
compatible Publications Service Periodicals be prepared with barcoded
tray or sack labels. The proposed Publications Service subclass of
periodicals was not recommended to the Governors by the Postal Rate
Commission. Instead revised rates for Regular Periodicals were
recommended and these changes to Periodicals have been accepted by the
Governors. The Postal Service is applying the requirement for barcoded
tray and sack labels to all automation Regular Periodicals under these
final rules.
Eight commenters indicated that implementation of this standard
needs to be delayed in order to give mailers enough time to buy
equipment and/or adapt their systems. Two of these commenters indicated
that at least 6 months was needed and another indicated that the date
should be much later than July 1, 1996. One commenter indicated that he
must replace dot matrix printers with ink jet, thermal or laser
printers. One commenter indicated that this standard should be dropped
as it will require him to stock labels for every 3-digit ZIP Code
because he will no longer be able to handwrite labels for destinations
that are seldom used. He indicated that this will cause him either
enormous storage problems or require him to purchase either an outside
vendor's system of special printers and unprinted labels. One commenter
simply stated that his operation is not set up to handle barcoded
labels at this time.
Six commenters indicated that the barcode specifications in the DMM
cannot be met by most mailers and are not met by the Postal Service's
own label printing facility. Problem areas mentioned included the point
size, characters per inch, and size of the labels. These commenters
also pointed out that these DMM standards are not met by the PASSPORT
and Monarch printers system indicated to be a way to meet these
standards in the proposed rule. One commenter indicated that the DMM
M032 exhibit needs to include the appropriate CINs for tray and sack
labels under Classification Reform.
Three commenters were concerned about the Postal Service's ability
to supply the total demand for these labels in a timely manner. One
commenter stated that the Postal Service needs to design better tray
label holders that will hold the label in place.
The Postal Service has investigated the barcode label
specifications in the DMM in relation to these comments. As a result,
some changes to the barcode tray and sack label specifications in DMM
M032 have been made and are published in this notice. Revised CINs have
also been published in the DMM section of this notice. In order to give
mailers time to incorporate these barcode specification changes into
any current systems they may have to produce labels and to give other
mailers time to buy necessary equipment and adapt their mailing systems
to incorporate barcoded tray labels, the Postal Service is delaying the
requirement to use barcoded tray and sack labels with automation rate
mailings until January 1, 1997. At that time automation First-Class,
automation Regular Standard, automation Enhanced Carrier Route, and
automation Regular Periodicals mailings must be prepared with barcoded
tray or sack labels. As indicated above, comments will be allowed on
the extension of this standard to Regular Periodicals mail.
The Postal Service currently has tray management systems that
utilize barcoded container labels deployed at its largest plants and is
aggressively deploying these systems to other plants. Barcoded tray
labels are needed to capture the efficiencies of the tray management
systems. Barcoded labels are also currently used to sort trays and
sacks of Standard mail at BMCs. Accordingly, mailers are strongly
encouraged to begin using barcoded tray labels prior to the January 1,
1997, implementation date.
Furthermore, mailers are reminded that, even though the requirement
to use barcoded tray and sacks labels with automation mailings has been
delayed, new tray and sack labels will be required for all mailings
under Classification Reform (with the exception of some sort levels of
First-Class Mail) due to the changes in postal networks, the addition
of scheme sorts, and changes to the names of the classes of mail.
As indicated in the previous notice, the Postal Service will supply
barcoded tray and sack labels. Customers must complete Form 1578-B and
submit it to their local post office, which after
[[Page 10084]]
checking the order, will forward it to the Postal Service Label
Printing Center in Topeka, Kansas. The labels will be delivered in
approximately 6 weeks of the order. These labels will reflect the
network changes and the new CINs for Classification Reform and can not
be used until July 1, 1996.
Alternatively, mailers having a personal computer and a modem can
obtain free PASSPORT software from the Postal Service that will enable
them to order labels directly from the Label Printing Center in Topeka.
In addition, the PASSPORT system will allow mailers to print barcoded
labels on demand if they use one of three printers--Monarch 9425 or
Monarch 9445, or Intermac 3000. The Passport system also includes free
updates to the Postal Service labeling lists in DMM module L. PASSPORT
software or further information about Passport may be obtained from the
National Customer Support Center at 1-800-238-3150.
The Postal Service purchased new tray labels holders last year that
hold labels more firmly in place. The Postal Service is systematically
replacing old tray label holders with the new ones.
d. ZIP Code Limits on Letter-Size Automation Carrier Route Rates
Eleven commenters responded to the proposal to limit letter-size
automation Carrier Route rates to ZIP Codes where mail will be
sequenced either manually or by a carrier sequence barcode sorter
(CSBCS). One commenter is opposed to the idea of reducing eligibility
for carrier route rates. One commenter indicated that this limit on
where letter-size automation carrier route rates can be obtained
worsens the rate qualification degradation caused by the 150-piece
standard for 5-digit and 3-digit Automation rates. This commenter
indicated that he will mail at the Enhanced Carrier Route nonautomation
letter rates rather than try to qualify mail for the 5-digit barcoded
rate.
As indicated in previous notices, the limits on availability of
automation Carrier Route letter rates are necessary for efficient
Postal Service processing. For an increasing number of 5-digit ZIP Code
areas, the Postal Service sorts mail to delivery point sequence (DPS),
the sequence in which carriers deliver the mail, using two passes on
delivery barcode sorters (DBCSs). Where this takes place, the carrier
does not have to sort this mail manually into delivery or walk
sequence, which saves carrier in-office time. At postal facilities
where DPS processing is performed, it is to the Postal Service's
advantage to have as much mail as possible DPS processed on the
automated equipment. Currently, at 5-digit ZIP Code areas for which DPS
processing on DBCSs has been implemented, all mailer-prepared carrier
route and walk-sequence presorted letter mail received with barcodes is
processed on DBCSs rather than being directed to carriers for manual
sequencing. Carrier route and walk-sequence sorted letter mail without
barcodes is directed to MLOCRs for application of barcodes and
subsequent DPS processing. In many cases today, this process results in
the Postal Service backflowing mail from a delivery unit to the place
where the DBCS or MLOCR is located. Thus, there is no additional value
provided to the Postal Service by mailer presortation to carrier route
or walk-sequence versus a 5-digit presortation for automation-
compatible letter mail at destinating DBCS sites.
Carrier route rates are based in part on steps avoided by the
Postal Service during processing. The preparation of carrier route
packages and trays of barcoded mail addressed to ZIP Code areas at
which mail is DPS processed on DBCSs does not avoid processing steps.
The Postal Service will not give reduced rates for mail preparation
that provides the Postal Service no value. Automation Carrier Route
rates will therefore not be provided to barcoded carrier route mail at
those 5-digit ZIP Code areas where DPS sequencing on DBCSs takes place.
Carrier sequence barcode sorters (CSBCSs) are smaller barcode
sorting machines that also sequence mail to delivery point. However,
mail must already be sorted to the carrier route level before it can be
processed on a CSBCS. Therefore it will still make sense for the Postal
Service to offer carrier route rates for barcoded mail that it sorts on
CSBCSs and for mail on carrier routes that are sequenced manually.
The Postal Service is aware that this limit on automation Carrier
Route rates will reduce the number of pieces a mailer can qualify for
automation carrier route rates. It will be up to each mailer to make
the decision whether the level of discount is worth the expense of
preparing their particular mail for automation rates. The issue
concerning the 150-piece minimum for 5-digit and 3-digit automation
letter rates is further discussed under a separate section on 150-piece
standards.
Seven commenters indicated that the list of ZIP Codes ineligible
for automation Carrier Route rates should be available on RIBBS on a
permanent basis and that small mailers should not have to subscribe to
the City/State file as this is an unnecessary and costly burden.
The Postal Service sees no advantage and only possible confusion in
providing a list of ZIP Codes where letter-size automation Carrier
Route rates may be obtained. The argument that small mailers should not
have to subscribe to the City/State file because this is an unnecessary
and costly burden is not a good one. To qualify for automation Carrier
Route rates, mailers will be required to match their addresses using
CASS-certified software to a current CRIS file or other AIS product
containing carrier route codes within 90 days prior to the date of
mailing. The City/State File is automatically provided with all Address
Information System (AIS) products and must always be used in
conjunction with these AIS products for accurate matching. Accordingly,
obtaining information as to which are the permissible ZIP Codes for
automation Carrier Routes rates can be done at the same time as
addresses are matched to the applicable CRIS, ZIP+4 or other AIS
product that contains carrier route codes. In addition, some presort
software vendors are including a City/State file match as part of the
presort program. Accordingly, the Postal Service does not believe that
use of the City/State file for determining the 5-digit ZIP Code areas
for which automation Carrier Route rates can be obtained will be an
unnecessary or costly burden to mailers. Furthermore, because software
processing using the City/State file and an appropriate database
containing carrier route information is already required for these
mailings, the Postal Service does not believe that publication of the
lists on RIBBS would be beneficial.
Two commenters indicated that the Postal Service should provide an
equipment deployment schedule to mailers that would give mailers
sufficient lead time and would also provide the Postal Service a tool
to make sure that the schedule is followed.
The Postal Service does not plan to publish an equipment deployment
schedule. Knowing when and where equipment is scheduled to be shipped
to a plant will not provide mailers with the information that they are
seeking. Knowing to which location and when a piece of equipment will
be shipped does not equate to having a list of ZIP Codes that will be
processed on that equipment. The 5-digit ZIP Codes that will be
processed on this equipment are determined locally. ZIP Codes being
processed on DBCSs may be shifted to processing on CSBCSs as these
machines are deployed. This in turn will provide the capacity for
additional ZIP Codes to be processed on DBCSs.
[[Page 10085]]
Because procedures will be in place to update the City/State file
on an established bimonthly basis, as to which 5-digit ZIP Codes may
obtain the automation Carrier Route letter rates, and because mailers
can easily incorporate this information in their mailings approximately
every 90 days in connection with the required address matching
standard, the Postal Service does not deem it appropriate to publicly
provide its equipment deployment plans.
e. 5-Digit Scheme Sortation for Automation Letters
Seven commenters responded to the information provided in the
proposed rule that the Postal Service will not provide 5-digit scheme
sortation for letters at the time Classification Reform is implemented.
All seven commenters would like the Postal Service to do so. One
argument for this action is to avoid the need to install a separate and
costly software release to implement it at a later date. Three of these
commenters indicated that having scheme sortation would enable mailers
to qualify more mail for 5-digit automation rates. Two commenters
indicated 5-digit scheme sort would reduce costs for both mailers and
the Postal Service. Two commenters indicated that the volatility of 5-
digit schemes should be no different than the update of the ZIP Codes
eligible for letter automation Carrier Route rates and suggested a
workgroup be formed to discuss obstacles. One commenter similarly
stated that it seems that there are systems in place to handle
volatility of scheme issues.
The Postal Service recognizes that 5-digit scheme sortation will
allow mailers to qualify more mail for 5-digit automation letter rates,
and agrees that it is in the best interest of mailers and the Postal
Service to provide these schemes when practical. As indicated in
comments on automation Carrier Route rates, the Postal Service is
actively deploying CSBCS and DBCS equipment. ZIP Codes being processed
on DBCSs may be shifted to processing on CSBCSs as these machines are
deployed. This in turn will provide the capacity for additional ZIP
Codes to be processed on DBCSs. This volatility will result in frequent
changes to 5-digit schemes being used within local plants in the near
future. Therefore 5-digit scheme sorts will not be implemented at this
time. Given this, the Postal Service does not believe that it would
benefit from forming a workgroup to discuss these matters.
f. 3-Digit Scheme Sort for Letters
Eleven comments were received in response to the provisions for a
3-digit scheme sort for automation letters set forth in the Proposed
rule. All 10 commenters interpreted proposed section DMM M810.1.7 as
requiring all possible 3-digit sorts to be prepared before performing
3-digit scheme sorts and all disagreed with it. One of these commenters
indicated that requiring 3-digit sorts prior to scheme sort would drive
an unacceptable amount of mail into the residual mailstream, both
decreasing mailer discounts and increasing the amount of raw mail
processed by USPS receiving units. Several commenters pointed out that
this information conflicted with the information presented in the
discussion of comments that scheme sorts could be prepared prior to
preparing 3-digit sortations. One commenter asked that we reword the
obvious error in DMM M810.1.7. One commenter stated that if the Postal
Service does require preparation of 3-digit trays prior to preparing 3-
digit scheme trays, that this is contrary to what was agreed to at the
Implementation Advisory Group meetings and also defeats the purpose of
scheme sort by not allowing mailers to merge small quantities of some
scheme 3-digit areas with larger quantities of others in order to meet
a single 150-piece minimum quantity standard for the 3-digit scheme.
The Postal Service acknowledges that the wording of proposed
section DMM M810.1.7 was misleading. This section was intended to give
greater flexibility to mailers and not intended to require that 3-digit
sorts would have had to been prepared prior to preparing 3-digit scheme
sorts. The Postal Service agrees with mailers that this would be
counterproductive, and notes the comment indicating that elimination of
3-digit scheme sort would increase the amount of mail falling into
basic rate levels of sortation.
The Postal Service has re-reviewed comments opposed to requiring
scheme sort that were received in response to the August 30 notice.
Reasons for opposition were either not given (other than to say it
would be a barrier to automation) or were based on desires not to
change current software programs or to be able to use the same software
sortation program for both automation and nonautomation mail. As
pointed out to these mailers in the comments section of the proposed
rule, mailers will be required to change their software because of
major changes under Classification Reform in the way mail is sorted,
including different sortation rules for automation mail and
nonautomation mail.
Accordingly, the Postal Service has revised the DMM language in
this final rule to require use of 3-digit scheme sort. A separate
labeling list in DMM L003 contains the information needed to sort to 3-
digit schemes and to sort non-scheme 3-digit ZIP Codes to direct 3-
digit trays. This will simplify sortation rules to avoid confusion such
as that encountered with the Proposed rule, and also, as pointed out by
a commenter, ensure that mail is sorted to the finest extent possible.
This will also ensure that mailers will qualify the most mail possible
for 3-digit Automation rates.
g. 5-Digit Scheme Sortation for Automation Flats
One commenter indicated a desire for implementation of a 5-digit
scheme sort for automation flats. Five-digit scheme sortation for
automation flats is not foreseeable in the near future. The Postal
Service will look at the feasibility of such sortation after it has
implemented 3-digit scheme sortation for automation flats.
h. 3-Digit Scheme Sort for Flats
Four comments were received concerning provisions for a 3-digit
scheme sort for automation flat mailings. All four expressed a desire
that these schemes be available on the date of implementation because
it will benefit both the Postal Service and mailers. One commenter also
pointed out that it would prevent the cost of installing another
software change if this was implemented on the same date as
Classification Reform.
The Postal Service believes that a 3-digit scheme list for flats is
feasible and has begun work on developing such a sortation scheme.
However, work will not be completed in time to make this available with
Classification Reform implementation. The 3-digit scheme sort for flats
should be available in 1997.
i. Value Added Mailings
Nine comments were received concerning the Postal Service's
proposal to include only pieces with postage affixed at an automation
First-Class or automation Standard Mail rate in mailings presented
under the value added refund (VAR) procedures in DMM P014.4. All nine
commenters strongly disagreed with this proposal and stated that the
original intent of value added refund procedures was to encourage the
upgrading of Presorted First-Class Mail to barcoded mail. Two
commenters pointed out that this was never offered for discussion with
[[Page 10086]]
members of the Implementation Advisory Group. One commenter indicated
that this will reduce the volume of barcoded mail received by the
Postal Service. One commenter indicated that this standard increases
the postage risk of presort bureaus because the bureaus will be
required to affix 5-cent postage to each nonbarcoded piece rather than
2-cents, and it is unlikely the difference could be recovered from the
mailer. One commenter indicated that no mailer would be able to remeter
all the pieces that did not qualify for barcoded rates. Two commenters
indicated that not all pieces coming into their shop will enter into
the automation mailstream. One of these further indicated that this
will cause problems for mailers when doing a handsort on nonautomation
mail.
In response to mailer comments, the Postal Service has determined
to continue to allow mail having postage affixed at the Presorted
First-Class rate or presorted nonautomation Regular Standard rates, to
continue to be mailed under the value added refund program.
j. Optimizing 5-Digit Sortation for Automation Letters
One commenter asked whether mailers would be able to continue to
optimize 5-digit sortation of Automation letters by moving some but not
all pieces able to be sorted to 5-digit trays to 3-digit or 3-digit
scheme trays to bring the total number of pieces sorted to the 3-digit/
scheme destination to the minimum of 150 pieces.
Because 5-digit sortation is optional for Automation mail, mailers
are not required to sort all possible pieces to the 5-digit level.
Accordingly, if a mailer has more than 150 pieces for a 5-digit ZIP
Code destination and fewer than 150 pieces for a 3-digit or 3-digit
scheme destination, mailers will be permitted to move pieces that
potentially could have been sorted to 5-digit destinations to a 3-
digit/scheme level of sortation. Each 5-digit destination would have to
be left with a minimum of 150 pieces trayed to that destination and
each 3-digit/scheme destination would also have to have a minimum of
150 pieces trayed to that destination. Furthermore, the pieces that
could have been placed in a 5-digit tray but were actually placed in a
3-digit or 3-digit scheme tray would have to be documented and reported
as qualifying for 3-digit automation rates.
k. Grouping of Pieces in AADC and Mixed AADC Trays in Automation Letter
Mailings
One commenter requested that this standard be dropped because it
would be impractical to sort mail within AADC and mixed AADC trays into
3-digit or AADC groups in his MLOCR operation. This commenter indicated
that if the MLOCR determines on the first pass that there are fewer
than 150 pieces for a particular 3-digit ZIP Code, then, on the second
pass groups with fewer than 150 pieces for a 3-digit or 3-digit scheme
will be aggregated to appropriate AADC or mixed AADC bins. Imposing the
standard for ZIP Code sortation within the AADC and mixed AADC trays
would require costly and time-consuming additional presort passes on
this mail to sort it into 3-digit sequence.
The Postal Service maintains that for mailers using presort
software, or even sorting manually, it should not be a burden to
maintain 3-digit/scheme groupings when placing mail in AADC trays or to
maintain groupings by AADC within mixed AADC trays. However, the Postal
Service acknowledges that this could be problematic for some MLOCR
users depending upon how mail is sorted to bins on the second pass. The
Postal Service is retaining this standard because it allows mailings to
be easily matched to standardized documentation during verification, or
if weigh verification is used, to determine that mail is presorted to
the finest extent possible. However, the Postal Service will waive this
standard for MLOCR users who submit standardized documentation.
In addition, the Postal Service has reviewed its need for pieces
within mixed AADC trays grouped by AADC to be further subgrouped by 3-
digit ZIP Code within each AADC group. This 3-digit subgrouping would
also be burdensome to MLOCR users sorting to AADC bins. Also,
documentation of these 3-digit subgroupings within mixed AADC trays
could potentially require a mailer to list every 3-digit ZIP Code in
the country. The Postal Service has determined that the added length to
required documentation and added sortation complexity is not outweighed
by the gains in ease of verification. Accordingly, the final
implementing DMM language will require only grouping by AADCs within
mixed AADC trays.
l. Numeric ZIP Code Standard for Automation Letter Mail
One commenter questioned the meaning of proposed DMM E241.1.1c that
required Regular Periodicals barcoded letter rate mail to ``Bear a
delivery address that includes the correct numeric ZIP+4 or 5-digit ZIP
Code (or, only if prepared with a delivery point barcode (DPBC), the
numeric equivalent to the DPBC).'' This commenter asked whether this
section meant that the entire DPBC numeric must be printed in front of
the delivery point barcode as part of the ZIP Code correction process
allowed MLOCR mailers.
This standard means only that each piece in an automation mailing
must bear a numeric ZIP Code in the address and that this ZIP Code can
be either a 5-digit, ZIP+4, or delivery point numeric ZIP Code at the
choice of the mailer, with the exception that a delivery point numeric
code is only permitted on pieces bearing a delivery point barcode.
m. Request for Elimination of Required Tray Sortation Level
One commenter wanted to begin sortation at the AADC tray level if
the cost of manual presortation was found to be higher than the savings
from sorting mail to qualify for 3/5 rates and 3- and 5-digit
automation rates.
The presort rates are based on presorting mail to the finest extent
possible, with the exception that 5-digit trays are optional for
automation rate letters and for the upgradable presort option for
nonautomation letters. Accordingly, mailers will be required to prepare
3-digit trays of automation letter mail any time there are at least 150
pieces for a 3-digit ZIP Code before preparing AADC trays. Similarly,
for upgradable Presorted First-Class and upgradable nonautomation
Regular Standard Mail preparation, 3-digit trays will be required any
time there are at least 150 pieces for a 3-digit ZIP Code prior to
preparing AADC trays. For all other mailings, preparation of all
possible 5-digit trays and 3-digit trays is required prior to preparing
ADC trays.
n. ACT Tags
Two comments were received in response to the Postal Service's
removal of the standard for mailers to apply ACT tags to trays of
automation First-Class letters. One commenter applauded the decision to
drop this standard. One commenter pointed out that current DMM
P014.4.14c requires mailers to sleeve, band, and ACT tag all trays in a
mailing for which a value added refund (VAR) request will be submitted.
The commenter requested that the Postal Service remove this standard
from the DMM.
The DMM language in this final rule removes the requirement for use
of ACT tags within VAR mailings. However, mailers participating in
other special programs such as multiple acceptance times may still be
required to prepare mail with ACT tags.
[[Page 10087]]
3. Letter Mail
a. Standard To Prepare All Letter Mail in Trays
Eight commenters responded to the Postal Service's proposal to
require preparation of all letter mail entered at reformed subclasses
in trays. Six of the comments were opposed to this standard for
Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail. Two were opposed to it as a
standard for any letter mail, and one was concerned about the
availability of trays.
Three commenters indicated the traying standards would result in
higher preparation costs for their mailings and loss of cube on
trailers for drop shipment. One of these commenters indicated that this
standard and others led to a net loss for his company despite the
decrease in Automation rates. Two commenters indicated that since the
attributable costs underlying the proposed Enhanced Carrier Route rates
were based on flat-sized mail, and therefore letter-size mail is paying
a higher rate, letter mailers should have the option of traying or
sacking this mail. One commenter stated that heavy letters, which are
not automation-compatible due to weight, would be more efficiently
handled in sacks since more pieces could fit into a sack than in a tray
resulting in fewer containers for the Postal Service and mailers to
handle. One commenter stated the Postal Service should be prepared to
allow optional forms of preparation such as bundles on pallets in the
event of tray shortages. Another commenter stated that Enhanced Carrier
Route letter mail should be allowed to be prepared as packages on
pallets provided such preparation is limited to 5-digit pallets. This
commenter believed this limited packages on pallets preparation would
not have a great impact on handling for the Postal Service and would
alleviate the demand for trays.
Trays are the most efficient method of containerizing letter mail
for the Postal Service. Since the Postal Service prepares letter mail
in trays, it is important that all mailer prepared letter mail be
prepared in trays. Accordingly, the DMM standards set forth in this
final rule require that all letter mail, except for Nonprofit Standard
and Preferred Periodicals, be prepared in trays. It should also be
clarified that although encouraged, it is not required that Standard or
Periodicals letters prepared in trays be palletized. Mailers will be
permitted to bedload trays of letter mail. However, if a mailer wants
to palletize Standard letter mail, it must be prepared in trays on
pallets, with one short-time exception. If, as described in the section
on flat-size mail, the letter-size piece also meets the definition of
an automation-compatible flat, and a portion of the mailing job is
mailed at the automation Regular Standard flats rate, until January 1,
1997, all the pieces in the mailing job may be prepared in packages
placed directly on pallets provided all pieces pay the applicable rates
as a flat-size piece and the amount of nonautomation Regular Standard
mail palletized in this manner does not exceed 10% of the amount of
Enhanced Carrier Route and Automation Regular Standard mail in the
mailing job. After January 1, 1997, all letter mail, other than letter
mail meeting the dimensions of an automation flat and mailed at those
rates, must be prepared in trays and preferably in trays on pallets.
The Postal Service acknowledges that trayed mail can sometimes fill
trailers more quickly than the same amount of mail prepared in sacks,
and that the number of pieces that can be placed in a trailer might
affect a mailer's decision as to whether to prepare mail for
destination entry discounts. The standard to use both 1-foot and 2-foot
trays will aid in assuring the most efficient use of trailer space
under the traying environment. As indicated in response to a previous
comment, the Postal Service recognizes that many mailers will be
affected by start-up costs for new preparation criteria and possibly
some additional ongoing costs. However, the Postal Service believes
that these preparation criteria are necessary to achieve one of the
goals of Classification Reform of encouraging mail that is most
efficient for the Postal Service to handle.
One commenter indicated that they now prepare letter mail in sacks
in which they mix letter-size and flat-size mail (this mail is a flat
only because it exceeds \1/4\-inch in thickness). This mailer indicated
that the standard to tray letters and sack flats will be a problem for
them causing their mailstream to be split four ways (barcoded vs.
nonbarcoded and trayed vs. sacked). One commenter stated if they could
not sack their letters they would like to tray their flats so their
automated handling systems could handle only one type of equipment.
Similarly, one commenter requested the ability to place automation
Standard flats in flats trays since it is not efficient to prepare both
barcoded tray labels and barcoded sack labels.
Currently, mailers are not permitted to mix mail of different mail
processing categories in the same mailing, except for limited
circumstances under which mailers may combine machinable and irregular
parcels. The standard for separate mailings for separate mail
processing categories will continue under Classification Reform.
Letters and flats are handled under two separate mail processing
streams and must not be merged together in the same mailing. Under
Classification Reform, mail exceeding \1/4\ of an inch in thickness and
classified as a flat will therefore be required to be sacked or
prepared as packages on pallets. The Postal Service also will not
permit flat mail to be prepared in letter trays due to the strong
chance this mail will be directed to letter sorting operations where
such pieces will not process on mechanized or automation letter sorting
equipment. As indicated in the last two notices, Standard flats will
not be permitted to be prepared in flats trays upon implementation of
Classification Reform. The Postal Service plans to initially limit the
use of these trays to First-Class flats to allow for a more gradual
change to a future operating environment in which all flat mail will be
prepared in trays (except for Standard Mail and Periodicals prepared as
packages on pallets). Currently, the Postal Service processes First-
Class flats in trays. Generally, flats trays are better handled at
processing and distribution center facilities and Airmail Facilities
than sacks which are more conducive to BMC processing. At processing
and distribution center facilities and at AMFs the Postal Service has
tray handling systems. When barcoded flat mail is distributed on flat
sorting machines using the barcode, there are instances were the flat
mail is dispatched in flat trays to the next handling or destination
regardless of class. Therefore, it is likely that as part of
transitioning all classes of flats mail to tray preparation, allowing
automation-compatible (barcoded) flat mail in trays would be the next
step, albeit a future step.
b. 150-Piec
FR Doc. 96-5500 Classification Reform; Implementation Standards
e/Full Tray Standard
Twenty-two commenters responded to the Postal Service's proposal to
require 150 pieces per 5-digit ZIP Code or 3-digit ZIP Code destination
to qualify for 5-digit or 3-digit automation rates, and to be used as
the basis for sorting to 5-digit, 3-digit and AADC trays. Six of these
commenters also voiced concern over the standard for 150 pieces per 3-
digit ZIP Code area being the basis for rate qualification and
sortation for the 3/5-digit nonautomation Regular Standard rates.
Nine commenters cited specific examples of rate degradation in the
automation rate categories and four commenters were concerned about
rate degradation in the 3/5-digit
[[Page 10088]]
nonautomation Regular Standard rate categories. These commenters
indicated that the 150-piece minimum would cause varying percentages of
their mail to drop from 5-digit to 3-digit, or from 3-digit to basic
within the automation rates, or from 3/5-digit to basic in the
nonautomation Regular Standard rates. Most of these commenters had
concerns regarding the shift in rate qualifications based on a
comparison of the qualification criteria under the current 10-piece/50-
piece minimums to qualify for current barcoded rates or the current
125-piece/15-pound criteria to qualify for current 3/5-digit non-
automation rates and the new 150-piece qualification rules.
One commenter indicated that because the proposed automation rates
were slightly lower than current rates the rate impact might balance
out for the barcoded portion of the mailing, but that since the rates
for nonbarcoded mail were increasing, it would raise their total
postage bill. Two commenters stated that the 150-piece rule would have
a big impact on 5-digit rate qualifications, one indicating all his
current 5-digit mail will move to the 3-digit qualification level
resulting in a 3% postage increase. The other indicated that the 150-
piece standard at the 5-digit level would force many mailers into
moving their mail into the Enhanced Carrier Route subclass since they
may have many carrier routes that will meet the 10-piece package
minimum, but very few groups of 150-pieces to a particular 5-digit ZIP
Code. One commenter indicated that modeling based on the 150-piece
criteria showed that some of his third-class customers would pay higher
rates under Classification Reform even though their lists were close to
100% barcoded. One commenter indicated they will probably discontinue
preparation of 5-digit sortations in order to be able to continue
qualifying mail for the 3-digit level, and that this degradation of
presort seems counter-productive to the Postal Service.
Other commenters had further concerns over the rate implications
for mail that could physically fill trays but would not meet the 150-
piece standard. Sixteen commenters in total requested that the Postal
Service allow mailers two choices to qualify for rates, one based upon
physically full trays without regard to the number of pieces within
them, and the other the proposed 150-piece minimum. These commenters
indicated that enforcement of the 150-piece standard will cause a
tremendous hardship on the ability of mailers of thicker pieces to
discount mail. One commenter stated he thought the idea was to fill
trays. Six commenters further requested that the physically full tray
option allow full 1-foot trays to qualify for rates without regard to
number of pieces. Two commenters indicated a physically full tray
criteria for rates and sortation would promote tray usage efficiencies.
One commenter stated that the definition of a full tray should be 85%
full because this is flexible enough to allow mailers to calculate the
number of pieces needed to fill a tray and would resolve mailer
consternation over near misses such as 130 pieces filling a tray but
not being eligible for a rate. Two commenters believed the Postal
Service should perform market surveys to gather data on mail volume
characteristics to assess the impact of the 150-piece minimum on its
customers.
Some of these commenters provided statistics on the number of
pieces that would fill trays as requested by the Postal Service in the
proposed rule. One commenter indicated they had pieces for which 47 to
65 pieces would fill a 1-foot tray. Five commenters cited pieces that
would fill two-foot trays ranging from as few as 63 pieces upwards to
140 pieces per tray. One commenter pointed out that by his estimate
``heavy'' letter mail, weighing up to 3.4383, which will be permitted
to qualify for letter-size barcoded rates under Classification Reform,
would generally average 125 pieces per 2-foot tray. Another commenter
also noted the Postal Service's provisions for including ``heavy
weight'' mail in the Automation mailstream and indicated this will
``probably encourage a growing volume of such letters that fill trays
in less quantity than lighter weight mail.'' Another commenter pointed
out that allowing an option to base the qualification and sortation on
a physically full tray would allow more opportunity for larger size
pieces that meet both the letter size dimensions and the automated flat
dimensions to be prepared as a barcoded letter.
Two commenters also stated that basing the traying criteria on the
150-piece minimum could result in service degradation since much mail
now trayed to the 5-digit or 3-digit level will drop down to the AADC
level. Two other commenters indicated that this drop in sortation level
will result in more residual or mixed AADC mail to be processed by the
Postal Service at the local SCF because some mail currently placed in
AADC trays will not be able to meet the 150-piece standard and will
subsequently be trayed at the mixed AADC level. These commenters
questioned whether the Postal Service could handle this volume and
questioned whether requiring a move from an AADC tray to a mixed AADC
tray made any sense from a mail processing standpoint.
One commenter stated that basing rates on the average number of
pieces that fill a 1-foot tray makes sense only if adequate supplies of
1-foot trays are available and was concerned that if they were not and
overflow had to be placed in a 2-foot tray it would result in loss of
cube space for drop shipment purposes.
One commenter questioned whether the 150-piece rule applied to
postcards since 150 postcards equals only about 4 inches of mail.
One commenter stated his thickness varies and in many instances 150
pieces will not fit in a single tray. Another indicated that sometimes
he produces sub-150-piece count trays containing mail of varying
thicknesses under a manifesting agreement. This commenter indicated
that because he manifests he cannot arbitrarily move mail around to
fill trays. One commenter indicated that at only 125-140 pieces per
tray none of this mail would qualify and the customer would have to
revise their mailing package which could result in losing sales.
Several commenters who advocate addition of an ``or full tray''
criteria to the qualifications for First-Class and Standard Regular
Automation mail and to Standard Regular Nonautomation mail, challenged
the reasons given by the Postal Service in the Proposed rule for
keeping the standard at 150 pieces. Four commenters indicated that
having an option to base discounts on full tray should not complicate
acceptance too much since mailers are currently preparing and
documenting this mail now under tray-based rules and the Postal Service
is currently accepting it.
Five commenters responded to the Postal Service's statement that if
a physically-full tray qualification criteria were instituted, it would
be based on a physically full 2-foot tray rather than a one-foot tray.
These commenters stated this makes no sense since the Postal Service is
basing the 150-piece rule on a one-foot tray. Three of these commenters
stated this would be unfair since it would require these mailers to
make twice as many trays to achieve equal qualification levels.
One commenter stated that allowing physically full trays to qualify
without a piece limit does not make sense from a unit (per piece) cost
or gross profit standpoint in that the Postal Service would have to
transport up to six trays of thicker Standard Mail for every one tray
of First-Class Mail, and would receive less revenue for the Standard
Mail.
[[Page 10089]]
One mailer of Standard pieces indicated that it appears the 150-
piece standard was designed primarily for MLOCR barcode sorter users.
This commenter indicated that since 90% of mailers do not use barcode
sorters, this reasoning should not apply to them. One commenter simply
stated that the level playing field argument does not make sense.
Four commenters challenged the Postal Service's argument that the
150-piece minimum per 3-digit area to be applied to nonautomation
Regular Standard Mail will not keep qualification levels equivalent to
today arguing that today mail can qualify based on either 125 pieces or
15 pounds of mail. Two commenters gave examples wherein their mailings
currently require only 75 pieces or 80 pieces to meet the 15-pound
minimum. These mailers indicated that the 150-piece rule will either
double or increase by 78% the number of pieces they will need to
qualify for the 3/5 rate. These commenters also pointed out that the
dual standard of 200 pieces or 50 pounds still applies as the minimum
quantity standard for each Standard mailing.
The Postal Service believes that applying a 150-piece minimum to an
entire 3-digit area to qualify for 3/5 nonautomation Regular Standard
rates will, on average, result in comparable or better rate
qualifications when compared to current qualification criteria, even
for heavier pieces of mail. Currently, the 125-piece/15-pound sacking
rules are applied separately to 5-digit sacks and to 3-digit sacks. The
two commenters with pieces meeting the 15 pound requirement with 75 to
80 pieces of mail to an individual 5-digit or 3-digit sack, would still
be able to meet the 150-piece requirement per 3-digit area in instances
where they had an equivalent number of pieces that are now contained in
two 5-digit sacks for the same 3-digit area, or in other combinations
of 5-digit and 3-digit sacks for the same 3-digit area. Mailers who
currently qualify for this rate based on a separate 125-piece
requirement should, on average, be able to qualify more mail for 3/5
rates since the 150-piece rule applies to an entire 3-digit area and
not to individual 5-digit or 3-digit trays.
The Postal Service would like to point out to the two commenters
who were concerned that they could not qualify for automation rates
based on the 150-piece rule because they could not fit 150 pieces in a
single tray, that the Postal Service has provided for overflow trays
wherever it has established a 150-piece minimum. This means that if a
mailer has 150 pieces for a given sortation level, the mail will
qualify for the rate regardless of the number of trays it takes to tray
the mail to that sortation level. Likewise, for thinner pieces, if the
150 piece minimum for a rate level is met, the mail will qualify for
that rate even if 150 pieces does not fill a tray.
The rate design approved for automation letters provides reduced
rates for these mailings. Those rates are based in part on more
stringent preparation standards that allow more efficient Postal
Service processing of that mail. Under the Automation Standard Mail (A)
letter rates, certain mailers could experience a minor increase in
postage over what they pay today given a number of assumptions, such as
that all mail not eligible for an automation carrier route rate moves
to the 3-digit barcoded rate level, and that there are no basic
automation rate pieces in the mailing. This hypothetical postage
increase would also be offset by any pieces which the mailer now
qualifies for basic rates, because there is a significant decrease in
the basic automation rates under Classification Reform.
Overall, the Postal Service believes that the automation letter
discount levels and preparation standards will lower postage bills for
automation mailings for most mailers of all three classes. Under
current Barcoded rate mailing rules, a large portion of mail qualifying
for 5-digit and 3-digit rates is already prepared in full 2-foot trays
without packages. Because the 150-piece standard is based on a 1-foot
tray, most mailers should be able to place even more mail in full 5-
digit and 3-digit trays under this standard.
The 150-piece minimum represents an average of the average number
of First-Class pieces that can fill three-fourths of a 1-foot tray and
the average number of Standard letter-size pieces that can fill three-
fourths of a 1-foot tray. This 150-piece average is applied uniformly
to all letter mail classes for purposes of determining rate
qualification and for determining when to prepare a particular
sortation level of tray for automation presort in the final DMM
standards published in the latter part of this rule. The purpose of the
standard is to apply rates to tray levels and to eliminate as much as
possible the preparation of packages for automation mail. Basing the
standard on an average number of pieces it takes too fill a 1-foot tray
also provides the opportunity for the Postal Service to increase the
number of pieces sorted to 5-digit and 3-digit destinations for the
vast majority of letter mail.
The Postal Service reiterates that it also desires to apply rates
on an equal basis to all mailers. The application of the 150-piece rule
allows mailers of postcard-size or other thin pieces to qualify for
rates in the same way that thicker pieces can qualify, and in the same
way as the vast majority of mail in the middle of this spectrum. Since
the 150-piece standard is based on an average of averages for First-
Class and Standard Mail, the Postal Service believes this standard is
equitable for both classes of mail. Moreover, the rates being
implemented are based on cost and volume figures that relied on the
150-piece criteria.
The Postal Service recognizes that pieces exist that can fill trays
with fewer than 150 pieces and that mailers of these pieces may not be
able to qualify as many pieces for 5-digit and 3-digit automation rates
under a 150-piece rule as they would under a physically full tray rule.
However, these mailers will not experience any more of a rate
degradation than will any other letter mailer at automation rates.
Testing with heavy letters has shown the Postal Service that heavier
pieces reduce automation productivity. Thicker pieces also result in
more tray handlings for the Postal Service, and increased use of cube
in its transportation systems, as compared to an equal number of
thinner pieces. It is noted that all but one of the commenters
requesting application of rates based on physically full trays were
Standard rate mailers. Standard Mail postage does not increase with
weight as does First-Class Mail, which means the same minimum piece
postage will be received regardless of the thickness of the pieces, up
to the minimum per piece rate weight breakpoint. Accordingly, if the
Postal Service allowed these thicker pieces to obtain rates at
quantities of less than 150 pieces, the Postal Service would be
granting a rate break to mail that will cost it more to process.
Although the Postal Service has permitted heavier weight pieces to
qualify for automation rates, we do not feel it is in our best interest
to encourage mailers to increase the thickness of their pieces in order
to lower their rate qualification thresholds. One commenter indicated
he could fill a 1-foot tray with as few as 47 pieces. It would be hard
to justify to the commenters to this rule who were concerned about rate
degradation in terms of moving from a 50-piece per 3-digit
qualification standard to a 150-piece qualification standard, why we
were allowing a mailer of thicker pieces (and therefore more expensive
to process) to qualify even fewer pieces
[[Page 10090]]
than are required today (47) for a 3-digit rate, while maintaining that
they must continue to meet the 150-piece rule to qualify.
The Postal Service recognizes that the 150-piece sortation rules,
when applied to pieces that fill 1-foot or 2-foot trays with fewer than
150 pieces may result in instances where mail ends up not being sorted
to as fine a level as if a full tray rule were instituted. By the same
token, the Postal Service will be obtaining finer levels of sortation
through use of the 150-piece rule from thinner pieces. On average, the
Postal Service feels that the 150-piece rule will provide a good level
of sortation for most mail. In the past the Postal Service has
attempted to fine-tune mailing standards and rates to meet the needs of
a variety of unusual mailpieces that constitute a small percentage of
the mailstream. The result was a Domestic Mail Manual and rate schedule
that led to public outcries for ``simpler rules.'' As indicated in past
notices and proposals, another benefit to having only one set of
preparation criteria is simplicity. Currently the Postal Service
provides three different types of sortation for barcoded letter mail.
It strongly wants to maintain only one type of preparation under
Classification Reform. Classification Reform to a great extent is about
simpler preparation rules, and the Postal Service has determined to
keep it that way. Therefore, the final rules in this notice retain the
150-piece rules and do not permit qualification for rates based on an
indeterminate number of pieces that would produce a physically full
tray.
c. Overflow Trays
One commenter disagreed with the Postal Service's proposal to
require use of overflow trays in those instances where the 150-piece
rule is applied. The Postal Service is retaining this rule in order to
ensure that mail is sorted to the finest extent possible.
d. Use of both 1-foot and 2-foot trays
Fifteen commenters responded to the Postal Service's proposal to
require letter-size mailings to be prepared in a combination of 1-foot
and 2-foot trays in a manner that will result in the fewest number of
trays. Seven commenters stated that use of two sizes of tray should be
left to the mailer's discretion in that it will be in the mailer's
interest as well to use the fewest number of trays. Three of these
commenters indicated that the Postal Service could re-evaluate making
this a standard at a later date if it finds mailers are not preparing
mail in an economical fashion. Five commenters had concerns about
pallet preparation in that use of two sizes of tray could lead to
unstable shipments. One of these commenters requested that all 1-foot
or all 2-foot trays be permitted for purposes of building pallets. Five
commenters were opposed to this standard stating it will create a very
difficult manufacturing operation to manage and will cause significant
production costs. One of these commenters indicated it will eliminate
his ability to automate the sleeving and banding process and doubles
the capital and space needed. Two commenters were concerned whether the
Postal Service will have adequate supplies of the different sizes of
trays. One of these commenters was particularly concerned about the
availability of extended mail trays. This mailer indicated difficulties
in obtaining adequate quantities of extended mail trays now and asked
the Postal Service to indicate the steps it is taking to ensure
adequate supplies since moving mail from extended mail trays to
standard letter trays jeopardizes their mail production strategy.
Another commenter similarly stated that shortages of 1-foot trays that
would result in mailers having to use only 2-foot trays in their
mailings would result in problems in determining drop shipment loads
and would increase cube space needed on transportation. One commenter
stated required use of both 1-foot and 2-foot trays will be a barrier
to mailers preparing Automation mail.
The 150-piece minimum quantity to qualify for automation letter
rates is based on the preparation of average size pieces in a 1-foot
tray in order to make it easier for mailers to qualify for those rates,
and to provide more full trays to direct destinations thereby lessening
any loss of presort to the Postal Service. In order to increase the
number of direct trays to sortation destinations for all letter
mailings, the proposed DMM language would require use of both 1-foot
and 2-foot trays for all mailings of letter-size pieces in all reformed
subclasses. The Postal Service does not want to potentially double its
number of tray handlings by allowing a mailing to be prepared entirely
in 1-foot trays. Also, the Postal Service does not want to increase
transportation costs by shipping an increased number of less-than-full
2-foot trays. Accordingly, the standard to use both 1-foot and 2-foot
trays where appropriate is considered necessary by the Postal Service.
The final DMM language contained herein requires mailers to fill as
many 2-foot trays as possible before filling 1-foot trays.
The Postal Service recognizes that this standard will cause mailers
to make major changes to their production lines and to maintain a
supply of both 1-foot and 2-foot trays. It is believed that presort
software developed to accommodate the Classification Reform presort
structure will include mail documentation that provides information as
to what size tray mail should be placed in as well as indicating where
the tray breaks are. If this type of software is used it may not be
necessary to create two separate production lines for the different
tray sizes. The Postal Service is anticipating the increased need for
both sizes of trays and has purchased additional supplies. In addition
the Postal Service is continuing to review the need to purchase more
trays. If local shortages of a particular size tray develop, mailers
will have to tray using the tray size that the Postal Service provides.
For example, if only 2-foot trays are provided, all mail would be
placed in 2-foot trays. If only 1-foot trays are provided, the entire
mailing would be placed in 1-foot trays. This may require working out
individual mailing solutions locally.
Mailers must use their own judgment when building pallets of trays
containing both sizes of trays. The elimination of the proposal to
require separate layers of trays on pallets for different mailings
should help mailers to build stable pallets. An exception is that
pieces at automation rates must not be combined with mail at
nonautomation rates on 5-digit pallets. The standard to place
destination delivery unit trays on the top of the pallet has also been
eliminated. Accordingly, mailers may build pallets of trays based
solely on the weight of the trays (heavier trays must be on the bottom)
and the pallet destination.
Since mailers will be required to use a combination of 1-foot and
2-foot trays for all letter mail, including presorted nonautomation
mailings, the Postal Service does not agree that this standard will be
a barrier to automation.
e. Tray Sleeving and Strapping
Six commenters responded to the Postal Service's proposal to
require that all trays used to prepare letter-size mailings be both
sleeved and strapped with limited exceptions for mail destined for the
service area of the entry post office and an exception to strapping
only for trays contained on 5-digit, 3-digit, and SCF pallets. Two
commenters requested that the Postal Service eliminate this standard
because it requires a private equipment purchase on the part of
mailer's and an increase
[[Page 10091]]
in their processing burdens. These commenters pointed out that the
Postal Service already has adequate capacity to strap all outgoing
trays, and one suggested that the Postal Service use stretchwrapped
pallets in its outgoing processing of mail to decrease its own need for
strapped trays. Two commenters requested that the Postal Service delay
implementation of this standard to allow mailers time to purchase and
install strapping equipment, one suggesting at least a 6-month delay.
Two commenters pointed out a discrepancy between the language in the
comments section of page 66595, section p, proposed DMM M045.5.5 (which
implied mail on any stretchwrapped pallet was exempt from strapping
standards), and the lack of changes to P014.4.14c which requires all
trayed mail submitted under value added refund procedures be both
sleeved and strapped.
The Postal Service will require sleeving and strapping of all trays
of mail prepared under all reformed subclasses, with the exception that
mail entered within the service area of an SCF which is for delivery
within the SCF area may obtain a local exception to the tray strapping
standard, and that strapping of individual trays placed on
stretchwrapped 5-digit, 3-digit, and SCF pallets will not be required.
All trays in all circumstances will be required to be sleeved. Mail
transported without first being sleeved is susceptible to spillage and
damage during transportation and handling. This is especially true for
automation mail in which full trays will not contain banded packages. A
strap around the tray is also necessary to maintain the integrity of
the tray and its contents during transportation and handling. For
example, because trays of mail sorted in a BMC move on belts and down
chutes during mechanized distribution, sleeves that are not strapped to
trays could slide off and the contents of the tray could spill. Trays
transported by air are handled in many different ways and also need to
be strapped to maintain their integrity. Because local mail is not
subject to the same type or amount of transportation as other mail, an
exception may be made for the strapping of this mail, however, it has
been determined that sleeving will still be necessary.
For palletized mailings, sleeving will be required for all trays,
but strapping will be required only for trays placed on ADC, ASF, BMC,
mixed ADC, and Mixed BMC pallets. These pallets must be broken down and
the trays further transported before reaching the local SCF or plant
and accordingly must be strapped to maintain their integrity during
handling and transportation.
The discrepancies in the DMM language contained in the proposed
rule have been corrected in this final rule to reflect the above
policy, which will apply to all mail including that prepared under
value added refund provisions.
The Postal Service will require sleeving and strapping effective
July 1, 1996. A major element of the Postal Service's Classification
Reform initiative is to remove costs from the postal processing system,
thereby enabling rates to remain stable for longer periods of time.
Accordingly, the Postal Service believes implementation of this
standard at the time Classification Reform is appropriate.
f. Elimination of 3-Digit Carrier Routes Trays.
One commenter stated that the Postal Service may be seriously
underestimating the number of 1-bundle trays that will be created by
elimination of 3-digit trays for barcoded carrier route mail. This
mailer indicated that he currently prepares a lot of 3-digit trays
which each contain only a few carrier route bundles for different 5-
digit areas. He indicated that almost every bundle currently in 3-digit
carrier routes trays will be required to be prepared in a separate 1-
bundle, 1-foot tray upon implementation of Classification Reform. He
believes these trays will be a problem to both mailers and the Postal
Service in terms of the increase in the number of trays needed to
prepare a mailing, and the resultant increase in the amount of air
being shipped in those trays which will impact drop shipment efforts.
The Postal Service recognizes that elimination of 3-digit carrier
routes trays will increase the total number of trays needed to prepare
the carrier route portion of automation First-Class mailings and to
prepare Enhanced Carrier Route mailings. However, preparation of
carrier route mail in direct carrier route or 5-digit carrier routes
trays will eliminate the breakdown and distribution of 3-digit carrier
routes trays at the plant level. This means trays can be routed
directly to the appropriate piece of automated equipment, or to the
postal facility where the carriers are located, without costly and time
consuming resorting of the mail in 3-digit trays. The use of 1-foot
trays for those 5-digit areas having only a few or one carrier route
package should eliminate a lot of the air being shipped both by mailers
and the Postal Service. Mailers will need to make their own cost-
benefit analyses concerning whether drop shipment will be beneficial to
them. The Postal Service has increased its procurement of 1-foot trays
in order to meet the anticipated demand under Classification Reform.
g. Banding Material for Package Preparation
Five commenters responded to the proposed standards that would
prohibit use of string or plastic strapping for preparation of packages
in less-than-full trays of automation mailings, and would require use
of separator cards in lieu of any banding material in full 5-digit
carrier routes trays within automation First-Class and automation
Enhanced Carrier Route mailings. Five commenters were opposed to the
prohibition of string or plastic banding on automation mail, and one
other to the prohibition against plastic strapping only. One commenter
indicted it would cost him $150,000 to replace tying machines, and that
he can't use rubber bands because of carpal tunnel syndrome complaints
from his employees. One commenter was concerned primarily because it is
problematic to have several different standards for different mailings
within the same mailing job, such as in some places it is required to
use separator cards, in some instances they are prohibited, sometimes
rubber bands are required, and sometimes string and plastic strapping
is required. This commenter would like the standards to be consistent
for all mailings since having different standards causes mailer
operational problems in terms of supply inventories, training,
processing, and quality checking. One commenter indicated that the
rules are not clear and appear to be contradictory in different places
in the proposed DMM language.
The standards for preparing packages or group separations for
First-Class, Regular Standard, Enhanced Carrier Route Standard, and
Regular Periodicals are contained in DMM M020.3.0. The Postal Service
has determined to continue to allow packages in automation related
mailings (automation First-Class, automation Regular Standard,
automation Enhanced Carrier Route Standard, and automation Regular
Periodicals, as well as upgradable Presorted First-Class and upgradable
nonautomation Regular Standard Mail), to be prepared using either
rubber bands, elastic strapping, plastic strapping, or string. However,
preparation using rubber bands or elastic strapping is optimal for
efficient Postal Service handling of the aforementioned automation-
related mailings because this material is quick and easy to remove and
eliminates the
[[Page 10092]]
debris created by removal of string and plastic strapping. Accordingly,
the Postal Service encourages mailers to prepare letter-size mailings
using rubber bands or elastic strapping under Classification Reform and
plans at some future point to institute this standard for automation
and upgradable mailings. The Postal Service will work with mailers on
the timing of making rubber bands a requirement.
In certain locations the Postal Service may take 5-digit carrier
routes trays and sort them using automated equipment to individual
carrier routes for subsequent DPS sequencing on CSBCS equipment.
Accordingly, the Postal Service is retaining the standard to prepare
full 5-digit carrier routes trays within automation mailings with
separator cards. However banding material must be used in all other
instances where packaging is required, (less-than-full trays or any
trays consisting entirely of postcard-size pieces within automation and
upgradable mailings, and all packages prepared for presorted
nonautomation letters and all presorted flats).
h. Machinability (Automation-Compatible) Standards
One commenter requested that the Postal Service relax its
machinability standards (as they relate to automation mailings) to
allow more mailers to prepare automation mail.
The Postal Service cannot spontaneously relax machinability
standards. The current standards are based on the type of mail that is
capable of being processed on currently available Postal Service MLOCR
and barcode sorting equipment.
i. Standards for Upgradable Mail
One commenter would like to see handwritten mail permitted to be
prepared under the upgradable option for nonautomation Presorted First-
Class and nonautomation Regular Standard Mail.
The upgradable option for nonautomation mail is for mail that has a
high likelihood of being read by current optical character readers
(OCRs). The Postal Service does not at this time wish to extend the
upgradable preparation option to mail that would require more costly
RBCS processing.
4. Flat Mail
a. Palletization Sortation Standards
Three comments were received in regard to the new palletization
make-up standards that: contained revised levels of pallet sortation,
and added a standard that all mail presented on pallets be sorted to
pallets to the finest extent possible. One commenter indicated support
of the standard allowing 10% of the total pallets to be working pallets
since it will eliminate most sacks and thereby streamline production
lines and improve the quality of mailpieces. One commenter requested
clarification as to whether automation Standard trayed letter mail
would be required to be sorted to SCF and BMC pallets, and if so would
they still be eligible for destination BMC/SCF discounts. One commenter
stated the new preparation standards are a rate increase without a rate
case due to the need for new software and more labor by mailers.
If presented to the Postal Service on pallets, trayed automation
Standard letter mail will be required to be sorted to SCF and BMC
pallets (and ASF pallets if drop shipment rates are claimed at ASFs).
Up to 10% of the mail on these pallets could be submitted on Mixed BMC
pallets. Trayed mail on SCF pallets will be eligible for SCF discounts
if entered at the SCF facility, and carrier route, 5-digit carrier
routes, 5-digit, 3-digit and ADC or AADC trays for destinations within
the service area of the BMC or ASF will be eligible for BMC discounts
if entered at the BMC or ASF. Determination of BMC rate eligibility for
all mail in AADC trays and for all mail in ADC trays, sacks, or
packages placed on pallets, will be made based upon whether the ADC or
AADC 3-digit ZIP Code that appears on the top line of the tray or sack
label in DMM L004 (or the ZIP Code assigned to the ADC in DMM L004 for
the package) is within the BMC service area.
As pointed out in previous notices, although there is a standard to
prepare letter-size mail in trays, there is no standard to place those
trays on pallets. However, if mailers choose to palletize trays of
letter-size mail, the trays must be palletized according to the
sortation standards set forth in DMM M040.
The standard to sort all mail placed on pallets rather than
submitting unsorted mail on working pallets is necessary for efficient
Postal Service operations. Receiving unsorted mail on a pallet means
that the pallet must be staged somewhere in the plant where it must be
broken down, sorted to other containers, and dispatched. When large
quantities of unsorted pallets are received at a plant, the facility
can run out of space to place the pallets that are waiting to be broken
down and sorted. In most instances it is more efficient to unload the
contents of bedloaded trucks at a BMC directly into the sortation
stream than it is to move a working pallet to a staging area, break it
down, and then direct it to a sorting operation. The purpose of
palletization of mail is to allow the Postal Service to cross-dock
entire pallet loads of mail to particular destinations eliminating the
need to break down and sort all the pallets at the entry postal
facility. Accordingly the Postal Service is retaining the standard that
mail presented on pallets must be sorted to required destinations with
a minor portion (no more than 10%) received on working pallets.
b. Mail Meeting the Standards for Both Letters and Automation-
Compatible Flats
Eight commenters had concerns regarding the preparation of
mailpieces that meet the size standards for a letter size piece as well
as the size standards for an automation flat-size piece.
Six commenters stated that mailers should have the option of
preparing their mail in a manner associated with the rates they are
paying. That is, if a mailer chooses to pay rates associated with flat-
size mail, the mailer should be able to prepare this mail as a flat in
sacks, or as packages on pallets; and conversely, if a mailer chooses
to pay letter rates the mail must prepared in trays or preferably in
trays on pallets.
The Postal Service disagrees with this position. The Postal Service
processes mail in different mailstreams based on the mail processing
category of the mailpiece, i.e., letter, flat, automation flat,
machinable parcel, irregular parcel or outside parcel. The mail
processing categories are defined by the size dimensions or size and
weight and other physical characteristics of the mailpieces as defined
in DMM C050. Therefore, even if a letter pays a flat rate it would be
processed by the Postal Service as a letter. The Postal Service
therefore wants letter-size mail prepared in trays and the trays
labeled to show they contain letter-size pieces so they can be directed
to the appropriate letter processing stream. Letter and nonletter rates
are developed on the basis that mail meeting the letter-size
characteristics is processed as letters and mail meeting the flat-size
or parcel characteristics is processed as flats or parcels as
appropriate. Accordingly, the DMM standards reflected in this notice
will require mail meeting the letter-size dimensions in DMM C050 to be
prepared as a letter. The one anomaly in this rule is the automation
flats category. Flat sorting machines can handle some smaller pieces
that overlap into the letter-size processing category, and in the
interest of encouraging preparation of barcoded flat mail, the Postal
Service allowed this smaller mail to qualify for the barcoded flat
rates. Accordingly the Postal Service will
[[Page 10093]]
continue to allow letter-size mail that also meets the size dimensions
for an automation flat to be prepared according to the preparation
standards for a flat, but only when such pieces are presented as part
of an automation flats mailing.
In the proposed rule, the Postal Service proposed an accommodation
for mailers of pieces that meet both the letter and Automation flats
dimensions if they prepare that mail as packages on pallets. Under this
accommodation, the Postal Service proposed that when a portion of the
mailing job consisted of such pieces and was prepared as an automation
flats mailing of packages on pallets, the Postal Service would allow
the entire mailing job, which could include Enhanced Carrier Route and
nonautomation Regular Standard mail, to be prepared as packages on
pallets if no more than 10% of the total number of pieces in the
mailing job were claimed at nonautomation Regular rates and provided
the pieces claimed at the nonautomation Regular rates were paid at the
non-letter rates. This was in recognition that mailers who prepare mail
in packages on pallets would have more efficient mail preparation
operations if allowed to prepare an entire mailing job in the same
manner. Seven commenters disagreed with the 10 percent limit on the
Regular mail (now nonautomation Regular Standard Mail). Six of these
commenters reiterated the reason above, that if they are paying flats
rates they should be able to prepare their mail as a flat without
limit. One commenter indicated he didn't understand the rationale,
especially if pieces over 3 ounces are not run on automated letter
sorting equipment. One commenter stated that the 10% limit should be
increased to 15% to accommodate the mail that previously could have
been prepared as part of a barcoded flat mailing under the 85/15
barcoding rules. One commenter stated that if there was no limit on
carrier route mail there should be no limit on the amount of Regular
mail prepared in the mailing job. This commenter further indicated that
there appears to be insufficient justification in terms of Postal
Service benefits to offset complications in mailer operations.
At the time the Postal Service proposed this accommodation to
mailers preparing packages on pallets, it was working under the terms
of its proposal to the PRC in which the Enhanced Carrier Route subclass
did not contain separate rates for letter and flat mail. The Postal
Service determined that it would overlook any additional preparation
costs it incurred by not having the letter-size carrier route mail
prepared in trays since there was no separate letter rate. However, the
PRCs recommended decision approved by the Governors includes separate
letter and flat rates for Enhanced Carrier Route mail. This change in
the rate structure, together with fairness issues related to giving an
exception for palletized mail but not for sacked mail, has caused the
Postal Service to rethink its proposed accommodation for palletized
mail. As reiterated in the beginning of this section and elsewhere in
the comments concerning letters, the Postal Service is handling all
letter mail in trays in its internal operations and for the sake of
processing category recognition and efficiency in handling, wants all
letter mail presented for entry by mailers to be prepared in letter
trays. The Postal Service believes that preparation of letter-size
Enhanced Carrier Route mail as well as nonautomation Regular letter
mail in trays, and preferably in trays on pallets, is the most
efficient preparation for its operations. The Postal Service will
therefore not offer the exception set forth in the proposed rule, for
palletized mailing jobs that contain a portion prepared as an
automation flats mailing indefinitely. That exception will be
terminated on January 1, 1997. At that time the Postal Service will
provide that, for mailing jobs consisting of mailpieces meeting the
definitions of both a letter and an automation flat, only the portion
submitted as an automation Regular Standard flats mailing may be
prepared as a flat. Letter-size pieces entered as Enhanced Carrier
route and nonautomation Regular mailings must be prepared according to
their letter-size classification as trayed mailings, and preferably as
trays on pallets.
c. Physically Full Flats Trays
One comment was received that supported the Postal Services
proposed definition of a full flats tray as one that is physically
full. This is further defined in DMM M011.1.3 as a minimum of a single
stack of mail lying flat on the bottom of the tray and filling the tray
to the bottom of the handholds. When there is additional mail for the
same tray destination and additional pieces can be stacked in the tray,
it must be further filled to capacity.
5. Periodicals
Two mailers submitted comments concerning the proposed Publications
Service subclass standard. As the Publications Service subclass was not
recommended by the PRC, these comments will not be addressed.
6. Addressing
a. Move Updates
Eighteen comments were received concerning the proposal to require
automation First-Class and Presorted First-Class mailers to update the
addresses of their customers who have moved within 6 months of the
mailing date. One commenter supported the proposal. One commenter
stated there was no support for the proposal within the mailing
industry.
The Postal Service believes the methods currently available to
provide updated address information to customers offer a wide range of
options that can meet the needs of mailers at reasonable cost. For
example:
Use of the endorsement ``Address Correction Requested'' means the
mailpiece will be returned to the sender with the new address
information affixed. This service is provided at No Additional Charge
to the mailing customer. The mailer may then update the address
information, use a new envelope and mail the piece to the new address.
Use of the endorsement ``Forwarding and Address Correction
Requested'' means the mailpiece is forwarded to the new location and
the Postal Service sends a hard copy notice to the mailer with the new
address information. This notice can be used to update the mailers
address and costs $0.50 for each notice.
Use of Address Change Service provides the mailer with an
electronic notice of new address information instead of a hard copy
notice. Electronic notices cost $0.20 and can be obtained on a variety
of electronic media. Mailers may determine the frequency with which
they use the ACS endorsement and participant code so long as the mailer
can certify that each address in a First-Class mailing has been updated
for customer moves within 6 months prior to the date of the mailing.
Use of National Change of Address (NCOA) processing service can
update mailers' address lists with corrected address information prior
to a mailing. Mailers determine how frequently they process their
address lists.
Use of these move update methods on mailings in other classes would
meet the standard for the addresses in the mailing list and qualify
them for access to automation First-Class or Presorted First-Class
rates. Any new addresses added to the mailing list would be ``move
updated'' during the next scheduled processing of the addresses.
One commenter stated that they are unable to use the current
methods and two said they were too costly. The Postal Service incurs
costs to rehandle
[[Page 10094]]
undeliverable-as-addressed mail and also incurs service delays when
mail must be redirected to a new location. It is in the best interests
of the Postal Service and mailers to improve deliverability and reduce
costs. The options cited above provide flexibility to mailers in
meeting the proposed standard, including the ``no fee'' Address
Correction Requested endorsement.
Three commenters asked that implementation of the standard be
postponed to allow time to adjust and obtain move updates. The Postal
Service believes this proposal has merit. The Postal Service recognizes
that many mailers will need to revise their addressing systems to
accommodate move updating. Some will have to learn to use electronic
update systems. Others will need to use up stocks of envelopes that do
not bear an endorsement. Some mailers may need to experiment with
several options, such as the impact of the two different endorsements,
to determine which makes the best business sense for their operations.
The Postal Service also wants to avoid creating a semi-annual
``crunch'' of demand for NCOA and ACS services that might occur if Move
Update was implemented at the same time as the rate and classification
changes resulting from Classification Reform. Thus, the Postal Service
will begin the move update address qualification process at the time of
Classification Reform implementation, but will not condition the
eligibility of automation First-Class and Presorted First-Class
mailings on complete move update qualification until January 1, 1997.
This ``ramp up'' compliance period should give all concerned customers
more than enough time to decide on the update method to use, obtain
NCOA matching services if appropriate, implement internal system
changes to accept electronic move update information and work with
their internal customers or presort customers to obtain full
compliance.
Several commenters expressed concern about the availability of
service from NCOA licensees. The Postal Service believes the existing
group of licensees has the capacity to continue to provide their
services to mailers within the terms of the license (process and return
address files within 7 business days of receipt.) If Postal Service
determines that a legitimate need exists, it will increase the number
of licensees.
Several commenters also asked that implementation be postponed
indefinitely until other methods to do move updating, such as the
Multiline Forwarding System, have been approved. The Postal Service
does not believe that such an open-ended delay is warranted, given the
wide range of current options. Excellent progress has been made towards
the implementation of the Multiline Forwarding System, now known as
FASTFORWARDsm. The Postal Service expects the implementation process to
continue on schedule with certification of the operating systems to
occur during the summer of 1996. Mailers who choose this option will be
able to meet the Move Update requirement well before the end of the
``ramp up'' period. The Postal Service plans to continue to work with
MLOCR users through the Mailers Technical Advisory Committee and the
Multiline Users Group on the development of the FASTFORWARDsm. As
marketplace demands create a need, the Postal Service will also
consider expanding the range of options in the existing services. For
example, this might include adding additional notification options in
Address Change Service beyond the current ones available.
Three commenters inquired if their in house address correction
centers, to which they have devoted significant resources, might be
certified as meeting the standard. For those mailers who believe their
lists are up to date, the use of the ``Address Correction Requested''
endorsement should have little or no impact on their business practices
because they are mailing to the most current address for their
customer. The simple and straightforward use of the endorsement would
meet the proposed standard with no difficulty, need only be applied to
all addresses on the list at least once within the 6 months prior to
the date of mailing and expenditures would be limited to the costs
associated with preprinting the endorsement on mailing envelopes. The
current endorsement options would be an effective approach to meeting
the proposed standard for lists which are well maintained by special
mailer move correction processes. The Postal Service will discuss
additional alternatives with members of the Mailers Technical Advisory
Committee and other industry representatives.
Three other commenters inquired whether a mailer was required to
use the information provided from postal address correction processes
and apply it immediately to their address lists. They asked if the
notification could serve as a trigger to the company to initiate an
inquiry with the customer about correcting address information. Four
commenters indicated that various state and federal government agencies
feel they are prohibited from using Postal Service provided
corrections. In most cases, mailers are expected to update their
mailing addresses promptly. However the Postal Service recognizes that
in some industries there may be legally mandated limits on the address
that can be used in certain customer communications. For example, one
commenter noted that in a number of states, notices of shareholder
meetings must be sent to the address ``in the corporation records.''
Given the concerns expressed by these mailers, the Postal Service has
decided that in circumstances where clearly demonstrated legal
constraints limit a mailer from using address changes provided by the
Postal Service, an individually approved alternative process will be
acceptable to meet the move update standard. Alternative process
approval would be granted on a case by case basis and the legal
limitation would need to be clearly identified. In this process,
mailers would receive address change information from the Postal
Service in any of the currently prescribed manners. This would be
followed by a prompt mailer initiated direct mail contact with the
customer requesting a signed verification of the address change. For
example, the mailer could provide a preprinted barcoded Business Reply
Card which the customer could sign and return. Address information
could then be updated in the mailer's records prior to the next mailing
cycle.
b. Carrier Route Sequencing Standards
16 comments were received on the proposed standards to sequence
basic Enhanced Carrier Route Standard mail and Publications Service
Periodicals carrier route mail. The proposal required update of
sequence information to be done through any of the established
sequencing methods or, for basic carrier route rates, use of the newly
developed Line-of-Travel (LOT) product.
Two commenters said they would be unable to sequence their
mailings. Two others asked that the High Density rate category in
Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail be allowed to use line of travel
sequence rather than exact walk sequence.
The Domestic Mail Classification Schedule which was recommended by
the PRC and approved by the Governors specifies that High Density
Enhanced Carrier Route Standard and High Density Regular Periodicals
mailings must be prepared in walk sequence, and this requirement is
incorporated in the DMM final rules. The approved DMCS provides that
basic nonautomation Enhanced Carrier Route mail and basic automation
Enhanced Carrier Route
[[Page 10095]]
mail be sequenced as prescribed by the Postal Service. The DMM language
in this final rule prescribes that nonautomation basic Enhanced Carrier
Route must be sequenced using either LOT or walk sequence. Sequencing
will not be required for automation Enhanced Carrier Route letters.
Furthermore, the approved DMCS does not specify sequencing for basic
carrier route Regular Periodicals. Accordingly, the Postal Service has
determined that sequencing will not be required for those rates in the
final DMM standards.
Four commenters asked that, where sequencing is required, the
Postal Service accept either ascending or descending order for
sequencing. Commenters added that the turns in production runs may vary
and it would be difficult to accurately predict which direction may
result. One also speculated that the efficiencies gained would be the
same going from end to beginning of the route as they would from
beginning to end of the route. The Postal Service will identify mailers
whose mailings are frequently in reverse order and work with them to
ensure mailings are presented in the proper order.
Eight comments were received concerning the availability of the LOT
product. LOT has been available for subscription since July 1995.
Implementation of the sequencing standards will occur with the
implementation date for Classification Reform. Mailers who are
interested in obtaining the Line-of-Travel product should contact the
National Customer Support Center at 1-800-238-3150 for subscription
information. Continuing updates of LOT sequence information will occur
with the same frequency that carrier route codes are updated.
c. Five Digit ZIP Code Verification
The Postal Service believes that accurate ZIP Codes are vital to
ensuring consistent, timely delivery service. Moreover, the use of a
correct ZIP Code is currently a standard for all presorted mail. Those
who are unwilling to verify that the ZIP Codes they apply to mailpieces
will not be allowed access to discounted postage rates that are based
on ZIP Code presortation.
One commenter asked if the results of CASS processing would verify
ZIP Code accuracy. If the mailer uses certified software and updates
the ZIP Code information using the software, this would be considered a
acceptable verification method. One commenter said the standard should
not be implemented because the Postal Service has received the revenue
and can just discard Standard rate mail if it is undeliverable. The
Postal Service disagrees. The Postal Service would still incur all the
transportation and processing costs in addition to waste disposal fees.
Two commenters asked for a longer implementation period. Mailers
will be expected to identify the method used to verify the ZIP Code
information and sign a certification of verification attached to the
postage statement. The Postal Service has decided to allow mailers 3
months from the date of Classification Reform implementation to verify
the accuracy of their 5-digit ZIP Code information. The Postal Service
believes this October 1, 1996, date provides adequate time in which to
verify ZIP Code information. One commenter asked who would be
responsible for ensuring ZIP Code accuracy. The person in control of
the address would be responsible, however, others may offer services
which would provide the verification. For example, an MLOCR could be
used to apply a barcode representing the correct ZIP Code or a service
bureau may offer a verification service as a part of their service
line.
d. Carrier Route Updates
Five comments were received about the proposal to update carrier
route information within 90 days of the date of mailing. Two comments
suggested that the coding date should be 120 days, not 90 and one
suggested 180 days. Two commenters questioned if the important date was
the date of coding or the date of the AIS product being used. It
appears that some commenters misinterpreted the chart which was
included in the last Federal Register concerning this issue. The chart
indicated all of the possibilities when data products would be valid
for use, not how long the codes assigned by using the product would be
valid. Carrier route assignments are more frequently changed to
accommodate the operational needs of the Postal Service to balance a
carrier's workload. Thus, the Postal Service believes the 90 day coding
standard is reasonable. However, it is not the Postal Service's intent
to require mailers to update their carrier route codes if no more
current source of information is available. The Postal Service believes
the most current data available should be used in assigning carrier
route codes. If new data files are not available, mailers should
continue to use the existing route assignments until such time as new
AIS products have been released by the Postal Service.
e. Address Information System Product Cycle Changes
Eight comments were received concerning the proposed increase in
the frequency of required updates to AIS products. One commenter
suggested the Postal Service publish a separate Federal Register notice
to ensure that all affected parties are aware of the proposed changes.
Three stated that it is difficult to implement the ZIP+4 product
releases within the required 45 day window and that to add CRIS within
the same window would be impossible. Another commenter added that they
have experienced difficulty with software vendors fulfilling product
updates consistently. Two other comments expressed concern about the
possible cost increases. To ensure a smooth transition to the bimonthly
product cycle, the Postal Service will begin bimonthly product
fulfillment with the October 15 product release. Thereafter products
will be released on December 15, February 15, April 15, June 15, and
August 15. The Postal Service believes it has given adequate notice of
these proposed changes through the various notices and mailer meetings
that have been a part of the Classification Reform implementation
effort. It also believes that the benefits which will accrue from more
timely updates justify the additional effort that mailers will need to
make to incorporate these product releases. However, as part of its
customer information commitment, the Postal Service will continue to
work with the vendor industry to resolve any remaining concerns about
product production and fulfillment.
C. Examples of Standardized Documentation
The following pages show examples of documentation that would be
produced under the requirements for standardized documentation
described below.
BILLING CODE 7710-12-P
[[Page 10096]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.000
[[Page 10097]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.001
[[Page 10098]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.002
[[Page 10099]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.003
[[Page 10100]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.004
[[Page 10101]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.005
[[Page 10102]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.006
[[Page 10103]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.007
[[Page 10104]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.008
[[Page 10105]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.009
[[Page 10106]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.010
[[Page 10107]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.011
[[Page 10108]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.012
[[Page 10109]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.013
[[Page 10110]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.014
[[Page 10111]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.015
[[Page 10112]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.016
[[Page 10113]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MR96.017
BILLING CODE 7710-12-C
[[Page 10114]]
D. Summary of DMM Changes
The DMM revisions shown below are the revisions published in the
December 22, 1995, proposed rule, as modified to reflect inadvertent
errors, comment responses, and the recommendations of the PRC as
approved by the Governors. These revisions use as their base the text
of DMM Issue 49 (September 1, 1995) as amended thereafter by notices
published in the Federal Register or Postal Bulletin. Revisions are
described by module of the DMM. This list is intended as an overview
only, and should not be viewed as definitive.
A (Addressing). Revisions in nomenclature are made throughout. A930
is revised to update the list of available AIS products, and A950 is
revised to show the more frequent product cycle for address coding
products.
C (Characteristics and Content). Revisions in nomenclature are made
throughout. C100 is amended to reflect the proposed new size limits for
pieces eligible for card rates. C300 and C400 are revised and merged
into new C600 to recognize the merger of third- and fourth-class into
Standard Mail. Terms used in various standards are defined in new
sections added to C810, C820, and C840. A new section is added to C810
to describe the standards for enclosed reply pieces.
D (Deposit, Collection, and Delivery). Revisions in nomenclature
are made throughout. D300 and D400 are revised and merged into new D600
to recognize the merger of third- and fourth-class into Standard Mail.
E (Eligibility). Revisions in nomenclature are made throughout.
E100 is amended to consolidate the standards for First-Class Mail
(excluding Priority Mail) into a unit on Presorted (nonautomation) mail
and automation rate mail (in E130 and E140, respectively). E200 is
renamed to recognize the renaming of second-class mail as Periodicals.
E210, E250, and E270 are revised minimally. E230 and E240 are
reorganized to present, respectively, the presort (nonautomation) rate
and automation rate eligibility standards for Regular Periodicals, and
to separate the standards retained for Preferred Periodicals in E239
and E249. E300 and E400 are revised and merged into new E600 to
recognize the merger of third- and fourth-class into Standard Mail.
E610 presents basic standards for all Standard Mail in E611, for former
third-class mail, now called Standard Mail (A) in E612, and for former
fourth-class mail, now called Standard Mail (B) in E613. E620 contains
standards for single-piece rates: single-piece Standard Mail (A)
(E621), parcel post (E622), bound printed matter (E623), Special
Standard Mail (currently special fourth-class mail) (E624), and Library
Mail (E625). E630 presents standards for bulk rates: Regular Basic and
3/5 (E631); Enhanced Carrier Route Basic, High Density, and Saturation
(E632); basic and carrier route bulk bound printed matter (E633); 5-
Digit and BMC Presorted Special Standard Mail (E634); and, consolidated
but without substantive change from current standards, for all existing
Nonprofit rates (E639). E640 contains standards for automation rates:
automation Carrier Route, 5-Digit, 3-Digit, 3/5 (for flats), and Basic
(E641); and, also consolidated but essentially unchanged from current
standards, for all existing Nonprofit rates (E649). E650 and E670 are
revised minimally. Although the PRC's recommendation, as approved by
the Governors, includes automation rate carrier route letter mail in
the Enhanced Carrier Route subclass, for administrative purposes and
for organizational simplicity in its rules, the Postal Service is
presenting the standards for that mail as part of the broader standards
in E641 (and, below, in M810) for automation rate Standard Mail.
F (Forwarding and Related Services). Revisions are confined to
changes in nomenclature and minor editorial changes.
G (General Information) and I (Index Information). No revisions are
made except to update address information, indices, and the Summary of
Changes.
L (Labeling Lists). Revisions in nomenclature are made throughout.
L002 is reorganized to present information for all 3-digit ZIP Code
areas to show where each 3-digit prefix is assigned for 3-digit, 3-
digit/scheme, and SCF distribution. L003 is added to list the 3-digit
ZIP Code areas that are combined for scheme sortation under specific
new preparation standards. To reflect the wider use of the ADC network,
current L101 is relocated and renumbered as L004, with distinctions
shown where appropriate for the respective ADC destinations to which
First-Class, Periodicals, or Standard Mail is to be directed. For
irregular Standard Mail (formerly third- and fourth-class irregular
parcels), L702 and L707 are renumbered as L603 and L604, respectively.
To reflect other revisions to distribution networks that have
eliminated SDC, state, and mixed states preparation, L201-203, L701,
L703, L704, and L706 are deleted.
M (Mail Preparation and Sortation). Revisions in nomenclature are
made throughout. Current M011 is renumbered as M012, and new M011 is
added to consolidate basic definitions of terms used throughout other
mail preparation instructions and to provide basic information about
the Presort Accuracy Validation and Evaluation (PAVE) program. M012 and
M013 are also updated to include revised formats for optional
endorsement lines and carrier route information lines and to allow the
inclusion of rate markings in both. M020 is amended to provide more
consistent package preparation standards for other-than-Nonprofit mail.
M033 is revised to add consistent standards for tray preparation for
letter- and flat-size mail and to offer enhanced information about sack
and tray preparation. M040 is amended to incorporate revisions to
pallet preparation standards set forth in a final rule published on
December 21, 1995 (60 FR 66142-66149). M041 is revised to present
general standards for pallets and their use. M045 reorganizes the
standards in current M042, M043, and M044 as amended by the cited
rulemaking, to present the revised and consolidated standards for
palletized mail preparation. M050 is revised to include information
about line-of-travel sequencing. M100 is reorganized, with the
standards for Presorted First-Class located in new M130. Preparation
standards for nonautomation Regular Periodicals are in new M210;
existing standards for nonautomation Preferred Rate Periodicals are
consolidated in M290. M300 and M400 are revised and merged into new
M600 to recognize the merger of third- and fourth-class into Standard
Mail. Regular Standard Mail (A) preparation is detailed in M610,
Enhanced Carrier Route standards are in M620, and existing standards
for Standard Mail (B) (current fourth-class mail) and for Nonprofit
Standard Mail are contained in M630 and M690, respectively. Revised
preparation standards for automation rate First-Class, Regular
Periodicals, and Standard Mail are contained in M810 (letter-size
pieces) and M820 (flat-size pieces). M890 brings forward existing
standards for Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail.
Throughout, the optional city preparation level has been eliminated
(except for Preferred Periodicals) and the SDC, state, and mixed states
preparation levels have been replaced with ADC and mixed ADC levels.
P (Postage and Payment Methods). Revisions in nomenclature are made
throughout. P012 is amended to improve the definition of
``standardized'' documentation and to
[[Page 10115]]
include information about PAVE as a source for standardized postage
documentation. P300 and P400 are revised and merged into new P600 to
recognize the merger of third- and fourth-class into Standard Mail.
P100 and P600 are revised to provide information about single-piece
rate mail presented at the same time as a mailing at an automated rate.
P710 is amended to contain new abbreviations for use with manifest
mailings.
R (Rates and Fees). Revisions in nomenclature are made throughout.
R000 contains updated stamp and stamped stationery information. R100
and R200 are amended to reflect revised rates and rate structures. R300
and R400 are revised and merged into new R600 to recognize the merger
of third- and fourth-class into Standard Mail and to show revised rates
and rate structures.
S (Special Services). Revisions in nomenclature are made throughout
with no other substantive changes.
Although exempt from the notice and comment requirements of the
Administrative Procedure Act (5 U.S.C. 553(b), (c)) regarding proposed
rulemaking by 39 U.S.C. 410(a), the Postal Service invites comments on
those revisions to the DMM set forth below that have been specifically
identified in the discussion as new proposals available for comment:
1. New standards applied to Periodicals that are similar to those
adopted in this final rule for First-Class and Standard Mail:
a. All pieces in an automation rate mailing must be delivery point
barcoded.
b. Presort and other preparation standards, including a 150-piece
minimum for preparing trays of automation rate letter-size mail.
c. 5-digit ZIP Codes used in the addresses on nonautomation rate
Periodicals must be verified annually for accuracy; mailers must
certify this at the time of mailing.
d. Letter-size reply envelopes and cards enclosed in automation
rate pieces must meet specific standards for automation-compatibility;
mailers must certify this at the time of mailing.
2. Standards for documentation produced by Presort Accuracy
Validation and Evaluation (PAVE) certified software and for
standardized documentation produced otherwise. These standards are
presented in P012, below; examples of documentation are also presented
as part of this notice.
List of Subjects in 39 CFR Part 111
Postal Service.
PART 111--[AMENDED]
1. The authority citation for 39 CFR part 111 continues to read as
follows:
Authority: 5 U.S.C. 552(a); 39 U.S.C. 101, 401, 403, 404, 3001-
3011, 3201-3219, 3403-3406, 3621, 3626, 5001.
2. Revise the following sections of the Domestic Mail Manual as
noted below:
* * * * *
A Addressing
A000 Basic Addressing
A010 General Information
[In 1.2d, replace ``second-class mail,'' and ``bulk third-class mail;
fourth-class mail'' with ``Periodicals,'' and ``bulk rate Standard Mail
(A); Standard Mail (B),'' respectively; remove the last sentence in
1.3; in 1.6, replace ``First-, third-, and fourth-class mail'' with
``First-Class and Standard Mail''; references ``E300, E400'' with
``E600''; and ``second-class mail'' with ``Periodicals''; in 4.3f,
replace ``Second-class mail'' with ``Periodicals''; in 4.3g, replace
``Fourth-class mail'' with ``Standard Mail (B)''; in 7.0 (heading),
replace ``Second-Class Mail'' with ``Periodicals''; in 7.1, replace
``First-, third-, and fourth-class'' with ``First-Class and Standard
Mail''; in 7.2, replace ``second-class mail'' with ``Periodicals'' and
``2C'' with ``PER.'']
A040 Alternative Addressing Formats
[In 1.7, 2.2, 3.1, and 3.4, replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals.'']
A060 Detached Address Labels
[In 1.2 (heading and text), replace ``[S]econd- or [T]hird-[C]lass''
with ``Periodicals or Standard Mail (A)''; in 1.3 (heading and text),
replace ``[T]hird-[C]lass'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 1.4
(heading), remove ``Fourth-Class''; in 5.2a, replace ``Second-class''
with ``Periodicals''; in 3.8 (heading and text), replace ``[M]ailing
[S]tatement'' with ``[P]ostage [S]tatement''; in 5.2b, replace
``[T]hird-class'' with ``Standard Mail (A)'' and remove ``fourth-
class''; in 5.3, replace ``third- or fourth-class'' with ``Standard
Mail.'']
* * * * *
A900 Customer Support Services
* * * * *
A930 Other Services
* * * * *
1.0 Delivery Statistics File
[Revise the fifth sentence as follows:]
* * * The information is updated monthly through transaction files
and can be ordered either with a single base file in the initial
shipment or with a base file provided quarterly (bimonthly effective
October 15, 1996). * * *
2.0 AIS Products
Customers may use USPS Address Information System (AIS) products to
obtain correct 5-digit ZIP Codes for the addresses on their mailing
lists. These products generally are more economical than mailing list
services. Customers with computerized address lists may obtain the
City/State file, Five-Digit ZIP Code file, Line-of-Travel (LOT)
information, Z4CHANGE file, ZIP Move file, Carrier Route Information
System (CRIS), and ZIP+4 tapes. Customers may also use USPS directories
and microfiche products to find correct 5-digit ZIP Codes for single
and multi-ZIP Coded offices. Information about ordering and using these
products is available by calling 1-800-238-3150.
* * * * *
[In 3.1a, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, and 4.6, replace ``Quart
FR Doc. 96-5500 Classification Reform; Implementation Standards
erly'' and
``quarterly'' with ``Quarterly (Bimonthly effective October 15, 1996)''
and ``quarterly (bimonthly effective October 15, 1996),''
respectively.]
* * * * *
[Revise 5.0 as follows:]
5.0 Delivery Statistics
In post offices with rural delivery, highway contract box delivery,
and post office box delivery, postmasters must provide, at no charge,
the following information for their respective offices:
a. Number of post office boxes rented.
b. Route numbers, number of boxes, and number of families on each
rural and highway contract box delivery route (including seasonal data,
if applicable).
c. Number of families served or number of business places served by
rural or highway contract box delivery routes within the total delivery
area.
A950 Coding Accuracy Support System (CASS)
* * * * *
3.0 Date of Address Matching and Coding
3.1 Updating Standards
Unless Z4CHANGE is used, all automation and carrier route mailings
bearing addresses coded by any AIS product must be coded with current
CASS-certified software and the current USPS database. Coding must be
performed within 90 days of the mailing date for all carrier route
mailings; within 6 months for automation rate First-Class, Regular
Periodicals, and Standard Mail; and within 1 year for ZIP+4 and
Barcoded rate Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard
[[Page 10116]]
Mail. All AIS products may be used immediately upon release. New
product releases must be included in address matching systems no later
than 45 days after the release date. The overlap in dates for product
use allows mailers adequate time to install the new data files and test
their systems. Mailers are expected to update their systems with the
latest data files as soon as practical and need not wait until the
``last permissible use'' date to include the new information in their
address matching systems. Effective with the October 15, 1996, database
product release, the ``current USPS database'' product cycle is defined
by the following matrix.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
File release Required use Last permissible
------------------------------------------------------ use
------------------
Use of file released on . . . Must begin no And must end no
later than . . . later than . . .
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feb. 15.......................... Apr. 1............ May 31.
Apr. 15.......................... June 1............ July 31.
June 15.......................... Aug. 1............ Sept. 30.
Aug. 15.......................... Oct. 1............ Nov. 30.
Oct. 15.......................... Dec. 1............ Jan. 31.
Dec. 15.......................... Feb. 1............ Mar. 31.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* * * * *
5.0 Documentation
5.1 Requirement
Unless excepted by standard, each mailing submitted at an
automation rate, at a carrier route Periodicals rate, or at an Enhanced
Carrier Route Standard Mail rate, must be accompanied by documentation
as described below.
* * * * *
5.4 Providing Required Data
* * * * *
b. Name of the list processor using the CASS-certified software to
match and code the address list, the date the address list was
processed, the date of the USPS database used to code the address list,
the address list name or identification number, the total number of
address records on the list submitted for coding, the total number of
address records successfully coded to the appropriate depth of code,
and the percentage of total addresses submitted for coding that were
successfully coded.
* * * * *
6.0 Obtaining CASS Certification
6.1 Testing Arrangements
[Replace ``ZIP+4 or delivery point'' with ``carrier route, ZIP+4, or
delivery point.'']
* * * * *
C Characteristics and Content
C000 General Information
C010 General Mailability Standards
[In 1.1 and 3.8, replace ``third-class'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in
1.7, replace ``C300'' and ``third-class mail'' with ``C600'' and
``Standard Mail (A),'' respectively; in 6.0, replace the reference
``G010'' with ``G020''; in 7.8 (heading), replace ``Scope'' with
``High-Density''; in 9.3, replace the reference ``I042'' with ``G042'';
no other change in text.]
* * * * *
C020 Restricted or Nonmailable Articles and Substances
[In 4.1, remove ``Title.'']
[Revise the heading of C021 as follows:]
C021 Articles and Substances Generally
* * * * *
C023 Hazardous Matter
[In 10.7, replace ``40 CFR 172, Identification Number Cross Reference
Index to Proper Shipping Names,'' with ``40 CFR 172''; in 11.2, replace
``Except under 10.10, parcels'' with ``Parcels''; in 11.6, replace
``mailing statement'' with ``postage statement''; no other change in
text.]
* * * * *
C024 Other Restricted or Nonmailable Matter
[In 12.1, replace ``First-, third-, or fourth-class'' with ``First-
Class or Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
C050 Mail Processing Categories
1.0 Basic Information
[Remove current 1.1 and 1.2 and replace with new 1.0 as follows:]
All mail is assigned to one of the mail processing categories
listed below, based on the physical dimensions of the mailpiece,
regardless of the placement (orientation) of the delivery address on
the mailpiece. Unless permitted by standard, any mailing at other than
the single-piece First-Class or Standard Mail rates may not contain
pieces from more than one processing category.
* * * * *
C100 First-Class Mail
1.0 Dimensions
[In 1.2, remove the reference ``(see C400).'']
* * * * *
2.0 Cards Claimed at Card Rates
2.1 Postcard Dimensions
Each card (i.e., each postal card or postcard or each half of a
double postal card or postcard) claimed at a card rate must be:
a. Rectangular.
b. Not less than 3\1/2\ inches high, 5 inches long, or 0.007 inch
thick.
c. Not larger than 4\1/4\ inches high, 6 inches long, or 0.016 inch
thick.
* * * * *
2.8 Special Rules for Cards
Cards not mailed as Presorted First-Class Mail but with the
characteristics noted in 2.6 or 2.7 must:
a. Be prepared in mailings of not less than 200 cards of identical
size and weight.
b. Have an address that includes the correct ZIP Code or ZIP+4
code.
c. Have postage paid with permit imprints, meter stamps, or
precanceled stamps.
d. Be sorted to the finest extent possible and trayed as required
for Regular Basic and 3/5 Standard Mail.
* * * * *
[Remove current 2.11 and renumber current 2.12 as 2.11; renumber
current 3.0 as 4.0 and add new 3.0 as follows:]
3.0 Enclosures
Enclosures in double cards are prohibited. Envelopes and cards
enclosed in automation rate First-Class Mail are subject to the
corresponding standards in C810.
4.0 Nonstandard Mail
[Replace ``A piece of First-Class Mail weighing 1 ounce or less'' with
``Single-piece rate and Presorted rate First-Class Mail weighing 1
ounce or less, and not claimed at a card rate,''; no other change.]
* * * * *
[Revise the heading of C200 as follows:]
C200 Periodicals
[In 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.4a, 1.4b, 1.4c, 1.5a, 1.6, 1.9, 1.10a, 1.10c,
2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 3.3, 3.7, 4.2, and 4.4, replace ``[S]econd-
[C]lass'' with ``Periodicals''; in 1.3, 1.3b, 1.3c, 1.3d, and 1.10c,
replace ``First- or [any] third-class'' with ``First-Class or [any]
Standard Mail (A)''; in 1.3a, 1.3d, 1.8b, and 1.10c, replace ``[T]hird-
[C]lass [Mail]'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 1.4d, replace ``mailing
statement'' with ``postage statement''; in 2.2c, replace ``First-,
third-, or fourth-class'' with ``First-Class or Standard Mail''; in
2.4, replace ``Fourth-[C]lass [M]ail'' with ``Standard Mail (B)''; no
other change in text.]
[[Page 10117]]
[Move current Exhibit [C300.]1.3 to new C600.1.1c and redesignate as
Exhibit [600.]1.1c; retitle redesignated Exhibit 1.1c as ``Dimensions
for Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail''; remove text of C300.]
[Move current Exhibit [C400.]1.2 to new C600.1.2b and redesignate as
Exhibit [C600.]1.2b; remove text of current C300 and C400.]
[No change to C500.]
[Insert new C600, based on text of current C300 and C400, as follows:]
C600 Standard Mail
1.0 Dimensions
1.1 Standard Mail (A)
These dimensional standards apply to Standard Mail (A):
a. Each piece must weigh less than 16 ounces. Lower limits apply to
mail claimed at automation rates.
b. Within the standards for mailability in C010, there is no
maximum size for nonautomation rate Regular and Nonprofit Standard Mail
(A); all automation rate Standard Mail (A) is subject to the size and
weight limits in C810 (letters) and C820 (flats), as applicable.
c. Except for automation Basic Carrier Route rate pieces and
merchandise samples mailed with detached address labels (DALs), the
maximum size for Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail is 11\3/4\ inches
high, 14 inches long, and \3/4\ inch thick (see Exhibit 1.1c).
Merchandise samples whose dimensions exceed these maximums may be sent
at the Enhanced Carrier Route rates if mailed using DALs, provided that
the samples meet all other applicable standards and the DALs meet the
standards in A060.
[Insert redesignated Exhibit [600.]1.1c.]
1.2 Standard Mail (B)
These dimensional standards apply to Standard Mail (B):
a. Each piece may not exceed 70 pounds, except matter at bound
printed matter rates may not exceed 10 pounds.
b. The combined length and girth of a piece (i.e., the length of
its longest side plus the distance around its thickest part) may not
exceed 108 inches (see Exhibit 1.2b).
c. Two or more packages may be mailed as a single parcel, if they
are about the same size or shape or if they are parts of one article,
if they are securely wrapped or fastened together, and if they do not
together exceed the weight or size limits.
d. Lower size or weight standards apply to mail claimed at certain
rates, addressed to certain APOs and FPOs, or sent by the Department of
State to U.S. Government personnel abroad.
e. Pieces might be subject to minimum weight or dimensions based on
the standards for specific rates.
[Insert redesignated Exhibit [600.]1.2b.]
2.0 Surcharges
2.1 Nonstandard Mail
Single-piece rate Standard Mail (A) (other than a key or
identification device) weighing 1 ounce or less is nonstandard and
subject to the applicable surcharge if its thickness exceeds \1/4\ inch
or, if based on the placement (orientation) of the address, its length
exceeds 11\1/2\ inches, its height exceeds 6\1/8\ inches, or its length
divided by its height is less than 1.3 or more than 2.5.
2.2 Nonmachinable Mail
Specific items mailed at the inter-BMC/ASF parcel post rates might
be subject to a nonmachinable surcharge (as described in E600) unless
the mailer paid the special delivery or special handling fee.
3.0 Sealing
Standard Mail is not sealed against postal inspection. Standard
Mail may be prepared for automated processing but must allow easy
examination.
4.0 Enclosures
Envelopes and cards enclosed in automation Standard Mail are
subject to the corresponding standards in C810.
C800 Automation-Compatible Mail
[Renumber current Exhibit [C800.]8.3 as Exhibit 7.2b; replace text of
current C810 with new C810 as follows:]
C810 Letters and Cards
1.0 Basic Standards
Letters and cards claimed at automation-based rates must meet the
standards in 2.0 through 7.0, and the general and specific standards
for mailability and mail class. Pieces claimed at a card rate must also
meet the standards in C100.
2.0 Dimensions
2.1 Shape and Size
Each mailpiece must be rectangular and:
a. Not more than 6\1/8\ or less than 3\1/2\ inches high.
b. Not more than 11\1/2\ or less than 5 inches long.
c. Not more than 0.25 or less than
(1) 0.007 inch thick if not more than 4\1/4\ inches high and 6
inches long; or
(2) 0.009 inch thick if more than 4-1/4 inches high or 6 inches
long, or both.
2.2 Aspect Ratio
The length of a mailpiece divided by its height (aspect ratio) must
be neither less than 1.3 nor more than 2.5.
2.3 Weight
Maximum weight limits are:
a. 2.5 ounces: upgradable Presorted First-Class, ZIP+4 Preferred
Periodicals, upgradable nonautomation Regular Standard Mail, and ZIP+4
Nonprofit Standard Mail.
b. 3 ounces: automation First-Class Mail, automation Regular
Periodicals, automation Standard Mail, and Barcoded Nonprofit Standard
Mail.
c. 3.3062 ounces: automation Enhanced Carrier Route heavy letters
(subject to 7.5).
d. 3.3087 ounces: automation Standard Mail heavy letters (subject
to 7.5).
e. 3.4383 ounces: automation First-Class Mail, automation Regular
Periodicals, and Barcoded Nonprofit Standard Mail heavy letters
(subject to 7.5).
3.0 General Prohibitions and Restrictions
3.1 Wraps and Closures
An automation-compatible mailpiece may not be polywrapped,
polybagged, or shrinkwrapped; have clasps, string, buttons, or similar
closure devices; or have protrusions that might impede or damage the
mail or mail processing equipment.
3.2 Staples and Saddle Stitching
Staples or saddle stitching may be used only on booklet-type
mailpieces to join the bound edge (spine). Inserted staples or
stitching must parallel the bound edge, seat tightly and securely, and
have no protrusions that might impede or damage the mail or mail
processing equipment.
3.3 Rigid and Odd-Shaped Items
Rigid items (e.g., pens, pencils, keys, bottle caps) are prohibited
within mailpieces. Reasonably flexible items (e.g., credit cards) are
permitted. Subject to 5.0, odd-shaped items (e.g., coins and tokens)
are permitted if firmly affixed to and wrapped within the contents of
the mailpiece and envelope to streamline the shape of the mailpiece for
automated processing.
4.0 Tabs, Wafer Seals, Tape, and Glue
Tabs, wafer seals, cellophane tape, or permanent glue (continuous
or spot) may be used as applicable to the
[[Page 10118]]
particular type of mailpiece under 7.0 if the sealing devices do not
interfere with the recognition of the barcode, rate marking, postage
information, or delivery or return addresses. In all cases, additional
tabs or seals may be used. Cellophane tape is not acceptable within the
barcode clear zone. Tabs or wafer seals placed in the barcode clear
zone must contain a paper face meeting the standards for background
reflectance and, if the barcode is not preprinted by the mailer, the
standards for acceptance of water-based ink. Tabs, wafer seals, and
tape must have a peel adhesion (shear strength) value of at least 15
ounces/inch at a speed of 12 inches/minute after application to a
stainless steel plate; the test is to be conducted 10 minutes after the
material is applied to the plate.
5.0 Flexibility
5.1 Ability to Bend
To ensure transport through automated equipment, a mailpiece and
its contents must bend easily when subjected to a transport belt
tension of 40 pounds around an 11-inch diameter drum.
5.2 Testing Flexibility
A mailer wanting to have mailpieces tested for flexibility must
submit at least 50 sample pieces and a written request to USPS
Engineering at least 6 weeks before the mailing date. The request must
describe mailpiece contents and construction, number of pieces being
produced, and level of preparation (e.g., presort). Engineering advises
the mailer by letter of its findings. If the mailpiece is approved, the
letter includes a unique number identifying the piece tested and serves
as evidence that the piece meets the relevant standards. A copy of the
letter must be attached to each postage statement submitted for
mailings of the approved piece. If requested by the USPS, the mailer
must show that pieces presented for mailing are the same as those
tested and approved.
6.0 Outside Labels and Stickers
6.1 Use
Permanent labels and stickers (i.e., those designed not to be
removed or relocated) must be affixed directly to the outside of the
mailpiece with permanent adhesive. A mailer may provide recipients with
relocatable labels to place on the outside of response pieces sent back
to the mailer. On pieces mailed at First-Class card rates or at
Periodicals rates, labels and stickers may be used only if permitted by
the applicable standards.
6.2 Pressure-Sensitive Labels
Pressure-sensitive labels and stickers affixed directly to
mailpieces before mailing must have a minimum peel adhesion to
stainless steel of 8 ounces/inch. This standard does not apply to
pressure-sensitive labels provided by the USPS to label packages to
sortation levels.
6.3 ``Sandwich'' Labels
A face stock/liner label (``sandwich'' label) is a two-part unit
with a face stock (top label) attached to a liner (bottom label)
affixed to the mailpiece. The face stock must have a peel adhesion
value of at least 2 ounces/inch with respect to the liner label and at
least 8 ounces/inch when reapplied to stainless steel.
7.0 Additional Standards for Specific Types of Pieces
7.1 Envelopes and Pieces Sealed on All Sides
An envelope or any mailpiece formed by an outer sheet or sheets
sealed on all four edges must be prepared from paper with a minimum
basis weight of 16 pounds (measured weight for 500 17- by 22-inch
sheets).
7.2 Folded Self-Mailers
A folded self-mailer must be prepared with the folded edge parallel
to the longest dimension and the address of the mailpiece. These
additional standards apply, based on the number of tabs used:
a. With one tab or wafer seal, the folded edge must be at the
bottom of the self-mailer. The tab or wafer seal must be placed in the
middle of the top edge of the piece. If formed of a single folded
sheet, the self-mailer must be prepared from paper with a minimum basis
weight of 28 pounds (measured weight for 500 17- by 22-inch sheets) or
70 pounds (measured weight for 500 25- by 38-inch sheets). If formed of
multiple folded sheets, the self-mailer must be prepared from paper
with a minimum basis weight of 24 pounds (measured weight for 500 17-
by 22-inch sheets) or 60 pounds (measured weight for 500 25- by 38-inch
sheets).
b. With two tabs or wafer seals, the folded edge may be at the top
or bottom of the self-mailer. The two tabs or wafer seals must be
placed on the open edge, opposite the folded edge. One tab or wafer
seal must be placed within 1 inch of the left edge of the piece; the
other, within 1 inch of the right edge of the piece (see Exhibit 7.2b).
The whole tab need not be placed within 1 inch of the edge. The tabs
must not obscure the FIM, postage, or required address information. The
folded self-mailer must be prepared from paper with a minimum basis
weight of 20 pounds (measured weight for 500 17- by 22-inch sheets).
[Insert renumbered Exhibit 7.2b.]
7.3 Booklet-Type Pieces
The front and back covers of a booklet-type piece must be prepared
from paper with a minimum basis weight of 20 pounds (measured weight
for 500 17- by 22-inch sheets). The bound edge (spine) must be the
longest edge of the piece and at the bottom, parallel to the address.
The top (unbound) edge must be secured with at least two tabs or wafer
seals. One tab or wafer seal must be placed within 1 inch of the left
edge of the piece; the other, within 1 inch of the right edge of the
piece.
7.4 Cards
Cards must be prepared from paper stock meeting the industry
standard for a basis weight of 75 pounds or greater, with none less
than 71.25 pounds (measured weight for 500 25- by 38-inch sheets). The
stock must be free from groundwood unless coated with a substance
adding to the stock's ability to resist an applied bending force. A
double postcard not prepared with all edges sealed must have the folded
edge at the top or bottom, and the open edge parallel to the address
must be secured with one tab (or other permitted closure) in the middle
of the length.
7.5 Heavy Letter Mail
Heavy letter mail (i.e., barcoded letter-size mail weighing more
than 3 ounces up to the maximum in 2.3) must meet the additional
barcoding standards in C840, must be prepared in an envelope, and must
be part of a 100% delivery point barcoded mailing. Heavy letter mail
may neither contain stiff enclosures nor be prepared as a self-mailer
or booklet-type mailpiece.
8.0 Enclosed Reply Cards and Envelopes
8.1 Basic Standard
Effective January 1, 1997, all courtesy reply and business reply
mail (BRM) letter-size cards and envelopes provided as enclosures in
automation First-Class, automation Regular Periodicals, and automation
Regular Standard Mail must meet the applicable standards in 1.0 through
7.0, bear a facing identification mark meeting the standards in 8.2,
and bear the correct delivery point barcode (or, for BRM, the correct
ZIP+4 barcode) for the delivery address of the reply piece as defined
by the USPS, subject to the barcode standards in C840. Mailers
[[Page 10119]]
must certify that these standards have been met when the corresponding
mail is presented to the USPS. BRM pieces must also meet the applicable
standards in S922.
8.2 FIM
Each enclosed reply piece described in 8.1 must bear the correct
facing identification mark (FIM), either FIM A for courtesy reply or
FIM C for BRM, prepared under the standards in S922.
C820 Flats
[Add new 1.0; renumber current 1.0 through 6.0 as 2.0 through 7.0,
respectively; renumber Exhibit 4.1a, Exhibit 4.1b, and Exhibit 4.2 as
Exhibit 5.1a, Exhibit 5.1b, and Exhibit 5.2, respectively; remove
renumbered 2.1 and redesignate renumbered 2.2 through 2.5 as 2.1
through 2.4, respectively; in renumbered 2.4b and 6.2, replace
``second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; in renumbered 2.4c, replace
``third-class'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; revise other text as
follows:]
1.0 Basic Standards
All pieces must meet the general and specific standards for
mailability and the class of mail and rate claimed.
2.0 General Dimensions
* * * * *
[Revise the heading and text of renumbered 2.3 as follows:]
2.3 Shape and Size
Each mailpiece must be rectangular and:
a. Not more than 12 or less than 6 inches high.
b. Not more than 15 or less than
(1) 5 inches long if from 6 to 7\1/2\ inches high; or
(2) 6 inches long if more than 7\1/2\ inches high.
c. Not more than 0.75 or less than 0.009 inch thick.
* * * * *
[Revise renumbered 4.0 as follows:]
4.0 Tabs, Wafer Seals, Tape, and Glue
Tabs, wafer seals, cellophane tape, or permanent glue (continuous
or spot) may be used if these sealing devices do not interfere with the
recognition of the barcode, rate marking, postage information, and
delivery and return addresses. Cellophane tape may not be placed over
the barcode or where any part of the barcode will be printed. Tabs or
seals placed in the area on which any part of the barcode is printed
must contain a paper face meeting the standards for background
reflectance. Tabs, wafer seals, and tape must have a peel adhesion
(shear strength) value of at least 15 ounces/inch at a speed of 12
inches/minute after application to a stainless steel plate; the test is
to be conducted 10 minutes after the material is applied to the plate.
5.0 Turning Ability and Deflection
[In renumbered 5.1a, replace ``(see Exhibit 4.1a)'' with ``(see Exhibit
5.1a)''; in renumbered 5.1b, replace ``(see Exhibit 4.1b)'' with ``(see
Exhibit 5.1b)''; in renumbered 5.2 (heading), replace ``Rigidity'' with
``Deflection''; in renumbered 5.2, replace reference ``Exhibit 4.2''
with ``Exhibit 5.2''; no other change.]
* * * * *
[Revise renumbered 7.0 as follows:]
7.0 Outside Labels and Stickers
7.1 Use
Permanent labels and stickers (i.e., those designed not to be
removed or relocated) must be affixed directly to the outside of the
mailpiece with permanent adhesive. A mailer may provide recipients with
relocatable labels to place on the outside of response pieces sent back
to the mailer. On pieces mailed at Periodicals rates, labels and
stickers may be used only if permitted by the applicable standards.
7.2 Pressure-Sensitive Labels
Pressure-sensitive labels and stickers affixed directly to
mailpieces before mailing must have a minimum peel adhesion to
stainless steel of 8 ounces/inch. This standard does not apply to
pressure-sensitive labels provided by the USPS to label packages to
sortation levels.
7.3 ``Sandwich'' Labels
A face stock/liner label (``sandwich'' label) is a two-part unit
with a face stock (top label) attached to a liner (bottom label)
affixed to the mailpiece. The face stock must have a peel adhesion
value of at least 2 ounces/inch with respect to the liner label and at
least 8 ounces/inch when reapplied to stainless steel.
* * * * *
[Revise the heading of C830 as follows:]
C830 OCR Standards
* * * * *
C840 Barcoded Mailpieces
* * * * *
[Revise 2.0 as follows:]
2.0 Barcode Location--Letter-Size Pieces
2.1 Barcode Clear Zone
Each piece in an automation rate mailing and each piece of
upgradable Presorted First-Class or upgradable Regular Standard Mail
must have a barcode clear zone unless the piece bears a DPBC in the
address block. The barcode clear zone and all printing and material in
the clear zone must meet the reflectance standards in 5.0. The barcode
clear zone is a rectangular area in the lower right corner of the
address side of cards and letter-size pieces defined by these
boundaries:
a. Right: right edge of the piece.
b. Left: 4-3/4 inches from the right edge of the piece.
c. Bottom: bottom edge of the piece.
d. Top: 5/8 inch from the bottom edge of the piece.
2.2 General Standards
Barcode location is subject to these general standards:
a. Pieces in automation rate mailings, except those subject to 2.2b
or 2.2c, may bear a DPBC (or, when permitted by standard, a 5-digit
barcode) in either the address block or the barcode clear zone. Pieces
may bear a ZIP+4 barcode (subject to rate eligibility standards) only
when the ZIP+4 barcode is in the address block and the DPBC is
correctly positioned within the barcode clear zone.
b. ZIP+4 rate pieces may bear a DPBC within either the address
block or the barcode clear zone. Pieces may not bear a ZIP+4 barcode in
the lower right corner. Subject to rate eligibility standards, pieces
may bear a ZIP+4 barcode in the address block or a 5-digit barcode
within either the address block or the barcode clear zone in the lower
right corner of the address side.
c. Automation rate pieces weighing more than 3 ounces, up to the
maximum weight for barcoded pieces permitted by C810, must bear a DPBC
in the address block.
2.3 Printed on Mailpiece
Except as noted in 8.2 for 5-digit barcodes, if the barcode is
printed directly on the lower right corner of the piece, the entire
barcode must be within the barcode read area defined by these limits:
a. Horizontally, the leftmost bar must be between 3-1/2 inches and
4-1/4 inches from the right edge of the mailpiece.
b. Vertically, the barcode must be positioned within the area
between 3/16 inch and 7/16 inch from the bottom edge of the mailpiece;
the bottom of the bars must be 1/4 inch 1/16 inch from the
bottom edge of the mailpiece.
2.4 Printed on Inserts
If the barcode is printed on an insert to appear through a window
in the lower right corner of an envelope:
[[Page 10120]]
a. The envelope and window must meet the physical standards in 7.0.
b. The entire barcode must be within the barcode clear zone (but
need not be completely within the barcode read area).
c. When the insert showing through the window is moved to any of
its limits inside the envelope, the entire barcode must remain within
the barcode clear zone, and a clear space must be maintained that is at
least 1/8 inch between the barcode and the left and right edges of the
window, at least 1/25 inch between the barcode and the top edge of the
window, and at least 3/16 inch between the barcode and the bottom edge
of the mailpiece.
2.5 Printed in Address Block
When the barcode is included as part of the address block:
a. The barcode must be placed above the address line containing the
recipient's name; below the city, state, and ZIP Code line; above or
below the keyline information; or above or below the optional
endorsement line.
b. The printing of the barcode anywhere between the address line
containing the recipient's name and the city, state, and ZIP Code line
is prohibited.
c. The minimum clearance between the barcode and any information
line above or below it within the address block must be at least 1/25
inch, and the separation between the barcode and top line or bottom
line of the address block must not exceed 5/8 inch.
d. If a window envelope is used, the clearance between the leftmost
and rightmost bars and any printing or window edge must be at least 1/8
inch, and the clearance between the barcode and the top and bottom
window edges must be at least 1/25 inch. These clearances must be
maintained during the insert's range of movement in the envelope.
Address block windows on heavy letter mail (as defined in 2.2c) must be
covered; such windows may be covered on other mail. Covers for address
block windows are subject to 7.3.
e. If an address label is used, a clear space of at least 1/8 inch
must be left between the barcode and the left and right edges of the
address label, and the clearance between the barcode and the top and
bottom edges of the address label must be at least 1/25 inch.
f. The rightmost bar must be at least 1/2 inch from the right edge
of the mailpiece, and the leftmost bar must be less than 10-1/2 inches
from the right edge of the mailpiece and at least 1/2 inch from the
left edge of the mailpiece; the top of each bar must be less than 4
inches from the bottom edge of the mailpiece; and the bottom line of
the address block, including the barcode, must be at least 5/8 inch
from the bottom of the mailpiece.
[Renumber current 3.0 through 9.0 as 4.0 through 10.0, respectively; in
renumbered 7.2, replace the reference ``6.3'' with ``7.3''; in
renumbered 7.3, replace the reference ``4.0'' with ``5.0''; add new 3.0
as follows:]
3.0 Barcode Location--Flat-Size Mail
The barcode may be anywhere on the address side that is at least 1/
8 inch from any edge of the mailpiece. That portion of the surface of
the piece on which the barcode is printed must meet the reflectance
standards in 5.0. The address side may bear only one POSTNET-format
barcode (i.e., the correct barcode for the delivery address on the
mailpiece). Other mailer-applied non-POSTNET barcodes may appear on the
address side if their format is not intelligible or not confusing to
automated postal equipment. Address block barcodes are subject to the
standards in 2.5a through 2.5f.
[Revise renumbered 4.0 as follows:]
4.0 Barcode Dimensions and Spacing
Barcodes are subject to these standards for dimensions and spacing.
Extraneous ink or ink voids must not cause any bar to fail to meet
these standards:
a. A full bar must be 0.125 0.010 inch high.
b. A half bar must be 0.050 0.010 inch high.
c. All bars must be 0.020 0.005 inch wide.
d. Measured over any 1/2 inch, horizontal spacing of the bars must
be 22 2 bars per inch, and pitch (a bar and a space) must
average at least 0.0416 inch but no more than 0.05 inch. The clear
vertical space between bars must not be less than 0.012 inch nor more
than 0.04 inch.
5.0 Reflectance
* * * * *
5.4 Dark Fibers and Background Patterns
* * * * *
c. The barcode clear zone on all nonbarcoded pieces in a letter-
size barcoded mailing.
* * * * *
8.0 Use of ZIP+4 or 5-Digit Barcodes
8.1 Automation Pieces
Pieces in automation rate mailings are subject to these standards:
a. Subject to the eligibility standards for the rate claimed,
pieces in automation rate mailings of Preferred Periodicals and
Nonprofit Standard Mail may bear a ZIP+4 or 5-digit barcode if the
barcode meets the standards in 3.0 through 6.0 except that a ZIP+4
barcode may not appear in the lower right corner on pieces in ZIP+4
rate mailings or in Barcoded rate mailings of pieces with address block
barcodes.
b. Letter-size pieces in automation rate mailings of First-Class
Mail, Regular Periodicals, and Standard Mail may not bear a 5-digit or
ZIP+4 barcode in the lower right corner. Pieces may bear a 5-digit or
ZIP+4 barcode in the address block if a DPBC appears in the lower right
corner.
c. Flat-size pieces in automation rate mailings of First-Class
Mail, Regular Periodicals, and Standard Mail may not bear a 5-digit
barcode.
8.2 Leftmost Bar
Any 5-digit barcode must be located as specified in 2.0, except
that, if placed in the barcode clear zone, the leftmost bar of the
barcode must be between 4-1/8 and 4-1/4 inches from the right edge of
the mailpiece.
* * * * *
D Deposit, Collection, and Delivery
D000 Basic Information
* * * * *
D020 Plant Loads
[In 3.1, replace ``second-, third-, and fourth-class mail'' with
``Periodicals and Standard Mail'' and ``mailing statement'' with
``postage statement''; in the table in 5.0 in the first column, replace
``Second-Class'' with ``Periodicals'' and ``Bulk Mail Acceptance Unit''
with ``Business Mail Entry Unit (BMEU)''; in the table in 5.0 in the
fourth column, replace ``Post Office of Acceptance Unit'' with ``BMEU
Post Office'' and both ``Eligible SCF'' and ``Delivery/SCF Office''
with ``Entry Office''; in the table in 5.0, in footnote 1, replace
``Mailing statements'' with ``Postage statements''; in the table in
5.0, in footnote 2, replace ``carrier route First-Class, Presorted
First-Class, ZIP+4, and Barcoded rate mail'' with ``Presorted First-
Class and all automation rate mail.'']
* * * * *
D041 Customer Mail Receptacles
[In 2.10, replace ``second-class mail'' with ``Periodicals.''] D042
Conditions of Delivery
[In 7.0, replace the reference ``M011'' with ``M012.'']
[[Page 10121]]
D071 Express Mail and Priority Mail Drop Shipment
[In 1.2, 1.3, 2.2, and 2.3, replace ``bulk mail acceptance unit'' with
``business mail entry unit.'']
D072 Drop Shipment of Metered Mail
[In 5.2, 5.3, 6.2, and 6.3, replace ``mailing statement'' with
``postage statement.'']
4.0 Option 2: Deposit at Another Post Office
* * * * *
[Revise 4.4 as follows:]
4.4 Markings
The drop shipment endorsement placed in the ad plate area may
include the marking required by the standards for the rate claimed if
that marking is placed directly below the drop ship endorsement and
meets the standards in M012. The marking may also be provided
separately, not necessarily by meter ad plate, directly below the meter
stamp or imprint, if it meets the relevant size and legibility
standards.
* * * * *
5.0 Option 3: Consolidated Drop Shipment With Endorsement
* * * * *
[Combine 5.2 and 5.3 as 5.2 and revise the heading as follows:]
5.2 Barcoded and Nonbarcoded Portion
[In new 5.2, replace ``mailing statement'' with ``postage statement.'']
[Renumber current 5.4 through 5.11 as 5.3 through 5.10, respectively.]
* * * * *
6.0 Option 4: Consolidated Drop Shipment Without Endorsement
* * * * *
[Combine 6.2 and 6.3 as 6.2 and revise the heading as follows:]
6.2 Barcoded and Nonbarcoded Portion
[In new 6.2, replace ``mailing statement'' with ``postage statement.'']
Renumber current 6.4 through 5.12 as 6.3 through 6.11, respectively.]
* * * * *
D100 First-Class Mail
[In 2.5, replace ``carrier route First-Class, Presorted First-Class,
ZIP+4, and Barcoded rate'' with ``Presorted First-Class or automation
rate''; remove 2.6; in 3.3, replace ``a presorted or automation First-
Class rate'' with ``a Presorted First-Class rate or an automation
First-Class rate''; remove 3.4 and renumber current 3.5 and 3.6 as 3.4
and 3.5, respectively; in renumbered 3.5, replace ``mailing statement''
with ``postage statement.'']
[Revise the heading of D200 as follows:]
D200 Periodicals
D210 Basic Information
[In 1.0, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.4, 4.0 (heading), 4.1, and 4.2, replace
``[S]econd-[C]lass [[M]ail]'' with ``Periodicals''; in 2.1, replace
``First-, third- or fourth-class'' with ``First-Class or Standard
Mail''; in 4.4a, replace ``second-class mail privileges'' with
``Periodicals mailing privileges''; in 4.5d, replace ``mailing
statements'' with ``postage statements.'']
D230 Additional Entry
[In 1.1, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; in 1.1 and 1.5,
replace ``mailing statements'' with ``postage statements''; in 4.5,
replace ``second- and third-class mail'' and ``third-class mail'' with
``Periodicals and Standard Mail (A)'' and ``Standard Mail (A),''
respectively.]
[Remove D300.]
[Remove D400.]
[No change to D500.]
[Insert new D600, based on current D300 and D400, and revise as
follows:]
D600 Standard Mail
1.0 Service Objectives
The USPS does not guarantee the delivery of Standard Mail within a
specified time. Standard Mail might receive deferred service. Local
postmasters can provide more information.
2.0 Mail Deposit
2.1 Single-Piece Rates
Single-piece rate parcel post, bound printed matter, Special
Standard Mail, or Library Mail must be deposited at a time and place
specified by the mailing post office postmaster. Single-piece rate
Standard Mail (A) bearing regular adhesive stamps may be placed into
collection boxes, mailchutes, receiving boxes, or other places where
mail is accepted. Mail with meter postage must be deposited in a
location under the jurisdiction of the licensing post office, except as
permitted in D072. Mail with permit imprints must be presented at the
post office as specified in P040 or P700. Mail with precanceled stamps
must be presented at the post office as specified in P023.
2.2 Bulk Rates
Bulk rate Standard Mail must be presented at a business mail entry
unit of the post office where the postage permit or license is held and
the annual bulk mailing fee is paid. Mailings must be deposited at the
locations and times specified by the postmaster. Plant-loaded mailings
must be presented as specified by the applicable standards and the
plant load agreement. Metered bulk Standard Mail may be deposited at
other than the licensing post office only as permitted under D072.
Nonprofit Standard Mail must be deposited only at post offices where
the USPS has approved a nonprofit authorization under the relevant
standards.
2.3 Zoned Rates
Unless excepted by other standards, pieces paid at zoned rates must
be presented for acceptance at the post office from which the
applicable zoned rate postage is computed.
2.4 Separation of Mailings
Unless permitted by standard, the same mailing (as defined in M011)
may not include pieces claimed at Regular rates, Nonprofit rates, or
Enhanced Carrier Route rates; or at both automation and nonautomation
rates; or at both Nonprofit 3/5 and Nonprofit carrier route rates.
Mailings that separately qualify at Enhanced Carrier Route and Regular
rates, or mailings that separately qualify at Nonprofit rates may be
reported on the same postage statement, if all pieces from each mailing
are presented at the same time and are correctly marked and prepared
under the respective standards.
* * * * *
[No change to D900.]
E Eligibility
E000 Special Eligibility Standards
E010 Overseas Military Mail
[In 1.3, replace ``Third- or fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail''; in
1.4, replace ``Second-[C]lass'' with ``Periodicals''; in 1.5, replace
the reference ``C400'' and ``fourth-class'' with ``C600'' and
``Standard Mail (B),'' respectively; in 3.1, replace ``second-, third-,
or fourth-class'' with ``Periodicals or Standard Mail''; in 3.3,
replace ``second-, third-, or fourth-class mail'' with ``Periodicals or
Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
E040 Free Matter for the Blind and Other Handicapped Persons
[In 4.1b, replace the reference ``C400'' with ``C600.'']
* * * * *
E060 Official Mail (Penalty)
[Renumber Exhibit 13.4 as Exhibit 13.3; in 13.3, add to end of section
``See Exhibit 13.3 for format.'' In 4.3, 5.4a,
[[Page 10122]]
6.1, 13.0 (heading), 13.1, 13.2, 13.3, renumbered Exhibit 13.3, 13.5,
and 15.2b, replace ``[S]econd-[C]lass [[M]ail]'' with ``Periodicals'';
in 13.4, replace ``Exhibit 13.4'' with ``Exhibit 13.3''; remove the
last sentence in 7.3; remove 9.6 and renumber 9.7 through 9.9 as 9.6
through 9.8, respectively; in 12.1, replace ``(including Priority
Mail), single-piece third-class, and single-piece fourth-class (parcel
post, special-fourth-class, and bound printed matter)'' with
``(including Priority Mail) and single-piece rate Standard Mail
(single-piece rate Standard Mail (A), parcel post, Special Standard
Mail, and bound printed matter)''; in 12.8, replace ``Third- or fourth-
class'' with ``Standard Mail''; in 12.9, replace ``Third- and fourth-
class'' with ``Standard Mail''; in 15.2a, replace ``First-, third-, and
fourth-class'' with ``First-Class and Standard Mail''; no other change
in text.]
E070 Mixed Classes
[In 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.3, and 3.4, replace ``First- or [T]hird-[C]lass
[[M]ail]'' with ``First-Class Mail or Standard Mail (A)''; in 2.1,
replace ``second-, third-, or fourth-class'' with ``Periodicals or
Standard Mail (A) or (B)''; in 2.4, 2.5, 3.1, 3.2b, 3.5, 3.6, 4.2, and
5.0, replace ``[T]hird-[C]lass [Mail]'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in
3.0 (heading), 3.1, 3.2, 3.2a, 3.2c, 3.2e, and 5.0 (heading), replace
``[S]econd-[C]lass'' with ``Periodicals''; in 3.3, replace ``comparable
First- or third-class presort rate'' with ``comparable First-Class Mail
or Standard Mail (A) rate''; in 4.0 (heading), replace ``Third- or
Fourth-Class Parcels'' with ``Standard Mail Parcels''; in 4.1, replace
``with third- or fourth-class mail'' with ``in pieces of Standard
Mail''; in 4.2, 5.0,and 6.0 (heading), replace ``[F]ourth-[C]lass''
with ``Standard Mail (B)''; in 4.2, replace the reference ``E400'' with
``E600''; in 6.1, replace ``special fourth-class'' with ``Special
Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
E100 First-Class Mail
[Insert text of current E110; revise as follows:]
E110 Basic Standards
1.0 Classification and Description
* * * * *
1.2 Written or Typewritten Matter
Matter wholly or partially in writing or typewriting must be mailed
as First-Class Mail or Express Mail, except authorized additions to
Periodicals or Standard Mail and written or typewritten matter in
Library Mail and Special Standard Mail, as permitted by the
corresponding standards.
* * * * *
3.0 Rates for Postal Cards and Postcards
* * * * *
3.3 Card Rates
To be eligible for the card rates, a postcard or postal card (and
each part of a double postcard or double postal card) must meet the
physical standards in C100. The reply part of a double postcard does
not have to bear postage when originally mailed, but it must bear
postage at the applicable rate when returned. Cards not meeting the
standards for card rates must be paid at the rates for matter other
than cards.
* * * * *
[Remove text of current 4.0 and 5.0; renumber 6.0 and 7.0 as 4.0 and
5.0, respectively.]
4.0 Fees
[Revise the heading and text of renumbered 4.1 as follows:]
4.1 Presort Mailing
A First-Class presort mailing fee must be paid once each 12-month
period at each office of mailing by any person or organization entering
mailings at automation or Presorted First-Class rates and/or Presorted
Priority Mail rates. Payment of one fee allows a mailer to enter mail
at all those rates. Persons or organizations paying this fee may enter
mail of their clients as well as their own mail.
* * * * *
[Revise renumbered 5.0 as follows:]
5.0 Documentation
A postage statement, completed and signed by the mailer, using the
correct USPS form or an approved facsimile, must be submitted with each
mailing except for single-piece First-Class or single-piece Priority
Mail mailings in which the correct postage is affixed to each piece.
Supporting documentation might be required by the standards for the
rate claimed or the postage payment method used.
* * * * *
[Replace text of current E131 with new E130 as follows:]
E130 Nonautomation First-Class Mail Rates
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 All Pieces
All pieces of nonautomation First-Class Mail must:
a. Meet the basic standards for First-Class Mail in E110.
b. Weigh 11 ounces or less.
c. Bear a delivery address.
d. Meet the applicable documentation and postage payment standards
in P012, P013, and P100.
1.2 Barcodes
Any POSTNET barcode on a mailpiece in a nonautomation First-Class
mailing must be the correct barcode for the delivery address and meet
the standards in C840 and A950.
1.3 Nonstandard Surcharge
Single-piece or Presorted First-Class Mail is subject to a
nonstandard surcharge if it is not mailed at the card rate, weighs 1
ounce or less, and meets the definition of nonstandard mail in C100.
2.0 Single-Piece Rate
The single-piece card rate applies to any card meeting the
applicable standards in C100 that is not eligible for or claimed at
Presorted or automation First-Class rates. The single-piece rate
applies to any other First-Class Mail weighing 11 ounces or less that
is not eligible for or claimed at the single-piece card rate, the
Presorted First-Class rate, or an automation First-Class rate.
3.0 Presorted Rate
3.1 Letters
In addition to the standards in 1.0, all pieces in a Presorted
First-Class rate mailing must:
a. Be part of a single mailing of at least 500 pieces of Presorted
First-Class Mail, subject to 3.2.
b. Be in the same processing category and meet the applicable
physical standards in C100.
c. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct ZIP Code or
ZIP+4 code and that meets the corresponding standards for accuracy and
maintenance in 3.3 and 3.4.
d. Be marked, sorted, and documented as specified in M130.
3.2 Cards and Letters
Cards claimed at card rates must meet the physical standards for
card rates in C100. Pieces claimed at card rates and pieces claimed at
letter rates are subject to separate minimum volume criteria, but may
be combined in the same mailing and reported on the same postage
statement.
3.3 Address Quality
Effective January 1, 1997, addresses appearing on all pieces
claimed at the Presorted rate must be updated within 6 months before
the mailing date by a USPS-approved address update tool (e.g., the
``Address Correction
[[Page 10123]]
Endorsement,'' ACS, or NCOA). Additional alternatives currently under
development (such as FASTFORWARDSM) may be used to meet this
requirement when they have received final approval. Mailers must
certify that this standard has been met when the corresponding mail is
presented to the USPS. This standard applies to each address
individually, not to a specific list or mailing. An address meeting
this standard may be used in mailings at any other rate to which the
standard applies throughout the 6-month period following its most
recent update.
3.4 ZIP Code Accuracy
Effective October 1, 1996, 5-digit ZIP Codes included in addresses
appearing on pieces claimed at the Presorted rate must be verified and
corrected within 12 months before the mailing date by a USPS-approved
method. Mailers must certify that this standard has been met when the
corresponding mail is presented to the USPS. This standard applies to
each address individually, not to a specific list or mailing. An
address meeting this standard may be used in mailings at any other rate
to which the standard applies throughout the 12-month period following
its most recent update.
[Remove E132.]
[Replace text of current E142, E144, E145, E147, E148, and E149 with
new E140 as follows:]
E140 Automation First-Class Mail Rates
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 All Pieces
All pieces in a First-Class automation rate mailing must:
a. Meet the basic standards for First-Class Mail in E110.
b. Be part of a single mailing of at least 500 pieces of automation
rate First-Class Mail, subject to 1.2.
c. Be in the same processing category and meet the applicable
physical standards in C810 or C820.
d. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct ZIP Code,
ZIP+4 code, or numeric equivalent to the delivery point barcode (DPBC).
e. Meet the address quality and coding standards in 1.3, 1.4 (if
applicable), A800, and A950.
f. Bear an accurate barcode meeting the standards in C840, either a
DPBC (if a card or letter) or a ZIP+4 barcode or DPBC (if a flat),
either on the piece or on an insert showing through a barcode window.
g. Be marked, sorted, and documented as specified in M810 or M820,
as applicable.
h. Meet the applicable documentation and postage payment standards
in P012, P013, and P100.
1.2 Cards and Letters
Cards claimed at card rates must meet the physical standards for
card rates in C100. Pieces claimed at card rates and pieces claimed at
letter rates are subject to separate minimum volume criteria, but may
be combined in the same mailing and reported on the same postage
statement.
1.3 Address Quality
Effective January 1, 1997, addresses appearing on all pieces
claimed at automation rates must be updated within 6 months before the
mailing date by a USPS-approved address update tool (e.g., the
``Address Correction Endorsement,'' ACS, or NCOA). Additional
alternatives currently under development (such as FASTFORWARD SM)
may be used to meet this requirement when they have received final
approval. Mailers must certify that this standard has been met when the
corresponding mail is presented to the USPS. This standard applies to
each address individually, not to a specific list or mailing. An
address meeting this standard may be used in mailings at any other rate
to which the standard applies throughout the 6-month period following
its most recent update.
1.4 Carrier Route Presort
Carrier route rates are available only for letter-size mail and
only for those 5-digit ZIP Code areas identified in the USPS City/State
File used for address coding. Subject to A930 and A950, mailers must
apply carrier route codes to mailings using CASS-certified software and
the current USPS Carrier Route Information System (CRIS) scheme or
another AIS product containing carrier route information. Carrier route
and City/State File information must be updated within 90 days before
the mailing date.
1.5 Enclosed Reply Cards and Envelopes
Effective January 1, 1997, all courtesy reply and business reply
mail (BRM) cards and letter-size envelopes provided as enclosures in
First-Class automation mail must meet the standards in C810 for
enclosed reply cards and envelopes. Mailers must certify that this
standard has been met when the corresponding mail is presented to the
USPS.
2.0 Rate Application
2.1 Letters or Cards
First-Class automation rates apply to each piece that is sorted
under M810 into the corresponding qualifying groups:
a. Subject to 1.4, pieces in full carrier route trays, or in
carrier route groups of 10 or more pieces each placed in 5-digit
carrier routes trays, qualify for the Carrier Route automation rate.
(Preparation to qualify for that rate is optional and need not be
performed for all carrier routes in a 5-digit area.)
b. Groups of 150 or more pieces in 5-digit trays qualify for the 5-
Digit automation rate. (Preparation to qualify for that rate is
optional and need not be performed for all 5-digit destinations.)
c. Groups of 150 or more pieces in 3-digit or 3-digit scheme trays
qualify for the 3-Digit automation rate.
d. Pieces in AADC and mixed AADC trays qualify for the Basic
automation rate.
2.2 Flats
First-Class automation rates apply to each piece that is sorted
under M820 into the corresponding qualifying groups:
a. Pieces in 5-digit or 3-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each
qualify for the 3/5 automation rate.
b. Pieces in ADC or mixed ADC packages qualify for the Basic
automation rate.
[Revise the heading of E200 as follows:]
E200 Periodicals
E210 Basic Standards
[Revise the heading of E211 as follows:]
E211 Standards Applicable to All Periodicals Publications
[Renumber current 1.1 and 1.2 as 1.2 and 1.3, respectively; in
renumbered 1.3, and in 2.1, 3.0, 4.1, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2, 7.2, 7.4, 7.5,
8.1, 8.2, 9.0, 11.1, and 12.0, replace ``second-class [mail]'' with
``Periodicals''; in 1.1, 4.1, 5.3, 7.4, 7.5, 10.2, and 13.1a, replace
``second-class mail privileges'' with ``Periodicals mailing
privileges''; in 6.1 and 9.0, replace ``First-, third-, or fourth-class
rates'' with ``First-Class or Standard Mail rates''; add new 1.1 and
revise other text as follows:]
1.0 Basic Information
1.1 Second-Class
Effective July 1, 1996, second-class mail was renamed Periodicals.
This name change does not alter the status of authorized publications;
second-class mailing privileges are now referred to as
[[Page 10124]]
Periodicals mailing privileges and have comparable eligibility
standards.
* * * * *
10.0 Identification
* * * * *
10.4 Bound Publication
In a bound publication (one secured with two or more staples,
spiral binding, glue, stitching, or other permanent fastening), the
identification statement must be shown conspicuously as described in
10.3 or on one of the last three editorial pages inside the back cover.
If the publication is mailed with a permissible nonincidental enclosure
paid with permit imprint, the identification statement must be located
as specified in 10.3.
10.5 Identification Statement Content
The identification statement must contain:
* * * * *
g. The imprint ``Periodicals Postage Paid at * * *'' or, if mailed
at two or more offices, ``Periodicals Postage Paid at * * * and at
additional mailing offices.'' A notice of pending application is shown
instead if copies are mailed while an application is pending:
``Application to Mail at Periodicals Postage Rates is Pending at * *
*.''
* * * * *
14.0 Basic Rate Eligibility
14.1 Regular Rates
Regular rates apply to all copies of an authorized Periodicals
publication mailed by a publisher or news agent, except nonrequester
and nonsubscriber copies under E215, unless the publication is
authorized a preferred rate. Mailings are also subject to the standards
that apply to rates or discounts claimed. Regular rates consist of a
per piece charge, a zoned charge for the weight of the advertising
portion of the publication, and an unzoned charge for the weight of the
nonadvertising portion. Each piece rate requires specific preparation.
14.2 Preferred Rates
Preferred rates consist of the in-county rates and the special
rates (nonprofit, classroom, and science-of-agriculture). Requester
publications are not eligible for preferred rates. Copies of authorized
Periodicals publications mailed at any preferred rate must meet the
corresponding eligibility standards. Nonsubscriber copies mailed at
preferred rates are subject to the standards in E215 and E270 and those
applicable to other rates or discounts claimed. Preferred rates consist
of a per piece charge, a zoned charge for the weight of the advertising
portion of the publication, and an unzoned charge for the weight of the
nonadvertising portion, except that in-county rates apply without
differentiation to the advertising and nonadvertising portions. Each
piece rate requires specific preparation.
14.3 Discounts and Adjustments
Postage for Periodicals publications is reduced by all applicable
discounts and adjustments:
a. The nonadvertising adjustment applies to the outside-county
piece rate charges for Regular and Preferred Periodicals publications
and is computed as described in P013.
b. Presort discounts are available for Regular and Preferred
Periodicals, subject to E230.
c. Automation discounts are available for Regular and Preferred
Periodicals, subject to E240.
d. Destination entry discounts are available for copies of a
Periodicals publication entered by the publisher at specific USPS
facilities, subject to E250.
14.4 Copies Mailed by Public
The applicable single-piece First-Class or Standard Mail rate is
charged on copies of publications mailed by the general public (i.e.,
other than publishers or registered news agents) and on copies returned
to publishers or news agents.
E212 Additional Standards for Qualification Categories
[In 1.1, 5.1, 5.3, 6.1, and 6.2, replace ``second-class [mail]'' with
``Periodicals''; in 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 5.1, and 5.3, replace
``second-class [mail] privileges'' with ``Periodicals mailing
privileges''; in 6.5, replace ``third- or fourth-class rates'' with
``Standard Mail rates.'']
[Revise the heading of E213 as follows:]
E213 Periodicals Mailing Privileges
[In 1.6b, 2.1, 3.5, and 3.6f, replace ``second-class [mail]'' with
``Periodicals''; in 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.9, 2.1, 3.1, 3.4, 3.5,
4.0 (heading), 4.1, 4.2, and 4.3, replace ``[S]econd-[C]lass [[M]ail]
[P]rivileges'' with ``Periodicals [M]ailing [P]rivileges''; in 2.1,
replace ``First-, third-, or fourth-class rates'' with ``First-Class or
Standard Mail rates''; in 2.2, replace ``third- or fourth-class rates''
with ``Standard Mail rates''; in 3.7 and 4.3, replace ``under 39 CFR
954, Rules of Practice in Proceedings Relative to the Denial,
Suspension, or Revocation of Second-Class Mail Privileges, a copy of
which'' with ``under 39 CFR 954, a copy of which''; no other change.]
E214 Reentry
[In 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.2, 3.1, 3.3, 3.6, and 3.10, replace ``second-
class'' with ``Periodicals.'' In 2.1, replace ``second-class mail
privileges'' with ``Periodicals mailing privileges.'' In 3.10, replace
``third- or fourth-class postage'' with ``Standard Mail postage''; in
3.12, replace ``under 39 CFR 954, Rules of Practice in Proceedings
Relative to the Denial, Suspension, or Revocation of Second-Class Mail
Privileges, a copy of which'' with ``under 39 CFR 954, a copy of
which''; no other change.]
* * * * *
3.0 Applications for Reentry
* * * * *
3.9 During Appeal
During the appeal:
a. Copies of any issue of a publication denied reentry under 1.0
and found unqualified for Periodicals mailing privileges are accepted
in a pending status at the applicable Standard Mail rates. For this
standard, the pending status begins when the appeal is filed and
continues until the end of the appeal process.
b. Copies of a publication denied reentry under 2.0 are accepted at
the currently applicable Periodicals rate.
c. The publisher must submit the applicable Periodicals and
Standard Mail postage statements with each mailing of the publication
in a pending status. Failure to submit these statements is sufficient
grounds to deny a postage refund under 3.12.
* * * * *
E215 Copies Not Paid or Requested by Addressee
[In 1.8, 2.1, 2.2, 2.6, and 2.7, replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals''; in 1.6, replace ``second-class privileges'' with
``Periodicals mailing privileges''; in 2.6, replace ``Express Mail, or
First-, third-, or fourth-class rates, as appropriate'' with ``the
appropriate Express Mail, First-Class Mail, or Standard Mail rate'' and
``third- or fourth-class rates'' with ``Standard Mail rates''; in 2.7,
replace ``Express Mail, or First-, third-, or fourth-class rate'' with
``Express Mail, First-Class Mail, or Standard Mail rate.'']
E216 Publisher Records
[Redesignate and revise text of current E216.3.0 as M210; renumber
current E216.4.0 and E216.5.0 as E216.3.0 and E216.4.0, respectively;
in renumbered 3.1, 3.4, 4.1, and 4.2, replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals''; in 1.1, 2.2,
[[Page 10125]]
and renumbered 3.2 and 3.3, replace ``second-class mail privileges''
with ``Periodicals mailing privileges.'']
E217 Authorization for Preferred Rates
[In 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.4, 3.5c, and 3.5g, replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals''; in 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, replace ``second-class [mail]
privileges'' with ``Periodicals mailing privileges''; in 2.1, replace
``First-, third-, or fourth-class rates'' with ``First-Class or
Standard Mail rates''; in 2.2, replace ``third- or fourth-class
postage'' with ``Standard Mail postage''; in 3.4, replace ``third- or
fourth-class rates'' with ``Standard Mail rates.'']
[Replace text of current 230 with new E231 and E239 as follows:]
E230 Nonautomation Periodicals
[Remove E230.1.0 through E230.6.0; insert new E231 as follows:]
E231 Nonautomation Regular Periodicals
1.0 General Information
1.1 Standards
The standards for presort rates are in addition to the basic
standards for Periodicals in E210, the standards for other rates or
discounts claimed, and the applicable preparation standards in M210,
M810, or M820. Not all combinations of presort level, automation, and
destination entry discounts are permitted.
1.2 Palletized Mail
A correctly prepared package is the equivalent of a sack when
palletized under M045. Individual pieces qualify for the presort level
rate appropriate for the palletized package in which they are placed,
regardless of the destination of the pallet. Eligibility for
destination entry or other zoned rates depends on the point of entry.
1.3 ZIP Code Accuracy
Effective October 1, 1996, 5-digit ZIP Codes included in addresses
appearing on pieces claimed at the 3/5 or Basic rates must be verified
and corrected within 12 months before the mailing date by a USPS-
approved method. Mailers must certify that this standard has been met
when the corresponding mail is presented to the USPS. This standard
applies to each address individually, not to a specific list or
mailing. An address meeting this standard may be used in mailings at
any other rate to which the standard applies throughout the 12-month
period following its most recent update.
2.0 Carrier Route Rates
2.1 Carrier Route Information
Subject to A930 and A950, mailers must apply carrier route codes to
mailings using CASS-certified software and the current USPS Carrier
Route Information System (CRIS) scheme or another AIS product
containing carrier route information. Carrier route information must be
updated within 90 days before the mailing date.
2.2 Eligibility
Preparation to qualify eligible pieces for carrier route rates is
optional and is subject to M210. Carrier route sort need not be
performed for all carrier routes in a 5-digit area. Specific rate
eligibility is subject to these standards:
a. The basic carrier route rate applies to pieces in carrier route
packages of six or more pieces each that are sorted to carrier route or
carrier routes trays (letter-size pieces) or sacks (flat-size pieces).
b. The high density and saturation rates apply to pieces that are
eligible for the basic carrier route rate, are prepared in carrier walk
sequence, and meet the applicable density standards in 5.0 for the rate
claimed.
3.0 3/5 Rates
Subject to M210, 3/5 rates apply to:
a. Letter-size pieces in 5-digit or unique 3-digit packages of six
or more pieces each, either placed in 5-digit or unique 3-digit trays
containing at least 24 pieces or in an overflow unique 3-digit tray.
b. Flat-size pieces in 5-digit or unique 3-digit packages of six or
more pieces each, either placed in 5-digit or unique 3-digit sacks or
palletized under M045.
4.0 Basic Rates
Basic rates apply to pieces prepared under M210 but not eligible
for or claimed at either the carrier route or 3/5 rates.
5.0 Walk-Sequence Discounts--Regular Periodicals
[Insert text of current E230.7.0 and E230.8.0; redesignate and renumber
as E231.5.0 and E231.6.0, respectively; in renumbered 5.4b and 5.4d,
replace ``125-piece walk-sequence rate'' with ``high density/125-piece
walk-sequence rate''; in renumbered 5.4b, replace the reference
``7.4d'' with ``5.4d'' and the reference ``7.4c'' with ``5.4c''; in
renumbered 5.4d, replace the reference ``7.4b'' with ``5.4b''; in
renumbered 6.1 and 6.2, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals'';
revise other text as follows:]
5.1 Eligibility
The 125-piece or saturation walk-sequence rates apply to each walk-
sequenced piece in a carrier route mailing, eligible under 2.2 and
prepared under M210, that also meets the corresponding addressing and
density standards in 5.4.
* * * * *
E239 Nonautomation Preferred Periodicals
1.0 General Information
1.1 Standards
The standards for presort rates are in addition to the basic
standards for Periodicals in E210, the standards for other rates or
discounts claimed, and the applicable preparation standards in M290 or
M890. Not all combinations of presort level, automation, and
destination entry discounts are permitted.
1.2 Optional Preparation
At the mailer's option, Preferred Periodicals may be prepared under
the standards for Regular Periodicals in M210, including presort. Under
this option, Preferred Periodicals may claim Level I/K, Level H, or
Level G/J rates, and may be combined (comailed) with Regular
Periodicals in the same mailing, if all corresponding eligibility
standards in E231 for Carrier Route, 3/5, and Basic are met. Presort
rate eligibility for the mailing is based on the combined pieces.
1.3 Palletized Mail
A correctly prepared package is the equivalent of a sack when
palletized under M045. Individual pieces qualify for the presort level
rate appropriate for the palletized package in which they are placed,
regardless of the destination of the pallet. Eligibility for
destination entry or other zoned rates depends on the point of entry.
1.4 Reporting Presort Level
Publishers must separately report copies at Levels H3 and H5, and
Levels J1, J3, and J5, only when claiming a ZIP+4 or ZIP+4 Barcoded
rate.
2.0 Carrier Route (Level I/K) Rates
2.1 Rate Application
Level I/K rates apply as follows:
a. Level I1 or K1 rates apply to pieces in carrier route packages
of six or more pieces each that are sorted to carrier route or carrier
routes trays or sacks.
b. Level I2 or K2 rates apply to pieces eligible for the Level I1
or K1 rates that are further prepared in carrier delivery walk sequence
and in the density
[[Page 10126]]
necessary to meet the additional standards in 6.0 for the 125-piece
walk-sequence rate.
c. Level I3 or K3 rates apply to pieces eligible for the Level I1
or K1 rates that are further prepared in carrier delivery walk sequence
and in the density necessary to meet the additional standards in 6.0
for the saturation walk-sequence rate.
2.2 Carrier Route Information
Mailers must apply carrier route codes to mailings by using the
current USPS Carrier Route Information System (CRIS) scheme or another
AIS product containing carrier route information (see A930). Carrier
route information must be updated within 90 days before the mailing
date.
3.0 3- and 5-Digit (Level H) Rates
3.1 H Rates
Level H rates apply to pieces in 5-digit, optional city, and unique
3-digit packages of six or more pieces each that are sorted to 5-digit,
optional city, or unique 3-digit sacks.
3.2 H5 Rates
Level H5 rates apply:
a. In tray-based automation rate letter-size mailings, to pieces in
5-digit trays.
b. In package-based automation rate letter-size mailings, to pieces
in 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each placed in 5-digit,
optional city, 3-digit, SCF, or AADC trays.
c. In ZIP+4 Barcoded rate flat-size mailings, to pieces in 5-digit
packages of six or more pieces each placed in 5-digit, optional city,
3-digit, SCF, or ADC sacks or palletized under M045.
d. In other mailings, to pieces in 5-digit packages of six or more
pieces each placed in 5-digit, optional city, or unique 3-digit sacks.
3.3 H3 Rates
Level H3 rates apply:
a. In tray-based automation rate letter-size mailings, to pieces in
optional city and unique 3-digit trays.
b. In package-based automation rate letter-size mailings, to pieces
in optional city and unique 3-digit packages of 50 or more pieces each
placed in optional city, 3-digit, SCF, or AADC trays.
c. In ZIP+4 Barcoded rate flat-size mailings, to pieces in optional
city and unique 3-digit packages of six or more pieces each placed in
optional city, 3-digit, SCF, or ADC sacks or palletized under M045.
d. In other mailings, to pieces in optional city or unique 3-digit
packages of six or more pieces each placed in optional city or unique
3-digit sacks.
4.0 Basic (Level G) Rates
Level G rates apply to pieces not eligible for or claimed at the
rates in 2.0 or 3.0.
5.0 In-County (Level J) Rates
[Insert text of current E230.5.0 and redesignate as E239.5.0; in 5.2c
and 5.3c, replace ``SDC'' with ``ADC.'']
6.0 Walk-Sequence Discounts
[Insert text of current E230.7.0 and redesignate and renumber as
E239.6.0; in renumbered 6.1, replace the references ``M203 and M204''
and ``7.4'' with ``M290'' and ``6.4,'' respectively; in renumbered 6.4b
and 6.4d, replace ``125-piece walk-sequence rate'' with ``high density/
125-piece walk-sequence rate''; in renumbered 6.4b, replace the
reference ``7.4d'' with ``6.4d''; in renumbered 6.4d, replace the
reference ``7.4b'' with ``6.4b''; no other change to text.]
E240 Automation Periodicals Rates
[Insert new E241 as follows:]
E241 Automation Regular Periodicals
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 All Pieces
All pieces in a automation Regular Periodicals mailing must:
a. Meet the basic standards for Periodicals and for the category of
authorization in E211 and E212, respectively.
b. Be in the same processing category and meet the applicable
physical standards in C810 or C820. (Automation rate mailings may not
include firm packages.)
c. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct ZIP Code or
ZIP+4 code (or, only if prepared with a delivery point barcode (DPBC),
the numeric equivalent to the DPBC).
d. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
e. Be sorted and documented as specified in M810 or M820, as
applicable.
f. Meet the applicable documentation and postage payment standards
in P012, P013, and P200.
g. Bear an accurate barcode meeting the standards in C840, either a
DPBC (if a letter) or a ZIP+4 barcode or DPBC (if a flat), either on
the piece or on an insert showing through a barcode window.
1.2 Enclosed Reply Cards and Envelopes
Effective January 1, 1997, all courtesy reply and business reply
mail (BRM) cards and letter-size envelopes provided as enclosures in
automation rate Regular Periodicals must meet the standards in C810 for
enclosed cards and envelopes. Mailers must certify that this standard
has been met when the corresponding mail is presented to the USPS.
2.0 Rate Application
2.1 Letters
Automation rates apply to each letter-size piece that is sorted
under M810 into the corresponding qualifying groups:
a. Groups of 150 or more pieces in 5-digit or unique 3-digit trays
qualify for the 3/5 automation rate. Pieces for unique 3-digit
destinations do not qualify for the 3/5 automation rate if placed in 3-
digit scheme trays with pieces for nonunique 3-digit destinations.
b. Groups of 150 or more pieces in other 3-digit, 3-digit scheme,
AADC, or mixed AADC trays qualify for the Basic automation rate.
2.2 Flats
Automation rates apply to each flat-size piece that is sorted under
M820 into the corresponding qualifying groups:
a. Pieces in 5-digit or unique 3-digit packages of 6 or more pieces
each qualify for the 3/5 automation rate.
b. Pieces in other 3-digit, ADC, or mixed ADC packages qualify for
the Basic automation rate.
E249 Automation Preferred Periodicals
[Insert text of current E242, E244, and E245 and redesignate and
renumber as E249.1.0, E249.2.0, and E249.3.0, respectively, with
subsections redesignated accordingly; no change in text except to
replace ``second-class [mail]'' with ``Periodicals.'']
1.0 Zip+4 Discounts
1.1 All Pieces
All pieces in a Preferred Periodicals ZIP+4 rate mailing must:
a. Meet the basic standards for Periodicals and for the category of
authorization in E211 and E212, respectively.
b. Meet the physical standards in C810.
c. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct ZIP Code or
ZIP+4 code (or, only if prepared with a delivery point barcode (DPBC),
the numeric equivalent to the DPBC).
d. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
e. Meet the standards in C830 or, for pieces with the correct DPBC,
the barcode standards in C840.
f. Be sorted and documented as specified in M891 or M892.
[[Page 10127]]
g. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P200.
1.2 Rate Application
ZIP+4 rates apply to each piece that also:
a. Is sorted under M810 into the qualifying groups described in 1.7
and 1.8.
b. Bears a delivery address with the correct numeric ZIP+4 code or
bears the correct DPBC.
1.3 Barcode Window
A mailpiece meeting the standards in 1.1 and 1.2, but with a
barcode window in the lower right corner, is ineligible for any
automation rate unless the correct DPBC appears through that window.
1.4 5-Digit Barcodes
ZIP+4 rate mailings may include pieces with correct 5-digit
barcodes if those pieces meet the standards in 1.1 and 1.2 and the
standards for 5-digit barcodes in C840. Such pieces qualify for ZIP+4
rates only if the barcode is printed on the piece and the address
contains the correct numeric ZIP+4 code.
1.5 ZIP+4 Barcodes
ZIP+4 rate mailings may include pieces with correct ZIP+4 barcodes
if the barcode is located in the address block and those pieces meet
the standards in 1.1 and 1.2 and the standards for ZIP+4 barcodes in
C840. Such pieces qualify for ZIP+4 rates only if, additionally, the
address contains the correct numeric ZIP+4 code. Pieces that bear a
ZIP+4 barcode in the lower right corner may not be included in a ZIP+4
rate mailing.
1.6 85% Rule
At least 85% of all pieces in a ZIP+4 rate mailing (regardless of
presort level or rate) must bear the correct numeric ZIP+4 code o
FR Doc. 96-5500 Classification Reform; Implementation Standards
r DPBC
for the delivery address, as defined by the standards for address
quality and coding accuracy in A800 and A950. The 85% requirement
applies to each mailing unless excepted by other standards.
1.7 Qualifying Tray-Based Presort
In tray-based mailings under M891:
a. In full or overflow 5-digit trays, ZIP+4 coded or DPBC pieces
qualify for the Level H5/J5 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for the
Level H5/J5 rates.
b. In full or overflow optional city and unique 3-digit trays,
ZIP+4 coded or DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 ZIP+4 rates;
other pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 rates.
c. In full or overflow nonunique 3-digit and SCF trays, ZIP+4 coded
or DPBC pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces
qualify for the Level G/J1 rates. One less-than-full SCF tray is
permitted for the SCF serving the post office where the mailing is
entered.
d. In AADC, mixed AADC, and working trays, ZIP+4 coded or DPBC
pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for
the Level G/J1 rates.
1.8 Qualifying Package-Based Presort
In package-based mailings under M892:
a. In 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each, ZIP+4 coded or
DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H5/J5 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces
qualify for the Level H5/J5 rates.
b. In optional city and unique 3-digit packages of 50 or more
pieces each, ZIP+4 coded or DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3
ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 rates.
c. In nonunique 3-digit packages of 50 or more pieces each, ZIP+4
coded or DPBC pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other
pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 rates.
d. In the residual portion of the mailing, ZIP+4 coded or DPBC
pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for
the Level G/J1 rates.
2.0 Barcoded Discounts (Letter-Size Pieces)
2.1 All Pieces
All pieces in a Barcoded rate letter-size mailing must:
a. Meet the basic standards for Periodicals and for the category of
authorization in E211 and E212, respectively.
b. Meet the physical standards in C810.
c. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct ZIP Code or
ZIP+4 code (or, only if prepared with a delivery point barcode (DPBC),
the numeric equivalent to the DPBC).
d. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
e. Either bear the correct DPBC meeting the barcode standards in
C840 or meet the applicable standards in 2.5.
f. Be sorted and documented as specified in M893, M894, or M895.
g. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P200.
2.2 Rate Application
Barcoded rates apply to each piece that also:
a. Is sorted under M893, M894, or M895 into the qualifying groups
described in 2.8, 2.9, and 2.10.
b. Bears the correct DPBC that meets the barcode standards in C840.
c. Meets the applicable standards in 2.4 through 2.7.
2.3 Optional Preparation
At the mailer's option, barcoded Preferred Periodicals may be
prepared under the standards for Regular Periodicals in M810, including
presort. Under this option, Preferred Periodicals may claim Level H or
Level G/J rates and may be combined (comailed) with Regular Periodicals
in the same mailing, if all corresponding eligibility standards in E231
and E241 for 3/5 and Basic rate are met. Presort rate eligibility for
the mailing is based on the combined pieces.
2.4 Barcode Window
A mailpiece with a barcode window in the lower right corner is
ineligible for an automation rate unless the correct DPBC appears
through that window.
2.5 Pieces Without DPBCs
Subject to 1.5 and 1.6, Barcoded rate mailings may include
nonbarcoded, 5-digit barcoded, or ZIP+4 barcoded pieces if each such
piece (regardless of rate) meets the standards in 2.1, has a barcode
clear zone in the lower right corner meeting the reflectance standards
in C840 and, if applicable, meets the applicable 5-digit or ZIP+4
barcode standards in C840. Additionally, to qualify for a ZIP+4 rate,
subject to 2.8, 2.9, and 2.10:
a. Nonbarcoded and 5-digit barcoded pieces must bear an address
with the correct ZIP+4 code, meet the standards in C830, and not have a
window in the lower right corner.
b. ZIP+4 barcoded pieces must have the barcode in the address
block, meet the standards in C830, bear an address with the correct
ZIP+4 code, and not have a window in the lower right corner.
2.6 85% Rule
Subject to 2.7, at least 85% of all pieces in a Barcoded rate
mailing (regardless of presort level or rate) must bear the correct
DPBC for the delivery address, as defined by the standards for address
quality and coding accuracy in A800 and A950. The 85% requirement
applies to each mailing unless excepted by other standards.
2.7 100% Barcoding
Each piece must bear the correct delivery point barcode:
a. In 5-digit trays in a tray-based mailing under M893.
b. In 5-digit packages in a package-based mailing under M894 or
M895.
c. In any mailing containing heavy letters (as defined in C810).
[[Page 10128]]
2.8 Qualifying Tray-Based Presort
In tray-based mailings under M893:
a. Pieces in full or overflow 5-digit trays qualify for the Level
H5/J5 Barcoded rates.
b. In full or overflow optional city and unique 3-digit trays, DPBC
pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 Barcoded rates; subject to 2.5,
ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 ZIP+4 rate;
other pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 rates.
c. In full or overflow nonunique 3-digit and SCF trays, DPBC pieces
qualify for the Level G/J1 Barcoded rates; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded
non-DPBC pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces
qualify for the Level G/J1 rates. One less-than-full SCF tray is
permitted for the SCF serving the post office where the mailing is
entered.
d. In AADC, mixed AADC, and working trays, DPBC pieces qualify for
the Level G/J1 Barcoded rates; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC
pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for
the Level G/J1 rates.
2.9 Qualifying Two-Tier Package-Based Presort
In two-tier package-based mailings under M894:
a. Pieces in 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each qualify for
the Level H5/J5 Barcoded rates.
b. In optional city and unique 3-digit packages of 50 or more
pieces each, DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 Barcoded rates;
subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3
ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 rates.
c. In nonunique 3-digit packages of 50 or more pieces each, DPBC
pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 Barcoded rates; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4
coded non-DPBC pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other
pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 rates.
d. In residual trays, DPBC pieces qualify for the Level G/J1
Barcoded rates; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces qualify for
the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for the Level G/J1
rates.
2.10 Qualifying Three-Tier Package-Based Presort
In three-tier package-based mailings under M895:
a. Pieces in 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each in the 5-
digit tier qualify for the Level H5/J5 Barcoded rates.
b. In optional city and unique 3-digit packages of 50 or more
pieces each in the 3-digit tier, DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H3/
J3 Barcoded rates; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces qualify
for the Level H3/J3 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for the Level H3/
J3 rates.
c. In nonunique 3-digit packages of 50 or more pieces each in the
3-digit tier, DPBC pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 Barcoded rates;
subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces qualify for the Level G/J1
ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 rates.
d. In the residual tier, DPBC pieces qualify for the Level G/J1
Barcoded rates; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces qualify for
the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for the Level G/J1
rates.
3.0 Barcoded Discounts (Flat-Size Pieces)
3.1 All Pieces
All pieces in a Barcoded rate flat-size mailing must:
a. Meet the basic standards for Periodicals and for the category of
authorization in E211 and E212, respectively.
b. Meet the physical standards in C820.
c. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct ZIP Code or
ZIP+4 code.
d. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
e. Bear the correct 5-digit barcode, ZIP+4 barcode, or DPBC,
meeting the barcode standards in C840, except for pieces in specific
portions of mailings prepared under M897.
f. Be sorted and documented as specified in M897.
g. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P200.
3.2 Rate Application
Barcoded rates apply to each piece that also:
a. Is sorted under M897 into the qualifying groups described in
3.6.
b. Bears the correct ZIP+4 barcode or DPBC.
c. Meets the applicable standards in 3.3 through 3.5.
3.3 Optional Preparation
At the mailer's option, barcoded Preferred Periodicals may be
prepared under the standards for Regular Periodicals in M820, including
presort. Under this option, Preferred Periodicals may claim Level H or
Level G/J rates and may be combined (comailed) with Regular Periodicals
in the same mailing, if all corresponding eligibility standards in E231
and E241 for 3/5 and Basic rates are met. Presort rate eligibility for
the mailing is based on the combined pieces.
3.4 5-Digit Barcodes
Barcoded rate mailings may include pieces with correct 5-digit
barcodes if those pieces meet the standards in 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, and 3.5
and the standards for 5-digit barcodes in C840. Pieces with a 5-digit
barcode could be eligible for a presort rate under 3.6.
3.5 85% Rule
At least 85% of all pieces in a Barcoded rate mailing (regardless
of presort level or rate) must bear the correct ZIP+4 barcode or DPBC
for the delivery address, as defined by the standards for address
quality and coding accuracy in A800 and A950. The 85% requirement
applies to each mailing unless excepted by other standards. Barcoded
rate mailings not meeting the 85% rule must be prepared under
corresponding standards in M897.
3.6 Qualifying Presort
Barcoded and presort rates apply as follows:
a. In 5-digit packages of six or more pieces each, ZIP+4 barcoded
or DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H5/J5 Barcoded rates; 5-digit
barcoded pieces (and nonbarcoded pieces where permitted) qualify for
the Level H5/J5 rates.
b. In optional city or unique 3-digit packages of six or more
pieces each, ZIP+4 barcoded or DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3
Barcoded rates; 5-digit barcoded pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3
rates.
c. In nonunique 3-digit and SCF packages, or in 5-digit, optional
city, or unique 3-digit packages of fewer than six pieces, or in
residual packages, ZIP+4 barcoded or DPBC pieces qualify for the Level
G/J1 Barcoded rates; 5-digit barcoded pieces qualify for the Level G/J1
rates.
[Revise E250 as follows:]
E250 Destination Entry
1.0 DSCF
1.1 Eligibility
Copies not eligible for in-county rates qualify for the destination
SCF (DSCF) rates if the copies are addressed for delivery in the same
SCF service area as the entry post office, regardless of the type of
package, pallet, sack, or tray in which they are prepared.
1.2 Rates
DSCF rates include a pound rate and a discount per piece. Pieces
claimed at DSCF rates must also meet the standards for any discount or
rate claimed and postage payment method used.
[[Page 10129]]
1.3 Authorized Entry
Publications must have an authorized entry at each post office
where mail is entered at DSCF rates. Only copies entered according to
the distribution plan authorized for that entry may be claimed at these
rates. DSCF rate mail must be deposited at locations and times
specified by the entry office postmaster.
1.4 Documentation
Subject to P012, the publisher must be able to show compliance with
1.1 through 1.3, e.g., by package, bundle, sack, tray, or pallet
destination (as appropriate), and the number of pieces by presort level
for each 5-digit ZIP Code destination eligible for DSCF rates.
2.0 DDU
2.1 Eligibility
The destination delivery unit (DDU) rate applies to pieces entered
at the facility where the carrier cases mail for the carrier route
serving the delivery address on the mailpiece. Copies claimed at DDU
rates must be part of a carrier route package placed in a carrier route
or 5-digit carrier routes sack or tray under M210, or palletized under
M045, and otherwise eligible for and claimed at a carrier route or
Level I or K rate. Except for the standards applicable to preparing
carrier route or walk-sequence rate mail, there is no additional
minimum volume required for a DDU rate mailing.
2.2 Rates
DDU rates include a pound rate and a discount per piece. Pieces
claimed at DDU rates must also meet the standards for any discount or
rate claimed and postage payment method used. A mailing may contain
copies claimed at DDU rates and other copies claimed at other rates if
permitted by standard. No separation by rate is required.
2.3 Maximum Volume
Except under 2.4, the same mailer may not present for verification
and acceptance more than four DDU rate mailings at the same destination
postal facility (or another acting as its agent) in any 24-hour period.
This limit may be waived if local conditions permit. A mailer may ask
for such a waiver when scheduling deposit of the mailings. There is no
maximum for plant-verified drop shipments. This standard does not apply
to mailings presented to either the publication's authorized original
entry post office or an authorized additional entry serving the place
where the copies were prepared for mailing, if that entry post office
is the destination postal facility at which the DDU rate copies must be
deposited.
2.4 Authorized Entry
Publications must have an authorized entry at each post office
where mail is entered at DDU rates. Only copies entered according to
the distribution plan authorized for that entry may be claimed at these
rates. DDU rate mail must be deposited at locations and times specified
by the entry office postmaster.
2.5 Scheduling
Mailers may schedule deposit of DDU rate mailings at least 24 hours
in advance by contacting the district office in whose service area the
destination facility is located. Mailers must follow the scheduled
deposit time provided. Mailers may request standing appointments for
renewable 6-month periods by written application to the district office
in whose service area the destination facility is located. Mixed loads
of Periodicals and Standard Mail require advance appointments for
deposit.
2.6 Documentation
Subject to P012, the publisher must be able to show compliance with
2.1 through 2.5. If a carrier route or walk-sequence rate is claimed,
the publisher must provide the documentation required by the
corresponding standards.
E270 Preferred Rates
[In 1.1, 1.2c, 2.1, 5.1, 6.1, and 6.2, replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals''; in 1.3, replace ``second-class mailing privileges''
with ``Periodicals mailing privileges.'']
[Revise the heading of 1.0 as follows:]
1.0 In-County
* * * * *
1.6 DDU Rate
Subject to E250, the DDU piece rate applies to each piece claimed
in the pound rate portion at the DDU rate.
[Revise the heading of 2.0 as follows:]
2.0 Nonprofit--Basic Information
* * * * *
2.4 Destination Entry Rates
Subject to E250, the DDU or DSCF piece rate applies to each piece
claimed in the pound rate portion at the corresponding rate.
[Remove current 2.5.]
[Revise the heading of 3.0 as follows:]
3.0 Nonprofit--Publications of Qualified Nonprofit Organizations
* * * * *
[Revise the heading of 4.0 as follows:]
4.0 Nonprofit--Publications of Other Qualified Organizations
* * * * *
[Revise the heading of 5.0 as follows:]
5.0 Classroom
* * * * *
5.5 Destination Entry Rates
Subject to E250, the DDU or DSCF piece rate applies to each piece
claimed in the pound rate portion at the corresponding rate.
[Remove current 5.6.]
[Revise the heading of 6.0 as follows:]
6.0 Science-of-Agriculture
* * * * *
6.5 Destination Entry Rates
Subject to E250, the DDU or DSCF piece rate applies to each piece
claimed in the pound rate portion at the corresponding rate.
[Remove current 6.6.]
[Remove current E300 and E400; no change to E500.]
* * * * *
[Insert new E600 as follows:]
E600 Standard Mail
E610 Basic Standards
[Insert new E611, based on current E311 and E411, as follows:]
E611 Standards Applicable to All Standard Mail
1.0 General Information
1.1 Definition
Standard Mail consists of mailable matter that is neither mailed or
required to be mailed as First-Class Mail nor entered as Periodicals
mail (unless permitted or required by standard). Standard Mail includes
matter formerly classified as third-class mail and as fourth-class
mail. Though combined in Standard Mail, matter from each former class
is subject to separate and specific classification, eligibility, and
preparation standards. Matter formerly classified as third-class mail
is referred to as Standard Mail (A); matter formerly classified as
fourth-class mail is referred to as Standard Mail (B). The unmodified
term Standard Mail applies to both former third-class and former
fourth-class matter.
1.2 Not Sealed
Standard Mail is not sealed against postal inspection. Regardless
of physical
[[Page 10130]]
closure, the mailing of articles at Standard Mail rates is consent by
the mailer to postal inspection of the contents.
1.3 Written Additions
Markings that have the character of personal correspondence
require, with certain exceptions, additional postage at the First-Class
rates. The following written additions and enclosures do not require
additional First-Class postage and may be placed on the wrapper, on a
tag or label attached to the outside of a parcel, or inside a parcel
(either loose or attached to an article):
a. The sender's and the addressee's names, occupations, and
addresses, preceded by ``From'' or ``To,'' and directions for handling.
b. Marks, numbers, names, or letters describing the contents.
c. Words or phrases such as ``Do Not Open Until Christmas,''
``Happy Birthday, Mother,'' etc.
d. Instructions and directions for the use of the item mailed.
e. A manuscript dedication or inscription not having the nature of
personal correspondence.
f. Marks to call attention to words or passages in the text.
g. Corrections of typographical errors in printed matter.
h. Manuscripts accompanying related proof sheets and corrections of
proof sheets including corrections of typographical and other errors,
changes in the text, insertions of new text, marginal instructions to
the printer, and corrective rewrites of parts.
i. Handstamped imprints, unless the added material is in itself
personal or converts the original matter to a personal communication.
j. Matter mailable separately as Standard Mail (A) printed on the
wrapper, envelope, tag, or label.
1.4 Invoice
An invoice, whether or not it also serves as a bill, may be
enclosed or placed in an envelope (marked ``Invoice Enclosed'')
attached to the outside of a Standard Mail mailpiece if the invoice
relates solely to the matter with which it is mailed. The invoice may
show this information:
a. Names and addresses of the sender and addressee.
b. Names and quantities of the articles enclosed, descriptions of
each (e.g., price, tax, style, stock number, size, and quality, and, if
defective, nature of defects).
c. Order or file number, date of order, date and manner of
shipment, shipping weight, postage paid, and initials or name of packer
or checker.
1.5 Incidental First-Class Attachments and Enclosures
Incidental First-Class matter may be enclosed in or attached to
Standard Mail (A) merchandise (including books but excluding
merchandise samples) or any Standard Mail (B) mailpiece without payment
of First-Class postage. An incidental First-Class attachment or
enclosure must be matter that, if mailed separately, would require
First-Class postage, is closely associated with but secondary to the
host piece, and is prepared not to encumber postal processing. An
incidental First-Class attachment or enclosure may be a bill for the
product or publication, a statement of account for past products or
publications, or a personal message or greeting included with a
product, publication, or parcel. Postage at the Standard Mail rate
applicable to the host piece is based on the combined weight of the
host piece and the incidental First-Class attachment or enclosure.
1.6 Address Correction
The fee for manual or automated address correction service is
charged per notice issued.
1.7 Addressing
Each piece of Standard Mail must bear a delivery address.
Alternative address formats or detached address labels may be used,
subject to A040 or A060, respectively.
1.8 Documentation
A postage statement, completed and signed by the mailer, using the
correct USPS form or an approved facsimile, must be submitted with each
mailing except for single-piece rate mailings in which the correct
postage is affixed to each piece. Supporting documentation might be
required by the standards for the rate claimed or postage payment
method used.
[Insert new E612, based on current E311 and E312, as follows:]
E612 Additional Standards Applicable to Standard Mail (A)
1.0 Weight
Standard Mail (A) must weigh less than 16 ounces.
2.0 Content
2.1 Circulars
Circulars, including printed form letters that, according to
internal evidence, are sent in identical terms to more than one person
are Standard Mail (A). A circular does not lose its character as such
if a date and the individual names of the addressee and sender are
printed therein or handwritten corrections of typographical errors are
made on the circular.
2.2 Printed Matter
Printed matter weighing less than 16 ounces may be sent as Standard
Mail (A). For this standard, printed matter means paper on which words,
letters, characters, figures, or images (or any combination of them),
not having the character of a bill or statement of account or of actual
or personal correspondence, are reproduced by any process other than
handwriting or typewriting.
2.3 Computer-Prepared Material
Computer-prepared material is considered printed matter. Such
material is not considered to have the character of actual or personal
correspondence merely because it contains:
a. Specific information about a product offered for sale or lease
(e.g., size, color, price) or a service being offered (e.g., the name,
address, and telephone number of a company representative).
b. Information relating the addressee directly to an advertised
product or service.
c. Information such as the amount paid for a previous purchase,
pledge, or donation, when associated with a sales promotion or
solicitation for donations.
3.0 Enclosures and Attachments
3.1 Nonincidental First-Class Enclosures
Letters or other pieces of nonincidental First-Class Mail, subject
to postage at First-Class rates, may be enclosed with Standard Mail
(A). Postage for the First-Class enclosure must be placed on the
outside of the mailpiece. It may be affixed separately or added to the
postage for the host piece. The endorsement ``First-Class Mail
Enclosed'' must be placed on the mailpiece, below the postage and above
the address.
3.2 Nonincidental First-Class Attachments
Letters or other pieces of nonincidental First-Class Mail may be
placed in an envelope and securely attached to the address side of a
Standard Mail (A) mailpiece or of the principal mailpiece, as
applicable. Combination envelopes or containers with separate parts for
the two classes of mail may be used. The names and addresses of the
sender and addressee must be placed on both the principal mailpiece and
the attachment.
[[Page 10131]]
Alternatively, the sender's name and address must be placed on one part
and the addressee's name and address on the other. If the mailpiece is
a combination container with inseparable parts or compartments, the
names and addresses may appear on only one part. The applicable
Standard Mail (A) postage for the Standard Mail (A) matter must be
prepaid and placed in the upper right corner of the address space.
Postage at the applicable First-Class rate must be paid for and affixed
to the First-Class attachment, unless other payment methods are
permitted by standard.
3.3 Attachment of Other Standard Mail (A) Matter
The front cover page or the back cover page of a Standard Mail (A)
mailpiece may bear an attachment that is other Standard Mail (A) matter
if:
a. Each piece in the mailing bears the same attachment.
b. The material qualifies for and is mailed at bulk rates.
c. The pieces bearing the attachment are larger than 6 by 11
inches.
d. The attachment is secured so as not to interfere with processing
or delivery. Folded or multipage attachments must be secured to prevent
opening during handling.
e. The mailing is sorted to carrier routes.
3.4 Protective Covers
A protective cover (outsert) on a catalog or book must fully cover
(to within 3/4 inch of each edge) the main body of the catalog or book,
front and back, or the entire piece must be enclosed in a wrapper (a
full sleeve or envelope).
4.0 Bulk Rates
4.1 General Information
Bulk rates apply to mailings meeting the basic standards in E611
and the corresponding standards for presort, automation, and
destination entry in E630, E640, and E650, as appropriate for the rate
claimed. Nonprofit rates may be used only by organizations authorized
by the USPS under E670. Bulk rate Standard Mail (A) may not use
certified, collect on delivery (COD), insurance, registry, return
receipt for merchandise, special delivery, and special handling
services. Not all processing categories qualify for every bulk rate.
4.2 Minimum Per Piece Rates
The minimum per piece rates (i.e., the minimum postage that must be
paid for each piece) apply to Enhanced Carrier Route rate pieces
weighing 0.2066 pound (rounded, or 3.3062 ounces, rounded) or less,
Regular nonautomation and automation rate pieces weighing 0.2068 pound
(rounded, or 3.3087 ounces, rounded) or less, and Nonprofit
nonautomation and automation rate pieces weighing 0.2149 pound
(rounded, or 3.4383 ounces, rounded) or less. The base postage rate
applies to pieces meeting minimum preparation standards (e.g.,
Basicrate) and may be reduced if additional standards are met. For the
minimum per piece rates, mail is categorized as either ``letters'' or
``other than letters'' based on the letter-size standard in C050 that
disregards address placement, except that, for automation rates, mail
may be assigned to the ``other than letters'' category based on the
standards in C820. Address placement is also used to apply the aspect
ratio standard for letter-size automation rates in C810.
4.3 Piece/Pound Rates
Pieces exceeding the weight limits specified in 4.2 are subject to
a two-part piece/pound rate that includes a fixed charge per piece and
a variable pound charge based on weight. The base postage rate applies
to pieces meeting the minimum preparation standards (e.g., basic
nonautomation presort). Discounts are available subject to the
corresponding standards.
4.4 Net Postage
The net postage rate that must be paid is either the minimum per
piece rate or the piece/pound rate, as reduced in either case by any
discounts for which the piece is eligible. The net postage rate is
commonly designated by the name of the primary discount (e.g., carrier
route rate, automation rate, DBMC rate).
4.5 Minimum Rate Per Piece
Postage is computed at the applicable rates on the entire bulk
mailing to be mailed at one time. Subject to 4.6, the total postage
paid on any bulk mailing may not be lower than the amount determined by
multiplying the proper minimum per piece rate (less applicable
discounts) by the total number of mailpieces. If the total postage
computed at pound rates, after any adjustment for presort level, is
less than the minimum postage charge, postage must be computed at the
minimum per piece rate.
4.6 Exception
When the postage computed at the bulk Standard Mail (A) rates is
higher than a Standard Mail (B) rate for which the matter and the
mailing could qualify except for its weight, the Standard Mail (B) rate
may be paid without adding needless weight. All other standards for
bulk Standard Mail (A) apply.
4.7 Annual Fees
Bulk rate Standard Mail (A) is subject to an annual fee once each
12-month period. The fee may be paid in advance only for the next year
and only during the last 30 days of the current service period. The fee
charged is that in effect on the date of payment. Additional standards
apply, based on how postage is paid:
a. When mailings are paid with meter or precanceled stamps, each
mailer who enters mailings at the Regular, Enhanced Carrier Route, or
Nonprofit rates must pay an annual bulk mailing fee at each post office
of mailing. Persons or organizations paying this fee may enter mail of
their clients as well as their own mail.
b. When a mailing is paid with a permit imprint, the mailer whose
permit imprint is on the mailpiece must put that permit number on the
postage statement and must pay the annual bulk mailing fee for that
permit. This fee is in addition to the fee that must be paid when
applying to use permit imprints.
4.8 Merging
Mailings are subject to the general definition and conditions in
M011. Generally, mailers may merge similar bulk Standard Mail (A)
matter into a single mailing. Differences in text, address labels, and
address lists or list key numbers do not prohibit the mailer from
merging and sorting pieces together. Pieces with different methods of
postage payment may be combined in the same mailing only if authorized
by the RCSC. Pieces of nonidentical weight, if merged in the same
mailing, must bear the correct postage when mailed, unless otherwise
authorized by the RCSC.
4.9 Preparation
Each Nonprofit, Regular, or Enhanced Carrier Route rate mailing
must be prepared under these general standards:
a. All pieces in a mailing must be of the same processing category,
except that irregular and machinable parcels may be commingled in 5-
digit sacks or on 5-digit pallets.
b. Each mailing must contain at least 200 pieces or 50 pounds of
pieces. Other volume standards can also apply, based on the rate
claimed.
c. The same mailing may not contain both automation and
nonautomation rate pieces except as allowed under E649.
c. All pieces in a bulk mailing must be sorted together and marked
under the standards applicable to the rate claimed.
d. Each piece must bear the addressee's name and delivery address,
[[Page 10132]]
including the correct ZIP Code or ZIP+4 code, unless an alternative
address format is used subject to A040. Pieces in automation rate
mailings, upgradable nonautomation rate pieces, or pieces prepared with
detached address labels, are subject to additional standards.
e. Postage must be paid under the standards in P600 with
precanceled stamps, postage meter, or permit imprint.
f. Mailings must be documented under P012 and the standards for the
rate claimed.
g. Each piece must meet the standards applicable to any other rate
or discount claimed.
h. Any POSTNET barcode on a mailpiece must be the correct barcode
for the delivery address and meet the standards in C840 and A950.
i. Mailings must be deposited at a business mail entry unit of the
post office where the postage permit or license is held and the annual
bulk fee paid, unless deposit elsewhere is permitted by standard.
[Insert new E613, based on current E411, as follows:]
E613 Additional Standards Applicable to Standard Mail (B)
1.0 Weight
Standard Mail (B) consists of mailable matter that (except Special
Standard Mail and Library Mail) weighs 16 ounces or more.
2.0 Zoned Rates
2.1 Required Mailing Office
Zoned Standard Mail (i.e., parcel post and bound printed matter)
must be mailed at the post office from which the zone rate postage was
computed, except under 2.2 and 2.3.
2.2 Redirected Mailings
Mailers who present large mailings of zoned Standard Mail may be
allowed or directed to deposit such mailings at another postal facility
when processing or logistics make such an alternative desirable for the
USPS, subject to these conditions:
a. Zoned postage need not be recomputed if both the original post
office of mailing and the alternative facility use the same zone chart
for computing zoned postage, based on the 3-digit prefix of their ZIP
Codes.
b. Postage must be recomputed on pieces in mailings redirected to a
postal facility that uses a different zone chart for computing zoned
postage.
c. Postage for pieces claimed at the local zone rates must be
recomputed at the applicable zone rate for the alternative postal
facility. Postage may also be recomputed for other pieces that are
ineligible for the local zone rates but that could become eligible at
the postal facility to which the mailing is redirected.
2.3 BMC Acceptance
Mailers may present zoned Standard Mail at a BMC for acceptance if:
a. Metered postage is paid through a postage meter licensed at the
BMC parent post office, or permit imprint postage is paid through an
advance deposit account at the BMC parent post office or another post
office in the BMC service area, unless otherwise permitted by standard.
b. Zoned postage is computed from the BMC parent post office.
c. The BMC is authorized by Form 4410 to act as acceptance agent
for the entry post office.
3.0 Addressing
All Standard Mail (B) must bear the sender's return address and,
except for single-piece rate parcel post, the delivery address on each
piece must include the correct ZIP Code or ZIP+4 code.
E620 Nonautomation Nonpresort Standard Mail Rates
[Insert text of current E320 and redesignate as E621; revise as
follows:]
E621 Single-Piece Standard Mail (A)
1.0 Single-Piece Rate
1.1 Rate Application
Single-piece rate Standard Mail (A) is Standard Mail (A) matter not
prepared as required for a bulk rate. The single-piece rates are
applied to each piece (or each item mailed under 1.2) based on its
weight. If the computed single-piece Standard Mail (A) rate is higher
than any Standard Mail (B) rate for which the mail could qualify except
for weight, the lower Standard Mail (B) rate may be paid; all other
standards for single-piece Standard Mail (A) apply.
1.2 Keys and Identification Devices
Keys and identification devices (identification cards or uncovered
identification tags) may be mailed as single-piece Standard Mail (A) if
they bear, contain, or have securely attached instructions to return to
a name and complete address of a person, organization, or concern and a
statement guaranteeing postage payment on delivery.
1.3 Nonstandard Surcharge
Single-piece rate Standard Mail (A) (except keys and identification
devices) is subject to a nonstandard surcharge if it weighs 1 ounce or
less and meets the definition of nonstandard mail in C600.
1.4 Preparation
Keys and identification devices must be prepared under 1.2. All
other single-piece rate Standard Mail (A) pieces must have a delivery
address and the endorsement ``Standard Mail.'' No minimum quantity is
required unless postage is paid with a permit imprint (in which case
the mailing must contain 200 pieces or 50 pounds of pieces). There are
no sortation standards, but five or more metered letter-size pieces and
any permit imprint pieces must be ``faced'' (so that the addresses face
in one direction) and bundled, boxed, or packaged.
1.5 Postage Payment and Documentation
Except for keys and identification devices, full postage must be
affixed in adhesive stamps, precanceled stamps, or meter postage or
paid with permit imprint. Documentation of postage and a postage
statement are required if postage is paid with a permit imprint or if
the correct postage is not affixed to each piece in the mailing.
1.6 Place of Mailing
Pieces paid with adhesive stamps may be deposited in collection
boxes or other places where mail is accepted. Pieces paid with meter
postage, precanceled stamps, or permit imprint must be taken to the
post office where the license or permit is held, unless the USPS
authorizes otherwise.
[Insert text of current E412 and redesignate as E622; revise as
follows:]
E622 Parcel Post
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 Description
Any Standard Mail (B) matter may be mailed at parcel post rates.
Parcel post rates are based on zones, on whether a parcel is mailed and
delivered within a BMC or ASF service area (as shown below), and on the
weight of the piece.
* * * * *
1.3 Enclosures
Parcel post may contain any printed matter mailable as Standard
Mail (A), in addition to the enclosures and additions listed in E611.
[Remove current E412.1.4; insert text of current E412.2.0 through
E412.4.0 and redesignate as E622.2.0 through E622.4.0, respectively; in
1.1 and 3.1, replace ``fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail (B)''; in
2.4, replace the reference ``E450'' with ``E652''; no other change in
text.]
[[Page 10133]]
[Insert text of current E414 and redesignate as E623; revise as
follows:]
E623 Bound Printed Matter
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 Description
Bound printed matter is Standard Mail weighing at least 1 pound but
not more than 10 pounds and meeting the standards in E611 and E613.
Bound printed matter rates are based on zones and on the weight of the
piece.
1.2 Characteristics
Bound printed matter must:
a. Consist of advertising, promotional, directory, or editorial
material (or any combination of such material).
b. Be securely bound by permanent fastenings such as staples,
spiral binding, glue, or stitching. Looseleaf binders and similar
fastenings are not considered permanent.
c. Consist of sheets of which at least 90% are imprinted by any
process other than handwriting or typewriting with words, letters,
characters, figures, or images (or any combination of them).
d. Not have the nature of personal correspondence.
e. Not be stationery, such as pads of blank printed forms.
1.3 Combining Pieces
A mailpiece containing two or more bound printed matter pieces,
each weighing less than 1 pound, is mailable at the bound printed
matter rates if the total weight of the pieces is at least 1 pound.
1.4 Enclosures
In addition to the additions and enclosures listed in E611 and
E612, bound printed matter may contain:
a. Any printed matter mailable as Standard Mail (A).
b. A merchandise sample attached to a bound page or to a
permissible loose enclosure, if the sample represents only an
incidental portion of the bound printed matter piece and if the sample
is not provided exclusively or primarily as a premium or an inducement
promoting the sale of the bound printed matter piece. The sample may be
identified as a ``free gift'' where it is clear that the sample is
offered to the addressee to market the gift product or promote the sale
of the bound printed matter.
[Remove current E414.1.5; redesignate current E414.2.0 as E633.]
[Insert text of current E416 and redesignate as E624; revise as
follows:]
E624 Special Standard Mail
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 Qualification
Special Standard Mail is Standard Mail matter meeting the standards
in E611, E613, and those below. Special Standard Mail rates are based
on the weight of the piece, without regard to zone.
1.2 Qualified Items
Only these articles may be mailed at the Special Standard Mail
rates:
a. Books, including books issued to supplement other books of at
least eight printed pages, consisting wholly of reading matter or
scholarly bibliography, or reading matter with incidental blank spaces
for notations and containing no advertising matter other than
incidental announcements of books. Advertising includes paid
advertising and the publisher's own advertising in display, classified,
or editorial style.
b. 16-millimeter or narrower width films, which must be positive
prints in final form for viewing, and catalogs of such films of 24
pages or more (at least 22 of which are printed). Films and film
catalogs sent to or from commercial theaters do not qualify for the
Special Standard Mail rate.
c. Printed music, whether in bound or sheet form.
d. Printed objective test materials and their accessories used by
or in behalf of educational institutions to test ability, aptitude,
achievement, interests, and other mental and personal qualities with or
without answers, test scores, or identifying information recorded
thereon in writing or by mark.
e. Sound recordings and guides or scripts prepared solely for use
with such recordings. Video recordings and player piano rolls are
classified as sound recordings.
f. Playscripts and manuscripts for books, periodicals, and music.
g. Printed educational reference charts designed to instruct or
train individuals for improving or developing their capabilities. Each
chart must be a single printed sheet of information designed for
educational reference. The information on the chart, which may be
printed on one or both sides of the sheet, must be conveyed primarily
by graphs, diagrams, tables, or other nonnarrative matter. An
educational reference chart is normally but not necessarily devoted to
one subject. A chart on which the information is conveyed primarily by
textual matter in a narrative form does not qualify as a printed
educational reference chart for mailing at the Special Standard Mail
rates even if it includes graphs, diagrams, or tables. Examples of
qualifying charts include maps produced primarily for educational
reference, tables of mathematical or scientific equations, noun
declensions or verb conjugations used in the study of languages,
periodic table of elements, botanical or zoological tables, and other
tables used in the study of science.
h. Looseleaf pages and their binders consisting of medical
information for distribution to doctors, hospitals, medical schools,
and medical students.
i. Computer-readable media containing prerecorded information and
guides or scripts prepared solely for use with such media.
1.3 Loose Enclosures
In addition to the enclosures and additions listed in E611, any
printed matter that is mailable as Standard Mail (A) may be included
loose with any qualifying material mailed at the Special Standard Mail
rates.
1.4 Enclosures in Books
Enclosures in books mailed at Special Standard Mail rates are
subject to these additional standards:
a. Either one envelope or one addressed postcard may be bound into
the pages of a book. If also serving as an order form, the envelope or
card may be in addition to the order form permitted by 1.4b.
b. One order form may be bound into the pages of a book. If also
serving as an envelope or postcard, the order form may be in addition
to the envelope or card permitted by 1.4a.
c. Announcements of books may appear as book pages. These
announcements must be incidental and exclusively devoted to books,
without extraneous advertising of book-related or other materials or
services. Announcements may fully describe the conditions and methods
of ordering books and may contain ordering instructions for use with a
separate order form. Up to three of these announcements may contain as
part of their format a single order form, which may also serve as a
postcard. The order forms permitted with these announcements are in
addition to, and not in place of, order forms that may be enclosed
under 1.4a or 1.4b.
[Remove current E416.1.5; redesignate E416.2.0 as E634.]
[Insert text of current E419 and redesignate as E625; revise as
follows:]
[[Page 10134]]
E625 Library Mail
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 Qualification
Library Mail is Standard Mail matter that meets the standards in
E611, E613, and those below. Library Mail rates are based on the weight
of the piece, without regard to zone.
1.2 Qualified Sender, Recipient, Content
Each piece must show in the address or return address the name of a
school, college, university, public library, museum, or herbarium or
the name of a nonprofit religious, educational, scientific,
philanthropic (charitable), agricultural, labor, veterans, or fraternal
organization. For Library Mail standards, these nonprofit organizations
are defined in E670. Only the articles described in 1.4 through 1.5 may
be mailed at the Library Mail rate.
1.3 Preparation
When 1,000 or more pieces of identical weight are mailed at the
Library Mail rates during a single day, the pieces must be prepared
under M630.
1.4 Mailable Items Sent Between
The following items may be mailed at the Library Mail rate when
sent between: (1) schools, colleges, universities, public libraries,
museums, and herbariums and nonprofit religious, educational,
scientific, philanthropic (charitable), agricultural, labor, veterans,
and fraternal organizations or associations; (2) any such institution,
organization, or association, and an individual who has no financial
interest in the sale, promotion, or distribution of the materials; or
(3) any such institution, organization, or association and a publisher,
if such institution, organization, or association has placed an order
to buy such materials for delivery to itself:
a. Books, consisting wholly of reading matter, scholarly
bibliography, or reading matter with incidental blank spaces for
notations and containing no advertising except for incidental
announcements of books.
b. Printed music, whether in bound or sheet form.
c. Bound volumes of academic theses, whether in typewritten or
duplicated form.
d. Periodicals, whether bound or unbound.
e. Sound recordings.
f. Other library materials in printed, duplicated, or photographic
form or in the form of unpublished manuscripts.
g. Museum materials, specimens, collections, teaching aids, printed
matter, and interpretive materials for informing and furthering the
educational work and interests of museums and herbariums.
1.5 Mailable Items Sent ``To'' or ``From''
The following specific items may be mailed at the Library Mail rate
when sent to or from schools, colleges, universities, public libraries,
museums, and herbariums and to or from nonprofit religious,
educational, scientific, philanthropic (charitable), agricultural,
labor, veterans, or fraternal organizations:
a. 16-millimeter or narrower width films, filmstrips,
transparencies, slides, and microfilms. All must be positive prints in
final form for viewing.
b. Sound recordings.
c. Museum materials, specimens, collections, teaching aids, printed
matter, and interpretive materials intended for informing and
furthering the educational work and interests of museums and
herbariums.
d. Scientific or mathematical kits, instruments, or other devices.
e. Catalogs of the materials in 1.5a through 1.5d and guides or
scripts prepared solely for use with such materials.
1.6 Enclosures in Books and Sound Recordings
Books and sound recordings mailed at the Library Mail rate may
contain these enclosures as well as the additions and enclosures
permitted under E611:
a. Either one envelope or one addressed postcard. If also serving
as an order form, the envelope or card may be in addition to the order
form permitted by 1.6b.
b. One order form. If also serving as an envelope or postcard, the
order form may be in addition to the envelope or card permitted by
1.6a.
c. With books, announcements of books appearing in book pages or as
loose enclosures. These announcements must be incidental and
exclusively devoted to books, without extraneous advertising of book-
related materials or services. Announcements may fully describe the
conditions and methods of ordering books (such as by membership in book
clubs) and may contain ordering instructions for use with the single
order form permitted in 1.6b.
d. With sound recordings, announcements of sound recordings
appearing on title labels, on protective sleeves, on the carton or
wrapper, or on loose enclosures. These announcements of sound
recordings must be incidental and exclusively devoted to sound
recordings. They may not contain extraneous advertising of recording-
related materials or services. Announcements may fully describe the
conditions and methods of ordering sound recordings (such as by
membership in sound recording clubs) and may contain ordering
instructions for use with the single order form permitted in 1.6b.
1.7 Other Material
Material mailed at the Library Mail rate other than books and sound
recordings may contain only those additions and enclosures permitted
under E611.
[Remove text of current E419.1.8.]
E630 Nonautomation Presort Standard Mail Rates
[Insert text of current of E331 and E332 and redesignate as E631;
revise as follows:]
E631 Nonautomation Regular Standard Mail
1.0 Basic Standards
All pieces in a nonautomation Regular Standard Mail mailing must
meet the basic standards for Standard Mail in E611 and E612 and must be
part of a single mailing of at least 200 pieces or 50 pounds of pieces
of nonautomation rate Regular Standard Mail.
2.0 Basic and 3/5 Rates
Nonautomation Regular Standard Mail rates (Basic and 3/5) apply to
Regular Standard Mail letters, flats, and machinable and irregular
parcels, weighing less than 16 ounces, that are prepared under M610 or
palletized under M045. Basic rates apply to pieces that do not meet the
standards for the 3/5 rates described below. Basic rate and 3/5 rate
pieces prepared as part of the same mailing are subject to a single
minimum volume standard. Pieces that do not qualify for the 3/5 rate
must be paid at the basic rate and prepared accordingly. Pieces may
qualify for the 3/5 rate if:
a. In quantities of 150 or more letter-size pieces for a single 3-
digit area, prepared in 5-digit or 3-digit packages of 10 or more
pieces each and placed in 5-digit or 3-digit trays.
b. In quantities of 150 or more upgradable letter-size pieces (as
defined in M610) for a single 3-digit area and placed in 5-digit or 3-
digit trays.
c. In a 5-digit or 3-digit package of 10 or more flat-size pieces
and placed in a 5-digit or 3-digit sack containing at least 125 pieces
or 15 pounds of pieces.
[[Page 10135]]
d. In a 5-digit or 3-digit package of 10 or more flat-size pieces
palletized under M045.
e. In a 5-digit, destination ASF (if required), or destination BMC
sack containing at least 10 pounds of machinable parcels. (The 3/5
rates are available only if all possible 5-digit sacks are prepared.)
f. On a 5-digit, destination ASF (if required), or destination BMC
pallet of machinable parcels. (The 3/5 rates are available only if all
possible 5-digit pallets are prepared.)
g. In a 5-digit or 3-digit sack of irregular parcels containing at
least 125 pieces or 15 pounds of pieces.
3.0 ZIP Code Accuracy
Effective October 1, 1996, 5-digit ZIP Codes included in addresses
appearing on pieces claimed at nonautomation Regular rates must be
verified and corrected within 12 months before the mailing date, using
a USPS-approved method. Mailers must certify that this standard has
been met when the corresponding mail is presented to the USPS. This
standard applies to each address individually, not to a specific list
or mailing. An address meeting this standard may be used in mailings at
any other rates to which the standard applies throughout the 12-month
period following its most recent update.
[Remove text of current E333 and E334 and replace with new E632 as
follows:]
E632 Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 All Pieces
All pieces in an Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail mailing
(letters, flats, or irregular parcels, including merchandise samples
distributed with detached address labels) must:
a. Meet the basic standards for Standard Mail in E611 and E612.
b. Be part of a single mailing of at least 200 pieces or 50 pounds
of pieces of Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail, except that
automation Basic Carrier Route rate pieces are subject to a separate
200-piece/50-pound minimum volume standard and may not be included in
the same mailing as other Enhanced Carrier Route mail.
c. Be sorted to carrier routes, marked, and documented under M045
(if palletized) or M620.
1.2 Flats and Merchandise Samples
Enhanced Carrier Route rate flats may not be more than 11\3/4\
inches wide, 14 inches long, or \3/4\ inch thick. Merchandise samples
with detached address labels may exceed these dimensions if the labels
meet the standards in A060.
1.3 Preparation
Preparation to qualify for any of the Enhanced Carrier Route rates
is optional and need not be performed for all carrier routes in a 5-
digit area. An Enhanced Carrier Route mailing may include pieces at
Basic, High Density, and Saturation Enhanced Carrier Route rates.
Automation Basic Carrier Route rate pieces must be prepared as a
separate mailing, subject to the eligibility standards in E641.
1.4 Carrier Route Information
Subject to A930 and A950, mailers must apply carrier route codes to
mailings using CASS-certified software and the current USPS Carrier
Route Information System (CRIS) scheme or another AIS product
containing carrier route information. The carrier route information
must be updated within 90 days before the mailing date. Carrier route
and City/State File information must be updated within 90 days before
the mailing date.
1.5 Sequencing
Basic Carrier Route rate mail must be prepared either in carrier
walk sequence or in line-of-travel (LOT) sequence according to LOT
schemes prescribed by the USPS (see M050). High Density and Saturation
rate mailings must be prepared in carrier walk sequence according to
schemes prescribed by the USPS.
1.6 Addressing--High Density and Saturation Mail
High Density and Saturation rate mail may be prepared with detached
address labels, subject to A060, or with an alternative addressing
format, subject to A040. High Density pieces must have a complete
delivery address or an address in occupant or exceptional format.
Saturation pieces addressed for delivery on a city route must have a
complete delivery address or an address in occupant or exceptional
format, except that official mail from certain government entities may
also use the simplified format. Saturation pieces for delivery on rural
or highway contract routes, or through general delivery or a post
office box, must have a complete delivery address or an alternative
address format.
1.7 Density--High Density and Saturation Mail
High Density and Saturation rate mailings are subject to these
density standards:
a. There is no minimum volume per 5-digit ZIP Code delivery area.
Pieces need not be sent to all carrier routes within a 5-digit delivery
area.
b. For the High Density rate, at least 125 pieces must be prepared
for each carrier route for which that discount is claimed, except that
fewer pieces may be prepared and the High Density rate may be claimed
for carrier routes of 124 or fewer possible deliveries if a piece is
addressed to every possible delivery on the route. Multiple pieces per
delivery address can count toward this density standard.
c. For the Saturation rate, pieces must be addressed either to 90%
or more of the active residential addresses or to 75% or more of the
total number of active possible delivery addresses, whichever is less,
on each carrier route receiving this mail, except that mail addressed
in the simplified address format must meet the 100% coverage standard
in A040. Multiple pieces per delivery address do not count toward this
delivery standard. Sacks with fewer than 125 pieces and less than 15
pounds of pieces may be prepared to a carrier route when the Saturation
rate is claimed for the contents and the applicable density standard is
met.
2.0 Rate Application
2.1 Automation Basic
Automation Basic Carrier Route rates apply to each piece that is
sorted under M810 into full carrier route trays, or in carrier route
groups of 10 or more pieces each placed in 5-digit carrier routes
trays. (Preparation to qualify for that rate is optional and need not
be performed for all carrier routes in a 5-digit area.)
2.2 Basic
Basic (nonautomation) Carrier Route rates apply to each piece that
is sorted under M620 into the corresponding qualifying groups:
a. Letter-size pieces in a full carrier route tray, or in a carrier
route package of 10 or more pieces placed in a 5-digit carrier routes
tray.
b. Flat-size pieces in a carrier route package of 10 or more pieces
palletized under M045, or placed in a carrier route sack containing at
least 125 pieces or 15 pounds of pieces or in a 5-digit carrier routes
sack.
c. Irregular parcels in a carrier route sack containing 125 pieces
or 15 pounds of pieces, in a carrier route carton(s) of merchandise
samples prepared with detached address labels under A060 containing a
total of 125 pieces or 15 pounds of pieces, or in a 5-digit carrier
routes sack or carton. (Pieces must be in
[[Page 10136]]
packages of 10 or more irregular parcels each if packaging is required
under M610.)
2.3 High Density and Saturation
High Density and Saturation rates apply to pieces qualified for the
Basic rates that also meet the applicable addressing and density
standards in 1.6 and 1.7.
[Insert text of current E414.2.0 and redesignate as E633; revise as
follows:]
E633 Bulk Bound Printed Matter
1.0 Basic Information
1.1 Preparation
Bulk bound printed matter must meet the basic standards in E623 and
the applicable preparation standards in M630. Mailings may contain
nonidentical-weight pieces only if the correct postage is affixed to
each piece or if the RCSC serving the office of mailing has authorized
payment of postage by permit imprint. Each mailing must contain 300 or
more pieces of bound printed matter. Insurance, special delivery,
special handling, and COD services may be used, but selective use of
these services for individual parcels must be approved by the RCSC.
1.2 Additional Standards for Carrier Route
Carrier route bulk bound printed matter is subject to these
additional standards:
a. Each mailing must contain 300 or more pieces sorted under M630
into groups of at least 10 pieces, 20 pounds, or 1,000 cubic inches
each for the same carrier route, rural route, highway contract route,
post office box section, or general delivery unit.
b. Residual pieces (not sorted as described in 1.2a) do not count
toward the minimum specified in 1.2a, are ineligible for the carrier
route presort level rate, and must have postage paid at the appropriate
bulk bound printed matter rate. Residual pieces may be included in a
carrier route presort rate mailing and be endorsed ``Carrier Route
Presort'' or ``CAR-RT SORT.'' The number of residual pieces to any
single 5-digit ZIP Code area may not exceed 5% of the total qualifying
carrier route pieces addressed to that 5-digit area. Residual pieces
must be separated from the pieces that qualify for the carrier route
rate and must be prepared under M630.
c. Subject to A930, mailers must apply carrier route codes to
mailings using CASS-certified software and the current USPS Carrier
Route Information System (CRIS) scheme or another AIS product
containing carrier route information. The carrier route information
must be updated within 90 days before the mailing date.
[Insert text of current E416.2.0 and redesignate as E634; revise as
follows:]
E634 Presorted Special Standard Mail
1.0 Basic Information
The Presorted Special Standard Mail rates apply to Special Standard
Mail rate matter mailed in minimum quantities at a place and time
designated by the postmaster, subject to the preparation standards in
M630. The size and content of each piece in the mailing does not need
to be identical. Nonidentical pieces may be merged, sorted together,
and presented as a single mailing either with postage paid with a
permit imprint if authorized by the RCSC serving the post office of
mailing, or with the correct postage affixed to each piece in the
mailing.
2.0 Presort Rates
2.1 Mailing Fee
A mailing fee must be paid once each 12-month period at each office
of mailing by or for any person who mails at the Presorted Special
Standard Mail rates. The fee may be paid in advance only for the next
year and only during the last 30 days of the current service period.
The fee charged is that in effect on the date of payment.
2.2 One Presort Level
A Presorted Special Standard Mail rate mailing receives only one
level of presort rate. The mailer may, however, prepare two or more
mailings with separate postage statements to use both levels of presort
rates. Pieces that do not qualify for a presort rate must be presented
for mailing under a separate postage statement if postage is paid with
a permit imprint.
2.3 Definitions
For this standard:
a. Full sack means either at least eight pieces or a quantity of
pieces equaling at least 1,000 cubic inches of volume or weighing from
20 to 70 pounds.
b. Substantially full sack means either at least four pieces or a
quantity of pieces equaling at least 1,000 cubic inches of volume or
weighing from 20 to 70 pounds.
2.4 5-Digit Rate
To qualify for the Presorted Special Standard Mail 5-digit rate, a
piece must be in a mailing of at least 500 pieces receiving identical
service, properly prepared and sorted either under M630 to full 5-digit
sacks or under M045 to 5-digit pallets. These conditions also apply:
a. Mailings of at least 500 nonmachinable outside parcels may
qualify for the Presorted Special Standard Mail 5-digit rate if
prepared to preserve sortation by 5-digit ZIP Code as prescribed by the
mailing office postmaster. The postmaster may require up to a 24-hour
notice before the mailing is presented.
b. Mailings prepared as palletized bundles must consist of 5-digit
bundles each containing at least eight pieces, or a quantity of pieces
equaling 1,000 cubic inches of volume or weighing 20 pounds. No bundle
may exceed 40 pounds. If there is more than 20 pounds of mail to a 5-
digit destination, mailers must prepare the minimum number of bundles
that do not exceed 40 pounds each.
2.5 BMC Rate
To qualify for the Presorted Special Standard Mail BMC rate, a
piece must be in a mailing of at least 500 sacked pieces receiving
identical service, properly prepared and sorted either under M630 to
full or substantially full bulk mail center (BMC) sacks or under M045
to BMC pallets. Mailings of at least 500 nonmachinable outside parcels
may qualify for the Presorted Special Standard Mail BMC rate if
prepared to preserve sortation by BMC as prescribed by the mailing
office postmaster. The postmaster may require up to a 24-hour notice
before the mailing is presented.
E639 Nonprofit Standard Mail
[Insert text of current E331 and E332 and redesignate, renumber, and
revise as E639.1.0; insert text of current E333 and redesignate,
renumber, and revise as E639.2.0; insert text of current E334 and
redesignate, renumber, and revise as E639.3.0.]
1.0 Basic and 3/5 Rates
1.1 Qualifying Pieces
Nonprofit Basic and 3/5 rates apply to Nonprofit Standard Mail
letters, flats, and machinable and irregular parcels, weighing less
than 16 ounces, that meet the basic standards in E611 and E612 and are
prepared under M692. Basic rates apply to pieces that do not meet the
standards for the 3/5 rates described below. Basic rate and 3/5 rate
pieces may be prepared as part of the same mailing, subject to a single
minimum volume standard. Pieces not sorted to qualify for the 3/5 rate
must be paid at the basic rate and prepared accordingly. Pieces may
qualify for the 3/5 rate if prepared:
a. In 5-digit or 3-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each, placed
in 5-digit or
[[Page 10137]]
3-digit sacks that contain at least 125 pieces or 15 pounds of pieces.
b. In 5-digit or 3-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each, placed
in 5-digit or 3-digit trays.
c. In full or overflow 5-digit, 3-digit, or SCF trays, prepared
under the standards for ZIP+4 tray-based mailings in M891.
d. In 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each, or 3-digit
packages of 50 or more pieces each, prepared under the standards for
ZIP+4 package-based mailings in M892.
e. In 5-digit, 3-digit, or SCF trays, prepared under the standards
for letter-size Barcoded tray-based mailings in M893.
f. In 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each, or 3-digit
packages of 50 or more pieces each, prepared under the standards for
letter-size Barcoded package-based mailings in M894 and M895.
g. In 5-digit or 3-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each,
prepared under the standards for flat-size 3/5 ZIP+4 Barcoded rate
mailings in M897.
h. In 5-digit or 3-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each,
palletized under M045.
i. In 5-digit, destination ASF (if required), or destination BMC
sacks containing at least 10 pounds of machinable parcels. (The 3/5
rates are available only if all possible 5-digit sacks are prepared.)
j. On 5-digit or destination BMC pallets of machinable parcels.
(The 3/5 rates are available only if all possible 5-digit pallets are
prepared.)
k. In 5-digit or 3-digit sacks of irregular parcels.
1.2 Optional Preparation
At the mailer's option, nonautomation Nonprofit Standard Mail may
be prepared under the standards for nonautomation Regular Standard Mail
in M610, including presort. Under this option, nonautomation Nonprofit
Standard Mail may claim nonautomation Nonprofit Basic or 3/5 rates if
all corresponding eligibility standards in E631 for nonautomation
Regular Basic and 3/5 rates are met.
1.3 Carrier Route Pieces
A 3/5 rate mailing may not include pieces claimed at the carrier
route or walk-sequence rates. The 3/5 rate pieces and carrier route or
walk-sequence rate pieces may be reported on the same postage statement
only under D600.
2.0 Carrier Route Rates
2.1 General
All pieces in a carrier route rate mailing must be presented at one
post office as part of a single mailing of at least 200 pieces or 50
pounds of pieces prepared under M693 to carrier routes. Pieces may not
be more than 11\3/4\ inches wide, 14 inches long, or \3/4\ inch thick.
Merchandise samples with detached address labels may exceed these
dimensions if the labels meet the standards in A060.
2.2 Optional Preparation
At the mailer's option, carrier route Nonprofit Standard Mail may
be prepared under the standards for Basic, High Density, or Saturation
rate Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail in M620, including presort.
Under this option, Nonprofit Standard Mail may claim Nonprofit carrier
route rates if all corresponding eligibility standards in E632 are met
for the Basic, High Density, or Saturation Enhanced Carrier Route rate.
Automation Basic Carrier Route rates may not be claimed under this
option.
2.3 Other Rates
A carrier route rate mailing may include pieces claimed at the
basic rate if the entire mailing meets the standard in 3.1. The basic
rate pieces must be prepared under M692, but they do not have to meet a
separate 200-piece/50-pound minimum. A carrier route rate mailing may
not include pieces claimed at the 3/5 rates. The 3/5 rate and carrier
route rate pieces may be reported on the same postage statement only
under D600.
2.4 Required Listing
At the time of mailing, the mailer must give the post office a list
of the number of qualifying pieces to each 5-digit ZIP Code area. After
the first mailing, the postmaster may authorize the mailer to keep the
records and submit them on request. The mailer must keep these records
for 90 days after the mailing date, or until any action pending on the
recalculation of postage is resolved to USPS satisfaction.
2.5 Carrier Route Information
Mailers must apply carrier route codes to mailings by using the
current USPS Carrier Route Information System (CRIS) scheme or another
AIS product containing carrier route information (see A930). Carrier
route information must be updated within 90 days before the mailing
date.
2.6 Qualifying Presort
Each qualifying piece must be prepared under M693 as part of a
group of 10 or more pieces in the same carrier route package that, in
turn, is placed in a carrier route, 5-digit carrier routes, or 3-digit
carrier routes tray or sack. To carrier route and 5-digit carrier
routes destinations, trays must be full and sacks must contain at least
125 pieces or 15 pounds of pieces. Qualifying mail also includes:
a. Carrier route packages in a 5-digit carrier routes tray that is
less than full, or in a 5-digit carrier routes sack that contains fewer
than 125 pieces and less than 15 pounds of pieces if that 5-digit area
does not have enough residential deliveries to meet the applicable full
tray or 125-piece/15-pound sack minimum at a 90% saturation level.
b. The last tray or sack to a 3-digit ZIP Code destination. The
last tray may be less than full and the last sack may contain fewer
than 125 pieces and less than 15 pounds of pieces.
c. Carrier route packages palletized under M045.
2.7 Residual
Residual pieces are those not sorted under M693 to qualify for
carrier route rates. These pieces may be included in a carrier route
rate mailing and may be marked ``Carrier Route Presort,'' subject to
these conditions:
a. Residual pieces do not count toward the minimum quantity for
carrier route rates.
b. The number of residual pieces to any single 5-digit ZIP Code
area may not exceed 5% of the total qualifying carrier route pieces
addressed to that 5-digit ZIP Code area.
c. Residual pieces are not eligible for the carrier route rate and
must have postage paid at the basic rate and must be prepared as
specified in M693.
3.0 Walk-Sequence Rates
3.1 General
All pieces in a walk-sequence rate mailing must be presented at one
post office as part of a single mailing of at least 200 pieces or 50
pounds of pieces sorted to carrier routes. Subject to compliance with
these standards, the saturation walk-sequence rate may be claimed by
pieces in both the ``letters'' and ``other-than-letters'' categories.
The 125-piece walk-sequence rate may be claimed only by pieces in the
``other-than-letters'' category, as defined in E612.
3.2 Optional Preparation
At the mailer's option, carrier route Nonprofit Standard Mail may
be prepared under the standards for Enhanced Carrier Route Standard
Mail in M620, including presort. Under this option, Nonprofit Standard
Mail may claim Nonprofit 125-piece walk-sequence or saturation walk-
sequence
[[Page 10138]]
rates if all corresponding eligibility standards in E632 for Enhanced
Carrier Route High Density or Saturation rates are met.
3.3 Other Rates
A walk-sequence rate mailing may include pieces claimed at the
carrier route and basic rates, but only the carrier route pieces count
toward the standard in 3.1. The basic rate pieces must be prepared as
required for residual pieces under 1.0, but they do not have to meet a
separate 200-piece/50-pound minimum. When presented to the USPS, the
trays or sacks containing the walk-sequence rate pieces must be
separated from other trays or sacks. Any effective separation method
may be used. A walk-sequence rate mailing may not include pieces
claimed at the 3/5 rate. The 3/5 rate and walk-sequence rate pieces may
be reported on the same postage statement only under D600.
3.4 Addressing
Walk-sequence rate mail must meet these addressing standards:
a. Mailings may be prepared with detached address labels, subject
to A060.
b. Pieces prepared with an alternative addressing format must meet
the applicable standards in A040.
c. For the 125-piece walk-sequence discount, each piece must have a
complete delivery address or an address in occupant or exceptional
format.
d. For the saturation walk-sequence discount, each piece addressed
for delivery on a city route must have a complete delivery address or
an address in occupant or exceptional format, except that official mail
from certain government entities may also use the simplified format.
Pieces for delivery on rural or highway contract routes, or through
general delivery or a post office box, must have a complete delivery
address or an alternative address format.
3.5 Density Standards
Walk-sequence rate mailings are subject to these density standards:
a. There is no minimum volume per 5-digit ZIP Code delivery area.
Walk-sequence mail need not be sent to all carrier routes within a 5-
digit delivery area.
b. For the 125-piece walk-sequence discount, at least 125 walk-
sequenced pieces must be prepared for each carrier route for which that
discount is claimed, except that for carrier routes of 124 or fewer
possible deliveries, the 125-piece walk-sequence discount may be
claimed if a piece is addressed to every possible delivery on the
route. Multiple pieces per delivery address can count toward this
density standard.
c. For the saturation walk-sequence discount, pieces must be
addressed either to 90% or more of the active residential addresses or
75% or more of the total number of active possible delivery addresses,
whichever is less, on each carrier route receiving this mail, except
that mail addressed in the simplified address format must meet the
coverage standard in A040. Multiple pieces per delivery address do not
count toward this density standard.
d. Sacks
FR Doc. 96-5500 Classification Reform; Implementation Standards
with fewer than 125 pieces and less than 15 pounds of
pieces may be prepared to a carrier route when a walk-sequence discount
is claimed for the contents and the applicable density standard in 3.5b
or 3.5c is met.
E640 Automation Standard Mail Rates
[Insert text of current E342, E344, and E345 and redesignate as E641;
revise as follows:]
E641 Automation Regular and Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail
1.0 Automation Regular Rates
1.1 All Pieces
All pieces in an automation rate Regular Standard Mail mailing
must:
a. Meet the basic standards for Standard Mail in E611 and E612.
b. Be part of a single mailing of at least 200 pieces or 50 pounds
of pieces of automation rate Regular Standard Mail.
c. Meet the physical standards in C810 (letters and cards) or C820
(flats).
d. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct ZIP Code,
ZIP+4 code, or numeric equivalent to the delivery point barcode (DPBC).
e. Meet the address quality and coding standards in 1.2 (if
applicable), A800, and A950.
f. Be marked, sorted, and documented as specified in M810 (letters
and cards) or M820 (flats).
g. Bear an accurate barcode, either a DPBC if a card or letter (on
the piece or on an insert showing through a barcode window) or a ZIP+4
barcode or DPBC if a flat, that meets the barcode standards in C840. A
letter-size mailpiece with a barcode window in the lower right corner
must have the correct DPBC appearing through that window.
1.2 Enclosed Reply Cards and Envelopes
Effective January 1, 1997, all courtesy reply and business reply
mail (BRM) cards and letter-size envelopes provided as enclosures in
automation rate Regular Standard Mail must meet the standards in C810
for enclosed cards and envelopes. Mailers must certify that this
standard has been met when the corresponding mail is presented to the
USPS.
1.3 Rate Application--Letters and Cards
Regular automation rates apply to each piece that is sorted under
M810 into the corresponding qualifying groups:
a. Groups of 150 or more pieces in 5-digit trays (and all pieces in
one less-than-full overflow tray) qualify for the 5-Digit automation
rate. (Preparation to qualify for that rate is optional and need not be
performed for all 5-digit destinations.)
b. Groups of 150 or more pieces in 3-digit or 3-digit scheme trays
(and all pieces in one less-than-full overflow tray) qualify for the 3-
Digit automation rate.
c. Pieces in full or overflow AADC trays and in all mixed AADC
trays qualify for the Basic automation rate.
1.4 Rate Application--Flats
Regular automation rates apply to each piece that is sorted under
M820 into the corresponding qualifying groups:
a. Pieces in 5-digit or 3-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each
qualify for the 3/5 automation rate.
b. Pieces in ADC or mixed ADC packages qualify for the Basic
automation rate.
2.0 Enhanced Carrier Route Rates
2.1 All Pieces
All pieces in an automation rate Enhanced Carrier Route Standard
Mail mailing (available for letters only) must:
a. Meet the basic standards for Standard Mail in E611 and E612.
b. Be part of a single mailing of at least 200 pieces or 50 pounds
of pieces of automation rate Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail.
c. Be sorted to carrier routes, marked, and documented under M045
(if palletized) or M810.
d. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct ZIP Code,
ZIP+4 code, or numeric equivalent to the delivery point barcode (DPBC).
e. Meet the address quality and coding standards in 1.5, A800, and
A950.
f. Bear an accurate DPBC that meets the barcode standards in C840.
A letter-size mailpiece with a barcode window in the lower right corner
must have the correct DPBC appearing through that window.
[[Page 10139]]
2.2 Preparation
Preparation to qualify for any of Enhanced Carrier Route automation
rates is optional and need not be performed for all carrier routes in a
5-digit area. An automation rate Enhanced Carrier Route mailing may not
include pieces at Basic, High Density, and Saturation Enhanced Carrier
Route rates.
2.3 Carrier Route Information
Subject to A930 and A950, mailers must apply carrier route codes to
mailings using CASS-certified software and the current USPS Carrier
Route Information System (CRIS) scheme or another AIS product
containing carrier route information. The carrier route information
must be updated within 90 days before the mailing date. Carrier route
and City/State File information must be updated within 90 days before
the mailing date. The automation Basic Carrier Route rate is available
only for letter-size mail and only for those 5-digit ZIP Code areas
identified in the USPS City/State File used for address coding.
2.4 Rate Application
Automation Basic Carrier Route rates apply to each piece that is
sorted under M810 into full carrier route trays, or in carrier route
groups of 10 or more pieces each placed in 5-digit carrier routes
trays. (Preparation to qualify for that rate is optional and need not
be performed for all carrier routes in a 5-digit area.)
E649 Automation Nonprofit Standard Mail
[Insert text of current eligibility standards in E342, E344, and E345
and redesignate and renumber as E649.1.0, E649.2.0, and E649.3.0,
respectively.]
1.0 ZIP+4 Discounts
1.1 All Pieces
All pieces in a Nonprofit Standard Mail ZIP+4 rate mailing must:
a. Meet the basic standards for Standard Mail in E611 and E612.
b. Be presented at one post office as part of a single mailing of
at least 200 pieces or 50 pounds of pieces of automation rate Nonprofit
Standard Mail.
c. Meet the physical standards in C810.
d. Bear a delivery address with the correct ZIP Code or ZIP+4 code
(or, if only prepared with a delivery point barcode (DPBC), the numeric
equivalent to the DPBC).
e. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
f. Meet the standards in C830 or, for pieces with the correct DPBC,
the barcode standards in C840.
g. Be marked, sorted, and documented as specified in M891 or M892.
h. Separately qualify under the standard for any other discount
claimed.
1.2 Rate Application
Nonprofit ZIP+4 rates apply to each piece that also:
a. Is sorted under M891 or M892 into the corresponding qualifying
groups described in 1.7 and 1.8.
b. Bears a delivery address with the correct numeric ZIP+4 code or
bears the correct DPBC.
c. Meets the applicable standards in 1.3 through 1.6.
1.3 Barcode Window
A mailpiece meeting the standards in 1.1 and 1.2, but with a
barcode window in the lower right corner, may be eligible for any
Nonprofit automation rate only if the correct DPBC appears through that
window.
1.4 5-Digit Barcodes
Nonprofit ZIP+4 rate mailings may include pieces with correct 5-
digit barcodes if those pieces meet the standards in 1.1 and 1.2 and
the standards for 5-digit barcodes in C840. Such pieces may qualify for
the Nonprofit ZIP+4 rates only if the barcode is printed on the piece
and the address contains the correct numeric ZIP+4 code.
1.5 ZIP+4 Barcodes
Nonprofit ZIP+4 rate mailings may include pieces with correct ZIP+4
barcodes if the barcode is located in the address block and those
pieces meet the standards in 1.1 and 1.2 and the standards for ZIP+4
barcodes in C840. Such pieces may qualify for Nonprofit ZIP+4 rates
only if, additionally, each has a barcode clear zone (without a window)
in the lower right corner and bears an address that contains the
correct numeric ZIP+4 code. Pieces that bear a ZIP+4 barcode in the
lower right corner may not be included in a Nonprofit ZIP+4 rate
mailing.
1.6 85% Rule
At least 85% of all pieces in a Nonprofit ZIP+4 rate mailing
(regardless of presort level or rate) must bear the correct numeric
ZIP+4 code or DPBC for the delivery address, as defined by the address
quality and coding standards in A800 and A950. The 85% requirement
applies to each mailing unless excepted by other standards.
1.7 Qualifying Tray-Based Presort
In tray-based mailings under M891, ZIP+4 coded or DPBC pieces in
full or overflow 5-digit, 3-digit, and SCF trays qualify for the
Nonprofit 3/5 ZIP+4 rate; other pieces qualify for the Nonprofit 3/5
rate. One less-than-full SCF tray for the origin SCF is permitted.
ZIP+4 coded or DPBC pieces in AADC, mixed AADC, or working trays
qualify for the Nonprofit Basic ZIP+4 rate; other pieces qualify for
the Nonprofit Basic rate.
1.8 Qualifying Package-Based Presort
In package-based mailings under M892, ZIP+4 coded or DPBC pieces in
5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each, and 3-digit packages of 50
or more pieces each, qualify for the Nonprofit 3/5 ZIP+4 rate; other
pieces in these packages qualify for the Nonprofit 3/5 rate. Residual
ZIP+4 coded or DPBC pieces qualify for the Nonprofit Basic ZIP+4 rate;
other pieces qualify for the Nonprofit Basic rate.
2.0 Barcoded Discounts (Letter-Size Pieces)
2.1 All Pieces
All pieces in a Nonprofit Standard Mail Barcoded rate letter-size
mailing must:
a. Meet the basic standards for Standard Mail in E611 and E612.
b. Be presented at one post office as part of a single mailing of
at least 200 pieces or 50 pounds of pieces.
c. Meet the physical standards in C810.
d. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct ZIP Code or
ZIP+4 code (or, only if prepared with a delivery point barcode (DPBC),
the numeric equivalent to the DPBC).
e. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
f. Either bear the correct DPBC meeting the barcode standards in
C840 or meet the applicable standards in 2.5.
g. Be marked, sorted, and documented as specified in M893, M894, or
M895.
h. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P600.
i. Separately qualify under the standard for any other discount
claimed.
2.2 Rate Application
Nonprofit Barcoded rates apply to each piece that also:
a. Is sorted under M893, M894, or M895 into the corresponding
qualifying groups described in 2.8, 2.9, and 2.10.
b. Bears the correct DPBC that meets the barcode standards in C840.
c. Meets the applicable standards in 2.3 through 2.7.
[[Page 10140]]
2.3 Optional Preparation
At the mailer's option, barcoded Nonprofit Standard Mail may be
prepared under the standards for Automation Standard Mail in M810,
including presort. Under this option, barcoded Nonprofit Standard Mail
may claim Nonprofit carrier route, 5-Digit Barcoded, 3-Digit Barcoded,
and Basic Barcoded rates if all corresponding eligibility standards in
E631 and E641 for Automation Carrier Route, 5-Digit, 3-Digit, and Basic
rates are met.
2.4 Barcode Window
A mailpiece with a barcode window in the lower right corner is
ineligible for any Nonprofit automation rate unless the correct DPBC
appears through that window.
2.5 Pieces Without DPBCs
Subject to 2.6 and 2.7, Nonprofit Barcoded rate mailings may
include nonbarcoded, 5-digit barcoded, or ZIP+4 barcoded pieces if each
such piece (regardless of rate) meets the standards in 2.1, has a
barcode clear zone in the lower right corner meeting the reflectance
standards in C840, meets the applicable 5-digit or ZIP+4 barcode
standards in C840. Additionally, to qualify for a Nonprofit ZIP+4 rate,
subject to 2.8, 2.9, and 2.10:
a. Nonbarcoded and 5-digit barcoded pieces must bear an address
with the correct ZIP+4 code and meet the standards in C830, and must
not have a window in the lower right corner.
b. ZIP+4 barcoded pieces must have the barcode in the address
block, meet the standards in C830, and bear an address with the correct
ZIP+4 code, and must not have a window in the lower right corner.
2.6 85% Rule
Subject to 2.7, at least 85% of all pieces in a Nonprofit Barcoded
rate mailing (regardless of presort level or rate) must bear the
correct DPBC for the delivery address, as defined by the standards for
address quality and coding accuracy in A800 and A950. The 85%
requirement applies to each mailing unless excepted by other standards.
2.7 100% Barcoding
Each piece must bear the correct delivery point barcode:
a. In 5-digit trays in a tray-based mailing under M893.
b. In 5-digit packages in a package-based mailing under M894 or
M895.
c. In any mailing containing heavy letters (as defined in C810).
2.8 Qualifying Tray-Based Presort
In tray-based mailings under M893:
a. Pieces in full or overflow 5-digit trays qualify for the 5-digit
Nonprofit Barcoded rate.
b. In full or overflow 3-digit and SCF trays, DPBC pieces qualify
for the 3-digit Nonprofit Barcoded rate; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded
non-DPBC pieces qualify for the Nonprofit \3/5\ ZIP+4 rate; other
pieces qualify for the Nonprofit \3/5\ rate. One less-than-full SCF
tray is permitted for the SCF serving the post office where the mailing
is entered.
c. In AADC, mixed AADC, and working trays, DPBC pieces qualify for
the Nonprofit Basic Barcoded rate; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC
pieces qualify for the Nonprofit Basic ZIP+4 rate; other pieces qualify
for the Nonprofit Basic rates.
2.9 Qualifying Two-Tier Package-Based Presort
In two-tier package-based mailings under M894:
a. Pieces in 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each qualify for
the Nonprofit 5-digit Barcoded rate.
b. In 3-digit packages of 50 or more pieces each, DPBC pieces
qualify for the Nonprofit 3-digit Barcoded rates; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4
coded non-DPBC pieces qualify for the Nonprofit \3/5\ ZIP+4 rate; other
pieces qualify for the Nonprofit \3/5\ rate.
c. In the residual portion, DPBC pieces qualify for the Nonprofit
Basic Barcoded rate; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces
qualify for the Nonprofit Basic ZIP+4 rate; other pieces qualify for
Nonprofit Basic rate.
2.10 Qualifying Three-Tier Package-Based Presort
In three-tier package-based mailings under M895:
a. Pieces in 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each in the 5-
digit tier qualify for the Nonprofit 5-digit Barcoded rate.
b. In 3-digit packages of 50 or more pieces each in the 3-digit
tier, DPBC pieces qualify for the Nonprofit 3-digit Barcoded rate;
subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces qualify for the Nonprofit
\3/5\ ZIP+4 rate; other pieces qualify for the Nonprofit \3/5\ rate.
c. In the residual tier, DPBC pieces qualify for the Nonprofit
Basic Barcoded rate; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces
qualify for the Nonprofit Basic ZIP+4 rate; other pieces qualify for
the Nonprofit Basic rate.
3.0 ZIP+4 Barcoded Discounts (Flat-Size Pieces)
3.1 All Pieces
All pieces in a Nonprofit Standard Mail ZIP+4 Barcoded rate flat-
size mailing must:
a. Meet the basic standards for Standard Mail in E611 and E612.
b. Be presented at one post office as part of a single mailing of
at least 200 pieces or 50 pounds of pieces.
c. Meet the physical standards in C820.
d. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct ZIP Code or
ZIP+4 code (or, only if prepared with a delivery point barcode (DPBC),
the numeric equivalent to the DPBC).
e. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
f. Bear the correct 5-digit barcode, ZIP+4 barcode, or DPBC,
subject to C840, except for pieces in specific portions of mailings
prepared under M897.
g. Be marked, sorted, and documented as specified in M897.
h. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P600.
i. Separately qualify under the standard for any other discount
claimed.
3.2 Rate Application
Nonprofit ZIP+4 Barcoded rates apply to each piece that also:
a. Is sorted under M897 into the qualifying groups described in
3.6.
b. Bears the correct ZIP+4 barcode or DPBC.
3.3 Optional Preparation
At the mailer's option, barcoded Nonprofit Standard Mail may be
prepared under the standards for Automation Standard Mail in M820,
including presort. Under this option, barcoded Nonprofit Standard Mail
may claim Nonprofit \3/5\ Barcoded and Basic Barcoded rates if all
corresponding eligibility standards in E631 and E641 for Automation \3/
5\ and Basic rates are met.
3.4 5-Digit Barcodes
Nonprofit ZIP+4 Barcoded rate mailings may include pieces with
correct 5-digit barcodes if those pieces meet the standards in 3.1
through 3.3 and the standards for 5-digit barcodes in C840. Pieces with
a 5-digit barcode could be eligible for a presort rate under 3.6.
3.5 85% Rule
Generally, at least 85% of all pieces in a Nonprofit ZIP+4 Barcoded
rate mailing (regardless of presort level or rate) must bear the
correct ZIP+4 barcode or DPBC for the delivery address, as defined by
the standards for address quality and coding accuracy in A800 and A950.
Remaining pieces must bear the correct 5-digit barcode meeting the
applicable standards in C840. The 85% requirement applies to each
[[Page 10141]]
mailing unless excepted by other standards. Nonprofit ZIP+4 Barcoded
rate mailings not meeting the 85% rule must be prepared under
corresponding standards in M897.
3.6 Presort
In 5-digit or 3-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each, ZIP+4
barcoded or DPBC pieces can qualify for the Nonprofit 3/5 ZIP+4
Barcoded rate; other pieces qualify for the Nonprofit 3/5 rate. In SCF
packages of 10 or more pieces each, or in residual packages, ZIP+4
barcoded or DPBC pieces qualify for the Nonprofit Basic ZIP+4 Barcoded
rate for flats; 5-digit barcoded pieces qualify for the Nonprofit Basic
rate.
E650 Destination Entry Discounts
E651 Destination Entry--Regular, Nonprofit, and Enhanced Carrier
Route Standard Mail
[Insert text of current E350 and redesignate as E651; in 1.4, replace
``bulk third-class mail'' with ``bulk rate Standard Mail (A)''; in 3.9,
replace ``third-class mail'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; revise the
rest of E651 as follows:]
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 Rate Application
Regular, Nonprofit, and Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail
meeting the basic standards in E611 and E612 may qualify for the
destination BMC, SCF, or DDU entry rates if deposited at the correct
destination postal facility, subject to the general standards below and
the specific standards in 5.0, 6.0, and 7.0, respectively. Only one
destination reduction may be claimed for each mailpiece.
* * * * *
5.0 DBMC Discount
[In 5.1, replace ``L708'' with ``L602.'']
* * * * *
5.2 Eligibility
[Add the following text after the first sentence:]
* * * All pieces in an ADC or AADC sack or tray are eligible for
the DBMC discount if the ADC or AADC facility ZIP Code (as shown on
Line 1 of the corresponding container label) is within the service area
of the BMC at which the sack or tray is deposited. All pieces in a
palletized ADC package are eligible for the DBMC discount if the ADC
facility that is the destination of the package is within the service
area of the BMC at which it is deposited.
[Replace current 5.3 with new 5.3 as follows:]
5.3 Separate Containers
Separate mixed ADC or mixed AADC sacks or trays must be prepared
for pieces eligible for and claimed at the DBMC rate and for pieces not
claimed at the DBMC rate. Otherwise applicable restrictions (e.g.,
minimum volume, number of less-than-full trays) are excepted when
necessary to comply with this standard. Alternatively, the mailer may
waive this separation if no pieces in the resulting mixed ADC or mixed
AADC containers are claimed at the DBMC rate. Separate destination BMC
sacks or pallets are not required for machinable parcels claimed at the
DBMC rate.
* * * * *
6.0 DSCF DISCOUNT
6.1 Definition
For this standard, destination sectional center facility (DSCF)
refers to the facilities listed in L002, Column C.
6.2 Eligibility
Pieces in a mailing that meet the standards in 1.0 through 4.0 and
6.0 are eligible for the DSCF rate when deposited at a DSCF, addressed
for delivery within that facility's service area, and placed in other
than an ADC, AADC, mixed ADC, or mixed AADC tray or sack, or BMC sack
or pallet (as permitted by the standards for the rate claimed) that is
labeled to that DSCF or to a postal facility within its service area.
DSCF rate mail may also be eligible for a presort or automation
discount subject to the corresponding standards.
* * * * *
7.0 DDU Discount
7.1 Definition
For this standard, destination delivery unit (DDU) refers to the
facility designated by the USPS district drop shipment coordinator (for
automation rate Standard Mail) or the facility (post office, branch,
station, etc.) where the carrier cases mail for delivery to the
addresses on pieces in the mailing (for other Standard Mail (A)).
* * * * *
[Remove 7.3.]
E652 Destination Entry--Parcel Post
[Insert text of current E450 and redesignate as E652; in 1.4, replace
``fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail (B)''; no other change in text.]
E670 Nonprofit Standard Mail
[Insert text of current E370 and redesignate as E670; in 1.1, 1.3, 2.1,
3.1, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.4a, 5.4b, 5.4c, 5.4d(1),
5.6a, 5.6b, 5.6b(1), 5.6b(2), 5.6b(3), 5.6e, 5.8, 5.9, 5.10, 5.10c,
5.11, 5.12, 6.0, 7.1, 7.3, 8.1, 8.3, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 11.1, and
11.4, replace ``[s]pecial bulk third-class rate[s],'' ``special bulk
rate[s],'' or ``special rate[s]'' with ``Nonprofit Standard Mail
rate[s]''; in 1.3, replace ``for all bulk third-class mail in E311 and
E312'' with ``in E611 and E612''; in 3.3, 5.4d(2), 5.6b, 5.11, 9.2, and
9.3b, replace ``third-class'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 5.8d,
replace the reference ``E211.11.0'' with ``E211''; in 5.10c, replace
the reference ``E370.5.0'' with ``5.0''; in 9.2, replace ``First-''
with ``First-Class'' and ``regular'' with ``Regular or Enhanced Carrier
Route''; no other change in text.]
F Forwarding and Related Services
F000 Basic Services
F010 Basic Information
[In 3.0d, replace ``fourth-class'' and ``third-class'' with ``Standard
Mail (B)'' and ``Standard Mail (A),'' respectively; in Exhibit 4.2, 5.2
(heading and text), 5.2a, 5.2b, 5.2e, 5.2f, 5.2g, and 6.1, replace
``[S]econd-[C]lass [[M]ail]'' with ``Periodicals''; in 4.4, replace the
reference ``M011'' with ``M012''; in 4.6b, 5.2e, the table following
5.2g, 6.1, 7.1, and 8.1e, replace ``third- or fourth-class'' with
``Standard Mail''; in 4.6d, 5.3b, 5.4 (heading and text), 5.4b, 5.4c,
5.4d, 5.4e, and 6.3, replace ``[F]ourth-[C]lass [[M]ail]'' with
``Standard Mail (B)''; in 5.3 (heading and text), 5.3a, 5.3f, 5.3g, the
table following 5.3g, 6.2, 8.1a, 8.1b, and 8.1e, replace ``[T]hird-
[C]lass [[M]ail]'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 7.1a and 7.2, replace
``second, third-, or fourth-class'' with ``Periodicals or Standard
Mail''; in 7.4, replace ``special fourth-class'' with ``Special
Standard Mail''; in 8.1e, replace ``third- and fourth-class'' with
``Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
F020 Forwarding
[In 2.3, 2.4, and 2.6, replace ``First-, second-, and fourth-class mail
[,] and [all] single-piece rate third-class mail'' with ``First-Class,
Periodicals, Standard Mail (B), and single-piece rate Standard Mail
(A)''; in 3.4 (heading and text), replace ``Second-[C]lass'' with
``Periodicals''; in 3.5 (heading and text), replace ``Third-[C]lass
[mail],'' ``fourth-class,'' and ``Special Fourth-Class'' with
``Standard Mail (A),'' ``Standard Mail (B),'' and ``Special Standard
Mail,'' respectively; in 3.6 (heading and text), replace ``[F]ourth-
[C]lass [mail]'' with ``Standard Mail (B)''; no other change in text.]
[[Page 10142]]
F030 Address Correction, Address Change, and Return Services
[In 1.2 (heading and text) and 2.3 (heading and text), replace
``[S]econd-[C]lass'' with ``Periodicals''; in 1.3, replace ``third- and
fourth-class mail'' and ``Express Mail, First-, third-, or fourth-class
mail'' with ``Standard Mail'' and ``Express Mail, First-Class Mail, and
Standard Mail,'' respectively; in 3.2d, replace ``third-class mail''
with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 3.2e, replace ``fourth-class mail'' with
``Standard Mail (B)''; no other change in text.]
G General Information
* * * * *
G020 Mailing Standards
[In 2.2, replace ``mailing statement'' with ``postage statement''; no
other change.]
* * * * *
L LABELING LISTS
L000 General Use
L001 Optional Multi-ZIP Coded Post Offices--Preferred Periodicals
and Nonprofit Standard Mail Only
[Amend the heading as follows; no change to list entries.]
As permitted by the standards for the rate claimed, Preferred
Periodicals mailings may be sorted to the following multi-ZIP Coded
cities.
* * * * *
[Replace current L002 as follows:]
L002 3-Digit ZIP Code Prefix Matrix
This table provides information about 3-digit ZIP Code prefixes as
follows:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Column A For 3- Column B For 3-
digit digit/scheme Column C For SCF
3-Digit ZIP destinations, destinations, destinations,
code prefix label container label container label container
to to to
------------------------------------------------------------------------
001 X
002 X
003 X
004............ WESTCHESTER NY WESTCHESTER NY SCF WESTCHESTER
004. 004. NY 105.
005............ MID-ISLAND NY 005 MID-ISLAND NY 005 SCF MID-ISLAND NY
117.
006............ SAN JUAN PR 006.. SAN JUAN PR 006 S SCF SAN JUAN PR
006.
007............ SAN JUAN PR 007.. SAN JUAN PR 006 S SCF SAN JUAN PR
006.
008............ (1).............. SAN JUAN PR 006 S (1).
009............ SAN JUAN PR 009 U SAN JUAN PR 006 S SCF SAN JUAN PR
006.
010............ SPRINGFIELD MA SPRINGFIELD MA SCF SPRINGFIELD
010. 010 S. MA 010.
011............ SPRINGFIELD MA SPRINGFIELD MA SCF SPRINGFIELD
011 U. 010 S. MA 010.
012............ PITTSFIELD MA 012 PITTSFIELD MA 012 PITTSFIELD MA 012
D.
013............ SPRINGFIELD MA SPRINGFIELD MA SCF SPRINFIELD MA
013. 010 S. 010.
014............ WORCESTER MA 014. WORCESTER MA 015 SCF WORCESTER MA
S. 015.
015............ WORCESTER MA 015. WORCESTER MA 015 SCF WORCESTER MA
S. 015.
016............ WORCESTER MA 016 WORCESTER MA 016. SCF WORCESTER MA
U. 015.
017............ WORCESTER MA 017. WORCESTER MA 015 SCF WORCESTER MA
S. 015.
018............ MIDDLESEX-ESSX MA MIDDLESEX-ESSX MA SCF MIDDLESEX-
018. 018 S. ESSX MA 018.
019............ MIDDLESEX-ESSX MA MIDDLESEX-ESSX MA SCF MIDDLESEX-
019. 018 S. ESSX MA 018.
020............ BROCKTON MA 020.. BROCKTON MA 023 S SCF BROCKTON MA
023.
021............ BOSTON MA 021 U.. BOSTON MA 021 S.. SCF BOSTON MA
021.
022............ BOSTON MA 022 U.. BOSTON MA 021 S.. SCF BOSTON MA
021.
023............ BROCKTON MA 023.. BROCKTON MA 023 S SCF BROCKTON MA
023.
024............ BROCKTON MA 024 U BROCKTON MA 023 S SCF BROCKTON MA
023.
025............ BUZZARDS BAY MA BUZZARDS BAY MA SCF BUZZARDS BAY
025. 025 S. MA 025.
026............ BUZZARDS BAY MA BUZZARDS BAY MAY SCF BUZZARDS BAY
026. 025 S. MA 025.
027............ PROVIDENCE RI 027 PROVIDENCE RI 028 SCF PROVIDENCE RI
S. 028.
028............ PROVIDENCE RI 028 PROVIDENCE RI 028 SCF PROVIDENCE RI
S. 028.
029............ PROVIDENCE RI 029 PROVIDENCE RI 029 SCF PROVIDENCE RI
U. 028.
030............ MANCHESTER NH 030 MANCHESTER NH 030 SCF MANCHESTER
NH 030.
031............ MANCHESTER NH 031 MANCHESTER NH 031 SCF MANCHESTER NH
U. 030.
032............ MANCHESTER NH 032 MANCHESTER NH 032 SCF MANCHESTER NH
030.
033............ CONCORD NH 033 U. CONCORD NH 033... SCF MANCHESTER NH
030.
034............ MANCHESTER NH 034 MANCHESTER NH 034 SCF MANCHESTER NH
030.
035............ WHITE RVR JCT VT WHITE RVR JCT VT SCF WHITE RVR JCT
035. 051 S. VT 050.
SCHEME B
036............ WHITE RVR JCT 036 WHITE RVR JCT VT SCF WHITE RVR JCT
051 S. VT 050.
SCHEME B
037............ WHITE RVR JCT 037 WHITE RVR JCT VT SCF WHITE RVR JCT
050 S. VT 050.
SCHEME C.........
038............ PORTSMOUTH NH 038 PORTSMOUTH NH 038 SCF PORTSMOUTH NH
S. 038.
039............ PORTSMOUTH NH 039 PORTSMOUTH NH 038 SCF PORTSMOUTH NH
S. 038.
040............ PORTLAND ME 040.. PORTLAND ME 040.. SCF PORTLAND ME
040.
041............ PORTLAND ME 041 U PORTLAND ME 041.. SCF PORTLAND ME
040.
042............ PORTLAND ME 042.. PORTLAND ME 042.. SCF PORTLAND ME
040.
043............ PORTLAND ME 043.. PORTLAND ME 043 S SCF PORTLAND ME
040.
044............ BANGOR ME 044.... BANGOR ME 044.... SCF BANGOR ME
044.
045............ PORTLAND ME 045.. PORTLAND ME 043 S SCF PORTLAND ME
040
046............ BANGOR ME 046.... BANGOR ME 046.... SCF BANGOR ME
044.
047............ BANGOR ME 047.... BANGOR ME 047.... SCF BANGOR ME
044.
048............ PORTLAND ME 048.. PORTLAND ME 048.. SCF PORTLAND ME
040
049............ BANGOR ME 049.... BANGOR ME 049.... SCF BANGOR ME
044.
[[Page 10143]]
050............ WHITE RVR JCT VT WHITE RVR JCT VT SCF WHITE RVR JCT
050. 050 S. VT 050.
SCHEME C
051............ WHITE RVR JCT VT WHITE RVR JCT VT SCF WHITE RVR JCT
051. 051 S. VT 050.
SCHEME B
052............ WHITE RVR JCT VT WHITE RVR JCT VT SCF WHITE RVR JCT
052. 051 S. VT 050.
SCHEME B
053............ WHITE RVR JCT VT WHITE RVR JCT VT SCF WHITE RVR JCT
053. 051 S. VT 050.
SCHEME B
054............ BURLINGTON VT 054 BURLINGTON VT 054 SCF BURLINGTON VT
S. 054.
055............ MIDDLESEX-ESSX MA MIDDLESEX-ESSX MA SCF MIDDLESEX-
055. 018 S. ESSX MA 018.
056............ BURLINGTON VT 056 BURLINGTON VT 054 SCF BURLINGTON VT
S. 054.
057............ WHITE RVR JCT VT WHITE RVR JCT VT SCF WHITE RVR JCT
057. 057 S. VT 050.
SCHEME A
058............ WHITE RVR JCT VT WHITE RVR JCT VT SCF WHITE RVR JCT
058. 057 S. VT 050.
SCHEME A
059............ WHITE RVR JCT VT WHITE RVR JCT VT SCF WHITE RVR JCT
059. 051 S. VT 050.
SCHEME B
060............ HARTFORD CT 060.. HARTFORD CT 060.. SCF HARTFORD CT
060.
061............ HARTFORD CT 061 U HARTFORD CT 061.. SCF HARTFORD CT
060.
062............ HARTFORD CT 062.. HARTFORD CT 062.. SCF HARTFORD CT
060.
063............ SOUTHERN CT 063.. SOUTHERN CT 063.. SCF SOUTHERN CT
064.
064............ SOUTHERN CT 064.. SOUTHERN CT 064.. SCF SOUTHERN CT
064.
065............ NEW HAVEN CT 065 NEW HAVEN CT 065. SCF SOUTHERN CT
U. 064.
066............ BRIDGEPORT CT 066 BRIDGEPORT CT 066 SCF SOUTHERN CT
U. 064.
067............ WATERBURY CT 067. WATERBURY CT 067. WATERBURY CT
067.D
068............ STAMFORD CT 068.. STAMFORD CT 068 S SCF STAMFORD CT
068.
069............ STAMFORD CT 069 U STAMFORD CT 068 S SCF STAMFORD CT
068.
070............ NEWARK NJ 070.... NEWARK NJ 070.... SCF NEWARK NJ
070.
071............ NEWARK NJ 071 U.. NEWARK NJ 071.... SCF NEWARK NJ
070.
072............ ELIZABETH NJ 072 ELIZABETH NJ 072. SCF NEWARK NJ 070
U.
073............ JERSEY CITY NJ JERSEY CITY NJ SCF NEWARK NJ
073 U. 073. 070.
074............ PATERSON NJ 074.. HACKENSACK NJ 074 SCF PATERSON NJ
S. 074.
075............ PATERSON NJ 075 U PATERSON NJ 075.. SCF PATERSON NJ
074.
076............ HACKENSACK NJ 076 HACKENSACK NJ 074 HACKENSACK NJ
S. 076.D
077............ MONMOUTH NJ 077.. KILMER NJ 077 S.. MONMOUTH NJ 077.D
078............ WEST JERSEY NJ WEST JERSEY NJ SCF WEST JERSEY
078. 078 S. NJ 079.
079............ WEST JERSEY NJ WEST JERSEY NJ SCF WEST JERSEY
079. 078 S. NJ 079.
080............ SOUTH JERSEY NJ SOUTH JERSEY NJ SCF SOUTH JERSEY
080. 080 S. NJ 080.
SCHEME A
081............ CAMDEN NJ 081 U.. SOUTH JERSEY NJ SCF SOUTH JERSEY
080 S. NJ 080.
SCHEME A
082............ SOUTH JERSEY NJ SOUTH JERSEY NJ SCF SOUTH JERSEY
082. 080 S. NJ 080.
SCHEME B
083............ SOUTH JERSEY NJ SOUTH JERSEY NJ SCF SOUTH JERSEY
083. 080 S. NJ 080.
SCHEME B
084............ ATLANTIC CITY NJ SOUTH JERSEY NJ SCF SOUTH JERSEY
084 U. 080 S. NJ 080.
SCHEME B
085............ TRENTON NJ 085... TRENTON NJ 085 S. SCF TRENTON NJ
085.
086............ TRENTON NJ 086 U. TRENTON NJ 085 S. SCF TRENTON NJ
085.
087............ TRENTON NJ 087... TRENTON NJ 085 S. SCF TRENTON NJ
085.
088............ KILMER NJ 088.... KILMER NJ 077 S.. SCF KILMER NJ
088.
089............ NEW BRUNSWICK NJ NEW BRUNSWICK NJ SCF KILMER NJ
089 U. 089. 088.
090............ APO AE 090....... APO AE 090.......
091............ APO AE 091....... APO AE 091.......
092............ APO AE 092....... APO AE 092.......
093............ APO AE 093....... APO AE 093....... .................
094............ APO/FPO AE 094... APO/FPO AE 094... .................
095............ FPO AE 095....... FPO AE 095....... .................
096............ APO/FPO AE 096... APO/FPO AE 096... .................
097............ APO/FPO AE 097... APO/FPO AE 097... .................
098............ APO/FPO AE 098... APO/FPO AE 098... .................
099 X
100............ NEW YORK NY 100 U NEW YORK NY 100.. SCF NEW YORK NY
100.
101............ NEW YORK NY 101 U NEW YORK NY 101.. SCF NEW YORK NY
100.
102............ NEW YORK NY 102 U NEW YORK NY 102.. SCF NEW YORK NY
100.
103............ STATEN ISLAND NY STATEN ISLAND NY STATEN ISLAND NY
103 U. 103. 103 D.
104............ BRONX NY 104 U... BRONX NY 104..... BRONX NY 104 D.
105............ WESTCHESTER NY WESTCHESTER NY SCF WESTCHESTER
105. 105. NY 105.
106............ WHITE PLAINS NY WHITE PLAINS NY SCF WESTCHESTER
106 U. 106. NY 105.
107............ YONKERS NY 107 U. YONKERS NY 107... SCF WESTCHESTER
NY 105.
108............ NEW ROCHELLE NY NEW ROCHELLE NY SCF WESTCHESTER
108 U. 108. NY 105.
109............ ROCKLAND NY 109.. ROCKLAND NY 109.. ROCKLAND NY 109
D.
[[Page 10144]]
110............ QUEENS NY 110.... QUEENS NY 110 S.. SCF QUEENS NY
110.
111............ LONG ISLAND CITY LONG ISLAND CITY LONG ISLAND CITY
NY 111 U. NY 111. NY 111 D.
112............ BROOKLYN NY 112 U BROOKLYN NY 112.. BROOKLYN NY 112
D.
113............ FLUSHING NY 113 U QUEENS NY 110 S.. SCF QUEENS NY
110.
114............ JAMAICA NY 114 U. QUEENS NY 110 S.. SCF QUEENS NY
110.
115............ WESTERN NASSAU NY WESTERN NASSAU NY WESTERN NASSAU NY
115. 115. 115 D.
116............ FAR ROCKAWAY NY QUEENS NY 110 S.. SCF QUEENS NY
116 U. 110.
117............ MID-ISLAND NY 117 MID-ISLAND NY 117 SCF MID-ISLAND NY
117.
118............ HICKSVILLE NY 118 HICKSVILLE NY 118 SCF MID-ISLAND NY
U. 117.
119............ MID-ISLAND NY 119 MID-ISLAND NY 119 SCF MID-ISLAND NY
117.
120............ ALBANY NY 120.... ALBANY NY 120 S.. SCF ALBANY NY
120.
121............ ALBANY NY 121.... ALBANY NY 120 S.. SCF ALBANY NY
120.
122............ ALBANY NY 122 U.. ALBANY NY 120 S.. SCF ALBANY NY
120.
123............ SCHENECTADY NY ALBANY NY 120 S.. SCF ALBANY NY
123 U. 120.
124............ MID-HUDSON NY 124 MID-HUDSON NY 124 SCF MID-HUDSON NY
S. 125.
125............ MID-HUDSON NY 125 MID-HUDSON NY 124 SCF MID-HUDSON NY
S. 125.
126............ POUGHKEEPSIE NY POUGHKEEPSIE NY SCF MID-HUDSON NY
126 U. 126. 125.
127............ MID-HUDSON NY 127 MID-HUDSON NY 124 SCF MID-HUDSON NY
S. 125.
128............ GLENS FALLS NY GLENS FALLS NY GLENS FALLS NY
128. 128. 128 D.
129............ PLATTSBURGH NY PLATTSBURGH NY PLATTSBURGH NY
129. 129. 129 D.
130............ SYRACUSE NY 130.. SYRACUSE NY 130 S SCF SYRACUSE NY
130.
131............ SYRACUSE NY 131.. SYRACUSE NY 130 S SCF SYRACUSE NY
130.
132............ SYRACUSE NY 132U. SYRACUSE NY 130 S SCF SYRACUSE NY
130.
133............ UTICA NY 133..... UTICA NY 133 S... SCF UTICA NY 133.
134............ UTICA NY 134..... UTICA NY 133 S... SCF UTICA NY 133.
135............ UTICA NY 135 U... UTICA NY 135..... SCF UTICA NY 133.
136............ WATERTOWN NY 136. WATERTOWN NY 136. WATERTOWN NY 136
D.
137............ BINGHAMTON NY 137 BINGHAMTON NY 137 SCF BINGHAMTON NY
S. 137.
138............ BINGHAMTON NY 138 BINGHAMTON NY 137 SCF BINGHAMTON NY
S. 137.
139............ BINGHAMTON NY 139 BINGHAMTON NY 137 SCF BINGHAMTON NY
U. S. 137.
140............ BUFFALO NY 140... BUFFALO NY 140 S. SCF BUFFALO NY
140.
141............ BUFFALO NY 141... BUFFALY NY 140 S. SCF BUFFALY NY
140.
142............ BUFFALO NY 142 U. BUFFALO NY 140 S. SCF BUFFALO NY
140.
143............ NIAGARA FALLS NY BUFFALO NY 140 S. SCF BUFFALO NY
143 U. 140.
144............ ROCHESTER NY 144. ROCHESTER NY 144. SCF ROCHESTER NY
144.
145............ ROCHESTER NY 145. ROCHESTER NY 145. SCF ROCHESTER NY
144.
146............ ROCHESTER NY 146 ROCHESTER NY 146. SCF ROCHESTER NY
U. 144.
147............ JAMESTOWN NY 147. JAMESTOWN NY 147. JAMESTOWN NY 147
D.
148............ ELMIRA NY 148.... ELMIRA NY 148.... SCF ELMIRA NY
148.
149............ ELMIRA NY 149 U.. ELMIRA NY 149.... SCF ELMIRA NY
148.
150............ PITTSBURGH PA 150 PITTSBURGH PA 150 SCF PITTSBURGH PA
150.
151............ PITTSBURGH PA 151 PITTSBURGH PA 151 SCF PITTSBURGH PA
150.
152............ PITTSBURGH PA 152 SCF PITTSBURGH PA
150..
153............ PITTSBURGH PA 153 PITTSBURGH PA 153 SCF PITTSBURGH PA
150.
154............ PITTSBURGH PA 154 PITTSBURGH PA 154 SCF PITTSBURGH PA
150.
155............ JOHNSTOWN PA 155. JOHNSTOWN PA 155 SCF JOHNSTOWN PA
S. 159.
156............ GREENSBURG PA 156 GREENSBURG PA 156 GREENSBURG PA 156
D.
157............ JOHNSTOWN PA 157. JOHNSTOWN PA 155 SCF JOHNSTOWN PA
S. 159.
158............ DUBOIS PA 158.... DUBOIS PA 158.... DUBOIS PA 158 D.
159............ JOHNSTOWN PA 159. JOHNSTOWN PA 159. SCF JOHNSTOWN PA
159.
160............ NEW CASTLE PA 160 NEW CASTLE PA 160 SCF NEW CASTLE PA
161.
161............ NEW CASTLE PA 161 NEW CASTLE PA 161 SCF NEW CASTLE PA
161.
162............ NEW CASTLE PA 162 NEW CASTLE PA 162 SCF NEW CASTLE PA
161.
163............ OIL CITY PA 163.. OIL CITY PA 163.. OIL CITY PA 163.D
164............ ERIE PA 164...... ERIE PA 164 S.... SCF ERIE PA 164.
165............ ERIE PA 165 U.... ERIE PA 164 S.... SCF ERIE PA 164.
166............ ALTOONA PA 166... ALTOONA PA 166... SCF ALTOONA PA
166.
167............ BRADFORD PA 167.. BRADFORD PA 167.. BRADFORD PA 167.D
168............ ALTOONA PA 168... ALTOONA PA 168... SCF ALTOONA PA
166.
169............ WILLIAMSPORT PA WILLIAMSPORT PA SCF WILLIAMSPORT
169. 169 S. PA 177.
170............ HARRISBURG PA 170 HARRISBURG PA 170 SCF HARRISBURG PA
170.
171............ HARRISBURG PA 171 HARRISBURG PA 171 SCF HARRISBURG PA
U. 170.
172............ HARRISBURG PA 172 HARRISBURG PA 172 SCF HARRISBURG PA
170.
173............ LANCASTER PA 173. LANCASTER PA 173. SCF LANCASTER PA
173.
174............ YORK PA 174 U.... YORK PA 174...... SCF LANCASTER PA
173.
175............ LANCASTER PA 175. LANCASTER PA 175. SCF LANCASTER PA
173.
176............ LANCASTER PA 176 LANCASTER PA 176. SCF LANCASTER PA
U. 173.
177............ WILLIAMSPORT PA WILLIAMSPORT PA SCF WILLIAMSPORT
177. 169 S. PA 177.
178............ HARRISBURG PA 178 HARRISBURG PA 178 SCF HARRISBURG PA
170.
179............ READING PA 179... READING PA 179... SCF READING PA
195.
180............ LEHIGH VALLEY PA LEHIGH VALLEY PA SCF LEHIGH VALLEY
180. 180 S. PA 180.
181............ ALLENTOWN PA 181 LEHIGH VALLEY PA SCF LEHIGH VALLEY
U. 180 S. PA 180.
[[Page 10145]]
182............ WILKES BARRE PA WILKES BARRE PA SCF WILKES BARRE
182. 182. PA 186.
183............ LEHIGH VALLEY PA LEHIGH VALLEY PA SCF LEHIGH VALLEY
183. 180 S. PA 180
184............ SCRANTON PA 184.. SCRANTON PA 184.. SCF SCRANTON PA
184.
185............ SCRANTON PA 185 U SCRANTON PA 185.. SCF SCRANTON PA
184.
186............ WILKES BARRE PA WILKES BARRE PA SCF WILKES BARRE
186. 186. PA 186.
187............ WILKES BARRE PA WILKES BARRE PA SCF WILKES BARRE
187 U. 187. PA 186.
188............ SCRANTON PA 188.. SCRANTON PA 188.. SCF SCRANTON PA
184.
189............ SOUTHEASTERN PA SOUTHEASTERN PA SCF SOUTHEASTERN
189. 189. PA 189.
190............ PHILADELPHIA PA PHILADELPHIA PA SCF PHILADELPHIA
190. 190. PA 190.
191............ PHILADELPHIA PA PHILADELPHIA PA SCF PHILADELPHIA
191 U. 191 S. PA 190.
192............ PHILADELPHIA PA PHILADELPHIA PA SCF PHILADELPHIA
192. 191 S. PA 190.
193............ SOUTHEASTERN PA SOUTHEASTERN PA SCF SOUTHEASTERN
193. 193 S. PA 189.
194............ SOUTHEASTERN PA SOUTHEASTERN PA SCF SOUTHEASTERN
194. 193 S. PA 189.
195............ READING PA 195... READING PA 195... SCF READING PA
195.
196............ READING PA 196 U. READING PA 196... SCF READING PA
195.
197............ WILMINGTON DE 197 WILMINGTON DE 197 SCF WILMINGTON DE
S. 197.
198............ WILMINGTON DE 198 WILMINGTON DE 197 SCF WILMINGTON DE
U. S. 197.
199............ WILMINGTON DE 199 WILMINGTON DE 197 SCF WILMINGTON DE
S. 197.
200............ WASHINGTON DC 200 WASHINGTON DC 200 SCF WASHINGTON DC
U. 200.
201............ NORTHERN VA 201.. NORTHERN VA 201.. SCF NORTHERN VA
220.
202............ WASHINGTON DC 202 WASHINGTON DC 202 SCF WASHINGTON DC
S. 200.
203............ WASHINGTON DC 203 WASHINGTON DC 202 SCF WASHINGTON DC
S. 200.
204............ WASHINGTON DC 204 WASHINGTON DC 202 SCF WASHINGTON DC
S. 200.
205............ WASHINGTON DC 205 WASHINGTON DC 202 SCF WASHINGTON DC
S. 200.
206............ SOUTHERN MD 206.. SOUTHERN MD 206.. SCF SOUTHERN MD
206.
207............ SOUTHERN MD 207.. SOUTHERN MD 207.. SCF SOUTHERN MD
206.
208............ SUBURBAN MD 208.. SUBURBAN MD 208 S SCF SUBURBAN MD
208.
209............ SIVLER SPRING MD SUBURBAN MD 208 S SCF SUBURBAN MD
209 U. 208.
210............ BALTIMORE MD 210. BALTIMORE MD 210 SCF BALTIMORE MD
S. 210.
211............ BALTIMORE MD 211. BALTIMORE MD 210 SCF BALTIMORE MD
S. 210.
212............ BALTIMORE MD 212 BALTIMORE MD 212. SCF BALTIMORE MD
U. 210.
213X
214............ ANNAPOLIS MD 214 ANNAPOLIS MD 214. SCF BALTIMORE MD
U. 210.
215............ CUMBERLAND MD 215 CUMBERLAND MD 215 SCF CUMBERLAND MD
215.
216............ EASTON MD 216.... EASTON MD 216.... EASTON MD 216.D
217............ FREDERICK MD 217. FREDERICK MD 217. FREDERICK MD
217.D
218............ SALISBURY MD 218. SALISBURY MD 218. SALISBURY MD
218.D
219............ BALTIMORE MD 219. BALTIMORE MD 210 SCF BALTIMORE MD
S. 210.
220............ NORTHERN VA 220.. NORTHERN VA 220.. SCF NORTHERN VA
220.
221............ NORTHERN VA 221.. NORTHERN VA 221.. SCF NORTHERN VA
220.
222............ ARLINGTON VA 222 ARLINGTON VA 222. SCF NORTHERN VA
U. 220.
223............ ALEXANDRIA VA 223 ALEXANDRIA VA 223 SCF NORTHERN VA
U. 220.
224............ RICHMOND VA 224.. RICHMOND VA 224 S SCF RICHMOND VA
SCHEME B 230.
225............ RICHMOND VA 225.. RICHMOND VA 224 S SCF RICHMOND VA
SCHEME B 230.
226............ WINCHESTER VA 226 WINCHESTER VA 226 WINCHESTER VA
226.D
227............ CULPEPER VA 227.. CULPEPER VA 227.. CULPEPER VA 227.D
228............ CHARLOTTESVILLE CHARLOTTESVILLE SCF
VA 228. VA 228. CHARLOTTESVILLE
VA 229.
229............ CHARLOTTESVILLE CHARLOTTESVILLE SCF
VA 229. VA 229. CHARLOTTESVILLE
VA 229.
230............ RICHMOND VA 230.. RICHMOND VA 230 S SCF RICHMOND VA
SCHEME A 230.
231............ RICHMOND VA 231.. RICHMOND VA 230 S SCF RICHMOND VA
SCHEME A 230.
232............ RICHMOND VA 232 U RICHMOND VA 232.. SCF RICHMOND VA
230.
233............ NORFOLK VA 233... NORFOLK VA 233 S. SCF NORFOLK VA
233.
234............ NORFOLK VA 234... NORFOLK VA 233 S. SCF NORFOLK VA
233.
235............ NORFOLK VA 235 U. NORFOLF VA 233 S. SCF NORFOLK VA
233.
236............ NORFOLK VA 236... NORFOLK VA 233 S. SCF NORFOLK VA
233.
237............ PORTSMOUTH VA 237 NORFOLK VA 233 S. SCF NORFOLK VA
U. 233.
238............ RICHMOND VA 238.. RICHMOND VA 224 S SCF RICHMOND VA
SCHEME B 230.
239............ FARMVILLE VA 239. FARMVILLE VA 239. FARMVILLE VA
239.D
240............ ROANOKE VA 240... ROANOKE VA 240 S. SCF ROANOKE VA
240.
241............ ROANOKE VA 241... ROANOKE VA 240 S. SCF ROANOKE VA
240.
242............ BRISTOL VA 242... BRISTOL VA 242... BRISTOL VA 242.D
243............ ROANOKE VA 243... ROANOKE VA 243... SCF ROANOKE VA
240.
244............ CHARLOTTESVILLE CHARLOTTESVILLE SCF
VA 244. VA 244. CHARLOTTESVILLE
VA 229.
245............ LYNCHBURG VA 245. LYNCHBURG VA 245. LYNCHBURG VA
245.D
246............ BLUEFIELD WV 246. BLUEFIELD WV 246. SCF BLUEFIELD WV
247.
247............ BLUEFIELD WV 247. BLUEFIELD WV 247. SCF BLUEFIELD WV
247.
248............ BLUEFIELD WV 248. BLUEFIELD WV 248. SCF BLUEFIELD WV
247.
[[Page 10146]]
249............ LEWISBURG WV 249. LEWISBURG WV 249. LEWISBURG WV
249.D
250............ CHARLESTON WV 250 CHARLESTON WV 250 SCF CHARLESTON WV
S. 250.
251............ CHARLESTON WV 251 CHARLESTON WV 250 SCF CHARLESTON WV
S. 250.
252............ CHARLESTON WV 252 CHARLESTON WV 250 SCF CHARLESTON WV
S. 250.
253............ CHARLESTON WV 253 CHARLESTON WV 253 SCF CHARLESTON WV
U. 250.
254............ MARTINSBURG WV MARTINSBURG WV MARTINSBURG WV
254. 254. 254.D
255............ HUNTINGTON WV 255 HUNTINGTON WV 255 SCF HUNTINGTON WV
255.
256............ HUNTINGTON WV 256 HUNTINGTON WV 256 SCF HUNTINGTON WV
255.
257............ HUNTINGTON WV 257 HUNTINGTON WV 257 SCF HUNTINGTON WV
U. 255.
258............ BECKLEY WV 258... BECKLEY WV 258... SCF BECKLEY WV
258.
259............ BECKLEY WV 259... BECKLEY WV 259... SCF BECKLEY WV
258.
260............ WHEELING WV 260.. WHEELING WV 260.. WHEELING WV 260.D
261............ PARKERSBURG WV PARKERSBURG WV PARKERSBURG WV
261. 261. 261.D
262............ CLARKSBURG WV 262 CLARKSBURG WV 262 SCF CLARKSBURG WV
263.
263............ CLARKSBURG WV 263 CLARKSBURG WV 263 SCF CLARKSBURG WV
263.
264............ CLARKSBURG WV 264 CLARKSBURG WV 264 SCF CLARKSBURG WV
263.
265............ CLARKSBURG WV 265 CLARKSBURG WV 265 SCF CLARKSBURG WV
263.
266............ GASSAWAY WV 266.. GASSAWAY WV 266.. GASSAWAY WV 266.D
267............ CUMBERLAND MD 267 CUMBERLAND MD 267 SCF CUMBERLAND MD
215.
268............ PETERSBURG WV 268 PETERSBURG WV 268 PETERSBURG WV
268.D
269 X
270............ GREENSBORO NC 270 GREENSBORO NC 270 SCF GREENSBORO NC
270.
271............ WINSTON-SALEM NC WINSTON-SALEM NC SCF GREENSBORO NC
271 U. 271. 270.
272............ GREENSBORO NC 272 GREENSBORO NC 272 SCF GREENSBORO NC
270.
273............ GREENSBORO NC 273 GREENSBORO NC 273 SCF GREENSBORO NC
270.
274............ GREENSBORO NC 274 GREENSBORO NC 274 SCF GREENSBORO NC
U. 270.
275............ RALEIGH NC 275... RALEIGH NC 275... SCF RALEIGH NC
275.
276............ RALEIGH NC 276 U. RALEIGH NC 276... SCF RALEIGH NC
275.
277............ DURHAM NC 277 U.. DURHAM NC 277.... SCF RALEIGH NC
275.
278............ ROCKY MOUNT NC ROCKY MOUNT NC SCF ROCKY MOUNT
278. 278 S. NC 278.
279............ ROCKY MOUNT NC ROCKY MOUNT NC SCF ROCKY MOUNT
279. 278 S. NC 278.
280............ CHARLOTTE NC 280. CHARLOTTE NC 280 SCF CHARLOTTE NC
S. 280.
281............ CHARLOTTE NC 281. CHARLOTTE NC 280 SCF CHARLOTTE NC
S. 280.
282............ CHARLOTTE NC 282 CHARLOTTE NC 282. SCF CHARLOTTE NC
U. 280.
283............ FAYETTEVILLE NC FAYETTEVILLE NC SCF FAYETTEVILLE
283. 283. NC 283.
284............ FAYETTEVILLE NC FAYETTEVILLE NC SCF FAYETTEVILLE
284. 284. NC 283.
285............ KINSTON NC 285... KINSTON NC 285... KINSTON NC 285.D
286............ HICKORY NC 286... HICKORY NC 286... HICKORY NC 286.D
287............ ASHEVILLE NC 287. ASHEVILLE NC 287. SCF ASHEVILLE NC
287.
288............ ASHEVILLE NC 288 ASHEVILLE NC 288. SCF ASHEVILLE NC
U. 287.
289............ ASHEVILLE NC 289. ASHEVILLE NC 289. SCF ASHEVILLE NC
287.
290............ COLUMBIA SC 290.. COLUMBIA SC 290 S SCF COLUMBIA SC
290.
291............ COLUMBIA SC 291.. COLUMBIA SC 290 S SCF COLUMBIA SC
290.
292............ COLUMBIA SC 292 U COLUMBIA SC 292.. SCF COLUMBIA SC
290.
293............ GREENVILLE SC 293 GREENVILLE SC 296 SCF GREENVILLE SC
S. 296.
294............ CHARLESTON SC 294 CHARLESTON SC 294 CHARLESTON SC
294.D
295............ FLORENCE SC 295.. FLORENCE SC 295.. FLORENCE SC 295.D
296............ GREENVILLE SC 296 GREENVILLE SC 296 SCF GREENVILLE SC
S. 296.
297............ CHARLOTTE NC 297. CHARLOTTE NC 280 SCF CHARLOTTE NC
S. 280.
298............ AUGUSTA GA 298... AUGUSTA GA 298... SCF AUGUSTA GA
308.
299............ SAVANNAH GA 299.. SAVANNAH GA 299.. SCF SAVANNAH GA
313.
300............ NORTH METRO GA NORTH METRO GA SCF NORTH METRO
300. 300 S. GA 300.
301............ NORTH METRO GA NORTH METRO GA SCF NORTH METRO
301. 300 S. GA 300.
302............ NORTH METRO GA NORTH METRO GA SCF NORTH METRO
302. 302. GA 300.
303............ ATLANTA GA 303 U. ATLANTA GA 303 S. SCF ATLANTA GA
303.
304............ SWAINSBORO GA 304 SWAINSBORO GA 304 SWAINSBORO GA
304.D
305............ ATHENS GA 305.... ATHENS GA 305.... SCF ATHENS GA
306.
306............ ATHENS GA 306.... ATHENS GA 306.... SCF ATHENS GA
306.
307............ CHATTANOOGA TN CHATTANOOGA TN SCF CHATTANOOGA
307. 307. TN 373.
308............ AUGUSTA GA 308... AUGUSTA GA 308... SCF AUGUSTA GA
308.
309............ AUGUSTA GA 309 U. AUGUSTA GA 309... SCF AUGUSTA GA
308.
310............ MACON GA 310..... MACON GA 310 S... SCF MACON GA 310.
311............ ATLANTA GA 311 U. ATLANTA GA 303 S. SCF ATLANTA GA
303.
312............ MACON GA 312 U... MACON GA 310 S... SCF MACON GA 310.
313............ SAVANNAH GA 313.. SAVANNAH GA 313.. SCF SAVANNAH GA
313.
314............ SAVANNAH GA 314 U SAVANNAH GA 314.. SCF SAVANNAH GA
313.
315............ WAYCROSS GA 315.. WAYCROSS GA 315.. WAYCROSS GA 315.D
316............ VALDOSTA GA 316.. VALDOSTA GA 316.. VALDOSTA GA 316.D
317............ ALBANY GA 317.... ALBANY GA 317.... ALBANY GA 317.D
318............ COLUMBUS GA 318.. COLUMBUS GA 318 S SCF COLUMBUS GA
318.
319............ COLUMBUS GA 319 U COLUMBUS GA 318 S SCF COLUMBUS GA
318.
320............ JACKSONVILLE FL JACKSONVILLE FL SCF JACKSONVILLE
320. 320. FL 320.
[[Page 10147]]
321............ DAYTONA BEACH FL DAYTONA BEACH FL DAYTONA BEACH FL
321. 321. 321.D
322............ JACKSONVILLE FL JACKSONVILLE FL SCF JACKSONVILLE
322 U. 322. FL 320.
323............ TALLAHASSEE FL TALLAHASSEE FL TALLAHASSEE FL
323. 323. 323.D
324............ PANAMA CITY FL PANAMA CITY FL PANAMA CITY FL
324. 324. 324.D
325............ PENSACOLA FL 325. PENSACOLA FL 325. PENSACOLA FL
325.D
326............ GAINESVILLE FL GAINESVILLE FL SCF GAINESVILLE
326. 326. FL 326.
327............ MID-FLORIDA FL MID-FLORIDA FL MID-FLORIDA FL
327. 327. 327.D
328............ ORLANDO FL 328 U. ORLANDO FL 328... SCF ORLANDO FL
328.
329............ ORLANDO FL 329... ORLANDO FL 329... SCF ORLANDO FL
328.
330............ SOUTH FLORIDA FL SOUTH FLORIDA FL SOUTH FLORIDA FL
330. 330. 330.D
331............ MIAMI FL 331 U... MIAMI FL 331..... SCF MIAMI FL 331.
332............ MIAMI FL 332 U... MIAMI FL 332..... SCF MIAMI FL 331.
333............ FT LAUDERDALE FL FT LAUDERDALE FL FT LAUDERDALE FL
333 U. 333. 333.D
334............ WEST PALM BCH FL WEST PALM BCH FL SCF WEST PALM BCH
334. 334 S. FL 334.
335............ TAMPA FL 335..... TAMPA FL 335 S... SCF TAMPA FL 335.
336............ TAMPA FL 336 U... TAMPA FL 336..... SCF TAMPA FL 335.
337............ ST PETERSBURG FL ST PETERSBURG FL ST PETERSBURG FL
337 U. 337. 337.D
338............ LAKELAND FL 338.. LAKELAND FL 338.. LAKELAND FL 338.D
339............ FT MYERS FL 339.. FT MYERS FL 339.. FT MYERS FL 339.D
340............ APO/FPO AA 340... APO/FPO AA 340... .................
341 X
342............ MANASOTA FL 342.. MANASOTA FL 342.. MANASOTA FL 342.D
343 X
344............ GAINESVILLE FL GAINESVILLE FL SCF GAINESVILLE
344. 344. FL 326.
345 X
346............ TAMPA FL 346..... TAMPA FL 335 S... SCF TAMPA FL 335.
347............ ORLANDO FL 347... ORLANDO FL 347... SCF ORLANDO FL
328.
348 X
349............ WEST PALM BCH FL WEST PALM BCH FL SCF WEST PALM BCH
349. 334 S. FL 334.
350............ BIRMINGHAM AL 350 BIRMINGHAM AL 350 SCF BIRMINGHAM AL
350.
351............ BIRMINGHAM AL 351 BIRMINGHAM AL 351 SCF BIRMINGHAM AL
350.
352............ BIRMINGHAM AL 352 BIRMINGHAM AL 352 SCF BIRMINGHAM AL
U. 350.
353 X
354............ TUSCALOOSA AL 354 TUSCALOOSA AL 354 TUSCALOOSA AL
FR Doc. 96-5500 Classification Reform; Implementation Standards
354.D
355............ BIRMINGHAM AL 355 BIRMINGHAM AL 355 SCF BIRMINGHAM AL
350.
356............ HUNTSVILLE AL 356 HUNTSVILLE AL 356 SCF HUNTSVILLE AL
357.
357............ HUNTSVILLE AL 357 HUNTSVILLE AL 357 SCF HUNTSVILLE AL
357.
358............ HUNTSVILLE AL 358 HUNTSVILLE AL 358 SCF HUNTSVILLE AL
U. 357.
359............ BIRMINGHAM AL 359 BIRMINGHAM AL 359 SCF BIRMINGHAM AL
350.
360............ MONTGOMERY AL 360 MONTGOMERY AL 360 SCF MONTGOMERY AL
360.
361............ MONTGOMERY AL MONTGOMERY AL 361 SCF MONTGOMERY AL
361U. 360.
362............ ANNISTON AL 362.. ANNISTON AL 362.. ANNISTON AL 362.D
363............ DOTHAN AL 363.... DOTHAN AL 363.... DOTHAN AL 363.D
364............ EVERGREEN AL 364. EVERGREEN AL 364. EVERGREEN 364.D
365............ MOBILE AL 365.... MOBILE AL 365.... SCF MOBILE AL
365.
366............ MOBILE AL 366 U.. MOBLIE AL 366.... SCF MOBILE AL
365.
367............ MONTGOMERY AL 367 MONTGOMERY AL 367 SCF MONTGOMERY AL
360.
368............ MONTGOMERY AL 368 MONTGOMERY AL 368 SCF MONTGOMERY AL
360.
369............ MERIDIAN MS 369.. JACKSON MS 393 S. SCF MERIDIAN MS
SCHEME B 393.
370............ NASHVILLE TN 370. NASHVILLE TN 370. SCF NASHVILLE TN
370.
371............ NASHVILLE TN 371. NASHVILLE TN 371. SCF NASHVILLE TN
370.
372............ NASHVILLE TN 372 NASHVILLE TN 372. SCF NASHVILLE TN
U. 370.
373............ CHATTANOOGA TN CHATTANOOGA TN SCF CHATTANOOGA
373. 373. TN 373.
374............ CHATTANOOGA TN CHATTANOOGA TN SCF CHATTANOOGA
374 U. 374. TN 373.
375............ MEMPHIS TN 375... MEMPHIS TN 375... SCF MEMPHIS TN
380.
376............ JOHNSON CITY TN JOHNSON CITY TN JOHNSON CITY TN
376. 376. 376.D
377............ KNOXVILLE TN 377. KNOXVILLE TN 377 SCF KNOXVILLE TN
S. 377.
378............ KNOXVILLE TN 378. KNOXVILLE TN 377 SCF KNOXVILLE TN
S. 377.
379............ KNOXVILLE TN 379 KNOXVILLE TN 377 SCF KNOXVILLE TN
U. S. 377.
380............ MEMPHIS TN 380... MEMPHIS TN 380... SCF MEMPHIS TN
380.
381............ MEMPHIS TN 381 U. MEMPHIS TN 381... SCF MEMPHIS TN
380.
382............ MCKENZIE TN 382.. MCKENZIE TN 382.. MCKENZIE TN 382.D
383............ JACKSON TN 383... JACKSON TN 383... JACKSON TN 383.D
384............ COLUMBIA TN 384.. COLUMBIA TN 384.. COLUMBIA TN 384.D
385............ COOKEVILLE TN 385 COOKEVILLE TN 385 COOKEVILLE TN
385.D
386............ MEMPHIS TN 386... MEMPHIS TN 386... SCF MEMPHIS TN
380.
387............ GREENVILLE MS 387 GREENVILE MS..... GREENVILLE MS
387.D
388............ TUPELO MS 388.... TUPELO MS 388.... TUBELO MS 388.D
389............ GRENADA MS 389... GRENADA MS 389... GRENADA MS 389.D
390............ JACKSON MS 390... JACKSON MS 390 S. SCF JACKSON MS
SCHEME A 390.
[[Page 10148]]
391............ JACKSON MS 391... JACKSON MS 390 S. SCF JACKSON MS
SCHEME A 390.
392............ JACKSON MS 392 U. JACKSON MS 392... SCF JACKSON MS
390.
393............ MERIDIAN MS 393.. JACKSON MS 393 S. SCF MERIDIAN MS
SCHEME B 393.
394............ HATTIESBURG MS HATTIESBURG MS HATTIESBURG MS
394. 394. 394.D
395............ GULFPORT MS 395.. GULFPORT MS 395.. GULPORT MS 395.D
396............ MCCOMB MS 396.... MCCOMB MS 396.... MCCOMB MS 396.D
397............ COLUMBUS MS 397.. COLUMBUS MS 397.. COLUMBUS MS 397.D
398X
399............ ATLANTA GA 399... ATLANTA GA 303 S. SCF ATLANTA GA
303.
400............ LOUISVILLE KY 400 LOUISVILLE KY 400 SCF LOUISVILLE KY
S. 400.
401............ LOUISVILLE KY 401 LOUISVILLE KY 400 SCF LOUISVILLE KY
S. 400.
402............ LOUISVILLE KY 402 LOUISVILLE KY 402 SCF LOUISVILLE KY
U. 400.
403............ LEXINGTON KY 403. LEXINGTON KY 403. SCF LEXINGTON KY
403.
404............ LEXINGTON KY 404. LEXINGTON KY 404. SCF LEXINGTON KY
403.
405............ LEXINGTON KY 405 LEXINGTON KY 405. SCF LEXINGTON KY
U. 403.
406............ FRANKFORT KY 406 FRANKFORT KY 406. SCF LEXINGTON KY
U. 403.
407............ LONDON KY 407.... LONDON KY 407.... SCF LONDON KY
407.
408............ LONDON KY 408.... LONDON KY 408.... SCF LONDON KY
407.
409............ LONDON KY 409.... LONDON KY 409.... SCF LONDON KY
407.
410............ CONCINNATI OH 410 CINCINNATI OH 410 SCF CONCINNATI OH
S. 450.
SCHEME A
411............ ASHLAND KY 411... ASHLAND KY 411... SCF ASHLAND KY
411.
412............ ASHLAND KY 412... ASHLAND KY 412... SCF ASHLAND KY
411.
413............ CAMPTON KY 413... CAMPTON KY 413... SCF CAMPTON KY
413.
414............ CAMPTON KY 414... CAMPTON KY 414... SCF CAMPTON KY
413.
415............ PIKEVILLE KY 415. PIKEVILLE KY 415. SCF PIKEVILLE KY
415.
416............ PIKEVILLE KY 416. PIKEVILLE KY 416. SCF PIKEVILLE KY
415.
417............ HAZARD KY 417.... HAZARD KY 417.... SCF HAZARD KY
417.
418............ HAZARD KY 418.... HAZARD KY 418.... SCF HAZARD KY
417.
419 X
420............ PADUCAH KY 420... PADUCAH KY 420... PADUCAH KY 420.D
421............ BOWLING GREEN KY BOWLING GREEN KY SCF BOWLING GREEN
421. 421. KY 421.
422............ BOWLING GREEN KY BOWLING GREEN KY SCF BOWLING GREEN
422. 422. KY 421.
423............ OWENSBORO KY 423. OWENSBORO KY 423. OWENSBORO KY
423.D
424............ EVANSVILLE IN 424 EVANSVILLE IN 424 SCF EVANSVILLE IN
476.
425............ SOMERSET KY 425.. SOMERSET KY 425.. SCF SOMERSET KY
425.
426............ SOMERSET KY 426.. SOMERSET KY 426.. SCF SOMERSET KY
426.
427............ ELIZABETHTOWN KY ELIZABETHTOWN KY ELIZABETHTOWN KY
427. 427. 427.D
428 X
429 X
430............ COLUMBUS OH 430.. COLUMBUS OH 430 S SCF COLUMBUS OH
SCHEME A 430.
431............ COLUMBUS OH 431.. COLUMBUS OH 430 S SCF COLUMBUS OH
SCHEME A 430.
432............ COLUMBUS OH 432 U COLUMBUS OH 432.. SCF COLUMBUS OH
430.
433............ COLUMBUS OH 433.. COLUMBUS OH 430 S SCF COLUMBUS OH
SCHEME A 430.
434............ TOLEDO OH 434.... TOLEDO OH 434 S.. SCF TOLEDO OH
434.
435............ TOLEDO OH 435.... TOLEDO OH 434 S.. SCF TOLEDO OH
434.
436............ TOLEDO OH 436 U.. TOLEDO OH 434 S.. SCF TOLEDO OH
434.
437............ ZANESVILLE OH 437 COLUMBUS OH 437 S SCF ZANESVILLE OH
SCHEME B 437.
438............ ZANESVILLE OH 438 COLUMBUS OH 437 S SCF ZANESVILLE OH
SCHEME B 437.
439............ STEUBENVILLE OH STEUBENVILLE OH STEUBENVILLE OH
439. 439. 439.D
440............ CLEVELAND OH 440. CLEVELAND OH 440. SCF CLEVELAND OH
440.
441............ CLEVELAND OH 441 CLEVELAND OH 441. SCF CLEVELAND OH
U. 440.
442............ AKRON OH 442..... AKRON OH 442 S... SCF AKRON OH 442.
443............ AKRON OH 443 U... AKRON OH 442 S... SCF AKRON OH 442.
444............ YOUNGSTOWN OH 444 YOUNGSTOWN OH 444 SCF YOUNGSTOWN OH
S. 444.
445............ YOUNGSTOWN OH 445 YOUNGSTOWN OH 444 SCF YOUNGSTOWN OH
U. S. 444.
446............ CANTON OH 446.... CANTON OH 446 S.. SCF CANTON OH
446.
447............ CANTON OH 447 U.. CANTON OH 446 S.. SCF CANTON OH
446.
448............ MANSFIELD OH 448. MANSFIELD OH 448. SCF MANSFIELD OH
448.
449............ MANSFIELD OH 449 MANSFIELD OH 449. SCF MANSFIELD OH
U. 448.
450............ CINCINNATI OH 450 CINCINNATI OH 450 SCF CINCINNATI OH
S. 450.
SCHEME B
451............ CINCINNATI OH 451 CINCINNATI OH 450 SCF CINCINNATI OH
S. 450.
SCHEME B
452............ CINCINNATI OH 452 CINCINNATI OH 452 SCF CINCINNATI OH
U. 450.
[[Page 10149]]
453............ DAYTON OH 453.... DAYTON OH 453.... SCF DAYTON OH
453.
454............ DAYTON OH 454 U.. DAYTON OH 454.... SCF DAYTON OH
453.
455............ SPRINGFIELD OH SPRINGFIELD OH SCF DAYTON OH
455 U. 455. 453.
456............ CHILLICOTHE OH CILLICOTHE OH 456 CHILLICOTHE OH
456. 456.D
457............ ATHENS OH 457.... ATHENS OH 457.... ATHENS OH 457.D
458............ LIMA OH 458...... LIMA OH 458...... LIMA OH 458.D
459............ CINCINNATI OH 459 CINCINNATI OH 459 SCF CINCINNATI OH
450.
460............ INDIANAPOLIS IN INDIANAPOLIS IN SCF INDIANAPOLIS
460. 460. IN 460.
461............ INDIANAPOLIS IN INDIANAPOLIS IN SCF INDIANAPOLIS
461. 461. IN 460.
462............ INDIANAPOLIS IN INDIANAPOLIS IN SCF INDIANAPOLIS
462 U. 462. IN 460.
463............ GARY IN 463...... GARY IN 463 S.... SCF GARY IN 463.
464............ GARY IN 464 U.... GARY IN 463 S.... SCF GARY IN 463.
465............ SOUTH BEND IN 465 SOUTH BEND IN 465 SCF SOUTH BEND IN
S. 465.
466............ SOUTH BEND IN 466 SOUTH BEND IN 465 SCF SOUTH BEND IN
U. S. 465.
467............ FORT WAYNE IN 467 FORT WAYNE IN 467 SCF FORT WAYNE IN
467.
468............ FORT WAYNE IN 468 FORT WAYNE IN 468 SCF FORT WAYNE IN
U. 467.
469............ KOKOMO IN 469.... KOKOMO 469....... KOKOMO 469.D
470............ CINCINNATI OH 470 CINCINNATI OH 410 SCF CINCINNATI OH
S. 450.
SCHEME A
471............ LOUISVILLE KY 471 LOUISVILLE KY 400 SCF LOUISVILLE KY
S. 400.
472............ COLUMBUS IN 472.. COLUMBUS IN 472.. COLUMBUS IN 472.D
473............ MUNCIE IN 473.... MUNCIE IN 473.... MUNCIE IN 473.D
474............ BLOOMINGTON IN BLOOMINGTON IN BLOOMINGTON IN
474. 474. 474.D
475............ WASHINGTON IN 475 WASHINGTON IN 475 WASHINGTON IN
475. D
476............ EVANSVILLE IN 476 EVANSVILLE IN 476 SCF EVANSVILLE IN
476.
477............ EVANSVILLE IN 477 EVANSVILLE IN 477 SCF EVANSVILLE IN
U. 476.
478............ TERRE HAUTE IN TERRE HAUTE IN TERRE HAUTE IN
478. 478. 478.D
479............ LAFAYETTE IN 479. LAFAYETTE IN 479. LAFAYETTE IN
479.D
480............ ROYAL OAK MI 480. ROYAL OAK MI 480. SCF ROYAL OAK MI
480.
481............ DETROIT MI 481... DETROIT MI 481... SCF DETROIT MI
481.
482............ DETROIT MI 482 U. DETROIT MI 482... SCF DETROIT MI
481.
483............ ROYAL OAK MI 483. ROYAL OAK MI 483. SCF ROYAL OAK MI
480.
484............ FLINT MI 484..... FLINT MI 484 S... SCF FLINT MI 484.
485............ FLINT MI 485 U... FLINT MI 484 S... SCF FLINT MI 484.
486............ SAGINAW MI 486... SAGINAW MI 486 S. SCF SAGINAW MI
486.
487............ SAGINAW MI 487... SAGINAW MI 486 S. SCF SAGINAW MI
486.
488............ LANSING MI 488... LANSING MI 488... SCF LANSING MI
488.
489............ LANSING MI 489 U. LANSING MI 489... SCF LANSING MI
488.
490............ KALAMAZOO MI 490. KALAMAZOO MI 490 SCF KALAMAZOO MI
S. 490.
491............ KALAMAZOO MI 491. KALAMAZOO MI 490 SCF KALAMAZOO MI
S. 490.
492............ JACKSON MI 492... JACKSON MI 492... JACKSON MI 492.D
493............ GRAND RAPIDS MI GRAND RAPIDS MI SCF GRAND RAPIDS
493. 493. MI 493.
494............ GRAND RAPIDS MI GRAND RAPIDS MI SCF GRAND RAPIDS
494. 494. MI 493.
495............ GRAND RAPIDS MI GRAND RAPIDS MI SCF GRAND RAPIDS
495 U. 495. MI 493.
496............ TRAVERSE CITY MI TRAVERSE CITY MI TRAVERSE CITY MI
496. 496. 496 D
497............ GAYLORD MI 497... GAYLORD MI 497... GAYLORD MI 497.D
498............ IRON MOUNTAIN MI IRON MOUNTAIN MI SCF IRON MOUNTAIN
498. 498 S. MI 498.
499............ IRON MOUNTAIN MI IRON MOUNTAIN MI SCF IRON MOUNTAIN
499 S. 498 S. MI 498.
500............ DES MOINES IA 500 DES MOINES IA 500 SCF DES MOINES IA
S. 500.
SCHEME A
501............ DES MOINES IA 501 DES MOINES IA 500 SCF DES MOINES IA
S. 500.
SCHEME A
502............ DES MOINES IA 502 DES MOINES IA 500 SCF DES MOINES IA
S. 500.
SCHEME A
503............ DES MOINES IA 503 DES MOINES IA 503 SCF DES MOINES IA
U. S. 500.
SCHEME B
504............ MASON CITY IA 504 MASON CITY IA 504 MASON CITY IA
504.D
505............ FORT DODGE IA 505 FORT DODGE IA 505 FORT DODGE IA
505.D
506............ WATERLOO IA 506.. WATERLOO IA 506.. SCF WATERLOO IA
506.
507............ WATERLOO IA 507 U WATERLOO IA 507.. SCF WATERLOO IA
506.
508............ CRESTON IA 508... CRESTON IA 508... CRESTON IA 508.D
509............ DES MOINES IA 509 DES MOINES IA 503 SCF DES MOINES IA
S. 500.
SCHEME B
510............ SIOUX CITY IA 510 SIOUX CITY IA 510 SCF SIOUX CITY IA
510.
511............ SIOUX CITY IA SIOUX CITY IA 511 SCF SIOUX CITY IA
511U. 510.
512............ SHELDON IA 512... SHELDON IA 512... SHELDON IA 512.D
513............ SPENCER IA 513... SPENCER IA 513... SPENCER IA 513.D
514............ CARROLL IA 514... CARROLL IA 514... CARROLL IA 514.D
515............ OMAHA NE 515..... OMAHA NE 680 S... SCF OMAHA NE 680.
516............ OMAHA NE 516..... OMAHA NE 680 S... SCF OMAHA NE 680.
517X
518X
[[Page 10150]]
519X
520............ DUBUQUE IA 520... DUBUQUE IA 520... DUBUQUE IA 520.D
521............ DECORAH IA 521... DECORAH IA 521... DECORAH IA 521.D
522............ CEDAR RAPIDS IA CEDAR RAPIDS IA SCF CEDAR RAPIDS
522. 522 S. IA 522.
523............ CEDAR RAPIDS IA CEDAR RAPIDS IA SCF CEDAR RAPIDS
523. 522 S. IA 522.
524............ CEDAR RAPIDS IA CEDAR RAPIDS IA SCF CEDAR RAPIDS
524 U. 524. IA 522.
525............ OTTUMWA IA 525... OTTUMWA IA 525... OTTUMWA IA 525.D
526............ BURLINGTON IA 526 BURLINGTON IA 526 BURLINGTON IA
526.D
527............ ROCK ISLAND IL ROCK ISLAND IL SCF ROCK ISLAND
527. 612 S. IL 612.
528............ DAVENPORT IA 528 ROCK ISLAND IL SCF ROCK ISLAND
U. 612 S. IL 612.
529 X
530............ MILWAUKEE WI 530. MILWAUKEE WI 530. SCF MILWAUKEE WI
530.
531............ MILWAUKEE WI 531. MILWAUKEE WI 531. SCF MILWAUKEE WI
530.
532............ MILWAUKEE WI 532 MILWAUKEE WI 532. SCF MILWAUKEE WI
U. 530.
533 X
534............ RACINE WI 534 U.. RACINE WI 534.... SCF MILWAUKEE WI
530.
535............ MADISON WI 535... MADISON WI 535 S. SCF MADISON WI
535.
536X
537............ MADISON WI 537 U. MADISON WI 537... SCF MADISON WI
535.
538............ MADISON WI 538... MADISON WI 535 S. SCF MADISON WI
535.
539............ PORTAGE WI 539... PORTAGE WI 539... PORTAGE WI 539.D
540............ ST PAUL MIN 540.. ST PAUL MN 550 S. SCF ST PAUL MN
550.
541............ GREEN BAY WI 541. GREEN BAY WI 541 SCF GREEN BAY WI
S. 541.
542............ GREEN BAY WI 542. GREEN BAY WI 541 SCF GREEN BAY WI
S. 541.
543............ GREEN BAY WI 543 GREEN BAY WI 543. SCF GREEN BAY WI
U. 541.
544............ WAUSAU WI 544.... WAUSAU WI 544.... WAUSAU WI 544.D
545............ RHINELANDER WI RHINELANDER WI RHINELANDER WI
545. 545. 545.D
546............ LA CROSSE WI 546. LA CROSSE WI 546. LA CROSSE WI
546.D
547............ EAU CLAIRE WI 547 EAU CLAIRE WI 547 EAU CLAIRE WI
547.D
548............ SPOONER WI 548... SPOONER WI 548... SPOONER WI 548.D
549............ OSHKOSH WI 549... OSHKOSH WI 549... OSHKOSH WI 549.D
550............ ST PAUL MN 550... ST PAUL MN 550 S. SCF ST PAUL MN
550.
551............ ST PAUL MN 551 U. ST PAUL MN 551... SCF ST PAUL MN
550.
552 X
553............ MINNEAPOLIS MN MINNEAPOLIS MN SCF MINNEAPOLIS
553. 553. MN 553.
554............ MINNEAPOLIS MN MINNEAPOLIS MN SCF MINNEAPOLIS
554U. 554. MN 553.
555............ MINNEAPOLIS MN MINNEAPOLIS MN SCF MINNEAPOLIS
555. 555. MN 553.
556............ DULUTH MN 556.... DULUTH MN 556.... SCF DULUTH MN
556.
557............ DULUTH MN 557.... DULUTH MN 557.... SCF DULUTH MN
556.
558............ DULUTH MN 558 U.. DULUTH MN 558.... SCF DULUTH MN
556.
559............ ROCHESTER MN 559. ROCHESTER MN 559. ROCHESTER MN
559.D
560............ MANKATO MN 560... MANKATO MN 560... MANKATO MN 560.D
561............ WINDOM MN 561.... WINDOM MN 561.... WINDOM MN 561.D
562............ WILLMAR MN 562... WILLMAR MN 562... WILLMAR MN 562.D
563............ ST CLOUD MN 563.. ST CLOUD MN 563.. ST CLOUD MN 563.D
564............ BRAINERD MN 564.. BRAINERD MN 564.. BRAINERD MN 564.D
565............ DETROIT LAKES MN DETROIT LAKES MN DETROIT LAKES MN
565. 565. 565.D
566............ BEMIDJI MN 566... BEMIDJI MN 566... BEMIDJI MN 566.D
567............ THIEF RIVER FALLS THIEF RIVER FALLS THIEF RIVER FALLS
MN 567. MN 567. MN 567.D
568 X
569 X
570............ SIOUX FALLS SD SIOUX FALLS SD SCF SIOUX FALLS
570. 570. SD 570.
571............ SIOUX FALLS SD SIOUX FALLS SD SCF SIOUX FALLS
571 U. 571. SD 570.
572............ DAKOTA CENTRAL SD DAKOTA CENTRAL SD SCF DAKOTA
572. 572. CENTRAL SD 572.
573............ DAKOTA CENTRAL SD DAKOTA CENTRAL SD SCF DAKOTA
573. 573. CENTRAL SD 572.
574............ ABERDEEN SD 574.. ABERDEEN SD 574.. ABERDEEN SD 574.D
575............ PIERRE SD 575.... PIERRE SD 575.... PIERRE SD 575.D
576............ MOBRIDGE SD 576.. MOBRIDGE SD 576.. MOBRIDGE SD 576.D
577............ RAPID CITY SD 577 RAPID CITY SD 577 RAPID CITY SD
577.D
578 X
579 X
580............ FARGO ND 580..... FARGO ND 580..... SCF FARGO ND 580.
581............ FARGO ND 581..... FARGO ND 581..... SCF FARGO ND 580.
582............ GRAND FORKS ND GRAND FORKS ND GRAND FORKS ND
582. 582. 582.D
583............ DEVILS LAKE ND DEVILS LAKE ND DEVILS LAKE ND
583. 583. 583.D
584............ JAMESTOWN ND 584. JAMESTOWN ND 584. JAMESTOWN ND
584.D
585............ BISMARCK ND 585.. BISMARCK ND 585.. BISMARCK ND 585.D
586............ DICKINSON ND 586. DICKINSON ND 586. DICKINSON ND
586.D
587............ MINOT ND 587..... MINOT ND 587..... MINOT ND 587.D
588............ WILLISTON ND 588. WILLISTON ND 588. WILLISTON ND
588.D
589 X
590............ BILLINGS MT 590.. BILLINGS MT 590 S SCF BILLINGS MT
590.
[[Page 10151]]
591............ BILLINGS MT 591 U BILLINGS MT 590 S SCF BILLINGS MT
590.
592............ WOLF POINT MT 592 BILLINGS MT 590 S WOLF POINT MT
592.D
593............ MILES CITY MT 593 BILLINGS MT 590 S MILES CITY MT
593.D
594............ GREAT FALLS MT BILLINGS MT 590 S GREAT FALLS MT
594. 594.D
595............ HAVRE MT 595..... BILLINGS MT 590 S HAVRE MT 595.D
596............ HELENA MT 596.... BILLINGS MT 590 S HELENA MT 596.D
597............ BUTTE MT 597..... BILLINGS MT 590 S BUTTE MT 597.D
598............ MISSOULA MT 598.. BILLINGS MT 590 S MISSOULA MT 598.D
599............ KALISPELL MT 599. BILLINGS MT 590 S KALISPELL MT
599.D
600............ PALATINE IL 600.. PALATINE IL 600 S SCF PALATINE IL
600.
601............ CAROL STREAM IL CAROL STREAM IL SCF CAROL STREAM
601. 601 S. IL 601.
602............ EVANSTON IL 602 U PALATINE IL 600 S SCF PALATINE IL
600.
603............ OAK PARK IL 603 U CAROL STREAM IL SCF CAROL STREAM
601 S. IL 601.
604............ SOUTH SUBURBAN IL SOUTH SUBURBAN IL SOUTH SUBURBAN IL
604. 604. 604.D
605............ FOX VALLEY IL 605 FOX VALLEY IL 605 FOX VALLEY IL
605.D
606............ CHICAGO IL 606 U. CHICAGO IL 606... SCF CHICAGO IL
606.
607............ CHICAGO IL 607... CHICAGO IL 607... SCF CHICAGO IL
606.
608............ CHICAGO IL 608... CHICAGO IL 608... SCF CHICAGO IL
606.
609............ KANKAKEE IL 609.. KANKAKEE IL 609.. KANKAKEE IL 609.D
610............ ROCKFORD IL 610.. ROCKFORD IL 610 S SCF ROCKFORD IL
610.
611............ ROCKFORD IL 611 U ROCKFORD IL 610 S SCF ROCKFORD IL
610.
612............ ROCK ISLAND IL ROCK ISLAND IL SCF ROCK ISLAND
612. 612 S. IL 612.
613............ LA SALLE IL 613.. LA SALLE IL 613.. LA SALLE IL 613.D
614............ GALESBURG IL 614. GALESBURG IL 614. GALESBURG IL
614.D
615............ PEORIA IL 615.... PEORIA IL 615 S.. SCF PEORIA IL
615.
616............ PEORIA IL 616 U.. PEORIA IL 615 S.. SCF PEORIA IL
615.
617............ BLOOMINGTON IL BLOOMINGTON IL BLOOMINGTON IL
617. 617. 617.D
618............ CHAMPAIGN IL 618. CHAMPAIGN IL 618 SCF CHAMPAIGN IL
S. 618.
619............ CHAMPAIGN IL 619. CHAMPAIGN IL 618 CHAMPAIGN IL 618.
S.
620............ ST LOUIS MO 620.. ST LOUIS MO 630 S SCF ST LOUIS MO
630.
621 X
622............ ST LOUIS MO 622.. ST LOUIS MO 630 S SCF ST LOUIS MO
630.
623............ QUINCY IL 623.... QUINCY IL 623.... QUINCY IL 623.
624............ EFFINGHAM IL 624. EFFINGHAM IL 624. EFFINGHAM IL
624.D
625............ SPRINGFIELD IL SPRINGFIELD IL SCF SPRINGFIELD
625. 625. IL 625.
626............ SPRINGFIELD IL SPRINGFIELD IL SCF SPRINGFIELD
626. 626. IL 625.
627............ SPRINGFIELD IL SPRINGFIELD IL SCF SPRINGFIELD
627 U. 627. IL 625.
628............ CENTRALIA IL 628. CENTRALIA IL 628. CENTRALIA IL
628.D
629............ CARBONDALE IL 629 CARBONDALE IL 629 CARBONDALE IL
629.D
630............ ST LOUIS MO 630.. ST LOUIS MO 630 S SCF ST LOUIS MO
630.
631............ ST LOUIS MO 631 U ST LOUIS MO 631.. SCF ST LOUIS MO
630.
632 X
633............ ST LOUIS MO 633.. ST LOUIS MO 630 S SCF ST LOUIS MO
630.
634............ QUINCY IL 634.... QUINCY IL 634.... SCF QUINCY IL
623.
635............ QUINCY IL 635.... QUINCY IL 635.... SCF QUINCY IL
623.
636............ CAPE GIRARDEAU MO CAPE GIRARDEAU MO SCF CAPE
636. 636. GIRARDEAU MO
637.
637............ CAPE GIRARDEAU MO CAPE GIRARDEAU MO SCF CAPE
637. 637. GIRARDEAU MO
637.
638............ CAPE GIRARDEAU MO CAPE GIRARDEAU MO SCF CAPE
638. 638. GIRARDEAU MO
637.
639............ CAPE GIRARDEAU MO CAPE GIRARDEAU MO SCF CAPE
639. 639. GIRARDEAU MO
637.
640............ KANSAS CITY MO KANSAS CITY MO SCF KANSAS CITY
640. 640. MO 640.
641............ KANSAS CITY MO KANSAS CITY MO SCF KANSAS CITY
641 U. 641. MO 640.
642 X
643 X
644............ ST JOSEPH MO 644. ST JOSEPH MO 644. SCF ST JOSEPH MO
644.
645............ ST JOSEPH MO 645 ST JOSEPH MO 645. SCF ST JOSEPH MO
U. 644.
646............ CHILLICOTHE MO CHILLICOTHE MO CHILLICOTHE MO
646. 646. 646.D
647............ HARRISONVILLE MO HARRISONVILLE MO HARRISONVILLE MO
647. 647. 647.D
648............ SPRINGFIELD MO SPRINGFIELD MO SCF SPRINGFIELD
648. 648. MO 656.
649............ KANSAS CITY MO KANSAS CITY MO SCF KANSAS CITY
649. 649. MO 640.
650............ MID-MISSOURI MO MID-MISSOURI MO SCF MID-MISSOURI
650. 650. MO 650.
651............ JEFFERSON CITY MO JEFFERSON CITY MO SCF MID-MISSOURI
651 U. 651. MO 650.
652............ MID-MISSOURI MO MID-MISSOURI MO SCF MID-MISSOURI
652. 652. MO 650.
653............ MID-MISSOURI MO MID-MISSOURI MO SCF MID-MISSOURI
653. 653. MO 650.
654............ SPRINGFIELD MO SPRINGFIELD MO SCF SPRINGFIELD
654. 654 S. MO 656.
SCHEME A
655............ SPRINGFIELD MO SPRINGFIELD MO SCF SPRINGFIELD
655. 654 S. MO 656.
SCHEME A
656............ SPRINGFIELD MO SPRINGFIELD MO SCF SPRINGFIELD
656. 656 S. MO 656.
SCHEME B
657............ SPRINGFIELD MO SPRINGFIELD MO SCF SPRINGFIELD
657. 656 S. MO 656.
SCHEME B
658............ SPRINGFIELD MO SPRINGFIELD MO SCF SPRINGFIELD
658 U. 658. MO 656.
[[Page 10152]]
659 X
660............ KANSAS CITY KS KANSAS CITY KS SCF KANSAS CITY
660. 660. KS 660.
661............ KANSAS CITY KS KANSAS CITY KS SCF KANSAS CITY
661 U. 661. KS 660.
662............ SHAWNEE MISSION SHAWNEE MISSION SCF SHAWNEE
KS 662 U. KS 662. MISSION KS 662.
633 X
664............ TOPEKA KS 664.... TOPEKA KS 664.... SCF TOPEKA KS
664.`
665............ TOPEKA KS 665 U.. TOPEKA KS 665.... SCF TOPEKA KS
664.
666............ TOPEKA KS 666.... TOPEKA KS 666.... SCF TOPEKA KS
664.
667............ FT SCOTT KS 667.. FT SCOTT KS 667.. FT SCOTT KS 667.D
668............ TOPEKA KS 668.... TOPEKA KS 668.... SCF TOPEKA KS
664.
669............ SALINA KS 669.... SALINA KS 669.... SCF SALINA KS
674.
670............ WICHITA KS 670... WICHITA KS 670 S. SCF WICHITA KS
670.
671............ WICHITA KS 671... WICHITA KS 670 S. SCF WICHITA KS
670.
672............ WICHITA KS 672 U. WICHITA KS 672... SCF WICHITA KS
670.
673............ INDEPENDENCE KS INDEPENDENCE KS INDEPENDENCE KS
673. 673. 673.D
674............ SALINA KS 674.... SALINA KS 674.... SCF SALINA KS
674.
675............ HUTCHINSON KS 675 HUTCHINSON KS 675 HUTCHINSON KS
675.D
676............ HAYS KS 676...... HAYS KS 676...... HAYS KS 676.D
677............ COLBY KS 677..... COLBY KS 677..... COLBY KS 677.D
678............ DODGE CITY KS 678 DODGE CITY KS 678 DODGE CITY KS
678.D
679............ LIBERAL KS 679... LIBERAL KS 679... SCF LIBERAL KS
679.
680............ OMAHA NE 680..... OMAHA NE 680 S... SCF OMAHA NE 680.
681............ OMAHA NE 681 U... OMAHA NE 681..... SCF OMAHA NE 680.
682 X
683............ LINCOLN NE 683... LINCOLN NE 683... SCF LINCOLN NE
683.
684............ LINCOLN NE 684... LINCOLN NE 684... SCF LINCOLN NE
683.
685............ LINCOLN 685 U.... LINCOLN 685...... SCF LINCOLN 683.
686............ NORFOLK NE 686... NORFOLK NE 686... SCF NORFOLK NE
687.
687............ NORFOLK NE 687... NORFOLK NE 687... SCF NORFOLK NE
687.
688............ GRAND ISLAND 688. GRAND ISLAND 688. SCF GRAND ISLAND
688.
689............ GRAND ISLAND 689. GRAND ISLAND 689. SCF GRAND ISLAND
688.
690............ MCCOOK NE 690.... MCCOOK NE 690.... MCCOOK NE 690.D
691............ NORTH PLATTE NE NORTH PLATTE NE NORTH PLATTE NE
691. 691. 691.D
692............ VALENTINE NE 692. VALENTINE NE 692. VALENTINE NE
692.D
693............ ALLIANCE NE 693.. ALLIANCE NE 693.. ALLIANCE NE 693.D
694 X
695 X
696 X
697 X
698 X
699 X
700............ NEW ORLEANS LA NEW ORLEANS LA SCF NEW ORLEANS
700. 700. LA 700.
701............ NEW ORLEANS LA NEW ORLEANS LA SCF NEW ORLEANS
701 U. 701. LA 700.
701
702 X
703 X.......... HOUMA LA 703..... HOUMA LA 703..... HOUMA LA 703.D
704............ MANDEVILLE LA 704 MANDEVILLE LA 704 MANDEVILLE LA
704.D
705............ LAFAYETTE LA 705. LAFAYETTE LA 705. LAFAYETTE LA
705.D
706............ LAKE CHARLES LA LAKE CHARLES LA LAKE CHARLES LA
706. 706. 706.D
707............ BATON ROUGE LA BATON ROUGE LA SCF BATON ROUGE
707. 707. LA 707.
708............ BATON ROUGE LA BATON ROUGE LA SCF BATON ROUGE
708 U. 708. LA 707.
709 X
710............ SHREVEPORT LA 710 SHREVEPORT LA 710 SCF SHREVEPORT LA
S. 710.
SCHEME A
711............ STREVEPORT LA 711 STREVEPORT LA 710 SCF STREVEPORT LA
S. 710.
SCHEME A
712............ MONROE LA 712.... MONROE LA 712.... MONROE LA 712.D
713............ ALEXANDRIA LA 713 SHREVEPORT LA 713 SCF ALEXANDRIA LA
S. 713.
SCHEME B
714............ ALEXANDRIA LA 714 SHREVEPORT LA 713 SCF ALEXANDRIA LA
S. 713.
SCHEME B
715 X
716............ PINE BLUFF AR 716 PINE BLUFF AR 716 PINE BLUFF AR
716.D
717............ CAMDEN AR 717.... CAMDEN AR 717.... CAMDEN AR 717.D
718............ TEXARKANA TX 718. TEXARKANA TX 718. SCF TEXARKANA TX
755.
719............ HOT SPRINGS NTL HOT SPRINGS NTL HOT SPRINGS NTL
PK AR 719. PK AR 719. PK AR 719.D
720............ LITTLE ROCK AR LITTLE ROCK AR SCF LITTLE ROCK
720. 720. AR 720.
721............ LITTLE ROCK AR LITTLE ROCK AR SCF LITTLE ROCK
721. 721. AR 720.
722............ LITTLE ROCK AR LITTLE ROCK AR SCF LITTLE ROCK
722 U. 722. AR 720.
723............ MEMPHIS TN 723... MEMPHIS TN 723... SCF MEMPHIS TN
380.
724............ JONESBORO AR 724. JONESBORO AR 724. JONESBORO AR
724.D
725............ BATESVILLE AR 725 BATESVILLE AR 725 BATESVILLE AR
725.D
[[Page 10153]]
726............ HARRISON AR 726.. HARRISON AR 726.. HARRISON AR 726.D
727............ FAYETTEVILLE AR FAYETTEVILLE AR FAYETTEVILLE AR
727. 727. 727.D
728............ RUSSELLVILLE AR RUSSELLVILLE AR RUSSELLVILLE AR
728. 728. 728.D
729............ FORT SMITH 729... FORT SMITH 729... FORT SMITH 729.D
730............ OKLAHOMA CITY OK OKLAHOMA CITY OK SCF OKLAHOMA CITY
730. 730. OK 730.
731............ OKLAHOMA CITY OK OKLAHOMA CITY OK SCF OKLAHOMA CITY
731 U. 731. OK 730.
732 X
733............ AUSTIN TX 733.... AUSTIN TX 733.... SCF AUSTIN TX
786.
734............ ARDMORE OK 734... ARDMORE OK 734... ARDMORE OK 734.D
735............ LAWTON OK 735.... LAWTON OK 735.... LAWTON OK 735.D
736............ CLINTON OK 736... CLINTON OK 736... CLINTON OK 736.D
737............ ENID OK 737...... ENID OK 737...... ENID OK 737.D
738............ WOODWARD OK 738.. WOODWARD OK 738.. WOODWARD OK 738.D
739............ LIBERAL KS 739... LIBERAL KS 739... SCF LIBERAL KS
679.
740............ TULSA OK 740..... TULSA OK 740..... SCF TULSA OK 740.
741............ TULSA OK 741 U... TULSA OK 741..... SCF TULSA OK 740.
742 X
743............ TULSA OK 743..... TULSA OK 743..... SCF TULSA OK 740.
744............ MUSKOGEE OK 744.. MUSKOGEE OK 744.. MUSKOGEE OK 744.D
745............ MCALESTER OK 745. MCALESTER OK 745. LCALESTER OK
745.D
746............ PONCA CITY OK 746 PONCA CITY OK 746 PONCA CITY OK
746.D
747............ DURANT OK 747.... DURANT OK 747.... DURANT OK 747.D
748............ SHAWNEE OK 748... SHAWNEE OK 748... SHAWNEE OK 748.D
749............ POTEAU OK 749.... POTEAU OK 749.... POTEAU OK 749.D
750............ NORTH TEXAS TX NORTH TEXAS TX NORTH TEXAS TX
750. 750. 750.D
751............ DALLAS TX 751.... DALLAS TX 751.... SCF DALLAS TX
752.
752............ DALLAS TX 752 U.. DALLAS TX 752 S.. SCF DALLAS TX
752.
753............ DALLAS TX 753 U.. DALLAS TX 752 S.. SCF DALLAS TX
752.
754............ GREENVILLE TX 754 GREENVILLE TX 754 GREENVILLE TX
754.D
755............ TEXARKANA TX 755. TEXARKANA TX 755. SCF TEXARKANA TX
755.
756............ LONGVIEW TX 756.. LONGVIEW TX 756.. LONGVIEW TX 756.D
757............ TYLER TX 757..... TYLER TX 757..... TYLER TX 757.D
758............ PALESTINE TX 758. PALESTINE TX 758. PALESTINE TX
758.D
759............ LUFKIN TX 759.... LUFKIN TX 759.... LUFKIN TX 759.D
760............ FORT WORTH TX 760 FORT WORTH TX 760 SCF FORT WORTH TX
760.
761............ FORT WORTH TX 761 FORT WORTH TX 761 SCF FORT WORTH TX
U. 760.
762............ FORT WORTH TX 762 FORT WORTH TX 762 SCF FORT WORTH TX
760.
763............ WICHITA FALLS TX WICHITA FALLS TX WICHITA FALLS TX
763. 763. 763.D
764............ FORT WORTH TX 764 FORT WORTH TX 764 SCF FORT WORTH TX
760.
765............ WACO TX 765...... WACO TX 765...... SCF WACO TX 766.
766............ WACO TX 766...... WACO TX 766...... SCF WACO TX 766.
767............ WACO TX 767U..... WACO TX 767...... SCF WACO TX 766.
768............ ABILENE TX 768... ABILENE TX 768... SCF ABILENE TX
795.
769............ MIDLAND TX 769... MIDLAND TX 769... SCF MIDLAND TX
797.
770............ HOUSTON TX 770 U. HOUSTON TX 770... SCF HOUSTON TX
770.
771............ HOUSTON TX 771 U. HOUSTON TX 771... SCF HOUSTON TX
770.
772............ HOUSTON TX 772 U. HOUSTON TX 772... SCF HOUSTON TX
770.
773............ NORTH HOUSTON TX NORTH HOUSTON TX SCF NORTH HOUSTON
773. 773. TX 773.
774............ NORTH HOUSTON TX NORTH HOUSTON TX SCF NORTH HOUSTON
774. 774. TX 773.
775............ NORTH HOUSTON TX NORTH HOUSTON TX SCF NORTH HOUSTON
775. 775. TX 773.
776............ BEAUMONT TX 776.. BEAUMONT TX 776.. SCF BEAUMONT TX
776.
777............ BEAUMONT TX 777 U BEAUMONT TX 777.. SCF BEAUMONT TX
776.
778............ BRYAN TX 778..... BRYAN TX 778..... BRYAN TX 778.D
779............ VICTORIA TX 779.. VICTORIA TX 779.. VICTORIA TX 779.D
780............ SAN ANTONIO TX SAN ANTONIO TX SCF SAN ANTONIO
780. 780. TX 780.
781............ SAN ANTONIO TX SAN ANTONIO TX SCF SAN ANTONIO
781. 781. TX 780.
782............ SAN ANTONIO TX SAN ANTONIO TX SCF SAN ANTONIO
782 U. 782. 780.
783............ CORPUS CHRISTI TX CORPUS CHRISTI TX SCF CORPUS
783. 783. CHRISTI TX 783.
784............ CORPUS CHRISTI TX CORPUS CHRISTI TX SCF CORPUS
784 U. 784. CHRISTI TX 783.
785............ MCALLEN TX 785... MCALLEN TX 785... MCALLEN TX 785.D
786............ AUSTIN TX 786.... AUSTIN TX 786 S.. SCF AUSTIN TX
786.
787............ AUSTIN TX 787 U.. AUSTIN TX 787.... SCF AUSTIN TX
786.
788............ SAN ANTONIO TX SAN ANTONIO TX SCF SAN ANTONIO
788. 788. TX 780.
789............ AUSTIN TX 789.... AUSTIN TX 786 S.. SCF AUSTIN TX
786.
790............ AMARILLO TX 790.. AMARILLO TX 790.. SCF AMARILLO TX
790.
791............ AMARILLO TX 791 U AMARILLO TX 791.. SCF AMARILLO TX
790.
792............ CHILDRESS TX 792. CHILDRESS TX 792. CHILDRESS TX
792.D
793............ LUBBOCK TX 793... LUBBOCK TX 793... SCF LUBBOCK TX
793.
794............ LUBBOCK TX 794 U. LUBBOCK TX 794... SCF LUBBOCK TX
793.
795............ ABILENE TX 795... ABILENE TX 795... SCF ABILENE TX
795.
796............ ABILENE TX 796 U. ABILENE TX 796... SCF ABILENE TX
795.
797............ MIDLAND TX 797... MIDLAND TX 797... SCF MIDLAND TX
797.
[[Page 10154]]
798............ EL PASO TX 798... EL PASO TX 798... SCF EL PASO TX
798.
799............ EL PASO TX 799 U. EL PASO TX 799... SCF EL PASO TX
798.
800............ DENVER CO 800.... DENVER CO 800.... SCF DENVER CO
800.
801............ DENVER CO 801.... DENVER CO 801.... SCF DENVER CO
800.
802............ DENVER CO 802 U.. DENVER CO 802.... SCF DENVER CO
800.
803............ BOULDER CO 803 U. BOULDER CO 803... SCF DENVER CO
800.
804............ DENVER CO 804.... DENVER CO 804.... SCF DENVER CO
800.
805............ LONGMONT CO 805.. LONGMONT CO 805.. LONGMONT CO 805.D
806............ BRIGHTON CO 806.. BRIGHTON CO 806.. SCF BRIGHTON CO
806.
807............ BRIGHTON CO 807.. BRIGHTON CO 807.. SCF BRIGHTON CO
806.
808............ COLORADO SPGS CO COLORADO SPGS CO SCF COLORADO SPGS
808. 808 S. CO 808.
809............ COLORADO SPGS CO COLORADO SPGS CO SCF COLORADO SPGS
809 U. 808 S. CO 808.
810............ PUEBLO CO 810.... PUEBLO CO 810.... PUEBLO CO 810.D
811............ ALAMOSA CO 811... ALAMOSA CO 811... ALAMOSA CO 811.D
812............ SALIDA CO 812.... SALIDA CO 812.... SALIDA CO 812.D
813............ DURANGO CO 813... DURANGO CO 813... DURANGO CO 813.D
814............ GRAND JUNCTION CO GRAND JUNCTION CO SCF GRAND
814. 814. JUNCTION CO 814.
815............ GRAND JUNCTION CO GRAND JUNCTION CO SCF GRAND
815. 815. JUNCTION CO 814.
816............ GLENWOOD SPRINGS GLENWOOD SPRINGS GLENWOOD SPRINGS
CO 816. CO 816. CO 816.D
817 X
818 X
819 X
820............ CHEYENNE WY 820.. CHEYENNE WY 820.. CHEYENNE WY 820.D
821............ YELLOWSTONE NAT BILLINGS MT 590 S SCF BILLINGS MT
PK WY 821U. 590.
822............ WHEATLAND WY 822. WHEATLAND WY 822. WHEATLAND WY
822.D
823............ RAWLINS WY 823... RAWLINS WY 823... RAWLINS WY 823.D
824............ WORLAND WY 824... WORLAND WY 824... WORLAND WY 824.D
825............ RIVERTON WY 825.. RIVERTON WY 825.. RIVERTON WY 825.D
826............ CASPER WY 826.... CASPER WY 826.... CASPER WY 826.D
827............ GILLETTE WY 827.. GILLETTE WY 827.. GILLETTE WY 827.D
828............ SHERIDAN WY 828.. SHERIDAN WY 828.. SHERIDAN WY 828.D
829............ ROCK SPRINGS WY ROCK SPRINGS WY SCF ROCK SPRINGS
829. 829. WY 829.
830............ ROCK SPRINGS WY ROCK SPRINGS WY SCF ROCK SPRINGS
830. 830. WY 829.
831............ ROCK SPRINGS WY ROCK SPRINGS WY SCF ROCK SPRINGS
831. 831. WY 829.
832............ POCATELLO ID 832. POCATELLO ID 832. SCF POCATELLO ID
832.
833............ TWIN FALLS ID 833 TWIN FALLS ID 833 TWIN FALLS ID
833.D
834............ POCATELLO ID 834. POCATELLO ID 834. SCF POCATELLO ID
832.
835............ LEWISTON ID 835.. LEWISTON ID 835.. SCF LEWISTON ID
835.
836............ BOISE ID 836..... BOISE ID 836..... SCF BOISE ID 836.
837............ BOISE ID 837 U... BOISE ID 837..... SCF BOISE ID 836.
838............ SPOKANE WA 838... SPOKANE WA 838... SCF SPOKANE WA
990.
839 X
840............ SALT LAKE CITY UT SALT LAKE CITY UT SCF SALT LAKE
840. 840 S. CITY UT 840.
841............ SALT LAKE CITY UT SALT LAKE CITY UT SCF SALT LAKE
841 U. 840 S. CITY UT 840.
842............ SALT LAKE CITY UT SALT LAKE CITY UT SCF SALT LAKE
842. 840 S. CITY UT 840.
843............ SALT LAKE CITY UT SALT LAKE CITY UT SCF SALT LAKE
843. 840 S. CITY UT 840.
844............ OGDEN UT 844 U... SALT LAKE CITY UT SCF SALT LAKE
840 S. CITY UT 840.
845............ PROVO UT 845..... PROVO UT 845..... SCF PROVO UT 845.
846............ PROVO UT 846..... PROVO UT 846..... SCF PROVO UT 845.
847............ PROVO UT 847..... PROVO UT 847..... SCF PROVO UT 845.
848 X
849 X
850............ PHOENIX AZ 850 U. PHOENIX AZ 850... SCF PHOENIX AZ
852.
851 X
852............ PHOENIX AZ 852... PHOENIX AZ 852... SCF PHOENIX AZ
852.
853............ PHOENIX AZ 853... PHOENIX AZ 853... SCF PHOENIX AZ
852.
854 X
855............ GLOBE AZ 855..... GLOBE AZ 855..... GLOBE AZ 855.D
856............ TUCSON AZ 856.... TUCSON AZ 856.... SCF TUCSON AZ
856.
857............ TUCSON AZ 857 U.. TUCSON AZ 857.... SCF TUCSON AZ
856.
858 X
859............ SHOW LOW AZ 859.. SHOW LOW AZ 859.. SHOW LOW AZ 859.D
860............ FLAGSTAFF AZ 860. FLAGSTAFF AZ 860. FLAGSTAFF AZ
860.D
861 X
862 X
863............ PRESCOTT AZ 863.. PRESCOTT AZ 863.. PRESCOTT AZ 863.D
864............ KINGMAN AZ 864... KINGMAN AZ 864... KINGMAN AZ 864.D
865............ GALLUP NM 865.... GALLUP NM 865.... SCF GALLUP NM
873.
866 X
867 X
868 X
869 X
[[Page 10155]]
870............ ALBUQUERQUE NM ALBUQUERQUE NM SCF ALBUQUERQUE
870. 870. NM 870.
871............ ALBUQUERQUE NM ALBUQUERQUE NM SCF ALBUQUERQUE
871 U. 871. NM 870.
872............ ALBUQUERQUE NM ALBUQUERQUE NM SCF ALBUQUERQUE
872 U. 872. NM 870.
873............ GALLUP NM 873.... GALLUP NM 873.... SCF GALLUP NM
873.
874............ FARMINGTON NM 874 FARMINGTON NM 874 FARMINGTON NM
874.D
875............ ALBUQUERQUE NM ALBUQUERQUE NM SCF ALBUQUERQUE
875. 875. NM 870.
876 X
877............ LAS VEGAS NM 877. LAS VEGAS NM 877. LAS VEGAS NM
877.D
878............ SOCORRO NM 878... SOCORRO NM 878... SOCORRO NM 878.D
879............ TRUTH OR CONS NM TRUTH OR CONS NM TRUTH OR CONS NM
879. 879. 879.D
880............ LAS CRUCES NM 880 LAS CRUCES NM 880 LAS CRUCES NM
880.D
881............ CLOVIS NM 881.... CLOVIS NM 881.... CLOVIS NM 881.D
882............ ROSWELL NM 882... ROSWELL NM 882... ROSWELL NM 882.D
883............ CARRIZOZO NM 883. CARRIZOZO NM 883. CARRIZOZO NM
883.D
884............ TUCUMCARI NM 884. TUCUMCARI NM 884. TUCUMCARI NM
884.D
885............ EL PASO TX 885 U. EL PASO TX 885... SCF EL PASO TX
798.
886 X
887 X
888 X
889............ LAS VEGAS NV 889 LAS VEGAS NV 890 SCF LAS VEGAS NV
U. S. 890.
890............ LAS VEGAS NV 890. LAS VEGAS NV 890 SCF LAS VEGAS NV
S. 890.
891............ LAS VEGAS NV 891 LAS VEGAS NV 890 SCF LAS VEGAS NV
U. S. 890.
892 X
893............ ELY NV 893....... ELY NV 893....... ELY NV 893.D
894............ RENO NV 894...... RENO NV 894 S.... SCF RENO NV 894.
895............ RENO NV 895 U.... RENO NV 894 S.... SCF RENO NV 894.
896 X
897............ CARSON CITY NV RENO NV 894 S.... SCF RENO NV 894.
897 U.
898............ ELKO NV 898...... ELKO NV 898...... ELKO NV 898.D
899 X
900............ LOS ANGELES CA LOS ANGELES CA SCF LOS ANGELES
900 U. 900 S. CA 900.
901............ LOS ANGELES CA LOS ANGELES CA SCF LOS ANGELES
901 U. 900 S. CA 900.
902............ INGLEWOOD CA 902. INGLEWOOD CA 902 SCF INGLEWOOD CA
S. 902.
903............ INGLEWOOD CA 903 INGLEWOOD CA 902 SCF INGLEWOOD CA
U. S. 902.
904............ SANTA MONICA CA INGLEWOOD CA 902 SCF INGLEWOOD CA
904 U. S. 902.
905............ TORRANCE CA 905 U INGLEWOOD CA 902 SCF INGLEWOOD CA
S. 902.
906............ LONG BEACH CA 906 LONG BEACH CA 907 SCF LONG BEACH CA
S. 907.
907............ LONG BEACH CA 907 LONG BEACH CA 907 SCF LONG BEACH CA
S. 907.
908............ LONG BEACH CA 908 LONG BEACH CA 907 SCF LONG BEACH CA
U. S. 907.
909 X
910............ PASADENA CA 910.. PASADENA CA 910.. SCF PASADENA CA
910.
911............ PASADENA CA 911 U PASADENA CA 911.. SCF PASADENA CA
910.
912............ GLENDALE CA 912 U GLENDALE CA 912.. SCF PASADENA CA
910.
913............ VAN NUYS CA 913.. VAN NUYS CA 913 S SCF VAN NUYS CA
913.
914............ VAN NUYS CA 914 U VAN NUYS CA 913 S SCF VAN NUYS CA
913.
915............ BURBANK CA 915 U. VAN NUYS CA 913 S SCF VAN NUYS CA
913.
916............ NORTH HOLLYWOOD VAN NUYS CA 913 S SCF VAN NUYS CA
CA 916 U. 913.
917............ INDUSTRY CA 917.. INDUSTRY CA 917 S SCF INDUSTRY CA
917.
918............ INDUSTRY CA 918 U INDUSTRY CA 917 S SCF INDUSTRY CA
917.
919............ SAN DIEGO CA 919. SAN DIEGO CA 920 SCF SAN DIEGO CA
S. 920.
920............ SAN DIEGO CA 920. SAN DIEGO CA 920 SCF SAN DIEGO CA
S. 920.
921............ SAN DIEGO CA 921 SAN DIEGO CA 921. SCF SAN DIEGO CA
U. 920.
922............ PALM SPRINGS CA PALM SPRINGS CA PALM SPRINGS CA
922. 922. 922.D
923............ SAN BERNARDINO CA SAN BERNARDINO CA SCF SAN
923. 923 S. BERNARDINO CA
923.
924............ SAN BERNARDINO CA SAN BERNARDINO CA SCF SAN
924 U. 923 S. BERNARDINO CA
923.
925............ SAN BERNARDINO CA SAN BERNARDINO CA SCF SAN
925. 923 S. BERNARDINO CA
923.
926............ SANTA ANA CA 926. SANTA ANA CA 926 SCF SANTA ANA CA
S. 926.
927............ SANTA ANA CA 927 SANTA ANA CA 926 SCF SANTA ANA CA
U. S. 926.
928............ ANAHEIM CA 928 U. ANAHEIM CA 928... SCF SANTA ANA CA
926.
929 X
930............ OXNARD CA 930.... OXNARD CA 930.... OXNARD CA 930.D
931............ SANTA BARBARA CA SANTA BARBARA CA SCF SANTA BARBARA
931 U. 931. CA 931.
932............ BAKERSFIELD CA BAKERSFIELD CA SCF BAKERSFIELD
932. 932. CA 932.
933............ BAKERSFIELD CA BAKERSFIELD CA SCF BAKERSFIELD
933 U. 933. CA 932.
934............ SANTA BARBARA CA SANTA BARBARA CA SCF SANTA BARBARA
934. 934. CA 931.
935............ MOJAVE CA 935.... MOJAVE CA 935.... MOJAVE CA 935.D
936............ FRESNO CA 936.... FRESNO CA 936.... SCF FRESNO CA
936.
937............ FRESNO CA 937 U.. FRESNO CA 937.... SCF FRESNO CA
936.
938............ FRESNO CA 938.... FRESNO CA 938.... SCF FRESNO CA
936.
939............ SALINAS CA 939... SALINAS CA 939... SALINAS CA 939.
940............ SAN FRANCISCO CA SAN FRANCISCO CA SCF SAN FRANCISCO
940. 940 S. CA 940.
SCHEME A
FR Doc. 96-5500 Classification Reform; Implementation Standards
[[Page 10156]]
941............ SAN FRANCISCO CA SAN FRANCISCO CA SCF SAN FRANCISCO
941 U. 941. CA 940.
942............ SACRAMENTO CA 942 SACRAMENTO CA 942 SCF SACRAMENTO CA
U. 956.
943............ PALO ALTO CA 943 SAN FRANCISCO CA SCF SAN FRANCISCO
U. 940 S. CA 940.
SCHEME A
944............ SAN MATEO CA 944 SAN FRANCISCO CA SCF SAN FRANCISCO
U. 940 S. CA 940.
SCHEME A
945............ OAKLAND CA 945... OAKLAND CA 945 S. SCF OAKLAND CA
SCHEME A 945.
946............ OAKLAND CA 946 U. OAKLAND CA 946 S. SCF OAKLAND CA
SCHEME B 945.
947............ BERKELEY CA 947 U OAKLAND CA 946 S. SCF OAKLAND
SCHEME B CA945.
948............ RICHMOND CA 948 U OAKLAND CA 945 S. SCF OAKLAND CA
SCHEME A 945.
949............ NORTH BAY CA 949. NORTH BAY CA 949. SCF NORTH BAY CA
949.
950............ SAN JOSE CA 950.. SAN JOSE CA 950.. SCF SAN JOSE CA
950.
951............ SAN JOSE CA 951 U SAN JOSE CA 951.. SCF SAN JOSE CA
950.
952............ STOCKTON, CA 952. STOCKTON, CA 952 SCF STOCKTON, CA
S. 952.
953............ STOCKTON, CA 953. STOCKTON, CA 952 SCF STOCKTON, CA
S. 952.
954............ NORTH BAY CA 954. NORTH BAY CA 954. SCF NORTH BAY CA
949.
955............ EUREKA CA 955.... EUREKA CA 955.... EUREKA CA 955.D
956............ SACRAMENTO CA 956 SACRAMENTO CA 956 SCF SACRAMENTO CA
S. 956.
957............ SACRAMENTO CA 957 SACRAMENTO CA 956 SCF SACRAMENTO CA
S. 956.
958............ SACRAMENTO CA 958 SACRAMENTO CA 958 SCF SACRAMENTO CA
U. 956.
959............ MARYSVILLE CA 959 MARYSVILLE CA 959 MARYSVILLE CA
959.D
960............ REDDING CA 960... REDDING CA 960... REDDING CA 960.D
961............ RENO NV 961...... RENO NV 961...... SCF RENO NV 894.
962............ APO/FPO AP 962... SAN FRANCISCO CA .................
962 S.
SCHEME B
963............ APO/FPO AP 963... SAN FRANCISCO CA .................
962 S.
SCHEME B
964............ APO/FPO AP 964... SAN FRANCISCO CA .................
962 S.
SCHEME B
965............ APO/FPO AP 965... SAN FRANCISCO CA .................
962 S.
SCHEME B
966............ FPO AP 966....... SAN FRANCISCO CA .................
962 S.
SCHEME B
967............ HONOLULU HI 967.. HONOLULU HI 967 S SCF HONOLULU HI
967.
968............ HONOLULU HI 968 U HONOLULU HI 967 S SCF HONOLULU HI
967.
969............ BARRIGADA GU 969. [FCM Only] BARRIGADA GU
HONOLULU HI 967 969.D
S.
[PER and STD]
OAKLAND CA 945 S.
970............ PORTLAND OR 970.. PORTLAND OR 970.. SCF PORTLAND OR
970.
971............ PORTLAND OR 971.. PORTLAND OR 971.. SCF PORTLAND OR
970.
972............ PORTLAND OR 972 U PORTLAND OR 972.. SCF PORTLAND OR
970.
973............ SALEM OR 973..... SALEM OR 973..... SALEM OR 973.D
974............ EUGENE OR 974.... EUGENE OR 974.... EUGENE OR 974.D
975............ MEDFORD OR 975... MEDFORD OR 975... MEDFORD OR 975.D
976............ KLAMATH FALLS OR KLAMATH FALLS OR KLAMATH FALLS OR
976. 976. 976.D
977............ BEND OR 977...... BEND OR 977...... BEND OR 977.D
978............ PENDLETON OR 978. PENDLETON OR 978. PENDLETON OR
978.D
979............ BOISE ID 979..... BOISE ID 979..... SCF BOISE ID 836.
980............ SEATTLE WA 980... SEATTLE WA 980... SCF SEATTLE WA
980.
981............ SEATTLE WA 981 U. SEATTLE WA 981... SCF SEATTLE WA
980.
982............ EVERETT WA 982... EVERETT WA 982... EVERETT WA 982.D
983............ TACOMA WA 983.... TACOMA WA 983.... SCF TACOMA WA
983.
984............ TACOMA WA 984 U.. TACOMA WA 984.... SCF TACOMA WA
983.
985............ OLYMPIA WA 985... OLYMPIA WA 985... OLYMPIA WA 985.D
986............ PORTLAND OR 986.. PORTLAND OR 986.. SCF PORTLAND OR
970.
987 X
988............ WENATCHEE WA 988. WENATCHEE WA 988. WENATCHEE WA
988.D
989............ YAKIMA WA 989.... YAKIMA WA 989.... YAKIMA WA 989.D
990............ SPOKANE WA 990... SPOKANE WA 990... SCF SPOKANE WA
990.
991............ SPOKANE WA 991... SPOKANE WA 991... SCF SPOKANE WA
990.
992............ SPOKANE WA 992 U. SPOKANE WA 992... SCF SPOKANE WA
990.
993............ PASCO WA 993..... PASCO WA 993..... PASCO WA 993.D
994............ LEWISTON ID 994.. LEWISTON ID 994.. SCF LEWISTON ID
835.
995............ ANCHORAGE AK 995. ANCHORAGE AK 995. SCF ANCHORAGE AK
995.
996............ ANCHORAGE AK 996. ANCHORAGE AK 996. SCF ANCHORAGE AK
995.
997............ FAIRBANKS AK 997. FAIRBANKS AK 997. FAIRBANKS AK
997.D
998............ JUNEAU AK 998.... JUNEAU AK 998.... JUNEAU AK 998.D
999............ KETCHIKAN AK 999. KETCHIKAN AK 999. KETCHIKAN AK
999.D
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a. ZIP Code: Use this column to find a 3-digit ZIP Code prefix. Those
indicated by an X are unassigned.
[[Page 10157]]
b. 3-Digit Destination: Use this information for Line 1 or 3-digit
containers (subject to the standards for the rate claimed). Unique 3-
digit cities are indicated by a U.
c. 3-Digit Scheme Destination: Use this information for Line 1 on 3-
digit/scheme containers (subject to the standards for the rate
claimed). Line 2 for destinations indicated by an S must include
either ``SCHEME'' or the specific information shown. 3-digit groups by
scheme group, where applicable, are shown in L003.
d. SCF Destination: Use this information for Line 1 on SCF containers
(subject to the standards for the rate claimed). SCFs serving only a
single 3-digit area are indicated by a D. 3-digit groups by SCF are
shown in L005. Destination SCF Standard Mail (A) rates or SCF zone
Periodicals rates are available only to those ZIP Code areas for which
an SCF is shown, except that, for either rate, mailings may be
deposited at Watertown SD for mail destinating in 572 and at Mitchell
SD for mail destinating in 573.
To order labels from the USPS Label Printing Center, use Form 1578-B and
indicate set number 001 (unique 3-digit cities only), set number 002
(3-digit destinations), or set number 003 (SCF destinations). Requests
are supplied in lots of 300 (minimum) for each label on the list.
\1\ =Mail destinating in 3-digit ZIP Code area 008 must be labeled as
shown in L601 for Standard Mail machinable parcels, L603 for Standard
Mail irregular parcels, and L004 for all other mail.
[Add new L003 as follows:]
L003 3-Digit ZIP Code Prefix Groups for 3-Digit Scheme Sortation
When required by the standards for specific rates, pieces for the
3-digit ZIP Code prefixes shown in Column A must be combined in trays
labeled to the corresponding destination shown in Column B. Line 2 on
tray labels must include ``SCHEME'' except as shown below.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Column A Column B
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3-Digit ZIP Code Prefix Group Label to
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
006-009............................................... SAN JUAN PR 006.
010, 011, 013......................................... SPRINGFIELD MA 010.
014, 015, 017......................................... WORCESTER MA 015.
018, 019, 055......................................... MIDDLESEX-ESSEX MA 018.
020, 023, 024......................................... BROCKTON MA 023.
021, 022.............................................. BOSTON MA 021.
025, 026.............................................. BUZZARDS BAY MA 025.
027, 028.............................................. PROVIDENCE RI 028.
035, 036, 051-053, 059................................ WHITE RVR JCT VT 051
SCHEME B.
037, 050.............................................. WHITE RVR JCT VT 050
SCHEME C.
038, 039.............................................. PORTSMOUTH NH 038.
043, 045.............................................. PORTLAND ME 043.
054, 056.............................................. BURLINGTON VT 054.
057, 058.............................................. WHITE RVR JCT VT 057
SCHEME A.
068, 069.............................................. STAMFORD CT 068.
074, 076.............................................. HACKENSACK NJ 074.
077, 088.............................................. KILMER NJ 077.
078, 079.............................................. WEST JERSEY NJ 078.
080, 081.............................................. SOUTH JERSEY NJ 080
SCHEME A.
082-084............................................... SOUTH JERSEY NJ 082
SCHEME B.
085-087............................................... TRENTON NJ 085.
110, 113, 114, 116.................................... QUEENS NY 110.
120-123............................................... ALBANY NY 120.
124, 125, 127......................................... MID-HUDSON NY 124.
130-132............................................... SYRACUSE NY 130.
133, 134.............................................. UTICA NY 133.
137-139............................................... BINGHAMTON NY 137.
140-143............................................... BUFFALO NY 140.
155, 157.............................................. JOHNSTOWN PA 155.
164, 165.............................................. ERIE PA 164.
169, 177.............................................. WILLIAMSPORT PA 169.
180, 181, 183......................................... LEHIGH VALLEY PA 180.
191, 192.............................................. PHILADELPHIA PA 191.
193, 194.............................................. SOUTHEASTERN PA 193.
197-199............................................... WIMINGTON DE 197.
202-205............................................... WASHINGTON DC 202.
208, 209.............................................. SUBURBAN MD 208.
210, 211, 219......................................... BALTIMORE MD 210.
224, 225, 238......................................... RICHMOND VA 224
SCHEME B.
230, 231.............................................. RICHMOND VA 230
SCHEME A.
233-237............................................... NORFOLK VA 233.
240, 241.............................................. ROANOKE VA 240.
250-252............................................... CHARLESTON WV 250.
278, 279.............................................. ROCKY MOUNT NC 278.
280, 281, 297......................................... CHARLOTTE NC 280.
[[Page 10158]]
290, 291.............................................. COLUMBIA SC 290.
293, 296............................................... GREENVILLE SC 296.
300, 301.............................................. NORTH METRO GA 300.
303, 311, 399......................................... ATLANTA GA 303.
310, 312.............................................. MACON GA 310.
318, 319.............................................. COLUMBUS GA 318.
334, 349.............................................. W PALM BEACH FL 334.
335, 346.............................................. TAMPA FL 335.
369, 393.............................................. JACKSON MS 393
SCHEME B.
377-379............................................... KNOXVILLE TN 377.
390, 391.............................................. JACKSON MS 390
SCHEME A.
400, 401, 471......................................... LOUISVILLE KY 400.
410, 470.............................................. CINCINNATI OH 410
SCHEME A.
430, 431, 433......................................... COLUMBUS OH 430
SCHEME A.
434-436............................................... TOLEDO OH 434.
437, 438.............................................. COLUMBUS OH 437
SCHEME B.
442, 443.............................................. AKRON OH 442.
444, 445.............................................. YOUNGSTOWN OH 444.
446, 447.............................................. CANTON OH 446.
450, 451.............................................. CINCINNATI OH 450
SCHEME B.
463, 464.............................................. GARY IN 463.
465, 466.............................................. SOUTH BEND IN 465.
484, 485.............................................. FLINT MI 484.
486, 487.............................................. SAGINAW MI 486.
490, 491.............................................. KALAMAZOO MI 490.
498, 499.............................................. IRON MOUNTAIN MI 498.
500-502............................................... DES MOINES IA 500
SCHEME A.
503, 509.............................................. DES MOINES IA 503
SCHEME B.
515, 516, 680......................................... OMAHA NE 680.
522, 523.............................................. CEDAR RAPIDS IA 522.
527, 528, 612......................................... ROCK ISLAND IL 612.
535, 538.............................................. MADISON WI 535.
540, 550.............................................. ST PAUL MN 550.
541, 542.............................................. GREEN BAY WI 541.
590-599, 821.......................................... BILLINGS MT 590.
600, 602.............................................. PALATINE IL 600.
601, 603.............................................. CAROL STREAM IL 601.
610, 611.............................................. ROCKFORD IL 610.
615, 616.............................................. PEORIA IL 615.
618, 619.............................................. CHAMPAIGN IL 618.
620, 622, 630, 633.................................... ST LOUIS MO 630.
654, 655.............................................. SPRINGFIELD MO 654
SCHEME A.
656, 657.............................................. SPRINGFIELD MO 656
SCHEME B.
670, 671.............................................. WICHITA KS 670.
710, 711.............................................. SHREVEPORT LA 710
SCHEME A.
713, 714.............................................. SHREVEPORT LA 713
SCHEME B.
752, 753.............................................. DALLAS TX 752.
786, 789.............................................. AUSTIN TX 786.
808, 809.............................................. COLORADO SPGS CO 808.
840-844............................................... SALT LAKE CITY UT 840.
889-891............................................... LAS VEGAS NV 890.
894, 895, 897......................................... RENO NV 894.
900, 901.............................................. LOS ANGELES CA 900.
902-905............................................... INGLEWOOD CA 902.
906-908............................................... LONG BEACH CA 907.
913-916............................................... VAN NUYS CA 913.
917, 918.............................................. INDUSTRY CA 917.
919, 920.............................................. SAN DIEGO CA 920.
923, 925............................................... SAN BERNARDINO CA 923.
926, 927.............................................. SANTA ANA CA 926.
[[Page 10159]]
940, 943, 944......................................... SAN FRANCISCO CA 940
SCHEME A.
945, 948.............................................. OAKLAND CA 945
SCHEME A.
(FCM only).............................................
945, 948, 969.......................................... OAKLAND CA 945.
SCHEME A.
(PER and STD only).....................................
946, 947.............................................. OAKLAND CA 946
SCHEME B.
952, 953.............................................. STOCKTON CA 952.
956, 957.............................................. SACRAMENTO CA 956.
962-966............................................... SAN FRANCISCO CA 962
SCHEME B.
967-969 (FCM only).................................... HONOLULU HI 967.
967-968 (PER and STD only)............................. HONOLULU HI 967.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[Add new L004 as follows:]
L004 3-Digit ZIP Code Prefix Groups for ADC Sortation
Subject to the standards for the rate claimed, pieces for the 3-
digit ZIP Code prefixes shown in Column A must be combined and labeled
to the corresponding ADC destination shown in Column B. Where noted,
the destination must be selected based on the class of mail being
prepared. Unassigned 3-digit prefixes or assigned 3-digit prefixes not
associated with an ADC are omitted.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Column A Column B
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3-digit ZIP code prefix group Label to
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
004, 105-109........................................... ADC WESTCHESTER NY 105.
005, 115, 117-119...................................... ADC LONG ISLAND NY 117.
006-009................................................ ADC SAN JUAN PR 006.
010-017................................................ ADC SPRINGFIELD MA 010.
018, 019, 021, 022, 055................................ ADC BOSTON MA 021.
020, 023-029........................................... ADC PROVIDENCE RI 028.
030-034, 038, 039...................................... ADC MANCHESTER NH 030.
035-037, 050-054, 056-059.............................. ADC WHITE RVR JCT VT 050.
040-049................................................ ADC PORTLAND ME 040.
060-069................................................ [FCM and STD only] ADC HARTFORD CT 060.
[PER only] ADC SOUTHERN CT 064.
070-079, 085-089....................................... [FCM and PER only] ADC DV DANIELS NJ 07099.
[STD only] ADC DV DANIELS NJ 00104.
080-084................................................ ADC SOUTH JERSEY NJ 080.
090-098................................................ [FCM only] AMF KENNEDY NY 00300.
APO/FPO
[PER and STD only] MILITARY CENTER NY 090.
100-102, 104........................................... [FCM and STD only] ADC NEW YORK NY 100.
[PER only] ADC JAF NY 10180.
103, 110-114, 116...................................... ADC QUEENS NY 110.
120-129................................................ ADC ALBANY NY 120.
130-139................................................ ADC SYRACUSE NY 130.
140-149 ADC BUFFALO NY 140.
150-168, 260........................................... ADC PITTSBURGH PA 150.
169-178................................................ ADC HARRISBURG PA 170.
179, 189, 193-196...................................... ADC SOUTHEASTERN PA 189.
180-188................................................ ADC LEHIGH VALLEY PA 180.
190-192................................................ ADC PHILADELPHIA PA 190.
197-199................................................ ADC WILMINGTON DE 197.
200, 202-205........................................... ADC WASHINGTON DC 200.
201, 220-223, 226, 227................................. [FCM only] ADC DULLES VA 201.
[PER and STD only] ADC NORTHERN VA 220.
206-209................................................ ADC SOUTHERN MD 206.
210-212, 214-219, 254, 267............................. ADC BALTIMORE MD 210.
224, 225, 228-239, 244................................. ADC RICHMOND VA 230.
240-243, 245........................................... ADC ROANOKE VA 240.
246-253, 255-259....................................... ADC CHARLESTON WV 250.
261-266, 268........................................... ADC CLARKSBURG WV 263.
270-279, 285........................................... ADC GREENSBORO NC 270.
280-284, 286-289, 297.................................. ADC CHARLOTTE NC 280.
290-296................................................ ADC COLUMBIA SC 290.
[[Page 10160]]
298, 300-303, 305, 306, 308, 309, 311, 399............. [FCM and PER only] ADC NORTH METRO GA 301.
[STD only] ADC NORTH METRO GA 30199.
299, 304, 313-315, 320-324, 326, 344................... [FCM and PER only] ADC JACKSONVILLE FL 320.
[STD only] ADC JACKSONVILLE FL 32099.
307, 370-374, 376-379, 384, 385........................ [FCM and PER only] ADC NASHVILLE TN 370.
[STD only] ADC NASHVILLE TN 37099.
310, 312, 316-319...................................... [FCM and PER only] ADC MACON GA 310.
[STD only] ADC MACON GA 31299.
325, 365, 366, 394-396, 700, 701, 703-708.............. [FCM and PER only] ADC NEW ORLEANS LA 700.
[STD only] ADC NEW ORLEANS LA 70099.
327-329, 334, 347, 349................................. [FCM only] ADC ORLANDO FL 328.
[PER only] ADC MID FLORIDA FL 327.
[STD only] ADC MID FLORIDA FL 32799.
330-333................................................ [FCM and PER only] ADC MIAMI FL 331.
[STD only] ADC MIAMI FL 33298.
335-339, 342, 346...................................... [FCM only] ADC TAMPA FL 335.
[PER only] ADC MANASOTA FL 342.
[STD only] ADC MANASOTA FL 34299.
340.................................................... [FCM only] ADC MIAMI FL 331.
[PER and STD only] MILITARY CENTER NY 090.
350-352, 354-359, 362.................................. [FCM and PER only] ADC BIRMINGHAM AL 350.
[STD only] ADC BIRMINGHAM AL 35099.
360, 361, 363, 364, 367, 368........................... [FCM and PER only] ADC MONTGOMERY AL 360.
[STD only] ADC MONTGOMERY AL 36099.
369, 390-393, 397...................................... [FCM and PER only] ADC JACKSON MS 390.
[STD only] ADC JACKSON MS 39099.
375, 380-383, 386-389, 723............................. [FCM and PER only] ADC MEMPHIS TN 380.
[STD only] ADC MEMPHIS TN 38099.
400-409, 411-418, 420-427, 471, 476, 477............... ADC LOUISVILLE KY 400.
410, 450-455, 458, 459, 470............................ ADC CINCINNATI OH 450.
430-438, 456, 457...................................... ADC COLUMBUS OH 430.
439-449................................................ ADC CLEVELAND OH 440.
460-469, 472-475, 478, 479............................. ADC INDIANAPOLIS IN 460.
480-489................................................ ADC DETROIT MI 481.
490-497................................................ ADC GRAND RAPIDS MI 493.
498, 499, 530-532, 534, 535, 537-539, 541-545, 549..... ADC MILWAUKEE WI 530.
500-509, 520-528, 612.................................. [FCM only] ADC DES MOINES IA 500.
[PER only] ADC DES MOINES IA 50092.
[STD only] ADC DES MOINES IA 50091.
510-516, 680, 681, 683-693............................. ADC OMAHA NE 680.
540, 546-548, 550, 551, 556-559........................ [FCM only] ADC ST PAUL MN 550.
[PER only] ADC ST PAUL MN 55222.
[STD only] ADC ST PAUL MN 55532.
553-555, 560-564, 566.................................. [FCM only] ADC MINNEAPOLIS MN 553.
[PER only] ADC MINNEAPOLIS MN 55228.
[STD only] ADC MINNEAPOLIS MN 55538.
565, 567, 580-588...................................... ADC FARGO ND 580.
570-577................................................ ADC SIOUX FALLS SD 570.
590-599, 821........................................... ADC BILLINGS MT 590.
600-603, 610, 611, 613-616............................. [FCM and STD only] ADC CAROL STREAM IL 601.
[PER only] ADC CHICAGO IL 60821.
604, 605, 609, 617-619................................. [FCM and STD only] ADC SOUTH SUBN IL 604.
[PER only] ADC CHICAGO IL 60821.
606-608................................................ [FCM and STD only] ADC CHICAGO IL 606.
[PER only] ADC CHICAGO IL 60821.
620, 622-631, 633-639.................................. [FCM and PER only] ADC ST LOUIS MO 630.
[STD only] ADC ST LOUIS MO 63203.
640, 641, 644-658, 660-662, 664-668.................... [FCM only] ADC KANSAS CITY MO 640.
[PER only] ADC KANSAS CITY MO 64240.
[STD only] ADC KANSAS CITY MO 66340.
669-679, 739........................................... [FCM only] ADC WICHITA KS 670.
[PER only] ADC WICHITA KS 64270.
[STD only] ADC WICHITA KS 66370.
710-714................................................ [FCM and PER only] ADC SHREVEPORT LA 710.
[STD only] ADC SHREVEPORT LA 71099.
716-722, 724-729....................................... [FCM and PER only] ADC LITTLE ROCK AR 720.
[STD only] ADC LITTLE ROCK AR 72098.
730, 731, 734-738, 748................................. ADC OKLAHOMA CITY OK 730.
733, 779-789, 798, 799, 885............................ [FCM and PER only] ADC SAN ANTONIO TX 780.
[STD only] ADC SAN ANTONIO TX 78099.
740, 741, 743-747, 749................................. ADC TULSA OK 740.
[[Page 10161]]
750-759................................................ ADC NORTH TEXAS TX 750.
760-769, 790-797....................................... ADC FT WORTH TX 760.
770-778................................................ ADC NORTH HOUSTON TX 773.
800-816................................................ ADC DENVER CO 800.
820, 822-831........................................... ADC CHEYENNE WY 820.
832-834, 836, 837, 979................................. ADC BOISE ID 836.
835, 838, 980-985, 988-994, 998, 999................... ADC SEATTLE WA 980.
840-847, 893, 898...................................... ADC SALT LAKE CITY UT 840.
850, 852, 853, 855-857, 859, 860, 863.................. ADC PHOENIX AZ 852.
864, 889-891, 894, 895, 897, 961....................... ADC LAS VEGAS NV 890.
865, 870-875, 877-884.................................. ADC ALBUQUERQUE NM 870.
900, 901............................................... ADC LOS ANGELES CA 900.
902-908, 910-918....................................... ADC TWIN VALLEY CA 900.
919-921................................................ ADC SAN DIEGO CA 920.
922-928, 930-935....................................... ADC SEQUOIA CA 901.
936-939, 942, 950-953, 955-960......................... [FCM only] ADC SIERRA CA 940.
[PER and STD only] ADC OAKLAND CA 945.
940, 941, 943-949, 954................................. [FCM only] ADC PENINSULA CA 941.
[PER and STD only] ADC OAKLAND CA 945.
962-966................................................ AMF SAN FRANCISCO CA 962.
APO/FPO.
967-968................................................ ADC HONOLULU HI 967.
969.................................................... [FCM only] ADC HONOLULU HI 967.
[PER and STD only] ADC OAKLAND CA 945.
970-978, 986........................................... ADC PORTLAND OR 970.
995-997................................................ ADC ANCHORAGE AK 995.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[Add new L005 as follows:]
L005 3-Digit ZIP Code Prefix Group for SCF Sortation
Subject to the standards for the rate claimed, pieces for the 3-
digit Zip Code prefixes shown in Column A must be combined and labeled
to the corresponding SCF destination shown in Column B. SCFs serving
only one 3-digit area are identified by S; Line 1 labels for these
destinations does not include the ``SCF'' prefix before the facility
name. Unassigned 3-digit prefixes or assigned 3-digit prefixes not
associated with an SCF are omitted.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Column A Column B
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3-digit ZIP code prefix group Label to
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
004, 105-108........................................... SCF WESTCHESTER NY 105.
005, 117-119........................................... SCF MID-ISLAND NY 117.
006, 007, 009.......................................... SCF SAN JUAN PR 006.
010, 011, 013.......................................... SCF SPRINGFIELD MA 010.
012.................................................... PITTSFIELD MA 012.S
014-017................................................ SCF WORCESTER MA 015.
018, 019, 055.......................................... SCF MIDDLESEX-ESSX MA 018.
020, 023, 024.......................................... SCF BROCKTON MA 023.
021, 022............................................... SCF BOSTON MA 021.
025, 026............................................... SCF BUZZARDS BAY MA 025.
027-029................................................ SCF PROVIDENCE RI 028.
030-034................................................ SCF MANCHESTER NH 030.
035-037, 050-053, 057-059.............................. SCF WHITE RVR JCT VT 050.
038, 039............................................... SCF PORTSMOUTH NH 038.
040-043, 045, 048...................................... SCF PORTLAND ME 040.
044, 046, 047, 049..................................... SCF BANGOR ME 044.
054, 056............................................... SCF BURLINGTON VT 054.
060-062................................................ SCF HARTFORD CT 060.
063-066................................................ SCF SOUTHERN CT 064.
067.................................................... WATERBURY CT 067.S
068, 069............................................... SCF STAMFORD CT 068.
070-073................................................ SCF NEWARK NJ 070.
074, 075............................................... SCF PATERSON NJ 074.
076.................................................... HACKENSACK NJ 076.S
077.................................................... MONMOUTH NJ 077.S
078, 079............................................... SCF WEST JERSEY NJ 079.
080-084................................................ SCF SOUTH JERSEY NJ 080.
085-087................................................ SCF TRENTON NJ 085.
088, 089............................................... SCF KILMER NJ 088.
100-102................................................ SCF NEW YORK NY 100.
103.................................................... STATEN ISLAND NY 103.S
104.................................................... BRONX NY 104.S
[[Page 10162]]
109.................................................... ROCKLAND NY 109.S
110, 113, 114, 116..................................... SCF QUEENS NY 110.
111.................................................... LONG ISLAND CITY NY 111.S
112.................................................... BROOKLYN NY 112.S
115.................................................... WESTERN NASSAU NY 115.S
120-123................................................ SCF ALBANY NY 120.
124-127................................................ SCF MID-HUDSON NY 125.
128.................................................... GLENS FALLS NY 128.S
129.................................................... PLATTSBURGH NY 129.S
130-132................................................ SCF SYRACUSE NY 130.
133-135................................................ SCF UTICA NY 133.
136.................................................... WATERTOWN NY 136.S
137-139................................................ SCF BINGHAMTON NY 137.
140-143................................................ SCF BUFFALO NY 140.
144-146................................................ SCF ROCHESTER NY 144.
147.................................................... JAMESTOWN NY 147.S
148, 149............................................... SCF ELMIRA NY 148.
150-154................................................ SCF PITTSBURGH PA 150.
155, 157, 159.......................................... SCF JOHNSTOWN PA 159.
156.................................................... GREENSBURG PA 156.S
158.................................................... DUBOIS PA 158.S
160-162................................................ SCF NEW CASTLE PA 161.
163.................................................... OIL CITY PA 163.S
164, 165............................................... SCF ERIE PA 164.
166, 168............................................... SCF ALTOONA PA 166.
167.................................................... BRANDFORD PA 167.S
169, 177............................................... SCF WILLIAMSPORT PA 177.
170-172, 178........................................... SCF HARRISBURG PA 170.
173-176................................................ SCF LANCASTER PA 173.
179, 195, 196.......................................... SCF READING PA 195.
180, 181, 183.......................................... SCF LEHIGH VALLEY PA 180.
182, 186, 187.......................................... SCF WILKES BARRE PA 186.
184, 185, 188.......................................... SCF SCRANTON PA 184.
189, 193, 194.......................................... SCF SOUTHEASTERN PA 189.
190-192................................................ SCF PHILADELPHIA PA 190.
197-199................................................ SCF WILMINGTON DE 197.
200, 202-205........................................... SCF WASHINGTON DC 200.
201, 220-223........................................... SCF NORTHERN VA 220.
206, 207............................................... SCF SOUTHERN MD 206.
208, 209............................................... SCF SUBURBAN MD 208.
210-212, 214, 219...................................... SCF BALTIMORE MD 210.
215, 267............................................... SCF CUMBERLAND MD 215.
216.................................................... EASTON MD 216.S
217.................................................... FREDERICK MD 217.S
218.................................................... SALISBURY MD 218.S
224, 225, 230-232, 238................................. SCF RICHMOND VA 230.
226.................................................... WINCHESTER VA 226.S
227.................................................... CULPEPER VA 227.S
228, 229, 244.......................................... SCF CHARLOTTESVILLE VA 229.
233-237................................................ SCF NORFOLK VA 233.
239.................................................... FARMVILLE VA 239.S
240, 241, 243.......................................... SCF ROANOKE VA 240.
242.................................................... BRISTOL VA 242.S
245.................................................... LYNCHBURG VA 245.S
246-248................................................ SCF BLUEFIELD WV 247.
249.................................................... LEWISBURG WV 249.S
250-253................................................ SCF CHARLESTON WV 250.
254.................................................... MARTINSBURG WV 254.S
255-257................................................ SCF HUNTINGTON WV 255.
258, 259............................................... SCF BECKLEY WV 258.
260.................................................... WHEELING WV 260.S
261.................................................... PARKERSBURG WV 261.S
262-265................................................ SCF CLARKSBURG WV 263.
266.................................................... GASSAWAY WV 266.S
268.................................................... PETERSBURG WV 268.S
270-274................................................ SCF GREENSBORO NC 270.
275-277................................................ SCF RALEIGH NC 275.
278, 279............................................... SCF ROCKY MOUNT NC 278.
280-282, 297........................................... SCF CHARLOTTE NC 280.
283, 284............................................... SCF FAYETTEVILLE NC 283.
285.................................................... KINSTON NC 285.S
286.................................................... HICKORY NC 286.S
[[Page 10163]]
287-289................................................ SCF ASHEVILLE NC 287.
290-292................................................ SCF COLUMBIA SC 290.
293, 296............................................... SCF GREENVILLE SC 296.
294.................................................... CHARLESTON SC 294.S
295.................................................... FLORENCE SC 295.S
298, 308, 309.......................................... SCF AUGUSTA GA 308.
299, 313, 314.......................................... SCF SAVANNAH GA 313.
300-302................................................ SCF NORTH METRO GA 300.
303, 311, 399.......................................... SCF ATLANTA GA 303.
304.................................................... SWAINSBORO GA 304.S
305, 306............................................... SCF ATHENS GA 306.
307, 373, 374.......................................... SCF CHATTANOOGA TN 373.
310, 312............................................... SCF MACON GA 310.
315.................................................... WAYCROSS GA 315.S
316.................................................... VALDOSTA GA 316.S
317.................................................... ALBANY GA 317.S
318, 319............................................... SCF COLUMBUS GA 318.
320, 322............................................... SCF JACKSONVILLE FL 320.
321.................................................... DAYTONA BEACH FL 321.S
323.................................................... TALLAHASSEE FL 323.S
324.................................................... PANAMA CITY FL 324.S
325.................................................... PENSACOLA FL 325.S
326, 344............................................... SCF GAINESVILLE FL 326.
327.................................................... MID-FLORIDA FL 327.S
328, 329, 347.......................................... SCF ORLANDO FL 328.
330.................................................... SOUTH FLORIDA FL 330.S
331, 332............................................... SCF MIAMI FL 331.
333.................................................... FT LAUDERDALE FL 333.S
334, 349............................................... SCF WEST PALM BCH FL 334.
335, 336, 346.......................................... SCF TAMPA FL 335.
337.................................................... ST PETERSBURG FL 337.S
338.................................................... LAKELAND FL 338.S
339.................................................... FT MYERS FL 339.S
342.................................................... MANASOTA FL 342.S
350-352, 355, 359...................................... SCF BIRMINGHAM AL 350.
354.................................................... TUSCALOOSA AL 354.S
356-358................................................ SCF HUNTSVILLE AL 357.
360, 361, 367, 368..................................... SCF MONTGOMERY AL 360.
362.................................................... ANNISTON AL 362.S
363.................................................... DOTHAN AL 363.S
364.................................................... EVERGREEN AL 364.S
365, 366............................................... SCF MOBILE AL 365.
369, 393............................................... SCF MERIDIAN MS 393.
370-372................................................ SCF NASHVILLE TN 370.
375, 380, 381, 386, 723................................ SCF MEMPHIS TN 380.
376.................................................... JOHNSON CITY TN 376.S
377-379................................................ SCF KNOXVILLE TN 377.
382.................................................... MCKENZIE TN 382.S
383.................................................... JACKSON TN 383.S
384.................................................... COLUMBIA TN 384.S
385.................................................... COOKEVILLE TN 385.S
387.................................................... GREENVILLE MS 387.S
388.................................................... TUPELO MS 388.S
389.................................................... GRENADA MS 389.S
390-392................................................ SCF JACKSON MS 390.
394.................................................... HATTIESBURG MS 394.S
395.................................................... GULFPORT MS 395.S
396.................................................... MCCOMB MS 396.S
397.................................................... COLUMBUS MS 397.S
400-402, 471........................................... SCF LOUISVILLE KY 400.
403-406................................................ SCF LEXINGTON KY 403.
407-409................................................ SCF LONDON KY 407.
410, 450-452, 459, 470................................. SCF CINCINNATI OH 450.
411, 412............................................... SCF ASHLAND KY 411.
413, 414............................................... SCF CAMPTON KY 413.
415, 416............................................... SCF PIKEVILLE KY 415.
417, 418............................................... SCF HAZARD KY 417.
420.................................................... PADUCAH KY 420.S
421, 422............................................... SCF BOWLING GREEN KY 421.
423.................................................... OWENSBORO KY 423.S
424, 476, 477.......................................... SCF EVANSVILLE IN 476.
425, 426............................................... SCF SOMERSET KY 425.
[[Page 10164]]
427.................................................... ELIZABETHTOWN KY 427.S
430-433................................................ SCF COLUMBUS OH 430.
434-436................................................ SCF TOLEDO OH 434.
437, 438............................................... SCF ZANESVILLE OH 437.
439.................................................... STEUBENVILLE OH 439.S
440, 441............................................... SCF CLEVELAND OH 440.
442, 443............................................... SCF AKRON OH 442.
444, 445............................................... SCF YOUNGSTOWN OH 444.
446, 447............................................... SCF CANTON OH 446.
448, 449............................................... SCF MANSFIELD OH 448.
453-455................................................ SCF DAYTON OH 453.
456.................................................... CHILLICOTHE OH 456.S
457.................................................... ATHENS OH 457.S
458.................................................... LIMA OH 458.S
460-462................................................ SCF INDIANAPOLIS IN 460.
463, 464............................................... SCF GARY IN 463.
465, 466............................................... SCF SOUTH BEND IN 465.
467, 468............................................... SCF FORT WAYNE IN 467.
469.................................................... KOKOMO IN 469.S
472.................................................... COLUMBUS IN 472.S
473.................................................... MUNCIE IN 473.S
474.................................................... BLOOMINGTON IN 474.S
475.................................................... WASHINGTON IN 475.S
478.................................................... TERRE HAUTE IN 478.S
479.................................................... LAFAYETTE IN 479.S
480, 483............................................... SCF ROYAL OAK MI 480.
481, 482............................................... SCF DETROIT MI 481.
484, 485............................................... SCF FLINT MI 484.
486, 487............................................... SCF SAGINAW MI 486.
488, 489............................................... SCF LANSING MI 488.
490, 491............................................... SCF KALAMAZOO MI 490.
492.................................................... JACKSON MI 492.S
493-495................................................ SCF GRAND RAPIDS MI 493.
496.................................................... TRAVERSE CITY MI 496.S
497.................................................... GAYLORD MI 497.S
498, 499............................................... SCF IRON MOUNTAIN MI 498.
500-503, 509........................................... SCF DES MOINES IA 500.
504.................................................... MASON CITY IA 504.S
505.................................................... FORT DODGE IA 505.S
506, 507............................................... SCF WATERLOO IA 506.
508.................................................... CRESTON IA 508.S
510, 511............................................... SCF SIOUX CITY IA 510.
512.................................................... SHELDON IA 512.S
513.................................................... SPENCER IA 513.S
514.................................................... CARROLL IA 514.S
515, 516, 680, 681..................................... SCF OMAHA NE 680.
520.................................................... DUBUQUE IA 520.S
521.................................................... DECORAH IA 521.S
522-524................................................ SCF CEDAR RAPIDS IA 522.
525.................................................... OTTUMWA IA 525.S
526.................................................... BURLINGTON IA 526.S
527, 528, 612.......................................... SCF ROCK ISLAND IL 612.
530-532, 534........................................... SCF MILWAUKEE WI 530.
535, 537, 538.......................................... SCF MADISON WI 535.
539.................................................... PORTAGE WI 539.S
540, 550, 551.......................................... SCF ST PAUL MN 550.
541-543................................................ SCF GREEN BAY WI 541.
544.................................................... WAUSAU WI 544.S
545.................................................... RHINELANDER WI 545.S
546.................................................... LA CROSSE WI 546.S
547.................................................... EAU CLAIRE WI 547.S
548.................................................... SPOONER WI 548.S
549.................................................... OSHKOSH WI 549.S
553-555................................................ SCF MINNEAPOLIS MN 553.
556-558................................................ SCF DULUTH MN 556.
559.................................................... ROCHESTER MN 559.S
560.................................................... MANKATO MN 560.S
561.................................................... WINDOM MN 561.S
562.................................................... WILLMAR MN 562.S
563.................................................... ST CLOUD MN 563.S
564.................................................... BRAINERD MN 564.S
565.................................................... DETROIT LAKES MN 565.S
[[Page 10165]]
566.................................................... BEMIDJI MN 566.S
567.................................................... THIEF RIVER FALLS MN 567.S
570, 571............................................... SCF SIOUX FALLS SD 570.
572, 573............................................... SCF DAKOTA CENTRAL SD 572.
574.................................................... ABERDEEN SD 574.S
575........................
FR Doc. 96-5500 Classification Reform; Implementation Standards
............................ PIERRE SD 575.S
576.................................................... MOBRIDGE SD 576.S
577.................................................... RAPID CITY SD 577.S
580, 581............................................... SCF FARGO ND 580.
582.................................................... GRAND FORKS ND 582.S
583.................................................... DEVILS LAKE ND 583.S
584.................................................... JAMESTOWN ND 584.S
585.................................................... BISMARCK ND 585.S
586.................................................... DICKINSON ND 586.S
587.................................................... MINOT ND 587.S
588.................................................... WILLISTON ND 588.S
590, 591, 821.......................................... SCF BILLINGS MT 590.
592.................................................... WOLF POINT MT 592.S
593.................................................... MILES CITY MT 593.S
594.................................................... GREAT FALLS MT 594.S
595.................................................... HAVRE MT 595.S
596.................................................... HELENA MT 596.S
597.................................................... BUTTE MT 597.S
598.................................................... MISSOULA MT 598.S
599.................................................... KALISPELL MT 599.S
600, 602............................................... SCF PALATINE IL 600.
601, 603............................................... SCF CAROL STREAM IL 601.
604.................................................... SOUTH SUBURBAN IL 604.S
605.................................................... FOX VALLEY IL 605.S
606-608................................................ SCF CHICAGO IL 606.
609.................................................... KANKAKEE IL 609.S
610, 611............................................... SCF ROCKFORD IL 610.
613.................................................... LA SALLE IL 613.S
614.................................................... GALESBURG IL 614.S
615, 616............................................... SCF PEORIA IL 615.
617.................................................... BLOOMINGTON IL 617.S
618, 619............................................... SCF CHAMPAIGN IL 618.
620, 622, 630, 631, 633................................ SCF ST LOUIS MO 630.
623, 634, 635.......................................... SCF QUINCY IL 623.
624.................................................... EFFINGHAM IL 624.S
625-627................................................ SCF SPRINGFIELD IL 625.
628.................................................... CENTRALIA IL 628.S
629.................................................... CARBONDALE IL 629.S
636-639................................................ SCF CAPE GIRARDEAU MO 637.
640, 641, 649.......................................... SCF KANSAS CITY MO 640.
644, 645............................................... SCF ST JOSEPH MO 644.
646.................................................... CHILLICOTHE MO 646.S
647.................................................... HARRISONVILLE MO 647.S
648, 654-658........................................... SCF SPRINGFIELD MO 656.
650-653................................................ SCF MID-MISSOURI MO 650.
660-662................................................ SCF KANSAS CITY KS 660.
664-666, 668........................................... SCF TOPEKA KS 664.
667.................................................... FT SCOTT KS 667.S
669, 674............................................... SCF SALINA KS 674.
670-672................................................ SCF WICHITA KS 670.
673.................................................... INDEPENDENCE KS 673.S
675.................................................... HUTCHINSON KS 675.S
676.................................................... HAYS KS 676.S
677.................................................... COLBY KS 677.S
678.................................................... DODGE CITY KS 678.S
679, 739............................................... SCF LIBERAL KS 679.
683-685................................................ SCF LINCOLN NE 683.
686, 687............................................... SCF NORFOLK NE 687.
688, 689............................................... SCF GRAND ISLAND NE 688.
690.................................................... MCCOOK NE 690.S
691.................................................... NORTH PLATTE NE 691.S
692.................................................... VALENTINE NE 692.S
693.................................................... ALLIANCE NE 693.S
700, 701............................................... SCF NEW ORLEANS LA 700.
703.................................................... HOUMA LA 703.S
704.................................................... MANDEVILLE LA 704.S
705.................................................... LAFAYETTE LA 705.S
[[Page 10166]]
706.................................................... LAKE CHARLES LA 706.S
707, 708............................................... SCF BATON ROUGE LA 707.
710, 711............................................... SCF SHREVEPORT LA 710.
712.................................................... MONROE LA 712.S
713, 714............................................... SCF ALEXANDRIA LA 713.
716.................................................... PINE BLUFF AR 716.S
717.................................................... CAMDEN AR 717.S
718, 755............................................... SCF TEXARKANA TX 755.
719.................................................... HOT SPRINGS NTL PK AR 719.S
720-722................................................ SCF LITTLE ROCK AR 720.
724.................................................... JONESBORO AR 724.S
725.................................................... BATESVILLE AR 725.S
726.................................................... HARRISON AR 726.S
727.................................................... FAYETTEVILLE AR 727.S
728.................................................... RUSSELLVILLE AR 728.S
729.................................................... FORT SMITH AR 729.S
730, 731............................................... SCF OKLAHOMA CITY OK 730.
733, 786, 787, 789..................................... SCF AUSTIN TX 786.
734.................................................... ARDMORE OK 734.S
735.................................................... LAWTON OK 735.S
736.................................................... CLINTON OK 736.S
737.................................................... ENID OK 737.S
738.................................................... WOODWARD OK 738.S
740, 741, 743.......................................... SCF TULSA OK 740.
744.................................................... MUSKOGEE OK 744.S
745.................................................... MCALESTER OK 745.S
746.................................................... PONCA CITY OK 746.S
747.................................................... DURANT OK 747.S
748.................................................... SHAWNEE OK 748.S
749.................................................... POTEAU OK 749.S
750.................................................... NORTH TEXAS TX 750.S
751-753................................................ SCF DALLAS TX 752.
754.................................................... GREENVILLE TX 754.S
756.................................................... LONGVIEW TX 756.S
757.................................................... TYLER TX 757.S
758.................................................... PALESTINE TX 758.S
759.................................................... LUFKIN TX 759.S
760-762, 764........................................... SCF FORT WORTH TX 760.
763.................................................... WICHITA FALLS TX 763.S
765-767................................................ SCF WACO TX 766.
768, 795, 796.......................................... SCF ABILENE TX 795.
769, 797............................................... SCF MIDLAND TX 797.
770-772................................................ SCF HOUSTON TX 770.
773-775................................................ SCF NORTH HOUSTON TX 773.
776, 777............................................... SCF BEAUMONT TX 776.
778.................................................... BRYAN TX 778.S
779.................................................... VICTORIA TX 779.S
780-782, 788........................................... SCF SAN ANTONIO TX 780.
783, 784............................................... SCF CORPUS CHRISTI TX 783.
785.................................................... MCALLEN TX 785.S
790, 791............................................... SCF AMARILLO TX 790.
792.................................................... CHILDRESS TX 792.S
793, 794............................................... SCF LUBBOCK TX 793.
798, 799, 885.......................................... SCF EL PASO TX 798.
800-804................................................ SCF DENVER CO 800.
805.................................................... LONGMONT CO 805.S
806, 807............................................... SCF BRIGHTON CO 806.
808, 809............................................... SCF COLORADO SPGS CO 808.
810.................................................... PUEBLO CO 810.S
811.................................................... ALAMOSA CO 811.S
812.................................................... SALIDA CO 812.S
813.................................................... DURANGO CO 813.S
814, 815............................................... SCF GRAND JUNCTION CO 814.
816.................................................... GLENWOOD SPRINGS CO 816.S
820.................................................... CHEYENNE WY 820.S
822.................................................... WHEATLAND WY 822.S
823.................................................... RAWLINS WY 823.S
824.................................................... WORLAND WY 824.S
825.................................................... RIVERTON WY 825.S
826.................................................... CASPER WY 826.S
827.................................................... GILLETTE WY 827.S
828.................................................... SHERIDAN WY 828.S
[[Page 10167]]
829-831................................................ SCF ROCK SPRINGS WY 829.
832, 834............................................... SCF POCATELLO ID 832.
833.................................................... TWIN FALLS ID 833.S
835, 994............................................... SCF LEWISTON ID 835.
836, 837, 979.......................................... SCF BOISE ID 836.
838, 990-992........................................... SCF SPOKANE WA 990.
840-844................................................ SCF SALT LAKE CITY UT 840.
845-847................................................ SCF PROVO UT 845.
850, 852, 853.......................................... SCF PHOENIX AZ 852.
855.................................................... GLOBE AZ 855.S
856, 857............................................... SCF TUCSON AZ 856.
859.................................................... SHOW LOW AZ 859.S
860.................................................... FLAGSTAFF AZ 860.S
863.................................................... PRESCOTT AZ 863.S
864.................................................... KINGMAN AZ 864.S
865, 873............................................... SCF GALLUP NM 873.
870-872, 875........................................... SCF ALBUQUERQUE NM 870.
874.................................................... FARMINGTON NM 874.S
877.................................................... LAS VEGAS NM 877.S
878.................................................... SOCORRO NM 878.S
879.................................................... TRUTH OR CONS NM 879.S
880.................................................... LAS CRUCES NM 880.S
881.................................................... CLOVIS NM 881.S
882.................................................... ROSWELL NM 882.S
883.................................................... CARRIZOZO NM 883.S
884.................................................... TUCUMCARI NM 884.S
889-891................................................ SCF LAS VEGAS NV 890.
893.................................................... ELY NV 893.S
894, 895, 897, 961..................................... SCF RENO NV 894.
898.................................................... ELKO NV 898.S
900, 901............................................... SCF LOS ANGELES CA 900.
902-905................................................ SCF INGLEWOOD CA 902.
906-908................................................ SCF LONG BEACH CA 907.
910-912................................................ SCF PASADENA CA 910.
913-916................................................ SCF VAN NUYS CA 913.
917, 918............................................... SCF INDUSTRY CA 917.
919-921................................................ SCF SAN DIEGO CA 920.
922.................................................... PALM SPRINGS CA 922.S
923-925................................................ SCF SAN BERNARDINO CA 923.
926-928................................................ SCF SANTA ANA CA 926.
930.................................................... OXNARD CA 930.S
931, 934............................................... SCF SANTA BARBARA CA 931.
932, 933............................................... SCF BAKERSFIELD CA 932.
935.................................................... MOJAVE CA 935.S
936-938................................................ SCF FRESNO CA 936.
939.................................................... SALINAS CA 939.S
940, 941, 943, 944..................................... SCF SAN FRANCISCO CA 940.
942, 956-958........................................... SCF SACRAMENTO CA 956.
945-948................................................ SCF OAKLAND CA 945.
949, 954............................................... SCF NORTH BAY CA 949.
950, 951............................................... SCF SAN JOSE CA 950.
952, 953............................................... SCF STOCKTON CA 952.
955.................................................... EUREKA CA 955.S
959.................................................... MARYSVILLE CA 959.S
960.................................................... REDDING CA 960.S
967, 968............................................... SCF HONOLULU HI 967.
969.................................................... BARRIGADA GU 969.S
970-972, 986........................................... SCF PORTLAND OR 970.
973.................................................... SALEM OR 973.S
974.................................................... EUGENE OR 974.S
975.................................................... MEDFORD OR 975.S
976.................................................... KLAMATH FALLS OR 976.S
977.................................................... BEND OR 977.S
978.................................................... PENDLETON OR 978.S
980, 981............................................... SCF SEATTLE WA 980.
982.................................................... EVERETT WA 982.S
983, 984............................................... SCF TACOMA WA 983.
985.................................................... OLYMPIA WA 985.S
988.................................................... WENATCHEE WA 988.S
989.................................................... YAKIMA WA 989.S
993.................................................... PASCO WA 993.S
995, 996............................................... SCF ANCHORAGE AK 995.
[[Page 10168]]
997.................................................... FAIRBANKS AK 997.S
998.................................................... JUNEAU AK 998.S
999.................................................... KETCHIKAN AK 999.S
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[Amend title of current L100; remove current L101; no change to L102.]
L100 Priority Mail
[Remove current L201, L202, L203, L701, L703, L704, and L706; add new
L600.]
L600 Standard Mail
L601 BMCs--Machinable Parcels
[Insert current L705 with no change in text.]
L602 BMCs--DBMC Rates
[Insert current L708 with no change in text.]
L603 ADCs--Irregular Parcels
[Insert current L702 with no changes to the ZIP Code ranges or
destination information; delete the notes preceding the chart.]
L604 Originating ADCs--Irregular Parcels
[Insert current L707 with no changes to the ZIP Code ranges or
destination information; replace the notes preceding the chart with the
following:]
To determine the correct top (destination) line for labels being
prepared for containers of mixed ADC mail:
1. Determine the ZIP Code of the origin post office (i.e., the post
office where the mail is to be entered and postage paid);
2. Locate the first three digits of that ZIP Code under
``Originating ZIP Codes'' in the left column;
3. Read across the line to the entry under ``Label To'' in the
right column;
4. Use this entry as the top line of the label for all mixed ADC
containers in the mailing.
* * * * *
L800 Automation Rate Mailings
L801 AADCs--Letter-Size Mailings
[Text of current L804 with no change except revise footnote 2 as
follows:]
\2\ For Regular Periodicals and other than Nonprofit Standard
Mail (A) mailings.
L802 BMC/ASF Entry--Periodicals and Standard Mail (A)
[Insert current L805 with no change in text.]
L803 Non-BMC/ASF Entry--Periodicals and Standard Mail (A)
[Insert current L806 with no change in text.]
L897 3-Digit Destinations--Automated Site Mailings (Preferred
Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail Only)
[Insert current L801 with no change in text.]
L898 SCFs--Automated Site Mailings (Preferred Periodicals and
Nonprofit Standard Mail Only)
[Insert current L802 with no change in text.]
L899 AADCs--Automated Site Mailings (Preferred Periodicals and
Nonprofit Standard Mail Only)
[Insert current L803 with no change in text.]
M000 General Preparation Standards
M010 Mailpiece Preparation
[Redesignate current M011 as M012; add new M011, based on M020.1.1,
M020.1.4, M020.1.5, and M020.1.7, as follows:]
M011 General Preparation Standards
1.0 Basic Preparation Terms and Definitions
1.1 Presort Process
Presort is the process by which a mailer prepares mail so that it
is sorted to at least the finest extent required by the standards for
the rate claimed. Generally, presort is performed sequentially, from
the lowest (finest) level to the highest level, to those destinations
specified by standard and is completed at each level before the next
level is prepared. Not all presort levels are applicable in all
situations.
1.2 Presort Levels
Terms used for presort levels are defined as follows:
a. Firm: all pieces for delivery at the address shown on the top
piece.
b. Carrier route: all pieces for delivery to the same city route,
rural route, highway contract route, post office box section, or
general delivery unit.
c. 5-digit: the delivery address on all pieces includes the same 5-
digit ZIP Code.
d. 3-digit: the ZIP Code in the delivery address on all pieces
begins with the same three digits (see L002, Column A, or L897, as
applicable).
e. Unique 3-digit: the ZIP Code in the delivery address on all
pieces begins with the same three digits, and that the 3-digit prefix
is so identified in L002, Column A.
f. 3-digit scheme: the ZIP Code in the delivery address on all
pieces begins with one of the 3-digit prefixes processed by the USPS as
a single scheme (see L003); see 1.3g.
g. Origin 3-digit(s): the ZIP Code in the delivery address on all
pieces begins with one of the 3-digit prefixes processed at the SCF in
whose service area the mail is verified. Subject to standard, a
separation is required for each such 3-digit area regardless of the
volume of mail.
h. SCF: the separation includes pieces for two or more 3-digit
areas served by the same SCF (see L005 or L898 as applicable), except
that, where required or permitted by standard, mail for a single 3-
digit area may be prepared in an SCF separation when no mail for other
3-digit ZIP Code areas is available.
i. ADC/AADC: all pieces are addressed for delivery in the service
area of the same ADC or AADC (see L004, L801, or L899, as applicable).
j. ASF/BMC: all pieces are addressed for delivery in the service
area of the same ASF or BMC (see L601 or L602, as applicable).
k. Mixed [BMC, ADC, AADC, etc.]: the pieces are for delivery in the
service area of more than one BMC, ADC, AADC, etc.
l. Residual pieces/packages/sacks contain material left over after
completion of a presort sequence. Residual mail lacks the volume set by
standard to require or allow package or bundle preparation to a
particular destination, and usually does not qualify for a presort
rate. Residual mail is also referred to as nonqualifying or working
mail.
1.3 Preparation Instructions
For purposes of preparing mail:
a. Pieces refers to individually addressed mailpieces. This
definition also applies when pieces is used in eligibility standards.
Quantities indicated for optional or required
[[Page 10169]]
sortations always refer to pieces unless specifically excepted.
b. A full letter tray (1- or 2-foot) is one in which faced, upright
pieces fill the tray to its capacity whenever practical, but never less
than at least 3/4 of its length. Each tray must be filled before
filling of the next tray is begun, with the contents in multiple trays
relatively balanced. A tray with less mail may be prepared only if
less-than-full or overflow trays are permitted by the standards for the
rate claimed. Tray preparation is described in M033.
c. A less-than-full letter tray is one that contains mail for the
same destination regardless of quantity or whether a full tray was
previously prepared for that destination. Less-than-full trays may be
prepared only if permitted by the standards for the rate claimed.
d. An overflow letter tray is a less-than-full tray that contains
all pieces remaining after preparation of full trays for the same
destination. Overflow trays may be prepared only if permitted by the
standards for the rate claimed.
e. A full flat tray is one that is physically full. Although a
specific minimum volume is required (at least a single stack of mail
lying flat on the bottom of the tray and filling the tray to the bottom
of the handholds) before a tray may or must be prepared to the
corresponding presort destination, trays must be filled with additional
available pieces, (up to the reasonable capacity of the tray) when
standards require preparation of full trays.
f. A full sack is defined in the standards for the class and rate
claimed.
g. A 3-digit/scheme sort yields 3-digit scheme trays for those 3-
digit ZIP Code prefixes listed in L003 and 3-digit trays for other
areas. The 3-digit ZIP Code prefixes in a scheme are treated as a
single presort destination that is subject to a single minimum tray
volume. No further separation by 3-digit prefix is required for pieces
placed in 3-digit scheme trays. Trays prepared for a 3-digit scheme
destination (i.e., one of the facilities listed in L003) that happen to
contain pieces for only one of the schemed 3-digit areas are still
considered 3-digit scheme sorted and are labeled accordingly. The 3-
digit/scheme sort is required for automation rate First-Class, Regular
Periodicals, and Regular Standard Mail letter-size pieces and may not
be used by mail at other rates.
h. An origin 3-digit tray contains all mail (regardless of
quantity) for a 3-digit ZIP Code area processed by the SCF in whose
service area the mail is verified. If more than one 3-digit area is
served, as indicated in L005, a separate tray must be prepared for
each.
i. The required at [quantity] instruction (e.g., ``required at 10
pieces'') means that the particular unit must be prepared for the
corresponding presort level whenever the specified quantity of mail is
reached or exceeded. Packages, bundles, and containers may contain more
than the specified required at quantity up to the applicable maximum
physical size. Subject to applicable rate eligibility standards,
smaller quantities may be prepared only if permitted. Where specified
by standard, required preparation applies only if the mailer chooses to
qualify for the corresponding rate.
j. The optional at [quantity] instruction means that the particular
unit may be prepared for the corresponding presort level whenever the
specified quantity of mail is reached or exceeded. Packages, bundles,
or containers may contain more than the specified optional at quantity
up to the applicable maximum physical size. Smaller quantities may be
prepared only if permitted by applicable rate eligibility standards.
Standards for quantities with which preparation is optional are often
followed by standards for larger quantities with which preparation is
required.
k. Entry [facility] (or origin [facility]) refers to the USPS mail
processing facility (e.g., ``entry BMC'') that serves the post office
at which the mail is entered by the mailer. If the post office where
the mail is entered is not the one serving the mailer's location (e.g.,
for plant-verified drop shipment), the post office of entry determines
the entry facility. Entry SCF includes both single- and multi-3-digit
SCFs. Entry BMC includes subordinate ASFs unless otherwise specified.
l. Smaller quantities not permitted or fewer pieces not permitted
disallows preparation of quantities of mail smaller than that stated as
the minimum required.
m. The group pieces instruction means the pieces are to be sorted
together as if to be packaged but not actually secured into a package.
Package labels and other package identification methods may be used for
unsecured groups of pieces as permitted by standard.
n. A package is a group of addressed pieces secured together as a
unit. The presort process considers the total number of pieces
available for the particular presort destination and assembles them
into groups meeting applicable volume and size standards. When the
standards applicable to the rate claimed require securing the pieces in
each group together, the result is a package. The term package does not
apply to unsecured groups of pieces (e.g., pieces prepared in trays and
identified by separator cards). Package preparation is described in
M020.
o. A bundle is a group of packages secured together as a unit under
the standards applicable to the rate claimed.
1.4 Mailing
A mailing is a group of pieces within the same class of mail and
processing category that may be sorted together under the applicable
standards. Other specific standards may define whether separate
mailings may be combined, palletized, reported, or deposited together.
These types of mail may not be part of the same mailing regardless of
being in the same class and processing category: automation and
nonautomation mail (except as permitted by the ``85% rule'' where
applicable); automation carrier route rate and other automation rate
mail; any combination of Enhanced Carrier Route, Regular, and/or
Nonprofit Standard Mail; 3/5 and carrier route Nonprofit Standard Mail.
2.0 Presort Accuracy Validation and Evaluation (Pave)
2.1 Basic Information
The Presort Accuracy Validation and Evaluation (PAVE) program is a
process designed in cooperation with the mailing industry to evaluate
presort software and determine its accuracy in sorting address files
under DMM standards. PAVE is available only to software and hardware
manufacturers (i.e., companies that actually develop presort software
or manufacture presorting equipment). PAVE certification does not
guarantee acceptance of customer mail prepared with PAVE-validated
hardware/software.
2.2 Process
PAVE evaluates the accuracy of presort products by providing test
address files to vendors. Vendors process the test file(s) through
their presort software or hardware and return the resulting postage
statement facsimile(s) and other presort documentation to the USPS
National Customer Support Center (NCSC) for evaluation of the answers.
Each test file is evaluated for its accuracy of presort, compliance
with current DMM standards, accuracy of sack/tray/pallet tag labels,
and general acceptability of computer-generated facsimiles of postage
statements and other presort documentation. If the answers are
[[Page 10170]]
accurate, the vendor's presort product is validated for a 12-month
period or until the end of the current annual period.
2.3 Participation
For information on participation in PAVE, presort product
developers may request the PAVE Program Technical Guide from the NCSC
by calling 1-800-331-5746, extension 651 or 454. Participants may use
the PAVE form included in that guide to order PAVE test files.
M012 Endorsements and Markings
[In 1.1a, replace ``First-, third-, and fourth-class mail'' with
``First-Class or Standard Mail''; in 1.1b, replace ``[S]econd-class
mail'' with ``Periodicals''; revise other text as follows:]
* * * * *
2.0 METHOD
2.1 Placement
Unless otherwise directed or permitted by standard, placement of
markings is subject to these standards:
a. The required rate markings ``First-Class,'' ``Presorted First-
Class,'' ``Bulk Rate,'' ``Nonprofit'' (or approved abbreviations) must
be printed or produced as part of, or immediately below or to the left
of, the permit imprint, meter impression or stamp, or precanceled or
adhesive stamp.
b. Other required rate markings (e.g., ``AUTO,'' ``Carrier Route
Presort,'' ``ECRLOT'') may be placed in the locations shown in 2.1a or,
alternatively, may be placed in the address area on the line
immediately above the address or, preferably, two lines above the
address if no other information appears on the line with the marking
except postal information such as package label and ACS information; in
the optional endorsement line (under M013); or carrier route
information line (under M014). Alternatively, the mailer may use an
MLOCR-driven ink jet printer to apply these markings to the left of the
DPBC or to apply AUTO or AUTOCR to the left of a corrected date.
c. Compound markings (e.g, ``AUTOCR,'' ``ECRLOT'') must appear in
their entirety wherever placed.
* * * * *
[Remove current 2.3 and renumber current 2.4 and 2.5 as 2.3 and 2.4,
respectively.]
* * * * *
M013 Optional Endorsement Lines
[In the current chart following 1.1, remove the three examples for
optional SDC, state, and mixed-states packages; in 1.2 and 2.1, replace
``[T]hird-[C]lass'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; revise other text as
follows:]
1.0 Use
1.1 Basic Standards
Mailers may prepare mailings without applying pressure-sensitive
package labels or facing slips to the top piece of packages by using a
specific optional endorsement line (OEL) above the address block or on
the address label on the top piece of a package as shown below. Use of
OELs on bundles is subject to the standards for the rate claimed.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Package type Optional endorsement line
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Firm................................... * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * FIRM 12345.
Carrier Route, (Nonprofit Standard * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Mail, Regular and Preferred * * * * * * * CAR-RT SORT**C-
Periodicals). 001.
Carrier Route (Basic, High Density, and
Saturation Enhanced Carrier Route
Standard Mail).
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * ECRLOT**C-001.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * ECRWSH**C-001.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * ECRWSS**C-001.
Carrier Route (Automation rate First- AUTOCR**C-001.
Class and automation rate Enhanced
Carrier Route and Regular Standard
Mail).
5-Digit................................ * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * 5-DIGIT 12345.
Optional City (Preferred Periodicals * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
only). * * * * * * * MIXED CITY 12345
(Use lowest 5-digit ZIP Code
assigned to that city.)
3-Digit................................ * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * 3-DIGIT 771.
SCF.................................... * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * SCF 750 (Use
correct 3-digit SCF code as
shown in L002, Column C.)
ADC.................................... * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * ALL FOR ADC
[nnn] (Mailer may insert 3-
digit ZIP Code prefix of ADC.)
Mixed ADC.............................. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * MIXED ADC [nnn]
(Mailer may insert 3-digit ZIP
Code prefix of ADC.)
AADC (Preferred Periodicals and * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Nonprofit Standard Mail only). * * * * * * * ALL FOR AADC
[nnn] (Mailer may insert 3-
digit ZIP Code prefix of
AADC.)
Mixed AADC (Preferred Periodicals and * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Nonprofit Standard Mail only). * * * * * * * MIXED AADC [nnn]
(Mailer may insert 3-digit ZIP
Code prefix of AADC.)
Working (Preferred Periodicals and * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Nonprofit Standard Mail only). * * * * * * * WORKING.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* * * * *
1.4 Rate Markings
At the mailer's option, rate markings required by the standards for
the rate claimed may be included in the OEL if the OEL appears on each
piece in the mailing and if it remains a single line with the basic
package label information (required by 1.1) at the right end (e.g., on
a carrier route package of Enhanced Carrier Route Saturation Standard
Mail: ****ECRWSS**C-001; on an automation Regular Standard Mail 3-digit
package: ****AUTO**3-DIGIT 750).
2.0 Format
* * * * *
2.6 ZIP Code
Except for carrier route packages, ADC, AADC, mixed ADC, mixed
AADC, and (as applicable) working residual packages, the optional
endorsement line must include the appropriate ZIP Code information.
ADC, AADC, mixed ADC, and mixed AADC OELs may include the 3-digit ZIP
Code prefix of the destination facility. Mixed ADC bundles
[[Page 10171]]
of bound printed matter must have facing slips as specified in M630.
Carrier route OELs must show carrier route information under M014.
M014 Carrier Route Information Lines
[Replace current 1.1 and 1.2 with new 1.0 as follows:]
1.0 Basic Information
Packages for individual carrier routes, rural routes, highway
contract routes, post office box sections, or general delivery units
may be prepared without facing slips if prepared with optional
endorsement lines under M013 or with carrier route information lines
under 2.0. These standards apply to automation Carrier Route rate
First-Class, carrier route and Level I/K Periodicals, automation Basic
Carrier Route rate and Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail, and
carrier route bound printed matter mailings. Carrier route information
lines may be on all pieces in a carrier route mailing, regardless of
presort level.
2.0 Format and Content
2.1 Route Information
Carrier route information consisting of a descriptive prefix (or
its abbreviation), plus a route number or numeric code, must be on the
top line of the address, either alone or with other information (e.g.,
addressee, account data). Alternatively, when permitted by standard,
the carrier route information may appear with the applicable carrier
route endorsement on the line above or two lines above the address if
the carrier route rate marking is in the address area (see Exhibit
2.1).
Address Formats With Carrier Route Information
Exhibit 2.1
**CARRIER ROUTE 011
RESIDENT, 1300 WATERFORD DR, DISTRICT HEIGHTS MD 20747
**C-011
RESIDENT, 1300 WATERFORD DR, ENDICOTT NY 13760
**RURAL ROUTE 005
RESIDENT, 1602 COUNTRY LN, BURKE VA 22015
**R 15005
POSTAL CUSTOMER
**C 127
CAR-RT SORT, RESIDENT, 2711 ORDWAY ST NW, WASHINGTON DC 20008
**C011
AUTOCR, RESIDENT, 1300 WATERFORD DR, DISTRICT HEIGHTS MD 20747
2.2 Descriptive Prefix
The descriptive prefix ``carrier route,'' ``rural route,''
``highway contract route,'' ``post office box section,'' or ``general
delivery unit'' must be spelled out or abbreviated as shown below.
Carrier Route--C
General Delivery Unit--G
Highway Contract Route--H
Post Office Box Section--B
Rural Route--R
2.3 Route Code
These conditions apply to route codes:
a. The one-character descriptive prefix in 2.2 must be followed by
a 3-digit route or post office box section number.
b. On Periodicals and Standard Mail pieces bearing a simplified
address that does not include a ZIP Code, the descriptive prefix in 2.2
must be followed by a route code that begins with the last two digits
of the 5-digit ZIP Code and is followed by the route code in 2.3a.
c. The descriptive prefix and route code required for simplified
address mailings in 2.3b may also be used on mailings of any class that
contain a ZIP Code in the address.
[Replace current 2.4, 2.5, and 2.6 with new 2.4 as follows:]
2.4 Other Contents
Other elements of the carrier route information line include:
a. The carrier route code must be preceded by at least two
asterisks (**) or other distinctive nonalphabetic or nonnumeric
characters.
b. At least 10 spaces must be reserved for the carrier route code
if other information is included on the top line.
c. The carrier route information line may also contain the basic
markings required by standard for the class of mail and rate claimed if
all the information remains on a single line with the basic information
(required by 2.1) at the right end (e.g., on a carrier route package of
Enhanced Carrier Route Saturation rate mail). No information other than
postal information appears on that line, and the carrier route
information line is the top line of the address:
* * * * * * * ECRWSS**C-001
POSTAL CUSTOMER
M020 Packages and Bundles
1.0 Basic Standards
[Move current 1.1, 1.4, 1.5, and 1.7 to M011; renumber current 1.2,
1.3, and 1.6 as 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3, respectively; revise renumbered 1.3,
and add new 1.4 and 1.5 as follows:]
* * * * *
1.3 Labeling
Unless excepted by standard, each package (other than carrier route
packages) must be identified with the pressure-sensitive package label
specified in the standards for the class and rate claimed. On letter-
size and card-size mail, the label must be placed in the lower left
corner of the address side of the top piece in the package. On flat-
size mail, the label must be placed on the address side of the top
piece in the package. An optional endorsement line may be used in lieu
of a pressure-sensitive label, subject to M013.
1.4 Palletization
Packages and bundles placed on pallets must be able to withstand
normal transit and handling without breakage or injury to USPS
employees. Heavy-gauge shrinkwrap over plastic banding, only
shrinkwrap, or only banding material is acceptable if the package or
bundle can stay together during normal processing. Packages and bundles
placed on BMC and mixed BMC pallets must be shrinkwrapped and
machinable on BMC parcel sorters; machinability is determined by the
USPS. If used, banding material must be applied at least once around
the length and once around the girth; wire and metal strapping are
prohibited.
1.5 Exception to Package Size
An individual package may be prepared with fewer than the minimum
number of pieces required by the standards for the rate claimed,
without loss of rate eligibility, under either of these conditions:
a. A greater number of pieces would exceed the maximum physical
size for a package and the total number of pieces for that presort
destination meets the minimum volume standard (e.g., 30 pieces are
available to meet a 10-piece minimum, but a package of 8 pieces is 6
inches thick).
b. The pieces constitute the ``last package'' for a presort
destination and previously prepared packages met the applicable minimum
volume standard (e.g., 505 pieces prepared in ten 50-piece packages and
one 5-piece package).
1.6 Exception to Package Preparation
In package-based mailings not entirely of card-size pieces, mail
need not be prepared in 5-digit packages when it will be placed in a
full 5-digit tray. Similarly, mail need not be prepared in other levels
of packages when it will be
[[Page 10172]]
placed in a full tray to the corresponding tray level, and none of the
mail in that tray would have been more finely sorted if packaged. For
example, the contents of a full ADC tray need not be packaged if, when
correctly sorted, it would have all been prepared in ADC packages to
the same destination; conversely, this exception would not apply if
some pieces would require preparation in 5-digit or 3-digit packages).
[Revise current 2.0 as follows:]
2.0 Additional Standards--Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard
Mail
2.1 Nonautomation Rate Mailings
Nonautomation rate mailings are subject to these additional
standards:
a. Maximum package thickness is 4 inches for letter-size walk-
sequence rate mail and 6 inches for other letter-size mail.
b. Packages of letter-size mail up to 1 inch thick must be secured
with appropriate banding applied around the girth. Thicker packages
must be secured with at least two bands, the first placed around the
length and the second around the girth.
c. When a simplified address is used, all pieces for the same post
office must be prepared in packages of 50 when possible. If packages of
other quantities are prepared, the actual number of pieces must be
shown on the facing slip that must be attached to show distribution
desired (e.g., rural route, city route, post office boxholder).
2.2 Automation Rate Mailings
Automation rate mailings are subject to these additional standards:
a. Maximum package thickness is 6 inches for letter-size mail.
b. Packages must be prepared for mailings consisting entirely of
card-size pieces, and for mail placed in residual AADC trays (package-
based mailings), mixed AADC trays, or overflow trays (tray-based
mailings).
c. Packages must not be prepared in full trays in tray-based
mailings of larger than card-size pieces except in residual AADC and
mixed AADC trays and as permitted by standard for oversize pieces.
d. Packages must be secured with rubber bands, elastic strapping,
flat plastic strapping, or string placed once around the girth (narrow
dimension) on packages up to 1 inch thick. Thicker packages must be
secured twice, with the first rubber band or elastic strap placed
around the length and the second around the girth. Additional ties may
be used if none lies along the outer 1 inch of any package edge.
e. Elastic strapping must have a minimum strength of 15 pounds and
a minimum of 150% elongation prior to breaking. Minimum tension, when
applied to the bundle, must be 50% breaking strength. Elastic strapping
may not be used unless approved by USPS Engineering. A mailer wanting
to have elastic strapping material tested for acceptability must
provide 25 packages (five each: 6 inches, 4 inches, 2 inches, 1 inch,
and 10 pieces) strapped with the tested material. The mailer must send
the material with a letter of request to USPS Engineering at least 6
weeks before the planned date of mailing. The mailer is notified in
writing by the USPS. If the USPS approves the material, that letter
(showing a unique number) serves as evidence that the material meets
USPS standards. A copy of the letter must be attached to each postage
statement provided for mailings that use the approved strapping
material. The mailer must be able to show when requested that the
strapping material on a mailing is the same as that approved.
f. Separator cards:
(1) May be used instead of packaging (except for card-size pieces)
to identify groups of pieces in full 3-digit and SCF trays in package-
based mailings.
(2) May be prepared from any paper or card stock.
(3) Must be at least 1/4 inch higher than the highest piece in the
mailing.
(4) Must be placed in front of the corresponding groups of mail.
g. Except in package-based mailings under M894 and M895, if groups
of pieces are identified by separator cards, the required pressure-
sensitive package label must be placed on the separator card or in the
lower left corner of the first piece behind it. Alternatively, the
descriptive words ``5-Digit'' or ``3-Digit,'' as appropriate for the
group, may appear on the separator card. If placed on separator cards,
the pressure-sensitive label or descriptive words must be at the top of
each card in a position easily read when the card is in a tray.
h. In three-tier package-based Barcoded rate mailings under M895,
pieces in AADC overflow trays must be secured into 5-digit packages in
the 5-digit tier, and 3-digit packages in the 3-digit tier. These
packages require no labeling.
i. In tray-based mailings, pieces in 5-digit overflow trays must be
secured into and labeled as 5-digit packages. Pieces in 3-digit
overflow trays and SCF overflow trays must be secured into and labeled
as 3-digit packages.
[Revise current 3.0 as follows:]
3.0 Additional Standards--First-Class Mail and Other Periodicals and
Standard Mail (A)
3.1 Cards and Letter-Size Pieces
Cards and letter-size pieces are subject to these specific
packaging standards:
a. The maximum thickness for packages of walk-sequence rate mail is
4 inches. The maximum thickness for other packages is 6 inches.
b. Mailings consisting entirely of card-size pieces must always be
prepared in packages.
c. Packages must be prepared in all less-than-full trays, for
nonupgradable Presorted First-Class, nonupgradable Regular Standard
Mail, and for nonautomation Regular Periodicals.
d. Separator cards may be used instead of packaging for carrier
route groups in full 5-digit carrier routes trays of nonautomation
Enhanced Carrier Route mail. Separator cards must be used instead of
packaging for carrier route groups in full trays of automation Carrier
Route First-Class and automation Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail.
Separator cards must be prepared from paper or card stock, must be at
least 1/4 inch higher than the highest piece in the mailing, and must
be placed in front of the corresponding groups of mail.
e. For mailings consisting entirely of card-size pieces and mail in
less-than-full trays, packages must be secured with rubber bands,
elastic strapping, flat plastic strapping, or string. (Elastic
strapping must have a minimum strength of 15 pounds and a minimum of
150% elongation prior to breaking. Minimum tension, when applied to the
bundle, must be 50% breaking strength. Elastic strapping may not be
used unless approved by USPS Engineering. If requested, the mailer must
be able to show such approval for the strapping material used for a
mailing.)
3.2 Flat-Size Pieces
Flat-size pieces are subject to these specific packaging standards:
a. Though not subject to a specific thickness limit, packages of
flats must be secure and stable, and are subject to specific weight
limits if palletized.
b. Flat-size pieces must always be prepared in packages unless
excepted by standard.
3.3 All Pieces
All pieces are subject to these standards:
a. For mail prepared with a simplified address, all pieces for the
same post office must be prepared in packages of 50 when possible. If
packages of other
[[Page 10173]]
quantities are prepared, the actual number of pieces must be shown on
the facing slip that must be attached to show distribution desired
(e.g., rural route, city route, post office boxholder).
b. Packages up to 1 inch thick must be secured with appropriate
banding placed once around the girth (narrow dimension). Thicker
packages must be secured with at least two bands, the first placed
around the length and the second around the girth so that the second
band crosses over the first. Additional ties may be used if none lies
along the outer 1 inch of any package edge.
* * * * *
[In 4.2b, replace ``Second-class'' with ``Periodicals.'']
[Remove current 5.0 and 6.0.]
M030 Container Preparation
M031 Labels
[In 1.7 and 4.13, replace ``second-class'' in the heading and text with
``Periodicals'' and replace ``2C'' with ``PER''; in 2.1a, replace
``First-, third-, and fourth-class mail'' with ``First-Class and
Standard Mail'' and replace ``second-class mail'' with ``Periodicals'';
in 2.1d, replace ``15/16 inch'' and ``31/32 inch'' with ``0.937 inch''
and ``0.980 inch,'' respectively; in 3.2a, replace ``First- and third-
class mail'' with ``First-Class and Standard Mail (A)'' and replace
``second-class mail'' with ``Periodicals''; in 4.2, replace ``second-
class mail'' with ``Periodicals'' and replace ``third- or fourth-class
mail'' with ``Standard Mail''; in 4.8, add ``(Preferred Periodicals
only)'' after ``optional city,'' replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals,'' and replace ``third-class'' with ``Standard Mail''; in
4.12c, replace ``third- and fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail''; in
4.14, replace ``second-class mail'' with ``Periodicals'' and ``2C''
with ``PER''; in 5.0 (chart), replace ``First- and third-class'' with
``First-Class and Standard Mail (A),'' replace ``second- or third-
class'' with ``Periodicals or Standard Mail (A),'' replace ``First-,
second-, and third-class'' with ``First-Class, Periodicals, and
Standard Mail (A),'' replace ``third-class'' with ``Standard Mail
(A),'' and replace ``[T]hird- and [F]ourth-[C]lass'' with ``Standard
Mail''; revise 1.1 as shown below; no other change in text.]
1.0 Sack and Tray Labels
1.1 Basic Standards
Only sack labels may be used for sacks, only tray labels for trays.
Machine-printed labels (available from the USPS) ensure legibility.
Legible hand-printed labels are acceptable. Illegible labels are not
acceptable.
* * * * *
M032 Barcoded Container Labels
1.0 Barcoded Tray Labels
1.1 Standards
Effective January 1, 1997, barcoded tray labels are required for
automation rate mailings of First-Class, Regular Periodicals, and
Regular and Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail letter-size pieces and
First-Class flat-size pieces. Barcoded tray labels may be used earlier
and may be used on any other mailing. Mailer-produced barcoded tray
labels must meet the standards below.
[In 1.2, replace ``First- and third-class mail'' with ``First-Class and
Standard Mail (A)'' and replace ``second-class mail'' with
``Periodicals.'']
* * * * *
1.3 Printed Text Lines
* * * * *
d. The human-readable printed text lines, unless otherwise noted,
must be printed in easily readable uppercase letters, with no run-on
letters, in the approximate locations shown in Exhibit 1.3a. The
printing must have an effective font density of no greater than 12
characters per inch; font density can be proportional.
* * * * *
f. The printed destination line must have a minimum character
height of 0.135 inch and a maximum character density of approximately
17 characters per inch. The corresponding ZIP Code must have a minimum
character height of 0.190 inch and a maximum character density of
approximately 10 characters per inch. The destination line must
accommodate at least 21 characters in the destination name and 5
characters in the corresponding ZIP Code. Only the correct 3-digit ZIP
Code prefix is to be printed when the required labeling for a tray
includes only a 3-digit ZIP Code prefix for Line 1.
g. The printed contents line must have a minimum character height
of 0.135 inch. The contents line must accommodate at least 21
characters.
h. The printed numeric barcode line must have a maximum character
height of 0.085 inch and must accommodate 10 characters.
i. The printed origin line must have a maximum character height of
not less than 0.085 inch and must accommodate at least 21 characters.
1.4 Zebra Code
The zebra code is a series of diagonal lines to the right of the
barcode that serves solely as a visual indication that a tray contains
barcoded mail. The code must not appear on tray labels for nonbarcoded
mail. The diagonal marks must each be from 0.25 to 0.375 inch high, and
from 0.125 to 0.25 inch wide, separated by blank spaces equal size in
size to the diagonal marks.
1.5 Barcode
* * * * *
b. It must be on the left side of the tray label. A clear space of
at least 0.05 inch must be maintained to the left and the right of the
barcode for its full height, and of at least 0.070 inch above and below
the barcode for its full width. The barcode must not extend more than
2.0 inches to the right from the left edge of the label. The top of the
barcode must be not less than 0.6 inch from the top of the label. The
bottom of the barcode must be no more than 1.5 inches from the top of
the label.
c. The width of the narrow bars and spaces (``X'' dimension) must
be between 0.012 inch and 0.016 inch and uniform within the barcode;
the optimum narrow bar width is 0.015 inch. The tolerance of the width
of all bars and spaces is 0.004 inch and is not cumulative.
The maximum irregularity in the edge straightness of any bar element is
0.3 times the ``X'' dimension.
d. The height of the barcode must be from 0.65 inch to 0.75 inch.
e. The wide-to-narrow ratio for barcodes must be between 3 to 1 and
2.3 to 1 and uniform within the barcode; the optimum ratio is 3 to 1.
f. When measured at 633 nanometers, bar reflectance must be less
than 30%; space reflectance must be more than 40%. The bar-to-space
reflectance difference must be more than 40 percentage points.
g. There must be a clear area (quiet zone) at each end of the
barcode not less than 10 times the ``X'' dimension. The clear area must
meet the space reflectance specification in 1.5f.
* * * * *
Exhibit 1.3c--Contents Identifier Codes
CIN/Mail Type
001 FCM
004 FCM FLTS
006 FCM FLTS NON-BC
008 FCM LTRS BC
013 FCM LTRS BC WKG
017 FCM PRESORT
018 FCM PRESORT RESID PKS
020 FCM WKG
021 FCM CR-RT
022 FCM CR- RTS
023 FCM MXD CR-RTS
024 FCM RURAL RT
025 FCM HWY CONTRACT RT
[[Page 10174]]
026 FCM BOX SECT
027 FCM GEN DEL UNIT
028 FCM FLTS BARCODED WKG
029 FCM LTRS 5D NON-OCR
030 FCM LTRS 3D NON-OCR
031 FCM LTRS ADC NON-OCR
032 FCM LTRS NON-OCR WKG
033 STD LTRS 5D NON-OCR
034 STD LTRS 3D NON-OCR
035 STD LTRS ADC NON-OCR
036 STD LTRS NON-OCR WKG
040 PRIORITY
041 PRIORITY LTRS
042 PRIORITY FLTS
043 PRIORITY PARCELS
044 PRIORITY DROP SHIP
058 FCM LTRS UPGR WKG
060 EXPRESS MAIL
061 EXPRESS DROP SHIP
063 FCM LTRS CR-RT BC
064 FCM LTRS CR-RTS BC
072 FCM LTRS 5D UPGR
077 FCM LTRS 3D UPGR
083 FCM LTRS AADC UPGR
084 FCM AADC LTRS BC
085 FCM LTRS BC SCHEME
086 FCM IRREG PARCELS
087 APO
088 FPO
089 MEXICO
090 CANADA
091 FOREIGN
092 APO/FPO
100 NEWS
101 NEWS CR-RT
102 NEWS RURAL RT
103 NEWS HWY CONTR RT
104 NEWS BOX SECT
105 NEWS GEN DEL UNIT
106 NEWS CR-RTS
107 NEWS MXD STATES
108 NEWS APO
109 NEWS FPO
111 NEWS LTRS CR-RT
112 NEWS LTRS CR-RT BC
113 NEWS LTRS CR-RTS
114 NEWS LTRS CR-RTS BC
116 NEWS APO/FPO
118 NEWS LTRS BC SCHEME
120 NEWS CITY
121 NEWS ZIP+4 PRESORT
122 NEWS LTRS BC
123 NEWS LTRS BC WKG
124 NEWS FLTS BC
125 NEWS FLTS BC WKG
126 NEWS FLTS CR-RT
127 NEWS FLTS CR-RT BC
128 NEWS FLTS CR-RTS
129 NEWS FLTS CR-RTS BC
130 NEWS CANADA
131 NEWS FOREIGN
132 NEWS MEXICO
200 PER
201 PER CR-RT
202 PER RURAL RT
203 PER HWY CONTR RT
204 PER BOX SECT
205 PER GEN DEL UNIT
206 PER CR-RTS
207 PER MXD STATES
208 PER APO
209 PER FPO
216 PER APO/FPO
218 PER LTRS BC SCHEME
220 PER CITY
221 PER ZIP+4 PRESORT
222 PER LTRS BC
223 PER LTRS BC WKG
224 PER FLTS BC
225 PER FLTS BC WKG
226 PER LTRS CR-RT
227 PER LTRS CR-RT BC
228 PER LTRS CR-RTS
229 PER LTRS CR-RTS BC
230 PER CANADA
231 PER FOREIGN
232 PER MEXICO
233 PER FLTS CR-RT
234 PER FLTS CR-RT BC
235 PER FLTS CR-RTS
236 PER FLTS CR-RTS BC
300 STD FLTS
301 STD FLTS CR-RT
302 STD FLTS RR
303 STD FLTS HC
304 STD FLTS BOX SECT
305 STD FLTS GEN DEL
306 STD FLTS MXD CR-RTS
307 STD FLTS MXD 5-DG PKS
308 STD FLTS MXD STATES
312 STD IRREG
313 STD MACH AND IRREG
314 STD MACH
316 STD FLTS APO/FPO
317 STD FLTS CR-RTS
318 STD FLTS APO
319 STD FLTS FPO
320 STD FLTS CITY
321 STD FLTS IRREG CITY
324 STD FLTS BC
325 STD FLTS BC WKG
329 STD FLTS MEXICO
330 STD FLTS CANADA
331 STD FLTS FOREIGN
332 STD FLTS CR-RT BC
333 STD FLTS CR-RTS BC
400 STD LTRS
401 STD LTRS CR-RT
402 STD LTRS RR
403 STD LTRS HC
404 STD LTRS BOX SECT
405 STD LTRS GEN DEL
406 STD LTRS MXD CR-RTS
407 STD LTRS MXD 5-DG PKS
408 STD LTRS MXD STATES
413 STD LTRS 5D UPGR
414 STD LTRS 3D UPGR
415 STD LTRS AADC UPGR
416 STD LTRS APO/FPO
417 STD LTRS CR-RTS
418 STD LTRS APO
419 STD LTRS FPO
420 STD LTRS CITY
421 STD ZIP+4 PRESORT
422 STD LTRS BC
423 STD LTRS BC WKG
424 STD LTRS UPGR WKG
428 STD LTRS BC SCHEME
429 STD LTRS MEXICO
430 STD LTRS CANADA
431 STD LTRS FOREIGN
432 STD LTRS CR-RT BC
433 STD LTRS CR-RTS BC
440 STD IRREG PARCELS
529 STD MACH MEXICO
530 STD MACH CANADA
531 STD MACH FOREIGN
600 STD IRREG
601 STD IRREG CR-RT
602 STD IRREG CR-RTS
603 STD IRREG MXD STATES
615 STD IRREG MEXICO
620 STD FLTS CITY
621 STD IRREG CITY
630 STD IRREG CANADA
631 STD IRREG FOREIGN
2.0 Barcoded Sack Labels
[Replace current 2.1 and 2.2 with new 2.1 as follows:]
2.1 Standards
Effective January 1, 1997, barcoded sack labels meeting the
standards in this section are required for automation rate Regular
Periodicals and Standard Mail flat-size pieces prepared in sacks. These
sack labels may be used earlier and may be used for other Periodicals
and Standard Mail prepared in sacks.
[Renumber current 2.3, 2.4, and 2.5 as 2.2, 2.3, and 2.4, respectively;
in renumbered 2.4e, replace the reference ``2.5d'' with ``2.4d''; in
renumbered 2.4f, replace ``200 (2C)'' with ``200 (PER).'']
* * * * *
2.2 Specifications
a. Sack labels for Standard Mail must be printed on white or manila
label stock; for Periodicals, on pink stock.
b. The paper stock must be 70 pounds or heavier.
c. Each label must be from 0.937 inch to 0.980 inch high.
d. Each label must be from 3.250 inches to 3.374 inch long.
2.3 Text Lines
* * * * *
c. The human-readable printed text lines, unless otherwise noted,
must be printed in easily readable uppercase letters, with no run-on
letters, in the approximate locations shown in Exhibit 1.3a. The
printing must have an effective font density of no greater than 15
characters per inch; font density can be proportional. When the
information cannot be shortened by acceptable postal abbreviations, it
may be printed in a compressed font. At least 22 human-readable
characters for the destination must fit on the label without
interfering with the quiet zone. The minimum acceptable height for the
destinating ZIP Code is 0.111 inch. The
[[Page 10175]]
minimum acceptable character height for all other information for Lines
1, 2, and 3 is 0.083 inch.
2.4 Barcode
* * * * *
c. The width of the narrow bars and spaces (``X'' dimension) must
be between 0.012 inch and 0.016 inch and uniform within the barcode;
the optimum narrow bar size is 0.015 inch. The tolerance of the width
of all bars and spaces is 0.004 inch and is not cumulative.
The maximum irregularity in the edge straightness of any bar element is
0.3 times the ``X'' dimension. The wide-to-narrow ratio must be between
3 to 1 and 2.3 to 1 and uniform within the barcode; the optimum ratio
is 3 to 1. The height of the barcode must be at least 0.700 inch.
M033 Sacks and Trays
[Replace current 1.0 with new 1.0 as follows:]
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 Total Weight
The total weight of any sack (mail plus sack tare) must not exceed
70 pounds. The total weight of any MM tray (mail plus tray tare) must
not exceed 20 pounds; for an EMM tray, 35 pounds.
1.2 Equipment
Palletization of trays or sacks is subject to M040. Other mailings
must be prepared in the container appropriate for the processing
category and rate of the mail:
a. First-Class, Regular Periodicals, and Regular and Enhanced
Carrier Route Standard Mail (A) letter-size pieces (including cards)
must be prepared in USPS letter trays with sleeves. Subject to
availability, 1-foot or 2-foot regular (MM) or 2-foot extended (EMM)
letter trays must be used as appropriate for the size and volume of
pieces. Letter trays may be used for other letter-size mail, subject to
the applicable preparation standards.
b. First-Class flat-size pieces must be prepared in USPS flat trays
with lids.
c. First-Class parcels weighing less than 11 ounces must be
prepared in green USPS sacks.
d. Priority Mail must be prepared in orange USPS sacks.
e. Periodicals flat-size pieces, machinable and irregular parcels,
and letter-size pieces not required to be placed in trays must be
prepared in brown USPS sacks.
f. Standard Mail flat-size pieces, machinable and irregular parcels
must be prepared in white canvas USPS sacks. Nonprofit Standard Mail
letter-size pieces may be prepared in white canvas USPS sacks or trays
as permitted by standard.
1.3 Tray Sizes
These standard tray sizes apply to all mail preparation standards:
a. Letter trays: Inside bottom length:
(1) 2-foot MM and EMM trays: 21 inches.
(2) 1-foot trays: 10-1/2 inches.
b. Flat trays:
(1) Inside bottom dimensions: 14-3/4 inches long by 10-3/4 inches
wide.
(2) Height: 8 inches to bottom of handhold, 11-1/4 inches to top of
tray.
1.4 Presort
Presort, presort levels, and standard preparation terms are defined
in M011, except for Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail,
which are covered in 3.0 and 4.0.
1.5 Sleeving and Strapping
Each letter tray must be sleeved, and each flat tray must be
secured with a lid, using USPS-provided sleeves or lids. Except under
1.6, each letter tray must also be secured with a plastic strap placed
tightly around the length of the tray without crushing the tray or
sleeve. Flat trays must be secured by two straps placed tightly around
the width of the tray (i.e., the shorter dimension).
1.6 Exception
Letter trays do not require strapping if placed on 5-digit, 3-
digit, and SCF pallets secured with stretchwrap, or if they originate
and destinate in the same SCF (mail processing plant) service area and
the processing and distribution manager has given the mailer a written
waiver.
1.7 Origin SCF/Plant Sacks and Trays
Except for Nonprofit Standard and Preferred Periodicals mailings,
after all required carrier route, 5-digit, and 3-digit trays are
prepared, a 3-digit sack/tray must be prepared to contain any remaining
mail for each 3-digit area served by the SCF (mail processing plant)
serving the post office where the mail is verified, and may be prepared
for each 3-digit area served by the SCF/plant where mail is entered (if
that is different from the SCF/plant serving where the mail is
verified, e.g., a PVDS deposit site). In all cases, only one less-than-
full sack/tray may be prepared for each 3-digit area.
[Renumber current 2.0 and 3.0 as 3.0 and 4.0, respectively, and revise
headings and text as shown below. Add new 2.0 as follows:]
2.0 First-Class, Regular Periodicals, and Regular and Enhanced Carrier
Route Standard Mail
2.1 Letter Tray Preparation
Pieces must be prepared to result in the fewest practical number of
packages (where required) and trays to contain the mail sorted to a
destination. Letter tray preparation uses terms defined in M011 and is
subject to these further standards:
a. Pieces must be ``faced'' (with all addresses in the same
direction) and placed in trays to maintain their orientation.
b. Regardless of minimum volumes that may be required per tray,
each tray prepared must be filled before filling of the next tray is
begun, with the contents in multiple trays relatively balanced. A tray
with less mail may be prepared only if permitted by the standards in
FR Doc. 96-5500 Classification Reform; Implementation Standards
2.1c, 2.1d, and 2.1e and for the rate claimed. Subject to availability,
2-foot trays must be used whenever available, except that 1-foot trays
must be used for lesser volume or as less-than-full trays.
c. Subject to 2.1e and the standards for the rate claimed, pieces
left over after filling one or more trays for a presort destination are
packaged and placed in a less-than-full ``overflow'' tray. Where
overflow trays are permitted, they are required for required presort
levels and optional for optional levels. Only one overflow tray per
destination may be prepared in the same mailing.
d. Where standards do not limit preparation to full trays, or where
no minimum volume per tray is required, pieces may be packaged and
placed in a less-than-full tray even though a full tray was not
previously prepared for that destination. In all circumstances, only
one less-than-full tray per destination may be prepared in the same
mailing.
e. For automation rate and nonautomation rate upgradable mailings
where packaging is not required, mail remaining after filling all
possible 2-foot trays must be prepared in a full 1-foot tray before
being packaged for placement in a less-than-full 1-foot tray (if a
less-than-full tray is permitted by the standards for the rate
claimed). For other mailings where packaging is required, mail
remaining after filling all possible 2-foot trays must be prepared in a
less-than-full 2-foot tray if it exceeds the capacity of a 1-foot tray.
f. Subject to availability, standard MM trays must be used for all
letter-size mail, except that extended MM (EMM) trays must be used
when available for letter-size mail more than 4-1/2 inches high or 10-
1/2 inches long. When EMM
[[Page 10176]]
trays are not available, such pieces must be placed in MM trays, angled
back and/or placed upright perpendicular to the length of the tray in
row(s) to preserve their orientation.
g. Each tray must bear the correct tray label.
h. Each tray must be sleeved and strapped under 1.5 and 1.6.
i. As a general exception, pieces do not have to be grouped by 3-
digit ZIP Code prefix in AADC trays, or by AADC in mixed AADC trays if
the mailing is prepared using an MLOCR and standardized documentation
is submitted.
2.2 Flat Tray Preparation (First-Class Mail Only)
All flat tray preparation is subject to these standards:
a. Addresses on all pieces must face upward in the same direction
b. Pieces must be placed in trays to maintain their orientation.
Once the required minimum volume is reached to allow or require
preparation of a tray, additional pieces must be placed in the same
tray up to its capacity to minimize the number of trays used. When
possible, pieces must be placed in two stacks to optimize tray use, but
mail must not overfill the tray to inhibit adequate closure or covering
of the contents. The total weight of a tray and its contents must not
exceed 70 pounds.
c. Each tray must bear the correct tray label.
d. Each tray must be covered and strapped under 1.5 and 1.6.
2.3 Sack Preparation
All sack preparation is subject to these standards:
a. Each sack must bear the correct sack label.
b. The weight of a sack and its contents must not exceed 70 pounds.
3.0 Nonautomation Rate Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard
Mail
[Insert text of current 2.0 and renumber accordingly. In renumbered
3.1a, replace the reference ``2.1b'' with ``3.1b.'']
4.0 Automation Rate Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail
[Insert text of current 3.0 and renumber accordingly. In renumbered
4.1a, replace the reference ``3.4 and 3.5'' with ``4.4 and 4.5''; in
renumbered 4.3, replace the reference ``3.1b'' with ``4.1b''; in
renumbered 4.5, replace the reference ``3.4'' with ``4.4''; in
renumbered 4.5c, replace the reference ``3.5b'' with ``4.5b''; and in
renumbered 4.6, replace the reference ``3.7'' with ``4.7.'']
M040 Palletization
[Replace current M041, M042, M043, M044, and M048 with new M041 and
M045, based on a recently concluded separate rulemaking.]
M041 General Pallet Standards
1.0 Physical Characteristics
1.1 Standards
All pallets presented to the USPS, whether USPS- or mailer-
provided, must meet the standards in 1.2, 1.3, and 1.4. Mail on such
pallets must meet the standards for the class and rate claimed.
1.2 Construction
Pallets must be made of high-quality material that can hold loads
equal to a gross weight of 2,200 pounds. Pallets must measure 48 by 40
inches and must allow for four-way entry by forklift trucks and two-way
entry by pallet jacks.
1.3 Securing
Except for pallet boxes under 4.3, loaded pallets of mail must be
secured with at least two straps or bands, wrapped with stretchable or
shrinkable plastic strong enough to retain the integrity of the pallets
during transportation and handling, or both.
1.4 Nonconforming Mailers
The USPS informs mailers or their agents who present palletized
mailings, including plant-verified drop shipment (PVDS), when their
pallets fail to meet basic pallet integrity and safety standards. Once
a mailer is notified and allowed to make changes to improve load
integrity, if the mailer's methods, or those of the mailer's agent, do
not work, the mailer is considered nonconforming. A nonconforming
mailer must meet the specifications for nonconforming mailers for top-
cap use, stacking of pallets, pallet box construction, and maximum
height/tiers of trays in 2.0 through 5.0, respectively. Mailers will be
suspended from the pallet program if their pallets continue to fail to
meet the minimum load integrity levels after being notified and allowed
to make changes accordingly.
2.0 Top Caps
2.1 Use
Top caps are used as follows:
a. Except under 2.1b and 2.1c, all pallets of sacks, letter mail
trays, parcels, packages or bundles of mail, or pallet boxes must be
top-capped if the pallets are double- or triple-stacked when presented
to the USPS for acceptance.
b. The top pallet need not be top-capped if the strapping or
banding securing the stacked pallets together neither damages the mail
on the top pallet nor allows the stack to shift.
c. Lower pallet(s) containing either parcels or packages or bundles
of mail need not be top-capped if the top surface of each pallet load
provides a sturdy, flat surface, parallel to the pallet base, that
allows for safe and efficient stacking of pallets placed on top and
prevents sliding of the top pallet(s), damage to the loaded mail, or
crushing of the load.
2.2 Construction
Any material may be used as a top cap if it provides a flat, level
surface horizontal to the base pallet, protects the integrity of the
mail below it while supporting a loaded pallet above, and allows for
easy entry of a forklift to remove the upper pallet(s). Flimsy paper or
fiberboard (e.g., the ends of paper rolls) or similar material is
inadequate and may not be used as a top cap.
2.3 Securing
A top cap must be secured to the pallet horizontal to the plane of
the base pallet, with either stretchwrap or at least two crossed straps
or bands, so that the cap stays in place to protect the mail and
maintain the integrity of the pallet load.
2.4 Nonconforming Mailers
Nonconforming mailers (see 1.4) must use top caps on all pallets of
sacks, letter mail trays, parcels, or packages or bundles of mail,
regardless of weight, or on pallets containing pallet boxes no more
than 60 inches high. Top caps must be approximately 48 by 40 inches and
meet one of these construction standards:
a. Five-wood boards, with uniform edges and nine-leg pallet contact
for stacking.
b. Fiberboard box-end style, with a minimum 3-inch side and wall
material of at least double-wall corrugated fiberboard C- and/or B-
flute.
c. Fiberboard honeycomb covered on both sides, with heavy
linerboard at least \1/2\ inch thick.
d. Corrugated fiberboard C-flute sheet covering the entire top of
the load, with standard pallet solid fiberboard corner edge protectors.
3.0 Stacking Pallets
3.1 Double- or Triple-Stacking
Pallets may be double- or triple-stacked if:
[[Page 10177]]
a. The combined gross weight of the stacked pallets (pallets, top
caps, and mail) does not exceed 2,200 pounds.
b. The heaviest pallet is on the bottom and the lightest is on the
top.
c. The pallets are secured with at least two straps or bands of
appropriate material to maintain their integrity during transportation
and handling. Pallets may not be secured together with stretchable or
shrinkable plastic.
d. Each pallet is top-capped under 2.0.
e. The combined height of the stacked pallets and their loads does
not exceed 84 inches.
3.2 Nonconforming Mailers
Nonconforming mailers (see 1.4) who stack pallets are subject to
the conditions in 3.1 with these additional restrictions:
a. The combined height of any stacked pallets may not exceed 77
inches; and
b. Triple-stacking is allowed only for pallets of parcels.
4.0 Pallet Boxes
4.1 Use
Mailers may use pallet boxes constructed of single-, double-, or
triple-wall corrugated fiberboard placed on pallets to hold sacks or
parcels prepared under M045. (Single-wall corrugated fiberboard may be
used only for light loads (such as lightweight parcels) that do not
require transportation by the USPS beyond the entry office.) Pallet
boxes must protect the mail and maintain the integrity of the pallet
loads throughout transportation, handling, and processing. The base of
the boxes must measure approximately 40 by 48 inches.
4.2 Height
The combined height of the pallet, pallet box, and mail may not
exceed 77 inches. The contents of the box may not extend above the top
rim of the box.
4.3 Securing
Pallet boxes must be secured to the pallet with strapping, banding,
stretchable plastic, shrinkwrap, or other material that ensures that
the pallet can be safely unloaded from vehicles, transported, and
processed as a single unit to the point where the contents are
distributed with the load intact if:
a. The pallet and its contents are transported by the USPS from the
office where the mail is accepted to another postal facility where the
contents are distributed.
b. The weight of the mail in the box is not sufficient to hold the
box in place on the pallet during transportation and processing.
4.4 Nonconforming Mailers
Nonconforming mailers (see 1.4) may use pallet boxes only if the
boxes are constructed of triple-wall corrugated fiberboard (C- and/or
B-flute material) with a maximum height of 77 inches.
5.0 Preparation
5.1 Presort
Pallet preparation and pallet sortation are subject to the specific
standards in M045. Pallet sortation is intended to presort the
palletized portion of a mailing to at least the finest extent required
for the corresponding class of mail and method of preparation.
Generally, pallet sortation is sequential from the lowest (finest)
level to the highest and must be completed at each required level
before the next optional or required level is prepared. As applicable,
standard preparation terms and presort levels for pallets are defined
in M011 and M045. Mailers must prepare all required levels of pallets
before any working pallet is prepared for a mailing or job.
5.2 Required Preparation
A pallet must be prepared to a required sortation level when there
are 500 pounds of Periodicals or Standard Mail packages, sacks, or
parcels or six layers of Periodicals or Standard Mail (A) letter trays.
Up to 10 percent of the total pallets in any mailing or job may be
working pallets labeled to the BMC (Standard Mail) or ADC (Periodicals)
serving the post office where mailings are accepted into the
mailstream. The processing and distribution manager of that facility
may issue a written authorization to the mailer to label working
pallets to the post office or processing and distribution center
serving the post office where mailings are entered. Working pallets
contain all mail remaining after required and optional pallets are
prepared.
5.3 Minimum Load
In a single mailing, the minimum load per pallet is 250 pounds of
Periodicals or Standard Mail packages, parcels, and sacks (or three
tiers/layers of letter trays of Periodicals or Standard Mail (A)),
except that the processing and distribution manager of the facility
where a mailing is entered may issue a written authorization to the
mailer allowing preparation of 5-digit, 3-digit, or SCF pallets
containing less volume if the mail on those pallets is for that
facility's service area. In a mailing or mailing job presented for
acceptance at a single postal facility, one overflow pallet may be
prepared containing less than 250 pounds or 3 tiers/layers of letter
trays if the mail is for the service area of the entry facility and the
pallet is properly labeled under 4.0 based on its contents. No special
authorization is required.
5.4 Maximum Load
The maximum weight (mail and pallet) is 2,200 pounds. The maximum
height of a single pallet (mail and pallet) is 77 inches for packages,
bundles, parcels, sacks, or pallet boxes or 12 layers of letter trays.
5.5 Mail on Pallets
Pieces in trays, packages, bundles, and sacks must be prepared
under the standards for the class of mail and rate claimed. When two or
more Periodicals or Standard Mail (A) mailings are placed together on
pallets, the mailer must maintain records for each mailing as required
by standard. Automation rate and upgradable letter-size pieces must be
placed on separate 5-digit pallets; neither may be placed on the same
5-digit pallet as pieces at other rates. Trays must always be placed on
pallets ``right-side-up'' with heavier, fuller trays at the bottom of
the load.
5.6 Sacked Mail
Mail that is not palletized must be prepared under the standards
for the rate claimed. For Periodicals, mailers must separately sack
packages of each publication that are not palletized under M045 or that
are excluded from palletization. Trays that are not palletized must be
bedloaded. Sacks (including sacks of packages not placed on pallets)
containing packages remaining after all pallets are prepared may be
presented with the palletized mail (and reported on the same postage
statement) if separated from the palletized portion of the mailing.
5.7 Nonconforming Mailers
For nonconforming mailers (see 1.4) of letter-size mail in trays,
the combined height of a pallet and its load may not exceed six layers
of MM or EMM letter trays.
6.0 Copalletized, Combined, or Mixed-Rate Level Mailings
6.1 General
Palletized mailings (including combined, copalletized, and mixed
rate level mailings) must be prepared under the standards for the class
of mail, subject to specific authorization by the RCSC serving the
mailing post office when required.
6.2 Application
The mailer (or publisher or agent) must submit a written request to
the
[[Page 10178]]
RCSC serving the mailing post office to present the types of pallets
described in 6.1. A separate request is required for each type of
pallet at each location, but multiple, concurrent applications are
acceptable. A mailer who cannot meet the minimum palletization
standards without copalletizing, combining, or commingling mixed rate
mailings might still qualify if the total copalletized, combined, or
commingled mailing meets minimum pallet standards. The request must be
received at least 30 days before the first mailing and include the
names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the mail owner and of the
firm or person preparing the mail; a description of the mailing (e.g.,
size, weight, class, rate, volume, mailing frequency, and postage
payment method); the type of authorization requested; and a sample of
the applicable documentation under M045.
6.3 Periodicals Publications
To combine more than one Periodicals publication on pallets, the
mailer must merge and presort copies of all the publications into
common packages to achieve the finest presort level for the combined
mailing. To copalletize different Periodicals flat-size publications,
the mailer must consolidate on pallets all independently sorted
packages for each publication to achieve the finest presort level for
the mailing. Both combining and copalletizing publications must be
supported by the documentation required in M045. Preferred Periodicals
may not be combined with Regular Periodicals.
6.4 Standard Mail (A)
To combine mixed rate level Nonprofit Standard Mail on pallets
(i.e., 3/5 and Carrier Route), the mailer must be an authorized plant
load mailer or an authorized plant-verified drop shipment (PVDS) mailer
with on-site postal verification; must attach to the written request to
the RCSC either a copy of an approved Form 3815 showing the mailer's
authority to plant load or the USPS authorization for PVDS with on-site
verification, as applicable; and must consolidate on pallets all
independently prepared packages to achieve the finest presort level for
the mailing. To copalletize different Standard Mail (A) flat-size
mailings, the mailer must consolidate on pallets all independently
sorted packages from each mailing to achieve the finest presort level
for the mailing, and must present computer-generated listings at the
time of mailing that include a summary list consolidating the
copalletized multiple mailings and a list of the contents of each
pallet by ZIP Code and presort level.
6.5 Cancellation
An authorization may be canceled by the RCSC if the mailer does not
meet the standards for pallets or the rates claimed or the mailer does
not submit information on future mailings as requested by the RCSC.
Mailers may appeal canceled authorizations under G020.
M045 Preparation of Palletized Mailings
1.0 Basic Uses
Mailers may palletize these types of mail:
a. Letter-size mail in trays.
b. Packages or bundles of nonletter-size mail not prepared in
sacks.
c. Packages or parcels in sacks.
d. Machinable or irregular parcels.
e. Copalletized multiple flat-size mailings, subject to M041.
f. Combined mailings of machinable parcels (Standard Mail (A) and
(B)), subject to M073.
g. Two or more Periodicals publications combined or copalletized,
subject to M041.
h. Combined mailings of Nonprofit Standard Mail mixed rate levels,
subject to M041.
i. Commingled zone-rated Standard Mail, subject to M630.
2.0 Packages
2.1 Standards
Package preparation must meet the applicable general standards in
M010, M020, and M030, except as noted below. The palletized portion of
a mailing may not include packages sorted to foreign destinations.
2.2 Size--Periodicals
Package size: Six-piece minimum, 20-pound maximum, except that:
a. Firm packages may contain as few as two copies of a publication
and do not have to be consolidated into bundles with other packages to
the same 5-digit destination. A firm ``package'' may be one piece for
presort standards (see M210 and M290).
b. All pieces for the same presort destination must be in one
package if they weigh less than 10 pounds. Otherwise, packages must
weigh from 10 to 20 pounds each.
c. The last package to a presort destination may contain less than
10 pounds of mail.
d. All palletized packages of copalletized publications must
contain at least six pieces.
2.3 Size--Standard Mail (A)
Package size: 10-piece minimum, 20-pound maximum, except that:
a. All pieces for the same presort destination must be in one
package if they weigh less than 10 pounds. Otherwise, packages must
weigh from 10 to 20 pounds each.
b. The last package to a presort destination may contain less than
10 pounds of mail.
2.4 Size--Standard Mail (B)
Package size: 10-pound or 1,000-cubic-inch minimum (whichever
occurs first), 40-pound maximum, except that:
a. All pieces for a presort destination must be in one package if
they weigh less than 10 pounds. Otherwise, packages must weigh from 10
to 40 pounds each.
b. The last package to a presort destination may contain less than
10 pounds of mail.
c. Packages must be prepared to carrier route sortations if the
carrier route bulk bound printed matter rate is claimed. Mail at other
rates must be sorted to 5-digit, 3-digit, ADC, BMC, and mixed ADC
destinations, as appropriate.
d. Smaller size packages of any copies remaining may be prepared to
the levels noted in 2.4c after all required volume or larger packages
are prepared. These smaller packages must be properly labeled and
placed on an appropriate pallet level.
2.5 Labels
When pressure-sensitive labels are used, a red Label D must appear
on 5-digit packages if the copies in those packages show carrier route
information.
2.6 Residual
After all required and optional packages are prepared, remaining
copies may be made into a residual package, properly labeled and placed
on an appropriate pallet level.
3.0 Optional Bundles--Periodicals and Standard Mail (A)
3.1 Standards
Bundle preparation must meet the applicable general standards in
M010, M020, and M030, except as noted below. The palletized portion of
a mailing may not include bundles sorted to foreign destinations.
3.2 Size
Bundle size: Two-package minimum, 20-pound maximum. Exception: For
copalletized publications or products, the maximum is 40 pounds.
[[Page 10179]]
3.3 Sortation
Sortation is in the same sequence as sacks under 4.1.
3.4 Labeling
Labeling of bundles is not required except for:
a. Bundles containing packages for sortation levels finer than the
bundle destination. (These bundles must have a facing slip with Lines 1
and 2 prepared as required for sacks.)
b. Bundles of Standard Mail (A) (other than carrier route and 5-
digit bundles) placed on BMC pallets and containing packages for
sortation levels finer than the bundle destination. These bundles must
have a facing slip with Lines 1 and 2 prepared as required for sacks.
The facing slip must completely cover the address and package label on
the top piece in the bundle.)
4.0 Pallet Presort and Labeling
4.1 Packages, Bundles, Sacks, or Trays
Preparation sequence and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required for packages, bundles, and sacks; optional for
trays; use destination of contents for Line 1.
b. 3-digit: optional; use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. SCF: required; use L002, Column C, for Line 1.
d. As appropriate:
(1) Periodicals: ADC: required; use L004 for Line 1.
(2) Standard Mail: As appropriate, (a) Destination ASF: allowed and
required only if DBMC rate is claimed for mail deposited at ASF; use
L602 for Line 1; or (b) Destination BMC: required; use L601 (L602 if
DBMC rate claimed) for Line 1. (Sort ADC packages, trays, or sacks, or
AADC trays to ASF/BMC pallets based on ZIP Code of the package
destination or shown on Line 1 of the tray or sack label.)
e. As appropriate:
(1) Periodicals: mixed ADC: optional; use L004 for Line 1, based on
ZIP Code of entry office (in ``Destination ZIP Codes'' column) (label
to plant serving entry post office if authorized by processing and
distribution manager).
(2) Standard Mail: mixed BMC: optional; use L601 for Line 1, based
on ZIP Code of entry office (in ``Destination ZIP Codes'' column)
(label to plant serving entry post office if authorized by processing
and distribution manager).
4.2 Machinable Parcels--Standard Mail
Preparation sequence and labeling:
a. 5-digit: optional, but required for Standard Mail (A) 3/5 rate
and Standard Mail (B) only; use destination of parcels for Line 1.
b. ASF: allowed and required only if DBMC rate is claimed for mail
deposited at ASF; use L602 for Line 1.
c. Destination BMC: required; use L601 (L602 if DBMC rate claimed)
for Line 1.
d. Mixed BMC: optional; use L601 for Line 1, based on ZIP Code of
entry office (in ``Destination ZIP Codes'' column).
4.3 Presorted Special Standard Mail
Preparation sequence and labeling:
a. 5-digit: (5-digit rate only); required; use destination of
pieces or packages for Line 1.
b. Destination BMC: (BMC rate only); required; use L601 for Line 1.
4.4 Line 2
Line 2, class of mail (shown below, as appropriate), processing
category and mail type (e.g., MACH, LTRS BC), and any processing code
required by the applicable labeling list under 4.1, 4.2, and 4.3:
a. Periodicals: PER or NEWS, as appropriate.
b. Standard Mail (A): STD 3C.
c. Standard Mail (B): STD 4C.
5.0 Pallets of Packages, Bundles, and Trays of Letter-Size Mail
5.1 Periodicals
When two or more letter-size publications are part of a combined
mailing, the mailer must keep records for each mailing (publication) as
required by standard. Automation rate and nonautomation rate pieces
must be placed on separate 5-digit pallets. Preferred Periodicals may
be combined with Regular Periodicals only as permitted by standard.
Pieces claimed at destination delivery unit (DDU) rates do not require
separation from pieces claimed at other rates.
5.2 Standard Mail (A)
Nonprofit mail may be included in the same mailing or palletized on
the same pallet as other Standard Mail (A) only as permitted by
standard. Automation rate and upgradable letter-size pieces must be
placed on separate 5-digit pallets; neither may be placed on the same
5-digit pallet as pieces at other rates. Pieces claimed at destination
delivery unit (DDU) rates do not require separation from pieces claimed
at other rates.
5.3 BMC Pallets
Packages and bundles placed on BMC pallets must be machinable on
BMC parcel sorting equipment. Line 2 on pallet labels must reflect the
processing category of the pieces. A BMC pallet may include pieces that
are eligible for the DBMC rate and others that are ineligible if the
mailer provides documentation showing the pieces that qualify for the
DBMC rate.
5.4 Commingled Zones
Pieces of Standard Mail (B) for different zones may be commingled
only under M630.
5.5 Securing Trays
Trays must be sleeved and strapped under M033, except that
strapping is not required for trays on 5-digit, 3-digit, and SCF
pallets or for trays that originate and destinate in the same SCF
service area.
6.0 Pallets of Sacks
All sacks remaining after all pallets are prepared may be presented
with the palletized mailing (on the same postage statement) if the
sacks are segregated from the palletized portion of the mailing.
7.0 Pallets of Copalletized Periodicals or Standard Mail (A) Flat-Size
Pieces
7.1 Basic Standards
Copalletized flat-size mailings must meet the standards in M041 and
in 1.0 through 5.0, and those below. Any combination of automation rate
mailings and nonautomation rate mailings is subject to the restrictions
in 5.0. Packages in a copalletized mailing qualify for the appropriate
presort level rate, regardless of the pallet level on which they are
placed.
7.2 Periodicals
Additional standards apply to Periodicals:
a. Preferred Periodicals may be combined with Regular Periodicals
only as permitted by standard.
b. Documentation meeting the basic standard in P012 must be
provided with each mailing. Before copalletizing, the mailer must
obtain the written approval of the RCSC manager. Approval is based on
the mailer's demonstrated ability to provide documentation meeting
these standards:
(1) Documentation by package and by publication and edition showing
the number of pieces and copies in each package and the per piece
presort rate claimed for each piece in each package, or a listing by
pallet showing (by presort level (rate) and destination) the number of
copies and pieces of each publication and edition. For large volume
mailing jobs reported on a single listing, the mailer may provide
abbreviated documentation that shows full package detail for the first
20 pallets and for every twentieth pallet thereafter if the mailer
maintains full package detail (by publication and edition code and
rate)
[[Page 10180]]
for the entire mailing job for 90 days and can provide it to the USPS
upon request within 3 working days. Abbreviated documentation must
include the rate summary by publication and edition for each pallet,
including those for which full detail package listings are not
reported.
(2) Documentation showing the number of copies and pieces claimed
at the intra-SCF rate.
(3) Documentation showing that packages of all publications and
editions are sorted to the appropriate finest pallet level in the
mailing.
(4) Documentation showing that 5-digit, 3-digit, SCF, and ADC
pallets are prepared when the applicable minimum volume is developed in
the copalletized mailing for these destinations.
(5) A listing showing the destination of pallets in the
copalletized mailing.
(6) If the sacked portion of the mailing is presented with the
copalletized portion, a report by sack showing the number of pieces
(and copies) of each publication or edition at each presort level
(rate).
7.3 Standard Mail (A)
Additional standards apply to Standard Mail (A):
a. Nonprofit Standard mailings may be copalletized with one another
but not with mailings at other rates unless permitted by standard.
b. Nonidentical-weight pieces may be copalletized only if the
correct postage is affixed to each piece or if otherwise authorized by
the RCSC.
c. All pieces in mailings to be copalletized must be subject to the
minimum per piece rate, or all subject to the per pound rate, unless
otherwise authorized by the RCSC.
d. All pieces must have postage paid with permit imprint, or all
pieces must have postage affixed.
e. When requested, the mailer must present pallets selected by USPS
employees for verification.
7.4 Line 2
Line 2 on pallet labels for copalletized mailings: Class (PER or
NEWS, or STD, as applicable), FLTS, and contents.
7.5 Postage Statement
Separate postage statements are required:
a. For Periodicals, a separate postage statement is required for
each publication and/or edition that is part of the copalletized
mailing. Mailers must note on or in an attachment to the postage
statement the name and issue date of the publications with which each
publication and/or edition was copalletized.
b. For Standard Mail (A), a separate postage statement must be
prepared for each mailing that is part of a single copalletized
shipment, except that copalletized Regular and Enhanced Carrier Route
mailings produced as part of the same job may be reported on the same
postage statement.
8.0 Mixed Rate Levels on Pallets--Nonprofit Standard Mail
8.1 Standards
Nonprofit mixed rate level mailings must meet the standards in 4.0
and those below.
8.2 Authorizations
Mailers must be authorized to commingle either Nonprofit Carrier
Route, 3/5, and Basic rate mail on pallets or Nonprofit Carrier Route
and Barcoded rate flats in packages. Mailers do not need authorization
to commingle mixed rate level mailings when only mailings of barcoded
flats are sorted on pallets. Nonidentical-weight pieces may be
commingled only if the correct postage is affixed to each piece or if
otherwise authorized by the RCSC.
8.3 Carrier Route Information
Carrier route endorsements may appear only on pieces that qualify
for that rate, but carrier route codes may appear on each piece in the
mailing.
8.4 Documentation
At the time of mailing, the mailer must provide a computer-
generated listing (in ZIP Code sequence and numbered to correspond to
the pallets) that describes the contents of each pallet. The mailer
must maintain this information for 90 days after the mailing is
dispatched. When requested, the mailer must present pallets selected by
USPS employees for verification by comparison with the listing. The
listing must show:
a. Mailer's name and location, owner of the mail, mailing segment,
and entry post office.
b. Number of pieces to each carrier route by 5-digit ZIP Code, to
each 5-digit and 3-digit ZIP Code at the Basic and 3/5 rates, in total
for these categories for each pallet and for the entire mailing.
Barcoded rates must be identified, where applicable.
8.5 Additional Pallet Standards
Pallets must meet these additional preparation standards:
a. The number relating the computer-generated list to each pallet
must be placed in the lower right corner of the pallet label in an
easily read print size.
b. At the time of mailing, the mailer must show how packages and
bundles are arranged on the pallets.
c. When preparing copalletized Nonprofit Carrier Route and Barcoded
rate mailings of flat-size pieces, mailers must separately group the
packages at each rate.
d. When top caps are used, the mailer must write the tare weight of
the top cap on the pallet label or in another prominent location.
9.0 Palletizing Machinable Parcels
9.1 Standard Mail (A)
Pieces may be eligible for the 3/5 rate when prepared under 4.2a,
4.2b, and 4.2c. This eligibility includes pieces correctly sorted under
4.2b and 4.2c to the service area of the entry ASF/BMC.
9.2 Standard Mail (B)
Mailers must sack by zone, using the applicable standards, any mail
that cannot be placed on 5-digit or BMC pallets. Sacks containing mail
remaining after all pallets are prepared may be presented with the
palletized mailing (on the same postage statement) if the sacks are
segregated by zone from the palletized portion of the mailing. Pieces
for different zones may be commingled only under M630.
9.3 DBMC Rate
If applicable, a BMC pallet may include pieces that are eligible
for the DBMC rate and others that are ineligible. The mailer must
provide documentation showing the pieces that qualify for the DBMC
rate.
9.4 Top Caps
When top caps are used, the mailer must write the tare weight of
the top cap on the pallet label or in another prominent location.
M050 Walk Sequence
1.0 Basic Standards
[In 1.1, replace the reference ``M203 or M303'' with ``M290 or M693.'']
* * * * *
3.0 Delivery Sequence Information
[Replace current 3.1 and 3.2 with new 3.1 and 3.2 as follows:]
3.1 With Simplified Addressing
Walk-sequence rate pieces prepared with a simplified address must
be based on delivery stop information obtained within 6 months before
the date of mailing (or within 90 days before the date of mailing for
Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail), either from the Delivery
Statistics File or from the postmaster of the destination office.
[[Page 10181]]
3.2 Without Simplified Addressing
[In 3.2a and 3.2b, replace ``quarterly'' with ``bimonthly'' and revise
the opening paragraph as follows:]
Walk-sequence rate pieces prepared with other than a simplified
address must be sequenced using USPS data from one of the following
sources, issued within 90 days before the date of mailing: * * *
* * * * *
[Add new 3.4 as follows:]
3.4 Line of Travel
Line-of-travel sequence is an option for mailers who prepare
carrier route mailings other than high density/125-piece or saturation
mailings. Line-of-travel sequencing is required for Basic Enhanced
Carrier Route Standard Mail. Line-of-travel sequence is not an exact
walk sequence but a sequence of ZIP+4 codes arranged in the order that
the route is served by a carrier. (First the ZIP+4 groups are
sequenced, then the addresses within each are identified as being in
ascending or descending order.) The USPS Line-of-Travel (LOT) product
provides a list of the ZIP+4 codes each route serves, identifies the
order in which they are delivered, and provides an indicator specifying
whether the addresses in each must be sorted in ascending or descending
order. LOT information must be updated at the same frequency as carrier
route codes, i.e., within 90 days before the date of mailing.
4.0 Documentation
[In 4.1, replace ``(second-class)'' with ``(Periodicals)'' and
``(third-class)'' with ``(Standard Mail).'']
* * * * *
[Replace current 4.2 with new 4.2 as follows:]
4.2 High Density/125-Piece
For each carrier route to which 125-piece walk-sequence or High
Density rate mail is addressed, the mailer must document the total
number of pieces to the route. If there are fewer than 125 pieces for a
route, the documentation must also show the number of possible
deliveries on the route.
* * * * *
M070 Mixed Classes
M071 Basic Information
[In 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3, replace ``[T]hird-[C]lass'' with ``Standard Mail
(A)''; in 1.2 and 1.2a, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals'';
in 1.2c, replace ``First- or third-class'' with ``First-Class or
Standard Mail (A)''; and in 1.3, replace ``third- or fourth-class''
with ``Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
M072 Express Mail and Priority Mail Drop Shipment
[In 2.1, replace ``Presorted First-Class and carrier route presort''
with ``Presorted and automation''; remove current 2.2 and renumber
current 2.3 as 2.2; in 3.0 (heading), replace ``Second-Class Mail''
with ``Periodicals''; in 4.0 (heading), replace ``Third-Class Mail''
with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 5.0 (heading), replace ``Fourth-Class
Mail'' with ``Standard Mail (B)'' and replace the reference ``E450''
with ``E652''; in 6.2, replace ``Transported by (Priority Mail)
(Express Mail) with ``TRANSPORTED BY [PRIORITY MAIL][EXPRESS MAIL]''
and ``Delivered locally as (class of enclosed mail)'' with ``DELIVERED
LOCALLY AS [CLASS OF ENCLOSED MAIL]''; no other change in text.]
[Revise the heading of M073 as follows:]
M073 Combined Mailings of Standard Mail Machinable Parcels
[Replace current 1.0 with new 1.0 as follows:]
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 Description
Subject to authorization under 2.0, a mailer authorized plant load
or plant-verified drop shipment privileges may prepare a combined
mailing of Regular Standard Mail (A) and Standard Mail (B) machinable
parcels that have been merged and sorted together in sacks (under 3.0)
or on pallets (under M040) to achieve the finest presort level. The
combined mailing must meet the standards below and those that apply to
the rates claimed. Each parcel in a combined mailing is subject to the
applicable Standard Mail rate, based on the corresponding standards.
Required volume for bulk or presort rates is based solely on the
quantity of pieces eligible for each rate at the required presort
level. Pieces claimed at other rates in the same sack or on the same
pallet do not count.
1.2 Postage Payment
Postage for all pieces must be paid with permit imprint at the post
office serving the mailer's plant under P710, P720, or P730. The
applicable agreement must include procedures for combined mailings
approved by the RCSC.
1.3 Documentation
Separate postage statements must be prepared for the Standard Mail
(A) and (B) pieces. Within each group, combined forms may be prepared
where standards and the forms permit. All postage statements must be
provided at the time of mailing, accompanied by a computer-generated
listing (in ZIP Code sequence and numbered to correspond to the sacks
or pallets) that describes the contents of each sack or pallet. The
mailer must retain this information for 90 days after the mailing is
dispatched. This listing must show the mailer's name and location, the
name and owner of each product for which a separate postage statement
is prepared, and the entry post office. For each product, the listing
must detail the number of pieces at each rate by 5-digit ZIP Code and
totals for each pallet or sack and for the entire mailing. Additional
documentation must be provided for all mailings of nonidentical-weight
pieces or in which Basic and 3/5 rate pieces are commingled and the
mailer has not separated the sacks or pallets containing the pieces at
the respective rates. Such documentation must be in one of these
formats:
a. Segmented sequentially by sortation level (e.g., 5-digit,
destination BMC) and, within each, listing a unique number or Line 1 of
each sack or pallet label. For each 5-digit or destination ASF/BMC
entry, the number of pieces at each rate must be shown by 5-digit ZIP
Code or 3-digit ZIP Code prefix, respectively. Destination ASF/BMC
sacks or pallets must show a total number of pieces in the sack or on
the pallet. The entries must be summarized for the whole mailing to
show total pieces at each rate, total pieces, and total postage (and
additional postage due, as applicable). The sacks or pallets do not
have to be presented to the USPS in any particular order.
b. Segmented sequentially by sortation level and, by 5-digit ZIP
Code (for 5-digit sacks) or 3-digit ZIP Code prefix (for other sacks or
pallets), the number of pieces at each rate must be listed. The entries
must be totaled for the whole mailing to show total pieces at each
rate, total pieces, and total postage (or additional postage due, as
applicable). If different amounts of additional postage are due, the
summary must further detail the number of pieces at each postage amount
or at each amount of additional postage due. The sacks or pallets must
be separated by sortation level when presented for acceptance.
2.0 Authorization
* * * * *
[Replace current 2.3 and 2.4 with new 2.3 as follows:]
[[Page 10182]]
2.3 Term
An authorization to combine Standard Mail (A) and (B) machinable
parcels expires at the same time as the applicable postage payment
system authorization and may not be for more than 2 years. A mailer may
terminate an authorization at any time by written notice to the
postmaster of the office serving the mailer's location. The USPS may
terminate an authorization, by written notice to the mailer explaining
the reasons for termination, if it finds that the mailer does not meet
the applicable standards.
3.0 Sack Preparation
[Replace current 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3 with new 3.1 and 3.2 as follows:]
3.1 Sack Size, Preparation, and Labeling
Sack size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: optional, but required for Standard Mail (A) Regular
and Nonprofit 3/5 rate eligibility (minimum of 10 pieces/20 pounds/
1,000 cubic inches, smaller volume not permitted); use 5-digit ZIP Code
destination of pieces for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the
prefixes under M031.
b. Destination ASF: allowed and required for DBMC rate only
(minimum of 10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches, smaller volume not
permitted); use L602 for Line 1.
c. Destination BMC: required (minimum of 10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000
cubic inches, smaller volume not permitted); use L602 if DBMC rate is
claimed; otherwise, use L601 for Line 1.
d. Mixed BMC: required (no minimum); use L601 to show entry BMC for
Line 1.
3.2 Line 2
Line 2:
a. 5-digit, ASF, and destination BMC sacks: STD 3C/4C MACH.
b. Mixed BMC sacks: STD 3C/4C MACH MIXED BMC.
c. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
M074 Plant Load Mailings
[In 3.3b and 3.3c, replace ``SDC'' with ``ADC''; in 3.3 and 3.7b,
replace ``[S]econd-[C]lass [M]ail'' with ``Periodicals''; and in 3.4
and 3.7c, replace ``[T]hird- or [F]ourth-[C]lass [M]ail'' with
``Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
M100 First-Class Mail
[Renumber current M101 as M120 with no change in text.]
M120 Priority Mail
* * * * *
[Replace current M102 and M103 with new M130 as follows:]
M130 Presorted First-Class
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 All Pieces
Each Presorted First-Class (nonautomation rate) mailing must meet
the applicable standards in E130 and in M010, M020, and M030. All
pieces must be in the same processing category, subject to 1.3, and
must be sorted together and prepared under 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, or 5.0, as
appropriate; automation rate First-Class Mail must be prepared under
M810 or M820, as applicable. Letter- and card-size pieces must be
prepared in letter trays; flat-size pieces must be prepared in flat
trays; parcels must be prepared in sacks. All pieces must be marked
``Presorted First-Class.''
1.2 Local Exception
Postmasters may authorize preparation of small volume mailings in
nonpostal containers if they consist primarily of packages for local
ZIP Codes, do not exceed 20 pounds, and do not require postal
transportation for processing.
1.3 Cards, Letters
Pieces claimed at card rates and pieces claimed at letter rates are
each subject to a separate minimum volume criteria whether prepared as
separate or combined mailings. Either way, card-size and letter-size
pieces may be presented at the same time and reported on the same
postage statement.
1.4 Processing Instructions
If the mailer's preference is that the USPS does not attempt to
upgrade (automate) letter- or card-size pieces presented at a
nonautomation rate, trays of such mail may be identified with a facing
slip or other device that conspicuously bears the words ``DO NOT
AUTOMATE'' and a tray label on which Line 2 includes ``NON-OCR.''
2.0 Basic Preparation--Letter-Size or Card-Size Pieces
2.1 Package Preparation
Package size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); red
Label D or optional endorsement line (OEL); labeling optional.
b. 3-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); green
Label 3 or OEL.
c. ADC: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); pink
Label A or OEL.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); tan Label MS or OEL.
2.2 Tray Preparation
Tray size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (full trays); no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required (full trays except for origin 3-digit(s)); no
overflow; use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. ADC: required (full trays); no overflow; use L004 for Line 1.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the city/state/ZIP of the facility serving the 3-digit ZIP Code of
the entry post office, as shown in L002, Column C.
2.3 Line 2
Line 2: FCM LTRS NON-OCR and, as applicable:
a. Mixed ADC trays: WKG.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
3.0 Optional Preparation--Upgradable Letter-Size or Card-Size Pieces
3.1 Definition
Upgradable pieces are those that meet the standards in C810 for
physical automation compatibility and the standards in C830 for an OCR
read area and barcode clear zone, for reflectance, and for paper that
can accept water-based ink. Addresses on upgradable pieces must be
machine-printed in a nonscript font. Upgradable pieces prepared under
3.0 are not packaged except for mailings of card-size pieces and pieces
in less-than-full mixed AADC trays.
3.2 Tray Preparation
Tray size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: optional (full trays); no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required (full trays except for origin 3-digit(s)); no
overflow; use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. AADC: required (full trays); no overflow; group pieces by 3-
digit ZIP Code prefix; use L801 for Line 1.
d. Mixed AADC: required (no minimum); group pieces by AADC; for
Line 1, use MXD, followed by the city/
[[Page 10183]]
state/ZIP of the facility serving the 3-digit ZIP Code of the entry
post office, as shown in L002, Column C.
3.3 Line 2
Line 2: FCM LTRS UPGR and, as applicable:
a. Mixed AADC trays: WKG.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
4.0 Preparation of Flat-Size Pieces
4.1 Package Preparation
Package size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); red
Label D or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 3-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); green
Label 3 or OEL.
c. ADC: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); pink
Label A or OEL.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); tan Label MS or OEL.
4.2 Tray Preparation
Tray size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (full trays), no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required (full trays except for origin 3-digit(s)), no
overflow; use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. ADC: required (full trays), no overflow; use L004 for Line 1.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the city/state/ZIP of the facility serving the 3-digit ZIP Code of
the entry post office, as shown in L002, Column C.
4.3 Line 2
Line 2: FCM FLTS and, on mixed ADC trays, WKG.
5.0 Preparation of Parcels
5.1 Standards
First-Class parcels weighing 11 ounces or less, except Priority
Mail, must be prepared under the standards below. All Priority Mail and
any parcels weighing more than 11 ounces must be prepared under the
applicable standards in M120.
5.2 Package Preparation
Packaging is not required for pieces \1/2\ inch thick or thicker if
they are placed in a sack to the same destination to which they would
otherwise be packaged (e.g., in a 3-digit sack vs. a 3-digit package).
Package size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); red
Label D or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 3-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); green
Label 3 or OEL.
c. ADC: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); pink
Label A or OEL.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); tan Label MS or OEL.
5.3 Sack Preparation
Sack size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10-pound minimum); use 5-digit ZIP Code
destination of packages (or unpackaged pieces, if applicable) for Line
1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required (10-pound minimum except for origin 3-
digit(s)); use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. ADC: required (10-pound minimum); use L004 for Line 1.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the city/state/ZIP of the facility serving the 3-digit ZIP Code of
the entry post office, as shown in L002, Column C.
5.4 Line 2
Line 2: FCM IRREG and, on mixed ADC sacks, WKG.
6.0 Documentation
A complete, signed postage statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing, supported by
documentation produced by PAVE- or MAC-certified software, or
standardized documentation meeting the standards in P012. Documentation
of postage is not required if each piece is of identical weight and the
pieces are separated by rate when presented for acceptance, or if the
correct rate is affixed to each piece.
[Revise the heading of M200 as follows:]
M200 Periodicals
[Move M201, M202, M203, M204, and M205 to new M290 and revise; add new
M210 as follows:]
M210 Regular Periodicals
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 General Preparation
All pieces in each nonautomation rate Regular Periodicals mailing
must be in the same processing category and must be sorted together to
the finest extent required under 2.0 and 3.0, or 4.0, as appropriate;
automation rate Regular Periodicals must be prepared under M810 or
M820, as applicable. Letter-size pieces must be prepared in trays;
flat-size pieces must be prepared in sacks. Palletization of trays,
sacks, or packages is as permitted by M040. Postmasters may authorize
preparation of small volume mailings in nonpostal containers if they
consist primarily of packages for local ZIP Codes, do not exceed 20
pounds, and do not require postal transportation for processing.
1.2 Carrier Route and Walk-Sequence
Preparation for carrier route rates is optional and is subject to
additional standards. Regular Periodicals for which a walk-sequence
discount is claimed must be prepared as a carrier route mailing under
this section and the walk-sequencing standards in M050; pieces prepared
with a simplified address must also meet the standards in A040.
1.3 Firm Packages
A firm package is two or more copies for the same address placed in
one package. If each copy has a delivery address, each may be claimed
as a separate piece for presort and on the postage statement. The firm
package may be claimed as one piece for presort and on the postage
statement. If the copies are unaddressed, the firm package is
considered one piece. A firm package sorted and claimed as one piece
must be accompanied by (but must be physically separate from) five
other pieces packaged to the same destination to satisfy a six-piece
package requirement when applicable, regardless of the number of copies
in the firm package.
2.0 Package Preparation
2.1 General
Packaging preparation is subject to M020 and the specific standards
below.
2.2 Carrier Route Packages
Mailers may choose to prepare carrier route packages at a higher
level of route saturation (e.g., only if there are at least 15 pieces
per route). Under this option, smaller packages of six or more pieces
per carrier route not prepared for carrier route rates must be prepared
and paid for at another applicable rate.
2.3 Regular Periodicals
In addition to labeling under 2.4b, each package of Regular
Periodicals walk-sequence mail must be labeled to show that the mail is
walk sequenced. A facing slip with the phrase ``HIGH
[[Page 10184]]
DENSITY WALK-SEQUENCED CARRIER ROUTE MAIL'' or ``SATURATION WALK-
SEQUENCED CARRIER ROUTE MAIL'' (as applicable) may be placed on the top
of each package of walk-sequence mail. It may be an address label with
the required information placed on a sample mailpiece that is the top
piece in the package, or a separate piece of paper affixed to the top
of the package. If packages are prepared without facing slips, an
optional endorsement line or carrier route information line must be
placed on each piece in the package to provide the equivalent
information.
2.4 Package Preparation
Package size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. Firm: optional (two-piece minimum); blue Label F or optional
endorsement line (OEL).
b. Carrier route: optional but required for rate eligibility (six-
piece minimum, fewer not permitted); labeling required only if placed
in a 5-digit carrier routes tray or sack (facing slip, OEL, or CR
information line).
c. 5-digit: required (six-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); red
Label D or OEL.
d. 3-digit: required (six-piece minimum, fewer not permitted);
green Label 3 or OEL.
e. ADC: required (six-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); pink
Label A or OEL.
f. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); tan Label MS or OEL.
3.0 Sack Preparation (Flats)
3.1 Sack Preparation
Sack size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: required for rate eligibility at 24 pieces,
optional with one six-piece package minimum; use 5-digit ZIP Code
destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the
prefixes under M031.
b. 5-digit carrier routes (carrier route packages only): required
for rate eligibility (no minimum); use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of
packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes under
M031.
c. 5-digit: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece
package minimum; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line
1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes under M031.
d. 3-digit: required at 24 pieces (no minimum for origin 3-
digit(s)), optional with one six-piece package minimum; use L002,
Column A, for Line 1.
e. ADC: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece package
minimum; use L004 for Line 1.
f. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the city/state/ZIP of the ADC serving the 3-digit ZIP Code of the
entry post office, as shown in L004.
3.2 Line 2
Line 2: PER or NEWS (as applicable), FLTS or IRREG (as applicable),
and:
a. Basic Carrier Route sacks: route type and number.
b. High Density sacks: WSH and route type and number.
c. Saturation sacks: WSS and route type and number.
d. 5-digit carrier routes sacks: CR-RTS.
e. Mixed ADC sacks: WKG.
f. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
4.0 Tray Preparation (Letter-Size Pieces)
4.1 Tray Preparation
Tray size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: required for rate eligibility at 24 pieces,
optional with one six-piece package minimum; use 5-digit ZIP Code
destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the
prefixes under M031.
b. 5-digit carrier routes (carrier route packages only): required
for rate eligibility (no minimum); use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of
packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes under
M031.
c. 5-digit: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece
package minimum; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line
1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes under M031.
d. 3-digit: required at 24 pieces (no minimum for origin 3-
digit(s)), optional with one six-piece package minimum; use L002,
Column A, for Line 1.
e. ADC: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece package
minimum; use L004 for Line 1.
f. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the city/state/ZIP of the ADC serving the 3-digit ZIP Code of the
entry post office, as shown in L004.
4.2 Line 2
Line 2: PER or NEWS (as applicable), LTRS, and:
a. Basic Carrier Route trays: route type and number.
b. High Density trays: WSH and route type and number.
c. Saturation trays: WSS and route type and number.
d. 5-digit carrier routes trays: CR-RTS.
e. Mixed ADC trays: WKG.
f. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
5.0 Bedloaded Bundles (Flats)
5.1 Authorization
The RCSC manager serving the post office where the mailing is to be
made may authorize preparation of flat-size Periodicals in bundles that
are outside sacks if this preparation benefits the USPS. Generally,
authorization is approved only when the number of bundles is not more
than the number of sacks that would otherwise be used in a mailing. The
mailer or agent must submit an application for each product, showing
the name of the mailer, the frequency of mailing, the post offices to
which shipments are to be made, and the approximate numbers of copies
and bundles to be deposited at each office. The RCSC manager rules on
the application and informs the applicant in writing. If an
authorization is approved, the publisher or agent must be prepared to
provide information for future filings, similar to that required on the
original application, if requested by the RCSC manager. Authorization
is approved for a specific period, not to exceed 2 years. Authorization
to bundle instead of sack may be revoked when it is determined that the
preparation method no longer benefits the USPS.
5.2 Package Preparation
Packages must be sorted and labeled under 2.0 and meet the
applicable basic standards in M020 and these conditions:
a. Packages must contain at least six pieces but no more than 20
pounds of mail.
b. Firm packages may contain as few as two copies of a publication
and (except under 5.2c) do not have to be consolidated into bundles
with other packages to the same 5-digit destination.
c. All pieces must be in one package if they weigh less than 10
pounds. Ten pounds or more of mail for a destination must be prepared
in packages weighing from 10 to 20 pounds each.
d. The last package to a destination may contain less than 10
pounds of mail.
e. All palletized packages of copalletized publications must
contain at least six pieces.
[[Page 10185]]
5.3 Bundle Preparation
Bundles must be sorted under 3.0 and meet the applicable standards
in M020 and these conditions:
a. Bundle size for all required presort levels: required (minimum
of 20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches, 40 pounds maximum; smaller bundles not
permitted except for origin 3-digit(s)).
b. Bundle size for all optional presort levels: optional (minimum
of 20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches, 40 pounds maximum; smaller bundles not
permitted except for origin 3-digit(s)).
c. Bundles other than carrier route and 5-digit bundles must be
labeled with facing slips that have similar information to that
required for sack labels. A facing slip is not required on carrier
route bundles. Five-digit bundles must contain pieces with the correct
optional endorsement line or have a red Label D.
5.4 Physical Characteristics
Bundles must be machinable on USPS sack-sorting equipment, unless
they consist of publications for entry and delivery in the same SCF
service area. Machinability can be improved by cross-strapping and
using heavy-gauge shrinkwrap or stretchwrap on each bundle. Bundles
entered and delivered in the same SCF service area must be securely
bound to withstand normal handling without breakage or injury to USPS
employees or damage to mechanized sorting systems. Binding material
must be applied at least once around both the length and girth. Wire
and metal strapping are prohibited.
6.0 Combining Multiple Publications or Editions
6.1 Basic Information
A combined mailing is a mailing in which individually addressed
copies of two or more Periodicals publications or editions are merged
into a single mailstream, during production or after finished copies
are produced, and all copies are sorted together to achieve the finest
presort possible for the combined mailing. This process is also known
as comailing. More than one publication, or edition of a publication,
may be combined to meet the volume standard per tray, sack, or bundle,
applicable to the presort rate claimed. Each piece must meet all
applicable standards for the specific rate claimed. Nonprofit and
Classroom publications may be combined with Regular publications only
as permitted by standard.
6.2 Postage Statements
A separate postage statement must be prepared for the postage
computations for each publication or edition that is part of the
combined mailing. The name and issue date of the publications with
which each publication or edition was combined must be noted on, or
attached to, the postage statements. To report postage for firm
packages, the per piece postage computation (and nonadvertising
adjustment, if applicable) for all copies included in firm packages
must be on the postage statement for the publication (having copies in
those packages) that contains the higher (or highest) amount of
advertising.
7.0 Documentation
A complete, signed postage statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing, supported by
documentation meeting the basic standards in P012. Effective January 1,
1997, postage statements must be supported by documentation produced by
PAVE-certified software, or standardized documentation meeting the
standards in P012.
M290 Preferred Periodicals
[Add new M290, based on current M201, M202, M203, and M205; M201.1.0,
M202.1.0, and M203.1.0 are combined into new M290.1.0; the remainder of
M201, M202, and M203, and all M205 are revised as M290.2.0, M290.3.0,
M290.4.0, and M290.5.0, respectively, with subsections renumbered and
revised accordingly for names of rates and mail classes.]
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 Presort
All pieces in a Preferred Periodicals mailing must be sorted. All
pieces must be in the same processing category unless specifically
excepted by standard. Except for automation rate mailings, presort must
at a minimum meet the standards in 2.0. Additional preparation might
qualify pieces for other presort rates or discounts. Automation rate
mailings must meet the presort standards in M800.
1.2 Single-Piece
Subject to the applicable standards, if sorting results in a single
piece remaining that cannot be included in a package already prepared,
that single piece may be sorted to a tray, sack, or pallet, as
appropriate, without being prepared as a package.
1.3 Loose Packing
District managers may authorize loose packing of faced, unpackaged
flat-size mail if there are enough pieces to fill a No. 3 sack for the
same 5-digit ZIP Code destination.
1.4 Firm Packages
A firm package is two or more copies for the same address placed in
one package. If each copy has a delivery address, each may be claimed
as a separate piece for presort and on the postage statement. The firm
package may be claimed as one piece for presort and on the postage
statement. If the copies are unaddressed, the firm package is
considered one piece. A firm package sorted and claimed as one piece
must be accompanied by (but must be physically separate from) five
other pieces packaged to the same destination to satisfy a six-piece
package requirement when applicable, regardless of the number of copies
in the firm package.
1.5 Nonpostal Containers
Postmasters may authorize preparation of small volume mailings in
nonpostal containers if they consist primarily of packages for local
ZIP Codes, do not exceed 20 pounds, and do not require postal
transportation for processing.
2.0 Preparation for Level G/J Rates
2.1 Package Preparation
Package size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. Firm: optional with at least two pieces; blue Label F or
optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 5-digit: required at six pieces; smaller packages permitted; red
Label D or OEL; labeling optional.
c. City: optional with at least six pieces; yellow Label C or OEL.
d. 3-digit: required at six pieces; smaller packages permitted;
green Label 3 or OEL.
e. SCF: optional at six pieces; smaller packages permitted; green
Label 3 or OEL.
f. ADC: required with at least six pieces; pink Label A or OEL.
g. Mixed ADC: required with no minimum; tan Label MS or OEL.
2.2 Sack Preparation
Sack size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required at four packages; fewer packages permitted;
use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for
military mail by the prefixes under M031.
b. City: optional with no minimum except as required for rate
eligibility; use lowest ZIP Code for destination from L001 for Line 1.
[[Page 10186]]
c. 3-digit: required at four packages; fewer packages permitted;
use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
d. SCF: optional with no minimum; use L002, Column C, for Line 1.
e. ADC: required at four packages; fewer packages permitted; use
L004 for Line 1.
f. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the city/state/ZIP of the ADC serving the 3-digit ZIP Code of the
entry post office, as shown in L004.
2.3 Line 2
Line 2: PER or NEWS (as applicable), processing category, and:
a. City sacks: CITY, right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
b. Mixed ADC sacks: WKG.
c. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
3.0 Preparation for Level H Rates
3.1 Package Preparation
Package size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. Firm: optional with at least two pieces, subject to 1.5; blue
Label F or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 5-digit: required at six pieces; smaller packages not permitted;
red Label D or OEL; labeling optional.
c. City: optional with at least six pieces; yellow Label C or OEL.
d. Unique 3-digit: required at six pieces; smaller packages not
permitted; green Label 3 or OEL.
3.2 Sack Preparation
Sack size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required at four packages; fewer packages permitted;
use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for
military mail by the prefixes under M031.
b. City: optional at one six-piece package, as required for rate
eligibility; use lowest ZIP Code for destination from L001 for Line 1.
c. Unique 3-digit: required at four packages; fewer packages
permitted; use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
3.3 Line 2
Line 2: PER or NEWS (as applicable) and processing category (and,
on city sacks, CITY right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1).
4.0 Preparation for Level I/K Rates
4.1 Trays
Letter-size pieces may be prepared in letter trays rather than
sacks. Letter-size pieces prepared in trays must be packaged under 2.0,
except that packages are not required when there is enough mail to fill
a tray for the same carrier route. Rate eligibility remains subject to
the applicable standards.
4.2 Walk-Sequence Mail
Pieces for which a walk-sequence discount is claimed must be
prepared as a carrier route mailing under this section and the walk-
sequencing standards in M050. Pieces prepared with a simplified address
must also meet the corresponding standards. Walk-sequence letter- and
flat-size pieces must be prepared in packages. In addition to labeling
under 4.4 and 4.5, each package of walk-sequence mail must be labeled
to show that the mail is walk sequenced. A facing slip with the phrase
``WALK-SEQUENCED CARRIER ROUTE MAIL'' may be placed on the top of each
package of walk-sequence mail. It may be an address label with the
required information placed on a sample mailpiece that is the top piece
in the package, or a separate piece of paper affixed to the top of the
package. If packages are prepared without facing slips, ``WS'' must
immediately precede the carrier route information on a carrier route
information line on each piece in the package.
4.3 Package Preparation
Package size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. Firm: optional with at least two pieces, subject to 1.4; blue
Label F or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. Carrier route: required at six pieces, subject to 4.5; smaller
packages not permitted; label under 4.4.
4.4 Package Labels
Carrier route package labels are based on the sack level in which
placed:
a. No label is required if the package is placed in a correctly
labeled carrier route sack.
b. Packages in 5-digit carrier routes sacks must have a facing slip
unless the pieces in the package show a carrier route information line.
c. Optional endorsement lines may be used instead of carrier route
information lines or facing slips.
4.5 Higher Level
Mailers may choose to prepare carrier route packages at a higher
level of route saturation than required in 4.4b (e.g., only when there
are at least 15 pieces per route). Under this option, smaller packages
(but with six or more pieces per carrier route) must be claimed at
another rate and prepared accordingly.
4.6 Tray or Sack Preparation
Tray preparation is in the same sequence as for sacks; a tray must
be prepared for a required presort destination when the corresponding
pieces (or packages of pieces) fill a tray. Minimum volume per tray is
the same as for a comparable sack. The information placed on tray
labels is the same as on sack labels. Tray or sack size, preparation
sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: optional at one six-piece package minimum,
required for rate eligibility; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of
packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes under
M031.
b. Carrier routes: optional at minimum of one six-piece package
each for two different routes in the same 5-digit ZIP Code area;
required for rate eligibility; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of
packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes under
M031.
4.7 Line 2
Line 2: PER or NEWS (as applicable), processing category, and:
a. Walk-sequence carrier route trays or sacks: WS and route type
and number.
b. Carrier route trays or sacks: route type and number.
c. 5-digit carrier routes trays or sacks: CARRIER ROUTES.
5.0 Bedloaded Bundles (Flats)
5.1. Authorization
The RCSC manager serving the post office where the mailing is to be
made may authorize preparation of flat-size Periodicals in bundles that
are outside sacks if this preparation must benefit the USPS. Generally,
authorization is approved only when the number of bundles is not more
than the number of sacks that would otherwise be used in a mailing. The
publisher or agent must submit an application for each publication,
showing the name of the publication; the frequency of mailing, the post
offices to which shipments are to be made, and the approximate numbers
of copies and bundles to be deposited at each office. The RCSC manager
rules on the application and informs the applicant in writing. If an
authorization is approved, the publisher or agent must be prepared to
provide information similar to that required on the original
application for future issues of the publication, if requested by the
RCSC manager. Authorization is approved for a specific period, not to
exceed 2 years. Authorization to bundle instead of sack may be revoked
when it is determined that the preparation method no longer benefits
the USPS.
[[Page 10187]]
5.2 Package Preparation
Packages must be sorted and labeled under 2.1, 3.1, and 4.3 and
meet the applicable basic standards in M020 and these conditions:
a. Packages must contain at least six pieces but no more than 20
pounds of mail.
b. Firm packages may contain as few as two copies of a publication
and (except under 5.2c) do not have to be consolidated into bundles
with other packages to the same 5-digit destination.
c. All pieces must be in one package if they weigh less than 10
pounds. Ten pounds or more of mail for a destination must be prepared
in packages weighing from 10 to 20 pounds each.
d. The last package to a destination may contain less than 10
pounds of mail.
e. All palletized packages of copalletized publications must
contain at least six pieces.
5.3
FR Doc. 96-5500 Classification Reform; Implementation Standards
Bundle Preparation
Bundles must be sorted under 2.2, 3.2, and 4.6 and meet the
applicable standards in M020 and these conditions:
a. Bundle size for all required presort levels: required (minimum
of 20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches, 40 pounds maximum; smaller bundles not
permitted).
b. Bundle size for all optional presort levels: optional (minimum
of 20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches, 40 pounds maximum; smaller bundles not
permitted).
c. Bundles other than carrier route and 5-digit bundles must be
labeled with facing slips that have similar information to that
required for sack labels. A facing slip is not required on carrier
route bundles. Five-digit bundles must contain pieces with the correct
optional endorsement line or have a red Label D.
5.4 Physical Characteristics
Bundles must be machinable on USPS sack-sorting equipment, unless
they consist of publications for entry and delivery in the same SCF
service area. Machinability can be improved by cross-strapping and
using heavy-gauge shrinkwrap or stretchwrap on each bundle. Bundles
entered and delivered in the same SCF service area must be securely
bound to withstand normal handling without breakage or injury to USPS
employees or damage to mechanized sorting systems. Binding material
must be applied at least once around both the length and girth. Wire
and metal strapping are prohibited.
6.0 Combining Multiple Publications or Editions
6.1 Basic Information
A combined mailing is a mailing in which individually addressed
copies of two or more Periodicals publications or editions are merged
into a single mailstream, during production or after finished copies
are produced, and all copies are sorted together to achieve the finest
presort possible for the combined mailing. This process is also known
as comailing. More than one publication, or edition of a publication,
may be combined to meet the volume standard per tray, sack, or bundle,
applicable to the presort rate claimed. Each piece must meet all
applicable standards for the specific rate claimed. Nonprofit and
Classroom publications may be combined with Regular publications only
as permitted by standard.
6.2 Postage Statements
A separate postage statement must be prepared for the postage
computations for each publication or edition that is part of the
combined mailing. The name and issue date of the publications with
which each publication or edition was combined must be noted on, or
attached to, the postage statements. To report postage for firm
packages, the per piece postage computation (and nonadvertising
adjustment, if applicable) for all copies included in firm packages
must be on the postage statement for the publication (having copies in
those packages) that contains the higher (or highest) amount of
advertising.
7.0 Documentation
The publisher must be prepared to support information on postage
statements required with a Periodicals publication (e.g., the number of
pieces or weight of copies addressed or sorted to specific destinations
or zones, prepared at specific presort levels, or prepared to qualify
for a particular rate or discount). Except for mailings containing
pieces at an automation rate, a destination entry rate, or a walk-
sequence rate, the publisher may meet this standard at the time of
mailing by separating sacks into groups based on the presort level for
which their contents qualify. In other situations, the publisher must
have available documentation meeting the standards in P012 that
describes the mailing in sufficient detail to allow verification of the
accompanying mailing's compliance with applicable preparation and
eligibility standards.
[Remove current M300 and M400; no change to M500.]
* * * * *
[Add new M600, M610, M620, and M630, based on M300 and M400, as
follows:]
M600 Standard Mail
M610 Single-Piece and Nonautomation Regular Standard Mail (A)
1.0 Single-Piece Rates
Each piece must be legibly marked ``Standard'' or ``STD.'' Unmarked
pieces are treated as First-Class Mail and charged postage at the
applicable First-Class rate.
2.0 Basic Standards--Regular Nonautomation Rates
2.1 All Mailings
All Regular nonautomation (Basic and 3/5) rate mailings are subject
to these general standards (automation rate Regular Standard Mail must
be prepared under M810 or M820 as applicable):
a. Each mailing must meet the applicable standards in E631 and in
M010, M020, and M030.
b. All pieces must be in the same processing category unless
specifically excepted by standard.
c. All pieces must be sorted together and prepared under M045 (if
palletized) or M610.
d. Sortation determines rate eligibility; pieces not claimed at or
not eligible for the 3/5 rate must be claimed at the Basic rate.
e. All pieces must be marked ``Bulk Rate'' or ``Blk. Rt.''
f. Subject to 2.2, letter-size pieces must be prepared in trays
and, unless palletized, flat-size pieces must be prepared in sacks.
g. Postmasters may authorize preparation of small volume mailings
in nonpostal containers if they consist primarily of packages for local
ZIP Codes, do not exceed 20 pounds, and do not require postal
transportation for processing.
2.2 Documentation
A complete, signed postage statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing, supported by
documentation produced by PAVE- or MAC-certified software, or
standardized documentation meeting the standards in P012. Documentation
of postage is not required if the correct rate is affixed to each piece
or if each piece is of identical weight and the pieces are separated by
rate when presented for acceptance.
[[Page 10188]]
2.3 Limited Exception--Standard Mail (A)
The following exception is applicable until January 1, 1997; after
that time, preparation will be based solely on the standards for the
rate claimed and the processing category of the pieces, whether the
same standards apply to other pieces claimed at other rates and
produced as part of the same mailing job: When a Standard Mail (A)
mailing job could, by size, qualify for Regular Standard Mail
automation rates as either letters or flats, if part of the job is
prepared as palletized flats at automation rates for flats, the
remainder may be prepared as palletized flats at Enhanced Carrier Route
rates and Regular nonletter nonautomation rates if the number of
Regular nonletter nonautomation rate pieces does not exceed 15% of the
total number of pieces in the entire mailing job.
2.4 Processing Instructions
If the mailer's preference is that the USPS does not attempt to
upgrade (automate) letter- or card-size pieces presented at a
nonautomation rate, trays of such mail may be identified with a facing
slip or other device that conspicuously bears the words ``DO NOT
AUTOMATE'' and a tray label on which Line 2 includes ``NON-OCR.''
3.0 Basic Preparation--Regular Nonautomation Rate Letter-Size Pieces
3.1 Package Preparation
Package size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); red
Label D or optional endorsement line (OEL); labeling optional.
b. 3-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); green
Label 3 or OEL.
c. ADC: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); pink
Label A or OEL.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); tan Label MS or OEL.
3.2 Tray Preparation
Only mail eligible for the 3/5 rate (i.e., 150 or more pieces in
total for the 3-digit area) can be prepared in 5- and 3-digit trays
under 3.2a and 3.2b. Tray size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (full trays); no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the correct prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required (no minimum); use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. Origin 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
d. ADC: required (full trays); no overflow; use L004 for Line 1.
e. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the city/state/ZIP of the ADC serving the 3-digit ZIP Code of the
entry post office, as shown in L004.
3.4 Line 2
Line 2: STD LTRS NON-OCR and, as applicable:
a. Mixed ADC trays: WKG.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
4.0 Optional Preparation--Upgradable Regular Nonautomation Rate
Letter-Size Pieces
4.1 Definition
Upgradable pieces are those that meet the standards in C810 for
physical automation compatibility and the standards in C830 for an OCR
read area and barcode clear zone, for reflectance, and for paper that
can accept water-based ink. Addresses on upgradable pieces must be
machine-printed in a nonscript font. Upgradable pieces prepared under
4.0 are not packaged.
4.2 Tray Preparation
Only mail eligible for the 3/5 rate (i.e., 150 or more pieces in
total for the 3-digit area) can be prepared in 5- and 3-digit trays
under 4.2a and 4.2b. Tray size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: optional (full trays); no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the correct prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required (no minimum); use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. Origin 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
d. AADC: required (full trays); no overflow; group pieces by 3-
digit ZIP Code prefix; use L801 for Line 1.
e. Mixed AADC: required (no minimum); group pieces by AADC; for
Line 1, use L802 (mail entered by the mailer at an ASF or BMC) or L803,
as appropriate.
4.3 Line 2
Line 2: STD LTRS UPGR and, as applicable:
a. Mixed AADC trays: WKG.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
5.0 Preparation--Regular Nonautomation Rate Flat-Size Pieces and All
Irregular Parcels
5.1 Commingling Irregular Parcel Mailings
RCSCs may authorize the commingling of several permit imprint
mailings of irregular parcels to achieve a finer presort, if adequate
means are available to ensure that proper postage is paid. When
authorizing commingling, RCSCs may waive minimum quantity standards for
preparation of 5-digit and 3-digit packages if doing so results in a
finer preparation of at least 50% of the mail.
5.2 Packaging Irregular Parcels
Irregular parcels are packaged under 5.3, except for:
a. Irregular parcels 1/2 inch thick or thicker if they are placed
in a sack to the same destination to which they would otherwise be
packaged (e.g., in a 3-digit sack vs. a 3-digit package).
b. Items so large that 10 or fewer pieces fill a sack.
c. Pieces in a 5-digit sack containing both machinable and
irregular parcels. (Sacks containing both machinable and irregular
parcels may not be prepared to other presort levels.)
5.3 Package Preparation
Package size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); red
Label D or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 3-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); green
Label 3 or OEL.
c. ADC: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); pink
Label A or OEL.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); tan Label MS or OEL.
5.4 Loose Packing
District managers of customer services may authorize loose packing
of unpackaged pieces to fill Number 3 sacks if no material in a sack
would be more finely sorted if packaged. Pieces must be faced and
packed to remain oriented in transit. The total weight of pieces placed
in one sack may not exceed 70 pounds. Requests to loose-pack mail must
be made through the post office of mailing.
5.5 Required Sacking
A sack must be prepared when the quantity of mail for a required
presort destination reaches either 125 pieces or 15 pounds of pieces,
whichever occurs first, subject to these conditions:
[[Page 10189]]
a. For identical-weight pieces, a single-piece weight of 1.92
ounces (0.12 pound) results in 125 pieces weighing 15 pounds.
Identical-weight pieces weighing 1.92 ounces (0.12 pound) or less must
be prepared using the 125-piece minimum; those that weigh more must be
prepared using the 15-pound minimum.
b. For nonidentical-weight pieces, mailers must either use the
minimum that applies to the average piece weight for the entire mailing
(divide the net weight of the mailing by the number of pieces; the
resulting average single-piece weight determines whether the 125-piece
or 15-pound minimum applies) or sack by the actual piece count or mail
weight for each sack, if documentation can be provided with the mailing
that shows (specifically for each sack) the number of pieces and their
total weight.
c. Mailers must note on the accompanying postage statement whether
they applied the 125-piece (``PCS'') or 15-pound (``WT'') threshold or
the method in 5.5b (``BOTH'').
5.6 Drop Shipment
Mailers who use Priority Mail or Express Mail to drop ship Standard
Mail (A) may prepare sacks containing fewer than 125 pieces or less
than 15 pounds of mail.
5.7 Sack Preparation
Sack size (subject to 5.4, 5.5, and 5.6), preparation sequence, and
labeling:
a. 5-digit: as applicable:
(1) Flats or irregular parcels: required (minimum of 125 pieces/15
pounds, smaller volume not permitted); use 5-digit ZIP Code destination
of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes
under M031.
(2) Commingled machinable and irregular parcels: required at 10
pounds, smaller volume permitted; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of
packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes under
M031.
b. 3-digit: required (minimum of 125 pieces/15 pounds, smaller
volume not permitted, except no minimum for origin 3-digit(s)); use
L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. ADC: required (minimum of 125 pieces/15 pounds, smaller volume
not permitted); for Line 1, use L004 (for flats) or L603 (for irregular
parcels), as appropriate.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the city/state/ZIP of the ADC serving the 3-digit ZIP Code of the
entry post office, as shown in L004 (for flats) or L604 (for irregular
parcels), as appropriate.
5.8 Line 2
Line 2: STD and:
a. 5-digit sacks of machinable and irregular parcels: 3C MACH AND
IRREG.
b. Sacks of commingled irregular parcels: 3C COMM IRREG.
c. All other sacks: FLTS or 3C IRREG (as appropriate).
d. Mixed ADC sacks: WKG.
e. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
6.0 Regular Rate Machinable Parcels
6.1 5-Digit Sacks
Five-digit sacks containing both machinable and irregular parcels
must be prepared under 5.0. Every possible 5-digit sack must be
prepared in any mailing including pieces claimed at the 3/5 rate. If
every possible 5-digit sack is not prepared when there are 10 pounds or
more of mail for that destination, the 3/5 rate may not be claimed for
any part of the mailing.
6.2 Sack Preparation
Sack size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: optional at 10 pounds except under 6.1; use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of pieces for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the prefixes under M031.
b. Destination ASF: required for DBMC rate only (10-pound minimum,
smaller volume not permitted); use L602 for Line 1.
c. Destination BMC: required (10-pound minimum, smaller volume not
permitted); use L602 if DBMC rate is claimed; otherwise, use L601 for
Line 1.
d. Mixed BMC: required (no minimum); use L601 to show entry BMC for
Line 1.
6.3 Line 2
Line 2: STD 3C MACH and:
a. Mixed BMC sacks: MIXED BMC.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
7.0 Bedloaded Bundles of Regular Nonautomation Rate Flat-Size Pieces
7.1 Authorization
The RCSC manager serving the post office where the mailing is to be
made may authorize preparation of nonautomation rate Regular Standard
Mail (A) in bundles that are outside sacks if this preparation benefits
the USPS. Generally, authorization is approved only when the number of
bundles is not more than the number of sacks that would otherwise be
used in a mailing. The mailer or agent must submit an application for
each product, showing the name of the mailer, the frequency of mailing,
the post offices to which shipments are to be made, and the approximate
numbers of copies and bundles to be deposited at each office. The RCSC
manager rules on the application and informs the applicant in writing.
If an authorization is approved, the mailer or agent must be prepared
to provide information for future filings, similar to that required on
the original application, if requested by the RCSC manager.
Authorization is approved for a specific period, not to exceed 2 years.
Authorization to bundle instead of sack may be revoked when it is
determined that the preparation method no longer benefits the USPS.
7.2 Documentation
Documentation must be provided under 2.2, applying those standards
to bundles rather than sacks.
7.3 Package Preparation
Package size for all presort levels: two-piece minimum, 20-pound
maximum. Preparation sequence and labeling of packages are subject to
5.0.
7.4 Bundle Preparation
Bundle size for all presort levels: minimum of two packages/20
pounds/1,000 cubic inches, 40 pounds maximum; smaller bundles not
permitted. Preparation sequence is subject to 5.0. Five-digit bundles
must contain pieces with the correct optional endorsement line or have
a red Label D. Other bundles must be labeled with facing slips that
have similar information to that required for sack labels. A facing
slip is not required on packages too large to be placed in a bundle.
7.5 Physical Characteristics
Bundles must be machinable by USPS sack-sorting equipment, unless
they consist of pieces for entry and delivery in the same SCF service
area. Machinability can be improved by cross-strapping and using heavy-
gauge shrinkwrap or stretchwrap on each bundle. Bundles entered and
delivered in the same SCF service area must be securely bound to
withstand normal handling without breakage or injury to USPS employees
or damage to mechanized sorting systems. Binding material must be
applied at least once around both the length and girth. Wire and metal
strapping are prohibited.
[[Page 10190]]
M620 Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail (A)
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 All Mailings
All nonautomation rate Enhanced Carrier Route mailings are subject
to these general standards (automation rate Enhanced Carrier Route
mailings must be prepared under M810):
a. Each mailing must meet the applicable standards in E632 and in
M010, M020, and M030.
b. All pieces must be in the same processing category, except that
automation Basic Carrier Route rate may not be included in the same
mailing as other Enhanced Carrier Route mail.
c. All pieces must be sorted together and prepared under M045 (if
palletized) or under M620.
d. Sortation determines rate eligibility; pieces not claimed at or
not eligible for the High Density or Saturation rates must be claimed
at the Basic Carrier Route rate.
e. Subject to M012, all pieces must be marked ``Bulk Rate'' or
``Blk. Rt.'' In addition, automation Basic Carrier Route, Basic, High
Density, and Saturation rate pieces must each be marked ``AUTOCR,''
``ECRLOT,'' ``ECRWSH,'' or ``ECRWSS,'' respectively, either in the
correct optional endorsement line under M013 or in the correct carrier
route information line under M014. Pieces not claimed at the
corresponding rate must not bear the ``AUTOCR,'' ``ECRLOT,''
``ECRWSH,'' or ``ECRWSS'' marking.
f. Letter-size pieces must be prepared in trays and, unless
palletized, flat-size pieces must be prepared in sacks.
g. Postmasters may authorize preparation of small volume mailings
in nonpostal containers if they consist primarily of packages for local
ZIP Codes, do not exceed 20 pounds, and do not require postal
transportation for processing.
1.2 High Density and Saturation Rates
Pieces claimed at the High Density or Saturation rate must be
prepared as a carrier route mailing under this section and the walk-
sequencing standards in M050. Pieces prepared with a simplified address
must also meet the corresponding standards.
1.3 Documentation
A complete, signed postage statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing, supported by
documentation produced by PAVE- or MAC-certified software, or
standardized documentation meeting the standards in P012. Documentation
of postage is not required if the correct rate is affixed to each
piece, or if each piece is of identical weight and the pieces are
separated by rate when presented for acceptance. In addition, at the
time a mailing is submitted for presort and postage verification, the
mailer must submit a list of the number of pieces qualifying for each
Enhanced Carrier Route rate claimed by 5-digit ZIP Code and, within
each, by carrier route; additional documentation is required under M050
for the High Density and Saturation rates. After the first mailing, the
postmaster may authorize the mailer to keep the records and submit them
on request. The mailer must keep these records for 90 days after the
mailing date, or until any action pending on the recalculation of
postage is resolved to USPS satisfaction.
1.4 Limited Exception--Standard Mail (A)
The following exception is applicable until January 1, 1997; after
that time, preparation will be based solely on the standards for the
rate claimed and the processing category of the pieces, whether the
same standards apply to other pieces claimed at other rates and
produced as part of the same mailing job: When a Standard Mail (A)
mailing job could, by size, qualify for Regular Standard Mail
automation rates as either letters or flats, if part of the job is
prepared as palletized flats at automation rates for flats, the
remainder may be prepared as palletized flats at Enhanced Carrier Route
rates and Regular nonletter nonautomation rates if the number of
Regular nonletter nonautomation rate pieces does not exceed 15% of the
total number of pieces in the entire mailing job.
2.0 Package Preparation
2.1 General
Only carrier route packages are prepared. Packages are not required
in full carrier route trays.
2.2 Package Preparation
Package size: carrier route; required (10-piece minimum, fewer not
permitted). Carrier route package labels are based on the sack or tray
level in which placed:
a. No label is required if the package is placed in a correctly
labeled carrier route tray or sack.
b. Packages in 5-digit carrier routes trays and sacks must have a
facing slip unless the pieces in the package show a carrier route
information line or an optional endorsement line.
3.0 Tray Preparation--Letter-Size Pieces
3.1 Tray Preparation
Tray size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: required full tray; no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the prefixes under M031.
b. 5-digit carrier routes: required (no minimum); use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the prefixes under M031.
3.2 Line 2
Line 2: STD LTRS and:
a. Basic Carrier Route trays: ECRLOT and route type and number.
b. High Density trays: ECRWSH and route type and number.
c. Saturation trays: ECRWSS and route type and number.
d. 5-digit carrier routes trays: CR-RTS.
4.0 Sack Preparation--Other Pieces
4.1 Required Sacking
A sack must be prepared when the quantity of mail for a required
presort destination reaches either 125 pieces or 15 pounds of pieces,
whichever occurs first, subject to these conditions:
a. For identical-weight pieces, a single-piece weight of 1.92
ounces (0.12 pound) results in 125 pieces weighing 15 pounds.
Identical-weight pieces weighing 1.92 ounces (0.12 pound) or less must
be prepared using the 125-piece minimum; those that weigh more must be
prepared using the 15-pound minimum.
b. For nonidentical-weight pieces, mailers must either use the
minimum that applies to the average piece weight for the entire mailing
(divide the net weight of the mailing by the number of pieces; the
resulting average single-piece weight determines whether the 125-piece
or 15-pound minimum applies) or sack by the actual piece count or mail
weight for each sack, if documentation can be provided with the mailing
that shows (specifically for each sack) the number of pieces and their
total weight.
c. Mailers must note on the accompanying postage statement whether
they applied the 125-piece (``PCS'') or 15-pound (``WT'') threshold or
the method in 4.1b (``BOTH'').
4.2 Sack Preparation
Sack size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: required (minimum of 125 pieces/15 pounds,
smaller volume not permitted); use 5-digit ZIP Code
[[Page 10191]]
destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the
prefixes under M031.
b. 5-digit carrier routes: required (no minimum); use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the prefixes under M031.
4.3 Line 2
Line 2: STD, FLTS or 3C IRREG (as appropriate), and:
a. Basic Carrier Route sacks: ECRLOT and route type and number.
b. High Density sacks: ECRWSH and route type and number.
c. Saturation sacks: ECRWSS and route type and number.
d. 5-digit carrier routes sacks: CR-RTS.
5.0 Residual Mail
Pieces not sorted under 2.0 and either 3.0 or 4.0 must be prepared
as a separate mailing at Regular Standard Mail rates.
6.0 Bedloaded Bundles
6.1 Authorization
The RCSC manager serving the post office where the mailing is to be
made may authorize preparation of Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail
in bundles that are outside sacks if this preparation benefits the
USPS. Generally, authorization is approved only when the number of
bundles is not more than the number of sacks that would otherwise be
used in a mailing. The mailer or agent must submit an application for
each product, showing the name of the mailer, the frequency of mailing,
the post offices to which shipments are to be made, and the approximate
numbers of copies and bundles to be deposited at each office. The RCSC
manager rules on the application and informs the applicant in writing.
If an authorization is approved, the mailer or agent must be prepared
to provide information for future filings, similar to that required on
the original application, if requested by the RCSC manager.
Authorization is approved for a specific period, not to exceed 2 years.
Authorization to bundle instead of sack may be revoked when it is
determined that the preparation method no longer benefits the USPS.
6.2 Package Preparation
Package size for all presort levels: two-piece minimum, 20-pound
maximum. Preparation sequence and labeling of packages are subject to
2.0.
6.3 Bundle Preparation
Bundle size for all presort levels: minimum of two packages/20
pounds/1,000 cubic inches, 40 pounds maximum; smaller bundles not
permitted. Preparation sequence is subject to 4.0. Five-digit bundles
must contain pieces with the correct optional endorsement line or have
a red Label D. A facing slip is not required on packages too large to
be placed in a bundle.
6.4 Physical Characteristics
Bundles must be machinable by USPS sack-sorting equipment, unless
they consist of pieces for entry and delivery in the same SCF service
area. Machinability can be improved by cross-strapping and using heavy-
gauge shrinkwrap or stretchwrap on each bundle. Bundles entered and
delivered in the same SCF service area must be securely bound to
withstand normal handling without breakage or injury to USPS employees
or damage to mechanized sorting systems. Binding material must be
applied at least once around both the length and girth. Wire and metal
strapping are prohibited.
M630 Standard Mail (B)
1.0 Parcel Post
1.1 Marking
Pieces mailed at the single-piece parcel post rates do not require
a marking. Each piece mailed at the bulk parcel post rates must be
marked ``Bulk Parcel Post'' or ``Bulk PP.'' Each piece mailed at the
DBMC parcel post rates must be marked ``DBMC Parcel Post'' or ``DBMC
PP.'' If postage for the piece is paid with a permit imprint and the
office of mailing is in a different 3-digit ZIP Code area from the post
office in the return address, the 5-digit ZIP Code or the 3-digit ZIP
Code prefix of the office of mailing must be included in the indicia or
incorporated in the required marking (e.g., ``DBMC PP 011'' or ``DBMC
Parcel Post Mailed From 01101''). Pieces not clearly marked as required
are treated as single-piece rate parcel post and subject to additional
postage as necessary.
1.2 Separation
DBMC and bulk parcel post pieces must be separated by zones when
presented unless either the correct postage is affixed to each piece or
the mailing is prepared under 8.0. For mailings prepared in sacks,
pieces for more than one zone may not be placed in the same sack, and
sacks must be separated by zone when presented to the USPS.
1.3 Documentation
A complete, signed postage statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing at other than
single-piece rates when the full postage is not affixed to each piece.
2.0 Bound Printed Matter
2.1 Basic Standards
There are no presort, sacking, or labeling standards for single-
piece rate bound printed matter. All bulk rate bound printed matter
must be prepared under 2.6 and 2.7, except for carrier route bound
printed matter, machinable pieces, bedloaded bundles, or palletized
pieces and bundles under 3.0, 6.0, 7.0, and M045, respectively.
2.2 Separation
Pieces must be separated by zones when presented unless either the
correct postage is affixed to each piece or the mailing is prepared
under 8.0. Pieces for more than one zone may not be placed in the same
bundle or sack, and bundles and sacks must be separated by zone when
presented to the USPS.
2.3 Marking
Each piece claimed at single-piece bound printed matter rates must
be marked ``Bound Printed Matter.'' Each piece claimed at bulk bound
printed matter rates must be marked ``Bound Printed Matter'' and ``Bulk
Rate'' or ``Blk. Rt.'' Pieces not clearly marked as required are
treated as single-piece rate parcel post and subject to additional
postage as necessary.
2.4 Catalogs
In addition to marking under 2.3, catalogs must be marked ``CATALOG
RATE'' or ``CATALOG.'' For this standard, a catalog is bound printed
matter consisting entirely of advertising. Advertising includes all
material for the publication of which a valuable consideration is paid,
accepted, or promised, which calls attention to something for getting
people to buy it, seek it, sell it, or support it. Public service
advertisements for which no consideration is paid are not advertising
for postal purposes. Advertising includes:
a. Reading matter or other material, for the publication of which
an advertising rate is charged.
b. Articles, items, and notices that are reading matter inserted by
a custom or understanding that textual matter is to be inserted for the
advertiser or the advertiser's products in the publication where a
display advertisement appears.
c. Material in a publication advertising its own services or
issues, or any other business (or products or services) of its
publisher, whether display advertising or editorial or reading matter.
[[Page 10192]]
2.5 Documentation
A complete, signed postage statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing at other than
single-piece rates when the full postage is not affixed to each piece.
2.6 Sack Preparation
Sack size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required at 10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches;
smaller volume permitted; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages
for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required at 10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches (no
minimum for origin 3-digit(s)); smaller volume permitted; use L002,
Column A, for Line 1.
c. SCF: optional (10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches minimum;
smaller volume not permitted); use L002, Column C, for Line 1.
d. ADC: optional (no minimum); for Line 1, use L004 (for flats) or
L603 (for irregular parcels), as applicable.
e. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD followed
by the city/state/ZIP of the ADC serving the 3-digit ZIP Code of the
entry post office, as shown in L004 (for flats) or L604 (for irregular
parcels), as applicable.
2.7 Line 2
Line 2: STD 4C, FLTS or IRREG (as applicable), and:
a. Mixed ADC sacks: WKG.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
3.0 Carrier Route Bound Printed Matter
3.1 Preparation
Carrier route rate bound printed matter must be prepared under 3.5,
3.6, and 3.7, unless prepared as machinable pieces, bedloaded bundles,
or palletized under 6.0, 7.0, or M045, respectively.
3.2 Marking
Each piece claimed at carrier route bulk bound printed matter rates
must be marked ``Bound Printed Matter Blk. Rt.'' and ``Carrier Route
Presort'' or ``CAR-RT SORT.'' In addition, catalogs must be marked
``CATALOG RATE'' or ``CATALOG.'' Catalog is defined in 2.4. Residual
pieces in a carrier route bulk bound printed matter mailing may have
the ``Carrier Route Presort'' or ``CAR-RT SORT'' marking if the number
of residual pieces to any single 5-digit ZIP Code area does not exceed
5% of the total qualifying carrier route rate pieces addressed to that
5-digit area. The residual pieces must be separated from the qualifying
pieces when presented to the USPS. Pieces not clearly marked as
required are treated as single-piece rate parcel post and subject to
additional postage as necessary.
3.3 Documentation
A complete, signed postage statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing at other than
single-piece rates when the full postage is not affixed to each piece.
Documentation is subject to the general standards in P012. At the time
a mailing is submitted for presort and postage verification, the mailer
must submit a list of the number of qualifying and residual pieces for
each 5-digit ZIP Code and, within each, by carrier route. After the
first mailing, the postmaster may authorize the mailer to keep the
records and submit them on request. The mailer must keep these records
for 90 days after the mailing date, or until any action pending on the
recalculation of postage is resolved to USPS satisfaction.
3.4 Package Preparation
Packages must meet the applicable basic standards in M020. Package
size, preparation sequence, and labeling: Carrier route; required
(minimum of 10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches, smaller packages
not permitted); facing slip required unless the pieces in the package
show a carrier route information line.
3.5 Sack Preparation
Sack size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: optional (minimum of 10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000
cubic inches, smaller volume not permitted); use 5-digit destination of
packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes under
M031.
b. 5-digit carrier routes: required (no minimum); use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the prefixes under M031.
3.6 Line 2
Line 2: STD 4C, FLTS or IRREG (as applicable), and:
a. Carrier route sacks: route type and number.
b. 5-digit carrier routes sacks: CR-RTS.
3.7 Residual Pieces
Residual mail not sorted under 3.5, 3.6, and 3.7 may be prepared in
packages of fewer than 10 pieces each for individual carrier routes.
Residual pieces must be sacked under 2.0. Residual pieces may be
included in a carrier route presort rate mailing with the ``Carrier
Route Presort'' or ``CAR-RT SORT'' marking if postage is paid at the
applicable bulk bound printed matter rate. These pieces must be
separated from the qualifying carrier route rate pieces when presented
to the USPS. The number of residual pieces endorsed ``Carrier Route
Presort'' or ``CAR-RT SORT'' addressed to any single 5-digit ZIP Code
area must not exceed 5% of the total qualifying carrier route pieces
addressed to that 5-digit area.
4.0 Special Standard Mail
4.1 Basic Standards
There are no preparation standards for single-piece Special
Standard Mail. Presorted Special Standard Mail must be prepared under
4.4, 4.5, and 4.6, unless prepared as machinable pieces, bedloaded
bundles, or palletized, under 6.0, 7.0, or M045, respectively. Mailings
of nonmachinable (outside) pieces eligible for the presort rates must
be prepared to preserve the required presort as instructed by the
mailing office postmaster.
4.2 Marking
Each piece claimed at Special Standard Mail single-piece rates must
be marked ``Special Standard Mail.'' Each piece claimed at Presorted
Special Standard Mail rates must be marked ``Presorted Special Standard
Mail.'' Pieces not clearly marked as required are treated as single-
piece parcel post and subject to additional postage as necessary.
4.3 Documentation
A complete, signed postage statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing at other than
single-piece rates when the full postage is not affixed to each piece.
4.4 Sack or Bundle Preparation (5-Digit Rate)
Sack or bundle size, preparation sequence, and labeling: 5-digit
(only); required (minimum of eight pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches,
smaller volume not permitted); 20-pound maximum for bundles; no label
required on bundles; on sacks, use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of
pieces for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes under
M031.
4.5 Sack Preparation (BMC Rate)
Sack size, preparation sequence, and labeling: destination BMC
(only); required (minimum of four pieces/20
[[Page 10193]]
pounds/1,000 cubic inches, smaller volume not permitted); use L601 for
Line 1.
4.6 Line 2
Line 2: STD 4C and processing category. As required by the labeling
list, Line 2 processing code must be right-justified under the ZIP Code
on Line 1.
5.0 Library Mail
5.1 Basic Standards
There are no preparation standards for single-piece Library Mail,
except that, if 1,000 or more identical-weight Library Mail pieces are
mailed during a single day, they must be sorted and sacked under 2.0
unless prepared as machinable parcels or palletized subject to 6.0 or
M045, respectively.
5.2 Marking
Each piece of Library Mail must be marked ``Library Rate'' or
``Library Mail.'' Pieces not clearly marked as required are treated as
single-piece parcel post and subject to additional postage as
necessary.
5.3 Documentation
A complete, signed postage statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing when the full
postage is not affixed to each piece.
6.0 Machinable Parcels
6.1 Basic Standards
All Standard Mail (B) machinable parcels must be prepared in sacks
under 6.2 or palletized under M045. Parcel post or bound printed matter
pieces must be separated by zones when presented to the USPS unless
either the correct postage is affixed to each piece or the mailing is
prepared under 8.0. Pieces for more than one zone may not be placed in
the same bundle or sack, and bundles and sacks must be separated by
zone when presented to the USPS.
6.2 Sack Preparation
Sack size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (minimum of 10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic
inches, smaller volume not permitted); use 5-digit ZIP Code destination
of pieces for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes under
M031.
b. ASF: allowed and required only if DBMC rate is claimed for mail
deposited at ASF (minimum of 10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches,
smaller volume not permitted); use L602 for Line 1.
c. Destination BMC: required (minimim of 10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000
cubic inches, smaller volume not permitted); use L601 (L602 if DBMC
rate claimed) for Line 1.
d. Mixed BMC: required (no minimum); use L601 to show entry BMC for
Line 1.
6.3 Line 2
Line 2: STD 4C MACH and:
a. Mixed BMC sacks: MIXED BMC.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
7.0 Bound Printed Matter as Bedloaded Bundles
7.1 Authorization
The RCSC manager serving the post office where the mailing is to be
made may authorize preparation of bound printed matter in bundles that
are outside sacks if this preparation benefits the USPS. Generally,
authorization is approved only when the number of bundles is not more
than the number of sacks that would otherwise be used in a mailing. The
mailer or agent must submit an application for each product, showing
the name of the mailer, the frequency of mailing, the post offices to
which shipments are to be made, and the approximate numbers of copies
and bundles to be deposited at each office. The RCSC manager rules on
the application and informs the applicant in writing. If an
authorization is approved, the mailer or agent must be prepared to
provide information for future filings, similar to that required on the
original application, if requested by the RCSC manager. Authorization
is approved for a specific period, not to exceed 2 years. Authorization
to bundle instead of sack may be revoked when it is determined that the
preparation method no longer benefits the USPS.
7.2 Separation
Unless prepared under 8.0, pieces for more than one zone may not be
placed in the same package or bundle, and packages and bundles must be
separated by zone when presented to the USPS.
7.3 Package Preparation
Packages must meet the applicable basic standards in M020. Package
size: two-piece minimum, 20-pound maximum. Sort sequence and labeling
of packages are subject to 2.0 or 3.0, as applicable for the rate
claimed.
7.4 Bundle Preparation
Bundles must meet the applicable basic standards in M020. Bundles
must be machinable by USPS sack-sorting equipment, unless they consist
of pieces for entry and delivery in the same SCF service area.
Machinability can be improved by cross-strapping and using heavy-gauge
shrinkwrap or stretchwrap on each bundle. Bundles entered and delivered
in the same SCF service area must be securely bound to withstand normal
handling without breakage or injury to USPS employees or damage to
mechanized sorting systems. Binding material must be applied at least
once around both the length and girth. Wire and metal strapping are
prohibited.
7.5 Bundle Preparation
Bundle size, preparation sequence, and labeling: For all presort
levels: minimum of two packages/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches, 40 pounds
maximum; smaller bundles not permitted. Sort sequence is same as sacks
under 2.0 or 3.0, as applicable for the rate claimed. Bundles other
than carrier route and 5-digit bundles must be labeled with facing
slips that have similar information to that required for sack labels. A
facing slip is not required on carrier route bundles. The 5-digit
bundles must contain pieces with the correct optional endorsement line
or have a red Label D. Packages too large to be placed in a bundle do
not require a facing slip. Optional endorsement lines may be used
instead of facing slips on other than mixed states bundles, subject to
M013.
8.0 Commingling Zones
Zoned Standard Mail pieces need not be separated by zones when
presented other than as individual pieces or with full correct postage
affixed to each piece, subject to this section. Nonidentical-weight
pieces not bearing the full correct postage may not be commingled
unless authorized by the RCSC manager serving the office of mailing.
These provisions also apply to bundles of bound printed matter, whether
bedloaded, sacked, or palletized. The mail must be prepared and
documented:
a. Under P710 or P730; or
b. Under all these conditions:
(1) A unique number is assigned to each sack/pallet in the mailing
and printed on a separate line at the top of the sack/pallet label
(above the Line 1 information on bound printed matter).
(2) For bound printed matter and all palletized mailings, Line 2 of
the sack/pallet label for each sack/pallet that contains mail for more
than one zone also shows ``MIXED ZONES'' and the zone numbers (e.g.,
``STD FLTS MIXED ZONES 2 & 3'').
(3) A detailed list accompanies each mailing or mailing segment,
sequenced
[[Page 10194]]
numerically by the numbers assigned to sacks/pallets in the mailing,
that shows the post office where the mail is to be entered (entry post
office), a unique identifier for the mailing or mailing segment that
also appears on the corresponding postage statement(s), the name and
address of the mailer, the permit number (if applicable), the date of
mailing, individual line entries for each sack/pallet, and the total
number of pieces to each zone and in the entire mailing or mailing
segment. Line entries for sacks/pallets containing mail for only one
zone must show the sack/pallet number, the level of sortation, the zone
for which the mail is destined, and the total number of pieces for the
sack/pallet. Entries for sacks/pallets containing mail for more than
one zone must also show (by zone) the number of pieces to each 3-digit
ZIP Code area and the total number of pieces for that zone for the
sack/pallet. Mailings are not accepted if there are discrepancies
between the information in the detailed listing or on the postage
statement and the results of USPS random verification of piece counts
and postage.
M690 Nonprofit Standard Mail
M692 Basic and 3/5 Presort
[Insert text of current M302 and redesignate sections accordingly. In
1.2, replace the references ``M302,'' ``M305,'' and ``M306'' with
``M692,'' ``M695,'' and ``M696,'' respectively; in 1.2 and 3.3, replace
``bulk third-class'' with ``Nonprofit Standard Mail''; remove current
1.3 and 1.6 and renumber succeeding sections accordingly; in renumbered
1.5, replace ``special (nonprofit)'' with ``Nonprofit''; in renumbered
1.8a, replace ``City and 3-digit sacks'' with ``The 3-digit sacks''; in
2.1, remove ``or optional city''; remove 2.2c, 2.2f, 2.3c, 2.3f, 3.4b,
3.4e, 3.5b, 3.5e, 3.6b, and 3.6d and reletter succeeding sections
accordingly; in relettered 2.2e, 2.3e, 3.4d, and 3.5d, replace
``State'' with ``ADC''; in relettered 2.2f, 2.3f, 3.4e, 3.5e, and 3.6e,
replace ``M[ixed states]'' with ``M[ixed ADC]''; in relettered 2.3e,
replace ``orange Label S'' with ``pink Label A''; in relettered 3.5c,
replace ``Column B'' with ``Column C''; in relettered 3.5d, replace the
references ``L703 or L704'' with ``L004 (flats) or L603 (irregular
parcels), as applicable''; and in relettered 3.5e, replace ``origin
SDC'' with ``origin ``ADC'' and replace the references ``L706 or L707,
as applicable'' with ``L004''; in 3.6, replace ``3C'' with ``STD''; no
other change to text.]
M693 Carrier Route
[Insert text of current M303 and redesignate sections accordingly. In
1.2, replace ``bulk third-class'' with ``Nonprofit Standard Mail,'' the
reference ``M043'' with ``M045,'' the reference ``M303'' with ``M693,''
and the reference ``M304'' with ``M050''; remove 1.3 and 1.5, and
renumber succeeding sections accordingly; in renumbered 1.3, replace
the reference ``D300'' with ``D600''; in renumbered 1.5, replace the
reference ``1.5 or 1.6, as applicable'' and ``Exhibit 1.7'' with
``1.4'' and ``Exhibit 1.5,'' respectively; redesignate current Exhibit
1.7 as Exhibit 1.5; in 2.7, replace the reference ``1.7'' with ``1.5'';
in 3.3a, replace the references ``E334'' and ``M304'' with ``E632'' and
``M693,'' respectively; in 3.4b, replace the reference ``E334'' with
``E632''; and in 3.6, replace ``3C'' with ``STD 3C''; no other change
to text.]
M695 Machinable Parcels
[Insert text of current M305 and redesignate as M695; in 2.3, replace
the references to ``L705'' and ``L708'' with ``L601'' and ``L602,''
respectively; in 2.4, replace ``3C'' with ``STD 3C''; no other change
in text.]
M696 Irregular Parcels
[Insert text of current M306 and redesignate as M696; in 1.5, replace
``bulk third-class'' with ``Nonprofit Standard Mail''; in 2.0, replace
the reference ``M302'' with ``M692''; in 3.0, replace ``3C'' with ``STD
3C'' and the reference ``M302'' with ``M692.'']
M697 Bedloaded Bundles
[Insert text of current M307 and redesignate as M697; in 1.2, replace
``third-class mail'' with ``Nonprofit Standard Mail''; in 2.3, replace
the references ``M302 or M303'' with ``M692 or M693''; in 3.3, replace
the references ``M302 or M303'' with ``M692 or M693.'']
M698 Combined Mailings of Nonprofit Standard Mail and Standard
Mail (B) Machinable Parcels
[Insert text of current M073 and redesignate as M698. In 1.1, replace
``third-class and fourth-class'' with ``Nonprofit Standard Mail and
Standard Mail (B)''; in 1.2, replace ``third- or fourth-class'' with
``Nonprofit Standard Mail or Standard Mail (B) and remove ``class or'';
in 1.5, replace the reference ``M043'' with ``M045''; in 1.6 and 1.7,
replace ``class'' with ``category''; in 1.7 and 2.3, replace ``third-
and fourth-class'' with ``Nonprofit Standard Mail and Standard Mail (B)
pieces''; in 3.2, replace the references ``L705'' and ``L708'' with
``L601'' and ``L602,'' respectively; in 3.3, replace ``3C/4C'' with
``STD 3C/4C.'']
M800 Automation-Compatible Mail
[Move text of current M810 and M820 to M890 and renumber and revise as
shown below to apply only to Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit
Standard Mail. For automation rate First-Class, Regular Periodicals,
and Standard Mail (A), add new M810 (replacing M814, M815, and M816)
and new M820 (replacing M823), as follows (M812, M813, M817, M818,
M819, M825, and M827 are removed for these subclasses).]
[Add new M810 as follows:]
M810 Letter-Size Mail (Except Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit
Standard Mail)
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 Standards
Letter-size automation rate First-Class, Regular Periodicals, and
Standard Mail (A) must be prepared under M810, subject to the basic
eligibility standards applicable to the rate claimed. Package and tray
preparation are subject to the general standards in M010, M020, and
M030. Firm packages may not be included in mailings prepared under
M810. Effective January 1, 1997, trays must be labeled with barcoded
tray labels under M032.
1.2 Mailings
All pieces in a mailing must meet the standards in C810 and must be
sorted together to the finest extent required. A single automation rate
mailing (e.g., automation First-Class) may include pieces prepared at
all available rate levels (e.g., 5-Digit, 3-Digit, and Basic); all may
be reported on the same postage statement and documentation.
Information about the definition of a mailing and permissible
combinations is in M011.
1.3 Marking
First-Class pieces must be marked ``First-Class'' or ``Presorted
First-Class''; Standard Mail must be marked either ``Bulk Rate'' or
``Blk. Rt.'' In addition, all pieces must be marked ``AUTO'' (or
``AUTOCR'' for carrier route rate pieces, as appropriate). No markings
are required on Periodicals pieces. Pieces not claimed at an automation
rate must not be marked ``AUTO'' or ``AUTOCR.''
1.4 General Preparation
Grouping, packaging, and labeling are not generally required, with
these exceptions:
a. No packaging is required in full trays except for any mailing
consisting
[[Page 10195]]
entirely of card-size pieces. Pieces must be packaged to preserve
orientation in overflow and less-than-full trays.
b. Pieces must be grouped as specified below in 5-digit carrier
routes, AADC, and mixed AADC trays, and for Regular Periodicals.
c. Package labels are required only for Regular Periodicals.
1.5 Carrier Route Rates
Preparation of mail to qualify for automation carrier route rates
is optional for First-Class and Standard Mail (A) pieces, subject to
the availability limitations in E140 and E641.
1.6 Scheme Sortation
Scheme sortation is required for automation rate First-Class,
Regular Periodicals, and Standard Mail (A) mail for those 3-digit ZIP
Code prefix groups listed in L003. Each 3-digit scheme group is subject
to a single minimum volume standard.
1.7 First-Class Cards
Pieces claimed at First-Class card rates and pieces claimed at
First-Class letter rates are each subject to a separate minimum volume
criteria whether prepared as separate or combined mailings. Either way,
card-size and letter-size pieces may be presented at the same time and
reported on the same postage statement.
2.0 Preparation--First-Class and Standard Mail (A)
2.1 Grouping--Carrier Route Pieces
Grouping size, preparation sequence, and labeling: carrier route
(only); required (10-piece minimum; fewer not permitted); use an
optional endorsement line or carrier route information line. Group
pieces by carrier route in full 5-digit carrier routes trays, using
separator cards under M020, not packaging.
2.2 Tray Preparation
Tray size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: optional, but required for rate eligibility (full
trays); no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of pieces for
Line 1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes under M031.
b. 5-digit carrier routes (carrier route pieces only): optional,
but required for rate eligibility (no minimum); overflow allowed; use
5-digit ZIP Code destination of pieces for Line 1, preceded for
military mail by the prefixes under M031.
c. 5-digit: optional, but required for rate eligibility (150-piece
minimum); overflow allowed; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of pieces
for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes under M031.
d. 3-digit/scheme: required (150-piece minimum except no minimum
for origin 3-digit(s)); overflow allowed; for Line 1, use L002, Column
B.
e. AADC: required (150-piece minimum); overflow allowed; group
pieces by 3-digit ZIP Code prefix; use L801 for Line 1.
f. Mixed AADC: required (no minimum); group by AADC; for Line 1,
for First-Class Mail, use MXD, followed by the city/state/ZIP of the
facility serving the 3-digit ZIP Code of the entry post office, as
shown in L002, Column C, or, for Standard Mail, use L802 (mail entered
by the mailer at an ASF or BMC) or L803, as appropriate.
2.3 Line 2
Line 2: FCM or STD (as appropriate), LTRS BC, and:
a. Carrier route trays: route type and number.
b. 5-digit carrier routes trays: CR-RTS.
c. For scheme trays: SCHEME.
d. For mixed AADC trays: WKG.
3.0 Preparation--Periodicals
3.1 Tray Preparation
Tray size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (150-piece minimum); no overflow; use 5-digit
ZIP Code destination of pieces for Line 1, preceded for military mail
by the prefixes under M031.
b. Unique 3-digit: required for rate eligibility (150 piece
minimum); overflow allowed; use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. 3-digit/scheme: required (150-piece minimum except no minimum
for origin 3-digit(s)); overflow allowed; for Line 1, use L002, Column
B.
d. AADC: required (150-piece minimum); no overflow; use L801 for
Line 1.
e. Mixed AADC: required (no minimum); group by AADC; for Line 1,
use L802 (mail entered by the mailer at an ASF or BMC) or L803, as
appropriate.
3.2 Line 2
Line 2: PER or NEWS (as appropriate), LTRS BC, and:
a. For scheme trays: SCHEME.
b. For mixed AADC trays: WKG.
4.0 Documentation
A complete, signed postage statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing, supported by
documentation produced by PAVE-certified (or, except for Periodicals,
MAC-certified) software, or standardized documentation meeting the
standards in P012. Documentation of postage is not required if the
correct rate is affixed to each piece, or if each piece is of identical
weight and the pieces are separated by rate when presented for
acceptance. Combined mailings of Periodicals publications must also be
documented under M210. Periodicals are not subject to the standard for
supporting documentation produced by PAVE-certified software, or
standardized documentation meeting the standards in P012, until January
1, 1997.
[Add new M820 as follows:]
M820 Flat-Size Mail (Except Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit
Standard Mail)
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 Standards
Flat-size automation rate First-Class, Regular Periodicals, and
Standard Mail (A) must be prepared under M820, subject to the basic
eligibility standards applicable to the rate claimed. Package, sack,
and tray preparation are subject to the general standards in M010,
M020, and M030. Effective January 1, 1997, trays must be labeled with
barcoded tray labels under M032.
1.2 Mailings
All pieces in a mailing must meet the standards in C820 and must be
sorted together to the finest extent required. A single automation rate
mailing (e.g., automation First-Class) may include pieces prepared at
all available rate levels (e.g., 5-Digit, 3-Digit, and Basic); all may
be reported on the same postage statement and documentation.
Information about the definition of a mailing and permissible
combinations is in M011.
1.3 Packages
All pieces must be prepared in packages. When the pieces for a
presort destination must be prepared in more than one package or in
packages each with fewer pieces than the minimum required (because of
size or total number of pieces), rate eligibility is not affected if
the total number of pieces for that destination exceeds the applicable
minimum. Firm packages may not be included in mailings prepared under
M820.
1.4 Marking
First-Class pieces must be marked ``AUTO'' and either ``First-
Class'' or ``Presorted First-Class.'' Standard Mail must be marked
either ``Bulk Rate'' or ``Blk. Rt.'' and ``AUTO.'' No markings are
required on Periodicals pieces.
[[Page 10196]]
1.5 Limited Exception--Standard Mail (A)
The following exception is applicable until January 1, 1997; after
that time, preparation will be based solely on the standards for the
rate claimed and the processing category of the pieces, whether the
same standards apply to other pieces claimed at other rates and
produced as part of the same mailing job: When a Standard Mail (A)
mailing job could, by size, qualify for Regular Standard Mail
automation rates as either letters or flats, if part of the job is
prepared as palletized flats at automation rates for flats, the
remainder may be prepared as palletized flats at Enhanced Carrier Route
rates and Regular nonletter nonautomation rates if the number of
Regular nonletter nonautomation rate pieces does not exceed 15% of the
total number of pieces in the entire mailing job.
2.0 Preparation--First-Class Mail
2.1 Package Preparation
Package size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use
red Label D or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 3-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use
green Label 3 or OEL.
c. ADC: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use pink
Label A or OEL.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); use tan Label MS or OEL.
2.2 Tray Preparation
Tray size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required full trays, no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP Code
destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the
prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required full trays, no overflow, except no minimum for
origin 3-digit(s); use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. ADC: required full trays, no overflow; use L004 for Line 1.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); use MXD, followed by the city/
state/ZIP of the facility serving the 3-digit ZIP Code of the entry
post office, as shown in L002, Column C, for Line 1.
2.3 Line 2
Line 2: FCM FLTS BC, and:
a. Mixed ADC sacks: WKG.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
3.0 Preparation--Periodicals
3.1 Package Preparation
Package size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (six-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use
red Label D or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 3-digit: required (six-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use
green Label 3 or OEL.
c. ADC: required (six-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use pink
Label A or OEL.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); use tan Label MS or OEL.
3.2 Sack Preparation
Sack size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece
package minimum; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line
1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece
package minimum, no minimum for origin 3-digit(s); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
c. ADC: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece package
minimum; use L004 for Line 1.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use L802 (mail
entered by the mailer at an ASF or BMC) or L803, as appropriate.
3.3 Line 2
Line 2: PER or NEWS (as appropriate), FLTS BC, and:
a. Mixed ADC sacks: WKG.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
4.0 Preparation--Standard Mail
4.1 Package Preparation
Package size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use
red Label D or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 3-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use
green Label 3 or OEL.
c. ADC: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use pink
Label A or OEL.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); use tan Label MS or OEL.
4.2 Required Sacking
A sack must be prepared when the quantity of mail for a required
presort destination reaches either 125 pieces or 15 pounds of pieces,
whichever occurs first, subject to these conditions:
a. For identical-weight pieces, a single-piece weight of 1.92
ounces (0.12 pound) results in 125 pieces weighing 15 pounds.
Identical-weight pieces weighing 1.92 ounces (0.12 pound) or less must
be prepared using the 125-piece minimum; those that weigh more must be
prepared using the 15-pound minimum.
b. For nonidentical-weight pieces, mailers must either use the
minimum that applies to the average piece weight for the entire mailing
(divide the net weight of the mailing by the number of pieces; the
resulting average single-piece weight determines whether the 125-piece
or 15-pound minimum applies) or sack by the actual piece count or mail
weight for each sack, if documentation can be provided with the mailing
that shows (specifically for each sack) the number of pieces and their
total weight.
c. Mailers must note on the accompanying postage statement whether
they applied the 125-piece (``PCS'') or 15-pound (``WT'') threshold or
the method in 4.2b (``BOTH'').
4.3 Sack Preparation
Sack size, preparation sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (125-piece/15-pound minimum, smaller volume
not permitted); use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line
1, preceded for military mail by the prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required (125-piece/15-pound minimum, smaller volume
not permitted, except no minimum for origin 3-digit(s)); use L002,
Column A, for Line 1.
c. ADC: required (125-piece/15-pound minimum, smaller volume not
permitted); use L004 for Line 1.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use L802 (mail
entered by the mailer at an ASF or BMC) or L803, as appropriate.
4.4 Line 2
Line 2: STD FLTS BC and:
a. Mixed ADC sacks: WKG.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
5.0 Documentation
A complete, signed postage statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing, supported by
documentation produced by PAVE-certified (or, except for Periodicals,
MAC-certified) software, or
[[Page 10197]]
standardized documentation meeting the standards in P012. Documentation
of postage is not required if each piece is of identical weight, or if
the correct rate is affixed to each piece or the pieces are separated
by rate when presented for acceptance. Combined mailings of Periodicals
publications must also be documented under M210. Periodicals are not
subject to the standard for supporting documentation produced by PAVE-
certified software, or standardized documentation meeting the standards
in P012, until January 1, 1997.
[Add new M890, based on current M810 and M820, as follows:]
M890 Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail
M891 ZIP+4 Presort--Tray-Based Letter-Size Mailings
[Insert text of current M812 and redesignate as M891, revised to apply
only to Preferred Periodicals publications and Nonprofit Standard Mail,
as follows:]
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 Standards
Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail claimed at a
ZIP+4 presort rate must be prepared as a tray-based mailing under 1.2
through 1.7, 2.0, 4.0, and 5.0, or as a package-based mailing under
M892. Grouping, packaging, labeling, and traying are subject to M010,
M020, and M030.
1.2 Automated Sites
Mailings consisting entirely of pieces for the 3-digit areas listed
in L897 (``automated sites'') may be prepared under 3.0 rather than
2.0. Pieces for other ZIP Code areas must be prepared in a separate
mailing.
1.3 Grouping
Grouping is required for pieces for the same 3-digit ZIP Code
prefix in SCF trays and for pieces for the same AADC area in working
trays. Grouping by ZIP Code is not required in city or 3-digit trays.
1.4 Packaging
Packaging is required:
a. For mailings consisting entirely of pieces that qualify by size
for First-Class card rates, regardless of the actual rate claimed or
class of mail. Package labels are required in less-than-full trays.
b. For mail in overflow AADC trays, in mixed AADC trays, and in a
less-than-full working tray. Appropriate package labels are required in
these trays.
1.5 No Packaging
Packaging may not be used for larger than card-size pieces, except
that:
a. Mail in overflow trays must be packaged and labeled correctly as
for the corresponding trays (mail in a less-than-full tray for the
entry SCF must be sorted and labeled as 3-digit packages).
b. Mail in AADC trays may be packaged, and mail in mixed AADC trays
must be packaged into AADC packages.
1.6 Marking
Standard Mail must be marked ``Nonprofit Organization'' or the
authorized abbreviation and may be also marked ``ZIP+4'' or ``5-digit
ZIP+4'' (as appropriate). No marking is required on Periodicals.
1.7 Carrier Route
ZIP+4 rate mail and carrier route presort (or walk-sequence) rate
mail may not be included in the same mailing or reported on the same
postage statement.
2.0 Tray Preparation--Qualifying Mail
[In 2.2d, replace ``use L002, Column B, for Line 1 for 3-digit areas
listed in Column C; L804 for Line 1 for others'' with ``use L002,
Column C, except use L801 for indicated single 3-digit areas''; 2.2b
and 2.3, replace ``second-class mail'' with ``Periodicals''; in 3.3a,
replace ``L801'' with ``L897''; in 3.2b and 3.3b, replace ``L802'' with
``L898''; no other change to 12.0. Revise succeeding sections as
follows:]
3.0 Optional Preparation For Automated Sites--Qualifying Mail
[In 3.3a, replace ``L801'' with ``L897''; in 3.2b and 3.3b, replace
``L802'' with ``L898''; no other change to 3.0.]
[Replace current 4.0 with new 4.0 as follows:]
4.0 Residual Mail
Pieces remaining after packages and trays are prepared under 2.0 or
3.0 are residual (nonqualifying) mail. Residual Periodicals and
Standard Mail must be prepared as follows:
a. All pieces must be sorted by AADC area using L801 (or, for
automated site mailings, L899).
b. Quantities of 10 or more pieces for an AADC area must be
prepared as an AADC package (or, if possible, a full AADC tray).
Packaging is not required in full AADC trays. AADC packages of fewer
than 10 pieces are not permitted.
c. All AADC packages must be trayed in AADC or mixed AADC trays.
Pieces remaining after preparing full AADC trays and AADC packages must
be placed in separate working trays.
d. Pieces in less-than-full AADC overflow trays and in all mixed
AADC trays must be packaged and labeled as AADC packages using a pink
Label A or optional endorsement line. Separator cards are not
permitted.
e. Pieces in working trays must be grouped by AADC area. Pieces in
a less-than-full working tray must be prepared in working packages up
to 6 inches thick making as few packages as possible without regard to
AADC breaks. Separator cards are not permitted. Label packages in less-
than-full working trays with either a facing slip marked ``WORKING'' or
``WKG'' or the optional endorsement line ``WORKING.''
f. A piece count listing must be provided for all residual pieces
that shows by tray level and AADC area (listed by numeric AADC code
from L801 or, for automated site mailings, L899) the number of pieces
eligible for each rate and the number of pieces with and without a
ZIP+4 code.
g. Tray size:
(1) AADC: required full trays; one overflow tray permitted per
destination per mailing.
(2) Mixed AADC: required full trays; one less-than-full tray
permitted.
(3) Working: required full trays; one less-than-full tray
permitted.
h. Residual preparation sequence and Line 1 labeling:
(1) AADC: (required); use L801 or, for automated site mailings,
L899.
(2) Mixed AADC: (required); use L802 for mail entered at a BMC/ASF
or L803 for mail entered at all other facilities.
(3) Working: (required); use L802 for mail entered at a BMC/ASF or
L803 for mail entered at all other facilities.
i. For Line 2: class (PER or NEWS as applicable, or STD), followed
by:
(1) For AADC trays: AADC ZIP+4 PRESORT.
(2) For mixed AADC trays: ZIP+4 PRESORT PKGS.
(3) For working trays: ZIP+4 WORKING or ZIP+4 WKG.
[Revise 5.0 as follows:]
5.0 Documentation
5.1 Postage Statement
A complete, signed postage statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing. The endorsement
``M891'' must be placed at the top and, as appropriate, ``Automated
Site'' (if prepared under 3.0).
* * * * *
5.4 Standards
Documentation must include residual pieces and meet the basic
standards in
[[Page 10198]]
P012 and those below. Abbreviated documentation may be provided under
M896. Combined mailings of Periodicals publications must also be
documented under M210.
* * * * *
5.6 ZIP Code Option
Under the ZIP Code option, individual entries for each type of tray
destination must be in ascending numeric order by ZIP Code: by 5-digit
ZIP Code for 5-digit trays; by lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP Code for
city trays (Periodicals only); by 3-digit ZIP Code prefix for 3-digit
and SCF trays; by the 3-digit AADC code (preceded by ``AADC'') in L801
(or L899 for automated sites) for AADC, mixed AADC, and working trays.
Volume in overflow trays must be included in the corresponding ZIP Code
entry even though there is a list of overflow trays.
5.7 Tray Label Option
Under the tray label option, individual entries for each tray must
be listed sequentially by the unique tray number on each label or by
Line 1 on the label. The contents of each overflow tray are reported as
an individual entry even though there is a list of overflow trays. Each
tray entry must be subdivided as needed to report volume sequentially
by ZIP Code in the tray: by 5-digit ZIP Code for 5-digit trays; by
lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP Code for city trays (Periodicals only); by
3-digit ZIP Code for 3-digit and SCF trays; by the 3-digit AADC code
(preceded by ``AADC'') in L801 (or L899 for automated sites) for AADC,
mixed AADC, and working trays.
5.8 Line Entries
Under either option, each entry must report ZIP+4 coded (including
delivery point barcoded) and uncoded pieces by each rate for which
specific numbers of pieces are eligible, and a cumulative total for the
segment through that entry. As applicable, data on each line must be
subdivided further to report separately:
a. In Periodicals mailings, both in-county and outside-county
pieces and Level G/J1 and Level H/J3 rates.
b. In Standard Mail, pieces at each destination entry rate.
5.9 Subtotals and Summaries
Each column of data must be subtotaled at the end of each segment
of the report, and a summary must list data for the entire mailing,
including the residual. The summary must include:
a. The number of pieces with a ZIP+4 code or delivery point
barcode, the number without, the total number of pieces in the mailing,
and the percentage with ZIP+4 codes or delivery point barcodes.
b. Each rate (or weight increment, combination of rate and
discount, or other variable in 5.8), the number of pieces at each rate,
the total postage at each rate, and the total postage for the mailing.
(For Periodicals mailings, postage rates and computed totals may be
omitted.)
c. A list of overflow trays.
d. For postage-affixed mailings, further detail must be added as
needed to account for the value of postage affixed, if less than the
FR Doc. 96-5500 Classification Reform; Implementation Standards
applicable amount, and the net due, to yield the correct total postage.
M892 ZIP+4 Presort--Package-Based Letter-Size Mailings
[Insert text of current M813; redesignate as M892, revised to apply
only to Barcoded Preferred Periodicals publications and Nonprofit
Standard Mail, as follows:]
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 Standards
Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail claimed at a
ZIP+4 presort rate must be prepared as a package-based mailing under
2.0, 3.0, 5.0, and 6.0, or as a tray-based mailing under M891.
Grouping, packaging, labeling, and traying are subject to M010, M020,
and M030.
1.2 Automated Sites
Mailings consisting entirely of pieces for the 3-digit areas listed
in L897 (``automated sites'') may be prepared under 4.0 rather than
3.0. Pieces of Periodicals or Standard Mail for other ZIP Code areas
must be prepared in a separate mailing.
* * * * *
1.4 No Packaging
Packages or separator cards are not required for larger than card-
size pieces in full 5-digit trays, full AADC trays if the contents are
only residual AADC packages, and full working trays under 4.2 and 4.3.
* * * * *
[Add new 1.6 as follows:]
1.6 Marking
Standard Mail must be marked ``Nonprofit Organization'' or the
authorized abbreviation, and may be also marked ``ZIP+4'' or ``5-digit
ZIP+4'' (as appropriate). No marking is required on Periodicals.
2.0 Package Preparation
[In 2.1b and 2.2b, replace ``second-class mail'' with ``Periodicals'';
in 2.2a, replace ``Line'' with ``line''; no other change to 2.0.]
3.0 Tray Preparation--Qualifying Mail
[In 3.3d, replace ``use L002, Column B, for Line 1 for 3-digit areas
listed in Column C'' with ``use L002, Column C''; in 3.2b, 3.3b, and
3.4b, replace ``second-class mail'' with ``Periodicals''; in 3.3e,
change the reference from ``L804'' to ``L801''; no other change to
3.0.]
4.0 Optional Preparation For Automated Sites--Qualifying Mail
[In 4.5b, replace the reference ``L802'' with ``L898''; in 4.6a,
replace the reference ``L801'' with ``L897''; in 4.6b, replace the
reference ``L802'' with ``L898''; in 4.6c, replace the reference
``L803'' with ``L899''; no other change to 4.0.]
5.0 Residual Mail
5.1 Definition
Pieces remaining after packages and trays are prepared under 2.0,
3.0, and 4.0 are residual (nonqualifying) mail. Residual Periodicals
and Standard Mail must be prepared under an option in 5.2 and under
5.3. Residual mail from automated site mailings under 4.0 is subject to
specific instructions where applicable. All residual mail must be
presented under 5.4.
5.2 Options
Residual Periodicals and Standard Mail must be prepared under one
of these options and under 5.3.
a. Separate AADC Preparation. Residual mail is trayed separately
from qualifying mail. Groups of 10 or more residual pieces to an AADC
area in L801 (or L899 or automated site preparation) are placed in AADC
trays and mixed AADC trays. AADC trays are required if there are enough
pieces to fill a tray, but less-than-full AADC trays are permitted.
Residual pieces in mixed AADC trays and in less-than-full AADC trays
must be prepared and labeled as AADC packages. Remaining groups of
fewer than 10 pieces to an AADC are placed in separate working trays.
Packages and trays must be prepared under 5.3.
b. Intermixed SCF/AADC Preparation. Some residual mail is trayed
with qualifying mail. Groups of 10 or more residual pieces to the same
AADC area in L801 (or L899 for automated site preparation) are packaged
by AADC and placed in AADC trays (with qualifying mail) and in mixed
AADC trays. AADC trays are required if there are enough pieces to fill
a tray, but less-than-full AADC trays are permitted. AADC trays
containing only residual AADC packages are permitted. Mixed AADC trays
are limited to residual AADC
[[Page 10199]]
packages. At the mailer's option, residual mail may be packaged by 3-
digit ZIP Code prefix and placed in SCF trays (remaining pieces sorted
by AADC). A less-than-full tray for the entry SCF containing only
residual packages is permitted. Remaining groups of fewer than 10
pieces to an AADC are placed in separate working trays. Packages and
trays must be prepared under 5.3.
5.3 Required Preparation
Subject to 5.1 and 5.2, residual mail must be prepared as follows:
[In 5.3a(2) and 5.3a(3), replace ``L804'' and ``L803'' with ``L801''
and ``L899,'' respectively; in 5.3c(1), replace ``Column A, identified
with three bullets'' with ``Column C''; in 5.3c(2), replace ``L802''
with ``L898.'']
* * * * *
d. Tray preparation sequence and Line 1 labeling:
(1) Optional 3-digit (only for single 3-digit SCFs under option
5.2b); use L002, Column C. This tray is not available for the residual
mail of automated site mailings.
(2) Optional SCF (only for option 5.2b); use L898 for automated
site mailings, use L002, Column C, for other mailings.
(3) AADC (required); use L899 for automated site mailings, use L801
for other mailings.
(4) Mixed AADC (required); use L802 for mail entered at a BMC/ASF
or L803 for mail entered at all other facilities.
(5) Working (required); use L802 for mail entered at a BMC/ASF or
L803 for mail entered at all other facilities.
e. Line 2: class (PER or NEWS as applicable, or STD), followed by:
(1) On 3-digit and SCF trays
(option 5.2b only): ZIP+4 PRESORT.
(2) On AADC trays: AADC ZIP+4 PRESORT.
(3) On mixed AADC trays: ZIP+4 PRESORT PKGS.
(4) On working trays: ZIP+4 WORKING or ZIP+4 WKG.
[Remove current 5.4 and 5.5; renumber current 5.6 as 5.4.]
6.0 Documentation
6.1 Postage Statement
A complete, signed postage statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing. The endorsement
``M892'' must be placed at the top and, as appropriate, ``Automated
Site'' (if prepared under 4.0).
6.2 When Not Required
Documentation under 6.3 through 6.8 is not required if each piece
in the mailing is correctly ZIP+4 coded (or delivery point barcoded)
and either has postage affixed at the exact rate for which it qualifies
or is of identical weight, the pieces in each tray are subject to the
same rate, and the trays for each rate are segregated when presented to
the USPS.
6.3 Standards
Documentation must include residual pieces and must meet the basic
standards in P012 and those below. Abbreviated documentation may be
provided under M896. Combined mailings of Periodicals publications must
be documented under M210.
6.4 Segmentation, Labeling
Documentation must be segmented and labeled by qualification tier
(e.g., residual). Each tier must be further segmented by type of
package/grouping (5-digit, 3-digit, AADC, as applicable) under 6.5, or
have all represented 3-digit and 5-digit ZIP Codes (and AADC codes for
residual mail under 5.2 and 5.3) reported in a continuous sequential
list under 6.6 within each tier listing. Under either option, data must
be presented as shown in 6.7 and 6.8.
6.5 Type of Package Option
If the report is segmented by type of package, individual entries
for each destination must be in ascending numeric order by ZIP Code: by
5-digit ZIP Code for 5-digit packages; by lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP
Code for city packages (Periodicals only); by 3-digit ZIP Code prefix
for 3-digit packages; and, for AADC packages and AADC groups (in
working trays) under 5.2 and 5.3, by the applicable 3-digit AADC code
in L899 (for automated site mailings) or L801 (AADC entries must be
preceded by ``AADC'').
6.6 Sequential List Option
If the report is a sequential list, individual entries for each
destination must be listed sequentially by ZIP Code within each tier,
regardless of package type: by 5-digit ZIP Code for 5-digit packages;
by lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP Code for city packages (Periodicals
only); by 3-digit ZIP Code for 3-digit packages; and, for AADC packages
and AADC groups (in working trays) under 5.2 and 5.3, by the applicable
3-digit AADC code in L899 (for automated site mailings) or L801. (AADC
entries must be preceded by ``AADC.'') For Periodicals only, listings
for 5-digit, city, and 3-digit packages must be preceded by the
prefixes ``5DG,'' ``CTY,'' and ``3DG,'' respectively.
6.7 Line Entries
Under either option, each entry must separately report ZIP+4 coded
(including delivery point barcoded) and uncoded pieces by each rate for
which specific numbers of pieces are eligible; and a cumulative total
for the segment through that entry. As applicable, data on each line
must be subdivided further to report separately:
a. In Periodicals mailings, both in-county and outside-county
pieces, and Level G/J1 and Level H/J3 rates.
b. In Standard Mail, pieces at each destination entry rate.
6.8 Subtotals and Summaries
Each column of data must be subtotaled at the end of each segment
of the report, and a summary must list data for the entire mailing,
including the residual. The summary must include:
a. The number of pieces with a ZIP+4 code or DPBC, the number
without, the total number of pieces in the mailing, and the percentage
with ZIP+4 codes or DPBC.
b. Each rate (or weight increment, combination of rate and
discount, or other variable in 6.7), the number of pieces at each rate,
the total postage at each rate, and the total postage for the mailing.
(For Periodicals mailings, postage rates and computed totals may be
omitted.)
c. For postage-affixed mailings, further detail must be added as
needed to account for the value of postage affixed, if less than the
applicable amount, and the net due, to yield the correct total postage.
M893 Barcoded--Tray-Based Letter-Size Mailings
[Insert text of current M814 and redesignate as M893, revised to apply
only to Barcoded Preferred Periodicals publications and Nonprofit
Standard Mail, as follows:]
[Insert new 1.0 as follows:]
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 Standards
Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail claimed at a
Barcoded rate must be prepared as a tray-based mailing under 1.2
through 1.7 and 2.0 through 4.0, or as a package-based mailing under
M894 or M895. Grouping, packaging, labeling, and traying are subject to
M010, M020, and M030.
1.2 Grouping
Grouping is required for pieces for the same 3-digit ZIP Code
prefix in SCF trays, and for pieces for the same AADC area in working
trays under 3.0.
[[Page 10200]]
Grouping by ZIP Code is not required in city or 3-digit trays.
1.3 Packaging
Packaging is required for mailings consisting entirely of card-size
pieces and for mail in overflow AADC trays, in mixed AADC trays, and in
a less-than-full working tray. Appropriate package labels are required.
1.4 No Packaging
Packaging may not be used for larger than card-size pieces, except
that:
a. Mail in overflow trays must be packaged to maintain orientation.
b. Mail in a less-than-full tray for the entry SCF must be sorted
and labeled as 3-digit packages.
c. Mail in AADC trays may be packaged and mail in mixed AADC trays
must be packaged into AADC packages.
d. Mail in a less-than-full working tray under 3.0 must be
packaged.
1.5 5-Digit Trays
Only pieces with correct DPBCs may be sorted to 5-digit trays.
Other pieces for the same ZIP Code must be sorted to successive trays
as appropriate. Preparation of 5-digit trays is required only for mail
claimed at the 5-digit Barcoded rate.
1.6 Marking
Standard Mail must be marked ``Nonprofit Organization'' or the
authorized abbreviation and may be also marked ``Barcoded.'' No marking
is required on Periodicals.
1.7 Carrier Route
Barcoded rate mail and carrier route (or walk-sequence) rate mail
may not be included in the same mailing or reported on the same postage
statement.
2.0 Tray Preparation
[In 2.2d, replace ``use L002, Column B, for Line 1 for 3-digit areas
listed in Column C; L804 for Line 1 for others'' with ``use L002,
Column C, except use L801 for indicated single 3-digit areas''; 2.2b
and 2.3, replace ``second-class mail'' with ``Periodicals''; no other
change to 2.0.]
[Insert new 3.0, based on current 3.0, as follows:]
3.0 Residual Mail
Pieces remaining after packages and trays are prepared under 2.0
are residual (nonqualifying) mail. Residual Periodicals and Standard
Mail must be prepared as follows:
a. All pieces must be sorted by AADC area using L801.
b. Quantities of 10 or more pieces for an AADC area must be
prepared as an AADC package (or, if possible, a full AADC tray).
Packaging is not required in full AADC trays. AADC packages of fewer
than 10 pieces are not permitted.
c. All AADC packages must be trayed in AADC or mixed AADC trays.
Pieces remaining after preparing full AADC trays and AADC packages must
be placed in separate working trays.
d. Pieces in less-than-full AADC overflow trays and in all mixed
AADC trays must be packaged and labeled as AADC packages using a pink
Label A or optional endorsement line (OEL). Separator cards are not
permitted.
e. Pieces in working trays must be grouped by AADC area. Pieces in
a less-than-full working tray must be prepared in working packages up
to 6 inches thick making as few packages as possible without regard to
AADC breaks. Separator cards are not permitted. Label packages in less-
than-full working trays with either a facing slip marked ``WORKING'' or
``WKG'' or the OEL ``WORKING.''
f. A piece count listing must be provided for all residual pieces
that shows by tray level and AADC area (listed by numeric AADC code
from L801) the number of pieces eligible for each rate and the number
of pieces with a DPBC, the number of pieces without a DPBC that qualify
for ZIP+4 rates, and the number of other pieces.
g. Tray size:
(1) AADC: required full trays; one overflow tray permitted per
destination per mailing.
(2) Mixed AADC: required full trays; one less-than-full tray
permitted.
(3) Working: required full trays; one less-than-full tray
permitted.
h. Residual preparation sequence and Line 1 labeling:
(1) AADC: (required); use L801.
(2) Mixed AADC: (required); use L802 for mail entered at a BMC/ASF
or L803 for mail entered at all other facilities.
(3) Working: (required); use L802 for mail entered at a BMC/ASF or
L803 for mail entered at all other facilities.
i. For Line 2: class (PER or NEWS as applicable, or STD), followed
by:
(1) For AADC trays: LTRS AADC BARCODED.
(2) For mixed AADC trays: LTRS BARCODED PKGS.
(3) For working trays: LTRS BARCODED WKG.
[Revise 4.0 as follows:]
4.0 Documentation
4.1 Postage Statement
A complete, signed postage statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing. The endorsement
``M893'' must be placed at the top, based on the documentation method
used, and ``ZIP Code Option'' or ``Tray Label Option.''
* * * * *
4.4 Standards
Documentation must include residual pieces and meet the basic
standards in P012 and those below. Abbreviated documentation may be
provided under M896. Combined mailings of Periodicals publications must
also be documented under M210.
* * * * *
4.6 ZIP Code Option
Under the ZIP Code option, individual entries for each type of tray
destination must be in ascending numeric order by ZIP Code: by 5-digit
ZIP Code for 5-digit trays; by lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP Code for
city trays (Periodicals only); by 3-digit ZIP Code prefix for 3-digit
and SCF trays; by the 3-digit AADC code (preceded by ``AADC'') in L801
for AADC, mixed AADC, and working trays. Volume in overflow trays must
be included in the corresponding entry even though there is a list of
overflow trays.
4.7 Tray Label Option
Under the tray label option, individual entries for each tray must
be listed sequentially by the unique tray number on each label or by
Line 1 on the label. The contents of each overflow tray are reported as
an individual entry even though there is a list of overflow trays. Each
tray entry must be subdivided as needed to report volume sequentially
by ZIP Code in the tray: by 5-digit ZIP Code for 5-digit trays; by
lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP Code for city trays (Periodicals only); by
3-digit ZIP Code for 3-digit and SCF trays; by the 3-digit AADC code
(preceded by ``AADC'') in L801 for AADC, mixed AADC, and working trays.
4.8 Line Entries
Under either option, each entry must separately report DPBC mail,
correctly ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC mail (meeting the standards in C830),
and other pieces by each rate for which specific numbers of pieces are
eligible, and a cumulative total for the segment through that entry. As
applicable, data on each line must be subdivided further to report
separately:
a. In Periodicals mailings, both in-county and outside-county
pieces and Level G/J1 and Level H/J3 rates.
b. In Standard Mail, pieces at each destination entry rate.
4.9 Subtotals and Summaries
Each column of data must be subtotaled at the end of each segment
of
[[Page 10201]]
the report, and a summary must list data for the entire mailing,
including the residual. The summary must include:
a. The number of pieces with a DPBC, the number without, the total
number of pieces in the mailing, and the percentage with DPBCs.
b. Each rate (or weight increment, combination of rate and
discount, or other variable in 4.8), the number of pieces at each rate,
the total postage at each rate, and the total postage for the mailing.
(For Periodicals mailings, postage rates and computed totals may be
omitted.)
c. A list of overflow trays.
d. For postage-affixed mailings, further detail must be added as
needed to account for the value of postage affixed, if less than the
applicable amount and the net due, to yield the correct total postage.
M894 Barcoded--Two-Tier Package-Based Letter-Size Mailings
[Insert text of current M815 and redesignate as M894, revised to apply
only to Barcoded Preferred Periodicals publications and Nonprofit
Standard Mail, as follows:]
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 Standards
Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail claimed at a
Barcoded rate must be prepared as a tray-based mailing under M893, as a
two-tier package-based mailing under 1.2 through 1.6 and 2.0 through
5.0, or as a three-tier package-based mailing under M895. Grouping,
packaging, labeling, and traying are subject to M010, M020, and M030.
* * * * *
1.3 No Packaging
Packages or separator cards are not required for larger than card-
size pieces in full 5-digit trays, full AADC trays if the contents are
only residual AADC packages, and full working trays under 4.2 and 4.3.
[Replace current 1.4 with the following:]
1.4 Marking
Standard Mail must be marked ``Nonprofit Organization'' or the
authorized abbreviation and may be also marked ``Barcoded.'' No marking
is required on Periodicals.
* * * * *
[Remove current 1.7.]
2.0 Package Preparation
[In 2.1b and 2.2b, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals'';
remove the parenthetical in 2.1c and 2.2c; no other change to 2.0.]
3.0 Tray Preparation--Qualifying Mail
[In 3.3d, replace ``use L002, Column B, for Line 1 for 3-digit areas
listed in Column C'' with ``use L002, Column C''; in 3.2b, 3.3b, and
3.4b, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; in 3.3e, replace
the reference ``L804'' with ``L801''; no other change to 3.0.]
[Revise 4.0 as follows:]
4.0 Residual Mail
4.1 Definition
Pieces remaining after packages and trays are prepared under 2.0
and 3.0 are residual (nonqualifying) mail. Residual Periodicals and
Standard Mail must be prepared under an option in 4.2 and under 4.3.
All residual mail must be presented under 4.4.
4.2 Options
Residual Periodicals and Standard Mail must be prepared under one
of these options and under 4.3.
a. Separate AADC Preparation. Residual mail is trayed separately
from qualifying mail. Groups of 10 or more residual pieces to an AADC
area in L801 are placed in AADC trays and mixed AADC trays. AADC trays
are required if there are enough pieces to fill a tray, but less-than-
full AADC trays are permitted. Residual pieces in mixed AADC trays and
in less-than-full AADC trays must be prepared and labeled as AADC
packages. Remaining groups of fewer than 10 pieces to an AADC are
placed in separate working trays. Packages and trays must be prepared
under 4.3.
b. Intermixed SCF/AADC Preparation. Some residual mail is trayed
with qualifying mail. Groups of 10 or more residual pieces to the same
AADC area in L801 are packaged by AADC and placed in AADC trays (with
qualifying mail) and in mixed AADC trays. AADC trays are required if
there are enough pieces to fill a tray, but less-than-full AADC trays
are permitted. AADC trays containing only residual AADC packages are
permitted. Mixed AADC trays are limited to residual AADC packages. At
the mailer's option, residual mail may be packaged by 3-digit ZIP Code
prefix placed in SCF trays (remaining pieces sorted by AADC). A less-
than-full tray for the entry SCF containing only residual packages is
permitted. Remaining groups of fewer than 10 pieces to an AADC are
placed in separate working trays. Packages and trays must be prepared
under 4.3.
4.3 Required Preparation
Subject to 4.1 and 4.2, residual mail must be prepared as follows:
[In 4.3a(2) and 4.3a(3), replace ``L804'' with ``L801.'']
* * * * *
c. Tray size:
(1) Optional 3-digit (only for single 3-digit SCFs in L002, Column
C, and prepared under option 4.2b): required full trays; less-than-full
and overflow trays prohibited, except for one less-than-full tray for
the single 3-digit origin SCF.
* * * * *
d. Tray preparation sequence and Line 1 labeling:
(1) Optional 3-digit (only for single 3-digit SCFs under option
4.2b); use L002, Column C.
(2) Optional SCF (only for option 4.2b); use L002, Column C.
(3) AADC (required); use L801.
(4) Mixed AADC (required); use L802 for mail entered at a BMC/ASF
or L803 for mail entered at all other facilities.
(5) Working (required); use L802 for mail entered at a BMC/ASF or
L803 for mail entered at all other facilities.
e. Line 2: class (PER or NEWS as applicable, or STD), followed by:
(1) In 3-digit and SCF trays (option 4.2b only): ZIP+4 PRESORT.
(2) In AADC trays: AADC ZIP+4 PRESORT.
(3) In mixed AADC trays: ZIP+4 PRESORT PKGS.
(4) In working trays: ZIP+4 WORKING or ZIP+4 WKG.
[Remove current 4.4 and 4.5; renumber current 4.6 as 4.4.]
[Revise 5.0 as follows:]
5.0 Documentation
5.1 Postage Statement
A complete, signed postage statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing. The endorsement
``M894 must be placed at the top.
5.2 Standards
Documentation must include residual pieces and must meet the basic
standards in P012 and those below. Abbreviated documentation may be
provided under M896. Combined mailings of Periodicals publications must
be documented under M210.
5.3 When Not Required
Documentation under 5.4 through 5.8 is not required if each piece
in the mailing is correctly delivery point barcoded and either has
postage affixed at the exact rate for which it qualifies or is of
identical weight, the pieces in each tray are subject to the same rate,
and the trays for each rate are segregated when presented to the USPS.
[[Page 10202]]
5.4 Segmentation, Labeling
Documentation must be segmented and labeled by qualification tier
(e.g., residual). Each tier must be further segmented by type of
package/grouping (5-digit, 3-digit, AADC, as applicable) under 5.5, or
have all represented 3- and 5-digit ZIP Codes (and AADC codes for
residual mail under 4.2 and 4.3) reported in a continuous sequential
list under 5.6 within each tier listing. Under either option, data must
be presented as shown in 5.7 and 5.8.
5.5 Type of Package Option
If the report is segmented by type of package, individual entries
for each destination must be in ascending numeric order by ZIP Code: by
5-digit ZIP Code for 5-digit packages; by lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP
Code for city packages (Periodicals only); by 3-digit ZIP Code for 3-
digit packages; and, for AADC packages and AADC groups (in working
trays) under 4.2 and 4.3, by the applicable 3-digit AADC code in L801
(AADC entries must be preceded by ``AADC'').
5.6 Sequential List Option
If the report is a sequential list, individual entries for each
destination must be listed sequentially by ZIP Code within each tier,
regardless of package type: by 5-digit ZIP Code for 5-digit packages;
by lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP Code for city packages (Periodicals
only); by 3-digit ZIP Code prefix for 3-digit packages; and, for AADC
packages and AADC groups (in working trays) under 4.2 and 4.3, by the
applicable 3-digit AADC code in L801. AADC entries must be preceded by
the prefix ``AADC. For Periodicals only, listings for 5-digit, city,
and 3-digit packages must be preceded by the prefixes ``5DG,'' ``CTY,''
and ``3DG,'' respectively.
5.7 Line Entries
Under either option, each entry must separately report DPBC pieces,
correctly ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces (meeting the standards in C830),
and other pieces, by each rate for which specific numbers of pieces are
eligible; and a cumulative total for the segment through that entry. As
applicable, data on each line must be subdivided further to report
separately:
a. In Periodicals mailings, both in-county and outside-county
pieces and Level G/J1 and Level H/J3 rates.
b. In Standard Mail, pieces at each destination entry rate.
5.8 Subtotals and Summaries
Each column of data must be subtotaled at the end of each segment
of the report, and a summary must list data for the entire mailing,
including the residual. The summary must include:
a. The number of pieces with a DPBC, the number without, the total
number of pieces in the mailing, and the percentage with DPBCs.
b. Each rate (or weight increment, combination of rate and
discount, or other variable in 5.7), the number of pieces at each rate,
the total postage at each rate, and the total postage for the mailing.
(For Periodicals mailings, postage rates and computed totals may be
omitted.)
c. For postage-affixed mailings, further detail must be added as
needed to account for the value of postage affixed, if less than the
applicable amount, and the net due, to yield the correct total postage.
M895 Barcoded--Three-Tier Package-Based Letter-Size Mailings
[Insert text of current M816 and redesignate as M895, revised to apply
only to Barcoded Preferred Periodicals publications and Nonprofit
Standard Mail.]
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 Standards
Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail claimed at a
Barcoded rate must be prepared as a tray-based mailing under M893, as a
two-tier package-based mailing under M894, or as a three-tier package-
based mailing under 1.2 through 1.6 and 2.0 through 7.0. Grouping,
packaging, labeling, and traying are subject to M010, M020, and M030.
* * * * *
1.3 No Packaging
Packages or separator cards are not required for larger than card-
size pieces in full 5-digit trays in the 5-digit tier; or in the 3-
digit tier in full city, full 3-digit, full SCF, and full AADC trays
containing only residual AADC packages; or in full working trays under
6.2 and 6.3.
* * * * *
1.5 Marking
Standard Mail must be marked ``Nonprofit Organization'' or the
authorized abbreviation, and may be also marked ``Barcoded.'' No
marking is required on Periodicals.
* * * * *
[Remove 1.7.]
[In 3.3c and 5.3c, replace ``use L002, Column B, for Line 1 for 3-digit
areas listed in Column C'' with ``use L002, Column C''; in 3.3d,
replace ``L804'' with ``L801''; in 4.1a, 4.2a, 5.2a, 5.3a, and 5.4b,
replace ``second-class mail'' with ``Periodicals''; in 4.1b and 4.2b,
remove the parenthetical ``optional for...''; in 5.3d, 6.3a(2),
6.3a(3), and 6.3b(2), replace the reference ``L804'' with ``L801''; no
other change to 2.0 through 5.0.]
6.0 Residual Mail
6.1 Definition
Pieces remaining after packages and trays are prepared under 2.0
through 5.0 are residual (nonqualifying) mail. Residual Periodicals and
Standard Mail must be prepared under an option in 6.2 and under 6.3.
All residual mail must be presented under 6.4.
6.2 Options
Residual Periodicals and Standard Mail must be prepared under one
of these options and under 6.3.
a. Separate AADC Preparation. Residual mail is trayed separately
from qualifying mail. Groups of 10 or more residual pieces to an AADC
area in L801 are placed in AADC trays and mixed AADC trays. AADC trays
are required if there are enough pieces to fill a tray, but less-than-
full AADC trays are permitted. Residual pieces in mixed AADC trays and
in less-than-full AADC trays must be prepared and labeled as AADC
packages. Remaining groups of fewer than 10 pieces to an AADC are
placed in separate working trays. Packages and trays must be prepared
under 6.3.
b. Intermixed SCF/AADC Preparation. Some residual mail is trayed
with qualifying mail. Groups of 10 or more residual pieces to the same
AADC area in L801 are packaged by AADC and placed in AADC trays (with
qualifying mail) and in mixed AADC trays. AADC trays are required if
there are enough pieces to fill a tray, but less-than-full AADC trays
are permitted. AADC trays containing only residual AADC packages are
permitted. Mixed AADC trays are limited to residual AADC packages. At
the mailer's option, residual mail may be packaged by 3-digit ZIP Code
prefix and placed in SCF trays (remaining pieces sorted by AADC). A
less-than-full tray for the entry SCF containing only residual packages
is permitted. Remaining groups of fewer than 10 pieces to an AADC are
placed in separate working trays. Packages and trays must be prepared
under 6.3.
6.3 Required Preparation
Subject to 6.1 and 6.2, residual mail must be prepared as follows:
[In 6.3a(2) and 6.3a(3), replace ``L804'' with ``L801.'']
* * * * *
[[Page 10203]]
c. Tray size:
(1) Optional 3-digit (only for single 3-digit SCFs in L002, Column
C, and prepared under option 6.2b): required full trays; less-than-full
and overflow trays prohibited, except for one less-than-full tray for
the single 3-digit origin SCF.
* * * * *
d. Tray presort sequence and Line 1 labeling:
(1) Optional 3-digit (only for single 3-digit SCFs under option
6.2b); use L002, Column C.
(2) Optional SCF (only for option 6.2b); use L002, Column C.
(3) AADC (required); use L801.
(4) Mixed AADC (required); use L802 for mail entered at a BMC/ASF
or L803 or mail entered at all other facilities.
(5) Working (required); use L802 for mail entered at a BMC/ASF or
L803 for mail entered at all other facilities.
e. Line 2: class (PER or NEWS, as applicable, or STD), followed by:
(1) In 3-digit and SCF trays (option 6.2b only): ZIP+4 PRESORT.
(2) In AADC trays: AADC ZIP+4 PRESORT.
(3) In mixed AADC trays: ZIP+4 PRESORT PKGS.
(4) In working trays: ZIP+4 WORKING or ZIP+4 WKG.
[Remove current 6.4 and 6.5; renumber current 6.6 as 6.4, no change in
text.]
7.0 Documentation
7.1 Postage Statement
A complete, signed postage statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing. The endorsement
``M895'' must be placed at the top.
7.2 Standards
Documentation must include residual pieces and must meet the basic
standards in P012 and those below. Abbreviated documentation may be
provided under M896. Combined mailings of Periodicals publications must
be documented under M210.
7.3 When Not Required
Documentation under 7.4 through 7.8 is not required if each piece
in the mailing is correctly delivery point barcoded and either has
postage affixed at the exact rate for which it qualifies; or is of
identical weight, the pieces in each tray are subject to the same rate,
and the trays for each rate are segregated when presented to the USPS.
7.4 Segmentation, Labeling
Documentation must be segmented and labeled by qualification tier
(e.g., residual). Each tier must be further segmented by type of
package/grouping (5-digit, 3-digit, AADC, as applicable) under 7.5, or
have all represented 3- and 5-digit ZIP Codes (and AADC codes for
residual mail under 6.2 and 6.3) reported in a continuous sequential
list under 7.6 within each tier listing. Under either option, data must
be presented as shown in 7.7 and 7.8.
7.5 Type of Package Option
If the report is segmented by type of package, individual entries
for each destination must be in ascending numeric order by ZIP Code: by
5-digit ZIP Code for 5-digit packages; by lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP
Code for city packages (Periodicals only); by 3-digit ZIP Code prefix
for 3-digit packages; and, for AADC packages and AADC groups (in
working trays), by the applicable 3-digit AADC code in L801 (AADC
entries must be preceded by ``AADC'').
7.6 Sequential List Option
If the report is a sequential list, individual entries for each
destination must be listed sequentially by ZIP Code within each tier,
regardless of package type: by 5-digit ZIP Code for 5-digit packages;
by lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP Code for city packages (Periodicals
only); by 3-digit ZIP Code prefix for 3-digit packages; and, for AADC
packages and AADC groups (in working trays) under 6.2 and 6.3, by the
applicable 3-digit AADC code in L801. AADC entries must be preceded by
the prefix ``AADC.'' For Periodicals only, listings for 5-digit, city,
and 3-digit packages must be preceded by the prefixes ``5DG,'' ``CTY,''
and ``3DG,'' respectively.
7.7 Line Entries
Under either option, each entry must separately report DPBC pieces,
correctly ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces (meeting the standards in C830),
and other pieces, by each rate for which specific numbers of pieces are
eligible; and a cumulative total for the segment through that entry. As
applicable, data on each line must be subdivided further to report
separately:
a. In Periodicals mailings, both in-county and outside-county
pieces and Level G/J1 and Level H/J3 rates.
b. In Standard Mail, pieces at each destination entry rate.
7.8 Subtotals and Summaries
Each column of data must be subtotaled at the end of each segment
of the report, and a summary must list data for the entire mailing,
including the residual. The summary must include:
a. The number of pieces with a DPBC, the number without, the total
number of pieces in the mailing, and the percentage with DPBCs.
b. Each rate (or weight increment, combination of rate and
discount, or other variable in 7.7), the number of pieces at each rate,
the total postage at each rate, and the total postage for the mailing.
(For Periodicals mailings, postage rates and computed totals may be
omitted.)
c. For postage-affixed mailings, further detail must be added as
needed to account for the value of postage affixed, if less than the
applicable amount, and the net due, to yield the correct total postage.
M896 Elective Documentation--Letter-Size Mailings
[Insert text of current M817 and redesignate as M896; in 1.1, 2.2, 2.4,
3.1a, and 4.8, replace ``M812 through M816'' with ``M891 through
M895''; in 1.2, 4.7b, and 4.7d, replace the references ``M817,''
``M815,'' and ``M812 or M814'' with ``M896,'' ``M894,'' and ``M891 or
M893,'' respectively; no other change in text.]
[Remove current M818 and M819.]
M897 ZIP+4 Barcoded--Flat-Size Mail
[Insert text of current M823 and redesignate as M897, revised to apply
only to Barcoded Preferred Periodicals publications and Nonprofit
Standard Mail.]
1.0 Basic Standards
1.1 Standards
Flat-size Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail claimed
at a ZIP+4 Barcoded rate must be prepared as described below.
Packaging, labeling, and sacking are subject to M010, M020, and M030.
* * * * *
1.4 Marking
Standard Mail must be marked ``Nonprofit Organization'' or the
authorized abbreviation, and may be also marked ``Barcoded.'' No
marking is required on Periodicals.
[In 1.5, replace the reference ``M825'' with ``M898.'']
* * * * *
[Revise 2.0 as follows:]
2.0 Package Preparation--Mailings Subject to 85% Rule
2.1 Package Preparation--Periodicals
Package size, preparation sequence, and labeling for Periodicals:
a. 5-digit: required at six pieces; smaller packages permitted but
not
[[Page 10204]]
eligible for Level H rates; use red Label D or optional endorsement
line (OEL).
b. City: optional at six pieces; smaller packages permitted but not
eligible for Level H rates; use yellow Label C or OEL.
c. 3-digit: required at six pieces; smaller packages permitted but
not eligible for Level H rates; use green Label 3 or OEL.
d. SCF: required at six pieces; smaller packages permitted; use
green Label 3 or OEL.
2.2 Package Preparation--Standard Mail
Package size, preparation sequence, and labeling for Standard Mail:
a. 5-digit: required at 10 pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use
red Label D or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 3-digit: required at 10 pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use
green Label 3 or OEL.
c. SCF: required at 10 pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use
green Label 3 or OEL.
[Revise 3.0 as follows:]
3.0 Package Preparation--Mailings Not Subject to 85% Rule
3.1 Package Preparation--Periodicals
Package size, preparation sequence, and labeling for Periodicals:
a. 5-digit (ZIP+4 or DPBC pieces only; see 1.3): required at six
pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use red Label D or optional
endorsement line (OEL).
b. 5-digit (nonbarcoded pieces only; see 1.3): required at six
pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use red Label D or OEL.
c. City: optional at six pieces; smaller packages permitted but not
eligible for Level H rates; use yellow Label C or OEL.
d. 3-digit: required at six pieces; smaller packages permitted but
not eligible for Level H rates; use green Label 3 or OEL.
e. SCF: required at six pieces; smaller packages permitted; use
green Label 3 or OEL.
3.2 Package Preparation--Standard Mail
Package size, preparation sequence, and labeling for Standard Mail:
a. 5-digit (ZIP+4 or DPBC pieces only; see 1.3): required at 10
pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use red Label D or optional
endorsement line (OEL).
b. 5-digit (nonbarcoded pieces only; see 1.3): required at 10
pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use red Label D or OEL.
c. 3-digit: required at 10 pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use
green Label 3 or OEL.
d. SCF: required at 10 pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use
green Label 3 or OEL.
[Revise 4.0 as follows:]
4.0 Sack Preparation--Qualifying Mail
4.1 Sack Preparation--Periodicals
Sack size, preparation sequence, and labeling for Periodicals:
a. 5-digit: required with four packages; smaller volume permitted;
use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for
military mail by the prefixes under M031.
b. City: optional with four packages; smaller volume permitted; use
lowest ZIP Code for destination from L001 for Line 1.
c. 3-digit: required with four packages; smaller volume permitted;
use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
d. SCF: required with four packages; smaller volume permitted; use
L002, Column C, for Line 1.
e. ADC: required with no minimum; use L004 for Line 1.
4.2 Required Sacking--Standard Mail
For Standard Mail, a sack must be prepared when the quantity of
mail for a required presort destination reaches either 125 pieces or 15
pounds of pieces, whichever occurs first, subject to these conditions:
a. For identical-weight pieces, a single-piece weight of 1.92
ounces (0.12 pound) results in 125 pieces weighing 15 pounds.
Identical-weight pieces weighing 1.92 ounces (0.12 pound) or less must
be prepared using the 125-piece minimum, those that weigh more must be
prepared using the 15-pound minimum.
b. For nonidentical-weight pieces, mailers must either use the
minimum that applies to the average piece weight for the entire mailing
(divide the net weight of the mailing by the number of pieces; the
resulting average single-piece weight determines whether the 125-piece
or 15-pound minimum applies) or sack by the actual piece count or mail
weight for each sack, if documentation can be provided with the mailing
that shows (specifically for each sack) the number of pieces and their
total weight.
c. Mailers must note on the accompanying postage statement whether
they applied the 125-piece (``PCS'') or 15-pound (``WT'') threshold or
the method in 4.2b (``BOTH'').
4.3 Sack Preparation--Standard Mail
Sack size, preparation sequence, and labeling for Standard Mail,
subject to 4.2:
a. 5-digit: required at 125 pieces/15 pounds; smaller volume
prohibited; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line 1,
preceded for military mail by the prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required at 125 pieces/15 pounds; smaller volume
prohibited; use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. SCF: required at 125 pieces/15 pounds; smaller volume
prohibited; use L002, Column C, for Line 1.
d. ADC: required with no minimum; use L004 for Line 1.
4.4 Line 2
Line 2: class of mail and FLTS BARCODED (and, on city sacks, CITY
right-justified under the ZIP Code for Line 1).
5.0 Residual Mail
* * * * *
5.4 Sack Labeling
Labeling of residual sacks:
a. Line 1: ``MXD,'' followed by the applicable origin SCF name,
state, and ZIP Code from L802 for mail entered at a BMC/ASF or L803 for
mail entered at all other facilities.
* * * * *
6.0 Documentation
[In 6.2, replace the reference ``M825'' and ``E230'' with ``M898'' and
``E239,'' respectively; in 6.9b, replace ``second-class'' with
Periodicals''; revise other text as follows:]
* * * * *
6.7 Line Entries
Under either option, the mailer must identify 5-digit, city, 3-
digit, SCF, and residual packages with the prefixes ``5DG,'' ``3DG,''
``SCF,'' and ``WKG,'' respectively. Each entry must separately report
ZIP+4 or DPBC pieces, and 5-digit barcoded or nonbarcoded pieces, by
each rate for which specific numbers of pieces are eligible; and a
cumulative total for the segment through that entry. As applicable,
data on each line must be subdivided further to report separately in
Periodicals mailings both in-county and outside-county pieces and Level
G/J1 and Level H/J3 rates.
6.8 Actual Piece Count
In Standard Mail for which the mailer used the actual piece count
and weight of the mail to prepare sacks (``BOTH''), a separate listing
must identify for each sack the total number of pieces it contains and
their combined weight.
* * * * *
[[Page 10205]]
M898 Elective Documentation--Flat-Size Mailings
[Insert text of current M825 and redesignate as M898; in 1.1, 2.2, 2.3,
3.1a, 3.4, and 4.5, replace the reference ``M823'' with ``M897''; in
1.2, replace the reference ``M825'' with ``M898.'']
[Remove current M827.]
P Postage and Payment Methods
P000 Basic Information
P010 General Standards
P011 Payment
[In 1.1e, replace the reference ``(see E320)'' with ``(see E621)''; in
1.5 and 2.3, replace ``third-class [mail]'' with ``Standard Mail (A)'';
in 2.3, replace ``fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail (B)''; in 4.2 and
5.1, change the reference from ``E370'' to ``E670''; in 5.0 (heading)
and 5.1, replace ``[S]pecial [bulk] [T]hird-[C]lass'' with ``Nonprofit
Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
P012 Documentation
1.0 Purpose and Basic Standards
1.1 General
[Add to the end of the section:]
Documentation must be submitted when specified by the standards for
the rate claimed or postage payment method used.
* * * * *
[In 1.5, replace the reference ``G010'' with ``G020.'']
[Renumber current 2.0 and 3.0 as 3.0 and 4.0 and insert new 2.0 as
follows:]
2.0 Standardized Documentation--First-Class Mail, Regular Periodicals,
and Regular Standard Mail
2.1 Basic Standard
For First-Class Mail, Regular Periodicals, and Regular Standard
Mail, subject to the standards for the rate claimed, documentation must
be produced by software certified under the USPS Presort Accuracy
Validation and Evaluation (PAVE) or Manifest Analysis and Certification
(MAC) programs, appropriate for the accompanying class of mail and rate
claimed, or must be prepared to meet the criteria for standardized
documentation in this section. Standardized documentation contains the
elements described in 2.2 through 2.6, as applicable. Documentation
produced by PAVE- or MAC-certified software is considered standardized
documentation for purposes of these standards.
2.2 Format and Content
For First-Class Mail, Regular Periodicals, and Regular Standard
Mail, standardized documentation includes:
a. A heading identifying the listing as a ``USPS Qualification
Report'' must appear at the top of each page. The heading must contain
the name of the mailer and the mailing, a mailing identification code
corresponding to the postage statement, the date, the class of mail,
and either the DMM standard under which the mail was prepared (e.g.,
M800) or type of rates claimed.
b. Sequential page numbers in the body of the listing.
c. For mail in trays or sacks, the body of the listing reporting
these required elements:
(1) Tray/sack sortation level.
(2) Tray/sack destination ZIP Code (use destination on top line of
tray/sack label).
(3) Group destination for automation letter mail (number of pieces
for each carrier route in carrier routes trays, for each 3-digit ZIP
Code prefix in 3-digit scheme and AADC trays, and for each AADC in
mixed AADC trays), or package level and package destination for
automation flats and regular nonautomation presort mail (use the
presort destination as described in M020).
(4) Number of pieces claimed at each rate.
(5) A running total of pieces mailed that is continuous for each
mailing.
(6) The tray identification number and tray size (1-foot or 2-foot)
if available for letter mail in trays.
(7) Separate columns for each rate reported in the mailing, with
pieces reported in the appropriate column (group information either in
ZIP Code order and by level of sortation or by sortation level and
within each sortation level, by ZIP Code).
d. For packages on pallets, the body of the listing reporting these
required elements:
(1) Pallet sortation level.
(2) Pallet destination ZIP Code (use destination on top line of
pallet label).
(3) For each package, the sortation level and number of pieces
claimed at each rate.
(4) Separate columns for each rate reported in the mailing, with
pieces reported in the appropriate column, and a running total of
pieces mailed that is continuous for each mailing (group information
either in ZIP Code order and by level of sortation or by sortation
level and within each sortation level, by ZIP Code; report trays and
sacks on pallets by pallet level and destination; include all
information required in 2.2c for mail in trays or sacks).
(5) At the end of the listing, a summary report of the total number
of pieces claimed at each postage rate on the pallet by postage payment
method, and the total number of pieces and the total weight of the mail
on the pallet.
e. At the end of the documentation, a summary report of the total
number of pieces mailed at each postage rate for each mailing reported
on the listing by postage payment method (and by entry point for drop
shipment mailings) and the total number of pieces in each mailing. This
information must correspond to the information reported on the postage
statement(s) for the pieces reported. Additional data must be provided
if necessary to calculate the amount of postage for the mailing (or
additional postage due, or postage to be refunded) if nonidentical-
weight pieces that do not bear the correct postage at the rate for
which they qualify are included in the mailing, or if different rates
of postage are affixed to pieces in the mailing.
2.3 Rate Level Column Headings
The actual name of the rate level (or corresponding abbreviation)
is used for column headings required by 2.2 as shown below:
a. Automation First-Class and Standard Mail
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rate Abbreviation
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carrier Route [letters/cards]............ CB
5-digit [letters/cards].................. 5B
3-digit [letters/cards].................. 3B
3/5 [flats].............................. 3/5B
Basic [letters/cards and flats].......... BB
------------------------------------------------------------------------
b. Presorted First-Class Mail and nonautomation Standard Mail
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rate Abbreviation
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Presorted First-Class.................... Presort
3/5...................................... 3/5
Basic.................................... BS
------------------------------------------------------------------------
c. Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rate Abbreviation
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Saturation............................... WS
High Density............................. HD
Basic.................................... CR
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.4 Tray, Sack, Pallet, Package Sortation Level
The actual sortation level (or corresponding abbreviation) is used
for the tray, sack, pallet, or package sortation levels required by 2.2
as shown below:
[[Page 10206]]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sortation level Abbreviation
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carrier Route(s)......................... CR
5-Digit.................................. 5DG
3-Digit.................................. 3DG
3-Digit Scheme [barcoded letters]........ 3DGS
ADC...................................... n/a
AADC..................................... n/a
Mixed ADC................................ MADC
Mixed AADC............................... MAAD
SCF [pallets]............................ n/a
BMC or ASF............................... n/a
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.5 Combined and Copalletized Mailings
For combined or copalletized mailings of Periodicals and Regular
Standard Mail prepared under M045, the listing must show the following
additional information:
a. For mailings that require a separate postage statement, a column
that further identifies the contents of all trays/packages by product
or edition code, unless the mailer provides abbreviated documentation
under 2.2. The applicable rates for each product or edition must be
shown in the correct rate column and be summarized for each pallet and
for the entire mailing.
b. For large-volume mailing jobs reported on a single listing, the
mailer may provide abbreviated documentation that shows full package
detail for the first 20 pallets and every twentieth pallet thereafter
if the mailer maintains full package detail (by product or edition code
and rate) for the entire mailing job for 90 days and can provide it to
the Postal Service upon request within 3 working days. Abbreviated
documentation must include the rate summary by product or edition for
each pallet, including those for which full detail package listings are
not reported.
2.6 Optional Information
Standardized documentation may include additional information about
the pieces mailed (such as individual tray or sack total piece counts,
optional identification codes, package weights) if this information
does not conflict with the information required under 2.2 through 2.5.
[Revise the heading of renumbered 3.0 as follows:]
3.0 Standardized Documentation--Preferred Periodicals, Nonprofit
Standard Mail, and Standard Mail (B)
[Renumber current 2.1 through 2.6 as 3.1 through 3.6, respectively;
revise the introductory text of 3.1 as follows:]
3.1 Format and Content
For Preferred Periodicals, Nonprofit Standard Mail, and Standard
Mail (B), subject to the standards for the rate claimed, standard
documentation must be provided that includes: * * *
* * * * *
[Revise the heading of renumbered 4.0 as follows:]
4.0 Postage Statement
[Add the following sentence to the end of the section:]
* * * A facsimile postage statement produced by software certified
by the USPS Presort Accuracy Validation and Evaluation (PAVE) or
Manifest Analysis and Certification (MAC) programs, appropriate for the
accompanying class of mail and rate claimed, is considered a USPS-
approved form for purposes of these standards.
P013 Rate Application and Computation
1.0 Basic Standards
* * * * *
[In 1.2c, replace ``mailing statement'' with ``postage statement'';
revise 1.3, 1.4, and 1.5 as follows:]
1.3 Determining Single-Piece Weight
To determine single-piece weight in any mailing at single-piece
rates, in a bulk rate mailing at parcel post Standard Mail or Special
Standard Mail rates, or in any bulk rate mailing of nonidentical-weight
pieces (except at Periodicals rates), weigh each piece individually. To
determine single-piece weight in any other bulk or presort rate mailing
(except at Periodicals rates), weigh a sample group of at least 10
randomly selected pieces and divide the total sample weight by the
number of pieces in the sample. Express all single-piece weights in
decimal pounds rounded off to four decimal places.
1.4 Affixing Postage--Single-Piece Rate Mailings
In a postage-affixed single-piece rate Express Mail, First-Class,
Priority Mail, or Standard Mail (A) mailing, or in any postage-affixed
Standard Mail (B) mailing, the mailer must affix to each piece a value
in adhesive stamps, precanceled stamps, or meter impressions equal to
at least the postage required for the piece. (In a Standard Mail bound
printed matter rate mailing, the postage affixed to each piece must be
at least the sum of the applicable per pound charge based on the weight
of the piece plus one unit of the applicable per piece charge.) Less
than the correct amount of postage may be affixed only when permitted
by standard or specific USPS authorization.
1.5 Affixing Postage--Other Than Single-Piece Rate Mailings
In a First-Class, Priority Mail, or Standard Mail postage-affixed
mailing at other than a single-piece rate, the mailer must affix to
each piece a value in precanceled stamps or meter impressions that
equals at least the full amount of postage at the applicable rate; or
a. For First-Class and Priority Mail, the applicable postage at the
lowest rate in the mailing (or a lesser amount if authorized under
P760) if all additional postage is paid at the time of mailing.
b. For Standard Mail (A), the minimum per piece charge, with the
pound rate charge paid with permit imprint under the applicable
standards; or the applicable postage at the lowest rate in the mailing
(or a lesser amount if authorized under P760) if all additional postage
is paid at the time of mailing.
c. For bound printed matter Standard Mail, the postage affixed to
each piece must be at least the sum of the applicable per pound charge
plus one unit of the applicable per piece charge.
* * * * *
[Revise 3.0 (heading), 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3 as follows:]
3.0 Rate Application--Periodicals
3.1 Rate Elements
Postage for all Periodicals includes a pound rate charge, a piece
rate charge, and any discount for which the mail qualifies under the
corresponding standards.
3.2 Applying Pound Rate
Pound rates are applied to the weight of the mailpieces in the
mailing. Regular and Preferred outside-county pound rates are based on
the weight of the advertising portion of the mail sent to each postal
zone (as computed from the entry office) and the weight of the
nonadvertising portion without regard to zone. In-county pound rates
consist of a delivery unit zone rate and a uniform (unzoned) rate for
all other eligible mailpieces delivered within the county of
publication. The minimum pound rate charge for any zone or other group
for which a per pound charge is computed is 1 unit (1 pound) of the
pound rate charge. For example, three 2-ounce pieces for a zone are
subject to the minimum 1-pound charge.
3.3 Computing Weight of Advertising Portion
The pound rate charge is the sum of the charges for the computed
weight of the advertising portion of copies to each zone, plus an
additional flat (unzoned)
[[Page 10207]]
charge for the total weight of the nonadvertising portion of all copies
to all zones. For publications containing advertising, the minimum
pound rate charge for any zone to which copies are mailed is 1 unit
(pound) of the advertising pound rate charge. The minimum pound rate
charge for the nonadvertising portion is that which applies to all
weight not reported in the advertising (zoned) portion. (Authorized
nonprofit rate publications with an advertising percentage that is 10%
or less are considered 100% nonadvertising. When computing the pound
rates and the nonadvertising adjustment, use ``0'' as the advertising
percentage. Authorized nonprofit rate publications claiming 0%
advertising must pay the nonadvertising pound rate for the entire
weight of all copies to all zones.)
* * * * *
[Revise the heading of 4.0 as follows:]
4.0 Rate Application--Standard Mail (A)
[In 4.1a, 4.1b, and 4.1c, replace ``third-class'' with ``Standard Mail
(A)'' and revise the introductory text of 4.1 as follows:]
4.1 Single-Piece Rates
Single-piece rate postage is based on the rate that applies to the
weight (postage) increment of each piece. Single-piece rates are
applied differently, depending on weight: * * *
* * * * *
[Revise 4.3 as follows:]
4.3 Bulk Rates
Bulk rates are based on the weight of the pieces and are applied
differently to pieces weighing under or equal to a ``break point''
(rounded to four decimal places) and those weighing more:
a. Pieces weighing 0.2067 pound (3.3062 ounces) or less (Enhanced
Carrier Route rates), 0.2068 pound (3.3087 ounces) or less (Regular
rates), or 0.2149 pound (3.4383 ounces) or less (Nonprofit rates), are
subject to the minimum applicable rate per piece.
b. Pieces weighing more than 0.2067 pound (3.3062 ounces) (Enhanced
Carrier Route rates), 0.2068 pound (3.3087 ounces) (Regular rates), or
0.2149 pound (3.4383 ounces) (Nonprofit rates), are subject to a per
piece charge plus a per pound charge based on the weight of the piece.
[Revise the heading of 5.0 as follows:]
5.0 Rate Application--Standard Mail (B)
* * * * *
[Revise 5.4 as follows:]
5.4 Special Standard Mail
The Special Standard Mail rate is charged per pound or fraction
thereof; any fraction of a pound is considered a whole pound. (Rate
application is identical for the single-piece and presort rates.) For
example, if an item weighs 4.225 pounds, the weight (postage) increment
is 5 pounds. The minimum postage rate per piece is that for a piece
weighing 1 pound.
[In 5.5 (heading and text), replace ``Library'' with ``Library Mail.'']
* * * * *
[Revise the heading of 7.0 as follows:]
7.0 Computing Postage--Periodicals
* * * * *
[Revise 7.4 and 7.6 as follows:]
7.4 Pound Rate
To compute the pound rate postage for Regular and Preferred
outside-county copies, multiply the weight of the advertising and
nonadvertising portions by the corresponding rates, add the unrounded
results, and subtract any applicable discounts. To compute the pound
rate postage for in-county copies, multiply their total weight by the
corresponding rate per pound.
* * * * *
7.6 Nonadvertising Adjustment
To compute the nonadvertising adjustment (where applicable),
subtract the advertising percentage from 100, multiply the remainder by
the nonadvertising adjustment per piece, multiply the unrounded product
by the number of pieces, and round off the product to four decimal
places.
* * * * *
[Revise the heading of 8.0 as follows:]
8.0 Computing Postage--Standard Mail (A)
* * * * *
[Revise the heading of 9.0 as follows:]
9.0 Computing Postage--Standard Mail (B)
[In 9.1b and 9.3, replace ``[F]ourth-[C]lass'' with ``Standard Mail
(B)''; in 9.4, replace the reference ``R400'' with ``R600.'']
* * * * *
[Combine current 9.5 and 9.6 and revise as follows:]
9.5 Permit Imprint
In a permit imprint mailing:
a. At other than bulk bound printed matter rates, for each weight
increment multiply the number of pieces by the applicable rate per
piece, rounding off each product to four decimal places. Add the
products and round up the total postage to the nearest whole cent.
b. At bulk bound printed matter rates, for each zone multiply the
total unrounded weight of the pieces by the applicable rate per pound
(round off each product to four decimal places) and multiply the number
of pieces by the applicable rate per piece without rounding. Add the
pound and piece charges and round up the total postage to the nearest
whole cent.
P014 Refunds and Exchanges
[In 2.3, replace ``First-Class, third-class single-piece, and fourth-
class mail'' with ``First-Class Mail, single-piece rate Standard Mail
(A), or Standard Mail (B)''; in 2.4, replace ``third-class'' with
``Standard Mail (A)''; in 4.1, replace ``First-Class or bulk third-
class mail'' with ``First-Class Mail or bulk rate Standard Mail (A)'';
in 4.12a and 4.13a, replace ``3 ounces or less'' with ``less than the
applicable maximum weight for automation mail prescribed in C810''; in
4.12c, replace ``ZIP+4 Presort, or one of the Barcoded'' with ``or
automation''; in 4.13, replace ``[T]hird-[C]lass'' with ``Standard Mail
(A)''; in 4.13c, replace ``3/5 presort, basic ZIP+4, or one of the
Barcoded minimum per-piece rates'' with ``Nonprofit 3/5 presort,
Nonprofit Basic ZIP+4, or one of the Nonprofit Barcoded minimum per
piece rates, or at Regular 3/5 nonautomation or any automation minimum
per piece rates, as applicable''; in 4.14, replace ``will be'' with
``is''; in 4.14c, replace ``sleeve, band, and ACT tag'' with ``sleeve
and band''; in 4.14d, replace ``First- or third-class'' with ``First-
Class or Standard Mail (A),'' remove 4.14e, redesignate 4.14f as 4.14e
and replace ``third-class'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 4.15 and
4.17, replace ``[M]ailing [S]tatement[s]'' with ``[P]ostage
[S]tatement[s]''; remove 4.17c and redesignate 4.17d and 4.17e as 4.17c
and 4.17d, respectively; in redesignated 4.17d, replace ``in (b) (and
(c) and (d), as applicable)'' with ``in 4.17b (and 4.17c, if
applicable)''; no other change in text.]
P020 Postage Stamps and Stationery
P021 Stationery Bearing Postage
[In 1.1b, replace ``special bulk third-class'' with ``Nonprofit
Standard Mail''; in 2.5b, replace ``Express, First-, or third-class
mail'' with ``Express Mail, First-Class Mail, or Standard Mail (A)'';
in 2.5a, 2.5c, and 2.5d, replace ``third-class,'' ``THIRD-CLASS,''
``single-piece rate third-class mail,'' and ``third-class mail'' with
``Standard Mail (A),'' ``STANDARD MAIL,'' ``single-piece rate Standard
Mail (A),'' and ``Standard Mail
[[Page 10208]]
(A),'' respectively; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
P023 Precanceled Stamps
[In 1.2, replace ``third-class'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 1.12,
replace ``Third-Class Mail'' with ``Standard Mail''; in 3.5a, replace
``third-class mail'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; no other change in
text.]
P030 Postage Meters and Meter Stamps
[In 1.4, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; in 1.5 and
1.5c, replace ``special fourth-class'' with ``Special Standard Mail'';
in 1.5 and 1.5c, replace ``library rate mail'' with ``Library Mail'';
in 4.8 and 4.9, replace ``third- or [and] fourth-class'' with
``Standard Mail''; in 4.14, replace ``(e.g., ``Library Rate'')'' with
``(e.g., ``Presorted'')''; in 5.3a, replace ``First- or third-class
mail'' with ``First-Class Mail or Standard Mail (A)''; no other change
in text.]
P040 Permit Imprints
[In 2.5 and 3.5b, replace ``bulk third-class mail'' with ``bulk rate
Standard Mail (A)''; in 3.2, replace ``[S]econd-[C]lass [M]ail'' with
``Periodicals''; in 3.3, replace ``[T]hird- and [F]ourth-[C]lass
[M]ail'' with ``Standard Mail''; in 3.5a, replace ``third- or fourth-
class'' with ``Standard Mail''; in Exhibit 4.1a under the heading
``First-Class Official Mail,'' replace ``ZIP+4 Presort'' with ``First-
Class Mail AUTO''; in Exhibit 4.1a under the heading ``Third-Class
Official Mail,'' replace the heading with ``Standard Mail (A) Official
Mail'' and ``Third-Class Mail'' with ``Standard Mail (A)'' and
``Carrier Route Presort'' with ``AUTOCR''; in Exhibit 4.1a under the
heading ``Fourth-Class Official Mail,'' replace the heading with
``Standard Mail (B) Official Mail'' and ``Fourth-Class Mail'' with
``Standard Mail (B)'' and ``Special Fourth-Class Rate'' with ``Special
Standard Mail''; in Exhibit 4.1b under the heading ``First-Class
Mail,'' no change; in Exhibit 4.1b under the heading ``Third- and
Fourth-Class Mail (Date and Class Omitted),'' replace the heading with
``Standard Mail (Date and Class Omitted)'' and ``Library Rate'' with
``Library Mail''; in Exhibit 4.1b under the heading ``Third-Class Mail
(Regular Single-Piece and Bulk Rates),'' replace the heading with
``Standard Mail (A) (Regular Single-Piece and Bulk Rates)'' and delete
``CAR-RT SORT''; in Exhibit 4.1b under the heading ``Third-Class Mail
(Authorized Organizations),'' replace the heading with ``Nonprofit
Standard Mail''; in Exhibit 4.1b under the heading ``Fourth-Class Bulk
Rate Mail,'' replace the heading with ``Standard Mail (B) Bulk Rate
Mail,'' ``Fourth-Class'' with ``Standard Mail (B),'' and ``Special
Fourth-Class Rate'' with ``Special Standard Mail;'' in 5.5, replace
``mailing statements'' with ``postage statements''; no other change in
text.]
P070 Mixed Classes
[In 1.1, replace ``second-, third-, or fourth-class'' with
``Periodicals or Standard Mail''; in 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5,
2.5d, 2.6, 2.6d, 2.7, 2.9, 2.9b, and 3.2, replace ``First- or third-
class'' with ``First-Class or Standard Mail (A)''; in 1.2, 2.2, 2.7,
2.9b, 3.2, 5.2, and 6.8, replace ``mailing statement'' with ``postage
statement''; in 1.3, 2.7, and 2.8, replace ``third-class'' with
``Standard Mail (A)''; in 2.0 (heading), 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
2.9, 2.9a, and 4.2, replace ``[S]econd-[C]lass'' with ``Periodicals'';
in 3.0 (heading), replace ``[T]hird- and [F]ourth-[C]lass'' with
``Standard Mail''; in 5.0 (heading) and 5.4, replace ``[S]pecial
[F]ourth-[C]lass'' with ``Special Standard Mail''; no other change in
text.]
P100 First-Class Mail
* * * * *
2.0 Single-Piece Rates
[In 2.1, remove ``regular.'']
* * * * *
[Insert new 2.5 as follows:]
2.5 Pieces Presented With Automation Rate Mailings
Fewer than 500 pieces of single-piece rate First-Class Mail with
postage affixed may be presented with other postage-affixed pieces
claimed at automation rates, and may be reported on the same postage
statement as the automation rate pieces, if the single-piece rate
pieces meet these standards:
a. The pieces are physically separated from the automation rate
pieces.
b. The pieces do not bear the ``AUTO'' rate marking.
c. The pieces all bear the full correct single-piece rate postage.
(Additional postage must be affixed to each as necessary.)
* * * * *
[In 3.2, replace ``mailing statement'' with ``postage statement.'']
[Revise 4.0 as follows:]
4.0 Presorted Rates
4.1 Payment Methods
Postage on mailings made at Presorted First-Class rates must be
paid with meter stamps, permit imprints, or precanceled postage,
subject to the corresponding standards. All pieces in a mailing must be
paid with the same method unless otherwise permitted by standard or
RCSC authorization.
4.2 Postage Affixed, Generally
Unless permitted by other standards or RCSC authorization, when
precanceled postage or meter stamps are used, all pieces in a single
mailing must bear postage under one of these conditions:
a. The full correct postage at the First-Class rate for which they
qualify (no postage documentation is required).
b. The full correct postage at the lowest First-Class first ounce
rate applicable to the mailing (or list/job if more than one mailing is
produced as part of the same list/job) and full postage for any extra
ounce(s) (postage documentation is required).
c. Postage in an amount not less than the lowest available First-
Class first ounce letter or card rate (as applicable) if authorized by
the RCSC, plus full postage for any extra ounce(s) (postage
documentation is required).
4.3 Additional Postage
Additional postage for pieces not bearing sufficient postage when
presented to the USPS (e.g., under 4.2b or 4.2c) must be paid before
acceptance either using an advance deposit account or with a meter
strip attached to the postage statement accompanying the mail. When the
amount affixed is subject to RCSC authorization under 4.2c, credit will
not be given for postage affixed in excess of the authorized amount.
[Revise 5.0 (heading), 5.1, and 5.2 as follows:]
5.0 Automation Rates
5.1 Payment Methods
Postage on mailings made at automation rates must be paid with
meter stamps, permit imprints, or precanceled postage, subject to the
corresponding standards. All pieces in a mailing must be paid with the
same method unless otherwise permitted by standard or RCSC
authorization. Permit imprints may be used for mailings of
nonidentical-weight pieces only if authorized by the RCSC serving the
mailing post office.
5.2 Postage Affixed, Generally
Unless permitted by other standards (e.g., 5.2c) or RCSC
authorization, when precanceled postage or meter stamps are used, only
one payment method may be used in a mailing and each piece must bear
the correct postage at the rate for which it qualifies. In a metered or
precanceled stamp mailing:
a. Each piece weighing more than 1 ounce must bear the correct
amount of
[[Page 10209]]
additional postage to pay for the additional ounces.
b. Flat-size pieces must bear enough postage to include the
nonstandard surcharge if applicable.
c. Each piece may bear postage at the lowest rate applicable to
pieces in the mailing if all additional postage is paid at the time of
mailing with an advance deposit account or with a meter strip affixed
to the required postage statement.
d. Documentation meeting the standards in P012 must be presented
with the postage statement to show the number of pieces at each rate
and the computation of the additional postage due for pieces not
bearing full postage at the applicable rate (i.e., the difference
between what the pieces bear and the correct postage at the rate for
which each qualifies).
[In 5.3b, 5.3c, 5.4c, 5.4d, and 5.5, replace ``mailing statement'' with
``postage statement.'']
* * * * *
[Revise the heading of P200 as follows:]
P200 Periodicals
[In 1.3, 1.4, 1.9, 1.11, 1.12, and 2.4, replace ``second-class [mail]''
with ``Periodicals''; in 1.4 and 1.9, replace ``third- or fourth-
class'' with ``Standard Mail''; in 1.3, 1.5, 1.6, 1.9, 1.10, 2.1, 2.2,
and 2.4, replace ``mailing statement'' with ``postage statement'';
revise other sections as follows:]
* * * * *
[Revise 2.0 (heading) and 2.4 as follows:]
2.0 Monthly Postage Statement
* * * * *
2.4 Waiving Nonadvertising Rates
[Revise the first sentence as follows:]
Instead of marking a copy of each issue to show the advertising and
nonadvertising portions, the publisher may pay postage at the
advertising zone rates on both portions of all issues or editions of a
Periodicals publication (except a requester publication). * * *
* * * * *
[Remove current 3.0 (key rates were eliminated on November 1, 1995);
renumber current 4.0 as 3.0; in renumbered 3.0, replace ``second-
class'' with ``Periodicals'' and remove the last sentence.]
[Remove P300.1.0; move P300.2.0 and P300.3.0 to new P600.2.0 and
P600.3.0, respectively.]
[Remove P400.]
[No change to P500.]
[Insert new P600, based on current P300 and P400, as follows:]
P600 Standard Mail
1.0 Basic Information
1.1 Payment Method
Subject to the corresponding standards, postage for single-piece
rate Standard Mail may be paid by any method; postage for bulk rate
Standard Mail may be paid with meter or permit imprints. Postage for
bulk rate Standard Mail (A) may also be paid with precanceled stamps.
Postage-affixed pieces must bear the correct postage unless excepted by
standard. A permit imprint may be used for mailings of nonidentical-
weight pieces only if authorized by the RCSC serving the mailing
office. The mailer is responsible for proper payment of postage.
1.2 Postage Statement
The mailer must submit a complete and signed postage statement, as
specified in P012, with every Standard Mail mailing for which postage
is paid with a permit imprint or claimed at any bulk rate.
1.3 Pieces Presented With Automation Rate Mailings
Fewer than 200 pieces of single-piece rate Standard Mail (A) with
postage affixed may be presented with other postage-affixed pieces
claimed at automation rates, and may be reported on the same postage
statement as the automation rate p
FR Doc. 96-5500 Classification Reform; Implementation Standards
ieces, if the single-piece rate
pieces meet these standards:
a. The pieces are physically separated from the automation rate
pieces.
b. The pieces do not bear the ``AUTO'' rate marking.
c. The pieces all bear the full correct single-piece rate postage.
(Additional postage must be affixed to each as necessary.)
[Insert text of current P300.2.0; revise as follows:]
2.0 Nonautomation Rates
2.1 Identical-Weight Pieces
Bulk mailings of identical-weight pieces may have postage affixed
at the 3/5 rate to each piece in the mailing with additional postage
for pieces subject to the Basic rate paid either by an advance deposit
account or with a meter strip affixed to the back of the accompanying
postage statement. The 3/5 rate pieces and carrier route or walk-
sequence rate pieces may not be part of the same mailing and (except
under D600) may not be reported on the same postage statement.
[In 2.2, replace ``mailing statement'' with ``postage statement.'']
* * * * *
[Insert text of current P300.3.0; in 3.1, 3.2a, 3.2b, 3.3b, 3.3c, 3.4c,
3.4d, and 3.5, replace ``mailing statement'' with ``postage
statement''; revise as follows:]
3.0 Automation Rates
3.1 Method
[Revise the first sentence as follows:]
Postage on mailings made at all automation rates (including
Nonprofit ZIP+4 and Barcoded rates) must be paid with meter stamps,
permit imprints, or precanceled postage, under applicable standards. *
* *
* * * * *
P700 Special Postage Payment Systems
P710 Manifest Mailing System (MMS)
[In 1.0, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; in 2.2a, 2.2b,
2.7, 2.8, and 2.8c, replace ``mailing statement'' with ``postage
statement''; in 2.6 and 3.1, replace ``First- or third-class [mail]''
with ``First-Class or Standard Mail (A)''; in Exhibit 3.1, replace
``Third-Class Mail'' with ``Standard Mail (A); in 4.2c, replace
``mailing statement'' with ``postage statement.'']
* * * * *
3.0 Keyline
* * * * *
[Combine and revise current 3.3 and 3.4 as shown below and renumber
current 3.5 as 3.4 and 3.6 as 3.5.]
3.3 Rate Category Abbreviations--Letter-Size and Flat-Size Mail
Keylines on letter-size First-Class Mail or bulk Standard Mail (A)
may use only the rate category abbreviations in Exhibit 3.3a or Exhibit
3.3b, respectively. All pieces that qualify for more than one postage
rate must show each rate category abbreviation, separated by a ``/''
(slash) (e.g., ZP/DS).
Exhibit 3.3a
Rate Category Abbreviations--First-Class Mail
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Code Rate category
------------------------------------------------------------------------
AC Automation Carrier Route [letters
only].
AV Automation 5-Digit [letters only].
AT Automation 3-Digit [letters only].
AF Automation 3/5 [flats only].
AB Automation Basic.
FP Presorted.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
SP Single-Piece Rate (when fewer than 500
pieces accompany automation rate
mail).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 10210]]
Exhibit 3.3b
Rate category Abbreviations--Standard Mail (A)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Code Rate Category
------------------------------------------------------------------------
AV Automation 5-Digit [letters only].
AT Automation 3-Digit [letters only].
AF Automation 3/5 [flats only].
AB Automation Basic.
RA Regular 3/5.
RB Regular Basic.
EA Enhanced Carrier Route Automation
Basic [letters only].
EB Enhanced Carrier Route Basic.
EH Enhanced Carrier Route High Density.
ES Enhanced Carrier Route Saturation.
ZB Nonprofit 5-Digit Barcoded.
TB Nonprofit 3-Digit Barcoded.
BB Nonprofit Basic Barcoded.
ZP Nonprofit 3/5 ZIP+4.
ZN Nonprofit Basic ZIP+4.
ST Nonprofit Saturation Walk Sequence.
WS Nonprofit 125-Piece Walk Sequence.
CP Nonprofit Carrier Route.
FD Nonprofit 3/5.
BA Nonprofit Basic.
DB Destination BMC.
DS Destination SCF.
DD Destination Delivery Unit.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
SP Single-Piece Rate (when fewer than 200
pieces accompany automation rate
mail).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* * * * *
P720 Optional Procedure (OP) Mailing System
[In 1.1, replace ``First-, third-, and fourth-class'' with ``First-
Class and Standard Mail''; in 3.1 and 3.2, replace ``mailing
statement'' with ``postage statement''; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
P750 Plant-Verified Drop Shipment (PVDS)
[In 1.1, 1.2b, 1.3a, 2.4, 2.6, 2.12a, and 5.1, replace ``[S]econd-class
[mail]'' with ``Periodicals''; in 1.2c, 2.5, and 2.11, replace
``[T]hird- and [F]ourth-[C]lass [Mail]'' with ``Standard Mail''; in
1.3b, 2.2e, and 2.5, replace ``third- or fourth-class'' with ``Standard
Mail''; in 1.4, 2.2d, 2.2e, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.10, 6.2, 6.3a, 6.4, 6.5,
7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.4a, 7.4b, 7.4c, 7.4d, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.7a, 7.7f,
7.8, 7.9, 7.10, 7.11, and 7.12, replace ``mailing statement'' with
``postage statement''; in 2.7, 2.9, 2.12b, 5.2, and 6.0 (heading),
replace [T]hird-[C]lass [Mail]'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 2.8,
2.12c, 5.3, 7.0 (heading), and 7.2, replace ``[F]ourth-[C]lass [Mail]''
with ``Standard Mail (B)''; in 1.4, replace ``(or 8125-PV)'' with ``(or
Form 8125-PV)''; in 2.11, replace the reference ``C042'' with ``C023'';
no other change in text.]
[Revise the heading of P760 as follows:]
P760 First-Class or Standard Mail Mailings With Different Postage
Payment Methods
[In 1.1 and 4.1, replace ``First- or third-class'' with ``First-Class
or Standard Mail (A)''; in 1.5c, 1.5e, 4.1a, 4.1b, 4.2, 4.3, 4.5, and
4.7, replace ``mailing statement'' with ``postage statement''; in 3.1e,
3.2, and 3.3a, replace ``third-class'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in
Exhibit 4.6, replace ``First-Class and Third-Class ZIP+4 Barcoded,''
``ZIP+4 Barcoded,'' and ``3rd'' with ``First-Class and Standard Mail
Automation and Barcoded''; ``Automation or Barcoded,'' and ``STD,''
respectively; in Exhibit 4.6 under part A (section 2), replace ``3600-
PC'' and ``3602-PC'' with ``3600-P'' and ``3602-PR,'' respectively; add
``3602-PN''; in Exhibit 4.6 under part A (section 3), replace ``3600-
PC'' and ``3602-PC'' with ``3600-P'' and ``3602-PR,'' respectively; add
``3602-PN''; revise 2.0 as shown below; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
2.0 Postage
2.1 Metered Pieces--First-Class Mail
Metered pieces in a combined mailing must bear postage for the
first ounce at the Presorted rate or at an automation rate for which
the pieces are eligible and, if applicable, the full amount of postage
due for additional ounces. Additional postage due for metered pieces in
a combined mailing is deducted from the mailer's postage due advance
deposit account. Full postage must be affixed to accompanying single-
piece rate mail.
2.2 Metered Pieces--Standard Mail (A)
Metered pieces in a combined mailing must bear postage at a Regular
nonautomation presort or automation rate (or, in combined Nonprofit
mailings only, at a Nonprofit presort, ZIP+4, or Barcoded rate) for
which the pieces are eligible. Additional postage due for metered
pieces in a combined mailing is deducted from the mailer's postage due
advance deposit account. Full postage must be affixed to accompanying
single-piece rate mail.
2.3 Precanceled Pieces--First-Class Mail
Pieces with precanceled stamps in a combined mailing must bear
postage for the first ounce in any denomination of precanceled stamp
permitted in a Presorted or automation rate mailing and the full
applicable amount of postage due for additional ounces. Additional
postage due for precanceled stamp pieces in a combined mailing is
deducted from the mailer's postage due advance deposit account. Full
postage must be affixed to accompanying single-piece rate mail.
2.4 Precanceled Pieces--Standard Mail (A)
Pieces with precanceled stamps in a combined mailing must bear
postage in any denomination of precanceled stamp permitted in a Regular
automation rate or Nonprofit Barcoded rate mailing. Nonprofit postage
may appear only on pieces in a Nonprofit rate mailing that are eligible
for and claimed at a Nonprofit rate. Additional postage due for
precanceled stamp pieces in a combined mailing is deducted from the
mailer's postage due advance deposit account. Full postage must be
affixed to accompanying single-piece rate mail.
2.5 Permit Imprint--First-Class and Standard Mail (A)
Pieces in a combined mailing may bear the permit imprint of the
mailer or the mailer's clients. Postage for the permit imprint part of
a combined mailing must be paid by the permit imprint advance deposit
account maintained for combined mailings. Postage is deducted only from
this account, regardless of the permit numbers or company permit
imprints on pieces in a combined mailing.
* * * * *
R Rates and Fees
R000 Stamps and Stationery
1.0 Plain Stamped Envelopes
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quantity and Price
Denomination --------------------------------------
Type Size \1\ or Value Each (less
than 500) 500 1,000
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Regular....................................... 6-3/4 $0.32 $0.38 $168.20 $336.40
10 0.32 0.38 172.00 344.00
Single Window................................. 6-3/4 0.32 0.38 169.00 338.00
10 0.32 0.38 173.00 346.00
[[Page 10211]]
Special Regular \2\........................... 6-3/4 0.32 0.38 170.50 341.00
10 0.32 0.38 175.00 350.00
Bulk Rate Regular............................. 10 0.10 ........... 62.00 124.00
Nonprofit Regular............................. 6-3/4 0.05 ........... 33.20 66.40
10 0.05 ........... 37.00 74.00
Nonprofit Single Window....................... 6-3/4 0.05 ........... 34.00 68.00
10 0.05 ........... 38.00 76.00
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Size 10 includes all intermediate sizes through 10.
\2\ Envelopes with multicolor indicia such as a Love stamp or a hologram.
2.0 Personalized Stamped Envelopes
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quantity and Price
Type Size 1 Denomination --------------------------------------
or Value 50 500 1,000
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Regular....................................... 6-\3/4\ $0.32 $19.00 $172.60 $345.20
10 0.32 19.20 176.40 352.80
Single Window................................. 6-\3/4\ 0.32 19.10 173.40 346.80
10 0.32 19.30 177.40 354.80
Special Regular 2............................. 6-\3/4\ 0.32 19.00 174.90 349.80
10 0.32 19.20 179.40 358.80
Bulk Rate Regular............................. 10 0.10 ........... 66.40 132.80
Nonprofit Regular............................. 6-\3/4\ 0.05 ........... 37.60 75.20
10 0.05 ........... 41.40 82.80
Nonprofit Single Window....................... 6-\3/4\ 0.05 ........... 38.40 76.80
10 0.05 ........... 42.40 84.80
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Size 10 includes all intermediate sizes through 10.
2 Envelopes with a multicolor indicia such as a Love stamp or a hologram.
3.0 Postal Cards
Postal cards in sheets, per sheet: $8.00.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Denomination Description
------------------------------------------------------------------------
$0.20..................................... Domestic regular or
commemorative, cut single
card.
0.20...................................... Domestic regular, sheet of
40.
0.40...................................... Domestic regular, double
reply-paid card.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.0 Postage Stamps
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Purpose Form Denomination
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Regular Postage............. Panes of up to 100.. $0.01, .02, .03,
.04, .05, .10, .20,
.23, .25, .29, .30,
.32, .35, .40, .45,
.46, .50, .52, .55,
.60, .75, .78, $1,
$2, $3, $5, $10.75.
Booklets............ $0.20 ($2.00
booklet).
$0.32 ($3.20 or
$6.40 booklets).
Coils of 100........ $0.20, .23
(additional ounce
postage), .32.
Coils of 500........ $0.01, .02, .03,
.04, .05, .10, .20,
.23, .32, $1.
Coils of 3,000...... $0.01, .02, .03,
.04, .05, .10, .20,
.23, .32.
Coils of 10,000..... $0.05, .32.
Precanceled Bulk Rate Coils of 500, 3,000, Various
Postage--First-Class and and 10,000. nondenominated
Standard Mail (A). (available only to
permit holders).
Commemorative............... Panes of up to 50... $0.32 and other
denominations.
20-Stamp Booklets... $0.32 ($6.40
booklets).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
R100 First-Class Mail
1.0 Single-Piece
1.1 Cards
Single and double postal cards and postcards meeting the standards
in C100 and E110:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Type Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Single.................................... $0.20.
Double.................................... 0.40 ($0.20 each part).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 Letters, Flats, and Parcels
Letters, flats, and parcels (i.e., matter not eligible for card
rates); surcharge might apply under 9.0:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weight increment Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
First ounce or fraction of an ounce.......................... $0.32
Each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce................ 0.23
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 10212]]
2.0 Nonautomation--Presorted
2.1 Cards
Single and double postcards meeting the standards in C100 and E110:
$0.180 each.
2.2 Letters, Flats, and Parcels
Letters, flats, and parcels (i.e., matter not eligible for card
rates); surcharge might apply under 9.0:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weight increment Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
First ounce or fraction of an ounce:
(For pieces weighing not more than 2 ounces)................. 0.295
(For pieces weighing more than 2 ounces)..................... 0.249
Each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce................ 0.230
------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.0 Automation--Basic
3.1 Cards
Single and double postcards meeting the standards in C100 and E110:
$0.166 each.
3.2 Letters
Letter-size pieces other than cards:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weight increment Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
First ounce or fraction of an ounce:
(For pieces weighing not more than 2 ounces)................. 0.261
(For pieces weighing more than 2 ounces)..................... 0.215
Each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce................ 0.230
------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.3 Flats
Flat-size pieces; surcharge might apply under 9.0:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weight increment Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
First ounce or fraction of an ounce:
(For pieces weighing not more than 2 ounces)................. 0.290
(For pieces weighing more than 2 ounces)..................... 0.244
Each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce................ 0.230
------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.0 Automation--3-Digit
4.1 Cards
Single and double postcards meeting the standards in C100 and E110:
$0.159 each.
4.2 Letters
Letter-size pieces other than cards:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weight increment Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
First ounce or fraction of an ounce:
(For pieces weighing not more than 2 ounces)................. 0.254
(For pieces weighing more than 2 ounces)..................... 0.208
Each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce................ 0.230
------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.0 Automation--5-Digit
5.1 Cards
Single and double postcards meeting the standards in C100 and E110:
$0.143 each.
5.2 Letters
Letter-size pieces other than cards:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weight Increment Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
First ounce or fraction of an ounce:
(For pieces weighing not more than 2 ounces)................. 0.238
(For pieces weighing more than 2 ounces)..................... 0.192
Each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce................ 0.230
------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.0 Automation--\3/5\ (Flat-Size Pieces)
Flat-size pieces; surcharge might apply under 9.0:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weight Increment Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
First ounce or fraction of an ounce:
(For pieces weighing not more than 2 ounces)................. 0.270
(For pieces weighing more than 2 ounces)..................... 0.224
Each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce................ 0.230
------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.0 Automation--Carrier Route
7.1 Cards
Single and double postcards meeting the standards in C100 and E110:
$0.140 each.
7.2 Letters
Letter-size pieces other than cards:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weight Increment Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
First ounce or fraction of an ounce:
(For pieces weighing not more than 2 ounces)................. 0.230
(For pieces weighing more than 2 ounces)..................... 0.184
Each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce................ 0.230
------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nonautomation Automation
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Letters, Flats, and Parcels Weight Carrier
Not Over (ounces) Single- Basic 3-digit 5-digit Route Basic 3/5
Piece Presorted (Letter- (Letter- (Letter- (Letter- (Flat- (Flat-
Size) Size) Size) Size) Size) Size)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1\1\.............................. $0.32 $0.295 $0.261 $0.254 $0.238 $0.230 $0.290 $0.270
2................................. 0.55 0.525 0.491 0.484 0.468 0.460 0.520 0.500
3 \2\............................. 0.78 0.709 0.675 0.668 0.652 0.644 0.704 0.684
4................................. 1.01 0.939 \3\ 0.90
5 \3\ 0.89
8 \3\ 0.88
2 \3\ 0.87
4 0.934 0.914
5................................. 1.24 1.169 1.164 1.144
6................................. 1.47 1.399 1.394 1.374
7................................. 1.70 1.629 1.624 1.604
8................................. 1.93 1.859 1.854 1.834
9................................. 2.16 2.089 2.084 2.064
10................................ 2.39 2.319 2.314 2.294
11................................ 2.62 2.549 2.544 2.524
Postcards \4\
Postal Cards \4\
Single............................ $0.20 $0.180 $0.166 $0.159 $0.143 $0.140
Double............................ 0.40
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Surcharge might apply.
\2\ Presorted and automation rates for pieces weighing over 2 ounces reflect a first-ounce rate that is $0.046
lower than for pieces weighing 2 ounces or less; see 2.0 through 7.0.
\3\ Weight not to exceed 3.4383 ounces; pieces over 3 ounces subject to additional standards.
[[Page 10213]]
\4\ Rates shown apply to each single or double postcard when originally mailed; reply half of double postcard
must bear postage at applicable rate when returned unless prepared as business reply mail.
Summary of First-Class Rates
[Renumber current 10.0 as 8.0 and Exhibit 10.0a and Exhibit 10.0b as
Exhibit 8.0a and Exhibit 8.0b, respectively.]
8.0 Priority Mail
See Exhibit 8.0a and Exhibit 8.0b.
[Renumber current 11.0 as 9.0; revise text as follows:]
9.0 Nonstandard Surcharge
Surcharge per piece:
a. Single-piece rate: $0.11.
b. Nonautomation presort and automation rates (flat-size): $0.05.
[Combine current 12.0, 13.0, and 14.0 and renumber as 10.0; revise text
as follows:]
10.0 Fees
10.1 Mailing
Presort fee, per 12-month period, per office of mailing: $85.00.
10.2 Address Correction Service
Charge per notice issued:
a. Manual: $0.50.
b. Automated: $0.20.
10.3 Pickup
Priority Mail only, per occurrence: $4.95.
R200 Periodicals
1.0 Regular
1.1 Pound Rates
Per pound or fraction:
a. For the nonadvertising portion: $0.161.
b. For the advertising portion:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Zone Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Delivery Unit................................................ $0.169
SCF.......................................................... 0.190
1 & 2........................................................ 0.214
3............................................................ 0.224
4............................................................ 0.251
5............................................................ 0.292
6............................................................ 0.336
7............................................................ 0.388
8............................................................ 0.432
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 Piece Rates
Per addressed piece:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Automation \1\
---------------------
Presort Level Nonautomation Letter-
Size Flat-Size
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Basic.............................. $0.240 $0.194 $0.209
3/5................................ 0.202 0.173 0.175
Carrier Route...................... 0.119
High Density....................... 0.111
Saturation......................... 0.095
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Weight limits apply.
1.3 Discounts
Piece rate discounts:
a. Nonadvertising adjustment for each 1% of nonadvertising content:
$0.00057 per piece.
b. Delivery unit zone piece discount for each addressed piece
claimed in the pound rate portion at the delivery unit zone rate:
$0.021.
c. SCF zone piece discount for each addressed piece claimed in the
pound rate portion at the SCF zone rate: $0.011.
* * * * *
5.0 Science-of-Agriculture
5.1 Pound Rates
Per pound or fraction:
a. For the nonadvertising portion: $0.161.
b. For the advertising portion:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Zone Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Delivery Unit................................................ $0.127
SCF.......................................................... 0.143
1 & 2........................................................ 0.161
3............................................................ 0.224
4............................................................ 0.251
5............................................................ 0.292
6............................................................ 0.336
7............................................................ 0.388
8............................................................ 0.432
------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.2 Piece Rates
Per addressed piece:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Automation \1\
---------------------
Presort Level Nonautomation Letter-
Size Flat-Size
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Basic.............................. $0.240 $0.194 $0.209
3/5................................ 0.202 0.173 0.175
Carrier Route...................... 0.119 ......... .........
High Density....................... 0.111 ......... .........
Saturation......................... 0.095 ......... .........
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Weight limits apply.
5.3 Discounts
Piece rate discounts:
a. Nonadvertising adjustment for each 1% of nonadvertising content:
$0.00057 per piece.
b. Delivery unit zone piece discount for each addressed piece
claimed in the pound rate portion at the delivery unit zone rate:
$0.021.
c. SCF zone piece discount for each addressed piece claimed in the
pound rate portion at the SCF zone rate: $0.011.
6.0 Fees
6.1 Application
Fee, as appropriate, per application:
[[Page 10214]]
a. Original entry: $305.00.
b. News agent registry: $50.00.
c. Additional entry: $85.00.
d. Reentry: $50.00.
6.2 Address Correction Service
Charge per notice issued:
a. Manual: $0.50.
b. Automated: $0.20.
* * * * *
[Redesignate text of current R300 and R400 as parts of new R600 and
revise as shown below; no change in R500.]
R600 Standard Mail
1.0 Single-Piece (Standard Mail (A))
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weight Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Not over 1 oz \1\............................................ $0.32
Over 1 oz., but not over 2 oz................................ 0.55
Over 2 oz., but not over 3 oz................................ 0.78
Over 3 oz., but not over 4 oz................................ 1.01
Over 4 oz., but not over 5 oz................................ 1.24
Over 5 oz., but not over 6 oz................................ 1.47
Over 6 oz., but not over 7 oz................................ 1.70
Over 7 oz., but not over 8 oz................................ 1.93
Over 8 oz., but not over 9 oz................................ 2.16
Over 9 oz., but not over 10 oz............................... 2.39
Over 10 oz., but not over 11 oz.............................. 2.62
Over 11 oz., but not over 13 oz.............................. 2.90
Over 13 oz., but under 16 oz................................. 2.95
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Surcharge might apply.
2.0 Keys and Identification Devices
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weight Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Not over 2 oz................................................ $0.99
Over 2 oz., but not over 4 oz................................ 1.54
Over 4 oz., but not over 6 oz................................ 2.09
Over 6 oz., but not over 8 oz................................ 2.64
Over 8 oz., but not over 10 oz............................... 3.19
Over 10 oz., but not over 12 oz.............................. 3.74
Over 12 oz., but not over 14 oz.............................. 4.29
Over 14 oz., but under 16 oz................................. 4.84
------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.0 Regular
3.1 Letter-Size Minimum Per Piece Rates--Pieces 0.2068 lb. (3.3087
oz.) or Less
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nonautomation Automation 1
Entry discount ------------------------------------------------------
Basic 3/5 Basic 3-digit 5-digit
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
None..................................................... $0.256 $0.209 $0.183 $0.175 $0.155
DBMC..................................................... 0.243 0.196 0.170 0.162 0.142
DSCF..................................................... 0.238 0.191 0.165 0.157 0.137
DDU...................................................... ......... ......... ......... ......... .........
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Pieces weighing over 3 ounces subject to additional standards.
3.2 Nonletter-Size Minimum Per Piece Rates--Pieces 0.2068 lb.
(3.3087 oz.) or Less
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nonautomation Automation \1\
Entry Discount -------------------------------------------
Basic 3/5 Basic 3/5
------------------------------------------------------------------------
None........................ $0.306 $0.225 $0.277 $0.189
DBMC........................ 0.293 0.212 0.264 0.176
DSCF........................ 0.288 0.207 0.259 0.171
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Available only for automation-compatible flats.
3.3 Piece/Pound Rates--Pieces More Than 0.2068 lb. (3.3087 oz.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nonautomation Automation \2\
Piece/Pound Rate \1\ -------------------------------------------
Basic 3/5 Basic 3/5
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Per Piece................... $0.166 $0.085 $0.137 $0.049
Per Pound (includes entry
discount if applicable).... PLUS PLUS PLUS PLUS
None........................ 0.677 0.677 0.677 0.677
DBMC........................ 0.613 0.613 0.613 0.613
DSCF........................ 0.592 0.592 0.592 0.592
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Each piece is subject to both a piece rate and a pound rate.
\2\ Available only for automation-compatible flats.
4.0 Enhanced Carrier Route
4.1 Letter-Size Minimum Per Piece Rates--Pieces 0.2066 lb. (3.3062
oz.) or Less
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nonautomation Automation
---------------------------------------------
Entry Discount High
Basic \1\ Density Saturation Basic \1\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
None.............................................................. $0.150 $0.142 $0.133 $0.146
[[Page 10215]]
DBMC.............................................................. 0.137 0.129 0.120 0.133
DSCF.............................................................. 0.132 0.124 0.115 0.128
DDU............................................................... 0.127 0.119 0.110 0.123
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Pieces weighing over 3 ounces subject to additional standards.
4.2 Nonletter-Size Minimum Per Piece Rates--Pieces 0.2066 lb.
(3.3062 oz.) or Less
------------------------------------------------------------------------
High
Entry Discount Basic Density Saturation
------------------------------------------------------------------------
None.................................. $0.155 $0.147 $0.137
DBMC.................................. 0.142 0.134 0.124
DSCF.................................. 0.137 0.129 0.119
DDU................................... 0.132 0.124 0.114
------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.3 Piece/Pound Rates--Pieces More Than 0.2066 lb. (3.3062 oz.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
High
Piece/Pound Rate \1\ Basic Density Saturation
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Per Piece............................. $0.018 $0.010 $0.000
Per Pound (includes entry discount if
applicable).......................... PLUS PLUS PLUS
None.................................. 0.663 0.663 0.663
DBMC.................................. 0.599 0.599 0.599
DSCF.................................. 0.578 0.578 0.578
DDU................................... 0.552 0.552 0.552
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Each piece is subject to both a piece rate and a pound rate.
5.0 Nonprofit
5.1 Letter-Size Minimum Per Piece Rates--Pieces 0.2149 lb. (3.4383
oz.) or Less
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nonautomation Automation \1\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entry Discount Carrier Saturation Basic Basic 3-Digit 5-Digit
Basic 3/5 Route W S ZIP+4 3/5 ZIP+4 Barcoded Barcoded Barcoded
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
None................................................ $0.124 $0.111 $0.086 $0.083 $0.117 $0.107 $0.106 $0.101 $0.093
DBMC................................................ 0.112 0.099 0.074 0.071 0.105 0.095 0.094 0.089 0.081
DSCF................................................ 0.106 0.093 0.068 0.065 0.099 0.089 0.088 0.083 0.075
DDU................................................. ......... ......... 0.063 0.060
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Lower weight limits might apply.
5.2 Nonletter-Size Minimum Per Piece Rates--Pieces 0.2149 lb.
(3.4383 oz.) or Less
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nonautomation Automation \1\
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entry Discount Carrier 125-Piece Saturation Basic Basic 3-Digit 3/5
Basic 3/5 Route W S W S ZIP+4 3/5 ZIP+4 Barcoded Barcoded Barcoded
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
None..................................... $0.175 $0.161 $0.128 $0.126 $0.121 ......... ......... $0.149 ......... $0.143
DBMC..................................... 0.163 0.149 0.116 0.114 0.109 ......... ......... 0.137 ......... 0.131
DSCF..................................... 0.157 0.143 0.110 0.108 0.103 ......... ......... 0.131 ......... 0.125
DDU...................................... ......... ......... 0.105 0.103 0.098
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Available only for automation-compatible flats.
5.3 Piece/Pound Rates--Pieces More Than 0.2149 lb. (3.4383 oz.)
[[Page 10216]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nonautomation Automation \2\
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Piece/Pound Rate\1\ Carrier 125-Piece Saturation Basic Basic 3-Digit 3/5
Basic 3/5 Route W S W S ZIP+4 3/5 ZIP+4 Barcoded Barcoded Barcoded
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Per Piece................................ $0.074 $0.060 $0.027 $0.025 $0.020 ......... ......... $0.048 ......... $0.042
Per Pound (includes entry discount if
applicable)............................. PLUS PLUS PLUS PLUS PLUS ......... ......... PLUS ......... PLUS
None..................................... 0.470 0.470 0.470 0.470 0.470 ......... ......... 0.470 ......... 0.470
DBMC..................................... 0.410 0.410 0.410 0.410 0.410 ......... ......... 0.410 ......... 0.410
DSCF..................................... 0.386 0.386 0.386 0.386 0.386 ......... ......... 0.386 ......... 0.386
DDU...................................... ......... ......... 0.362 0.362 0.362
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Each piece is subject to both a piece rate and a pound rate.
\2\ Available only for automation-compatible flats.
6.0 Parcel Post
[Insert text and rates from current R400.1.0 with no change.]
7.0 Bound Printed Matter
7.1 Single-Piece
[Insert text and rates from current R400.2.0 with no change.]
7.2 Bulk
[Insert text and rates from current R400.3.0 with no change.]
7.3 Bulk Rate Computed Postage Amount With Postage Affixed
[Insert text and rates from current R400.4.0 with no change.]
8.0 Special Standard Mail
[Insert text and rates from current R400.5.0 with no change.]
9.0 Library Mail
[Insert text and rates from current R400.6.0 with no change.]
10.0 Fees
10.1 Mailing Fees
Fee, as appropriate, per 12-month period:
a. Regular, Enhanced Carrier Route, and Nonprofit rates: $85.00.
b. Parcel post destination BMC rate: $85.00.
c. Presorted Special Standard Mail: $85.00.
10.2 Address Correction Service
Charge per notice issued:
a. Manual: $0.50.
b. Automated: $0.20.
10.3 Pickup
Parcel post only, per occurrence: $4.95.
11.0 Nonstandard Surcharge
Single-piece rate Standard Mail (A) only, per piece: $0.11.
S Special Services
S000 Miscellaneous Services
* * * * *
[Revise the heading of S020 as follows:]
S020 Money Orders and Other Services
[Revise the headings of 1.0, 2.0, and 3.0 as ``Issuing Money Orders,''
``Cashing Money Orders,'' and ``Use of Federal Reserve System,''
respectively.]
[Add new 4.0, based on S030.1.0, as follows:]
4.0 Nonpostal Services
4.1 Bird Stamps
Migratory-bird hunting and conservation stamps (``bird stamps'')
are required by federal law for the hunting of migratory birds, such as
ducks and geese. As a public convenience, these stamps are sold at all
post offices in CAGs A through J and, based on demand, at designated
offices in CAGs K and L. These post offices act as agents of the
federal government for this function. Blocks composed of two or more
attached unused stamps, sold on consignment to any person but not
resold, may be redeemed at any time on or before the last day of the
stamp year. Stamps may not be redeemed if they are validated by
signature or appear removed from a hunting license or identification
card.
[Redesignate current S030.2.0, S030.3.0, and S030.4.0 as S020.4.2,
S020.4.3, and S020.4.4, respectively; no other change in text; remove
current S030.]
S070 Mixed Classes
[In 1.1, replace ``third- or fourth-class mail'' with ``Standard
Mail''; in 1.2, replace ``third- and fourth-class'' with ``Standard
Mail''; no other change in text.]
S500 Special Services for Express Mail
[In 3.0, replace ``third- or fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail''; no
other change in text.]
S900 Special Postal Services
* * * * *
S913 Insured Mail
[In 1.2a, replace ``Third- and fourth-class mail'' with ``Standard
Mail''; in 1.2b, replace ``Third- or fourth-class,'' ``Third-Class
Mail,'' and ``Fourth-Class Mail'' with ``Standard Mail,'' ``Standard
Mail (A),'' and ``Standard Mail (B),'' respectively; no other change in
text.]
S914 Certificate of Mailing
[In 1.2, delete ``or for First-, third-, and fourth-class matter
bearing an official mail indicia''; in revised 1.2, replace ``First-,
third-, and fourth-class matter'' with ``First-Class and Standard
Mail''; in 1.6, replace ``third-class mail'' with ``Standard Mail
(A)''; delete 2.3 and renumber current 2.4 as 2.3''; no other change in
text.]
S915 Return Receipts
1.0 Basic Information
* * * * *
[Replace current 1.4 with new 1.4 as follows:]
1.4 Postage and Fees
The applicable fee for return receipt service must be paid in
addition to postage and other fees. For purposes of computing postage,
the weight of the return receipt is excluded from the weight of the
mailpiece to which it is attached.
* * * * *
S917 Return Receipt for Merchandise
[In 1.2, replace ``third-class,'' ``special fourth-class,'' and
``library rates of postage'' with ``Standard Mail (A),'' ``Special
Standard Mail,'' and ``Library Mail postage rates,'' respectively; in
1.3, replace ``third-class'' and ``third-class
[[Page 10217]]
and fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail (A)'' and ``Standard Mail,''
respectively; no other change in text.]
S921 Collect on Delivery (COD) Mail
[In 1.2, replace ``First-, third-, fourth-class, and Express Mail''
with ``Express Mail, First-Class and Priority Mail, and Standard
Mail''; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
S923 Merchandise Return Service
[In 1.1, replace ``third-class, and fourth-class mail,'' ``special
fourth-class,'' and ``library rate'' with ``and Standard Mail,''
``Special Standard Mail,'' and ``Library Mail,'' respectively; in 1.7,
replace ``First-Class, third-class, and fourth-class'' with ``First-
Class and Standard Mail''; in 1.10, replace ``single-piece third-class
or fourth-class parcel post'' with ``Standard Mail single-piece Regular
or parcel post''; in 1.11, replace ``or third- or fourth-class,''
``Special fourth-class,'' and ``library rate'' with ``or Standard Mail
(A) or Standard Mail (B),'' ``Special Standard Mail,'' and ``Library
Mail,'' respectively; in 3.2, replace ``First-, third-, or fourth-
class'' with ``First-Class, or Standard Mail''; in 4.1, replace
``third- or fourth-class,'' ``Third-Class Mail,'' and ``Fourth-Class
Mail'' with ``Standard Mail,'' ``Standard Mail (A),'' and ``Standard
Mail (B),'' respectively; in 4.7 and 5.6d, replace ``third- or fourth-
class'' with ``Standard Mail''; in 4.10, replace ``third- and fourth-
class'' with ``Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
S930 Handling
[In 2.2, replace ``third- and fourth-class mail'' with ``Standard
Mail''; in 3.2, replace ``both third-class mail and fourth-class mail''
with ``Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
An appropriate amendment to 39 CFR 111.3 will be published to
reflect these changes.
Stanley F. Mires,
Chief Counsel, Legislative.
[FR Doc. 96-5500 Filed 3-5-96; 3:54 pm]
BILLING CODE 7710-12-P
Complete official Federal Register PDF
FR Doc. 96-5126 Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards; Brake Hoses
[Federal Register Volume 61, Number 49 (Tuesday, March 12, 1996)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 9953-9955]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 96-5126]
=======================================================================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
49 CFR Part 571
[Docket No. 96-18, Notice 01]
RIN 2127-AG32
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards; Brake Hoses
AGENCY: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), DOT.
ACTION: Final rule; technical amendment.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: This document updates several addresses and dates in Standard
No. 106, ``Brake Hoses.'' These amendments reflect the new name of the
office to which a person should write when filing a designation that it
is a manufacturer of a brake hose or brake hose assembly.
EFFECTIVE DATE: This rule is effective April 11, 1996.
[[Page 9954]]
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Mr. Marvin L. Shaw, Office of Chief
Counsel, NCC-20, the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
400 Seventh St., S.W., Washington, D.C., 20590. (202) 366-2992.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: Pursuant to the President's March 4, 1995
directive, ``Regulatory Reinvention Initiative,'' to the heads of
departments and agencies, NHTSA undertook a review of all its
regulations and directives. During the course of this review, the
agency identified several requirements and regulations that are
potential candidates for revision. In reviewing Standard No. 106, Brake
Hoses, the agency identified several references to addresses and to
dates that are obsolete. Today's amendments reflect the new name of the
office to which a person should write when filing a designation that it
is a manufacturer of a brake hose or brake hose assembly. This document
also transfers provisions inappropriately located following the
definition of rupture to the definition of brake hose.
NHTSA finds good cause to make this amendment effective 30 days
after publication of this document. This amendment makes minor changes
to Standard No. 106 that clarify the standard without affecting its
requirements.
NHTSA also finds for good cause that notice and an opportunity for
comment on this document are unnecessary. This document does not impose
any additional responsibilities on any manufacturer. Instead, this
document simply updates outdated provisions of the standard.
Rulemaking Analyses and Notices
Executive Order 12866 and DOT Regulatory Policies and Procedures:
This rulemaking document was not reviewed under E.O. 12866,
``Regulatory Planning and Review.'' Further, this action has been
determined to be not ``significant'' under the Department of
Transportation's regulatory policies and procedures. This rule updates
outdated portions of Standard No. 106 without changing any of the
requirements in the standard. Because this rule does not affect any
substantive requirement of the brake hose standard, its impacts are so
minimal as not to warrant preparation of a full regulatory evaluation.
Regulatory Flexibility Act
NHTSA has also considered the impacts of this rule under the
Regulatory Flexibility Act. I hereby certify that this rule will not
have a significant economic impact on a substantial number of small
entities. As noted above, this rule simply updates outdated sections of
Standard No. 106. It has no effect on the manufacture or sale of
vehicles or motor vehicle equipment.
National Environmental Policy Act
NHTSA has also analyzed this rule under the National Environmental
Policy Act and determined that it will not have a significant impact on
the human environment.
Executive Order 12612 (Federalism)
NHTSA has analyzed this rule in accordance with the principles and
criteria contained in E.O. 12612, and has determined that this rule
will not have significant federalism implications to warrant the
preparation of a Federalism Assessment.
Civil Justice Reform
This rule will not have any retroactive effect. Under 49 U.S.C.
30103, whenever a Federal motor vehicle safety standard is in effect, a
State may not adopt or maintain a safety standard applicable to the
same aspect of performance which is not identical to the Federal
standard, except to the extent that the state requirement imposes a
higher level of performance and applies only to vehicles procured for
the State's use. 49 U.S.C. 30161 sets forth a procedure for judicial
review of final rules establishing, amending or revoking Federal motor
vehicle safety standards. That section does not require submission of a
petition for reconsideration or other administrative proceedings before
parties may file suit in court.
List of Subjects in 49 CFR Part 571
Imports, Motor vehicle safety, Motor vehicles, Reporting and
recordkeeping requirements.
In consideration of the foregoing, part 571 of title 49 of the Code
of Federal Regulations are amended as follows:
PART 571--[AMENDED]
1. The authority citation for part 571 continues to read as
follows:
Authority: 49 U.S.C. 322, 30111, 30115, 30117, and 30166;
delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50.
Sec. 571.106 [Amended]
2. Section 571.106 is amended in Sec. 4 by designating the
undesignated text following the definition of ``Rupture'' as the second
and third sentences in the definition of ``Brake hose.''
3. Section 571.106 is further amended in the list below for each
paragraph indicated in the left column, remove the words indicated in
the middle column from wherever they appear in the paragraph, and add
the words indicated in the right column.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Paragraph Remove Add
------------------------------------------------------------------------
S5.2.2(b)................... Office of Crash Office of Crash
Avoidance, Handling Avoidance
and Stability Standards, Vehicle
Division. Dynamics Division.
S5.2.2(c)................... For example, 10/1/74 For example, 10/1/96
means October 1, means October 1,
1974. 1996.
S5.2.4(b)................... Office of Vehicle Office of Crash
Safety Standards, Avoidance
Crash Avoidance Standards, Vehicle
Division. Dynamics Division.
S7.2.1(b)................... Office of Vehicle Office of Crash
Safety Standards, Avoidance
Crash Avoidance Standards, Vehicle
Division. Dynamics Division.
S7.2.1(c)................... For example, 10/1/74 For example, 10/1/96
means October 1, means October 1,
1974. 1996.
S7.2.2(b)................... Office of Vehicle Office of Crash
Safety Standards, Avoidance
Crash Avoidance Standards, Vehicle
Division. Dynamics Division.
S7.2.3(b)................... Office of Vehicle Office of Crash
Safety Standards, Avoidance
Crash Avoidance Standards, Vehicle
Division. Dynamics Division.
S9.1.1(b)................... Office of Vehicle Office of Crash
Safety Standards, Avoidance
Crash Avoidance Standards, Vehicle
Division. Dynamics Division.
S9.1.1(c)................... For example, 10/1/74 For example, 10/1/96
means October 1, means October 1,
1974. 1996
S9.1.2(b)................... Office of Vehicle Office of Crash
Safety Standards, Avoidance
Crash Avoidance Standards, Vehicle
Division. Dynamics Division.
[[Page 9955]]
S9.1.3(b)................... Office of Vehicle Office of Crash
Safety Standards, Avoidance
Crash Avoidance Standards, Vehicle
Division. Dynamics Division.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issued on: February 29, 1996.
Barry Felrice,
Associate Administrator for Safety Performance Standards.
[FR Doc. 96-5126 Filed 3-11-96; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 4910-59-P
Continua la tua ricerca in ChatGPT o Claude
Collega Omnilex per cercare nel corpus legale dal tuo assistente IA.